Saga of The Sun and Moon

by Charlamagne_OR_WHATEVER

Summary:

What if Sokka took up a power that he did not understand? What would it cost? And what would his family do to save him?

What if Azula had been shown another way? If someone had helped her, could she find her own redemption?

Underlying theme: The dereliction of duty and the consequences thereof, and that if you hold to your convictions and are resolved in your duty you will find salvation.

This takes place in the universe in which Aang did not use Sokka's jerky as fire stater in episode three, and the butterfly effect is strong indeed.

Constructive Criticism welcomed.

Chapter 1: Lost

Part One

 

Regret

 

Chapter One

 

Lost

 

Sokka looked over the side of the sky bison. Katara had said that the clouds looked soft, and Aang decided to test her theory. The Avatar’s laughter rang out as he disappeared into the clouds below. The two siblings watched the clouds expectantly, waiting for their friend to return. Unbeknownst to them,  Aang landed on the opposite side of the saddle.

 

“Turns out clouds are made of water,” Said Aang, before using his airbending to dry himself. The strong currents of air that he produced startled Momo, and the lemur hissed and crawled into Katara’s shirt.

 

“What's that!?” Katara exclaimed. She had seen something that had obviously upset her, and she pointed in the direction opposite her brother. Sokka looked and saw a massive swath of blackened land. Around them were the brown leaves of oaks slumbering through the winter, lush green needles of pines that never slept, and the pale wood of empty branches. But stretching out in the middle of it all like a wave of despair, was an ashen and burned plain that rolled against the sides of the valley. 

 

“It looks like a scar.” Sokka said softly. He thought he knew what had happened to the forest. The Fire Nation had come and wreaked havoc; whether for some battle or to deprive the Earth Kingdom of resources he didn’t know.

 

Appa descended to the scorched ground and they dismounted to inspect the forest. Sokka saw  tracks that by now he had grown well familiar with. He had been right: It was the Fire Nation. They had come and burned this forest. For what purpose he could not say, all he knew was that they had come and burned as they had done countless times before. He felt the deep seething anger that had dwelt within him for years stir once more, and he started to give it voice. “Those Fire Nation savages! How could they do this-” 

 

He was cut off when his sister punched him in the arm. Startled, he gave her an accusatory look.“What? Am I not allowed to be upset?” 

 

He glared at her, but when she pointed to Aang, he stopped talking. His friend was sitting in the dirt, scooping up ash and letting it fall between his fingers. The sight of the devastation had roused an anger that had long since dwelt within Sokka, ever since his mother had been killed. Looking at his friend, he saw the young Avatar had not become angry. No, his airbending friend wore a shroud of bone deep sorrow.

 

“Why would anyone do this? I’m the Avatar! I’m supposed to protect nature-” He too was cut off by Katara, although this time because she had thrown an acorn at his head.

 

“What was that for?”

 

“To cheer you up.” She said, bouncing another one in her hand. Aang looked at her puzzled. “How was that supposed to cheer me up?”

 

“It cheered me up!” Sokka said with a grin, which vanished almost immediately as Katara hit him  with another acorn, one she threw much harder than the first. 

 

“I probably deserved that.” He said, rubbing the side of his head where she had hit him. Katarra went over to talk to Aang, but Sokka didn't pay attention to what she was saying. His hunter's instincts had kicked in, telling him that they weren’t alone.  He narrowed his eyes and scanned the burned remains of the forest. Something was watching them.

 

He got to his feet warily, and pulled out his boomerang. He regretted leaving his machete on Appa’s saddle, wishing that he’d had more weapons. A spear, or a proper sword maybe. Not that he could use a sword, but he didn’t like being so poorly armed.

 

Sure, Aang was a skilled bender and the Avatar and all, but Katara was his sister. She could defend herself well enough with her bending against one or two enemies, but she wasn’t all that good at waterbending just yet. Until she was, it was Sokka’s job to keep her safe. It would still be his responsibility, even after she had mastered the skill, but he would rest easier when she mastered waterbending. 

 

As he was eyeing the charred remains of the forest, an old man came out from behind Aang and Katara. Had that been the presence he sensed?  Sokka wasn’t sure, but it must have been. What else could it be?

 

The old man began to speak with Aang, pleading with him to save his village. According to him some sort of spirit was attacking everyday after sunset.

 

“Our village has been attacked each night at sunset by a monstrous spirit, Hei Bai of the black and white. Only the Avatar can stop him” Said the old man, eyes filled with fear and sorrow. Sokka knew that they would help him even before Aang spoke. Aang was too kind for their own good, and Katara would never turn her back on people in need. Sokka wanted to help as well, but he understood how important it was for Aang to reach the north pole. Still, it was growing late, and he was outvoted.

 

“Of course we’ll help,” Aang said, to which the elderly stranger sagged in relief. Sokka shrugged and they followed the villager into the forest. Eventually, the burned ground gave way to the sleeping oaks of a forest in winter. After a time they came to the walled village and entered through the western gate. Sokka eyed the small village. Burned and broken buildings lined the street. He shook his head; he had a bad feeling about this.

 

They had entered the largest building at the end of the village, where the village leader greeted them. He pleaded with Aang once more for his help, to which the Avatar agreed. As the sun entered the last leg of its voyage across the sky, Sokka, Katara, and the villagers watched through the windows as Aang walked to the gate. He said something, but he was too far away for Sokka to hear him. 

 

 “I don’t like it,” Sokka said, “He shouldn’t be out there by himself.”

 

“Only the Avatar can face the spirit” spoke the village elder who had brought them there. Sokka was growing annoyed with the man. ‘Avatar this, Avatar that’ Did he ever do anything himself?

 

They returned their attention back to the Avatar. Aang was speaking again, rubbing the back of his head as if unsure what to say.  In a flurry of motion he struck the ground with his staff. He turned to go. The moment Aang’s back was turned, the monster appeared.

 

Sokka shuddered and cold sweat formed on his brow when he saw the thing. It was terrible to look upon. It was horribly ugly, a twisted and foul thing. Its body long and misshapen with two sets of arms, one used as forelegs, and the other, smaller set, seemed to hang from its neck. Sokka was unsure what about the spirit was the most unsettling. Its head was too small for its body. Its mouth was too large for its face. Its teeth were long, crooked, unnatural things. Sokka looked upon it and felt in his heart, in his mind, in the marrow of his bones a break, a crack. Something seemed to tear away, as if the very fabric of the world had been stretched, taught, and now began to split.

 

“Aang!” Katara cried out in warning. Sokka blinked when his sister cried out. He had been shaken by the spirit, its very form enough to send his mind reeling from the impossibility of it. In his shock he had lost track of the Avatar, and it took him a moment to locate him again.

 

The Avatar faced the creature and spoke once more to no avail. Hei Bai roared his fury and shifted into an aurora of silver light. The light dispersed and gathered itself again within the village, coalescing into the monster once more. The spirit began destroying homes indiscriminately, with Aang trying to get its attention. He jumped onto the roof of a building and shouted, loud enough that for the first time Sokka could hear him. “I am The Avatar! I command you to Sto-” 

 

It seemed he had gotten its attention- and its wrath. The spirit whirled on the airbender, its broken face in the rictus of a snarl. With a massive arm it struck the boy from the roof and sent him through a building.

 

Sokka felt the familiar knot closing around his heart like a fist. He was afraid, afraid for his sister, his friend, and for himself. He looked at his machete, surprised to find his knuckles white upon the grip. He took a deep breath and exhaled slowly, calming himself. He couldn’t lose his composure. Not now. He needed to keep his wits about him if he was going to help Aang. 

 

Not that he had ever been much help before, he thought somewhat bitterly. When Zuko had attacked their village he had been unable to defend it. Aang had offered himself as a captive in exchange for their safety. He had been almost as useless on Kyoshi Island when they were ambushed by Suki and her team. And again, when Zuko attacked them there too. Never again, he had told himself. When the time came to fight, he would be a burden to the Avatar no longer; he would hold his own. And now the time had come, he thought, as Hei Bai threw the Avatar once more.

 

“Aang!” Katara shouted as she watched him fly through the air. Sokka gritted his teeth, “I'm going out there! I’m not going to make him do this alone.” and then he swallowed, clenched his jaw, and vaulted through the window.

 

He sprinted towards the Avatar. And as he ran, he remembered the last time he saw his father. It had been at the shore of the bay by their home when he had set out to war.

 

---

Sokka, a boy of thirteen, had dressed himself in the war paint of his tribe and pleaded to be brought with them. Despite his efforts, it seemed that his pleas had fallen on deaf ears.

 

“No, Sokka, you’re too young to go to war.” His father had said to him, shaking his head and smiling sadly.

 

 “Let me go with you,” Sokka had pleaded. “I’m not scared! I can fight.”

 

The chief had taken him in his arms and hugged him then. “I know you can, son. But I need you here, to keep your sister safe. Always.” he released his son,  “Besides, you can’t lie to me. I know you’re scared. Don’t be ashamed of it. Fear, hope, love, pain. Those things are part of life. They are for the living, and only the dead do not feel them.”

 

Sokka looked up at Hakoda, “Are you afraid too, then?” Hakoda nodded. Sokka fought back tears. “How can you still fight when you’re afraid?” Hakoda laughed and put a hand on his boy's shoulder. “By being brave.” Hakoda stood up and drew something from his bag. 

 

“Sokka,” He said, his tone growing serious once again. “I’ve called the men on this side of the tundra. With us gone, you will be among the strongest in the southern Water Tribe.” 

 

He held the object before his son, it glinted in the light. He paused for a moment before speaking again  “As I was given it by my father, and he from his, I pass the mantle now to you. I name you, Sokka, the First Son of the South.”

 

Sokka’s jaw tightened and his tears flowed freely. He reached out and took the boomerang that would mark him the heir and next high chief of the Southern Water Tribe. It had been handed down his line for centuries, ever since it was forged by Avatar Kuruk. He placed it in the sheath on his back, and gave his father his own. He wiped the tears from his eyes, smudging his war paint. “How can I be brave? 

 

Hakoda kneeled down, placed one hand on Sokka's head, and smiled. “Take a deep breath. swallow, and clench your jaw.”

 

---

Sokka approached the Spirit, throwing his boomerang as he ran. It flew through the air and bounced impotently against the backside of the spirit. Sokka stopped and looked up at the sky, exasperated. Of course that wouldn’t work. The creature was huge. He needed to hit its eyes, and not its anus. The spirit turned to destroy more buildings, and at that chance Sokka ran and grabbed his boomerang, replacing it in its sheath. He helped Aang to his feet. They were standing in front of the gate. “Come on, we’ll fight it together.”

 

“I don’t want to fight it at all.” Aang said. Sokka began to respond when he was suddenly lifted into the air and carried fast by the spirit. His arms were pinned at his sides, trees rushed past him at a blinding speed. He could hear Aang calling out to him, desperate in his pursuit.

 

Sokka was furious. He had made up his mind, sworn never to be a burden again, and here he was. A literal burden being carried by a spirit monster. The universe just loved torturing him.

 

“Well,” Sokka said, getting an idea, “ I’d better put my big mouth to good use.” and he bit the spirit as hard as he could. The spirit stopped. Water splashed all around them. Hei Bai roared at Sokka, who laughed awkwardly  before saying  “Sorry.”

 

Hei Bai dropped him and walked away. Sokka fell into water and splashed around, partially submerged. He stood up, awkwardly, and looked around. He saw some kind of monkey. He yelled, jumping away when it turned to him. Where its face should have been, where anything should have been, there was nothing. No wound that might explain its absence, no scarring where the eyes should be. Not even the whisper of bone beneath the skin. Instead of anything, there was just a blank patch of emptiness. A void where none should be; skin stretched over empty space.

 

He looked around, trying to find something familiar in his surroundings. He stood in knee deep water. All around him were massive trees, with roots that rose above the ground like bluffs. The air was hot and humid, and his breath coalesced in front of him. Frost creeped along the edges of the water where the root first met the air.

 

 He craned his neck and took a few steps back to try and make out the top of the tree, and far above him he could just see the shapes of branches. He looked round once more before speaking aloud, though there was nobody to hear. “Where am I?”

 

---

Author's Note:

The first two chapters are kind of slow, and the writing isn't really the best. That said, this is my first piece of creative writing, and it does get much better. At least, that's what I've been told. 

if you have any feedback or questions let me hear it, please. 

Chapter 2: The Face Stealer

 

“Where am I?” Sokka said, scratching the back of his head in confusion. The monster had carried him off to some place he had never seen before. A… swamp of some kind? It was both freezing and hot; he could see his breath and could feel the sweat running down his skin.

 

“This is the spirit world.” A low, gruff voice answered him. Sokka spun around to see who had spoken. Sitting atop a high gnarled root was a Water Tribe man wearing a tiger seal fur mantle. He reclined lazily against the tree of the root he was sitting on, and he was examining…

 

“My boomerang!” Cried Sokka, “Give it back. That belongs to me.”

 

The man looked at him. “Is that so? So you’re him then. The First Son.” He said, flipping the boomerang over. He eyed its edge, tapping the right angle with his fingernail. The boomerang rang like a bell of ice, cold, clear, and haunting. 

 

“Yeah,” said Sokka, “That weapon is an heirloom of my people.”

 

“I know.” He said. The man flicked his eyes lazily onto Sokka, an annoyed expression on his face. He turned his attention to the blade of the weapon and lightly touched it with his thumb. He drew his hand away and, there where he had touched the weapon, a small ruby drop of blood swelled, falling onto the root he sat upon. 

 

“Just as sharp as the day you were finished,” He murmured absently. Then suddenly he stood and threw the weapon into the sky. Sokka listened, raised his hand, and caught his birthright.

 

He eyed the man wearily. “Who are you?” He asked, though he already had an idea of the answer. 

 

“Surely you know already.” Said the man.

 

“I want to hear you say it.”

 

The man leapt from his perch and into the water beside Sokka. He threw back the hood of his mantle and spoke. “I am Avatar Kuruk.”

 

Sokka nodded, “If you’re looking for Aang, he’s not with me. I don’t think he’s in the spirit world.”

 

Kuruk was silent for a moment, then he threw back his head and laughed “Oh he’s in the spirit world alright, but it hasn't been my job to guide the Avatar unasked for centuries now.”

 

He put his arm around Sokka's shoulder and said “You're the one I wanted to see, now give your great- well, whatever amount of greats it takes to cover around eight hundred years- grand uncle a hug.”

 

“WHAT! We’re related?” Sokka exclaimed, jumping away.

 

“Oh yeah, you're my sister’s descendant. I made that boomerang for her son. He was the first child born in the south pole. That's what the inscription meant originally; it became a title later.”

 

“Well, that makes sense. I always wondered why we called it that.” Said Sokka rubbing his chin.

 

“You look just like him. Even talk and act the same way he did.”

 

“I do? How so?” Sokka said, arms folded across his chest, hand on his chin, and one eyebrow raised. Kuruk looked at him again and smiled sadly.

 

“Just like that, he used to stand and look at me that way too. And a few weeks ago, when your sister froze your feet to the Fire Navy ship ‘I’m just a guy with a boomerang, I didn’t ask for all this flying! And magic!’ He said the same thing once.” Kurk sighed. “That's what makes this so hard.”

 

“Makes what so hard?” Sokka asked, the beginnings of unease filling his stomach.

 

“Come with me,” Said the former Avatar, beckoning over his shoulder as he walked away.

 

“Where are we going?” Sokka asked, jogging to catch up.

 

Kuruk didn’t answer him. He just continued walking through the spirit world with Sokka at his heels. They waded through pools of murky water and past glowing mushrooms. They climbed over roots and jumped narrow ravines filled with golden light. When they had gone on for what felt like hours they came before an opening; a rent in the ground. A towering tree grew above it. 

 

This cave, or whatever it was, seemed foul. Broken maybe. Unclean. The more Sokka stared at it the more uneasy he felt. It was as if a perfect hole had been bored into the world and night had filled the space with shadow. It drank in the light, leaving the space around it dim, the colors muted.

 

“What's in there? Where are you taking me?” His hand fell to the handle of his machete. What good that would do him he did not know, but feeling the familiar grip gave him some comfort, slight as it was.

 

Kuruk was silent for a moment, then he spoke. With great sadness in his eyes. “That is the home of an old enemy. Of Koh: The Face Stealer.”

 

Sokka glanced back at the cave. “Why?”

 

“To do what's necessary”

 

---

Sokka walked down the stairs with Kuruk. He was anxious. Sure, his ancestor had said that Koh wouldn’t steal his face, as long as he didn't show any emotion. Sure that was easy enough, just walk into the lair of another giant spirit monster. Super easy not to show just how terrifying this was. 

 

They walked deeper and deeper into the earth. Or was it spirit earth? Sokka wasn’t sure, but he didn’t think this was the best time to be asking those sorts of questions. Their footsteps echoed in the vast cavern. The only light, from a torch held by Kuruk, flickered and flared sporadically.  The light didn’t reach as far as it should have, as if the darkness was tangible. Repressing the light so that they could only see the next step below them.  When they reached the bottom, the light from the entrance was but a faint outline far above them.

 

“Koh!” Kuruk called out. “I have brought him.” Then he turned and lit a brazier set low in the wall before beginning to climb the stairs back to the light. Sokka closed his eyes and breathed slowly. When he opened them again he was faced by a beautiful woman. 

 

No, not a beautiful woman. Just the face of one. Behind it was a long chitinous being, eight long mandibles around an eyelid that framed the face. When the creature spoke, it was with a deep and foreboding voice that made Sokka’s skin crawl and his blood run cold.

 

“I am Koh.” The spirit said as he crawled around Sokka, coiling its long and hideous body around the cave. “Kuruk and I, well, we’ll never be friends, but we have a common enemy. A shared goal you might say”

 

Sokka didn’t speak. He stared straight ahead, keeping his face carefully blank.

 

“The mortal world is out of balance. The Avatar, powerful he might be, requires aid. Raava grows weaker. Vaatu stronger.”

 

“What does that have to do with me?” Sokka asked. Who was Raava? And Vaatu?

 

Koh circled him, his many legs scuffing the stone floor of the cavern.

 

“Nothing. And everything.”

 

The corner of Sokka's eye twitched, and the spirit whirled to face him, eyelid closing only to open again revealing the face of a baby. He stared at Sokka intensely and began circling once more. “Raava is the spirit of order. She is the Avatar spirit. Vatu is the spirit of chaos, her opposite and nemesis.”

 

The spirit circled him more, always moving, always shifting. “I have lived here for eons. I have had many visitors, told many things, and won many faces.”

 

“Sozin came to me once. He asked me one question, a common enough occurrence in those days. Mortals would brave the risk of stepping into my lair. They would ask a question of me and I would answer. I stole their faces when I could, when I could not they would leave and tell of their adventure. More would come, some would leave and some would not. My power grew.”

 As Koh spoke he flicked through hundreds of faces, some had been taken in horror, some while laughing. Others in a rage, and still more in the depths of their deepest sorrow.

 

“But then Sozin came. Old was he then, but the fire in him burned hotter and darker than any I had seen.. He asked but a single question: When would the firebenders be strongest? When could none stand against them? He asked me. And I told him.”

 

The Spirit coiled once more around Sokka again, wearing the face of an airbender. He looked him in the eye. “I have watched the world since then. I have seen what his nation has become.”

 

Sokka spoke, “So you want to help fight the Fire Nation? To fight evil?”

 

Koh laughed then, and the sound shook Sokka to his bones. It was like this pit, like this chasm: foul. It was the sound of a hundred broken things crashing together, again and again, splitting themselves and breaking the air.

 

“Oh no, I do not care for the petty differences the humans make between themselves. Good? Evil? These are your words, child, and they are meaningless to me. I only want one thing. Order. The sweet perfect order of still water, of the turning of the stars. Chaos I despise. The chaos of emotion written upon the face, most of all.. And the fire inside of Sozin, his light, was touched by it. By Vaatu. How? I do not know. But it spreads even now and it must be extinguished, or Vaatu will grow stronger still. Strong enough to free himself before he is meant to. And if that happens then not even the Avatar will be able to stop him.”

 

The spirit began to climb across the walls, his stolen eyes never leaving Sokka. Sokka, for his part, stared ahead. “What do you want from me?”

 

Koh laughed then, eyes fixed upon the Water Tribesman. “From you? Nothing. I asked Kuruk to bring me a vessel. Someone with capacity. I knew that Hei Bai would come bearing one with the will needed. That it would be you, a man long descended from my great foe, I had never considered. What a delicious turn of events it is, that you have come to me.”

 

“A vessel?” Sokka asked

 

“Yes. I can give you power. Power enough to protect what you hold dear. Power enough to destroy your enemies.”

 

Sokka swallowed. He wanted to keep Katara and Aang safe, to keep his tribe safe, to stop the Fire Nation. Had he not sworn to defend his people? To be a burden no longer? To never again be the weakest link? He was tempted for a moment then. He stood on the edge and looked into the abyss. He could have the power to help, couldn’t he?

 

But if this spirit was the one to help him… No. He didn't know what this creature truly wanted. It might have gone on about order and chaos, but Koh had said that good and evil meant nothing to him. But evil is only the absence of good, and if good was meaningless to the spirit..

 

Sokka spoke once more, “And if I refuse?”

 

“Then nothing. You shall leave this place and return to the mortal world, and see many that you hold close to your heart destroyed. You shall walk the earth, a burden to your friends. I have seen it.”

 

Sokka swallowed, but he didn't speak.

 

“If you take up my mantle, you will be mighty. You shall be loved by your allies, and hated by your foes. You shall say nothing and the wicked will flee before you.”

 

“What do you get out of this?”

 

“A mortal champion. And in time, an Avatar of my own.”

 

Sokka’s heart seemed to stop in his chest then. He did not know what it would mean for this monster to have its own avatar, but the very thought of this beast leaving its cave, and touching even lightly the world of the living filled him with dread. 

 

Koh left the wall and grew smaller. He coiled around himself in front of Sokka and turned to smoke. Where the spirit had been moments before sat a wooden bowl of dark liquid that shimmered and swirled.

 

Sokka looked at the bowl and was uneasy. He turned and walked to ascend the stairs. He placed his foot on the first step when Kohs voice rang out from all around him.

 

“You may leave this place if you wish, but your strength is insufficient. She will die.”

 

Sokka stood there for what felt like hours, hearing those words over again and again. She will die. He thought of his mother and could only see Katara’s face. She was gone now, even in his memory. He would not let them take his sister too.

 

He turned and walked towards the bowl, where he sat crossed legged on the ground. “What would you have me do?”

 

“Drink and I will teach you to see the light in all people. Their chi.  Where you find those who burn with only Sozin’s light, you will snuff them out. You shall take them and they will fall to me. You shall face many, and I foresee this: thrice more you shall come to me, and thrice more shall I give you strength.”

 

Sokka looked at the bowl. Again those words filled his ears. She will die. He lifted the bowl to his lips and drank.

 

---

Sokka emerged from Koh’s lair. He looked around for Kuruk but he was gone. Sokka looked up at the trees. He could make out the veins in the leaves now, from so far away. He climbed out of the swamp and onto a root. Had climbing always been so easy? 

 

He watched as a leaf fell from the canopy above, and marveled at how much slower it seemed to fall. He jumped, and felt that he could jump higher than before. Not as high as Aang could, not even close. But higher all the same. He drew his machete and it felt lighter in his hands, he swung it in a kata he had been trained in. The forms were easier for him now, his movements more precise.

 

He didn’t know how long he had been in the spirit world. He hadn't felt tired, or hungry, or thirsty. He had walked with Kuruk for hours, and he didn’t know how long he was with Koh. When he drank what had been offered him it had tingled and snapped, boiling and freezing, making his hair stand on end. His composure had broken, and he had writhed on the ground. The mask of apathy had fallen away, but Koh had not taken his face. Of course he wouldn’t have. Why would he maim his champion?

 

He sat on the root, his eyes closed. He just had to wait, Koh had told him that. 

 

He sat there and listened, waiting for Hei Bai to come for him. He heard heavy footsteps approach and opened his eyes. Before him stood a large bear, a panda. The spirit looked at him and drew his paw through the water. Bamboo sprouted up through the ground and Sokka stood and walked into it. He walked for he knew not how long until he came out to see the village. Katara and Aang ran to him. 

 

He looked behind him and the bamboo was gone. Other people had come out of it as well, stumbling around into the village, hugging their loved ones and crying. But there was something more, inside of each of them burned a pale green light. Right in their chests where their heart was, and flowed out into their limbs. Chi, he thought, idly.

 

Sokka looked at Aang, and he lsaw inside of him. His light was different, It burned with many colors. Brightest was silver, but there was blue, green, and gold too. Aang stiffened, a confused expression on his face. “You seem… different,” He said, looking Sokka up and down.

 

“Well, he did just spend twenty four hours in the spirit world.” Said Katara, hugging her brother. He looked at her and saw that she glowed with a deep blue light, as bright as the moon.

 

“How do you feel?” She asked him.

 

“Like I seriously need to use the bathroom.”

Chapter 3: The Winter Solstice

The Winter Solstice

 

Sokka sat against the back of Appa’s saddle. They had been flying all morning, and now the sun had reached its zenith. Katara sat across from him hugging her knees. Aang was on the bison's head urging him onward. While Sokka had been in Koh’s lair, Aang had been having an adventure of his own - having met Roku’s dragon and being brought to a temple in the Fire Nation. In their haste to make it to the Fire Nation before sunset at the solstice, Sokka hadn’t yet told them of his escapades in the spirit world, and he wasn’t sure he wanted to. 

 

He trusted them; they’d saved each other's lives a dozen times by now. Well, maybe they did more saving than he did. But still, he thought grimly, that he had taken that spirit at his word. That he simply drank the poison the spirit had offered him, so ready to take whatever dark power he had been offered…

 

She will die. Those words were all it took for the spirit to take him. He looked at his sister. He could still see the light that shined within her, swirling and crashing against itself like the sea in a storm. He knew, but he didn’t know how, that it meant she was a powerful waterbender. More powerful than even she knew really. Despite this, Sokka knew that he would do anything to keep her safe. He would kill, or even die if he had to.

 

The purpose of this power he had now, this new sight, was to find those that were tainted with the same corruption that took Fire Lord Sozin. Or maybe he was the one that corrupted the spirits of his people, Sokka didn’t know. He wondered how many people it had taken already. Zuko, probably. Maybe his uncle, but he wasn’t so sure. He hadn’t gotten the sense that the old man was interested in fighting them.

 

There were other changes too, not quite as noticeable as his ability to see the chi of those around him. But they were there all the same. Before they had flown this high and so quickly he had worn his parka, but now he didn't feel cold at all. His reflexes felt sharp, his body stronger. He could hear the sea far below them. He could smell things he couldn't before, and that was something he could do without. He liked Appa and all but his musk was another thing entirely. More than those things, sounds were more clear, his vision sharper.

 

But more than that, when he closed his eyes he knew what was around him. Even while sleeping he was completely aware of his surroundings. He tilted his head back and looked at the sky.

 

He thought back to what Koh had said in that cave. Three times he would go to him, and three times he would give him power. “Yeah right..” 

 

“What did you say?” Katara said, looking at him.

 

“Nothing important,” he said, smiling at her. 

 

“Well, that's surprising.” She said, giving him a sarcastic smirk. He blew a raspberry at her.

 

“I never asked you,” She said, crawling to sit beside him. “What was it like in the spirit world?”

 

Well, he knew how nosey his sister was. She had gotten their mothers curiosity too. It wasn’t surprising that she would ask, though he had hoped it wouldn’t be so soon.

 

“It was.. Hot. And cold. At the same time.” He said, “I met one of our ancestors, Avatar Kuruk.”

 

“You’re descended from the Avatar?!” Aang exclaimed, twisting around to look at them in surprise.

 

“I never knew that..” Said Katara, looking at Aang.

 

“Well, not directly. He said it was through his nephew. That's who he made the boomerang for. ‘Said he was the first child born in the Southern Water Tribe after we split from the north, and that ‘First Son of the South’ was his nickname or something. Before it was the office of the heir.”

 

Aang was looking at them, his eyes narrowed. He scratched his chin, “Have you ever met the heir? Or the High Chief?”

 

Katara looked at him again, surprised. “Well, yeah. Our dad’s the High Chief.”

 

“Your Dad’s the High Chief?” the Avatar exclaimed, “Then you must be..” He trailed off looking at Sokka.

 

“Yes,” Said Katara, annoyed, “It is his lordship, the First Son of The South.”

 

“Would you stop teasing me about it? It’s not a big deal.” Sokka said, rolling his eyes.

 

“Oh yes it is!” said Aang, standing up and jumping over to them.

 

“What? Why?” said Katara, confused. Sokka shared his sister's confusion.

 

“Because you’re traveling with me! I’m The Avatar!”

 

“What does that have to do with it?” Sokka and Katara said simultaneously.

 

“Well, I don’t know, the monks wouldn’t tell me but they were pretty serious about it. So it must be something big.”

 

“Did they tell you anything about it?” Asked Katara.

 

“The Avatar and the First Son will unite with the heir to the Dragon Throne, and face a great evil.”

 

“Well,” Sokka said, “all we have to do is not team up with Zuko and we’ll be in the clear.”

 

“Oh yeah,” Said Aang, “I hadn’t thought of that.”

 

“That’s pretty vague…  and we're already facing great evil.” Katara said, frowning.

 

“Monk Gyatso said he would tell me when my training was complete.” Said Aang, his eyes growing distant.

 

There was silence for a moment, and Aang returned to his place on Appa’s head. Katara turned to Sokka and asked, “What else happened? You were there for a long time and you must’ve done more.”

 

Sokka looked away. “Kuruk took me to meet a spirit.”

 

“Who?”

 

“Koh.”

 

“I’ve never heard of him. Is he nice?” Asked Aang, looking back again, smiling cheerfully.

 

“No. He’s not.” Sokka spoke quietly, resting his chin on his knees. “He asked Kuruk to bring someone, told him they would appear where Hei Bai dropped me”

 

“What did he want?” Katara asked, apprehension in her eyes.

 

“He-” Sokka cut himself off when he smelled something. Ash, or smoke. He got up and whirled around, looking behind them to the sea. Far below them sailed a single fire navy ship. Sokka focused and could just make out the outline of prince Zuko on its deck.

 

“It’s Zuko! Can Appa go any faster?” he cried, pointing in the direction of the ship. Odd, he thought, for the scent of just one ship to be so strong.

 

“He can but there's a problem!” Aang said, pulling the bison into a curving dive as a wave of flaming boulders were shot in front of them. “It’s a blockade!”

 

Sokka felt his feet leave the saddle as the bison dove. Everything seemed to slow. Katara reached out to him but was too far to reach. Sokka pulled out his machete as he fell from the saddle, and hooked the side with it, pulling himself in as they leveled out.

 

As he settled himself into a safer position he glanced over to the others. Katara’s mouth hung open in astonishment, and Aang gaped at him, evidently unaware of the flaming projectile right in front of them. 

 

“Aang!” Shouted Sokka, pointing at the boulder. The Avatar looked ahead and saw their oncoming doom. He dropped the reins and leapt at it, unleashing a powerful kick and a gust stronger than a hurricane. The flaming projectile shattered, and then crumbled into dust. They plunged towards the sea, dodging and twisting to avoid the coming onslaught of the Fire Navy’s barrage. And then, as quickly as it had begun, it was over.

 

Sokka turned and looked over the bison's tail, and saw that a single ship was charging towards the blockade. It had not escaped the onslaught unscathed, and Sokka could see that the Dragon Prince’s vessel billowed smoke from a rent torn into the side of the bridge.

 

“... He’s not going to make it.” he said softly, only to be proven wrong as the ships forming the defensive line slowed, and then stopped. Zuko would live after all. Sokka was surprised to find that he felt relief. Why, he wondered, did he want their enemy to live? Did he want to kill the man himself? Perhaps it was simply that he didn't wish for any man, even an enemy, to drown. Better to die on the battlefield, than to be pulled beneath the waves, never again to see the moon or stars. Or maybe he didn’t want to see him perish at all… The warrior didn’t know. But, all the same, Zuko lived and he was glad. If his enemy should fall, he deserved a fine end. 

 

Their journey continued on in silence, their discussion of Sokka’s trip into Koh’s lair forgotten. For this too, Sokka was glad. He felt in the bottom of his heart a deep shame. He had taken up the power of that foul being too readily. His resolve to leave untainted had waverd, crumbled, and fell. Fell at three words that for all he knew could be a lie. He felt now sorrow, regret filling his mind as he thought back. Back to his foray into the spirit world, into that cave. Koh had offered him power, and had offered to aid him. 

 

Sokka had been tempted, and very nearly taken the offer even before the spirit had said those three words. He had long feared that when he was tested, when the time came he wouldn’t be strong enough, not fast enough, not smart enough. And when he was tested he found that he was right. First, Zuko had attacked his village and defeated Sokka with ease. Then he failed again on Kyoshi Island, bested by Suki and the Kyoshi Warriors. In Omashu he had been trapped by King Bumi and was powerless. When Hei Bai attacked he was powerless once more. Again and again, over and over he had been a burden. Help the Avatar? All he had done was get in the way. 

 

When Koh had offered him power, he had barely restrained himself. And the spirit saw right through him, and knew exactly where to prod and send him over the edge.

 

Now, he was faster, stronger. His senses sharper and his reflexes quicker. He could see people now, look inside of them. It would come at a cost, he realized. Nothing was free, not when dealing with spirits. He wondered why he hadn’t thought to ask. What was the price?

 

As they continued westward, the sun passed its highest point and the sky began to burn with the red hue of sunset.  Sokka knew they were close, he could hear the faint lapping of waves on the shore. “There! It’s the temple that Roku’s dragon showed me.” Aang cried out, pointing to a volcanic island, lava flowing down the mountainside and into the sea. And upon it stood a brilliant red temple.

 

---

Aang, Katara and Sokka entered the temple as stealthily as they could, taking care to make no noise. Evidently, they had forgotten to loop in Momo that stealth was the goal, and he chittered loudly on Aang’s shoulder. 

 

Katara held a finger to her lips, shushing the lemur. Oddly, he seemed to understand and looked embarrassed. He quieted, although it was too late. A door crashed open and four men in red robes entered the hall. Sokka concentrated, and was able to look into them. To see their chi, their light.

 

The light which shone inside them was a dark, poisoned red. It guttered and spat, the edges of the flame tinged black as burning oil. Sokka’s eyes widened slightly when he saw it. This was Sozin’s light, he was sure of it. It looked nothing like the golden flame that kindled within the Avatar, the part he was sure was his firebending.

 

“We are the Fire Sages that guard the temple of the Avatar.” Said the lead man.

 

“Really? Great! I am the Avatar.” Said Aang, surprised.

 

“We Know.” Said the fire sage, and then the sages blasted them with flame. 

 

Wasting no time, Sokka stepped in front of Katara to shield her from the flame, his boomerang in hand. His effort was unnecessary though, as Aang blew the flames away with a spin of his staff. 

 

“Run, I’ll hold them off!” Aang shouted. Sokka grabbed Katara by the hand and they sprinted around a corner and out of sight. 

 

They had not been running long when Aang caught up with them. “Follow me!” He shouted, passing them by. “Do you know where you’re going?!” Shouted Sokka, slowing his pace to stay beside his sister. He had never had never had to do this before; as children she had always been faster than him. 

 

“Nope!” Aang shouted rounding a corner, then he shouted again. “Wrong way!” Running past them again the way they had come. Katara turned on her heel instantly to follow him, but as Sokka turned to follow he caught sight of the new pursuer. 

 

He was a fire sage, that much was obvious, but he was different from the others. The light within him was brighter. Kinder. Instead of the dark red of corrupted blood that was within the others, this man was filled with the golden light of the sun.

 

“Aang, wait!” Sokka called out, “He isn’t like the others.”

 

The fire sage stopped and looked at Sokka, a look of slight confusion on his face. “How.. no matter,” He said, turning to the Avatar as he approached wearily. The man got on his knees, and prostrated himself. “I am Fire Sage Shiyu. It has long been our duty to serve the Avatar, not the Fire Lord. Some still remember the purpose of our order.”

 

Aang looked at the man and nodded. “I came to speak with Avatar Roku.”

 

“Then I shall take you to him.” Said Shiyu, rising and leading them down a hallway. They turned, once, twice, a third time and came to a dead end. Shiyu moved a lamp to one side revealing a hole in the wall. He firebent into it and a door opened in the wall. “This way” He said, leading them into a secret passageway.

 

Aang and Shiyu walked in front, conversing quietly. Sokka and Katara followed behind.

 

“How did you know we could trust him?” Katara said, “That he was different?”

 

Sokka walked in silence for a moment. “I could see it.” He said finally, looking Katara in her eyes. He noticed then that he could see inside those eyes the light that crashed within her more clearly than he could from outside. Like through a porthole on a ship, The sea within roiled and crashed against itself, never ceasing, always flowing. It was her strength, he realized. Not just her bending, no, this was the depth of her heart. It was deep, and unyielding.

 

Katara’s eyebrows furrowed. “What does that even mean?”

 

“Can we talk about this later?” Sokka asked, as they exited the passageway, and ascended a staircase. Katara looked at him, her eyes narrowed, but she let the matter drop. This wasn’t the time and she knew it.

 

They came out to a large semi-circular room with a closed door on the far wall. There were five dragons on it, their mouths open in silent roars.

 

“No!” Shiyu said softly. “They’ve sealed the sanctuary.”

 

“Can’t you open it?” Asked Sokka.

 

“I cannot. This a special lock, five simultaneous fire blasts can open it and nothing else. Only a fully realized avatar can open it alone..” The sage said, bowing his head.

 

“Five fire blasts huh?” Said Sokaa, “I think I have an idea.” 

 

He pulled out animal skin bags from his satchel and filled them with oil from the lamps on the wall. “This is a trick Dad taught me. Fill these animal skin bags with some kind of explosive and BOOM! Fake firebending.” He began placing them in the serpent's mouths. When he was finished Shiyu got into position on the side of the door.

 

“You must run inside as soon as the doors open, Avatar Aang. The other sages will hear the explosion and come running. You will only have a minute, two or three at best when the light of the sun reaches his eyes.” The sage said as sokka and Katara hid behind a pillar. Sokka stood behind Katara, kneeling and plugging his ear. He saw Katara not doing the same and gestured for her to copy him, which she did.

 

Shiyu lit the bags, and they exploded. Aang charged into the smoke and stopped short when he saw the door was unopened. “It didn’t work..” He said, trailing off. Sokka unplugged his ears and walked to the door, whipping some soot with his finger. “It looks real though,” he said.

 

“Sokka, you’re a genius!” Said Katara.

 

“But his plan didn’t work! Did the definition of genius change in the last hundred years?”

 

“Oh come on, Aang, let her dream!” Said Sokka, leaning against the wall and smiling.

 

“No, but it looks like it did.” Katara said, and she told them her plan.

 

---

The fire sages ran up the stairs and into the antechamber. Shiyu pointed to the door and shouted to them, “The Avatar has entered the sanctuary! See the scorch marks?”

 

“Look, you can see somebody inside!’ Said one of the sages.

 

There was a shadow moving under the door. “We must get inside before he contacts Avatar Roku.”

 

Shiyu joined the other sages in a line, and they released an impressive synchronized barge of firebending at the door. When the flames entered the lock the dragons began to move, sliding in towards one another and down. The door moved back and opened, revealing… Momo.

 

“It’s just a lemur!” Said the lead sage, “He must have crawled through the pip-”  

 

Suddenly the lemur let out what he must have thought was a fearsome battle cry and lept on the man's face. Suddenly there was mass confusion, one sage moved to help remove the lemur, only to be stopped by Shiyu who twisted his arm behind his back. Out of seemingly nowhere, Sokka and Katara were upon the others, Katara jumping on one man's back and placing him in an ill-effective sleeper hold. She was a girl still, and old as he may be, her enemy was a man grown, and the difference in their stature left her at a disadvantage. The sage stood tall and her feet left the ground. The man began clawing at her arms and Katara thrashed her body wildly, throwing him off balance. He staggered and she kicked into the back of his knees forcing him to fall.

 

Meanwhile Sokka charged his opponent loosing an ululating battle cry. The man turned and punched a blast of fire at Sokka. He ducked beneath it, rolling to his feet again while the firebender extended his arm in a fighting stance. As his enemy Raised his foot to begin the next strike, Sokka moved. He moved faster than he had ever moved before as if he were a viper, coiled and waiting for its prey. He grabbed the man’s wrist and twisted, moving in a half circle as he did so, pulling the man's arm behind his back. “Now Aang!” He yelled, as he forced the man to the ground. He heard a popping noise and the man screamed in anguish, Sokka released him in shock.

 

“Agh!” Moaned the sage, cradling his wrist. His shoulder seemed to push out at an unnatural angle, his arm limp as he cradled it.

 

Sokka stared at the man, shocked at what he had done. He hadn’t meant to hurt him, not really. He just wanted to waylay him so that Aang could get into the sanctuary. And yet here the man was, writhing in evident pain, his shoulder dislocated and his wrist broken.

 

There was a noise coming from the other side of the room. Sokka looked up and saw that Zuko had appeared as if from smoke, holding Aang's arms behind his back. “Zuko!” He snarled. He heard a thud and a cry as Katara was thrown into a wall and she slumped on the floor, dazed but otherwise unharmed. He wheeled around and saw that Shiyu was on the ground with a trickle of blood running down his forehead. The head fire sage had dislodged Momo, stuffing him into his hat and tying the end. He rounded on Sokka with the remaining sages.

 

As they approached Sokka took up his boomerang from its place on his back. His other hand reached for the handle of his machete. The sanctuary door began to close. There was a gust of wind and a grunt from Zuko as the Avatar freed himself. Sokka saw as Aang began to take up a fighting stance to help face the sages, and he yelled to him. “We’ll be fine! You’re the one they want so get inside! Remember why we came here!”

 

Aang hesitated a moment, and Sokka feared he wouldn’t follow the mission, but then he nodded and ran to the door, leaping into the air and flying over the sages with his glider.

 

The door slammed shut just as the Avatar made it through. Sokka felt rough hands grab him from behind as Zuko threw him from his feet. He dropped his boomerang as two sages tied him, Shiyu, and Katara to a pillar as the lead fire sage knelt beside his wounded compatriot. “Are you alright, Brother Lee? How bad is it?”

 

The wounded man, brother Lee apparently, sat up and said “Shoulder’s dislocated. Wrist might be broken, I’m not sure.”

 

“Let me see it.” Said Zuko, crouching down and gently feeling the wrist. “It’s a sprain. Be careful with that arm for a few weeks and you’ll be okay.”  The prince helped the man to his feet. “I can relocate your shoulder, if you're ready.”

 

Lee nodded and gritted his teeth as Zuko began to count down from three and popped the arm back in place on two. The man exhaled slowly and bowed to him. “Thank you for your help Prince Zuko.”

 

Sokka stared at Zuko as Katara asked Shiyu if he was alright. He looked at Prince Zuko and saw something he hadn’t expected. The man who had been so savage to them and their allies was kind and soft spoken to this fire sage. Everytime he had heard the prince speak to his men he had been brusk and rude. He had assumed, perhaps rashley, that Zuko was cruel. Heartless even.

 

Sokka looked at Zuko, searching for the light that burned inside. His eyes widened as he saw, not just the corrupted light of the fire sages, Sozin’s flame, but a fire that burned like the sun as well. As he starred he saw that the two flames were fighting, warring for dominance within Zuko.

 

He watched as they lined up to open the lock, but it was to no avail. “The door is sealed from within. We can’t reach him now.” 

 

Slow clapping filled the room. Sokka looked to the source and saw a man in a fire navy uniform with enormous sideburns. The man spoke. “Would you look at that? A traitor, a banished prince, and two Water Tribe peasants. Friends of the Avatar no doubt.”

 

Sokk’s breath caught in his chest. This man wasn’t like any he had seen before. Inside him was a fire that burned a red so deep it was almost black. 

 

“You’re too late Zhao!” snarled the Prince. “The Avatar is inside and the doors are sealed.”

 

“He has to come out eventually, and when he does, I’ll take him and you to the Fire Lord. Tie him up.” This new man, Zhao, turned and walked a step as his soldiers lashed Zuko to another pillar with chains. He stopped when his boot brushed against something metal. He looked down and bent to pick up Sokka's boomerang. He lifted it and read the inscription. 

 

He looked at Sokka and smiled a viscous grin. “No, not peasants it seems.”

 

“What are you talking about?!” Zuko said angrily. Zhao walked to the prince and held the boomerang up to him. “Read the inscription.” He said, still looking at Sokka.

 

“Made in Water Tribe.” Zuko read, raising an eyebrow, confused.

 

Zhao whipped his head to the prince and realized he had held up the wrong side for him to read.

“Not that one.” He said, turning it around quickly. Zuko read again, turning his head to look at Sokka. “You’re the prince of the southern Water Tribe?!”

 

Sokka said nothing, glaring at the two Fire Nation.

 

“The Fire Lord will be most pleased when I bring him the children of that bastard Hakoda. They will be good leverage to negotiate his surrender. And without his fleet guarding the rivers east of Ba Sing Se, the Fire Nation will finally conquer that impregnable city.”

 

As Zhao spoke he caressed the boomerang, running his fingers along its edges. When he got to the blade, it bit deep into his finger and he dropped it. The weapon fell to the ground and rang cold and clear as a winter morning.

 

Zuko’s eyes widened at the sound. This, more than anything else, proved the veracity of Zhao's claim.

 

There was a noise from inside the sanctuary. Zhao and his soldiers got moved into position, the boomerang forgotten on the floor. They waited at the door, silent as the grave. Beads of sweat dripped on Sokka’s forehead and into his eyes. “Come on Aang” , he thought, blinking the sting away as best he could, scrunching his eyes for a moment. “I know you made it in time, you must’ve talked with him by now.”  When he opened them again he saw the sanctuary door start to move again. Shiyu had said that Aang would only have a few minutes with him at best, and that window had come and gone. He had been inside for less than ten minutes and now the odds were against them more than they had been when he went inside. Sokka hoped that he had gotten something from his former self.

 

The firebenders waited for the doors to open wide before punching flame to the darkness within. The fire surged forth and into the chamber beyond where it swirled and coalesced into a great sphere, then dispersed. Two bright points of blue light appeared in the darkness, and a tall figure walked through the doorway.

 

“No, Aang!” Katara shouted, fear and worry for their friend in her voice.

 

The man, Sokka realized, was not Aang. No, this was a different man whose likeness he had seen once before. Out of the smoke and darkness stepped Avatar Roku. He moved his arms vertically in a circle in front of him, then punched out. Zhao, his soldiers, and the sages were knocked to the ground and blasted into the stairwell. Zuko’s head was rocked back into the pillar he was bound to and he slumped forwards, unconscious. 

 

The floor split open and the wall blasted out, revealing the island and sea beyond. Lava spewed out from the volcanic island and the temple shook.

 

“He’s going to destroy the temple!’ Shouted Shiyu, as the Avatar bent a wave of fire across the room, disintegrating the chains that bound both them and Zuko alike. The Fire Prince slid to the ground, still unconscious. Aang had appeared again, Roku was gone. The airbender ran to Katara asking if she was okay. Sokka bit back a sarcastic comment at being ignored as Appa flew up to the opening in the wall. He picked up his weapons and the still restrained lemur, then helped his sister onto the bison when Aang asked, “Where’s Shiyu?”

 

Sokka turned to look for the sage but he had vanished. He saw only Zuko lying where had fallen on the floor. Aang saw the prince too, and looked at Sokka. “We can’t leave him, he’ll die!” 

 

Sokka groaned and rolled his eyes. He didn’t want to leave him to burn or be crushed under rubble when the temple collapsed either. He ran to Zuko and hauled him over his shoulders, carrying him to safety, dumping him unceremoniously in Appa’s saddle. “You just love making our lives more difficult, don’t you?” He asked the dazed prince. Appa took off and Sokka tied Zuko with rope from his bag. The whole ordeal from the time Roku had emerged to their escape had taken less than a minute, yet Sokka felt as if he had been running for hours. Adventure was exhausting.

 

“What are we going to do with him?” Katara aked, looking at Zuko.

 

“We can drop him off at an island?” Aang said, rubbing his head with his hand.

 

“We’re in Fire Nation territory,” Sokka replied, “We can’t make any more stops, it's too risky.”

 

“Well, we can’t keep him with us.” Katara said, still looking at Zuko. “That's even more risky.”

 

The sky grew darker as they conversed, and the first stars began to appear overhead. The moon was visible and the sun fell behind the horizon. Night fell around them.

 

“So we can’t drop him anywhere, and we can’t keep him with us.” Said Sokka, staring at Zuko. Zuko stirred and opened his eyes.

 

“Well, well, well, look who decided to wake up.” He said to the firebender. “You tried to capture the Avatar, and now you’re captured by the Avatar!” He said with an obnoxious grin.

 

Katara laughed at the indignant expression on Zuko’s face. “Remember how you invaded our village? And burned Kyoshi Island?”

 

“Or about how you destroyed my watchtower? I bet you think those were all great ideas now that we’ve captured you!” Sokka said, grinning.

 

“We didn’t capture him, Sokka, we rescued him.” Said Aang from his seat on Appa’s head.

 

“Lies!” Spat Zuko, glaring at Aang. Sokka realized that he was blocking the view of the burning and collapsed temple with his body. “See for yourself.” He said, moving aside.

 

Zuko's eyes widened as he saw the burning ruin shrinking into the distance behind them. Aang spoke again. “Like I said, we rescued you, we didnt take you prisoner.”

 

“If not to keep me prisoner then why?!”

 

They were silent for a moment. Sokka saw a ship to the northeast and pointed Aang in that direction. The Avatar looked puzzled but followed Sokka's direction regardless. Eventually Katara answered Zuko’s question. 

 

“Even if you are our enemy, we won’t leave someone defenseless behind to die.” Zuko blinked at that, his mouth slightly open.

 

“I’m not defenseless!” Zuko said indignantly.

 

“Yeah, okay buddy. I’m sure that you were pretending to be knocked out on the floor of a collapsing building. That was also on fire.” Sokka said, his voice thick with sarcasm. He pulled the prince up by the ponytail and facing him out towards the ship. “Real clever of you. Now, is that your ship?”

 

“What ship? I can’t see anything out there, it's completely dar-” Zuko cut off mid sentence. He hadn’t seen a ship, but he could faintly make out the sound of his uncle singing. His shoulders sagged, “Why does it have to be music night? Yes, that’s my ship.”

 

Team Avatar ghosted silently beside the ship and tossed Zuko, gagged with one of Sokka’s socks, onto the deck where he slid on his face until he lost momentum, falling on his belly.

 

“Prince Zuko!?” Iroh said, rushing to help his nephew. He untied him, and looked at the silhouette of a sky bison flit across the moon. “I take it that your mission did not go as planned.”

Chapter 4: New Eyes

 

Zuko glowered in his room, awake. Two days had passed since his excursion on the solstice. When uncle Iroh had untied him, he had been indignant. That buffoon had gagged him with the most disgusting thing he could find, and then thrown him onto his face. He did that purposefully, Zuko was sure.

 

The lieutenant had asked if they should follow them, and Zuko had been silent for a moment. When he finally spoke he told his subordinate to plot a course for Earth Kingdom waters. They would find the Avatar after they reached safety. 

 

Zuko got up from his cot, walked to his desk and sat cross legged on the cushion. He breathed deeply and exhaled slowly, lighting the candles before him. He opened his eyes and looked at his twin broadswords; a gift from his sword master, Piandao.

 

The door to his room opened and his uncle stepped inside. Iroh bowed slightly before he spoke. “Good morning Prince Zuko,” He said, “It has been a while since you returned and I thought you might like to share the details of your mission with me.”

 

Zuko was silent for a moment, his nearly ever present anger telling him to send his uncle away. He thought better of it, after a moment of consideration. He sat, facing the swords upon his wall. Closing his eyes he breathed in, and out. In, and out. The candles on the desk burned brighter and dimmer as he breathed. A minute passed as he calmed himself, and Iroh spoke again. “I’ll just come back later,” he said, turning to leave.

 

“No, Uncle. Stay.” He said calmly. Iroh raised his eyebrows in surprise. His nephew was… well the calm was unexpected. Zuko gestured to the cot, the only other seat. “Would you like to sit?”

 

“Okay..” said Iroh, apprehensive as he sat. Zuko remained where he was, his eyes still closed. “I followed the Avatar to a temple. By the time I arrived, there had been fighting in the entryway. I went to the sanctuary where I was sure I would find him, and I did.”

 

Iroh watched him as he spoke. He watched as lines began to form as his eyebrows furrowed, the calm slipping from his face.

 

“When I found them, there was a fight between them and the sages. One of the sages had turned against the others. I managed to subdue the airbender, but he escaped into the sanctuary and sealed it behind him.”

 

General Iroh stroked his beard. “Was anyone injured?”

 

“One of the sages. The Water Tribe boy dislocated his shoulder. Sprained his wrist as well. I subdued the oaf and we restrained them.” As he spoke his anger returned, his voice losing its composure and becoming more volatile. 

 

“And then Zhao came!” He snarled, the candle's fire growing in magnitude, reaching the ceiling and leaving soot in their wake. “His men restrained me as well! Chained me as if I was their enemy!”

 

Iroh was silent for a moment, thinking before he spoke again. “I had not foreseen this. That Zhao would openly oppose you is one thing. But to hinder you on your quest to capture the Avatar? He goes against the will of the Fire Lord. Zhao has always been rash, but even as a boy he would show more restraint. He’s planning something, otherwise there’s no way he would act in such a manner.”

 

Zuko nodded and breathed slowly again, reaching for the calm that had escaped him. Iroh continued speaking. “Your victory in the agni kai disgraced him. He became even more so when he tried to strike you after his defeat.”

 

Zuko nodded again. “While we waited for the Avatar to emerge from the sanctuary, Zhao discovered that the Avatar's companions were not the peasants we thought they were. To think that they were living in that pathetic collection of tents… The son and daughter of Hakoda..”

 

Iroh’s eyes widened slightly. “The Southern Fox.” He said softly. “ A clever foe, and one of the greatest commanders I have faced.”

 

“If he’s so clever then why was his family left defenseless in that village? Should they not have been guarded in a palace somewhere?’

 

Iroh chuckled softly in his throat. “I see why you would think so, my nephew. But the southern Water Tribe has no great cities anymore. Hakoda hid his children in plain sight where nobody would look for them.”

 

“We found them there.” Said the prince.

 

“And only now, half a world away, have we learned their identity. Tell me Prince Zuko, do you know why there has only been one military expedition to the south pole in the last forty years?” Iroh said. His nephew turned to face him for the first time. 

 

“Because there are no waterbenders in the south.” he said, raising an eyebrow.

 

“That’s the official reason, but reality is much different. After the destruction of the Air Nomads, Fire Lord Sozin set his eyes on the south pole. He knew that the waterbenders were the greatest threat to the Fire Nation. The south pole was far closer than the north, and they have close ties with the earth kingdom to this day. My father led the attack on the Water Tribe, and he devised a plan to neutralize the threat and suffer few casualties. When he would attack a city, he made sure to capture as many waterbenders as possible. He would attack, capture, and withdraw, repeating the process until there were no waterbenders to be found in the south.”

 

“I know this already!” Zuko said, pinching the bridge of his nose in exasperation. 

 

“The previous chieftain realized our plan too late, but he was a shrewd man nonetheless. He knew that without the water benders they stood little chance of surviving. He ordered the cities abandoned, and overnight his people vanished into the falling snow. My father attacked each city and found them empty. Many expeditions were sent out into the tundra but few men ever returned. The ones who did spoke of phantoms in the night, of men in white who would strike and fall away, again and again depleting their numbers until few remained, if any.”

 

“They used Fire Lord Azuon’s strategy against him,” Zuko said.

 

“Yes. And far more effectively. In a matter of months more than ten thousand soldiers, firebenders and spearmen alike, were lost. Chief Vurak, father of Hakoda, knew the terrain of his country quite well. He chose the best captains for the mission. The Fire Nation does not have animals suited for the tundra, and our soldiers are unaccustomed to the frigid environment. Many of them died from exposure, and the food they brought with them was frozen and inedible. After a years-long campaign my father returned, and declared victory over the waterbenders. He did not lie, but he did not tell the whole truth. He defeated the waterbenders, and yet was defeated by the Water Tribe. When he took the throne, he forbade me and Fire Lord Ozai from invading the Water Tribes. The southern Water Tribe never again returned to its cities, for Vurak and Hakoda knew well that their greatest advantage. They could not be cornered and boxed in on the tundra.”

 

Zuko stood and walked to the porthole. It made sense to him. His firebening had been weaker in the south. He was slower. If the Water Tribe was spread thin across the southern continent then there was little hope of ferrating them out. Hakoda hiding his children in plain sight, a simple, effective strategy.

 

“But still, that rube is the First Son. It’s hard to believe.” Zuko said, shaking his head.

 

“Do not underestimate him, Prince Zuko. The men of that family have foiled our plans many times. My father was defeated by Vurak, and Prince Ozai, my uncle and your fathers namesake, was slain by him. I myself have been bested by Hakoda on more than one occasion.” The old general said.

 

“Though, I have outsmarted the Southern Fox just as often. “ Iroh continued, “Zhao has a particular hatred for him; they have faced each other many times. Zhao has never beaten him.”

 

“He must be quite formidable, to outsmart you, Uncle.” Zuko said, turning to face Iroh.

 

“Well,” said iroh, blushing slightly. “You’re very kind Prince Zuko. The royal family of the southern Water Tribe is considered to be as powerful and cunning as that of the Fire Nation. Unlike our family, however; not every member is a bender.  Despite this, they have endured for the last eight and a half centuries, an unbroken chain of succession. It is said that the line of the First Son shall never die out.”

 

“It is odd,” Mused Zuko, “That the heirloom of their people is a boomerang. I’ve not seen anything like it though. Zhao cut himself by just brushing against its edge. When he dropped it, it rang like a bell, loud as thunder.”

 

“Yes,” Said Iroh. “It does seem odd, having grown up in the Fire Nation. But the Water Tribe is a different culture entirely. The south in particular does not stand on ceremony. But that particular weapon is an oddity. Legend holds that it was forged by Avatar Kuruk, tempered in lightning and quenched by the ocean spirit. It is thought to never tarnish or lose its edge.  When the heir reaches the age of thirteen his father passes the boomerang onto him. Even with this fabled weapon there's little pomp. They are a practical people, and in times of hardship even more so.”

 

“Prince Zuko,” He said again, “I know I have gotten a little side tracked with this impromptu history lesson, but tell me. How did you come to be tied up by the Avatar and his friends?”

 

Zuko scowled looking away and to the floor. “After the sanctuary opened, Zhao and his men unleashed a wave of firebending inside. And then Avatar Roku walked out. The next thing I remember I was tied on the Avatars bison. The temple was collapsed and burning. The avatar told me that they rescued me.”

 

“So that’s why…” Iroh trailed off. He looked at his nephew carefully. The young man had spent the past days in his room. He had taken no meals, and there was a shadow under his unmarked eye. He stood tall, but his shoulders slumped inwards. He had slept little, if it all. More than this, Zuko had not ordered the crew to pursue the Avatar. No, instead he had steered the ship northeast, out of Fire Nation territory.

 

“You have not slept, Prince Zuko.” Iroh said to his nephew. It wasn’t a question. 

 

“No.” Zuko answered anyway. “I haven’t.”

 

Zuko sat beside his uncle, and Iroh guessed at what was keeping him awake. He had been saved by the Avatar and not taken prisoner, something he never would have expected. He had been returned to his ship unharmed, though rather embarrassingly. Iroh placed a hand on his shoulder. “Sometimes,” He said, “We find allies where we least expect them. There is no shame in that.”

 

Iroh stood then, and bowed once more to his nephew. “I shall take my leave, Prince Zuko.” he said, and left.

 

Zuko undressed and laid on his cot. He looked at the Fire Nation flag on the wall, and after a moment he turned away from it. He closed his eyes and slept.

---

Katara moved her arms carefully, watching as bandits surrounded her brother. One struck out with his spear but Sokka deflected the blow with his boomerang, breaking the point from the shaft. Katara grit her teeth in concentration as she moved as much water through the air as she could without giving away her position. Sokka had come up with the plan after Aang had been captured. He would act as a distraction while she trapped the bandits in ice.

 

One of the men seemed to notice something and began to turn around, and Sokka moved like lightning. One moment his back was to a tree and the next he stood in front of the man, throwing a savage kick at his knee. There was a hideous cracking sound and the man's leg bent inwards, and he collapsed to the ground. The fallen man's companions lashed out with knives and swords trying to wound Sokka, but he twisted away. One man managed to score his arm, but the knife caught on something and was jolted from his hand.

 

Katara eased the water through the air until it was directly above them, and Sokka shouted the signal, leaping into the lowest branches of the tree. Katara pulled the water downward, and closing her fists, froze it into place.

Some of the bandits were encased in ice completely, and others were just frozen to the ground. None had escaped. Sokka Leapt from the tree, avoiding the bandits. He pulled the knife from his arm, and pocketed it,

 

“You’re hurt.” Katara said, reaching out to inspect his tricep. Her brother turned away to avoid her. “We can worry about it later. Right now we need to get Aang and get out of here,”

 

Katara looked at him, concerned. She agreed that it could wait; there wasn't much blood. But it wasn’t like Sokka to brush off an injury without whining about it. Perhaps it was because this was the first time he had been wounded in battle, or maybe he was trying to be tough. She didn’t know. All the same she nodded. The two of them ran into the woods towards the bandits hideout.

 

They had been ambushed that morning, just a few hours earlier. The bandits came in a rush, blowing darts at the three of them, hitting Aang first and then Katara paralyzing them. How Sokka had avoided them she had no idea, but when the criminals began to tie up her and Aang Sokka had leapt to his feet and begun to fight. Aang had told him to save Katara, and he had done so, hoisting her over his shoulder and sprinting back to Appa. The bandits gave chase but couldn’t keep up with them. At the time Katara was too angry at her brother for leaving Aang behind to think about it, but now that the bandits were taken care of she thought it odd. Sokka had never been that fast, even when children she had outpaced him. 

 

Appa had been over a mile away at their camp by the river, and when they got to him and flew back Katara could move again. They had returned to the spot of the attack, and Sokka managed to track the bandits to a cave in the base of a cliff, where they were gathered outside, and one of the men carried Aang inside, using a lantern to light his way. The others had talked outside and Katara and Sokka had listened in on their conversation. The man from the fire temple, Commander Zhao, was offering a steep reward for the capture of the Avatar and his Water Tribe companions.

 

Sokka hatched a plan then, and the two of them put it into action. Katara hid herself by the river, and Sokka lured the bandits over to her so she could trap them.

 

Now that they had succeeded they sprinted back to the cave, calling Appa to them as they ran. The bison landed next to the cave and groaned, reaching his arm into it to reach his master.

 

“It’s no good big guy. We’ll get him out.” Katara said to the bison. At her words Appa backed away to let them into the cave. Katara couldn’t see anything inside. She looked around the entrance for a lantern but Sokka just walked inside without a moment's hesitation. 

 

“Sokka! It’s dark in there we won’t be able to find him without light,” She said to him when he passed into the shadow of the earth. “I can see him. He’s tied up not far from the entrance.” 

 

She stared into the darkness, eyes straining to catch a glimpse of anything beyond the first few feet. She walked in, thinking that maybe her eyes would adjust once she got inside. She took a few tentative steps into the cave and immediately smacked her head into something. A hand took hers and her brother spoke. “Katara are you blind? Watch where you’re going.”

 

She grew angry at his words. “How can you see anything in here? Its completely dark! I can’t even see my nose in this!”

 

“Katara? Sokka? Is that you?” It was Aang, “I can’t see anything!”

 

“See! I told you!.”

 

“Maybe non-benders just have better night vision.” Sokka said.

 

“I’m more than happy to discuss the differences in vision between benders an non-benders, but

Could you hurry up and untie me? I really have to go to the bathroom.” Aang said. Katara could hear him shuffle towards them. “Sure Aang.” Sokka spoke again and Katara heard him cut through the cord binding him. “... This is the worst rope I've ever seen. It’s just grass woven together.”

 

Katara made her way slowly back to the light at the end of the cave. She stepped inside and Aang popped out shortly after, and ran into the woods to relieve himself. Sokka was nowhere to be seen. She stared at the mouth of the cave expectantly, and Aang returned to stand beside her. As seconds became minutes she called out to him. “Sokka? What are you doing in there?” 

 

Her brother's voice drifted out to them. “I’m stealing their stuff. Normally I'd be against it. but considering that they were going to sell us to Zhao I’ll make an exception. Do either of you know how to use nunchakus?”

 

“I’m more of an airbender myself.” Aang said, a lopsided smile on his face. Katara snickered despite her agitation. She expected Sokka to laugh or make a joke back, but he didn’t. Instead he came out with a bag on his hip and a heavy pack, his face completely neutral. “What’s in those?” Aang asked.

 

“Money.” He said, patting the bag at his side. Then he gestured to his new pack. “Food. Let’s go before they come back.” 

 

Aang leapt onto Appa’s back, and gestured for Sokka to throw his pack up. Sokka did, and over shot it. Aang had to leap into the air to catch the bag. “Nice throw.” he said, surprised. Sokka said nothing and climbed into the saddle. Katara joined him and Aang steered Appa into the sky.

 

“Let me see your arm. I saw the bandit’s knife get stuck while you were fighting.” Katara said, rummaging in her bag for a bandage as she spoke. She found one and went to inspect Sokka’s wound. There was more blood than she realized, and she washed it off. To her surprise, the wound had already scabbed over, closing itself. “Well?” Sokka asked. “Is it bad?

 

No. it’s… it’s already closed up. That shouldn’t be possible, it hasn’t even been an hour.” 

 

Sokka blinked and brushed his fingers over the mark, wincing slightly. Then he shrugged. Settling back in his position against the far side of the saddle.

 

Katara watched him, curiously. Her brother stared off into the distance. She watched his eyes and thought it was as if a great weight had settled over him, an ever present shadow dragging along in his wake. Was it because he had broken the bandits leg? She decided to try and talk with him to cheer him up.

 

“You fought amazingly today. I’ve never seen anyone but Aang move so fast.” She said, smiling at him. His eyes flicked over to her, a smile tugged at the corner of his mouth for a moment and then fell away. “Thanks.” Was all he said. Worry began to knot itself into her stomach then. Not whining was one thing, but Sokka never passed a compliment so casually. She looked over at Aang. He too had noticed Sokka’s odd behavior. They exchanged looks briefly, and then Aang's face brightened as he seemed to have an idea. 

 

“Maybe we should go back. Make sure they’re okay.” The Avatar said.

 

Sokka snorted. “That’s a great idea. Let's go ask the men who we robbed and beat up how they’re feeling. It’s not like they wanted to hand us over to the Fire Nation or anything.”

 

“Do you really think so?”

 

“What? Are you ser-” Sokka spluttered as he turned his head to look at the Avatar, who for his part was failing to suppress a laugh. “Oh. You’re messing with me.” Aang laughed openly then, seeing the expression on his friend's face. Katara joined in, and after a moment Sokka laughed too.

 

When they were finished, Sokka upended the contents of the pack into the saddle. He and Katara took stock of their supplies. Most of it was food, with some knick-knacks mixed in. Sokka picked up a whistle in the shape of a bison and blew on it. Appa grunted loudly. Sokka paused, and blew again. Appa roared this time and Aang looked back to see the cause of the disturbance. “Is that a bison whistle?” he asked, jumping back to join them for a moment. 

 

“I guess so.” Sokka handed it to Aang. The Avatar pocketed it and grinned. “This ought to come in handy, I lost mine when I left the air temple.”

 

Katara spoke up after packing away the rest of the food. “It looks like we got lucky. There’s enough food here to last a few weeks, we won’t have to stop for supplies for a while. That should take some time off of our trip to the north pole.”

 

“Good,” her brother said. “Time’s one thing we don’t have enough of.”

 

---

Katara and Aang sat next to each other in front of their campfire. Having finished their evening meal they rested in a comfortable silence, neither speaking while they enjoyed each other's company. Sokka was across the campsite from them, snoring loudly in his sleeping bag. The young prince had been acting… different for the last few days. Katara thought at first that it was because of the events at the temple, but now she began to realize that it had started when he had come out of the spirit world. He had been quiet, his jokes and sarcasm less frequent. When he laughed it was quiet, his smile not as broad.

 

“I’m worried about Sokka.” She said, breaking the soft silence that covered them. “Ever since he came out of the spirit world he’s been different.”

 

Aang nodded. “I’ve noticed that too,” He said, “I can’t quite put my finger on it. It’s almost as if he’s Sokka, but also not Sokka.” Aang turned and watched his friend sleep. His snoring slowed, and stopped. He slept silently, as if far away in his dreams. “Almost as if there’s two people where there should be one.”

 

“When we were fighting those bandits,” Katara said, “He moved so fast. He shouldn’t have been able to keep them at bay but he did. It looked like one of them was about to notice me, and Sokka moved ten feet in the blink of an eye. He kicked him in the knee and broke his leg. He’s never done that  before, he never tried to injure someone so bad in any of our other fights.”

 

Katara stared at her brother as well. Watching him she could almost see something there, a flicker of movement. A shadow just out of sight. As she pondered him, she thought back to their flight over the blockade. Sokka had moved faster than she believed possible when he started to fall from the saddle. He had been the one to notice the Fire Nation ships. He had seen Zuko’s ship in the darkness when she could barely see Aang across Appa’s back. And he could see in the cavern that Aang was trapped in, too. 

 

“It must have something to do with that spirit he met,” Aang said, “Koh. Did he tell you what happened with him?”

 

“... No.” Katara responded, shaking her head slowly. “After the Fire Navy and everything that happened at the solstice, I didn’t ask him.”

 

Aang nodded. After they had returned Zuko to his ship, he told them about what he had learned from Roku.

 

“Do you think we should ask him?” The avatar asked

 

“Yeah,” She said slowly, “I do.”

 

“I’ll wake him up!” Aang said, moving to loose a gust of wind at Sokka. Katara stretched out an arm and stopped him. “Not now,” She said exasperated. “Tomorrow. You know how cranky he gets when you wake him up.”

 

“There's no need to wait. I’m up.”

 

Katara started at the sound of her brother's voice. She was sure he had been sleeping.  She wasn’t sure how to begin, now that it was time. Fortunately, Aang had no such hesitation.

 

“What happened when Kuruk took you to meet that spirit?”

 

Sokka looked up at the stars for a while. He debated lying, or just not answering them at all. Eventually, he decided to tell them.  He sat up, and got out of his sleeping bag to sit by the fire with them. He began to tell them what had happened in Koh’s lair, keeping some of it to himself.

 

“So Koh told Sozin about the comet, and now he wants to fix the mess he made.” Aang said, once Sokka had finished speaking.

 

“I don’t think so,” Sokka said. “I think he just wants the world to be put in order, so he offered me power and gave me a task.”

 

“You took the deal.” Katara said. “The power.”

 

“You agreed to become his avatar.” Aang said, realization on his face.

 

“I don’t know about avatar,” Sokka said, “More like his champion. Either way, I can do things I couldn't before. I'm faster, stronger. My senses are sharper and my reflexes quicker. I can see things that were hidden.”

 

“That’s great!” Said Aang. He started moving around making punches and kicks at the air while he spoke. “When I face the Fire Lord you can unleash a crazy amazing spirit attack on his soldiers!”

 

“Uh, I don’t know about that Aang. It seems that it's mostly just that I can do stuff better than before, and see things. I don’t think I'll be shooting lasers out of my eyes or anything.”

 

“See things?” Katara asked. He had said he knew Shiyu could be trusted because he had seen it. Then she frowned, “is that why you could see in that cave?”

 

“Or how you spotted Zuko’s ship?” Aang added.

 

Sokka nodded. “Yeah, I guess. That's not all, I can see people. On the inside, what kind of person they are. Their chi. Some of them have been corrupted, it looks like they’re sick. As if a disease has gotten into them. Sozin’s light, Koh called it. He wants me to snuff it out.”

 

“How?” She asked him. 

 

Her brother shrugged. “I don’t know. The Sages had it, at least partially. Zuko too, but there was something else, something more. There were two fires burning within, fighting each other. But then Zhao…” He trailed off. “He’s too far gone. There was no good in him.”

 

Aang spoke again. “Sokka, I think I know what Koh did to you, at least part of it.”

 

“What did he do?”

 

“He opened your third eye. The one that can see into the spirit world.” The airbender said, pointing at his own forehead. Sokka looked confused and tried to look at his forehead. When that clearly didn’t work he touched it gingerly with his hands.

 

“It’s not an actual eye.” Aang said, laughing at the odd sight. “Some of the monks had mastered it. They could open and close it at will.”

 

“That must be nice.” Sokka huffed. “Because watching you two glow all the time is distracting.”

 

“I can teach you some of the exercises the monks taught me. I haven’t managed to unlock it yet, but maybe it could help.”

 

“That would be very helpful,” Sokka said, smiling at Aang. The Avatar sat down cross legged and motioned for Sokka to the same. When his friend had mirrored him he spoke.

 

”Put two fingers on your brow like this,” he said, placing the first two fingers of his right hand in the center of his forehead. “Take five deep breaths, seven normal breaths, and five more deep ones. Close your eyes slowly, and imagine a third eye where your fingers are doing the same.”

 

Sokka did as he was instructed. Once his eyes were closed Aang told him to open them and repeat the process again, only this time to try and close only his third eye. Sokka did, and to his surprise the light inside of the Avatar was dimmer, not as defined as it was before. “That’s a little better.”

 

Aang smiled at him. “I”m glad. Keep practicing and eventually you’ll be able to open and close it with just a touch or a thought. Monk Gyatso said that opening it for the first time was the hardest part, and you've already got that covered.”

 

“I don’t know about you two, but I’m ready for bed.” Katara told them as she got into her sleeping bag. Aang lifted himself with airbending and laid on appa’s tail. “Yeah, that's probably a good idea.”

 

Sokka for his part was already asleep, and dreaming. As he slept he saw an ever present shadow, a darkness that drank the light. In the distance a pair of golden eyes, and a billowing azure flame. He stared at it with slumbering curiosity, wondering what it meant

---

Zhao marched along the prow of his ship. He had seen the banished prince carried off by the Avatar. He had been tied up, and unconscious, but his men hadn’t seen that. No, they had seen the disgraced royalty on the back of the Avatar's pet, only his head visible from their vantage point. Zhao had been the first to see them, and the only one to see him dropped unceremoniously. The only witness as the Water Tribe buffoon had tied him. But that didn’t matter. No, what mattered was that his soldiers had seen Zuko with the Avatar and came to their own conclusions. Zhao smiled as he remembered their words. Traitor, they had said. In league with the Avatar. That suited him just fine. 

 

“One down,” He said, watching as a messenger hawk soared westward

 

---

 

Author's Note

Please forgive me. I didn't go to school, and so my grammar and spelling may be terrible. if you have any comments regarding those subjects, please share them with me. My primary goal is to improve.

 

Chapter 5: Enter the Void.

Commander Zhao stood before the assembled men of the Lu Ten naval station, watching as a gilded ship approached the docks. In minutes the ship docked and a palanquin progressed along the pier to wait beside the gangplank. A procession of red clad firebenders and spearmen escorted a figure in black armor down and to the palanquin. The figure took their seat upon it and the procession made its way toward the assembled military. 

 

Zhao knelt down and prostrated himself when the Palanquin passed under the gateway and into the base. The assembled military behind him did the same, and the palanquins curtains opened to reveal a girl with dark hair and golden eyes.

 

“You may rise.” Princess Azula said, motioning with her left hand as she did so. Zhao rose, and when he stood he bowed to her.

 

“It is an honor to receive your presence, Princess.” He said, before looking up again.

 

“The Fire Lord has received your report that my brother aided the Avatars' escape from the Fire Nation. He has sent me to discover the truth of this claim, and to find out if my uncle has betrayed us as well.” Azula told the commander, watching him closely as she spoke. The man did not so much as blink at this.

 

“I would expect nothing less. The possibility that a member of the royal family could turn traitor would be disastrous for the Fire Nation,” He said in response.

 

Azula nodded and pulled a scroll from the sleeve of her armor. “My father values your integrity, and as reward for your loyalty to the Fire Nation he has promoted you to admiral.” She said, handing him the scroll.

 

Zhao took the scroll and read it, then bowed once more to the princess. “I am honored and grateful for the Fire Lord's goodwill.”

 

“As you should be. Now, Admiral, show me to the witnesses.”

 

“Of course, Princess.” He said turning to lead her to the soldiers. As he walked, a triumphant smile spread across his face.

---

Sokka wandered through a vast forest, idly wondering if he had entered the spirit world again. He walked along a narrow winding path leading he knew not where. As he walked the grass dulled to brown, and it grew sparse and then ceased . The trees grew thin and shorter here, giving way to a plain illuminated by an auror of spiraling light over the center. He walked farther still, the path before him growing frosted until snow crunched underfoot. He came to the center of the plain and saw the aurora reach down from the heavens and touch a pale tower of ice and stone.

 

As if drawn in by an unseen force, the Water Prince glided towards the tower and stepped inside. He ascended a spiraling stairway, passing window after window, climbing higher and higher until he found a man meditating on a ledge overlooking the tundra below. The man stood and turned, and Sokka recognized him as Avatar Kuruk. Sokka tried to speak, but when he moved his lips no sound could be heard. Kuruk frowned and his forehead creased slightly. He placed his hand on Sokka’s shoulder.

 

The moment the hand touched his shoulder everything rushed past Sokka. He felt as though he was falling, falling backwards into an infinite nothingness. He shut his eyes tightly against the disorienting rush passing him. After what might have been seconds or hours he felt everything around him still. He opened his eyes and saw Kuruk was still in front of him, yet their surroundings had changed. The tower had gone, and the tundra with it. 

 

They stood on the saddle of a mountain, high enough that there were only loose and bare stones beneath them. Behind his ancestor stood the peak, rising again a few dozen feet. Sokka could vaguely make out the silhouette of a man upon it.

 

He tried to speak again, and Kuruk shook his head. He beckoned Sokka to follow him, turning to walk the final ascent. They climbed over the rough stone face until they reached the summit. Sokka’s eyes widened when they reached the top, for the man he had seen was not on the mountain but floating over it. The man moved through the air and levitated in front of Sokka. He was surprised again, for this man had the same tattoos as Aang. The mark of an airbender.

 

“So this is him.” Said the air nomad, as he looked at Sokka with curiosity.

 

“Yes.” Kuruk said, nodding and sitting cross-legged on the ground. Sokka tried to speak again but still no sound was heard. The airbender frowned at this, still watching Sokka.

 

“His mind is clouded.” The airbender said, looking towards Kuruk now, who nodded and spoke, “We do not have much time before he returns to his body.”

 

The airbender turned his attention back towards Sokka, and gestured to a large stone. It was covered with dirt and the empty shells of long dead snails. “Your mind is like this stone. Emotion and distraction cover it like the dirt and shells, keeping things from your sight. You must clear them away if you are to see things for what they are.” 

 

The man moved his arms in precise motions, rotating them as they pushed outwards towards the stone. Wind rushed across the peak and the dirt and shells that covered the stone were blown away, scraping it clean. What had looked to be an oddly shaped boulder was revealed to be a statue, its elegant curved lines twisting around it, and many veins of rock of varying size and color wove all across its surface.

 

“Once you learn to do this inside yourself, then things that were unseen shall become clear to you.” The man alighted upon the ground in front of Sokka. He looked into his eyes and spoke once more. ‘Let go thy earthly tether. Enter the void, empty, and become wind.” 

 

He turned away and walked a few steps before speaking again, “You are not an airbender, so you will not become wind. But attaining this mental state will help you to see clearly. And when you do, then you shall master your abilities. You must reach for the void.”

 

Sokka tried to speak, to ask about what the airbender had meant by enter the void , but as he spoke the two men seemed to grow distant until they were far away, and then gone altogether.

---

Sokka opened his eyes as the first light of dawn touched his face. He blinked, yawned and stretched. He had been having the strangest dream. Was it a dream? It had felt very real, too real, now that he thought about it.

 

He climbed out of his sleeping bag and began rolling it up. When he finished he saw Aang watching him from atop Appa, a curious expression on his face.

 

“What?” Sokka Asked, raising an eyebrow.

 

“Well, you almost never get up this early. And you were talking in your sleep, you said something I thought that only an Air Nomad would know about..” Aang said, jumping to land beside Sokka.

 

“What was I saying?”

 

“It was a poem by an man who lived thousands of years ago: Let go thy earthly tether. Enter the void, empty, and become wind.” Aang said, throwing Sokka and Kataras bags to Katara in the saddle.

 

“What was his name? The guy who wrote the poem I mean.”

 

“Guru Laghima.”

 

“Could he fly around and stuff? Because I had this weird dream about an airbender who could fly around. He told me my mind was clouded and I couldn’t see right. Then he said the bit about entering the void,” Sokka said as he climbed up Appa’s tail to get into the saddle. Aang jumped and floated to the floor of the saddle so as to sit beside Katara.

 

“Well, yeah, that's what the monks said. Laghima was the greatest airbender to have ever lived. He supposedly reached enlightenment and lived the last part of his life without ever touching the ground.” Aang rubbed his chin thoughtfully as he spoke, and Sokka stepped past them to sit on Appa’s head. He was going to steer the bison, apparently.

 

“What are you guys talking about?” Katara asked as Sokka gave the command to start flying. He turned his head to the side and said, “I had a dream about a dead guy I’ve never met.”

 

“What?” She said, looking at Aang who shrugged and grunted his confusion. She rolled her eyes and continued to speak. “Why don’t you tell us about the dream?”

 

Sokka shrugged his shoulders and began to explain everything that he remembered about it. When he finished Katara spoke again, “That sounds more like a trip into the spirit world than a dream to me.”

 

Aang grumbled, slightly miffed. “I wish Roku would speak to me as often as you speak to Kurrk.”

 

“I’ve only seen him twice!”

 

“Yeah but that’s still twice as many times as I've seen Roku.” Said Aang, crossing his arms.

 

“Well, if I ever find myself in the spirit world again, I’ll ask Kuruk if he has any advice about getting in touch with Roku.” Sokka said, feeling a little guilty that he hadn’t thought of something like that before, although, it wouldn’t have mattered if he did. Seeing as how he couldn’t speak on the last occasion.

 

“Really?” Aang asked, cheering up a bit. Sokka nodded with a smile, and then turned forwards again. As sokka looked ahead of them he could see, far in the distance, the slow ponderous roll of storm clouds on the horizon. As he watched it the wind changed its course, blowing directly into them.

 

“Aang, Katara!” he called out to the others. “There’s a storm coming. It’s still far off, but it looks big.”

 

Katara squinted in the direction Sokka was looking, but she couldn’t see anything. She looked at Aang and asked, “Can you see it?”

 

Anng shook his head. “No, but I can sense the change in the air through my bending.”

 

Katara frowned. Why was she the only one without any special weather sense? Stupid spirit powers and airbending. “We should find a town or village to shelter in.”

 

“No, we need to get to the north pole as soon as possible,” Sokka said, “Maybe we can fly through it?!”

 

Aang shook his head in disagreement. He could feel the strength of the storm on the wind already. “Not this one. It’s too strong!” He remembered the last time he tried to fly through a storm. “It’s better to get there later than not at all!”

 

Sokka stared at the oncoming storm. Barely a minute had passed and already he could see it more clearly, the dark clouds towering hundreds of feet into the air, flashes of lightning crashed within its ominous form.

 

“You know what? I think you’re right!” he said.

 

“There!” Katara Shouted, pointing towards a seaside town on the other side of the bay they were flying over. Sokka steered the bison towards it. Nearly a whole day wasted, Sokka thought as they approached. They hadn’t even been flying for an hour.

---

Prince Zuko sat with Lieutenant Ji in the bridge of his ship, pouring over a map. They had drawn lines connecting each place where the Avatar had been spotted. They zigzagged haphazardly, though generally maintaining a somewhat northward trajectory.

 

“We lost the Avatars trail,” The lieutenant said, “But we know that he’s going to the north pole to learn waterbending.”

 

Zuko nodded. It had been three weeks since the winter solstice, and the last reported sighting of a sky bison had been a week previous over a town in the colonies in the western Earth Kingdom. They had gone to the settlement and questioned the witness, but all he could say was that the Avatar had been heading northward. His thoughts were interrupted when his uncle entered the bridge

 

“There’s a powerful storm coming.” Iroh said, as he sat at the table with them. “We must seek shelter until it passes.”

 

 Zuko looked out of the windows that lightened the room. The sky seemed clear to him, and the sea was calm.

 

“It’s completely calm, what are you talking about? Why do you think that a storm is coming?” He asked his uncle, irritated.

 

“When you get to be my age Prince Zuko,” He said, as he stroked his beard, “You can feel the weather turn in your bones.”

 

Zuko huffed and looked at the map. He didn’t know where the Avatar was. If he had, then he would have ignored his uncle and ordered the ship to stay the course. But he did not know, the ship was low on provisions, and the men hadn’t been allowed shore leave since before their journey to the south pole. If there was a storm coming as his uncle predicted, then it would be better not to be caught at sea. If the storm was powerful like Iroh said, then it might cause the Avatar to stop as well.

 

“Helmsman!” He called out, and pointed to a village marked on the map. “Change course and head east. We’re going to dock the ship here,” He turned his head to the Lieutenant. “I want the ship resupplied within three hours. After that, allow the crew shore leave until two hours past sundown.”

 

Lieutenant Ji blinked in surprise, he hadn’t expected for the crew to be given leave and he had told them as much the previous night. He stood and bowed. “Of course, thank you Prince Zuko. I shall give the order.”

 

The lieutenant left the bridge and Zuko continued to stare at the map. His uncle spoke again, “It was wise of you to allow the men time off the ship. After so long at sea this will greatly improve morale.”

 

Zuko remained silent at his uncle’s words. He knew the importance of the men's goodwill, and he knew that he had gone too long without letting them off of the ship. He knew that if he was to capture the Avatar and restore his honor then he would need his men to remain loyal, and for that to happen he couldn't continue to treat them poorly.

 

He walked to the window and looked out beyond the prow of the ship. In the distance he could just faintly see a dark line appearing over the horizon. 

 

“You were right Uncle. There is a storm coming.”

---

Team Avatar drifted over the seaside village and towards the fields beyond. There were a few farms a mile or two beyond the settlement, and some of them had barns big enough to house Appa. Sokka steered the bison towards one of the furthest from the village and landed beside it. 

 

A middle aged man in earth kingdom clothing stepped out of the farmhouse and watched them wearily. Aang jumped out from the saddle and spoke to the man. Sokka and Katara waited on the bison while their friend spoke with the farmer. The man laughed and then bowed to the Avatar. He pointed towards his barn and returned to his home.

 

“Sho said we can stay in the barn until the storm passes.” Aang said as he returned to them.

 

Sokka nodded and began to help unload their belongings, carrying them into the barn as Katara helped Aang to remove the saddle. He piled everything up on one side of the building and Aang floated the saddle down beside the stack.

 

Sokka walked outside again and looked out at the sky. It was still blue, but towards the north clouds had begun to obscure the heavens. He lowered his gaze and looked around, seeing a large rock covered in dust and leaves.

 

“Hey Aang!” He called out, walking up to it.

 

“What’s up Sokka?” The air nomad said, coming to stand beside the rock as well.

 

“Can you blow all of this stuff off for me?” Sokka gestured at the stone as he spoke.

 

“Sure I can,” Aang said cheerfully, using his bending to clean the stone. Once he had done so, the young Water Tribe man jumped up on top of it. An impressive feet, as the thing came up to his shoulder. Once he was on top, Sokka sat cross-legged and closed his eyes, placing two fingers onto the center of his forehead.

 

Aang looked at Sokka with mild curiosity on his face, before turning to walk back to Katara and the barn.

 

Sokka focused on his third eye, willing it to open. He had practiced opening and closing it before sleeping each night since Aang had taught him the exercise, and now he could do it almost with ease. After a while, he opened his eyes again and returned his gaze to the sky.

 

A vast blue void filled half of it, and the storm filled the other. Sokka did not see much difference in the storm now, but he had been curious. The Eye gave him the ability to see into the spirit world, and the energy of the world around him. He averted his gaze towards the fields surrounding the barn and farmhouse.

 

In them he could see the imprint of the farmers' labor. A faint green mist above the fields, and most prominent around the places the man had worked most. He could see the life within the plants too. A faint glow from the leaves stretching down into the roots.

 

He closed his eyes again and thought back on his dream of his ancestor and the airbender. The man had said to reach for the void, and that he would find clarity therein. Sokka remembered how Aang had cleared the stone away, removing the debris from the stone and revealing the bare rock to the sky. He breathed deeply and exhaled slowly, imagining that as he did so the debris within himself was blowing away with it. He could feel something within himself fall away slightly, leaving behind as clear a space as the endless blue sky.

 

Had anyone been around him then, they would have seen the shadow he cast upon the rock lengthen. They would have heard the sounds of nature dim. But there was no one there to see, no one there to hear, and so these things went unnoticed.

---

Aang walked through the gate in the village wall, his friends on either side of him. They had found a farmer willing to let them stay with them for the night, and Appa was nestled comfortably in the barn. While he and Katara were discussing going into town Sokka had been meditating, first with his fingers over his third eye, and then not. At one point he asked Aang to airbend a large rock clean of debris for him, and then sat on top of it. He repeated the poem of Guru Laghima to himself, and then was silent for an hour.

 

Katara had asked him what Sokka was doing but Aang didn’t have a real answer. He had never mastered the practice of stilling his mind, and he didn’t have much knowledge of it to share with Sokka. So while his friend meditated on a boulder, he and Katara decided that they should go into town to try and learn what they could about any Fire Nation nearby. The farmer, Sho, had told them that his brother Boh ran an inn where they could get a hot meal and talk with other travelers.

 

Sokka had been silent on their walk to the village, and Aang got the feeling that his mind was elsewhere. Katara kept looking at her brother sideways as they walked, and Aang didn’t really blame her. Weeks had passed since he had told them about his visit to Koh, and he had been less and less talkative every day. In the morning he was almost normal, but even as soon as an hour after waking he would grow quiet. And now he had visited the spirit world again, and had been told to reach for the void. Aang wasn’t sure what that meant but it didn’t sound good.

 

Katara told him that he had broken the leg of one of the bandits that ambushed them, and in the weeks that followed there had been a couple more battles. In each of them Sokka was more… eager. He hadn’t seriously wounded anyone, but it seemed to Aang that his friend was more willing to fight, almost like he enjoyed it.

 

They passed by a few shops and continued walking west. The sky was dark with storm clouds, and the wind had picked up since they left. Aang began to think that coming into town might not have been such a great idea when suddenly Sokka grabbed him, pushing him and Katara into an alley.

 

“What are you-!” Katara began to shout at him but her brother put a finger to his lips.

 

Aang was going to ask Sokka what was going on when he heard a familiar voice drifting from the road they had just been on.

---

Zuko glanced in the direction he thought he’d heard something in. He looked down the road but there was no one there but a cabbage merchant. He squinted, and was about to walk in the direction when his uncle spoke.

 

“Wow, I can’t believe it! Zhao has been promoted to admiral.”

 

“What?!” Zuko exclaimed as he turned to his uncle. Iroh had been reading a scroll that had arrived by messenger hawk. He closed the scroll and handed it to Zuko, who began to read it aloud.

 

“By Order of Fire Lord Ozai, in recognition of his skills as a leader and for demonstrating exceptional loyalty, Commander Zhao has been raised to Admiral Zhao and placed in command of the northern fleet.” Zuko threw the scroll at a wall and exhaled fire from his nose.

 

“Exceptional loyalty?! All that man has done is stop me from capturing the Avatar!” Zuko shouted at the scroll, as if that would do anything.

 

They made port in the village an hour after noon and had completed their resupply in record time. Zuko wasn’t particularly surprised by that, he figured that the promise of a night on dry land would give the men a particularly strong motivation. 

 

His uncle had suggested that he join them in the tavern or the inn, but Zuko had refused. He was sure that the last thing the crew wanted was to have their commander standing over their shoulders as they tried to relax.

 

He turned and continued walking down the road in the direction of the cabbage merchant.

 

“Where are we going, Prince Zuko?” his uncle asked, following him. Zuko kept walking and said, “ We are not going anywhere. I am going for a walk. Remind the men to be on the ship two hours after sundown.”

 

“Maybe I should come with you, it’s getting dark, and the storm..” He trailed off as rain began to fall.

 

“I need some time to think, Uncle. After you remind the men, why don’t you find out what local tea they carry at one of the shops?”

 

“Well, I do like tea, but..”

 

“I don’t need you to watch over me while I walk around the village, Uncle.” Zuko said. Had he been looking at his uncle he would have seen the worry on his face, but as it was he did not see.

 

“Alright, Prince Zuko,” Iroh said. “I will do as you asked, but please, be careful.”

 

Zuko nodded that he would and Iroh turned away and vanished around a corner. As Zuko walked he noticed something out of the corner of his eye. He looked down an alleyway just in time to see a scrap of blue cloth flicker out of sight, his eyes widened and he chased after it.

---

“Do you think he saw us?” Katara asked, as they hurried down a side street to find a way out of the village.

 

“I don’t know,” Aang said quietly, sneaking as quickly as he could. “How does he keep finding us?”

 

“I don’t think he came here for us.” Sokka said, walking in front, looking around corners. “They probably came here to shelter from the storm the same as we did.”

 

A fireball shot directly next to Katara, and they bolted. “I think he saw us!” Aang said, sending a wave of airbending at the scarred prince. The gust hit him and he was blasted back into a wall, but he was soon after them again, sending wave after wave of firebending at them.

 

Sokka led the way, crossing the road and ducking into another alley, and pulled them into the shadow of a building. When they stepped into it it darkened and concealed them from view. “We need to split up. Aang, you and Katara get back to Appa and I’ll distract Zuko.”

 

“No, we’re not leaving you behind!” Katara argued, and Aang opened his mouth to do the same, but Sokka spoke before he could.

 

“Aang needs to get to the north pole and, Katara, you need to stay with him. Besides, I have a plan.” As he spoke thunder crashed around them, the wind and the rain became furious.

 

“He won’t be able to firebend that well in this rain, and his men aren’t with him. Wait until he chases after me and then you two run back to Appa. I’ll lose him in the storm and join you, and when you get there start getting everything ready to leave. As soon as the storm breaks, we need to get out of here.”

 

“No, Sokka, we won’t leave you here, it's too dark you won’t be able to... Oh, right.” Aang remembered that Sokka had been able to see inside that cave, and other times in the past weeks that he had been unhindered by darkness.

 

“No, not ‘oh right’. We can’t just leave him here and hope that he can get away!” Katara said, glaring at the two boys furiously.

 

“Katara, he can see in the dark, remember? With that and the rain, he’s the only one who can do anything. Neither of us are good waterbenders yet, and I can’t see that well in this.” He waved his hand vaguely in the air as he spoke. Even in the short time they had been hiding the storm had begun to blow with a tremendous rage..

 

“I- Fine. Sokka, if you get hurt I'm going to freeze your feet to Appa’s horns and fly around upside down.” Katara glared at him. Sokka nodded. “That’s fair.” he said, before walking out onto the road.

 

Sokka looked down the street and saw Zuko staring around, his hands in a ready stance. Sokka wondered how long he’d have to stand here until Zuko noticed him. He decided to take matters into his own hands and stepped into a puddle, splashing loudly.

 

A jet of flame shot towards him, and he had to jump to the side to avoid the attack. It flew past him and hit something, and a man in one of the buildings cried out, “My cabbages!”

 

Sokka started running, careful to keep in sight of Zuko as he did. The plan would only work if Zuko could see him. Zuko shouted unintelligibly and a whip of fire shot out, barely missing Sokka. 

 

Sokka ducked around a corner and into another alley, running in earnest now as fire reigned down after him. He focused on the center of his forehead and opened his third eye. He could see everything as clearly as if it were a cloudless day. He leapt over a stack of crates and heard Zuko collide with them.

 

Sokka turned another corner and found himself surrounded by walls, buildings forming a cage with Zuko at the only opening. Storm lanterns illuminated the space, and Sokka had nowhere to hide.

 

He turned about to try and escape the way he had come but saw Zuko blocking the entrance. Sokka gulped. He was more capable than any time before, but he was boxed in against a firebender. The rain had not hampered his foe's ability to firebend as he had hoped. 

 

“Where is the Avatar? Tell me and I will see that you and your sister are unharmed.” Zuko said, facing Sokka. 

 

The warrior took a deep breath as he faced Zuko. “No.”

 

“Last chance!” Zuko snarled, the rain running down his face.

 

Sokka thought furiously trying to find a way to get out of this. What had the airbender said in his dream? He had to enter the void to see clearly, and to control his abilities. Put his emotions and distractions aside. He reached for the void he had found earlier, the vast emptiness of the sky. He breathed out slowly and felt as though a part of himself fell away. There was a tug at the back of his mind.

 

“What?” Zuko said, his voice faltering.

 

Sokka opened his eyes and saw that the light given by the lanterns was repressed, illuminating only a few feet around them. He felt a tugging sensation in his mind grow, but he ignored it. He could feel an unyielding calm, a detachment from his emotions. They were still there, but it was as if they were far away, just a voice at the edge of hearing. 

 

Looking at Zuko now with his Eye, he noticed for the first time that the fire burning within Zuko had changed. The corrupted flame was smaller than it had been, and the golden light of the sun had grown. The two were fighting still, but it seemed that the corrupted light would falter at times, if only for a moment before returning to its desperate struggle.

 

He watched as Zuko squinted into the darkness where Sokka was hidden. He bent fire towards him but it went wide and illuminated little of the space before dying out. Zuko moved towards the center, one step at a time, scanning for Sokka. 

 

Once Zuko moved far enough into the space Sokka walked past him, ducking into the alley. He stepped through a hole in the fence he hadn’t seen before and let the calm escape him. And suddenly he felt his emotions rush back to him, and the tugging he had ignored turned to pain as the light returned to normal.

 

He heard Zuko roar in frustration and turn back down the way they had come, passing the place where Sokka had hidden. Sokka waited until he couldn’t make out his enemy’s steps in the rain, and then made his way back to the farm where Appa was hidden. He cradled his head in his hands as he walked, each step causing it to throb painfully.

 

He walked back to the farm they had found refuge in, the wind and rain obscuring his trail. As he walked the pain subsided. He thought about how the light had been dimmed, and how it looked as had the light in Koh’s lair. 

 

The tugging sensation, he realized. He had done it subconsciously, dampening the light from the lanterns. 

 

As he walked the pain receded. As the pain left him he realized that he had suddenly become ravenously hungry, as if he hadn’t eaten for days. He walked on until he found his way to the barn, stopping to close his third eye. It was harder to do now, exhausted as he was. He had to go through the exercise a few times before he managed it. When he had closed it, he looked around. 

 

He could see better than he had before his pact with the Face Stealer, but whereas before it had been as clear as day, he instead saw everything as if it was illuminated by the full moon. With his third eye closed, his senses were dimmed, but still greater than they had been naturally.

 

He placed his hand on the door to open it, but paused when he could hear Aang and Katara talking within.

---

“It’s been too long, we have to go after him!” Katara said, pacing back and forth in front of Appa.

 

“Maybe we should wait a bit longer,” Aang said, ringing his hands with indecision.

 

“What if he was captured by Zuko? We’ve got to do something, he might need our help!” Katara waved her hands in the air in agitation. “I knew we shouldn’t have left him there!”

 

She began to walk to the door when Aang spoke again, “What if he comes back while we’re gone and thinks that we’ve been captured? He might run off and sneak onto Zuko’s ship while we’re looking for him!”

 

Katara stopped walking and began tugging on her braid, “One of us should stay here and wait for him. I’ll go, he’s my brother.”

 

Aang shook his head. “No, I’ll go. I have a better chance of fighting off Zuko and his men.”

 

Katara began to argue that it was too dangerous for Aang to go since Zuko’s primary goal in life seemed to be capturing the Avatar, when the door opened and Sokka walked in. He was soaking wet, and he looked haggard and exhausted. 

 

“I appreciate you guys being brave and all but I’m fine, just really hungry.” He said, sitting down on an upturned bucket.

 

“You’re okay!’ Katara cried out and threw her arms around him. She let go almost as soon as she hugged him. “You’re freezing. Let’s get you dried off.”

 

As she pulled the water off of him with her bending, Aang tossed a bag of food his way. Seeing the food, Momo leapt out of nowhere swinging a hand at it, disrupting Katara's concentration and soaking Sokka again. “Gee, thanks Momo. That's much better.”

Chapter 6: Jeong Jeong

The soldier sat in a chair in the center of the room. He had been there waiting for he knew not how long. He was beginning to wonder if he had violated some code or statute he was unaware of when the door opened and three girls walked in.

 

He blinked in surprise for a second before he recognized the leading lady. He bowed his head deeply to her, before speaking. “Princess, I am honored to be in your presence.”

 

Azula smiled. “Of course you are,” She said, meeting the soldier's eyes as he raised his head.

 

She didn’t say anything, she just watched the man for a minute. As she stared, he began to sweat, and his eyes darted from person to person, nervous. When Azula deemed a sufficient time had passed she spoke again. “Tell me, what did you see at the fire temple?”

---

Azula idly tapped her fingers on the arm of her chair, waiting for Admiral Zhao to join them. Her friends Mai and Ty Lee were sitting at a table at one side of the room discussing the soldiers Azula had questioned. She had brought the two of them with her from the Fire Nation, and they had been present during the interrogation of the eleven witnesses.

 

All of the men and women had said roughly the same thing; Zuko had escaped the collapsing temple with the Avatar. Mai was reluctant to believe that to be true, and she had said that there must be more to it than had appeared. Azula was inclined to agree. 

 

During her interviews she had watched the eyes of the soldiers carefully, and known that they spoke the truth. Or at least that they believed what they were saying was the truth. Everyone gave something away when she looked into their eyes. Often she saw their fear or admiration, at times hope flickered and dimmed when she watched them. No matter who she faced, they all bent eventually. Except for her father. He was the only one who never gave, never faltered.

 

Even Mai and Ty Lee, her two companions and only real friends, couldn’t withstand her gaze for long without looking away. They had been together for almost their entire lives, and even they feared her at times.

 

She looked at the pair of them, chatting idly. Mai was stating she was skeptical of the accounts from the soldiers, in her dry way. Which, coming from her, might as well have been a stirring speech on the nature of love and loyalty. She was apathetic towards nearly everyone and everything. She held the world in an unfailing indifference except for one person: Zuko. She wasn’t indifferent towards him.

 

No, Azula’s brother held a special place in Mai’s heart. Why that was Azula herself couldn’t begin to fathom. Her brother had been banished for nigh on three years and it seemed that Mai’s affection for the boy had only grown.

 

Azula rose from her chair and paced the length of the room, rain and lightning pelting the ground outside of the naval compound they were visiting. Her friends stopped chatting and watched her walk, back and forth across the room. Moving. Thinking. 

 

Her father had sent her to find the truth. The witness testimony was compelling, but it wasn’t everything. No, she would have to see for herself to find if there was truth in her brother's alleged treachery. It was the task given by her father and she could not, would not, fail him.

 

She had learned something else while questioning the witnesses, a little piece of information that hadn’t made its way into Zhao’s missive to the Fire Lord. The companions of the Avatar were none other than the First Son of the South and his sister, the princess. Perhaps he had deemed it unimportant, or perhaps he merely delayed the information to put into the official report.

 

Still, it was odd that those two were with the Avatar. The last reports had placed the Southern Fox sailing north, not far from the northern air temple, several weeks ago. Most of the generals thought he was going to skirt around the northern coast of the Earth Kingdom and rejoin his fleet guarding the rivers to the east of Ba Sing Se. But Azula wasn’t sure. Perhaps that was his plan, or perhaps not. 

 

The door to the chamber opened and the newly minted admiral entered, disrupting Azula’s thoughts. The man walked towards her and bowed. “You wished to speak with me Princess?”

 

Azula nodded. “I interviewed the witnesses, they all corroborated your story. It would seem that my brother has joined forces with the Avatar, betraying the Fire Nation and the Fire Lord both. But I’m not so sure. I think I’ll have to see it for myself before I confirm it to my father, so we will be traveling with you a while longer.”

 

Zhao blinked, and then bowed his head. “Of course, Princess.”

 

“And I found something else, Admiral. You neglected to mention in your message to the Fire Lord that the Avatar travels with the First Son and princess of the southern Water Tribe. I find that curious, I find that very curious in fact, given your own personal history with the southern Water Tribe. Your father was killed during the raids of the south pole after all. I should hope that you weren’t planning to keep the information to yourself, so that you may get your revenge on their line.”

 

Zhao stiffened, and Azula took note of it. His next words would tell her if that was an act of fear or guilt. 

 

The admiral spoke. “Not at all your highness, I simply thought the news of the prince was most important. I included the information about the Avatar's companions in the official report, and the Fire Lord should have received it by now. In fact, I have even taken the liberty of drafting wanted posters and posting bounties for the pair of them.”

 

It was fear then. The man was likely worried that his omission of the fact might have been taken for treachery. Had his actions regarding the report been less thorough, or had he not taken steps to advance the capture of the Avatar’s companions Azula would have determined treachery, or at the very least hubris.

 

“Very well, Admiral.” Azula said, turning away from him and returning to her seat. “See that they are posted in every town and village under the Fire Nation’s control.”

 

“It will be done.” Zhao said, bowing once more, before departing the room.

 

---

 

Zuko glared from the prow of his ship as they sailed northward. The storm had broken late that morning and the ship had left later still. His men had returned to the ship on time, but after their day of shore leave they were in no shape to do anything but crawl into their racks and sleep off their revelry.

 

Zuko found it both surprising and typical that the Avatar had been there as well. Surprising that the Avatar would show up at the exact place and time that he himself had, and completely typical that it had been on the first occasion in months that he had given his crew shore leave. Of course the Avatar would appear when he was alone, and when his men were incapable of aiding him. Even that the boy had appeared mere moments after he had sent his uncle away was just another entry in the long line of misfortune that had befallen Zuko.

 

When he had chased the Water Tribe buffoon- he could still hardly believe that the boy was more than he had appeared- he had encountered something he had never expected. The light from the lanterns had just stopped somehow. They didn’t go out, not quite, but their reach had wavered, and then receded. In the dark he had lost his quarry, It must have been a trick, some plan somehow.

 

Uncle Iroh had said not to underestimate the First Son, and somehow Zuko had. That mad dash through the village, had it been a ruse all along? But that didn’t make any sense. They hadn’t known he was there, they couldn’t have. But if not how could they have planted the faltering lanterns?

 

Zuko huffed. It was over now, he thought, and dwelling on the past wouldn’t help.

 

They had seen the Avatar flying north after the storm had broken, and they would follow. Now that they had his trail again he wouldn’t stand idly by and let him slip away.

“Prince Zuko!”

 

Zuko turned to see his uncle hurrying towards him, a scroll in his upraised hand.

 

“What is it, Uncle?” He asked wearily. Based solely off of Iroh's hurry he guessed it wasn’t good. His uncle didn’t hurry often.

 

“Princess Azula is traveling with Admiral Zhao. Apparently she arrived yesterday with two companions, and is now sailing with him.” His uncle said, before placing the scroll in Zuko’s outstretched hand.

 

Zuko read the scroll and his eyes narrowed. Azula was sailing with Zhao? Why? Had his father decided to send her after the Avatar as well?

 

Zuko was uneasy at this revelation. Azula was out of the capital. She had delighted in tormenting him when they were younger, and took even greater joy in beating him in anything she could. 

 

Her two companions. Mai and Ty Lee, he assumed. It would be good to see Mai again, even Ty Lee would be good to see. Zuko hadn’t been overly fond of her, but after nearly three years it would be good to see a familiar face that wasn’t part of his crew or his uncle. To his surprise he found that he had even missed Azula, although only slightly.

 

But the fact that they were sailing with Zhao… It did not promise a happy reunion. The opposite if anything, and that was something he wasn’t looking forward to. He turned his attention back to his uncle. “I don’t know why she’s here. I don’t like it.”

 

“Nor do I, Prince Zuko.” His uncle said, a foreboding expression on his face. “I think it’s time we resume your training.”

 

---

 

Sokka reached again for the void as he sat in Appa’s saddle. He was closer this time, he could feel it. He hadn’t managed to find the state of clarity he had found when facing Zuko the previous day but he could feel.. Something.

 

Katara was watching him from the front of the saddle, near where Aang steered the bison. She watched as he sat, eyes closed breathing evenly. There was a line of worry forming on her forehead, but she said nothing. She sat silently, watching her brother. All day he had been sitting quietly, hardly moving. More strange than this, he had not eaten since they left the barn after the storm had broken.

 

She supposed that him sitting quietly wasn’t so odd, he had been doing so for weeks now as he learned to control his third eye. But Sokka not rummaging through their food supply for a whole day? Unheard off. Perhaps he was sick?

 

“Are you feeling okay?” She asked. “You were out in that storm for a while, I’m worried you might have caught something.”

 

Sokka opened his eyes and looked at her for a moment then said, “I’m fine.” Before closing his eyes once more.

 

She rolled her eyes and went over to him, placing a hand on his forehead. She blinked. It was cold to the touch.

 

“You’re freezing!” She said and started looking for his parka. She had no idea how someone could be as cold as that and still be conscious.

 

“What’s going on?” Aang asked, looking back when he noticed the commotion in the saddle.

 

“Sokka’s freezing! We have to land and make a fire!” Katara said as she unroled her brother's parka.

 

“I feel fine.” Sokka said, touching his face and neck methodically. He hadn’t noticed anything, and even now he didn’t feel particularly cold. Katara pushed his coat toward him and he considered refusing to wear it, but decided to wear it. Maybe he had hypothermia or something?

 

Aang jumped into the saddle and floated down beside the two of them. He put his hand on Sokka’s forehead and frowned. “Wow, you are cold! Really cold.”

 

The Avatar returned to the head of the bison and steered him toward the ground. He could make out a small camp in the woods near a river, and pointed it out to his friends. They flew towards it and in minutes they had landed next to it. The camp was filled with tents and small buildings with metal roofs. They lined the path leading up to a slightly larger hut with a tree sticking out of its top.

 

“Hello?” Aang called out as he jumped down from Appa. “Is anybody home? My friend is sick, he needs to get warm.”

 

A man with a mane of shaggy gray hair appeared from within the largest hut. As he approached Aang saw that he had a thin mustache and beard, along with two long scars that ran up the right side of his face.

 

Katara and Sokka climbed down Appa’s tail and stood beside Aang. For his part, Sokka had an expression of mild indignation on his face and stood there with his arms folded in front of his chest. Katara Looked around the camp with curiosity.

“Is he on the bison?” The man asked, looking up at the animal. 

 

“No, he’s right here.” Katara said, pointing a thumb at her brother.

 

“He doesn't look sick.” The man observed.

 

“I don’t feel sick either!” Sokka huffed. Katara rolled her eyes at her brother’s stubbornness.

 

“Well, healthy people don’t feel that cold when you touch them!” She said loudly, glaring at him.

 

The man walked forwards and touched Sokka’s face, at which point the young Water Tribe man jumped back, and said “The next person who touches my face without asking is getting their hand bitten!”

 

Really, he thought, this was getting ridiculous. First Katara, then Aang, and now random strangers with creepy mustaches! “Who even are you?!”

 

The man narrowed his eyes. “One should not presume to come to a man's home uninvited, ask for help, and then demand names without giving introductions of their own.”

 

Sokka blushed at that, and Katara kicked at the ground, slightly embarrassed. Aang rubbed the back of his head and spoke. “My name is Aang, I’m the Avatar. These are my friends Katara and Sokka.”

 

The man’s eyes widened, and then he spoke. “It is an honor to meet the Avatar. I am Jeong Jeong.”

 

---

 

Sokka reached for the void, and this time he found it. He held onto it for a moment and then it slipped away.

 

“Gah!” He said as he lost the trance. Well, he thought, that was better than he’d managed all day. He sat near the campfire, still clad in his parka. His protestations that he was fine went completely ignored, and Katara insisted that he remain bundled up.

 

The three of them had been quite shocked when Jeong Jeong lit the fire with a single breath, and it had taken some cajoling from the firebender to convince them that he wasn’t with the Fire Nation. Once they had accepted that, Aang had pleaded with the man to train him in firebending, to which Jeong Jeong had refused. 

 

According to Jeong Jeong, the Avatar had to master the other elements in the cycle before he would teach him firebending.

Now the three of them sat around a campfire within Jeong Jeong’s camp. When the sun began to set, the other men with him had come back one by one until there were a few dozen people there. 

 

“So what do you think we should do Aang?” Katara Said, “Should we keep going to the north pole and then find Jeong Jeong again once you’ve mastered earth and water?”

 

Aang didn’t respond right away, so Sokka cut in. “Well, I think we should get to the north pole as quickly as possible. Once the two of you learn waterbending, then we can worry about earth and fire. Plus, when Katara masters waterbending we’ll be able to worry about the Fire Nation less. We’re pretty much defenseless without Aang, so having two benders on our team will help me sleep easier at night.”

 

“Is that even possible? You already sleep like a hibernating polar bear-dog.” Katara said, looking at Sokka with a mocking expression. Sokka just shrugged and looked at Aang. Katara’s face fell at that, but she looked at Aang too.

 

“You guys have a point,” He said at last. “We should reach the north pole quickly. But I think I should at least try and ask Jeong Jeong one more time. We might not be able to find him again, so this might be my only chance. Where else are we going to find a firebender who isn’t part of the Fire Nation?”

 

With that the Avatar stood and left the fire, heading into the night in the direction of Jeong Jeong’s hut. Sokka watched him as he left the fire light. He could make out his outline as he made his way towards the hut, and disappeared inside.

 

The brother and sister sat in silence for a while as they waited for Aang to return. As the minute’s dragged on Katara decided to break the silence.

 

“So what’s it like in the spirit world?” She asked, eyeing Sokka from across the fire. She sat huddled together, her arms hugging her knees. Sokka looked at her, and then leaned back against the stump of a tree he sat in front of. He placed his hands behind his head as he reclined and looked at the crescent moon.

 

“Not too different from this one really. I’ve only been to three places, but they weren’t that special. First it was a swamp where Hei Bai dropped me, and then it was in a forest. I walked onto a plain that turned into tundra. There were lights in the sky like back home during summer. After that I was on a mountain top where I met Guru Laghima.”

 

Katara looked thoughtful for a moment then spoke again. “Aang said that this guru died thousands of years ago.”

 

Sokka nodded and turned his attention to her once again. “Yeah?”

 

“I was thinking… if the guru is there, and Avatar Kuruk… do you think Mom is there? That you could see her again?”

 

Sokka blinked. Their mother. He hadn’t even considered… she had been gone so long and he didn’t think that he would see her again until he… But hadn’t he traveled to the spirit world twice already? Laghima and Kuruk were there so why wouldn't she be there too?

 

“Katara you’re a genius! I can’t believe I didn’t think of that!” He smiled broadly and ran to her, picking her up in a bear hug. He spun her around laughing, in what he didn’t realize had been the first time in weeks.

 

“The next time I go there, I won’t leave until I find her!” He said, putting his sister down again. He stopped laughing when he saw her face. She was frowning and tears had formed in the corners of her eyes. She grabbed her elbow, and looked away.

 

“Oh, yeah. You probably want to see her too.” Sokka said lamely. He hadn’t thought about that, caught up in his elation over the chance to see his mother again. Katara nodded and wiped her eyes. 

 

“It’s okay.” She said, “At least one of us will get to see her again.”

 

Sokka thought for a moment, and then found an idea. “I know what will make you feel better. When I first met Kuruk he was holding my boomerang!” he said smiling again

 

“How is that going to make me feel better?” Katara said, raising an eyebrow at him.

 

“If Kuruk could hold something of mine then it stands to reason that Mom could too.”

 

“And why would Mom holding a boomerang help?”

 

Sokka sagged for a second, realizing he hadn’t explained fully. “No, that’s not what I meant. If she can hold things from the physical world then you can write her a letter! I’ll give it to her and she can read it! Maybe she can even write one back, I don't know what the rules are.”

 

Katara’s face lit up at his words. She might not be able to see their mom again, but even the possibility of talking to her, be it by using Sokka as a mailman, was enough to make her happier than she had been in a long time.

 

“That's a great idea! I need a brush and some paper, do you think Jeong Jeong will let me borrow some?” She said, turning to look out towards the deserter’s hut.

 

“Probably. When you finish it, give it to me. I’ll have to keep it on me because I don’t know when I’ll be in the spirit world again.”

 

“Don’t read it.” Katara said with a glare.

 

“I would never!” Sokka said, feigning offense. If she hadn’t asked him not to he probably would have.

 

“You should try to go to the spirit world on purpose. If you’ve become bound to this Koh person then it makes sense that you’d be able to cross over.”

 

Sokka rubbed his chin at that. He hadn’t thought of trying to go to the spirit world on purpose.

 

“Yeah, maybe I should.”

 

---

Aang pushed aside the curtain and entered Jeong Jeong’s hut. The man himself was sitting lotus style beside the tree that grew through the roof of the structure. Candles encircled him and the flames flared and dimmed in time with his breathing.

 

“Why are you here, young Avatar?” He asked, without looking up to see who had come.

 

“I’ve come to ask you to teach me firebending again.” Aang said, sitting down in front of the firebender, placing his staff across his knees. Jeong Jeong shook his head as he did so, grumbling.

 

“No.” He said before turning away and facing the opposite direction. “You must master water and earth first; you are not ready.”

 

“Please!” Aang said, “It’s my destiny to master all the bending disciplines! I have to-”

 

“Destiny?! What does a child know about destiny? A fish can swim all its life in this river and not know water, it can swim to the river's end and it will not know the world, it cannot imagine the ocean. You have no interest in discipline, and so I have no interest in you. Get out.”

 

“This could be my only chance! I have to learn. I need to defeat the Fire Lord before the comet comes!” Aang pleaded. Jeong Jeong only shook his head.

 

“How can I teach you if you will not listen? I told you to leave, now go!” They were both shouting now, neither giving ground.

 

“But I-”

 

“You are impatient!” Jiong Jeong cut him off. “Fire is not like the other elements! Water will not drown a man unless he cannot swim! Without the bender, a rock doesn’t throw itself into the air!” He turned again to face the Avatar. 

 

“Fire alone is alive, it breathes! It grows! If you do not have the will to control it, then the fire will destroy all that it touches if left to its own devices! You are impatient! You are not ready! You are too weak!” Jeong Jeong said with a snarl.

 

A gong sounded and the candles flared and went out, save one. Mist filled the room of the hut, and the walls seemed to fade away. Jeong Jeong looked around, blinking in surprise when a voice alien to him spoke.

 

“You think I am weak?”

 

Jeong Jeong looked back to where Aang sat moments before, finding not the young airbender but instead a tall figure with an ornate hair piece.

 

“Avatar Roku? No, no I didn’t mean that.” He bowed his head before the old man.

 

“I have mastered the element a thousand times in a thousand lifetimes. And now, I must do it once again. Aang must defeat the Fire Lord before summer's end, and afterwards he will face an even greater threat. You will teach the Avatar firebending.”

 

As he finished speaking, Roku waved a hand and the tree beside them ignited, illuminating the space in an eerie light.

 

“Yes, I will teach you.” Jeong Jeong said, closing his eyes. But the voice that responded to him ws not Avatar Roku. He opened his eyes once more to see the smiling face of Avatar Aang.

 

“Really? Great!”

 

---

 

The captain Kano of the unit assigned to protect Ilah Firenation colony started at the two scouts. They had rushed into his office making claims about seeing the Avatar. 

 

“You saw the Avatar?” He said, incredulous. Why here of all places?

 

They nodded vehemently and The taller of the two spoke. “We saw his bison descend a few dozen miles upriver. We think they made landfall at that camp by the shore.”

 

The captain exhaled through his nose. The fire festival was a few weeks away and he had spent much of his time preoccupied with the planning of the festivities. If the Avatar had come at another time he wouldn’t have been so distracted. He looked at the two men and then nodded.

 

“Send a report to Admiral Zhao at once. Black ribbon.”

The two scout’s bowed to him and left quickly, rushing to the rookery where the messenger hawks were kept.

 

The captain sat behind his desk and slumped back in his seat. He had a bad feeling about this.

Chapter 7: Training

Jeong Jeong left Aang on the hilltop. He had told the Avatar to focus on his breathing, despite Aang telling him he knew how to breathe already. The firebending master ignored his protestations and left. Now Aang sat breathing, a bit dramatically, completely disgruntled.

 

Aang sucked in a huge breath, and then exhaled it forcefully. Leaves and small stones scattered from around him and dust billowed up in a great cloud. Aang coughed violently, eyes watering from the dust. He smacked himself on the forehead and continued breathing, if a bit less forcefully. He could see the camp in the near distance and just barely make out the shape of Sokka. He seemed to be talking with one of Jeong Jeong's men. The man drew a sword and showed Sokka, who took it and started swinging it clumsily, as if swinging a willow switch at a cluster of flies. What were they doing down there?

 

He scanned around the rest of the camp looking for Katara, when at first he couldn’t find her he lost focus on his breathing. Where had she gone? He was considering going to look for her when she emerged from one of the huts carrying something. A woman followed her out and Katara bowed to her, Aang assumed it was in thanks for whatever it was she was carrying, And then Katara turned and walked toward Appa.

 

Aang shook his head and closed his eyes. He was supposed to be learning firebending, wasn’t he? He returned his attention to his breathing. He could feel the gentle warmth of the late winter sun on his face, the morning light giving faint relief from the chill of the season. He breathed, slowly, and tried to focus on the action. Though he tried to focus, his mind kept wandering. What did a firebender know of breathing that an airbender did not? The monks had trained him in the practice since his earliest days at the temple. All airbenders had to master the breath if they were to survive the frigid temperatures in the mountains where they made their homes. An airbender cooled or heated themselves through the power of their own breath. It was why he didn’t wear a heavy parka like his friends when he visited the south pole, or use a sleeping bag at night.

 

Be it in the coldest seas or the hottest desert, no airbender would succumb to temperatures of either extreme. Nonetheless, Jeong Jeong had told him to breathe and now breathe he would. He took short, shallow breaths. He took long deep breaths. He took measured breaths, holding them for long intervals before letting them out again. He breathed until his back ached from sitting and the sun hung high above him. 

 

After what felt like hours he opened his eyes. This was getting ridiculous. If all that Jeong Jeong would teach was to breathe then he would be better served going directly to the north pole and finding Jeong Jeong or someone else after he mastered water and earthbending. He stood up and stretched, before turning on his heel and walking down the path that he had come up. He would go to Jeong Jeong and demand to learn something else.

 

As he descended the hill, he thought about Sozin’s comet. He had so much to learn and so little time. Sure, he had master airbending incredibly early, but now he had to master water, earth, and fire in less than eight months. Eight months before he had to defeat the man who was probably the most powerful firebender in the world. A grown man, who had spent a lifetime firebending, always honing his skills to retain his throne. And now Aang, at the age of twelve, had to master all of the elements in a matter of months to defeat him. 

 

Aang hopped on the stones crossing the river. He had to learn firebending as quickly as possible. How was going to be able to defeat the Fire Lord otherwise? Even if he mastered the elements, he was afraid that he would still fail. Just as he had failed to protect the air nomads a century ago. How could he possibly defeat Ozai? He was still just a kid.

 

Aang could see Jeong Jeong's hut, it wasn’t far now. Less than a hundred steps. As he made the final approach, Jeong Jeong exited the small building. When he saw Aang he scowled. “What are you doing here?! You were to stay on that hill until I told you otherwise.” Jeong Jeong said, walking towards Aang.

 

“I know how to sit and I know how to breathe! I don’t have time to learn it again! I have to master all of the elements in only a few months! You need to teach me real firebending!” Aang said angrily, eyebrows furrowed in defiance.

 

“You must learn patience before you learn firebending!” Jeong Jeong growled.

 

“I learned patience long ago! But now I do not have time for patience, and the world doesn’t either. I must defeat the Fire Lord before summer’s end!” Aand said, shouting now.

 

Jeong Jeong sighed, and then nodded. “Fine. Come with me to the river.” And with that he walked past Aang to the flowing water beyond. As they walked, Aang was surprised that Jeong Jeong had agreed so easily. He figured that Jeong Jeong would refuse him, and that he would have to leave for the north pole, and find a new teacher later.

 

Aang couldn’t say he was disappointed by the development, but he was still surprised. Jeong Jeong led him to a small island in the river, barely more than a few boulders and some dirt really. Aang was told to sit on one of the rocks, and so he sat, lotus style, while he watched the firebender.

 

Jeong Jeong plucked a falling leaf from the air. He pinched it between his thumb and forefinger, and a small plume of smoke rose from between them. Jeong Jeong presented the leaf to Aang. “Keep the fire from reaching the edges of the leaf. I will return in a few hours, and if you have not let the leaf burn or the fire go out, we shall move on.”

 

Aang focused on the leaf as Jeong Jeong left him. He tried to make the flame stop, but it ignored him. He tried again, this time focusing on his breathing and the fire stopped spreading. It flared in time with his breath, and he managed to keep the flame from moving.

 

Aang focused on the flame for a while, watching it respond to his breathing. He exhaled sharply and the fire grew larger, expanding outwards towards the edges of the leaf. Aang drew in a hasty breath, letting it out slowly. The fire calmed again, and Aang smiled. He closed his eyes and could feel the fire’s energy. He felt it change in time with his breathing. He stayed like that for what could have been minutes or hours, he wasn’t sure. When he opened his eyes again he saw that the sun had barely progressed any further in voyage across the azure sky.

 

Aang sagged, exasperated. He had learned patience from the monks, but that didn’t mean that he liked being patient. He exhaled carelessly and the leaf burst into flames. Aang blanched, shocked at how quickly it had gone awry. Now the leaf was destroyed and the fire went out. All that remained was a faint clow on the edges of the blackened and charred husk of the leaf.

 

Well, Aang thought, he had already failed the exercise. He might as well try and bend real fire right? He drew in a breath and let it out forcefully. The ember flared into fire and Aang scooped it up, watching it hover above his open palm. He tossed it to the other hand and it billowed in the air, stretching and growing as it made its way to the opposite palm.

 

Aang laughed with delight. He pushed his hand into the air above him, exhaling as he did so. The fire shot into the sky a few feet. Aang stood up and aimed for the river, loosing a punch like he had seen Zuko do countless times before. Fire roared from his fist and hit the river. The water hissed and steamed, creating a cloud of mist that wafted in the winter air.

 

He jumped into the air and started raining down punches of flame into the river. When he landed he shot a wide sweeping kick out across the water towards the shore opposite the camp. A wide swath of flame swept across the surface, and collided with the opposite bank, setting the forest ablaze.!

 

Aang cried out in dismay. He had started a forest fire! How could he have been so careless? Jeong Jeong has said that fire was dangerous and would destroy everything it touches if not controlled! Monkey feathers!

 

Aang lept to the shore and tried his best to extinguish the flames, blasting them with airbending. Unfortunately that only made things worse. The fire roared and started to spread even faster. Aang tried to quench the flames with water from the river, but he wasn’t a skilled enough waterbender to move more than a bucket's worth of water. He remembered how his breathing had dimmed the flame of the leaf, and so he extended his arms and tried to calm the flame with his breathing. 

 

To Aang's astonishment that seemed to work. The fire shrank and then went out. He exhaled and said, “Thank goodness,” before he felt the presence of someone behind him. He turned around to see Jeong Jeong standing on the small island, arms outstretched before him, fingers splayed.

 

Aang waved and gave a nervous laugh, but Jeong Jeong only glared at him with fury in his eyes. Aang swallowed and approached the firebender. He knew he had made a mistake, an enormous mistake. If Jeong Jeong hadn’t put out the fire as soon as he did, there was no telling how much worse it could have been. The fire had raged for a few seconds at most, yet it had destroyed dozens of feet of forest, leaving the trees blackened and charred as had the attack on Hei Bai’s forest.

 

“I knew you weren’t ready. I foresaw only disaster should I train you now. You lack discipline, just as one of my students before. He did not care for what was burned, he only sought to destroy. And now you have done the same.” Jeong Jeong said, turning his back on Aang.

 

“Why did you agree to teach me if you thought something like this was going to happen?” Aang asked as Jeong Jeong walked away. The man stopped at his question, hands clasped behind his back. He was silent for a while and then he spoke. “Your predecessor appeared before me in your stead. He warned me that you must master the elements and defeat the Fire Lord before summer's end, and then you would face an even greater threat. But you are not yet ready to learn firebending, and so you must leave this place come morning.”

 

“What do you mean greater threat? What could be worse than fighting the Fire Lord? Please! You have to tell me!’ Aang pleaded with Jeong Jeong, but the deserter simply walked away, and Aang pleas fell on deaf ears.

---

 

Sokka looked at the top of a hill not too far away. A cloud of dust had covered the top of it and he could just barely make out Aang through the dust as he coughed and spluttered. A few weeks ago he might have laughed at the sight of an airbender coughing on a dust cloud he had made himself, but now he didn’t feel mirthful. Instead he just watched with a mild indifference. He turned away and approached a man with a sword at his hip.

 

“Nice sword.” He said before introducing himself. “I’m Sokka. My sister Katara and I are traveling with the Avatar to help him defeat the Fire Nation.”

 

“Thanks! I made it myself when I studied under Master Piandao. The name’s Shing.” The man said, extending a hand towards Sokka. They exchanged grips and Shing drew his sword and showed it to Sokka. Sokka admired the blade for a few moments. Sokka didn’t know much about swords, his tribe fought with machetes and spears mostly, but he thought that Shing’s blade must be a pretty good one.

 

“May I?” Sokka asked as he gestured towards the grip. Shing nodded and offered the sword to him. Taking it in hand, Sokka gave it a few practice swings. They were clumsy and graceless but Sokka found that the weapon felt good in his hands.

 

“It’s called Foe Biter.” Shing said, as Sokka made an awkward thrust at an invisible enemy. With the sword extended before him Sokka noticed the stylized imprint of a flower, vaguely reminiscent of a lotus tile.

 

“Good name.” Sokka said, offering the sword back to Shing, who took it and replaced it in its scabbard gracefully. Shing looked thoughtfully at Sokka for a moment before speaking again.

 

“I take it that was the first time you held a sword like this?”

 

Sokka nodded. Shing rubbed his chin, and then spoke again. “I can show you a thing or two. I’m not much of a sword master, but I think I can teach you some of the basics while the Avatar learns from the master.”

 

“Really? I’d like that.” Sokka said, thinking it would be good to grow his skill as a warrior, even if it was just the basics of swordplay, it might just save his life, or Katara’s. Once more the echo of Koh’s word rang in his mind. She will die.  

 

“Sure thing!” Shing said, waving for Sokka to follow him. They walked to the outskirts of the camp where a clearing of packed earth formed a ring. There were three training dummies at one end, and Sokka assumed that this was where the men trained. Shing pulled two wooden swords from a barrel and gave one to Sokka.

 

“Alright,” He said, “Look at how I’ve placed my feet.”

 

Sokka looked, and tried his best to imitate him. Shing nudged his lead foot with the tip of his sword, and Sokka adjusted accordingly. Shing nodded, before standing beside Sokka and raising his weapon.

 

“This is a high guard,” He said, “From here you can block from a mounted opponent or deliver a powerful strike.” he demonstrated, stepping forward quickly and slicing through the air. Sokka replicated the movement, but instead of the graceful swing of the older man, he stumbled clumsy and off balance.

 

“You’ve got to keep your other arm extended behind you for balance. Like this,” He said, showing Sokka how he kept his free hand out, two fingers extended. “Imagine the sword as an extension of your body, not as a tool.”

 

Sokka nodded, replicating Shings movements, and managing it better than he had before. They practiced a few different forms: High guard, low guard, parries, thruts, a wide swing that was meant to deter anyone from coming too near. A few moves that would hamper the attacks of earth and firebenders. Shing told Sokka to practice the movement and strike the training dummies, and he spent much of the rest of the morning doing just that.

 

Once Shing was satisfied with Sokka’s grasp of rudimental swordplay they faced off against each other. While Sokka’s speed and reflexes had been enhanced by his deal with the face stealer, he was still no match for Shing. He was defeated easily, never coming close to landing a blow.

 

“Pay attention to your footwork, it will save your life in battle. Don’t get distracted!” He said, striking Sokka on the top of his head when he looked toward his feet. “On the battlefield there are ten thousand things clamoring for your attention! You must take them all in without losing focus.”

 

At Shing’s words an idea began to take shape in Sokka’s mind. While he parried a blow from the older man, he reached for the void. This time he found it waiting for him. He entered the void and felt more of himself fall away than it had before, leaving a sharp and cold clarity in its wake.

 

When he faced Shing again, he noticed a slight tension in the man's neck before he struck. Shings sword stabbed towards Sokka’s chest and he managed to parry, before stepping to one side and swinging his sword towards his opponent. Shing leaned back and avoided the blow deftly, a look of pleasant surprise on his face. Sokka’s stabbed forward, aiming for Shing’s stomach and shing turned aside, but not with getting struck on the arm.

 

“That is much better!” Shing exclaimed, “Now let’s work on that footwork!”

 

They spent the rest of the day sparring and working on other factors of being a proficient swordsman. Sokka had managed to get a few more blows in, but Shing was by far the more skilled with a blade. Sokka made an astounding amount of progress in a single day, and Shing said as much. The two of them returned their training weapons to the barrel, and Sokka left the void. As soon as he did, the dozens of bumps and bruises he had received through the day roared to the forefront of his mind. He had felt them, the sting of getting them and the dull ache that had formed slowly afterwards, but while in the trance he hadn’t cared. Now that he had returned to himself all he could do was say, “Ow. That stuff hurt a lot.”

 

Shing laughed, and then spoke. “It’s good you were able to ignore it for so long. I’m impressed. If only you could have trained with my master, he could have taken you further than I ever will.”

 

“Oh yeah, you mentioned him. Master Piano right?” Sokka said, massaging his arm.

 

“Piandao, actually.” Shing said, pulling a rag from his pocket and whipping his face. “He’s the best sword master in Fire Nation history, probably in the whole world.”

 

“Well, if he’s Fire Nation, I probably won’t get the opportunity to train with him. I doubt he’d want to train somebody from the southern Water Tribe.” Sokka said, slightly disappointed.

 

“You might be surprised. My master once told me that the way of the sword doesn’t belong to one nation, but to all.”

 

“He sounds pretty wise.” Sokka said.

 

“Yeah, he is.” Shing said in return. With that they bowed to each other and Sokka returned to where he and the others slept. When he got there he sat on a tree stump, exhausted, he had learned much about combat that day. And he had managed to reach the void easily. He wondered if he could do so again now.

 

He reached for the void, and he found it. He thought that must come easier the more often he reached for it. As he let the vast emptiness fill his mind, he remembered the light from the lanterns when he faced Zuko. He had done… whatever it was that had happened. He wasn’t really sure what to call it. He hadn’t so much affected the light… it was more like he had pulled the shadows. He thought about the sensation, the tugging in his mind.

 

He picked up a stick from the ground next to him and drove it into the dirt. The piece of wood stood maybe three feet high. The sun was beginning to fall towards the horizon and the world was bathed in a soft orange glow. The stick that Sokka had placed cast a long and thin shadow across the ground, stretching away from him to one side.

 

Sokka, still engulfed by the void, focused on the shadow and tried to replicate the tugging sensation. He found in the back of his mind a sort of connection that hadn’t always been there, like a handle of some kind. He pulled on it and the shadow moved towards him, stretching out towards his feet. It passed across open ground, where it should not have been able to go, until it joined with his own. When the two shadows met they grew darker, harder to see into. Sokka heard someone approaching, and released the shadows and the void. When he returned to himself, he felt the tugging turn to pain. It wasn’t as intense as it had been after he had faced Zuko. He thought it was because head done less this time.

 

Sokka looked up to see Katara walking towards him. She held up a rolled scroll, bound with a piece of string. 

 

“I finished it! I finished the letter!” She said with a smile, and Sokka nodded. He took the letter and stowed it on his belt satchel, making sure that it was closed securely within.

 

Katara looked him up and down before frowning. “Why are you so beat up?”

 

“I was learning to sword fight with Shing, one of Jeong Jeong’s men. He’s quite a bit better than I am though,” Sokka said with a smile. “What have you been up to?”

 

“I was trying to write that letter,” Katara said, “It took a while to decide on what I wanted to say, but I got it eventually. After that I just refilled our supplies.”

 

“That’s good. I was worried we’d have to stop again. The food we got from those bandits was running out. We still have most of their money though,” Sokka said. He got up and started fishing through their bags. “I’m kind of hungry, so let’s eat now. I don’t know when Aang is going to get back so there’s not much point waiting for him.”

 

Sokka continued rummaging through the bags looking for some of the older supplies so that they wouldn’t go to waste, when he felt something sharp against his thumb. He stopped digging and brought out the object so that he wouldn’t cut himself. He examined it, and found it was a black bladed knife. He stared at it for a second before he realized that it was the one that the bandit had stuck his arm with. Had the blade always been that color?

 

His thoughts were interrupted when Aang sat down loudly next to Katara. Sokka turned his attention onto the Avatar, and was surprised to see an ashamed expression on his face. He exchanged a look with Katara.

 

“Uh, how was your first day of firebender training?” Katara asked apprehensively. Aang sagged and shook his head.

 

“Bad.” 

---

 

Zuko breathed out and unleashed a whip of fire at his training partner, a firebender named Tahno. Tahno ducked under the whip, and punched two gouts of flame at Zuko, who dissipated them each in turn by swinging his forearms vertically in front of him. The two stood facing each other, and Tahn stuck first. He leaped into the air and launched a spinning kick, unleashing a wave of fire at the prince. Zuko brought his hands together and divided the wave to either side of him, before pushing his fists back and using his bending to speed his approach towards Tahno. 

 

Tahno took a defensive stance and moved to shoot another fireball at Zuko, who hooked rolled to his back beneath the attack and swung his legs around, knocking Tahn off balance. Tahn stumbled and fell to his stomach, rolling to his back to find Zuko’s fist inches from his face. 

“That’s two out of three victories, Prince Zuko.” Iroh said, sipping his tea calmly. “You have improved greatly since the south pole.”

 

“Thank you, uncle.” Zuko said, before bowing to Tahno. The firebender returned his bow before departing. Zuko walked to the ship's gunnel, looking out over the sea. Waves rose and fell, cresting gently before collapsing into themselves. The light of the midday sun shone onto the ocean, illuminating the spray like hundreds of molten diamonds.

 

Zuko thought of his sister. Azula, a prodigious firebender, had always been more skilled than him. She had mastered the basics of the art when she was only seven years old, and their father had taken to her then like a moth to a flame. Zuko was the first born, he was the heir, but his father hardly cared. No, Oza only saw Azula. He had left Zuko by the wayside and trained Azula personally. When he had taken her under his direct tutelage in firebending, Azula began to treat Zuko harshly. No more did she follow him around the palace as she had in her earliest years. In their early childhood Azula had always been at Zuko’s heels. She would ask him what he was doing, she would try and join in his games, she would try and get him to read aloud his books and scrolls. Zuko had always brushed her off, pushing her away. Looking back, it wasn’t such a shock that his sister had developed such animosity towards him, especially after their mother disappeared and she was left with just their father to look up to. Their mother, Ursa, had been a soothing influence on their relationship.

 

Zuko reached up to touch the tip of his nose absently. He could almost feel his mother pinching it between her knuckles. She would do that to both him and Azula, pinching gently before saying that she loved them. It was a game they would play, the children would try to escape and their mother would catch them, pinching their noses and telling them of her love.

 

“But is it enough, I wonder.” His uncle spoke, bringing Zuko out of the past and into the present. He had been lost in thought. Now that the day’s training had concluded, the memories stirred up by Azula traveling with Zhao had bubbled to the fore of his mind. Why he was remembering his early childhood, the sweet girl who had acted as his shadow around the palace, rather than the antagonizing young woman she had become before his banishment, he couldn’t say.

 

“Azula has mastered firebending by now,” Zuko said, turning to his uncle. “I don’t have the shadow of doubt in my mind. If she decides to fight me she will bring forth fire and lightning, I’m certain of it.”

 

Iroh stroked the beard on his chin, looking thoughtful for a moment. He stood up and spoke, “If you are to face Azula, then you must master lightning as well.”

 

The older man began pacing in front of Zuko, stroking his beard all the while. “It is not for nothing that lightning is called the cold blooded fire. It is precise and deadly, much like Azula and my brother. When you generate lightning you must separate the positive and negative energy within you and bring them together at the precise moment, otherwise the energy will backfire and explode. Observe.”

 

Iroh stopped pacing and began to cycle his arms, in short precise motions with two fingers extended on each hand. As he moved, electricity began to coalesce around him, and the air snapped and popped around him. He extended his hands, one behind and the other before. Lightning shot into the sky with a roar of thunder.

 

Iroh waved his hands to clear away the smoke that trickled from them before turning to Zuko. “You must follow my motions, forcing the energy apart and bring them together at the exact moment of release.”

 

Zuko stood and copied his uncle, moving his arms in the same fashion iroh did. No electricity formed around him, and when he tried to release the energy an explosion blossomed before him, throwing him back across the deck.

 

Iroh frowned. He hadn’t expected his nephew to succeed, but this failure was a little… more than he anticipated. He wasn’t sure what the reason was, but he was beginning to suspect that he was conflicted. The avatar had saved him from near certain death, Zhao had betrayed him by treating him like a criminal. And now Ozai had sent Azula… 

 

Zuko got up and returned to his earlier position. He tried again, to the same effect. He tried again, and he kept trying. He continued on for hours, his uncle correcting his form. He tried and tried until Iroh stopped him.

 

“Your form is perfect, Prince Zuko. Further practice will do little to help you master lightning. Whatever it is that prevents you from mastering lightning is inside. You must master yourself, your emotions and inner conflict are keeping you from separating the energies properly.”

 

Zuko sagged. Inner conflict? He wasn’t sure what his uncle meant, he didn’t feel conflicted. Well, maybe a little. As he pondered his uncle’s words, he spotted something towards the eastern horizon, a faint pillar of smoke. He wondered what it was when his uncle drew his attention away from it.

 

“But in the meantime, I can teach you something that even Azula doesn’t know, because I made it up myself.” Iroh said with a grin, jabbing a thumb towards his belly.

 

---

 

“Let me sum it up,” Katara said, “You started a forest fire, Jeong Jeong has stopped teaching you, and now there's a bigger threat than the Fire Nation?”

 

She counted each point by raising a finger. Aang frowned, nodding.

 

“And Jeong Jeong wouldn’t tell me what it is, only that Roku appeared before him saying he must teach me and that I have an even greater threat ahead of me.” Aang said, looking as anxious as Katara had ever seen him.

 

Katara tapped a finger to her chin, thinking. Roku hadn’t told Aang about this second problem during the solstice, but they hadn’t had much time together. Maybe he had limited their conversation to the Fire Nation because it had to be dealt with first?

 

“It sounds like you need to talk with Roku again,” She said, “Maybe you should try crossing into the spirit world tonight. If we have to leave in the morning then this might be our last chance for a while. It’s safer to do it here than in the woods somewhere anyone might find us.”

“That’s probably a good idea,” Aang said. “I don’t want to wait until we get to the north pole or for the summer solstice.”

 

“And Sokka can go with you.” Katara said, looking over to her brother who didn’t react at all.

 

“Why would Sokka come into the spirit world with me?” Aang said, raising an eyebrow in confusion. Sokka was the one to answer his question.

 

“I want to look for our mom. Katara and I figured that if Kuruk and Laghima are there then she might be too.”

 

“Uh, I don’t know Sokka,” Aang said, scratching his head awkwardly. “Kuruk was the Avatar and Laghima was a guru, she might not be there.”

 

Katara’s face fell at that, but Sokka just shrugged. “It’s worth a shot. My instincts tell me she is.”

 

Aang nodded and beckoned Sokka to sit across from him. They sat in lotus style and waited, Aang focusing on his breathing, feeling the life energy around him. Sokka, for his part, opened his third eye, and then reached for the void. He found it, but his hold on it was tenuous. He let go and looked at Aang. With his third sight opened, he could see the energy flowing through the Avatar. Watching the energy calmed Sokka , and he reached again for the void. He grasped it and pulled himself into the vast emptiness, as wide and barren as the clear sky. 

 

They sat like that for a time, and then Aang tattoos began to glow. Sokka saw his friend leave his body and shoot upwards into the sky. He closed his eyes and moments later he felt as though he was falling downwards into nothingness, and endless dark abyss.

---

 

Zhao read the scroll again. The avatar had been seen in the Ilah colony, only a few dozen miles upriver. Only a few hours from where he was now. He would have to inform the princess of course, or he would be cast into suspicion and his accusation against Zuko may be discredited. He had to play this carefully, otherwise his and his allies' plans would fall to nothing.

 

He thought for a moment before deciding on a course of action. He turned to one of his guards. “Take this to the Princess, and ready the riverboats. We’re going hunting.”

Chapter 8: Hunting

 

Katara stared in shock. Her brother had evidently crossed into the spirit world with Aang, but where the later bore glowing tattoos, the former was shrouded in darkness, and shadow covered half his face.

 

It shouldn’t be possible, Katara thought. The shadow fell upon what should have been illuminated, what had been illuminated moments before, by the light of the setting sun. She looked at him, and realized that more shadows were stretching towards him, like the twisted and gnarled limbs of bitter trees, crossing ground where there should be only light.

 

Katara shivered and rushed to him, whatever spirit he had bonded with could not be a kind one, of that she was certain. She reached out to shake him from his trance,  but pulled her hand away when it touched him. He was cold, colder than the howling wind in the depths of winter, colder than the spray of the sea upon the shores of their home. 

 

 Katara was stunned. The mystery of why he had been so cold was solved. He wasn’t sick, no, this was because of his bond with Koh. it had made his body as cold as the grave, and now it was colder still.

 

Maybe it wasn’t so bad though, she mused, maybe it just meant that he wouldn’t be in danger of freezing anymore? She wanted to believe that, but she couldn’t quite convince herself of it. Sokka had grown quiet of late, his jokes and comment’s had become fewer and further between, almost stopping altogether. The boy she had known and loved all her life, her brother, was changing and she wasn’t sure it was for the better. Was it because of Koh though?

 

They were at war after all, and they had been through a lot since leaving the south pole. Her father had said that war changes a man, and they had fought a few battles. Zuko had attacked their village, they had fought him again on Kyoshi Island, they had been taken prisoner by King Bumi. The old man hadn’t ever meant to harm them, but they didn't know that at the time. Sokka had been helpless for most of those fights, and again when he was abducted by Hei Bai.

 

Maybe that was what was changing him, she considered, looking at him with concern. Their father hadn’t had time to complete his training before setting out for the Earth Kingdom. He might be worried that his skills as a warrior were insufficient to the task, and that could be what was making him more somber?

 

Katara sighed and sat down against the trunk of a tree. The sun finally dipped beneath the western horizon. The only light to be seen was that of the stars and the glow of Aang’s tattoos. Now that night had fallen, she couldn’t see the shadows reaching towards Sokka. Not the shadows on the ground or the one that fell across the right side of his face.

 

She looked at Aang, the only thing she could really make out in the darkness. He looked calm, serene. Unlike when he was awake, or at least not in the spirit world, he was perfectly still. Aang was always moving, laughing and joking with her and filling her day with fun. Now that he was in the spirit world, she realized that she missed him. It was silly, she thought, he was only a dozen feet away. But still… His absence and journey into the spirit was a surprising weight on her shoulders.

 

Soft wind rushed through the night, chilling and making her shiver. She got up and began to build a fire a short distance from the two boys. Cold might not bother them, but it certainly did for her. She built up a small fire and then dug through their bags to find some food. When Aang had joined them, she and Sokka had put eating by the wayside.

 

The fire cracked and popped happily as she ate her meal. She realized that there was a bit of bustle in the camp around them, men and women collapsing huts and tents. She looked on in confusion as the camp disintegrated.

 

She was about to get up and ask what was going on when a tall man with a light mustache and a sword walked into the firelight.

 

“Uh, hey.” He said, “I’m Shing. Is Sokka around?”

 

Katara blinked at the man, he said he was Shing. “Oh are you the guy that was teaching Sokka to sword fight? He’s over there by Aang.” She said, jerking her head towards the glowing boy outside the circle of firelight.

 

“You won’t be able to talk to him, or Aang. They’ve crossed into the spirit world and I don't know how long until they come back.”

 

Shing looked surprised. “Sokka can go into the spirit world?”

 

“Yeah, he has this weird spirit power thing. He-” She stopped talking. She didn’t know if she should tell anyone about the deal he made with Koh, but she doubted her brother would like for her to do so before they had discussed it.

 

“Well, he can’t talk right now at least.” She said lamely.

 

Shing’s face fell at that. “That’s too bad,” He said, before turning to go.

 

“Wait! What’s going on? Are you guys leaving?” Katara asked, stopping him as he turned.

 

“Yeah, the master thinks that the smoke from the fire the Avatar started might have given away our position. He ordered us to pack up and move on before midnight.”

 

“Oh,” Katara said, “That’s too bad. I’m sure Sokka wanted to say goodbye before we leave tomorrow.

 

Shing sighed and sat on a stump opposite Katara. “So did I. I wanted to tell him that I sent a message to my old sword master, Piandao. I hope that the two of them will meet one day. Sokka has great potential with the art of the sword.”

 

“You’re from the Fire Nation, aren’t you? Would a Fire Nation man want to train someone from the Southern Water Tribe?” Katara asked skeptically.

 

“Yes, I think he would. Master Piandao believes that the way of the sword belongs to all nations.”

 

“I hope that we do meet him then,” Katara said with a smile.

 

“I certainly hope so,” Shing said, “And maybe sooner than you think. He has friends in the Northern Water Tribe, so maybe you can get into contact with him through them.”

 

Katara blinked in surprise. “A Fire Nation swordsman has friends in the north?”

 

Shing chuckled at her reaction. “Oh yeah, he’s got friends all over the world, just like Jeong Jeong does.”

 

“Jeong Jeong has friends?!” Katara exclaimed.

 

Shing was silent for a heartbeat, and then threw back his head and laughed.

 

“Well, I know he seems a bit abrasive to you kids, but that's just the way he is with his students. He’s not like that all the time.”

 

Katara nodded slowly. It made sense, she realized. If he was teaching young firebenders, he had to establish a proper dynamic: I am your master, not your friend.

 

Shing stood, and stretched. “It’s time to get going. I hope we meet again. Do tell Sokka what I said, won’t you?”

 

“Of course I will. It’s been nice meeting you, have a safe journey.” Katara told the swordsman as he turned away, waving a hand over his shoulder as disappeared into the night.

 

As the camp dismantled itself around them Katara wondered what her two companions were doing in the spirit world. Had they entered in the same place? Were locations in the spirit world tied to the mortal world? She didn’t know.

 

Katara began to roll out her sleeping bag, but stopped when she realized that the three of them were alone now. Aang and Sokka were both in the spirit world, and until they returned to their bodies they would be helpless. Now that the camp had emptied and all of Jeong Jeong’s group had left, Katara thought that telling the pair of them to go into the spirit world was a foolish idea.

 

Katara bit her lip, looking around the now empty campsite. She felt that maybe Jeong Jeong  had a point, the smoke could have been seen by anyone. Staying here wasn’t the best idea, and they should leave as soon as Aang and Sokka got back. She started carrying their possession up and securing them in the saddle. Making sure that nothing was missing before she went back down to the fire.

 

She sat and kept watch, and the moon made its ponderous voyage across the sky; a white ship in a sea of stars. She looked up at it, barely a sliver remained, washing the earth in a faint silver glow. She could imagine what it must be like up there, all alone. The moon must be lonely, passing over cities and towns while the world sleeps.

 

Looking down on the sleeping flocks of animals, tired shepherds dutifully watching over their charges. Did she see them? Could she notice when the small eyes of children gazed up at her in wonder?

 

The loud snap of a branch jolted Katara out of her musings. Had she fallen asleep?

 

“Hello? Jeong Jeong? Shing? Is that you?

 

---

“Zuzu! Let me play with you!” Azula said to her older brother as he bounced a small red ball from foot to foot. He had been ignoring her all day, and she was getting mad at him. Why wouldn’t he play with her?

 

“Go away! I’m busy!” He said, annoyed at his little sister.

 

“But I’m booooorrreeeedddd!” She whined. This really wasn’t fair, he had been playing with the ball for hours and all he let Azula do was watch. She wanted to try; maybe if she showed him she was good at kicking too he would let her play with him.

 

“I don’t have anyone else to play with! Mai and Ty Lee had to stay home!” This wasn’t true. Azula hadn’t even asked her mother if her friends could come over. She really just wanted to spend time with Zuko.

 

“I don’t care, I’ve got to practice so go away!” He said, in a rather mean tone that hurt Azula’s feelings a little bit. She was only six, after all. She crossed her arms and huffed, her cheeks puffing out a little bit. Why was he always so mean to her? Lu Ten always played games with both of them, he was never mean. But Lu Ten and Uncle had left for Ba Sing Se weeks ago, and he wasn’t here to make Zuko play nice.

 

“Why do you have to practice?” She said, curious despite her hurt feelings.

 

“Because last time Lu Ten could bounce it more times than me.” Zuko said, and the ball dropped onto the ground and rolled over to Azula who picked it up.

 

“Give that back!” Zuko yelled, reaching to snatch it from her. She didn’t let him take it though, it was her turn! The ball had basically said so, it rolled right to her!

 

“No! I want a turn!” She yelled back, before running off through the palace. Zuko chased after her, shouting at her to give it back. She kept running though, and finally Zuko was playing with her! Well, sort of. Getting chased was close enough, she thought.

 

She ducked under a servant carrying a basket and rolled between the legs of a guard, both of whom cried out in surprise. Zuko just ran around them, and Azula gained ground because of it. She raced down the steps of the palace to the stable where the animals were kept, she was going to hide in the stable and make Zuko look for her! They were going to play hide and seek. Hide and explode was more fun but their mother wouldn’t let them play that in the palace.

 

She rounded a corner, she was almost there! There was a carriage rolling out of the stable, being pulled by a komodo-rhino. She slowed down for a second, she didn’t want to run into the animals. When she stopped, Zuko ran into her and they fell to the ground. The ball flew out of her hands, and bounced towards the carriage. A rhino saw the toy, whipped down its head, and popped it with a single bite. 

 

Azula’s heart sank. The ball was gone, and now Zuko wouldn’t play with her! This was not fair, why did the rhino have to ruin their fun? Tears began to form in her eyes, she had wanted her brother to play with her so badly and now..

 

“You popped it! You dummy! I hate you!” Zuko was shouting. Yeah, tell that stupid rhino off Zuzu! Azula thought as she sat up, wiping her eyes. Hearing Zuko yell at the animal made her feel better.

 

“You’re the worst, Azula!” Zuko yelled, before turning to go back inside the palace.

 

Azula sat in shock. Her brother wasn’t talking to the komodo-rhino, he was talking… to her? He had said he hated her. Her big brother, her favorite person in the world, hated her. Azula’s lips quivered, and her face burned. She fought back tears, she tried so hard not to cry and she managed not to… for three seconds.

 

Her tears burst forth and she ran to her room as fast as she could, trying hard not to let anyone see.

 

---

Azula woke up in the quarters given her aboard Zhao’s ship. There was a lump in her throat. She coughed to clear it away. Why had she been dreaming about that? It had been eight years ago, and she had decided to forget about it. She hadn’t thought of it since before her brother's banishment. Why now, of all times, did she have to remember the day with the ball?

 

Azula decided to ignore it. Dredging up the past was pointless, and it wouldn’t help her with the task given by her father. She sat up, and stretched. She got out of bed and donned her armor. She called in the servants to tend to her hair, and after they had finished she left her quarters and walked to the galley.

 

She didn’t have to eat there, in fact usually her meals would be brought to her, but Ty Lee was curious about what it would be like to eat where the soldiers did. Mai was completely opposed to the idea, and Azula had nearly refused to as well. She hadn’t though, not through some desire to slum it with the common soldiery, but because she found she had been curious too.

 

She walked through the door into the galley and found it nearly empty, save for Mai and Ty Lee.

 

“Good morning Azula!” The bubbly girl said. Mai just rolled her eyes, sighing melodramatically.

 

“Good morning Mai.” Azula said, to which Ty Lee huffed and pouted. It was entertaining to annoy her friend like that, for Azula at least. Ty Lee wasn’t very fond of it, but that was to be expected. She was the one being annoyed.

 

“So this is the galley.” Azula said, looking around the room and taking in the details. A dozen or so tables were bolted to the floor in neat rows. The walls were bare, save for the flag of the Fire Nation on the starboard wall. The galley itself was empty, no soldiers to be found.

 

“Where are the soldiers?” Azula asked, quizzically.

 

“The Admiral ordered the galley empty while we ate.  Seemed to think that common soldiery had no business dining with the noble class.” Mai said, waving her hand vaguely towards the prow of the ship.

 

“But that was the whole point!” Ty Lee exclaimed. “I wanted to see what they are like while they eat. They’re always so serious. ‘Yes Ma’am! No Ma’am! As you wish!’ I thought I'd get to see how they acted normally.” She did a mock salute while impersonating the soldier, scrunching her eyebrows and lowering her voice.

 

Azula snorted. “I very much doubt that they would act any differently just because they were eating, if anything they would be more uncomfortable.”

 

A trio of servants walked out of the kitchen, carrying covered trays of food. They placed one before Mai and Ty Lee each, but hesitated to place Azula’s meal as she had not chosen a seat yet. They looked at the princess nervously, and she motioned for them to place it next to Ty Lee’s.

 

The servant carrying the tray exhaled in relief as he placed the tray and removed the cover. Azula took her seat and inspected the meal. Some pastries, poached eggs, and rice. Quite lower than her usual standard, but Ty Lee wanted to eat what the soldiers ate and Azula had acquiesced.

 

“Do they really eat this every day?” Ty Lee asked, looking disappointed. She picked up an egg with her chopsticks and popped it in her mouth, chewed it thoughtfully, and swallowed.

 

Azula rather doubted that they gave the soldiers pastries at all, but her friend didn’t need to know that. The eggs were probably just boiled and left in the shell, if given at all.

 

“Yes, I think so.” Azula said, eating her breakfast. It was rather bland, but it was fine enough.

 

“I think I could go without doing this again,” Mai said, nibbling on a pastry.

 

“I certainly won’t be making a habit of it. Perhaps Ty Lee should eat all her meals in the galley, since she’s so interested in it.” Azula said.

 

“Uh, you know, maybe once is enough.” Ty Lee responded, her cheeks slightly pink.

 

The door to the galley opened and a man walked in, bearing a scroll and bringing it to Azula. She took it and read its contents, before passing it to Mai, ignoring Ty Lee’s proffered hand.

 

“Admiral Zhao has set course for the Ilah colony, and we should be arriving within the hour. He wishes to know if you will join him in hunting the Avatar.” The soldier said, bowing with his palm over his fist.

 

“Of course we will.”

 

---

 

Azual stood before the two scouts who had seen the Avatar’s bison. She watched them carefully as Zhao interviewed them. Looking at their eyes as they spoke. She had seen confidence in them at first, and pride. That confidence had shone like a glistening steel sword, razor sharp and clean as the light of the midday sun. As the interview had gone on, it  faded. It rusted away, flaking off piece by piece until blown away like dust in an autumn wind. What was left in its wake was doubt. A sickly, sad thing. Like the light of the moon seen through murky water.

 

Azula doubted they were lying however, she could see that they believed that they told the truth. Now, after speaking to the Admiral and Princess, they were afraid that they might have been wrong.

 

“Admiral,” She said, “You can interrogate these men all you like, but the only way to discover if they saw what they say they did is to go and search for it ourselves.”

 

Zhao turned, meeting her eyes for a second. It wasn’t long enough for her to get a read on him, but she thought she saw agreement in his eyes.

 

“Of course, Princess. I was beginning to suspect as much myself.” He turned back to the scouts. “You are dismissed.”

 

The relief in the to mens posture was obvious, though they tried to hide it. Well, obvious to Azula at least.

 

“The reports say that there is a small encampment a few dozen miles upriver.” Admiral Zhao said, “Jeong Jeong the deserter is suspected to be in the area, and it stands to reason that he may be involved with the encampment. My strategy is to travel the majority of the distance, and then wait until nightfall to traverse the last few miles. We’ll disembark a half mile distant and travel to the camp on foot, encircling the camp and forcing them against the river.”

 

Azula nodded before responding. “Cutting off their retreat, forcing them to surrender or fight.”

 

“Surrender or die, I should hope.” Zhao said with a chuckle. “The Avatar and his companions will be captured alive, of course. We’ll have to do something about that bison of his though. Can’t have him flying out of our net.”

 

Azula thought for a moment, before settling on a decision. She shared it with Admiral Zhao.

 

“We don’t have the necessary firepower to kill the animal, it’s too big. We’ll have to frighten it away. If the forest wasn't as dense we could bring catapults or tanks, but as it is that is not an option. Even a mounted force would slow us down too much.” 

 

Zhao looked at her appreciatively. “A good strategy. You are wise beyond your years, Princess. Sozin’s brilliance shines within you.”

 

Azula smirked, “Thank you, Admiral.” 

 

“Do you have an idea as to how to frighten off the creature?” Zhao asked, watching her curiously.

 

“Leave that to me.” She said, a plan formulating in her mind.

 

Half an hour later, Azula was climbing the steps of an observation tower in the center of the city. Mai and Ty Lee had gone up to search for any signs of the sky bison while she had been interviewing the scouts with Zhao.

 

For his part, the Admiral was busy overseeing the preparation of the river boats and choosing which soldiers to bring with him. They had decided on a smaller, elite team of firebenders. The riverboats had a limited occupancy, and that meant they had to choose carefully. Jeong Jeong was an elite firebending master, so they had opted against spear and swordsmen.

 

Azula came to the top of the observation tower, to find Ty Lee looking towards the northeastern horizon through a spyglass. Azula could make out a faint dark line rising from the trees in the direction her friend was looking.

 

“Smoke,” Mai said, nodding towards the faint line. “It was stronger a few minutes ago. We think it might’ve been a forest fire, but it was put out already.”

 

Ty Lee turned to see who Mai was talking to, and then cartwheeled over to Azula.

 

“Here, take a look.” She said, giving Azula the spyglass with a smile. Azula took it and trained it on the smoke. It had already turned from the black of a raging fire to the light gray of one put out. As she watched the smoke began to fade, growing thinner.

 

“I wonder…” She said, sharing her thoughts aloud with her friends. “Jeong Jeong is suspected to be in the area. He deserted the army and turned against the Fire Nation. A firebending master…”

 

“The Avatar is supposed to be in that direction.” Mai said, picking up on Azula's line of reasoning.

 

Ty Lee’s eyes widened, as she realized where the two were going. “He’s training the Avatar!”

 

“Possibly, we can’t know for certain.” Azula replied. “But if he is, we need to capture them both, now. If the Avatar masters firebending, he’ll be a greater threat than he is now. Once he does, he’ll be able to defend against our attacks easily, and then we might never capture him.”

 

This wasn’t good, if the airbender mastered firebending now, then the Fire Nation would be hard pressed to stop him. Water and earth would make him formidable enough, but if he mastered firebending then all but their most powerful would be unable to stand against him. Zhao had told Azula of how the boy had brought down the temple, or at least he had while channeling Roku’s spirit.

 

Azula and her friends hastened down the tower, and strode quickly to the river boats. By the time they arrived, the boats were loaded up and the men were ready to cast off. Azula and her companions boarded Zhao’s vessel and Azula briefed him on their suspicions about Jeong Jeong and the Avatar.

 

“It makes sense.” Zhao said, “If the Avatar has encountered Jeong Jeong, he may well try and learn firebending from him. But a single day of tutelage is not enough for any to stand against us, no matter how talented the student.”

 

Azula nodded. “I agree, Admiral. I doubt an alteration to our plan is necessary.”

 

“No, it likely isn’t.” The Admiral said in reply.

 

---

Ty Lee walked along the edges of the cabin's roof, alternating between walking on her hands and feet at each corner. Azula watched as she did so, mildly impressed with the acrobatics. She would never say so of course, her father wouldn’t approve of complimenting such a frivolous action.

 

Her father. Fire Lord Ozai. The man had taught Azula firebending, strategy, all sorts of things really. He cared for her, unlike Iroh. Her uncle had taken Zuko under his wing as her father had taken her under his.

 

Iroh had never been as fond of her as he had Zuko, never bothered to get to know her. When he broke through the walls of Ba Sing Se, he had sent Zuko the dagger of the surrendering general. What did Azula get? A doll.

 

Azula exhaled through her nose sharply. It was a silly thing to let bother her, so many years later. She looked away from Ty Lee, and saw Mai looking at her with a raised eyebrow. Azula waved her hand in the air dismissively.

 

The sun had dipped below the tree line, and the world was bathed in the soft blue haze of twilight. They would be setting off again soon, and should all go according to plan they would reach the camp just after midnight.

 

“So the Avatar’s traveling with the prince of the southern Water Tribe.” Ty Lee said, coming to sit beside where Azula leaned against the boat's railing.

 

“That’s what the report’s say. Zhao verified the claims himself, so I would assume it to be true.” Azula said, without looking in Ty Lee's direction.

 

“Do you think he’ll be cute? He’s supposed to be a prince…”

 

Azula looked at her friend. “We’re going to capture the Avatar. We are not out here to catch you a boyfriend, no matter how desperate you may be.” She said harshly. Ty Lee pouted, and Mai snorted at the two of them.

 

“I know that, Azula. I was just saying. Besides, the only prince I've ever met is Zuko, and well…” She trailed off, her eyes darting towards Mai. Mai crossed her arms and rolled her eyes.

 

Azula decided to ignore them and focus on the task at hand. She had been sent to discover the truth of Zuko’s alleged treachery, but she couldn’t let this opportunity pass her by untaken. She was going to capture the Avatar, and bring him back to her father. Zuko had had his chance, and now she would finish what he could not.

 

Azula leaned against the gunnel in silence while the dim light of evening faded to the pressing darkness of night. When the moon was the only source of light in the sky, the small fleet of river boats resumed their journey. The minutes passed slowly, turning to hours as they progressed down the river.

 

The moon hung high above them as they reached the point of their disembarkment. The riverboats pushed for the eastern shore, and two men remained behind on each vessel. They would wait for the signal before steering the fleet the rest of the way.

 

The remainder of the personnel began their trek through the woods. They walked through the thick and tangled brambles slowly, cautious against noise that might alert their prey. As they progressed, Ty Lee opened her mouth to speak but Azula quieted her with a glare. There was no room for error.

 

As they marched silently through the woods they began to fight their way uphill through the trees. The climb was slow and arduous, but when they reached the top Azula found that she could see a glimpse of firelight through the trees, along with a soft blue glow. 

 

Illuminated by the light of the fire was the beast the Avatar rode around on, and the figure of a girl dressed in blue. Azula used a series of hand signals to motion Zhao’s force to spread out around the perimeter of the camp. She waited the time that they had allotted for the men to get into position, no more than a few minutes, and pressed forward. 

 

As she readied herself into position, she stepped into motion and a single branch snapped beneath her foot.

 

---

Katara looked into the forest, squinting in vain to see through the darkness. She couldn’t see very far through the trees, but she thought she could make out the faint traces of movement in the dark. Was it some of Jeong Jeong's group? An owl-mink? Maybe she was imagining it. She looked over to Appa, at the other side of the fire. The bison had gotten to his feet, and was glaring uneasily towards where Katara had heard a noise moments before. So she hadn’t imagined it, then. Someone or something was out there.

 

Katara heard a faint buzzing, a low hum just at the edge of hearing. She whipped around and her eyes opened wide in surprise. Where seconds before there had been only darkness, there was a figure outlined by the cold blue light of electricity swirling around them. Katara unstoppered the pouch at her waist in which she had taken to keeping water, and then the figure shifted swiftly, and the electricity burst forth from their outstretched hand and into one of Appa’s horns.

 

The bison roared, eyes wide and whirling around in terror. He reared onto his hind legs and twin jets of blue flame shot towards him. Appa fell back to a stand and took off flying away into the night. 

 

Katara’s blood ran cold as the bison disappeared. Appa had always been a solid and dependable ally, and he had saved them many times over. To see him shocked, burned, and flee was more terrifying than anything Katara had ever imagined. And now She, Aang and Sokka were left alone with whoever had attacked Appa.

 

Azula smiled as she watched the bison flee. She had struck him with her lightning, and frightened him with her firebending. She hadn’t managed to hurt the beast, she was sure of that, but for the time being he was gone. Azula walked out from the cover of the forest flanked by Mai and Ty Lee, and the three of them approached the Water Tribe girl.

 

“Who are you?!” Katara asked, bending the water from her pouch as she spoke. She didn’t know much about waterbending, but the three girls before her didn’t know that.

 

“Oh? Can’t you see the family resemblance?” Azula said with a smirk. She covered her left eye with her hand before speaking again, in a lower, gruffer voice. “I must capture the Avatar to restore my honor!”

 

Katara just stared at her, a confused expression on her face. Azula rolled her eyes and Ty Lee giggled. “It’s okay, you can laugh. It’s funny.”

 

“That is funny Azula!” Ty Lee said, still giggling. 

 

Well, Azula didn’t really think it was funny but her father and Minister Qin certainly did. And Ty Lee as well apparently, though if she was laughing for the impersonation or for the fact that Azula would even try was anybody’s guess.

 

“Mai, Ty Lee, tie up the Avatar. The First Son is here too, though where he is remains to be seen. I’ll handle this one.”

 

At Azula’s words, Katara sprang into action. She sent the water at Azula, who just leaned to one side as the stream of water shot past her head. 

 

Katara brought the water around again, this time aiming for the giggly girl. She thought she would hit her, but the girl simply ducked under the water. 

 

As Katara pulled the water back to herself, she had to release her control over it to dodge an ark of blue flame, narrowly avoiding getting burned. She managed to pull most of the water from the ground, only to have to jump back as the firebender approached her lazily. 

 

“So this is what passes for royalty in the Water Tribe? Disappointing. To think that my brother has been unable to capture the Avatar, while his only companions are you and your brother. Where is he? Has he run off to save himself?”

 

“Azula!” Mai called out.

 

“What is it Mai?” Azula said, her eyes never leaving Katara. Katara, for her part, managed to figure out who was who. How that might help she couldn’t say, but it was something.

 

“The First Son is here too. I don’t think he’s conscious, he’s freezing. If it weren’t for the heartbeat I’d have thought him dead.”

 

That was curious, Azula thought, was he sick? Maybe all the Water Tribe people were like that? It made a little sense; if they made their homes in the frozen tundra of the poles then maybe they were just cold naturally?

 

She discarded the thought, thinking it wasn't important right now. 

 

“Oh hey, he is cute!” Ty Lee said, followed by the sound of Mai flicking her ear. Mai spoke, “Now’s not the time.”

 

Katara blinked. This was by far the weirdest fight she had ever been in, and the most one sided. She had to think of something. If only she could get rid of the firebender, this Azula person. She would have a chance to save her brother and Aang. She thought that she could waylay the other two, at least until Appa came back. But she wasn’t strong enough to defeat her opponent with the water in her pouch. She needed more, if only there was some way for her to… The river! That was it! If she could lure the firebender to the water she could wash her away and come back in time to save the others.

 

With her plan formed, as simple as it might be, Katara rushed into action. She whipped her hands out and she waterbent the muddy water in a wide sheet directly at Azula, who shot a fireblast into it. The fire evaporated most of the water, and what was left splashed all across the Princesses armor.

 

Azula was furious now. This pathetic excuse for a waterbender had covered her in mud and was now… running away? Azula was not about to let that happen, not if she could help it. She chased after the girl, attacking with carefully aimed blasts of fire. It would be far simpler if she wasn’t just trying to capture her unharmed, or if she could see. A cloud had wafted in front of the moon and Azula could barely make out the shape of her enemy. She chased her down the hill, careful not to lose sight of her. The terrain began to level out and she gained ground on the waterbender, who came to a stop and turned around. She had a triumphant smile on her face.

 

“Giving up so soon?” Azula asked, not letting her voice reveal the weariness she felt. Why had she stopped? What was she so happy about? Azula found the answer herself when she heard the lapping of waves against the shore. The river.

 

The water bender snarled at Azula, and the image of a wolf flooded her mind at the sight. The anger in those eyes, the fierce determination to win, to overcome and defeat Azula, all served to give this waterbender the terrible lupine aura of the animal her people had chosen as their symbol. While the Fire Nation was a land of the sun and dragons, the Water Tribes were a people of the wolf and moon.

 

“Oh no, I’m just getting started!” Katara said, as the moon reappeared in the sky. Katara focused with all her might and bent an enormous wave, holding it behind her as it grew. Azula’s eyes grew wide as Katara moved to push the wave toward her, to wash her towards the river. 

 

Just as Katara brought her hand in front of her, a jet of orange fire shot toward her, burning her hands. She cried out in pain and lost control of the wave, and it crashed over her, carrying her out and into the river. Katara struggled against it, but as she lost to the current, she saw a stone rush up to meet her and fell into darkness.

 

The water rushed toward Azula, knocking her off of her feet and threatening to pull her away from the shore. She could swim, but she didn’t want to face any waterbender, even one as untrained as this, in a body of water. She struggled against the force of the water as it crashed around her, and she was losing. She could feel herself being pulled away when a strong hand gripped her own.

 

She at last found her footing, coughing as she breathed in the fresh air. She looked up to see Admiral Zhao. One of his hands gripped her tightly and the other was held by one of his soldiers. They had formed a sort of chain in order to keep her from being swept away.

 

“Are you alright, Princess?” He asked, looking at her with concern.

 

“I’m fine.” She said, relinquishing his grip. Even moments after she had stood, the water had receded back to its natural level. The waterbender was nowhere to be seen, swept away by the wave she herself had conjured. If Zhao hadn’t come to save her, then Azula would have been swept away instead. Azula was surprised; she hadn’t expected for the waterbender to be so powerful. Clever enough to lure the firebender to the river, strong enough to bend the water into a wave dozens of feet high even untrained. Perhaps she had been too quick to dismiss Zuko’s efforts.

 

“Send the signal for the boats. Search the shoreline for the girl.” Zhao said, addressing his men. Immediately upon receiving their orders, the soldiers split into teams of three and began their tasks. One group shot a series of predetermined signals into the air through firebending while the others combed the shoreline.

 

“If jeong jeong was here, he’s long gone by now. We found the remnants of a camp, and tracks leading southeast, but they’re hours old by now.” Admiral Zhao said after his subordinates had begun their duties.

 

Azula nodded. It was a shame to have let slip whoever had been here, but they had the Avatar and the First Son. “We have the Avatar. The others are of little consequence in comparison.”

 

Zhao nodded, and the two stood in silence for a time.

 

A quarter of an hour passed when the river boats made landfall. There had been no sign of the water bender, and Mai and Ty Lee had tied the Avatar and First Son. They oversaw the crew tasked with taking the prisoners aboard the vessels, making sure to stow the two on separate ships.

 

“It doesn’t sit well that the waterbender got away, especially as powerful as she is. With any luck she’ll have drowned.” Admiral Zhao said, turning to face Azula.

 

“Of course.” Azula said, placating the admiral. She didn’t agree. She wanted the girl captured, brought to her father to negotiate the surrender of the Southern Water Tribe, she didn’t want her dead. She would kill, if necessary, but she didn’t want to. She knew they were at war; people killed, people died. That didn’t mean she wanted to kill anyone. She wouldn’t admit that of course, a reputation was as deadly as any weapon. She wasn’t about to tarnish hers.

 

She and the Admiral walked to the lead boat and boarded in silence. The Admiral had risked his own wellbeing, possibly his life, to save Azula from being washed away. Up until that point, she had held him in a measure of distrust. She didn’t believe him to be a traitor, not really, but she had held him in suspicion. There had been something.. Off about him. In the way he spoke and carried himself around her. Now that he had saved her from the waterbender she was more inclined to believe that it was in reverence of her station, rather than anything more nefarious.

 

She stood in silence on the dock of the small vessel. The Avatar had been placed in the middle of the procession, to be guarded most securely. The First Son however wasn’t treated half as cautiously. He was tied up on the very boat she had taken passage on herself, and Ty Lee kneeled in front of him, prodding him with a finger.

 

Azula rolled her eyes at her friend's antics. “What are you doing?”

 

Ty Lee glanced at her before standing up. “I was trying to wake him. It’s weird that he’s been unconscious for so long. I mean, sure, the Avatar glows and is unconscious too, but he’s the Avatar. It’s probably normal for him.”

 

“But this guy’s just passed out. It doesn't look like he was hit in the head, and he was sitting like he was meditating when we found him. He doesn’t even have an aura, like he’s not even in there. As if he left his body and went someplace else.” Ty Lee said, and grabbed a lantern from the side of the ship's operating cabin.

 

“Like I said, he’s cute and all, but this is weird.” As she spoke, she brought the lantern directly in front of the unresponsive prisoner. The light should have illuminated him fully, but despite its proximity to the lantern half of his face was covered in shadow.

 

---

Katara groaned. Her head throbbed horribly, and her hands burned. She opened her eyes slowly, confused by the soft light from the morning sun. What had happened? Why was she in the river?

 

She was on a small island in the center of the river. It was the same one that Aang had sat on while practicing with the leaf the day before. Katara looked at her hands and saw that they were burned, not too badly, but they pained her nonetheless. She moaned softly and placed them in the water, hoping that the coolness of the river would soothe them. When they were submerged, the water around them began to glow. A light tickling sensation covered her wounds and when she drew her hands out of the water they were healed.

 

As she stared at her hands, a shadow passed over her. It was too quick to be a cloud, so she glanced in the direction it had gone. She saw the shape off Appa landing across the water and on the far shore. She looked and saw one of his horns was blackend.

 

At the sight of Appa’s damaged horn, the memories of the previous night came flooding back to her.

 

“Oh no. No no no no.” She said, Aang and Sokka had been captured by The Fire Nation.

Chapter 9: Answers, Mysteries, and Regrets

Aang opened his eyes. He had only moments before been at the top of the hill beside Jeong Jeong’s camp. Now, however, he was in a bright sunlit meadow. Gigantic flowers with glowing petals of shifting hue dotted the landscape. Small translucent creatures floated in the air across the field.

 

“I made it!” The young boy said, jumping into the air with a triumphant smile. He was in the spirit world, and this time he hadn’t needed the solstice to get there, or an angry spirit attack. “Sokka! We’re in the spirit world!”

 

He turned to look at his friend, only to find that he wasn’t beside him. He wasn’t anywhere nearby in fact. Aang was disappointed, he had hoped that Sokka would join him on his journey, but it didn’t look like he had. Aang bowed his head for a moment, and then stood up straight again.

 

Just because Sokka wasn't there with him didn’t mean he wasn’t going to search for Roku. He had come here for a reason, and the absence of his friend didn’t make it less important. Aang scanned the meadow, hoping to see something that would give away the direction of his quarry.

He only saw the small spirits floating around, some as small as hummingbird-mice, others as large as Momo.

 

“Uh, do you know where Avatar Roku is?” He asked one rabbit-like creature that floated in front of him. The spirit just tilted its head at him quizzically, as if confused by the question.

 

“I guess not.” Aang said, before walking towards the far end of the meadow. He could see the edge of a forest in that direction, so he figured it would be better than standing still, or asking tiny spirits if they knew anything.

 

Eventually, Aang made his way into the trees. The meadow was much larger than he had thought, the giant flowers throwing off the scale and distance of the trees. When he finally reached them, he found that they were truly massive. They towered over the ground for hundreds of feet, stretching towards the sky in an unending quest toward the heavens. Aang marveled at the size of them. He had seen shorter mountains.

 

He pulled his attention away from the living monoliths, returning to the task at hand. He walked deeper into the forest, not knowing quite what he was looking for. All that he knew was that he had to find someone to ask for directions. Maybe they would know where Roku was.

 

As he walked, Aang had an idea. Maybe he just had to call Roku? He cupped his hands around his mouth and yelled for him. “Avatar Roku! I must speak with you!”

 

He waited for a moment, and then two. Nothing. He sagged. It was worth a shot at least. He was about to carry on when a familiar shape emerged for the depths of the trees. A large bear colored black and white.

 

“Hei Bai!” Aang ejaculated, glad to see the spirit again. “Man am I glad to see you! Do you know where Avatar Roku is?”

 

The panda nodded and knelt down in front of Aang.

 

“Do you want me to ride on your back?” Aang asked, raising an eyebrow. Again Hei Bai nodded. Aang shrugged before climbing on. Once the Avatar had settled in place, the bear spirit began to race through the trees.

 

---

 

Sokka landed lightly on the ground. He shivered. It had not been pleasant, falling through the ground and into empty space like that. He had been starting to think that he would never stop falling, even though it had only lasted a few seconds at most.

 

He looked around, wondering where he was. He was on a mountainside, that much at least was clear, but where? What mountain? He scanned the horizon until he saw a familiar peak, not too far off. He could faintly make out the shape of a man floating above it.

 

Laghima then. He knew where he was, or at least he had been there before. He began his arduous hike towards the airbender. There was no path through the trees, so Sokka had to fight through the branches to find his way beyond the tree line. It was slow going, and annoying, but eventually he broke out of the forest and onto the saddle.

 

Once there, he climbed the rest of the way toward Laghima. When he made it to the top, the guru was waiting for him.

 

“So. You have returned.” Laghima said, looking at him with curious eyes.

 

“Uh, yeah.” Sokka said, sitting in the ground, tired from fighting his way through the trees and his climb up the mountain.

 

The airbenders eyebrows raised when he heard Sokka speak. “It seems that you’ve made progress. Your mind is not so clouded as before.”

 

“No, it isn’t.”

 

“I take it you have found the void, then.” Laghima said, floating down to sit across from Sokka, who nodded.

“It seems that the Face Stealers bond has hastened your progress in many things. I can see you using his power even now.”

 

Sokka blinked, confused. He wasn’t using any power, he had closed his third eye, he had left the void. He wasn’t pulling on any shadows that he could tell.

 

“What do you mean? My third eye is closed. I have left the void. I am using no power that I know off.”

 

Laghima said nothing for a moment, and just regarded Sokka with an implacable stare. Eventually, the man spoke.

 

“The third eye was not given to you by him. He merely opened it. Any could learn to enter the void, and set aside their emotion to see clearly. These are not things of his, he has merely hastened you along the path to them.”

 

“Then what do you mean?” Asked Sokka, trying to understand what the man was driving at. He hadn’t drawn on any shadows, and as far as he knew that was the only power he had control over. Sure, he was faster and stronger, his senses and reflexes were enhanced, but he didn’t have any control over that, did he?

 

“You are using them now, whether you know it or not. Have you not seen how you have become faster? Stronger? I can see his shadow flowing through you, filling your body with it’s power.”

 

“Well, there isn’t much that I can do about that.” Sokka said, shrugging.

 

“But there is.” Laghima argued, “Just as you pull the shadows in the mortal world, you can control them within yourself.”

 

Sokka blinked at that. Control the shadows within himself. He hadn’t realized there were shadows within himself. He had never thought to look at himself with his third eye. He figured he ought to try it now. Sokka measured his breathing, and focused on his third eye. He could picture it opening, slowly, but opening nonetheless. 

 

He raised a hand before his eyes. Laghima was right after all. There within his limb was a swirling darkness, rushing forward and back as the edies that fell against the rocks of the bay. He felt around his mind for the power to move shadows, but instead he found something else. There was an opening, a gate of sorts. He could feel the darkness rushing through it, moving throughout his body and strengthening him.

 

Sokka closed his eyes again, his brow furrowed in concentration. He waded through that river of shadow in his mind. The rushing power threatened to sweep him away, to pull him under and drown him under its weight. He resisted and pressed on, wading across until he reached the gate. He found it and took firm hold. He pulled with all his strength, and the gate shut. The power waned, and then stopped.

 

Sokka opened his eyes. He felt elated at his success, until he realized how hungry he was. And cold. And tired. Had Koh’s power been keeping him from feeling those things? He thought back to recent weeks. He had felt hunger, yes, but it had been muted. He had noticed that he wasn’t as cold as he should be. Well, he didn’t feel cold.

 

He looked off to the side of the peak. He could no longer make out the branches of the trees he had landed in. He inhaled through his nose and found that his sense of smell was only as sharp as it had been before his bond with the face stealer. Well then, he thought, he had been using Koh’s power all this time.

 

“I guess you were right.” He said, “I’ve been using it this whole time without even realizing. It’s strange, I'd have thought my instincts would’ve told me.”

 

Guru Laghima looked at, tilting his head to one side. “You should not rely on your instincts. You must see the world clearly, and act on reason alone.”

 

“My instincts usually lead me in the right direction.” Sokka countered, a little affronted. It was true that they were wrong sometimes, but his instincts were good mostly. Laghima shook his head.

 

“No. Instinct is a lie, told by a frightened body praying to be wrong. You must not listen to the cries of the flesh. Trust in only what you can see.”

 

Sokka frowned as he considered the man's words. Instinct was a lie. He figured that there was some truth in that. Most instincts warned of danger, even when none was to be found. He thought about his lesson with Shing. He had said that a swordsman must take in everything on the battlefield. To focus on one thing and take in everything. There was no room for instinct in a fight, only the cold and sharp logic of the sword.

 

“Is that the purpose of the void? To see clearly?” Sokka asked.

 

Laghima nodded. “When you enter the void, you shed off the chains of life. Emotions, hunger, pain, exhaustion all of them are a distraction. They obscure the facts of the world around you and cloud your mind. In the void, you can remember what you have forgotten, and hide what you wish to forget. It is complete mastery of the mind.”

 

Sokkapondered the mans words. Complete mastery of the mind. A place in which he could remember, or forget. He set aside the information for the time being. He had come here for a reason after all. He got to his feet before speaking. “I appreciate your wisdom, and thank you for your help. But I have come to the spirit world for a reason: I’m looking for my mother.”

 

“What makes you think that she is here?” Laghima said, and Sokka stiffened. He had come here to find her because his instincts told him she was here, but laghima had told him that instinct was a lie. He had been afraid that he wouldn’t ever see her again, and when he found his way into the spirit world he had blindly believed he could. But what evidence of that was there?

 

“You’re here. And Kuruk. I figure that if you two could be here then so might she.”

 

Before the airbender could respond, they were interrupted by the sound of loose stone crunching beneath boots. Sokka turned and saw Avatar Kuruk.

 

“I’m sorry Sokka, but she’s not here.” He said, “The dead do not pass into the spirit world. They go beyond. For those who have achieved enlightenment, like our friend here,” he gestured to the guru, “it is possible to pass between this world and the next.”

 

“Why are you here then? Did you reach enlightenment?” Sokka asked. He was disappointed that his mother wasn’t in the spirit world, but at least he would see her again some day.

 

“No. As long as the Avatar exists, all of our past lives will remain.” Kuruk said, bearing a grave expression.

 

“Oh. I’m sorry to hear that, you must have been here for a long time then.” Sokka said, scratching the back of his head. This conversation had grown more tense than he had expected.

 

“It is the nature of things. The spirit bound does not pass on like the rest.”

 

Sokka felt his heart stop beating at his ancestors' words. The spirit bound? Like the Avatar? Or did he mean… Sokka had become bound with Koh. He was spirit bound. 

 

“No, wait, hold on. What do you mean spirit bound? You said that I had bonded with K-” Sokka was cut off when a stone hit his ear.

 

“Do not say his name. If you call him he will come. It is the nature of your pact.”

 

Sokka rubbed his ear, angry at Kuruk. He pushed it aside, a little pain was nothing.

 

“Fine then. I am bound with the face guy. Does that mean that I…?”

 

Kuruk and Laghima exchanged a glance. Something passed between them that filled Sokka with worry. Before either of them could speak, Sokka saw the answer in their eyes.

 

“I’m sorry, Sokka.” Kuruk said, “But unlike the Avatar, the bond of the face stealer does not reincarnate.  When your body dies, you will not pass on. You will cease.”

 

Sokka’s eyes widened. “What do you mean cease?”

 

It was Laghima who answered his question. “Now you are. A time will come when you are not.”

 

Sokka shuddered. He felt numb, devoid of all warmth. He had feared that he would be stuck in the spirit world, waiting here for eternity. But this was worse, much worse. He would not pass on, he would not linger. One day his heart would stop its relentless beat and he would be no more. Everyone that he had lost, anyone that he would lose, were gone from him forever. He would not see them again.

 

“Sokka, I-” Kuruk began to say, but Sokka waved him off. He tried to speak but he could not pass the words. He looked at Laghima and Kuruk as his eyes stung with tears. He swallowed and shook his head.

 

“I-” His voice shook as he tried to speak. “I need some time alone.”

 

Sokka left them there and walked down the mountain, through the forest. He knew that he was alone, that nobody was around. When he began to weep, he hid his face all the same.

 

---

 

Aang and Hei Bai walked along the narrow path that snaked its way up the cliff. They had been traveling for an hour, maybe a little more. They had left the forest and now traversed a volcanic mountain range, the translucent spirits of dragons flying between peaks.

 

Aang had regaled Hei Bai with stories of his adventures since they had last met, and now they traveled in silence. They crested the top of the cliff, and Aang could see a red clad figure sipping tea beneath the branches of flowering sakura. He recognized him as his past life, and jumped off Hei Bai.

 

“Thanks for the ride Hei Bai!” he said, before running off to speak with Roku.

 

“Hello Aang. It’s good to see you.” Roku said, pouring Aang a cup of tea.

 

“It’s good to see you too, Roku.” Aang said, sitting on the grass and taking the cup offered by his former self. He took a sip, and decided that Roku was not the best brewer he had encountered.

 

“I have come to ask you about whatever danger I must face after I defeat the Fire Lord.” Aang said, placing his cup on the low table between the two of them. Roku didn’t react. He sipped his tea, and then put his cup down as well.

 

“I am sorry Aang. I do not have the answers that you seek. All that I know is that Vaatu is trying to escape before the time of harmonic convergence, and if that happens then the world will be irrevocably changed.”

 

“Who is Vaatu?” Aang asked, raising an eyebrow in confusion.

 

“He is the opposite of the Avatar spirit, Raava. She is the spirit of order, of balance. He is the spirit of chaos. While Raava is free and he is imprisoned, we can live peacefully. We can predict how the world reacts around us,” As Roku finished speaking he picked up a stone from the ground.

 

“When I drop this stone, it will fall to the ground. It is because of Raava’s influence that the laws of nature can be enforced. If Vaatu were free, I could drop this stone and it could go up, or turn into a tree, or even cease to exist.”

 

“But that doesn’t make any sense.” Aang said.

 

“Exactly. We live in an ordered universe. Should that order be removed, or altered, the world as we know it would be no more.” Roku placed the stone on the ground again.

 

“So I have to stop this Vaatu from escaping? How? When?”

 

“I do not know. I have told you everything that I have learned of it.” Roku said, frowning. “The time of harmonic convergence shall not happen in your lifetime. It should be the responsibility of the next Avatar. But it seems that at least part of their burden has fallen to you.”

 

Aang grimaced. He never wanted to be the Avatar, and now he had even more problems to deal with. Monkey feathers.

 

“If you can’t tell me, then who can?” Aang asked Roku, trying not to let his bitterness seep into his voice.

 

“After you begin your training in earthbending, you must go to the spirit library. It can be found in the Si Wong desert. There you will learn about the prophecy the monks warned you of, but now you must go! Return to your body, there is danger in the mortal world.”

 

“What danger?!”

 

Roku shook his head. “There is no time. Hei Bai will take you back to where you crossed over.”

 

Aang groaned, and then sprang to his feet, running to Hei Bai. He jumped on the spirits back, and the two of them were off, sprinting down the path they had come from.

 

---

 

Zuko tapped his foot impatiently, waiting for the officers of the other ship to come aboard. They had stopped his vessel when he had tried to enter the bay near the ilah colony. Now he had been waiting for nearly an hour for them to speak with him.

 

He stood there, fuming, as he watched them lower the plank from theri ship to the deck of his own. Slowly, a figure in a commander's uniform followed by two guards came down the gangplank. His uncle sat at his small table playing a game with the wooden cards he favored when he couldn’t play pai sho with the crew.

 

“Calm yourself, Prince Zuko. Letting your anger take hold of you will do no good.” Iroh said, as he poured himself another cup of jasmine tea. Zuko decided to ignore him. His uncle had refused to shoot lightning at him, despite teaching him how to redirect it. So Zuko was still rather annoyed at the older man.

 

Finally, after what felt like years, the commander made his way onto the deck. He bowed to Iroh, and then to Zuko.

 

“My apologies, Prince Zuko. Under the command of Admiral Zhao and Princess Azula, no ships are allowed within the bay without prior authorization. They have captured the Avatar and the Prince of the southern Water Tribe. These measures are to be in place until the prisoners are transported to the capital.”

 

The officer bowed again, and departed the way they had come. Zuko stood frozen in shock. Zhao and Azula captured the Avatar? The capture of the idiot prince who traveled with him was no surprise to Zuko, but the fact that Zhao and his sister had captured the Avatar, the sole mission his father had given him, and the only way he could possibly return home, stunned him to his core.

 

Zuko turned around and stumbled to the opposite gunnel.

 

“Are you alright Prince Zuko?” His uncle said, placing a hand on his nephew's shoulder.

 

“No, I’m not. My honor, my country, My throne. I’m going to lose them all.”

 

“No, don’t say that! The Avatar is slippery, he might still escape!’ Iroh said, “Don’t give up my nephew.”

 

Iroh’s words gave Zuko an idea. A terrible idea, but the only one he had.

 

“Yeah. Maybe he will.” Zuko said, as determination shone in his eyes.

 

---

 

Zuko guided the small steamer up a river that fed into the sea a few miles from Ilah bay. He had formed a very feeble plan, but it was the best he had. The commander had said that Azula and Zhao captured the Avatar and First Son, so he reasoned that the girl must still be out there.

 

She was a waterbender, so he reasoned that she would be near water. The river he was navigating had branched off of the greater Shan Jo river that flowed into the bay. He would join up with that river, and continue upstream until he found her or night fell. Then he would descend into the colony and free the Avatar, hopefully taking him prisoner.

 

Zuko knew that the Avatar and his companions wouldn’t accept his help, so he had disguised himself as the Blue Spirit. In order to gain the girl's trust, a dubious prospect given his mask, he had brought the necklace he found at a prison rig the Avatar had emptied.

 

He came to the junction between the two bodies of water, and steered his small craft up the river. He continued sailing, and the sun began to drift across the sky. It reached its zenith, and began to descend. Zuko was ready to give up his search for the girl and head back to the colony, when he heard a female voice from across the water. He steered his steamer to the shore and tied it to a mangrove.

 

Zuko disembarked and headed through the trees, disguise in place. He crept along until he could see the source of the voice.

 

Katara was drawing a diagram in the dirt for Appa and Momo. She had flown Appa high enough above the colony that he might be mistaken for a cloud, and tried her best to observe the layout of the town. The town had grown around a mid-sized earth kingdom fortress that had been taken by the Fire Nation fifty years ago. It was a walled compound, with a tower at each of the four corners. There was a high observation tower outside of the compound, and docks at the bay and mouth of the river.

 

“Alright.” Katara said. “Appa, you fly in causing a distraction. Momo and I will sneak in and find Aang and Sokka while everyone is distracted. They’re probably locked up so I need Momo to find the keys. Once he’s got them he can bring them to me and then we’ll free the others and meet Appa by the river.”

 

The lemur tilted his head and looked at her. Appa blinked. Katara sighed. “I know, I know, it’s not a very good plan. If Sokka were here he could whip something up way better in seconds, but he’s not and we’re all we’ve got. So please, please understand what I'm trying to tell you.”

 

Zuko’s mouth opened in astonishment. This was one of the people who had been evading him for months? He shook his head and stepped out of the trees. Disguising his voice he spoke, “That’s literally the worst plan I’ve ever heard.”

 

Katara whipped around and opened the pouch at her side. She bent the water out and glared at the newcomer. He was dressed all in black, save for the blue mask of a laughing spirit. He bore two swords on his back.

 

“Who are you?!” She asked, taking an offensive stance.

 

“A friend, I guess.” Zuko said, raising his empty hands.

 

“I don’t know any masked swordsmen.” Katara said, her voice heavy with suspicion.

 

“Uh, we haven’t met.” Zuko lied, trying not to let it tell in his voice. Unlike Azula, he had never been a good liar.

 

“I gathered that. What’s with the mask?” Katara asked, her stance unchanged.

 

“It doesn’t matter.” Zuko said, brushing off the question.

 

“You got a name?” Katara asked. She didn’t like this. A masked stranger claiming to be her friend, hours after Aang and Sokka had been captured by the Fire Nation. The stranger seemed stumped by that. He looked around for a second before answering.

 

“Uh, I’m Lee.” Zuko said lamely. How could he not have thought of a name? His whole plan had hinged on getting her to trust him enough to work together.

 

“Okay, ‘Lee’ I’m Katara.” Katara said, putting the water back into its container. She still didn’t trust this guy, but she figured if he meant to attack he would have done so already.

 

“I want to help you rescue the Avatar.” 

 

Katara narrowed her eyes. How had this ‘Lee’ -She doubted that was his real name- heard of Aang’s capture? It had only been half a day. Maybe the Fire Nation had announced it already? It didn’t matter. She didn’t have many options.

 

“How do I know I can trust you?” She asked, looking at him distrustfully. ‘Lee’ Moved his hand slowly to a pouch at his side and took something from within. He drew it out in his closed fist and opened his hand to reveal..

 

“My mothers necklace! How did you get it? Wait, how did you know it was mine?”

 

The man shrugged. “It doesn’t matter. Will you accept my help or am I on my own?”

 

Katara was torn. She did not trust this man. Why did he use a fake name? Why was he masked? How did he know it was her necklace and where did he find it? But despite the mystery, despite the suspicion, Katara needed help. She couldn’t rescue the others alone, and she couldn’t leave them imprisoned. There was too much at risk, for her, her people, and the world.

 

“Fine. I don’t really have much choice.”

 

 

---

 

Sokka wandered through the forest of the spirit world. After Kuruk and Laghima had told him of the price he paid for Koh’s power, he was filled with bitter regret. He wished that he had never taken Koh’s deal, that he had never entered that cave, never left the south pole. He had lost so much and he hadn’t even known, never stopped to ask.

 

The fact that Koh had never told him, never mentioned what it would cost… It made him boil in anger. He wanted to find the Face Stealer, and hurt him. Or at least yell at him alot. Where was that blasted cave, he wondered.

 

He walked down a path and through a clearing in the woods. A small stream flowed through it, and the water pooled at the far end. Spirits were clustered around the pool, but Sokka was beyond caring, consumed by his grief. He continued along his path, but when he passed the group someone called out and grabbed his attention.

 

“Look! It’s him! The guy from the pool!” A bright green man with the face of a walrus pointed at him excitedly.

 

Sokka was confused. What pool? The one they were at now? He had certainly never met this guy before.

 

“H-Have we met before?” Sokka said, awkwardly. He already knew the answer, but felt compelled to ask anyway.

 

“No,” The walrus man said, and he pointed to the water. “This pool shows us what's going on in the mortal world, Look, you’re right there! Tied up with the Avatar.”

 

“What!” Sokka cried, dropping to his hands and knees to get a closer look, his turmoil pushed aside. The walrus thing told the truth; he was, in fact, tied up. And so was Aang. Although Aang was chained to a post, while he was tied to a chair. Sokka groaned. If he was to cease after death, he would prefer to put it off as long as he could.

 

“Is this really happening? Where’s Katara?” At his words the water swirled and Katara appeared, talking to a masked stranger. They were pointing at a drawing in the dirt. It looked as though they were planning his and Aang's rescue.

 

“Hey, go back to the Avatar!” A glowing pink snake said. The picture changed again, showing Aang and Sokka. This time they were not alone. Zhao had come in, as well as a girl in armor.

 

“Wow, she’s pretty.” Said that snake spirit. Sokka glared at her. Him. Snake. She was Fire Nation, it didn’t matter how beautiful she was. Or wasn’t. Sokka berated himself for agreeing with the snake. “Don’t get distracted, Sokka.

 

“Are you talking to yourself?” The snake asked.

 

“Are you pink?” Sokka replied. The snake blushed.

 

“It’s a sunburn. I’m normally yellow.”

 

Sokka stifled a laugh. The snake was embarrassed. Despite his grief, despite his rage, the sight of a blushing serpentine spirit was something he had never imagined. He shook his head to clear his thoughts. It didn’t matter. 

 

He had to assume that whatever this water showed him was real. He had to get out of the spirit world and back in his body. His mirriad emotions all clamored for his attention, his thoughts and feels crashing together like leaves in a hurricane. He needed to get a hold of himself. Sokka closed his eyes. He took a deep breath, and reached for the void.

 

When he at last found it, he sank deeper into the emptiness than he ever had before. He opened his eyes, and looked at the water calmly. Zhao and the girl had left, and they had taken his body with them.

 

Sokka turned to the walrus-man. “How do I return to my body?”

 

The walrus-man shrugged. Sokka thought for a moment, before calling out again. “Koh! I must speak with you!”

 

Sokka did not react to the cries of dismay of the spirits around him. He did not so much as blink when they scattered and ran, hiding their faces in their arms or keeping them low in the grass. He did not feel fear or surprise when the light dimmed in the sky.

 

“To what do I owe the pleasure, my champion?” Said a twisted voice from behind Sokka. Sokka turned and saw the Face Stealer stretched across the clearing, wearing the face of a bearded man with one eye. The shadows of the trees had lengthened, pulling from their natural course to cover the spirit.

 

“I must return to my body.” Sokka said. Wrapped in the cool emptiness of the void,  he felt nothing of his anger towards the spirit. He knew that he should, that he had been angry mere moments before. But that anger had left him when he entered the void. All that remained was the cold and sharp blade of reason. “You will tell me how.”

 

“Must I? I suppose I should, yes.” Koh said, before he started to wind his way around Sokka. “But before you go, I know this: When you must speak to me again, take my home in your mind's eye. Call my name in your thoughts. Soon you shall come to me again, and I shall grant you greater strength.”

 

Sokka did not blink. Though he resided in the void, he felt the presence of his anger flare again. The heat of a distant flame. “And what shall it cost me then, I wonder.”

 

“Nothing, you have already paid in full. Though, you have yet to take Sozin's corrupted. Do not dally when you have the chance, or you shall find the price of mercy weighs heavy on your shoulders.”

 

“Enough. Tell me how to return to my body.” Sokka said. He had to return, otherwise he would be able to do nothing to escape.

 

“All you must do is traverse the darkness and step into the light.” Koh said, and then he was gone. Sokka was unphased. Traverse the darkness and step into the light. Sokka looked through his mind for the gate through which Koh’s power flowed. After a moment of searching, he found it again. He opened the gate, letting the shadow wash over him, before he stepped through.

 

Chapter 10: Enemies, Allies, and Something In-between

Sokka opened his eyes and saw that he was in a large room. Narrow, barred windows against one wall framed the light of the setting sun. He inspected the room further and found a young man, perhaps a few years older than his own sixteen years.

 

The youth started when he saw that Sokka was awake. He turned abruptly to leave, and had placed his hand on the heavy steel door when Sokka called out to him.

 

“Water. Please.”

 

The youth turned to face him again, a look of confusion on his face. Sokka spoke again. “It’s been more than a day. I need water.” 

 

The soldier hesitated, before giving Sokka a drink from his own water skin. Sokka thanked him and the soldier left.

 

Sokka watched the closed door after the man departed. He hadn’t really needed water, he could go another day without it before he would be in danger. His thirst hadn’t been his motivation, no. He needed them to think he was weak; incapable of resistance or escape. 

 

As he dwelled within the void, he considered the future. The next hours were crucial for the survival of himself and the Avatar. He needed every advantage he could get. Had he not been in this state of complete mastery of the self, he doubted he could so much as form a cohesive thought. In fact, he doubted he could do anything but sit and wallow in self pity.

 

When he left the void he would surely crumble. Perhaps he would make it a day before he succumbed to his grief for what he had lost. Maybe more, maybe less. He knew that he had only been able to organize his thoughts because the reality of it all had not yet sunk in. When he eventually left the void it would, and he doubted that he could reach it again. Would he find the strength to carry on, once again shackled by the weight of his emotions? 

 

He knew that he could not stay in the void forever. Eventually he would emerge, willingly or otherwise. He had to find a solution to this problem. He thought back to his last encounter with Laghima. You can remember what you have forgotten, and hide what you wish to forget. 

 

Had the man known? He must have understood that the news would unsettle him, that it might even break him, if given the chance. Sokka closed his eyes and visualized the labyrinth of his mind. He searched through tunnel after tunnel, corridor after corridor, until he found the archive of his memory.

 

He envisioned his memory as a great library. Rooms filled with shelves upon shelves of  memories, as clear as the moment that they had been made, stretched across the very length of his life. He opened the first door and went inside. 

 

The memories of the past day were piled neatly inside; the studious workers of his subconscious knew their work well. He picked one up, inspected it, and replaced it on the shelf. It had been the memory of the blushing snake. That was one, he knew, he would want to remember when he left the void. He kept looking, before realizing that all he needed to do was think of the memory and it would appear in his hands.

 

He took the memory containing the price of his bargain and left the room. He reentered the greater archive of his life and created a chest with a thought. He placed the memory inside and locked the thing tight. He carried the chest to the darkest corner of his memory, laying it beside things he had forgotten before, someplace he would not think to look.

 

He straightened up once more, looking down at the chest. With the memory locked away, he did not know what it was. He only knew that it had to remain hidden, that he must not look at it. He turned away from it and began his journey out of the crypt of his memory.

 

---

The door to Princess Azula’s chambers opened. She looked up from the message she had written to her father, seeing the sentry she had stationed in the First Son’s cell. She raised an eyebrow at him. The soldier blanched before saluting hastily.

 

“The prisoner is awake, Princess.” He said, staring past her into the wall.

 

“Has he said anything?” Azula asked, returning to her task. She sealed the message and placed it in the canister upon the back of the messenger hawk. She crossed to her window and sent the hawk away.

 

“He asked for water. He sounded weak, your highness.”

 

Azula frowned. All he had done was ask for water?

 

“Is that all?” She asked, looking at the young soldier. The man nodded. Azula rolled her eyes and motioned for him to leave. “You are dismissed. Return to whatever your usual duties are.”

 

Azula leaned back in her chair. It was odd, she thought, that a man would awake to find himself imprisoned and do nothing but ask for a drink. She had expected panic, confusion, even rage. But none of that had come, according to the soldier at least. She rose from her seat and left the room. She headed down the corridor. A left turn, and then a right. She climbed a staircase and turned left again, before coming to the steel door that served as the entrance to the Water Tribesman’s cell. Admiral Zhao was waiting for her.

 

“Good evening, Admiral. Have you spoken with the prisoner yet?” She asked, despite knowing that he had not.

 

“No, Princess. I believed that you would wish to be present when I questioned him.” Zhao replied.

 

“What, pray tell, do you intend to question him about?” Azula asked. She had come out of curiosity for the boy's behavior. Azula doubted that he would have any useful information for them now that they had captured the Avatar.

 

“The whereabouts of his father, and what plans he might have. Now we have captured one of his children, Hakoda will be easy to manipulate into surrender.”

 

Azula nodded. Her own father, Fire Lord Ozai, had spoken of the Water Tribe’s weakness for family. It was one that Fire Lord Azulon had crushed out of his line, after his own brother was killed by the previous chief of the southern Water Tribe. Holding one's own family so dear was a weakness that could be exploited, her father had told her. He demonstrated that philosophy when he burned Zuko during their Agni Kai, a lesson that Azula had forced herself to watch. She had put on an air of enjoyment so that none who saw her would report to her father that she had shown weakness, but in truth it was horrifying. Her brother had never been kind to her, but she didn’t relish in his suffering. That her father would so readily disfigure his own son, and for such a meaningless offense, had opened her eyes. If she wanted to keep her fathers love then she could never fail him. He was the only family that ever cared for her, after all.

 

“Shall we, Princess?” Zhao asked, stirring Azula from her thoughts.

 

“After you, Admiral.” She said.

 

 Zhao smiled and opened the door to the cell, stepping inside. Azula followed seconds after. She looked at her prisoner. The boy remained tied, his eyes open as he stared into the near distance. He looked calm, lost in thought as if he was in some Earth Kingdom cliffside chateau overlooking the sea,  and not held prisoner in a Fire Nation stronghold.

 

“So you’re awake at last.” Zhao said, coming to stand directly in front of him.

 

“I guess so.” The Water Tribe boy said, his voice dry and weak.

 

“I imagine you’re wondering how we captured you.” Zhao said, and he turned his back on the boy. When no response came, Zhao turned again and bent over so his face was level with the prisoner’s. “No? Well, it hardly matters. We have you and the Avatar. I would have liked to get your sister too, but we can’t always get what we want.”

 

Azula watched the boy's eyes. She couldn’t get a read on him. There was no emotion, no feeling in them. They gave nothing away, at least they hadn’t yet.

 

“What is your name? It would be nice for us to know when we send word to your father that we’ve captured you.” Azula said. “I could torture it out of you of course, that’s always more fun. But it would save time for you to tell us yourself.”

 

“Sokka.” The boy said lazily. His eyes had yet to leave Zhao, as if he was searching through him for something she couldn’t begin to understand.

 

“Well then, Sokka,” Said Zhao, “I have some questions for you. Where is your father?”

 

Sokka shrugged. “I can’t say, I haven’t seen him in years.”

 

Zhao’s eyes narrowed. “Surely you must have heard something. I doubt that a Water Tribesman would go years without communicating with his family.”

 

Again Sokka shrugged, unmoved by Zhao’s words. Zhao stood up straight. He turned to Azula before speaking again. “Princess Azula, would you care to loosen the boy's tongue?”

 

Azula tapped her chin, thinking, “Well,” She said, before igniting a condensed point of blue flame at the end of her finger. “I could. I am no stranger to burning the truth out of people.”

 

“Liar.” Sokka said, still not looking away from Zhao.

 

Azula looked at Sokka, surprised. It was true, she hadn’t resorted to such tactics. She had interrogated prisoners before, of course, but they succumbed to threats long before anything more had been necessary. Azula had been secretly glad of that. It was something that nobody other than herself had known, a secret she guarded closely to grow her reputation. How had the boy known?

 

Sokka finally deigned to look at her. His ocean blue eyes, cold and empty as the light of the stars, met her own. She smirked, knowing that he would break as all others had before. But then something happened, something that she couldn’t quite explain. There was something inhuman in those eyes, something as devoid of compassion as the blackness of night. It was like looking down upon the depths of the sea, an abyss that could swallow whole armies never to see the sun again. She felt that she was seeing not a man, but something ruthless and unfeeling as a Crocodile-Shark.

 

His eyes seemed to expand, and she saw a windswept plain as empty and devoid of life as any she had imagined. It was a cold and dry place inside of this man, as well ordered and maintained as the hull of any warship. To her surprise Azula found that, for the first time since she was small, she was afraid. She was frightened by whatever this person was, for she knew that he would not hesitate to do what he must.

 

Azula blinked. She fought the urge to run, to get away from whatever this empty thing was. This void in the shape of man. She was Azula, blood of the dragon; firebender of the finest order. She did not shy away from any bender, she did not balk at quick men with clever swords. 

 

But his ocean colored eyes… 

 

She felt in the marrow of her bones that this man was like nothing she had seen before. The emptiness in those eyes, the sheer inhuman apathy, was something that she did not wish to see again.

 

She remained glued to the spot, staring into those eyes. But then something changed, the emptiness filled, the void blew away. What was left in them was surprise, confusion, and… sorrow?

 

“It would do no good.” Sokka said, breaking the silence. “Even if you did, I couldn’t tell you.”

 

Azula nodded. “He speaks the truth. He knows nothing, or at least nothing of use to us. You can remain here if you wish Admiral, but my presence is no longer necessary.”

 

With that, she turned on her heel and left. She retraced her steps to her chambers. Once inside she locked the door.

 

What was that? Azula wondered, bracing herself against the desk. What on earth had happened? Had she imagined it? He had seemed inhuman, like some spirit in human flesh. But then he had changed, as if coming out of a trance. Was it all in her head?

 

Azula exhaled slowly, calming herself. She must be mistaken, there was no way that whatever she saw in that cell was real. The boy was a good actor, that must have been it. He had let slip his emotions in the end, hadn’t he? He too broke, he too gave way.

 

Azula couldn’t help but wonder if she had broken as well.

 

---

As Azula turned on her heel, Sokka watched her go.

 

When she, this Princess Azula, had come in with Zhao, he hadn’t paid her any attention. Instead he had focused on Zhao. Still wrapped in the absolute clarity of the void, he had opened his third eye. He had been looking through Zhao, searching in vain to find a shred of the man that wasn’t corrupted by Sozin’s light. He had found none. It wasn’t unexpected, but he had searched nonetheless.

 

Then she spoke about how she had burned the truth out of people. As soon as the words had left her mouth Sokka knew that they had been a lie. How he knew he couldn’t quite say; he just knew it like he knew that the sun would rise again. He had looked upon her with his third eye then, and had seen something he had never expected. Her aura, her chi, it wasn’t the dark red of Zhao, or the golden fire of Shiyu. No, inside this woman was a blue flame that roiled and snapped like lightning, coursing through her body like summer wind over the sea.

 

More than that, he had seen inside of her as he had Katara at the fire temple. She was… Afraid. Someone had left her when she was young, abandoned her without a word, and she was left with no one but her father. Sokka could see in her a devotion to the man, an unbreaking need to never fail him. Deep down she was afraid that he too would abandon her, that he would cast her away. More than that, in the time their eyes met, she was afraid of him

 

He had lost his hold over the void then, and when it left she seemed to relax. As if she had taken him for something other than he was, and when he left the trance of perfect stillness she found that he was human after all. Moments later she had left.

 

Now that she was gone, he was alone with Zhao. Zhao, who for some reason he did not understand, hated him with the fury of a hurricane.

 

Zhao watched as the door closed behind Azula. He turned once more to face Sokka and he smiled. It was a vicious thing, the expression a tiger-seal gave a fawn.  “You know, the Princess thinks that we’re going to use you to negotiate your father’s surrender. We're not, at least I’m not. Instead I'm going to wait until your father is right in front of us, and then I'm going to kill you. Him too, if I can manage it.”

 

Sokka tried to speak but found that he could not form words, so great was his dismay.

 

“Don’t bother, you can’t talk me out of it.” Zhao said, pacing in front of Sokka.

 

“When I was a boy, younger than you are now, I learned of my fathers death. He was slain by your grandfather, Chief vurak. I swore that I would not rest until I saw your whole family wiped out like the Air Nomads. Hakoda and I have fought many battles, but that snake is far too slippery. Now, however; I have you. The perfect bait to snare the fox. Your sister might still live of course, but rest assured that I have my soldiers scouring the forest for her even now. None of you will escape, and my father will finally get justice.”

 

Zhao made to exit the room, but paused to speak once more. “Do try and escape. I’d love the chance to end you sooner than I plan.”

 

---

Aang’s eyes snapped open. He tried to move but he was restrained, his arms held taught by chains connected to two pillars. He struggled to free himself to no avail. He heard a noise and whipped his head around in any attempt to see what it was.

 

“Oh! Mai! He’s awake!” Said a cheerful girl with a long braid. Aang tried to see who she was talking to, but she was out of sight.

 

“I managed to puzzle that out myself, Ty Lee.” Mai replied, stepping into Aang’s line of sight. She was rather gloomy, he thought.

 

“I’ll go find Azula, you can wait here with him.” Mai said before leaving the room.

 

“Where am I? Where is Katara? Where’s Sokka?” Aang said, glaring at Ty Lee, who cartwheeled over to him.

 

“So that’s what they’re called? Well we have Sokka, that’s the boy right? The other one was washed down the river when we captured you.”

 

Aang groaned. How had they been captured? What had happened to Jeong Jeong’s people?

 

“What’s your name?” Ty Lee asked, smiling at him. Aang blinked at her for a second. This was a bit silly, she had taken him prisoner and yet she was being friendly and casual, as if the seriousness of the situation was lost on her.

 

“Aang.” He said, looking at her warily.

 

“I’m Ty Lee. The girl who just left is my friend Mai. She went to find Princess Azula, I think you’ve met her brother a time or two. Did he really decide to leave the Fire Nation to join you?”

 

“What? Why would Zuko do that? All he’s ever done is try and capture me and my friends.” Aang said, perplexed by her question. Ty Lee was about to respond when a new voice spoke.

 

“So you say my brother is not your ally. Tell me then, why was he seen leaving the fire temple with you?”

 

Aang craned his neck to see the newcomer. Another girl, dressed in black armor fringed with gold, had come in. She wore a top-knot, with two fang ike bangs framing her face. She looked vaguely familiar; her resemblance to Zuko was faint but undeniable.

 

“What? He was unconscious. We took him with us because he would’ve died if we left him there! We tied him up and dropped him on the deck of his ship.” Aang said, perplexed. So Zuko wasn’t involved in his capture? Then he had a new enemy after him, one with more resources than Zuko.

 

Azula, Aang assumed that was who she was, only stared at him. Her eyes narrowed, and then she spoke again. “Why would you do that? If he is your enemy, why would you want to take him with you? Why return him to his ship?”

 

Aang rolled his eyes. “Because he would have died if we left him there. And we couldn’t take him with us or leave him in the Fire Nation. Sokka saw his ship from far off, and we gagged him with a sock and threw him aboard. He slid on his face a bit, it was pretty funny actually.”

 

Azula nodded slowly, before speaking again. “Girls, let’s go. We’ll leave the Avatar to himself until we depart for the capital.” 

 

The three of them left without another word, leaving Aang to struggle with his bonds alone.

 

---

Appa flew high among the clouds of the night sky. The sun had set an hour ago, and they had begun their rescue mission. Zuko was surprised to find that he liked this Water Tribe girl, if she had been born in the Fire Nation they could’ve been friends. It was too bad, he thought, that they had to be on opposite sides of this war. He had seen much of it in his years searching the globe for the Avatar. Countless villages, numberless islands, ports, cities, towns. He had been all over the world, both in Fire Nation colonies and Earth Kingdom lands, and everywhere he went he saw the same thing: people hated the Fire Nation.

 

It was a shame really, that so many couldn’t see the Fire Nation for the great civilization that it was. Great grandfather Sozin had started his war to share their greatness with the world, and yet it didn’t seem to have worked. Maybe there wasn’t a point to the fighting anymore? If the whole world was Fire Nation then who could they share their greatness with?

 

Zuko shook himself from his thoughts. Katara had said something. “What?”

 

“I said, are you ready?” Katara repeated, guiding Appa lower and towards the wall of the compound. Zuko grunted his response as they came up alongside the wall. The plan that they had concocted was for Zuko, or ‘Lee’ as he had called himself, to go in first and cause a distraction. Katara would wait five minutes before entering from the opposite side of the compound while the soldiers were rushing to deal with Zuko’s infiltration.

 

Once they were level with the top of the wall Zuko leapt off of the bison and onto the rampart. He moved like a shadow, staying just out of sight of the sentries. He ran to a corner and climbed down rapidly, before rolling under a wagon. He watched silently as a unit of infantry men marched past in formation, waiting for them to grow fifty paces distant before slipping out of cover. He ran stealthily along the bottom of the wall until he came to a low iron building that was separate from all of the others. 

 

He rounded to the front and broke the padlock on the door with a heel kick, sending sparks everywhere. The door swung open silently on well-oiled hinges, revealing the compounds store of blasting jelly and other explosives. Carefully, he removed a small keg of spark powder and poured it in a line from the most volatile of the explosives and out the door. He continued the work quickly once outside, pouring the line a safe distance from the storehouse. He checked to make sure that the building was clear and lit the spark powder with a pair of spark rocks. He would have used firebending, but he wanted to keep that part of his identity secret.

 

The powder caught, and Zuko made a mad dash for cover while remaining unseen. He rolled behind some barrels on the other side of the courtyard from the storehouse, and waited. He didn’t have to wait long, for mere seconds after he had reached the dubious safety of the barrels the munitions exploded.

 

Unsurprisingly the walls bent outwards but held in place, though somewhat shredded. The roof however, flew into the sky in a jet of flame and debris. Burning pieces of wood and fabric rained down across the compound, igniting anything that it could. Training dummies, hay, crates, canvas. Everything within a hundred yards was soon aflame.

 

Soldiers rushed out of the stronghold trying desperately to put out the flames. It was pandemonium; pure chaos ensued. Zuko waited for the stream of personnel flowing from the stronghold to slow before making his way to the stable. He climbed in through a window and began cutting harnesses and tethers with his dao blades. The rhinos were panicking from the explosion and subsequent commotion of the men attempting to stifle the flames. Zuko kicked open the stable doors, stepping to the side as a herd of angry komodo-rhinos burst through the open doorway.

 

He watched from the shadows as the new element was added into the confusion of the compound. He looked and saw Katara sneak in through a side door, almost unseen. To his dismay, a pair of soldiers followed her. He groaned and chased after. Why was he always stuck with amateurs?

 

---

Sokka heard an explosion. He assumed it meant that Katara had begun the rescue plan. Good, he had gotten bored of waiting. Throughout the past few hours, ever since Zhao had left him alone in his cell, Sokka had been rubbing his restraints against a bolt in his steel chair. He had felt the ropes begin to fray, and he hoped that they had been compromised enough that he could break them.

 

He calmed himself and concentrated on the Face Stealer’s shadow coursing through him. He tried to focus it into his arms and shoulders, and he felt the now familiar tugging sensation in his mind. He pulled on the restraints, and they held for a moment before breaking. With his hands free he began to untie the knots that bound his legs and torso to the seat. When he was done he picked up the chair and walked to the door, where he paused and listened. He could hear the sound of two sentries breathing, their breath echoing inside their helms.

 

Sokka had expected as much and planned for it. He knocked on the door and said “Hey, uh, I’ve really got to pee.”

 

The two guards jumped in surprise. “How did you get untied?”

 

“Zhao untied me. Said that I couldn’t escape even if I tried to, so there was no need to keep me restrained.”

 

Sokak heard the guards pause for a second, before one of them spoke again. “Stand back from the door. We will escort you to the bathroom and back.

 

“Sure thing! Man I appreciate it, I feel like I’m gonna burst.” Sokka said, trying to make his voice sound like it was further away. He waited next to the door, chair held at the ready. The door opened and when the guard walked in, Sokka hit him in the chest with the chair. The man dropped, groaning in pain. Sokka took the soldier's jian blade and its scabbard from the man's back and dodged underneath the blast of fire from the second guard. Sokka moved like lightning, sweeping the guards feet from under him and drawing the blade. The guard had time to blink his surprise as he found himself flat on his back on top of the other man. He tried to rise but found the point of a sword level with his eye.

 

“Keys. Slowly.” Sokka said. The guard swallowed and slowly pulled out his keys. He tossed them into the hallway behind Sokka, who spoke again. “Where is the Avatar?”

 

The guard swallowed, before replying. “Down the stairs, two levels. Take a left down this corridor and you'll find the staircase on the right side. Go right when you get to his floor, he’s held in the last cell. You can’t miss it.”

 

“Thanks!” Sokka said with a smile, before knocking the man unconscious with the flat of his bade. Sokka closed the door, picked up the keys, and locked them inside. The keys were labeled, a surprising and helpful development. He probably would have liked the Fire Nation, if they hadn’t been bent on world domination for the last century. They were a very efficient and well-organized people.

 

He had his third eye opened, and it told him that his two guards weren’t bad people. He felt conflicted at having to hurt and lock them up, but he had to do it. He followed the directions that the guard had given him, making his way to the stairs. He descended, and when he got to the first landing, he saw Katara cornered by two firebenders. He drew his sword and came at them silently, preparing an overhead strike to knock one unconscious. Before he got there however, Katara’s masked companion struck like a coiled snake. He swept the legs of one firebender, and tossed him into the other. They tumbled down the stairs and lay heaped together on the next landing.

 

Sokka paused in his descent, lowering his sword. The masked man was no stranger, Sokka could see who it was with his third eye. Katara’s companion was Prince Zuko. Sokka thought furiously, trying to reason out the next few minutes of the night. Zuko was helping them escape, likely just so he could capture Aang himself later on. But they were short on allies, surrounded by enemies and in unfamiliar territory. Could he rely on Zuko not to double cross them? Did he have a choice?

 

The conflicting fires within Zuko had changed even more since their last encounter; the golden fire had grown brighter and the corrupted flame of Sozin’s light had waned even more. Sokka grit his teeth. He would take this subtle change in Zuko’s aura as a sign. He cleared his throat and Katara spun to face the noise, her face in the richtus of battle. The fire in her eyes faded the moment she saw that it was her brother to have made the noise.

 

“Sokka!” Katara cried out as she rushed up the stairs to embrace him. He hugged her back briefly but his eyes never left Zuko. He could hear the steps of two men in armor approaching around the corner from outside the stairwell. “Two men are coming from the hallway. They’re close, coming from the right side. You two wait here while I rescue Aang, I know where he is.”

 

He detached himself from his sister and raced down the stairs and to the cell the guard had told him about. He unlocked the door and entered. Aang was in the center of the room, struggling with his bonds.

 

“Aang! Katara and Z- someone else are here to rescue us. They're on the next floor keeping the exit clear.” He fumbled the keys while he spoke, looking for one that would open the padlocks that held the manacles in place. He gave up after a second and drew his sword.

 

“Sokka! What’re you-?” Aang said when Sokka raised the sword over his head before saying, “Try not to move.”

 

Sokka focused as hard as he could on this swing, channeling Koh’s power through his limbs. Everything seemed to slow down as Sokka brought his weapon to bear against the metal binding Aang’s hand. The metal gave and the cuff fell open. Sokka repeated the process on the other cuff and then the Avatar was free. Sokka sheathed his sword and the two friends ran from the room as fast as they could retracing Sokka’s steps to meet up with Katara.

 

Reaching the landing that Katara and Zuko had met Sokka on, they found a fight taking place. Katara had managed to freeze the feet of one soldier while Zuko dueled the other. The fight hadn’t been going on long, perhaps a few seconds. Aang drew in a deep breath and with it he blew a powerful gust of wind at the two soldiers, throwing them both into a wall and leaving the boots of the first man frozen to the floor.

 

“Hey Katara, who's your friend?” Aang said, stopping his mad dash to stand beside her. Katara hugged the Avatar, before making quotation marks with her hands and saying, “This is ‘Lee’.”

 

“Okaaay. ‘Lee’ then.” Aang repeated the same gesture when he said Zuko’s alias. Zuko looked up at the ceiling in evident exasperation. Sokka rolled his eyes. They didn’t have time for this. He thought for a moment before asking, “Where’s Appa? How long will it take us to reach him?”

 

“I still have my bison whistle, I guess they didn’t search my clothes when they captured me.” Aang offered.

 

That was good, Sokka thought, they could still call Appa to them. “Alright, here’s the plan: We’re going to make our way out of here, ‘Lee’ and I will cover the rear while you two take point. Aang, you’ll need to clear the way with airbending. Katara and Lee know the layout, so Katara will give directions while you lead.”

 

Katara nodded before she and Aang took off running, Sokka held up a hand for five seconds before he and Zuko followed. They ran furiously through the stronghold, but fortunately they met no more obstacles in their race for freedom. And then they made it outside.

 

The moment that Sokka and Zuko stepped out of the stronghold they were met with a jet of blue fire. Sokka leapt over it and Zuko spun right, narrowly avoiding getting burned. Sokka drew his sword and quickly scanned the scene. It was pure madness. Everything was onfire, angry rhinos rampaged around and for some reason a pig-chicken was pecking at the back of a passed out firebender. Katara and Aang were engaged in combat against two girls that Sokka hadn’t seen before.

 

One of the young women fighting Aang and Katara shone with a faint silver aura, not unlike that of Aang’s airbending chi. Sokka guessed she might have some Air Nomad ancestry. The other one shone with a dull gray light. It was rather depressing, actually. In the few seconds that Sokka watched the exchange one of them, the one with the silver glow, landed a hit on Katara’s arm. The chi immediately stopped flowing into the limb, and it fell limply to her side.

 

Sokka’s attention was drawn back to his fight when the crackle of electricity filled his ears. He turned just in time to see Princess Azula shoot a bolt of lightning at her brother. Sokka’s eyes widened when Zuko dropped his swords and caught the lightning and channeled it through his body. Sokka could see the lightning travel through Zuko as the firebender guided it with a hand and then shot it at Azula's feet. The Princess flew backwards through the air and out of sight, and Zuko regained his weapons. 

 

Sokka pushed away his astonishment and raced towards Aang and Katara, ducking under arrows and cutting the heads off spears as he went. He channeled more of Koh’s power into his run and crossed the length of the yard in an eyeblink. The girl with the silver aura, she had braided hair now that he noticed it, was aiming another puch at Katara’s other shoulder. Time seemed to slow for Sokka and he knew exactly where this girl was going to strike. He copied her target and placed his own light punch on the girl's outstretched arm. 

 

Ty Lee’s eyes widened in shock as her own chi was blocked less than a second before she would’ve made contact with the waterbender. She jumped into a flip to put space between her and her attacker. She turned to face this new assailant, and froze when she saw him. It was the First Son, but he was awake now, and his aura had returned. His aura was like a shadow on a moonless night, save for a pale blue light that stood in the center of his heart. A long shadow stretched out behind him, and it writhed as if with a life of its own. 

 

Ty Lee shuddered, and backed away slowly. Her eyes never left whatever this person, this thing, was. She was truly afraid, more so than at any time in her life. “What are you?” 

 

Sokka blinked at the odd question, but didn’t slow down to talk. The other girl, the one with the depressing aura, was throwing knives. He deflected some with his stolen blade and dodged the rest. He stepped closer to her to knock her out, but a gust of wind kicked by Aang sent her sliding across the ground. Sokka grinned at his friend, and only just managed to pull him out of the way as another firebender started attacking them. 

 

“So you tried to escape after all.” Zhao said, walking calmly towards the pair of them. Soka looked around and saw Zuko and Katara battling Azula and Knife Girl respectively. Sokka put his sword in a low guard that would allow him to dissipate any fire bent at him with an upward swing. Aang stood beside him, in a ready stance. Zhao too took a bending pose and their fight began in earnest.

 

Sokka swung his sword through a ball of fire, dissipating it easily, and Aang blew his aside in a kick. Sokka darted forward at Zhao, who sent a jet of flame at him. Sokka dodged and began thinking. Zhao meant to kill him, he had said as much in his cell. He would never rest until his entire family ended, he would never stop chasing them. Unlike Zuko, this man had no good left in him. He had chosen his path in life and would not turn back. 

 

They fought furiously, and Zhao was truly a master. He dodged, struck, fell back, all in perfect form. Despite the older man's skill, he was no match for the combined strength of Aang and Sokka. Gradually the fight turned in their favor unti suddenly Zhao was lifted into the air and then slammed back into the ground by the power of Aang’s bending. Zhao lay on the ground, dazed and groaning. Sokka looked at him, trying to find a reason not to do what he felt he must. Search as he might, he could come up with nothing. The words of the Face Stealer came back to him again, predicting Katara’s death. And then again from his most recent voyage into the spirit world. You shall find the price of mercy weighs heavy on your shoulders.

 

Had not Zhao sworn that he would never rest until Sokka’s line was wiped out? Could he afford to let him…? No. Sokka knew what he had to do. He walked to stand over Zhao. He raised his sword to point directly above the man’s heart. He lifted his sword higher still, until his hands were above his own head. He brought them down, plunging the weapon towards Zhao.

 

And then a gust of wind pushed him away from Zhao, and Aang stood between them.

 

“Sokka! How could you even think about ending him! He’s defenseless, he-” Aang was cut off by the sound of a Zuko crying out as he fell to the ground.

 

“We’ll finish this later!” Sokka said, before rushing to face Azula.

 

Azula stood over the masked firebender, a nagging feeling of familiarity tugging at her. She began to suspect the identity of her opponent. The twin swords, the way he redirected her lightning as only one man in the world could. She reached down to remove the mask, but stopped when a stream of water caught her in the chest. She slid back a few feet and raised a fist to fight the waterbender.

 

“Do not touch him, you monster.” Katara said icily, bending the water with one arm as the other hung limp at her side. She had grown to like this ‘Lee’ despite herself. They had spent only a day together planning her brother's rescue, but she found that she considered him a friend.

 

Azula grit her teeth as Katara’s words brought unwanted visions of her mother, Ursa. She punched out flame at the girl, only for Sokka to intercept it with his sword. She met his eyes for a moment and found them to be filled with determination. Perhaps she had imagined whatever had been there before.

 

“I admit it.” Azula said. “I am a monster, a-” She was cut off when the First Son spoke.

 

“Liar! I checked.” Sokka said, sword pointed at Azula. Azula had been about to monologue about how she was going to take them all prisoner while Zhao regained his senses. Her plan left her mind at Sokka’s statement. What did that even mean, he checked? She opened her mouth to speak again, but was silenced when the Avatar’s beast landed beside her and swatted her away with a paw.

 

Even as she watched, her two prisoners and the waterender climbed up onto the bison, Sokka carrying the masked man. They took off in an instant, and Azula’s heart sank. She wished now very much that she hadn’t sent word to her father of their capture. Despite that failure, she thought she had accomplished the mission her father had sent her on. The man in the mask… had it been her brother?

 

---

Katara’s hands were covered with a soft blue light as she healed Zuko’s shoulder. They had removed his mask when they had escaped. She and Aang had been shocked to see the familiar ruined face of their enemy, but Sokka had not so much as blinked. He said that he had known all along, ever since seeing him with his third eye on the stairs. He shrugged when asked why he had said nothing, saying that he believed they had to trust him for the time being.

 

Aang steered Appa back to where Zuko had found Katara. He had been overjoyed to find that his staff had been tucked safely away in the saddle. Sokka was surprised and thankful to find his boomerang was there too. He had thought it was lost, and losing this was not something he wanted to explain to his father.

 

Aang and Sokka carried Zuko down from the bison. They laid him gently on a pile of leaves and propped his head up, and then they waited for him to awake. They did not have to wait long before Zuko stirred, and opened his eyes. He blinked slowly before he fixed his eyes on Aang.

 

“You know, a hundred years ago I had friends all over the world, even in the Fire Nation. I used to visit my friend Kuzon there all the time. If you and I knew each other back then, do you think we could have been friends too?”

 

Zuko clenched a fist, half ready to lash out at the Avatar. Before he could move, his eyes fell on Katara and Sokka. He remembered how they had defended him when he lost his battle with Azula, and of how well he and Katara had gotten along. He relaxed his hand and sighed.

 

“Yeah, I think so.” He said, before getting to his feet. He found that his dao blades had been laid beside him and he replaced them in their sheath. Without another word, Zuko walked away into the night.

Chapter 11: Family Conflict

Katara, Sokka, and Aang packed up camp the morning after the escape from the Ilah colony stronghold. All through the night, Sokka’s mind was occupied by two things: his looming argument with Aang, and the nagging sense that he had forgotten something. Whatever it was that he had forgotten, he felt that it was important. Despite this, he was under the impression that he did not want to remember what it was.

 

“Sokka.”

 

The First Son stiffened. It was Aang that had spoken, and Sokka knew what was about to happen. They were about to discuss Zhao…

 

“Yeah?” He said, looking at his friend.

 

“Why did you do it? Why did you try to…” Aang said. As he spoke his expression grew dark, as if a stormcloud had rolled in to cover the once clear sky.

 

“What are you guys talking about? What did Sokka try to do?” Katara asked curiously. Aang’s expression softened, and he rubbed the back of his head awkwardly.

 

“When we were fighting Zhao, Sokka was going to…” Aang trailed off, unsure of how to progress. Sokka exhaled and looked at them. Aang looked sad, disappointed in him. Katara looked confused.

 

“I tried to kill him. He was down, and I had the opportunity. If Aang hadn’t stopped me then Zhao would be dead.”

 

Katara gasped, her eyes grew wide and her mouth fell open. “What?! How- No, wait, I must be misunderstanding you. Did you say that Zhao was down? Do you mean like coming down to firebend at you?”

 

“No. Aang had knocked him around with airbending, he was basically unconscious.” Sokka said as he returned to packing up their belongings. “Zhao’s never going to stop chasing us, and there’s no good left in him. Not like Zuko, Azula or her two friends. He’s just… rotten.”

 

“You were going to kill a defenseless man?” Katara said in a small voice, staring at her brother in disbelief.

 

“Yes.” Sokka said calmly. “This is war. Sometimes you have to kill, even if you don’t want to. I looked inside of him and I could see nothing but darkness. If I have the chance again I'll take it. It doesn’t matter if he’s sleeping, awake, eating, or using the bathroom. The world would be a better place without him in it.”

 

He stood up from his pack and began to turn, only to be knocked off his feet when Katara struck him with a jet of water. He landed hard on his back and coughed. He tried to rise but Katara had frozen him in place.

 

“Katara, what are you doing?” Sokka said calmly, looking at her. She was incredibly angry, he realized. Aang was upset too, but for the moment he was too shocked at Katara’s outburst to do anything but gawk. Sokka understood that Aang was upset, but Katara’s reaction had surprised him. Why was she so furious with him?

 

“I can’t believe you would do something like that! You never would’ve done it back home, and Dad wouldn’t either! How could you?! Why…?” Katara said, her emotions leaking into her voice.

 

“Why? Because I had to. Zhao told me that he would never stop hunting us, he swore he would not rest until our entire family was wiped out. Our grandfather killed his father, and now he’s sworn revenge on our entire family.”

 

“And so you decided to kill him in cold blood!?”

 

“It wasn’t in cold blood! We-” He was beginning to protest her statement but Katara cut him off.

 

“Your blood is always cold! It has been since you made you deal with that spirit! Whatever he promised you, it's not worth it! It’s changing you, it’s making you into something else, something worse!” Katara was yelling now, on her feet and pointing an accusatory finger right at his face.

 

“It’s turning you into something terrible!” Katara’s voice began to weaken, as her anger turned to sorrow and grief. “Sometimes it’s… it’s like you’re dead inside. I don’t mean when you enter the void, but when we’re talking and having fun, you don’t laugh or smile anymore. You don’t get happy, or angry, just... sad.  Mom’s gone, and we haven’t seen Dad in years. And sometimes, it’s like you're not even here anymore.”

 

Katara’s eyes were rimmed with tears. “Don’t go, Sokka. Don’t leave me alone. Whatever this power is, you have to set it aside!”

 

The ice holding Sokka melted, and he sat up. Aang placed a hand on Katara’s shoulder, and she hugged him. She wiped her eyes with her sleeve. Sokka rubbed his eyes.

 

“I can’t.” He said softly. Katara looked at him. “Can’t or won’t?”

 

“Won’t”

 

“Why?” Katara said, choking out the word past a lump in her throat.

 

Sokka took a deep breath. He hadn’t shared all the details of his first trip into the spirit world with them, but he thought that now he should. “When I first met Koh, I didn’t want to take up his offer. I didn’t trust him, so I turned him down. But then he told me something that made me change my mind.”

 

“He told me that I could leave, but I wasn't strong enough. He told me that you would die, and that I would be too weak to save you.”

 

Katara and Aang looked at him in shock. The fact that this spirit would foretell of Katara’s death was unsettling, disturbing, horrifying. It weighed over them like a sandstorm at the edge of the desert.

 

“He lied.” Aang said. He didn’t know if that was true, strictly speaking, but he wanted it to be. “There’s no way that could happen.”

 

“I don’t think he was,” Sokka said. “I don’t know for sure, but I don’t think the F- the guy can lie.”

 

Sokka stopped himself from using Koh’s moniker. He doubted that revealing that he had bonded with a spirit called the Face Stealer was something he should reveal right now.

 

“That doesn’t mean that he was being honest, does it? I mean, I am going to die eventually. Everyone is.”

 

‘I don’t know, Katara.” Sokka said, shaking his head. “If you mastered waterbending then maybe, but until then I can’t put it aside.”

 

“Well, let’s compromise.” Said Aang. “We’ll go straight to the north pole. If we move fast then we can be at the northern air temple in just a few days, and after that it’s a straight shot to the north pole. We can be there in a little more than a week.”

 

Sokka glared at Aang. “If that’s so then why did you say it would take another month at least to make it there?”

 

“Uh, I wanted to give Appa a chance to rest. You know, to not tire him out too much.”  Aang smiled as rubbed his head, blushing. The truth was that he wanted to show Katara and Sokka some sights along the way. That, and he didn’t know how much time he And Katara would get together while learning waterbending.

 

“Okay, that does seem fair.” Sokka took another deep breath and exhaled slowly. “Alright. If you promise there will be no more distractions, no more side trips. Just a straight shot from here to the air temple and then the north pole.”

 

Aang and Katara nodded in unison. Sokka squinted at them. “Alright then. I’ll stop using them. But if I need to, I will open myself up to the shadow once again.”

 

Sokka closed his eyes. He again searched his mind for the source of Koh’s power. He found the gate, and closed it once more. It was easier now, as if the act of opening and closing the gate made it smoother. 

 

Sokka opened his eyes. He immediately felt.. Lighter. As if a weight had lifted off his shoulders. For the first time in months, a joke sprang to mind. He grinned lopsidedly, before looking at Katara and Aang. The two of them looked at him warily, as if not sure what to expect.

 

“Hey, Katara, did you trap me in ice just so that I wouldn’t… lose my cool?”

 

They looked at him, astonished. Then Aang laughed and Katara snorterd.

 

“That’s the worst joke I’ve ever heard!” She said, before giving Sokka a hug. She was so glad, so thankful, that at last her brother seemed to be back to normal.

 

---

“There you are, Prince Zuko, I was- What happened to you? Why is there a burn on your-” Iroh said. Zuko cut him off with a curt shake of the head. “My quarters.”

 

The two Fire Nation royals made their way swiftly to Zuko’s room. Once there, Zuko closed the door and secured the windows and vents. He sighed and leaned against the bulkhead before sliding to the ground.

 

“Uncle, I’ve messed up.” Zuko said, before he explained everything that had happened since his departure the previous day.

 

“It’s Azula. I’m sure she’s figured it out by now. It was set in stone the moment I redirected lightning.” Zuko hung his head. He was ashamed, and conflicted. He felt that he had in some way betrayed his nation when he helped rescue Aang. He had done it to save his honor, but he had acted against the Fire Nation's best interest.

 

“This… is not good.” Iroh said, pinching the bridge of his nose. He swallowed the urge to berate his nephew. Zuko had a habit of not thinking through his decisions, why could he just not stop and think? The boy could, obviously he was smart enough for that, but for some reason he never did.

 

“Prince Zuko, we need a plan. It’s only a matter of time until Azula catches up to us, and when that happens she is bound to haul you back to the Fire Lord.”

 

Zuko nodded at his uncle’s words. The older man spoke the truth. She would bring him back to their father, and no amount of explaining on his part would inspire mercy from the Fire Lord. Zuko stared out of the sealed window, pondering his situation. He needed to keep out of Azula’s grasp until he could deliver the Avatar to his father. He couldn’t stay on his ship. No, that would be too obvious. He would be to easy to spot, both for Aang and Azula. 

 

He tapped his chin, wondering what to do. He knew where Aang was going, yes, and he knew that Zhao would surely try and capture him there. As an admiral, Zhao would have the authority to conscript a fleet of ships to lay siege to the northern Water Tribe. In fact Zhao himself was proud and arrogant enough to do just that, and Zuko was sure that Azula would go with him to the north. Now that she had entered the fray, he doubted that she would return home. Zuko smiled as his plan began to form in the center of his mind.

 

---

Azula stared at the ceiling of her cabin. She and Admiral Zhao had set off first thing in the morning after the Avatar’s escape. Mai and Ty Lee had come with her, of course, but Ty Lee was acting strange. Well a different kind of strange. Instead of her usual acrobatic and bubbly self, she was quiet and still. She had been acting more like Mai to be honest, and it wasn’t a change that Azula fully supported. Their group dynamic was part of what made them such an effective team. She was aggressive and commanding. Mai was cool and even keeled. Ty Lee was lighthearted and merciful. Without the combination of all those factors she doubted that her team would be as effective a weapon as they should be.

 

More than that, she rather liked Ty Lee the way she was. She didn’t know what had happened to shake her so, and she didn’t know how to go about bringing her friend out of whatever funk she had fallen into. Azula was gifted at many things, but cheering up her friends had never been one of them. That had always been Ty Lee’s area. But now Ty Lee was the one in need of support, and Azula guessed she would be the one to give it. She wasn’t exactly in the best mood herself, actually. They were on their way to confront Zuko, for Azula was nearly certain that he had been the man disguised as the Blue Spirit. She didn’t relish the idea of her brother being the one to rescue the Avatar, for that would mean that he had truly turned against her, and her last childlike hope for her brother's affection would crumble.

 

Azula rose from her bed. She was being silly, Zuko had never cared for her. She didn’t really care. No, what she was upset about was that Zuko had turned his back on the Fire Nation. That was it, not some stupid childhood need for her brother to love her. No, she had her father, and that was enough.

 

Her father. Fire Lord Ozai. The man had taught Azula firebending, strategy, all sorts of things really. He loved her, unlike Ursa. Her mother had thought she was a monster and abandoned Azula without saying goodbye. Zuko had never cared for her, even when she had come to warn him of their grandfather's command of his death. True, she had warned him in taunting fashion, but only because their father didn’t approve of sentiment. Going to her brother's room and telling him to run? Begging him to get away from the palace and save himself? No, that would have gained her fathers ire. But going to taunt him? To tease him over his pending doom? That was all she could have done. Zuko should have known that, did know that, but had never acknowledged it. Why? Because, just as he had said when they were small, Zuko hated Azula.

 

Azula shook her head, annoyed with herself for letting her thoughts and feelings run away from her. Why was she letting herself dwell on a past that hardly mattered? She didn’t know. Azula rolled her eyes at herself and noticed that her hand had floated up to gently touch the tip of her nose. Her eyebrows furrowed at the action, and she forced her hand to fall back to her side.

 

Azula marched her way to find her friends. She was sure that Ty Lee would still be sulking over whatever it was that had upset her, and she was going to find out what it was and set it right. She didn’t have to search very hard, as it turned out. She found Mai and Ty Lee sitting on the deck near the prow. Mai was lounging in the sun and Ty Lee was sitting in the shade of gunnel, her arms curled around her knees as she looked out into the middle distance. Azula crossed her arms and stared at Ty Lee.

 

“What is it?” She said, tapping her foot impatiently. Ty Lee looked up at her, a look of mild confusion in her eyes. 

 

“What?” Ty Lee replied. Mai opened one eye lazily and looked over at the two of them before she spoke.

 

“What is it that’s making you act so weirdly? All day you’ve just been sulking and staring out into nothing. It was a good change of pace, but now it’s just depressing.”

 

Azula nodded. “Out with it Ty Lee, we’re your friends. You can tell us.”

 

Ty Lee’s lip quivered and Azula was worried that the chi blocker was going to cry, but something even worse happened. Ty Lee jumped to her feet and tackled Azula in a bear hug.

 

“Azula! You really do care!” She said while Azula writhed desperately trying to untangle herself from the acrobat.

 

“Yeah, sure, now let go of me before I shoot you full of lightning.” Azula growled, and Ty Lee released her and sat up. Azula huffed and straightened her hair before coming to her feet again. That was completely unexpected. She glanced at Mai, whose eyes were wide in surprise and amusement. Ty Lee was known to hug people, but Azula almost always managed to avoid the display of affection. The fact that she had not only failed to do so, but had also been brought to the deck was evidently enough to put emotions on even Mai’s placid face.

 

Azula glared at Ty Lee who blushed, slightly embarrassed over her actions. Ty Lee rubbed her face awkwardly and Azula made a motion with her hand that seemed to say, Let's hear it.

 

“Uh, well… It was that Water Tribe boy.” She said at last. Azula blinked, surprised at her friend's words. Ty Lee had said he was cute, and Azula was inclined to agree, but that didn’t seem to be enough to push Ty Lee into melancholy.

 

“Sokka? What about him?” Azula said, raising an eyebrow. Mai looked over at her, surprised to find that Azula knew his name.

 

“His aura… it was, well, it felt wrong, it looked tainted. Like some dark spirit had planted its hooks into him. He was so full of shadow that I could barely see any light, and it shone as if from far away. He didn’t really seem fully human, almost like there was something else inside.”

 

Azula nodded, thinking back to that empty thing that she had seen when she had first encountered him. That emptiness had filled, and she thought she had imagined it. But now that Ty Lee said that she too had seen something, Azula couldn’t help feeling like she hadn’t. Maybe her friend was right, and there were two things inside of that man.

 

“There was something off about him.” Azula said softly. “When I was interrogating him with Admiral Zhao, he called me a liar. That’s nothing new, of course, but he said it as soon as the lie left my mouth. It’s like he could tell. And when I looked into his eyes…”

 

Azula shuddered, remembering that horrible ocean colored emptiness. It was as if he was standing right in front of her again, and she was falling straight into that sea blue abyss.

 

“He didn’t seem human at first.” Azula finished.

 

Mai glanced back and forth between the two of them. It was bizarre. Ty Lee was depressed and Azula was rattled, both of which were things you didn’t see often. 

 

“Is that why you’ve been so..” Mai trailed off and made a vague gesture with her hand.

 

“Uh, kind of. When I saw his aura,” Ty Lee said, “I froze. I couldn’t move, it was like I was cornered by a crocodile-shark. I don’t know why, but I couldn’t… It’s just, maybe if I hadn’t then we could’ve stopped them from escaping. We don’t know where the Avatar is now, so who knows when we’ll get another chance? I feel like it’s my fault.”

 

Ty Lee’s voice became less steady as she finished, her eyes beginning to water. Azula looked away and over the starboard side of the ship. Ty Lee blamed herself? Why would she do that? Azula, Zhao, Ty Lee, and the countless soldiers stationed at the compound all bore a share of the blame. The only one who hadn’t truly failed in some capacity was Mai…

 

“It’s not your fault, Ty Lee.” Azula said. “If anyone’s to blame for this failure it’s me. I decided that the Avatar would be left alone without guards. I decided to bind Sokka with rope instead of chains. I was the one who let them escape when we fought.”

 

Ty Lee gasped. “No Azula, it’s not! It has to-!” Azula cut her off, refusing to let her get more than a few words out.

 

“Oh? Who's fault is it then? Zhao? He was following my orders. The soldiers? You? Mai? No. The only one responsible for this fiasco is me. And once word reaches the capital, I’m sure my father will agree. The only other person we could blame is Zuko, and I don’t know for sure that he was the Blue Spirit.”

 

“Zuko?!” Mai asked, a touch of emotion coloring her usual even voice. Azula nodded.

 

“The dao blades, the way he redirected lightning, the mask. It fits. He trained under Piandao to use those swords. My uncle is the only man who can redirect lightning. The Blue Spirit was my mothers favorite character in ‘Love Amongst the Dragons’.

 

Ty Lee looked up at Azula, her eyes distant. As if lost in thought. 

 

“Even if it was him, that would hardly matter. My father sent me to discover the truth, and to bring Zuko home as a prisoner if he had turned against me. The Fire Nation, I mean.”

 

The three of them sat in silence for a while. No one wanted to speak, the tension between the three of them had grown and waned with Azula’s monologue. Finally, Ty Lee spoke.

 

“It’s going to be fine. We’ll recapture the Avatar, and soon we’ll discover the truth about Zuko.”

 

Mai didn’t say anything. She laid back in her chair and stared into the clear blue sky.

 

Less than an hour passed before the port in which her brother's ship was reported to be docked came into view. Soon they too had docked and disembarked onto the pier. Azula, her friends, along with Zhao and a group of his soldiers walked along the dock and towards Zuko’s ship. They had nearly made it when a man in a Fire Navy uniform disembarked from Zuko’s ship and met them along the pier.

 

“I am Lieutenant Ji.” The man said with a bow. “I am second in command of Prince Zuko’s vessel. I am sorry to tell you that he and General Iroh have left the ship for the evening.”

 

Azula stared at the lieutenant. She could see that the man spoke the truth, there was no deception in his bearing. She could usually tell when someone was being dishonest with her, though not always. People could lie to her, some could even get away with it, but she usually figured it out before more than a few seconds passed.

 

“Where are my brother and uncle? Surely they would have told you where they were going.” She said, still eyeing the lieutenant.

 

“Uh, yes, they did. General Iroh wanted to visit the local tea house, but Prince Zuko was adamant that they go to the shrine on the outskirts of town. He wouldn’t explain why, and he was very… uh, insistent about it.”

 

Azula rolled her eyes. She had heard from Admiral Zhao about her brother's change in character since his banishment. He had become an ill tempered young man, lashing out those around him and showing little respect for those under his command.

 

“Very well, Lieutenant. In the name of Fire Lord Ozai, you are not to take this ship out to sea until after we have spoken with Prince Zuko. Any attempt to do so will be considered treason and your ship will be sunk.”

 

With that, Azula turned and left. Her retinue followed suit and they made their way to the shrine that Ji had specified. It did not take them long, for Zhao had seen fit to bring with them a soldier who had been stationed here for a number of years before being put under his command. Before as much as a half hour had passed, they stood before the shrine. 

 

Iroh was standing a few feet outside of the shrine, watching as his nephew seemed to be bent in prayer. Zuko was not wearing his imperial armor, instead he had dressed himself in a simple outfit of brown and gray. His hair was pulled high into a phoenix tail, but a few days worth of stubble shadowed his scalp. He did not turn around when Azula arrived. He did not acknowledge their presence. He merely reamined on his knees, and touched his forehead to the ground, bathed in the light of the setting sun.

 

Eventually Zuko stood, and he picked up his dao blades. He slung them over his shoulder before facing Azula. His eyes fell on her, and then to Zhao, Ty Lee, and finally coming to rest on Mai. Zuko smiled.

 

“It’s good to see you again.” He said, turning his attention back to his sister. Azula snorted and rolled her eyes at him.

 

“You mean aside from last night when you freed the Avatar?” Azula asked, watching him carefully. She was sure it had been him, but she wanted to get his reaction. She wanted to know, for certain, that he had betrayed her. No, the Fire Nation. Azula clenched her teeth, this was getting ridiculous, why did she care? He had turned against her long ago.

 

“Yes, aside from that. It’s been too long, Azula. It’s a shame we had to meet like thi-” Zuko spoke to Azula, but he was cut off when Iroh started shouting at him.

 

“You did what!?” Iroh said, rounding on Zuko with a ferocity that Azula had never seen from the man. Zuko too seemed taken aback, stepping away from the older man.

 

“He and the waterbender infiltrated the stronghold at the Ilah colony. They caused massive damage to the facility and freed the Avatar and the First Son of the South. They’re probably halfway to the north pole by now.” Zhao said, looking at Iroh with an expression of delighted shock. Was the old general actually going to side with them? Azula was at a loss. She had expected iroh to be in on Zuko’s escapades. She hadn’t seriously considered that he might not have known, and certainly not that he might side against Zuko.

 

“Uncle, you have to understand,” Zuko said, “I had no choice! If I’m not the one to capture the Avatar then I won’t be able to come home!”

 

“No, you have to understand! The Avatar is the Fire Nation’s greatest threat! His capture is far more important than any individual person!” Iroh was shaking his head, his fists clenched at his sides. “You should have left him with Zhao! You could have doomed your whole country! For what?! The chance to capture him again later on? Zuko! You never think things through!”

 

Azula wasn’t sure what to say. She had planned to arrest Zuko as well as her uncle, but now that Iroh seemed to be turning on Zuko she wasn’t sure. She decided that Zuko had to be taken into custody, and brought back to their father.

 

“Admiral Zhao, arrest the traitor and escort him back to the ship for transport to the Fire Nation.” Zhao stepped forward, as well as several of his men. Before they could come close to him, Zuko unleashed an impressive display of firebending that sent them all to the ground.

 

“I am no traitor, Azula. I will capture the Avatar, and the children of Hakoda. I will bring them to our father and he will restore my place on the throne.” Zuko said, taking a fighting stance.

 

“I doubt that, dumdum.” Azula said, using the childhood taunt that he had always hated. Oddly, its use brought a smile to her brother's face. He ignited a fire dagger in each hand. His eyes narrowed. So that was it then. He had resolved to fight her, and turned against her fully. She had expected as much. She stepped forwards to face him, but Iroh threw up an arm.

 

“I am sorry, Princess Azula,” He said, at which Azula raised an eyebrow. “But it is because of my failure as a mentor that it has come to this.”

 

Generally Iroh, the dragon of the west, stepped into a firebending stance. Zuko’s eyes widened in shock, and he stepped back and closer to the forest. ”Surrender, Prince Zuko. You cannot win.”

 

“Uncle, please.” Zuko said, backing away from the old general. Iroh closed his eyes for a moment and looked away. When he opened them again they were wet. Iroh took a deep breath, and punched out with both fists, sending twin jets of spiraling flame towards his nephew. Zuko managed to disperse the flame, and shot back with an attack of his own. Zuko’s own fire went wide. He clearly wasn’t willing to hurt Iroh.

 

Iroh and Zuko fought furiously, Iroh gained ground and Zuko fled closer and closer to the forest. Eventually, Iroh stopped his firebending, and began to cycle his arms in the precise and deadly motions that necessitated the generation of lightning.

 

Azula’s eyes widened in shock, and Mai opened her mouth as if to cry out, only to close it again at the last minute. Zuko looked haggard and exhausted from his battle with their uncle. Azula wasn’t sure if he would be able to redirect the lightning, or even survive it at all. She watched in silence as iroh shot a bolt of the cold blooded fire at his nephew. Zuko caught the bolt and was pushed backwards several yards before he managed to redirect the lightning back at them. He had not aimed for iroh, or Zhao, or any of the others. No, instead he aimed for the shrine.

 

A fireball blossomed up and the air was filled with dust and debris as the old place exploded. Azula shielded her eyes and faced away from the explosion. When she returned her gaze to where her brother had been she saw nothing. Her uncle had been knocked down by the force of the explosion, and he was only now getting to his feet.

 

Azula grit her teeth. She had confirmed her brother's treachery as her father had commanded, but she had not taken him prisoner. Twice now she had failed him. How long until he decided that she wasn’t good enough? How long before he decided to cast her aside?

 

She shook her head and moved towards her uncle. There was some good news at least. Iroh had not turned against them, and maybe he hadn’t been as opposed to her as she had assumed.

---

“So Mom’s not in the spirit world?” Katara asked.

 

Sokka shook his head. “No, apparently most people go on to some other place or reincarnate. That’s what Kuruk said. I think there was something else but for some reason I can’t remember what it was.”

 

He scratched Momo behind the ears absently as he tried to remember what it was that he had forgotten. Something from when he was in the spirit world… The image of a blushing snake floated to the fore of his mind and he laughed.

 

“What’s so funny?” Aang asked from his seat on Appa’s head.

 

“There was this snake with a sunburn.” Sokka said, wiping a tear from his eye. “You really had to be there.”

 

Aang smiled and turned his attention forward again. He looked down from the horizon and noticed a fleet of ships anchored along the shore. They were Water Tribe ships.

 

“Sokka! Katara! Look!” He pointed down towards them.” The two siblings looked in the direction he had indicated, and Katara shouted in excitement. “I recognize those ships! That’s Dad’s fleet!”

 

The Avatar guided his bison down towards the sea, so that his friends could at long last reunite with their father.

Chapter 12: Childish Things

Appa landed behind a hill near the Water Tribe fleet. It was rather small, less than ten ships in total. Sokka wondered where the rest of the warriors were, for there should have been hundreds of ships. He would have to ask his father when they met up with him.

 

“Why did we land here instead of closer to their camp?” Katara asked, looking at Aang quizzically. The Avatar gave her a mischievous grin before he replied.

 

“I think it would be funny to sneak up on them.” Aang said, rubbing his hands together evilly. Katara looked at him with a surprised look on her face, but Sokka matched his friend's expression.

 

“That’s the best idea I’ve ever heard!” He said, giving Aang a high five. “We’ll sneak into his tent, and eat his blubbered seal jerky! He doesn’t share it with anyone, so when he finds out we ate it he’ll be so mad! The best part is that he won’t say anything about it because he will be so happy to see us!”

 

Katara glared at them with exasperation. “We haven’t seen Dad in years, and the first thing you want to do is steal his food?”

 

Sokka and Aang beamed at her, and her brother nodded furiously. Katara snorted. At least Sokka was back to normal.

 

“As funny as that would be, it won’t work. Your father doesn’t let his favorite snack leave his person, ever since a business of ferrets ate all of it last spring.” An unknown voice said from beside Appa.

 

Team Avatar leapt into action. Aang whipped hsi staff around to point at the newcomer. Sokka drew his sword and boomerang to face the stranger and Katara bent the water from her pouch. The two Water Tribe siblings relaxed immediately when they recognized the man.

 

“Bato!” They cried in unison as they sheathed their weapons and ran to embrace the man. Aang relaxed as his friends rejoiced with Bato. The three of them talked for a few seconds before Katara led Bato to Aang.

 

“Bato, this is Aang. He’s a friend of ours.” She said, and Aang bowed to the older man.

 

“It’s an honor to meet the Avatar. I hope these two haven’t caused you too much trouble.” Bato said with an outstretched hand. Aang took it and they shook in the fashion of the southern continent.

 

“No, if anything I’ve been the one getting them into trouble.” He said with a laugh. Bato smiled.

 

“What are you all doing here? The last we heard you were guarding the rivers east of Ba Sing Se.” Sokka said.

 

“Most of the fleet is still there, but how did you hear about that? We haven’t sent word back home in case our letters were intercepted.”

 

“Welllll it’s a bit complicated, but we’ve been around a bit. Heard some things and what not. We can tell you guys all about it, but let’s go see Dad first. I’m sure he’d want to hear about it.” Sokka said, and Bato nodded.

 

“Well, if you still want to play a joke on him, it’s the perfect time. He’s planning your rescue from the Fire Nation, not that you need one it seems. I guess the news of your capture was just a rumor.”

 

“No,” Katara said with a grin. “They were captured alright. But we managed to rescue them yesterday.”

 

“What?!” Bato exclaimed, “How?”

 

Sokka shook his head. “We’ll explain everything later, let's go meet the other warriors first. Now, what kind of joke did you have in mind?”

---

Hakoda was pouring over a map of terrain surrounding the stronghold his son and the Avatar were allegedly being held in. Completely absorbed in his planning, the chief failed to notice the arrival of Bato and his new companions. He pointed to the river that fed the town.

 

“This river supplies the stronghold with fish and freshwater. Do we have a map detailing it’s tributaries before this point?” He asked, without looking up.

 

“No, I don’t think so. Katara, Sokka, do you have one?” Bato said.

 

Sokka shook his head while fighting his urge to snicker. Katara did the same, before speaking.

 

“No, but we could go back to the stronghold and get one. I’m sure they’d let us borrow a map or two.”

 

Hakoda blinked. Go to the Fire Nation and ask for a map to use to attack them? Were they being serious? This was no time for games, this was serious. They had to rescue Sokka and the Avatar.

 

“I don’t know, Katara.” Sokka said, “It doesn’t seem likely that they’ll give us anything since we burned down half their colony.”

 

“Sokka has a point.” Piped Aang, joining in on the fun. Chief Hakoda had yet to look up from his map. He had dark circles under his eyes. Aang assumed that the man had been focusing on his mission since he heard of his and Sokka’s capture.

 

“Sokka’s right, the Fire Nation aren't in the habit of…” Hakoda trailed off. He blinked again. He shook his head and looked up to see his children sitting beside Bato, who was trying to suppress a grin. Hakoda stood up, and looked at them in disbelief.

 

“Hi, Dad.” Katara said, waving at him awkwardly. Sokka saw the look on his father’s face and the laughter immediately left his eyes. Maybe this hadn’t been the best idea, teasing their dad when he was so worked up. He scratched the back of his head and coughed. Hakoda stepped towards them and began to close the few feet that separated them. In an instant he had leapt on them both, lifting them into the air with a powerful embrace. They spun around and he was laughing joyfully with the pair of them.

 

“You’re okay! Both of you!” He said, setting them on their feet again. “You’ve gotten so tall.” 

 

Hakoda smiled warmly while the warriors around him laughed and cheered. The High Chief noticed a young boy standing not too far from them, and he turned to him. “You must be the Avatar.”

 

Aang nodded, extending a hand. “Yeah, I’m Aang. It’s a pleasure to meet you, Chief Hakoda.”

 

“The pleasure is mine,” Hakoda said, “This calls for a celebration. We’ll have a fine meal tonight, and you can tell us all about your adventures.”

 

---

Aang grimaced as he forced himself to swallow the stewed sea prunes. A hundred years ago, though it was only a matter of months to him, Water Tribe cuisine was famous the world over. Monk Gyatso had never let him try any, always saying that it was an acquired taste. Aang was now even more grateful for the man’s wisdom. The food was terrible.

 

He went back to the seaweed noodles. Those were okay. Not good in his opinion, but bearable. He finished his food and wiped his mouth. One of the warriors offered him more, but Aang politely declined. He had enough challenges ahead of him, and he did not need to add the monstrosity of Water Tribe cooking to the list.

 

“You three have gotten into quite a few adventures.” Hakoda said with a smile. “Helping the Avatar. Fighting Fire Nation royalty, weird meetings in the spirit world, you’ve done quite a bit of living in the past couple of months. We knew that you had left home, and that you were traveling with the Avatar, but the scope of your adventures wasn’t something we’d heard.”

He took out a set of rolled up papers from a bag at his side and unfurled them. Aang looked to see what they were and found a set of wanted posters for them all. He looked at them and saw that they had official monikers other than their real names. 

 

“Why don’t I get a cool nickname?” Sokka said as he crossed his arms. Aang looked at Sokka’s poster. His image had been labeled by his official title in the Water Tribe. Aang was referred to as the last airbender. He read Katara’s poster and his eyebrows raised. He whistled. 

 

Sokka grabbed his sister's bounty and read it aloud. “Wanted alive: Katara the Sea Wolf. Warning: dangerous.”

 

He passed it to Katara, before pouting and staring at his own poster. “That’s just not fair.”

 

“By order of Princess Azula, the waterbender known as Katara the Sea Wolf is to be captured alive and delivered into the custody of Princess Azula or Admiral Zhao.” Katara read, smiling a little. “I guess I made her mad when we fought the other day.”

 

“You must have.” Aang said, a little conflicted by the fact that his friends were wanted now too. Would they have been in danger if he hadn’t brought them with him? No, certainly not as much. Eventually they would have joined the war, that is if he couldn’t stop it first.

 

“So what are you guys doing so far north?” Sokka asked, “When we were at the fire temple Zhao mentioned that you were guarding the rivers east of Ba Sing Se.”

 

Hakoda put his bowl down. Bato looked away from Sokka, and the other warriors seemed to busy themselves with whatever they were doing. This did not go unnoticed by the three friends, but they didn’t address it. Eventually, Hakoda spoke again.

 

“We were visiting our sister tribe. Chief Arnook and I negotiated a treaty for mutual support. Once we fulfill our end of the bargain, he will send some of his waterbenders to join us in the Earth Kingdom, and a smaller group will travel to the south pole.”

 

“That’s great!” Katara said. “What is our tribe going to do?”

 

“Our warriors and shipwrights have long been superior to theirs. We were going home to collect some of our best masters and shipwrights to share their knowledge.” Hakoda said, glancing at Sokka.

 

“That doesn’t seem like much, considering that they’re joining the war again after more than eighty years.” Sokka said curiously.

 

Hakoda sighed. “No, it’s not. It’s not all, either. We’re merging the tribes into a single nation again.”

 

“What? How are you going to do that?” Aang asked, confused by the idea.

 

“Through marriage.” Hakoda said, looking at his bowl. Sokka and Katara exchanged worried looks.

 

“... You’re gonna marry Chief Arnook?” Aang said, completely lost. His question was met with complete silence for a few seconds, before Bato burst with laughter. It wasn’t long before the other warriors joined him, and even Hakoda laughed a little at the idea.

 

Eventually the laughter died down.. Hakoda shook his head, and wiped his eyes. “I think we all needed that; it’s been a long couple of weeks.”

 

“No, I am not going to marry Arnook. I have arranged for Sokka to marry Princess Yue, Arnook’s daughter.” He said, looking at his son. Sokka’s face paled. He was going to be married? To some strange woman he had never even met? Suki’s face floated across his mind and he grit his teeth. He had hoped that if they saw each other again then maybe…

 

“Yue is a nice girl,” Hakoda said, “She’s a little younger than Sokka is. She’ll be sixteen in a month or so.”

 

At least she wasn’t thirty years old or something. And she was nice, according to his father. Still, this was not something that he had ever expected. In their tribe, marriage was usually an arrangement of love. Even for the High Chief or local chieftains, it was a rarity to have a political marriage.

 

“You’ll have to carve a betrothal necklace for her.” Hakoda said, shaking Sokka from his thoughts.

 

“What?” He asked.

 

“A betrothal necklace.”

 

“Oh, right, yeah. Sure thing, Dad.” Sokka said. He stood up. “I’m tired, I think I’ll turn in early.”

 

Sokka left the group of his friends and family, and walked towards where Appa lay unsaddled. Sokka started to gather his bedroll but found that he wasn’t actually all that sleepy. He shook his head and went for a walk along the shore. The waves lapped calmly along the beach, and the moon shone brightly in the cloudless sky.

 

It was nearly a quarter full now, and its beautiful light spilled across the foaming sea. The stars glittered in the sky like a million silver candles, shining brightly and yet sar far away he could hardly imagine it. Right now, even though he couldn’t explain it, he felt like them. All alone, even though the people he cared for the most weren’t far away.

 

He walked along the beach for a while, thinking. He climbed on top a stone large enough for a few people to sit on, and gazed at the sea. He pondered his future. He was going to marry a princess in a foreign land. It wasn’t much different from his home, but all the same; it wasn’t his home. When he was married, could he still travel with Aang and Katara? Or would he have to stay in the north? Maybe they would move to the south? He doubted it. Why would Arnook agree to let his daughter marry a stranger and move to the other side of the planet?

 

Sokka sighed and shook his head. He broke off a flat piece of stone from the rock he was sitting on and tossed it into the ocean. It skipped a few times before it was swallowed by a crashing wave. He was about to throw another when he heard someone climb up to sit beside him. Sokka glanced over his shoulder to see his dad coming to sit with him.

 

“I’m sorry, Sokka.” He said, placing a hand on the younger man's shoulder. Sokka jerked his head in his fathers direction. “I’m fine.. it’s just, I don’t know.”

 

Sokka sighed. “I’m not a kid anymore. I’ve been all over the world, I’ve fought and bled, I’ve even been to the spirit world a couple times. I just- I don’t want to marry a stranger. I know, it’s my duty to our tribe, and I will do it. I just don’t want to and that makes me feel like a kid. I’m being childish.”

 

Hakoda took his hand from Sokka’s shoulder, taking up the piece of stone his son had discarded. He tossed it, and it skipped a few times just as Sokka’s had. When at last it sank beneath the waves the man spoke.

 

“A very wise man once said,” Hakoda spoke softly, gazing out over the moonlit sea, “When I was a child, I used to talk like a child, think like a child, and reason like a child. When I became a man, I put away childish things.”

 

Sokka looked at his father. Hakoda maintained his steady watch over the waves, not looking at Sokka as he spoke again. “Another man added to it later, saying: When I became a man I put away childish things; such as the fear of childishness, or the desire to seem very grown up.”

 

“So you don’t think I’m being childish?” Sokka asked.

 

“Of course not. Anyone would be upset, to find out they were going to marry a woman they had never met. Honestly, you’re handling it better than I would have.” The Chief said.

 

“Really?”

 

“Of course. I have loved your mother since before I understood what love is. If Arnook had been a girl then your grandfather would have arranged the same thing that I have. I surely would have run away. I could never have imagined being with anyone else. Even now…” Hakoda trailed off, and his eyes grew distant. The loss of Kya weighed on him heavily, even now, nearly a decade later.

 

Sokka, for his part, completely failed to notice his fathers vacant expression. The mention of his grandfather had reminded him of what Zhao had said to him in his cell.

 

“Zhao said that Grandpa killed his father. He promised that he won’t stop chasing us until we’re all wiped out.”

 

Hakoda nodded. “Yeah, he keeps reminding me whenever we cross paths. The problem is, the man’s not as clever as he thinks. I’ve always defeated him, although we haven’t fought directly many times. Usually just raids on his bases or supply lines, guerrilla warfare. General Iroh, however; That man is dangerous. He’s far more formidable than his cousin.”

 

“What? Who’s his cousin?” Sokka asked, confused.

 

“Zhao.” Hakoda said. Sokka’s jaw dropped. Hakoda looked surprised. “What, didn’t you know? Every time we meet he gets all pompous and struts around saying ‘I shall avenge the death of my father, Prince Ozai, by stamping out the line of his killer!’ He really is ridiculous; I was three, I had nothing to do with that.  And the sideburns.”

 

Sokka closed his mouth. Well, it did make a degree of sense. Zhao didn’t seem overly competent as a commander, although he was a gifted firebender. If he was a member of the royal family it would explain his rise in the ranks.

 

Sokka decided to change the subject back to his engagement. “Going back to this Princess Yue.”

 

“Yeah?” Hakoda said, raising an eyebrow.

 

“is… is she..?” Now that he had started to ask him, he felt foolish. It didn’t matter. This time he was being childish.

 

“Is she what?”

 

“Is she pretty?” Sokka forced himself to say, a light blush coloring his dark skin. Hakoda only smiled. He nodded, and Sokka sagged in relief. “Well I have that going for me at least.”

 

Hakoda laughed at that, and after a moment Sokka joined him. Maybe things wouldn’t be so bad after all.

 

---

The evening after the confrontation with Zuko, Ty Lee watched as the last of Iroh’s luggage was brought aboard the ship. She was not sure how to feel about it. Azula had never gotten along with her uncle, at least not since before he laid siege to Ba Sing Se. The fact that she had invited the general to sail with them, and that Zhao had asked him to aid him in his quest to seize the Avatar and the north pole, was a bit of a surprise. Personally, Ty Lee had always thought the man was funny. 

 

She watched her friend carefully, from across the ship. Azula looked slightly annoyed, tapping her foot as her uncle spoke to her. The general pointed to a tsungi horn, and Azula rolled her eyes and waved a hand in a vague gesture. Ty Lee couldn’t make out the words, but General Iroh smiled and bowed. Ty Lee decided that she wanted to know what they were talking about, so the young acrobat leapt into a handstand and hand-walked over to them.

 

“...though, I’m not really sure why I am agreeing to let you have your music night. You haven’t ever given me anything that I would like after all. It doesn’t really seem fair.” Azula said. Ty Lee hadn’t heard the first part of her sentence. But she caught the end as she had come in range by then.

 

“What?” Iroh said in surprise. “I gave you many gifts in the palace when you were small.”

 

Azula scoffed and waved a hand. “That hardly counts Uncle, and it stopped when you left for Ba Sing Se.”

 

Iroh paused, and looked confused for a moment. A slight crease formed on his brow. Ty Lee flipped onto her feet and watched the two of them, her hands clasped nervously in front of her. Iroh raised a finger, and spoke again. “That is not entirely true, Princess Azula. While I did stop giving you and your brother presents when you grew older, I did send you both gifts when I broke through the wall of Ba Sing Se.”

 

Azula glared at him. “You sent me a doll, and Zuko the dagger of the surrendering general. I didn’t even like dolls.”

 

“You didn’t like it?” Iroh said, and he looked genuinely hurt. “But you loved playing with them when I left, I was sure you would have liked it better than some weapon. I sent Zuko the knife because he had always been fond of swords.”

 

“Had I known then that you had outgrown them, I would have given you something better, something less childish.” Iroh said. His words seemed to appease Azula, for her glare softened.

 

“It’s no matter, Uncle, it was a long time ago.” Azula said, and she turned to go. Iroh reached out a hand and lightly took hold of her arm.

 

“No, Princess Azula. I will endeavor to find a new gift to give you, to make up for my poor choice those long years ago. Even if now I can only offer wisdom, in time I shall find a suitable gift”

 

Azula didn’t react to her uncle's words at first, she just watched his eyes carefully. She saw that he was earnest, and decided to accept his words. She thought for a second. Iroh had once journeyed into the spirit world, and he was known to have insight towards those matters. Perhaps he could shed light on the mystery of whatever it was that made Sokka so… strange?

 

“Very well Uncle.” Azula said, returning her attention to him fully. As she did so she noticed Ty Lee, standing beside them. “There is a matter I could use the gift of your wisdom on. It concerns Ty Lee as well.”

 

Ty Lee jumped slightly at being dragged into whatever Azula had planned. Iroh glanced at her, and nodded. “Of course, Niece. But for the dispensing of proper wisdom, tea is required.”

 

Ty Lee smiled and Azula rolled her eyes. “Don’t you ever get sick of tea uncle?”

 

Iroh scowled. “Sick of tea? That’s like getting sick of breathing!”

 

Ty Lee laughed, and Azula shook her head. “As you wish Uncle, I’ll have tea delivered to my quarters.”

Fifteen minutes later, the three of them were sipping tea in Azula’s quarters. She sipped idly, and her uncle drained his cup swiftly. He poured himself another, and Ty Lee did the same.

 

“So, what is this matter you wished to hear my wisdom on?” Iroh siad, placing his cup on the low table that had been brought in. Azula paused, wondering if it was truly wise to trust her uncle. It was true that her father had taken his advice in his warmeetings, and the general was highly esteemed throughout the Fire Nation, but Azula was hesitant to confide in the man. All the same, there was a shortage of advisors on this expedition.

 

“There was something strange about the First Son.” Azula said, “I noticed it when Admiral Zhao was interrogating him. At first I thought he was putting on an act to throw us off, but then Ty Lee said she saw it too. She’s always claimed to see people’s auras, and when she met Sokka…”

 

“When I was fighting the waterbender,” The chi blocker said, “He managed to paralyze my arm. I mean, that's really not all that strange. But when I looked at him his aura stretched across the ground behind him like a shadow, and it moved by itself like it was alive. It looked like he wasn’t fully human, like some evil spirit had grabbed onto him somehow.”

 

Iroh nodded slowly. He had heard of people being touched by spirits before, and it was supposed to have an effect on their chi, but this seemed… dangerous. It was fortunate that this young woman could see in the spirit world, even if she didn’t know that was what she was doing. It was odd though; that she had the ability but couldn’t see quite how unstable his niece was. Considering how much time the two had spent together, it was understandable. If she had always had her third eye open then it might seem normal to her, or perhaps she couldn’t see quite as clearly as he could.

 

“When we first captured him and the Avatar,” Azula continued, “When we brought him into the light.” Ty Lee’s eyes widened as she remembered, and she added her observation to the conversation. “I remember. No matter where we shone the lantern his face was always half in shadow. Even when it was right in front of the lantern.”

 

Iroh stopped sipping his tea. He had just taken up his cup again, and this news had given him pause. He replaced it on the table. He looked at the two of them carefully. This development was more troubling than he had originally thought. He knew of some spirits whose bond could cast their champion in shadow, and none of them were kind.

 

“Did either of you touch him?” He asked. Azula’s friend nodded. “Was he cold?”

 

“Yeah, he was freezing! Like really, really cold. Mai said she would’ve thought him dead if he wasn’t breathing.” Ty Lee said. Iroh paled, and his reaction did not go unnoticed. Azula eyed him carefully. “Well? Out with it Uncle. What seems to be the problem?”

 

“I cannot say for certain. There are a few spirits who can have those effects on a mortal should they make a pact with one. The ocean spirit is one. Another is Kuraokami, the winter spirit. And…” He trailed off before saying the last name. He shook his head. “Is there anything else you can tell me?”

 

Azula looked at her uncle. Why had he refrained from naming others? Was he hiding something? “And what? Uncle, finish your names. I have no patience for dawdling. Out with it.”

 

“Very well. Though I would prefer not to speak his name, I will honor your request.” Iroh said, and lit all the candles throughout the room with a wave of his hand. Azula watched her uncle skeptically at this. Really, she thought, there was no need for his theatrics. “The last spirit that I know of who’s bond might do this is Koh, the Face Stealer.”

 

Azula looked at him skeptically. “Really Uncle, such theatrics? Are they truly necessary?”

 

“Perhaps not, Princess Azula, but the spirits are not to be taken lightly. Especially not him. Now, I cannot say for sure if the Avatar’s friend has made a spirit pact, or even if he has ever been to the spirit world. Both are unlikely. Now, as I said before, is there anymore that you can tell me?”

 

Azula thought for a moment, not sure if she wanted to reveal anything more. But if an enemy had made a pact with a spirit… 

 

“He knew when I was lying.” She said, “The moment the words left my mouth, he accused me of telling a lie.”

 

Iroh shook his head. “As, uh, interesting as that may be it doesn’t really help. It could have been a lucky guess, or he might be a people person. It could be any number of things.”

 

“When we first captured him, his body looked empty, as if he had left and gone someplace else.” Ty Lee cut in, and she shrugged when she spoke. “Other than that I don’t really know.”

 

Iroh stroked his beard thoughtfully. If what Ty Lee said was true, then the boy had gone into the spirit world. He had hoped that perhaps it had been a trick of the light, and the boy was cold because of hypothermia or something. This was not good. The spirit bound were unpredictable.

 

“Was he wounded in the escape? Was he cut at all?” Iroh asked, hoping that he could at least rule out one possibility. Had he bonded with the Face Stealer, then nearly any blade to cut him would be stained black. It wasn’t a strong hope, but he was short on options at the moment. True, he did not wish for the war to continue. But he and Zuko had planned to infiltrate Zhao’s fleet when he eventually sailed north, and if Zuko had to face the Avatar and a spirit champion he doubted it would go well.

 

“No. He was too fast, none of our soldiers could lay a hand on him. He and the Avatar defeated Admiral Zhao, and then confronted me when I bested Zuko. The waterbender called me a monster and..” Azula stopped herself from finishing the thought. She did not need to share all the little details did she? “And they escaped when the Avatar’s bison incapacitated me.”

 

“I see.” Iroh said, before he picked up and drank the last of his tea. “I will have to look at his aura for myself to know for certain. Anything I say now could turn out to be false, but I will say this: be careful of him. He might be more dangerous than he appears.”

 

Azula nodded. This had been a waste of time, all that her uncle had told her was that he didn’t know anything for certain, and things she had already guessed herself. She was about to send her uncle and friend away when Ty Lee spoke once more.

 

“You can see auras too?” She asked, surprised. Azula looked over at her friend. She had up until recently assumed that all her friend's talk of auras was nonsense, and when she had agreed about Sokka she had begun to think that maybe there was more to it than she had given credit.

 

“Yes, technically, but the more accurate term is chi. Aura is just the…” Iroh waved a hand around vaguely, “overall feel of a person's spirit. Chi is life energy that flows through the body. It looks different for every person, as I'm sure you know. I don’t open my third eye very often anymore, mostly just when I want to see what kind of person someone is.”

 

Azula rolled her eyes. “Well, I’m sure you too will enjoy the finer points of whatever you're talking about, but you will talk about it somewhere else. I appreciate your wisdom, uncle, but now I’m tired and ready for bed.”

 

Azula ushered them out the door, and Iroh picked up the teapot to bring with him. Azula flagged down a pair of soldiers and had them remove the table. After they had departed she allowed a pair of servants to remove her armor. She did not always rely on them to do so, but it was so much more enjoyable to be waited on than to do things herself. She ordered them to draw her a bath, and once it was ready she enjoyed a leisurely soak. She let the hot water soothe her worries. She would capture the Avatar, and her brother. And that stupid Water Tribe prince who had said she wasn’t a monster. Why had she even started to mention that to Iroh? It was silly, she had to stop worrying about such childish things.

 

She pondered the conversation Ty Lee and Iroh had. He had said that with the third eye you can see someone’s spirit, and learn what kind of person they are. She thought back to the previous day, when Zhao was speaking to Sokka. She had thought that Sokka was searching for something in the Admiral, and she didn’t understand what it was. Then when their eyes had met, and the void inside of him had filled, he seemed sad. As if whatever he had seen there had upset him somehow. Looking back, had she seen pity in those eyes? Surely not. How could he pity her? She had everything.

 

Even if he had the third eye, it didn’t mean much did it? Although… If Iroh had spoken the truth and it did let you see what kind of person someone was, then it would help one thing make sense. Sokka had declared that she was not a monster, he checked. He had seen her with his third eye, and he didn’t seem to think…

 

Azula huffed and got out of the tub. She dried herself by raising her temperature through firebending. She was determined to go to sleep that instant and not dwell on things that didn’t matter. She was going to capture her brother, and the Avatar, and his Water Tribe friends too. She decided that she was going to shoot Sokka full of lightning for no reason other than she felt like it.

Chapter 13: Jet

Zuko turned the map over in his hands, thinking that perhaps he’d been reading it upside down. He turned it over again, he had been right the first time. Zuko’s stomach growled. He remembered his uncle’s words at their staged battle, You never think things through.

 

The man had a point, Zuko had to admit. While he had thought of most things, such as how to get his Uncle onto Zhao’s ship, and where to rendezvous and when, he had overlooked one of the most basic points of life: You eat or you die. He had not brought any food. He had money, sure, but he couldn’t eat coins. He would be able to buy food, or perhaps forage for some, but as of now he had very nonexistent luck. He was sure that Azula would’ve found a roast dinner in the woods somewhere. She was born lucky, and he had been lucky to be born.

 

Zuko reached up and rubbed the crown of his head where his phoenix tail had been a few days ago. He had cut and burned it, so that he might be less recognizable as he traveled through the colonies and smaller Earth Kingdom villages to reach the rendezvous. He knew it was a necessary precaution, but he still hadn’t relished the idea. 

 

He returned his attention to the map. He had taken his ship quite a way south from the Ilah colony, to put more distance between him and the larger units of the Fire Nation military. He would skirt around the eastern edge of Fire Nation territory, and avoid the major conflict zones further east. The route he and his uncle had planned was relatively safe for travelers, especially well armed firebenders. Earth Kingdom patrols he might encounter would take him as a refugee and leave him alone, and any Fire Nation forces would let him pass when he showed his bending. Provided of course that they didn’t recognize him.

 

He turned his attention to the mountains and tried to triangulate his position. He should be somewhere near a village called Gaipan. It was under Fire Nation control, or at least that was what the reports had said before his banishment. Afterwards he hadn’t been privy to military communications. All the same, he should be able to acquire food and maybe an ostrich-horse there, no matter who held the village. All he had to do was get there.

 

Zuko guessed he was around a day's walk from Gaipan. He was far more proficient with navigating at sea than overland. He had gotten a lot of practice during his banishment. Perhaps he should’ve asked Uncle to teach him more about navigation. Zuko had hardly paid attention to his uncle’s lesson on anything other than firebending, and he regretted it now. When they were together again, Zuko decided to be more appreciative for his uncle than he had been in the last years.

 

Zuko shouldered his pack and resumed walking. The path was winding, and it crossed over a few too many hills. Still, Zuko was glad to have a path to walk. He had spent much of the first two days bushwacking towards this path in his efforts to avoid Azula and Zhao’s men. At the end of the second day he finally managed to reach it and avoid any pursuers, and when he finally found the trail he had searched for he nearly collapsed with delight, and exhaustion. Now he trudged along as best he could, well aware of how hungry he was. Fortunately he’d remembered to bring a waterskin, and he had refilled it that morning.

 

A beautiful forest of red canopied trees surrounded him, their alternating white and brown trunks stretching out into the distance. A soft breeze rushed over his scalp and he took pleasure in it, warming himself with a breath. Days like this made him glad he was a firebender. Nonbenders and those who bent earth or water would have to rely on clothing to keep warm. Despite his ability to warm himself, it had limits. He could not spend too long outdoors in cold weather without exhausting himself. He was glad now too that his uncle had insisted on warm clothes for the journey. Warming himself occasionally was about all he could muster at the moment. Without a meal he would freeze if not for his insulated clothing.

 

Zuko drew his swords and scanned the forest on either side of him. He had heard something. Maybe it was an animal, maybe a bird. Or maybe, it was an enemy. Zuko didn’t know, but he was sure that he wasn’t about to be caught unaware by random bandits in the middle of nowhere.

 

“Show yourself!” He shouted, glaring into the trees. He wasn’t sure if there actually was anyone out there, but his life had not been an easy one. He learned through long suffering not to take chances.

 

“Allright.” Said a voice to his left. Zuko turned to see a young man around his own age leap down from a tree, a hooked sword in each hand. He had shaggy dark hair and tan skin. A wheat stalk was held between his teeth. Zuko eyed him for a moment before scanning the canopy for others. He spotted a few more, and cursed himself for not looking up. It was a tactic he had taken advantage of several times himself; people never looked up.

 

“The name’s Jet, and these are my freedom fighters.” At his words the youths leapt down from the canopy to join them. “Longshot,” He pointed to a tall boy with a bow and a very large nose. “Smellerbee.” He pointed to a waifish girl with face paint and even shaggier hair than Jet.

 

“And this is Pipsqueak and The Duke.” He jerked a thumb towards a very large man and a small boy in a helmet. Jet slung his swords across his back and put his hand on his hips. He looked at Zuko expectantly. Zuko sheathed his broadswords and continued walking.

 

“Do you have a name?” Jet asked.

 

“Lee.” Zuko said without looking back. His stomach gave another cry of hunger and Jet smiled. He walked beside Zuko for a few paces and the banished prince stopped. “What do you want?”

Zuko doubted that Jet and his ‘Freedom Fighters’ wanted to harm him. Their body language hadn’t expressed any imminent violence, and they had lowered their weapons. Nonetheless, Zuko wasn’t exactly willing to have a group of strange children and one massive adult following him around.

 

“Nothing.” Jet said with a shrug. You just seemed hungry. And it’s getting dark.” Zuko was hesitant to accept handouts, and there was something about Jet that didn’t sit right with him. Still, this was his fourth day without food. He could swallow his pride to soothe his hunger, at least for a night.

 

“Our hideout isn't far. Come on, a hot meal and a warm bed, and you can be back on your way by morning.” Jet said, before turning towards the trees again. Zuko hesitated for a second, and then followed. He couldn’t capture the Avatar if he was half starved, could he?

 

Zuko and the Freedom Fighters walked through the forest for roughly an hour. Eventually, Jet spoke to him again.

 

“So Lee,” Je said casually. “I take it you’ve had a run in with the Fire Nation.”

 

“What makes you say that?”

 

Jet chuckled. “A guy my age traveling by himself so close to the front? You know how to use those swords of yours, and then there's that scar.”

 

Zuko nodded. “You could say that.”

 

“Most of us have lost someone to the Fire Nation. Longshot’s village was burned down in a Fire Nation raid. Smellerbee’s home was seized by the Fire Nation. My parents were killed right in front of me. I was only eight years old.”

 

Zuko kept his eyes forward. It wasn’t easy to hear from those his nation had harmed so greatly. Now they were helping him. Him, whose family was directly responsible for the hardships and tragedies that they had suffered through their lives. And for what? He had always been told that the war was to share the Fire Nation's greatness with the world. He had heard tell of the horrors of war, but only from veterans speaking of battles they had fought. He hadn’t known, hadn’t realized how much his ancestors had harmed everyday people.

 

“I’m sorry.” He said at last. Jet shook his head. “It’s not your fault. It was a long time ago.”

 

They walked in silence for a few minutes before Jet spoke again. “We’ve been harrying the Fire Nation troops that have been attacking towns and villages in the area. Stealing food, maps, equipment. It’s hard to destroy homes if you can’t find them, right?”

 

Zuko stiffened. They had been fighting Fire Nation troops? From the sound of it they hadn’t killed anyone. They just made things more difficult for them. Zuko once would have refused to believe that there were troops harassing and attacking villages at random. He would have liked to think that his country was more honorable than that, but he had been dispelled of that notion when War Minister Qin had suggested sacrificing new recruits as a distraction.

 

“Anyway, we intercepted a message. The Fire Nation is planning to burn down the forest, but I came up with a plan to stop them.” Jet said. “But more on that later. We’re here.”

 

Zuko looked around, but he didn’t see anything. He looked up into the trees and was amazed to see a network of camouflaged treehouses and walkways. Jet whistled a bird call and a number of footholds on ropes were lowered from the branches. The Freedom Fighters took hold of them and were whisked of and into the trees. In a moment the only people remaining on the ground were Jet and Zuko.

 

“Alright Lee, just put a foot into the stirrup and hold on tight. You’ll be topside in no time.” With that the leader of the rebel band stepped onto his own rope, and was hoisted into the air. Zuko watched him go, and grumbled to himself. He hardly needed it to be explained to him; it was a rather simple process. Zuko forced himself to let his anger go. He really needed to relax, for he didn’t like being angry all the time. He stepped into the stirrup. He waited, but nothing happened. He gave it a tug, thinking perhaps it was broken. He was about to step off and climb the tree manually, but as soon as his grip slackened the rope jerked skyward, bringing him ungracefully with it. The rope came to a sudden stop, and Zuko flew into the air a few feet before landing painfully on his stomach.

 

“Sorry about that.” Said Smellerbee, blushing slightly and rubbing the back of her head in embarrassment. “Sometimes they stick and when they get moving they really move.”

 

“It’s fine.” Zuko said as he rose to his feet. He checked to ensure he had all of his possessions and that his pack was secured properly. Everything was in order, and Zuko adjusted the dagger  his uncle had given him. Once he was sure that everything was tucked safely in place, he straightened up again. Zuko scanned his surroundings.

 

The Freedom Fighters had built their base in the forest canopy, around a hundred feet above the ground. Hut of varying shapes and sizes were supported in the trees, and they were connected by a series of walkways and rope bridges. Zuko could see even more people than he had originally. It seemed that Jet had around forty teens and young adults working under him. It was rather impressive actually, for a kid his age to bring together a force cohesive enough to establish this hideout.

 

Jet waved a hand for Zuko to follow him, and he did. The two of them walked along a narrow bridge, and stopped at a smaller hut. When they did so Jet held open a curtain for Zuko to walk through.

“This is where you’ll be sleeping.” Jet said as he followed Zuko inside. It was a small one roomed building, and the trunk of the tree made up one wall. A narrow bed that was reminiscent of the racks that soldiers slept on while at sea. Zuko was glad to have someplace warm to sleep for the night, even if it was somewhat sparse. He turned to Jet and bowed. “Thank you for your generosity.”

 

Jet smiled and waved him off. “Think nothing of it. There’s a war going on, we’ve got to help each other, right?”

 

Zuko hesitated before agreeing with the man. “Yeah, I suppose so.”

 

Jet grinned. “Dinner’s nearly ready. I’ll show you around until then.”

 

The two young men walked around the hideout for a while, Zuko remaining mostly silent while Jet talked. He decided that he rather liked this fellow, or he would if he wasn't so vehemently against the Fire Nation. Not that his reasons weren’t fair; but Zuko loved his country, flaws and all.

 

Eventually the food was finished. Zuko’s stomach gave a growl at the sound of the dinner bell. Jet laughed and ushered Zuko to the dining platform, where the rest of the Freedom Fighters were already assembled. When they arrived, the rebels cheered and raised their cups.

 

“Tomorrow we are going to prevent the Fire Nation from burning down this forest, and protect the villages from their wrath!” Jet said, and again his men cheered. Zuko tuned them out. He didn’t care for Jet’s tirade against the Fire Nation; he had heard enough of it through the course of the day. He eyed the food eagerly. Roasted duck, soups, and was that… yes it was, mashed potatoes. It was an Earth Kingdom dish, and so he hadn’t been able to enjoy it very often, but Zuko secretly loved those root vegetables. They were so versatile, you could put them in anything! You could…

 

“Right, Lee?”

 

Zuko blinked, he hadn’t been paying attention. He was so absorbed by his own hunger that he had absolutely ignored everything Jet had said. Zuko blinked, and panicked for a second. “Uh, yes! Absolutely!”

 

“That’s great! With you on our side we’ll be able to grab all of their blasting jelly in seconds!”

 

Zuko nearly jumped out of his skin. He had agreed to what now? 

 

“Let’s eat!” Jet said and he sat beside Zuko. He leaned over and said, “I’ll explain the plan. There’s a Fire Nation camp not far from here. They’re part of the mission to burn down the forest, but they’re also the solution. There’s a reservoir near the top of the valley, and it’s nearly full. By tomorrow night it will be, and that’s the time that the fire is going to be set. We’re going to rig the dam to blow, and when the fire is started we’ll blow it, dousing the flames.”

 

Zuko looked at him warily. “What am I supposed to do?”

 

“You, me, Sneers, Longshot, and Smellerbee are going to raid the Fire Nation camp tonight and steal their munitions. Hopefully we’ll be able to get in and out undetected, and since the explosives are meant to go off during the fire they’ll never notice that they’re gone.”

 

Zuko nodded slowly. He had already agreed to help, although he hadn’t been listening to what they were saying at the time. Still, honor dictated that he followed his word, and since they didn’t plan on harming the soldiers, he felt that he could help. Zuko pulled a plate of food towards himself.

 

“When?” He asked, before devouring the food like a teenager who hadn’t eaten in four days.

 

“An hour after midnight. That’s an  hour before the watch changes and they’ll have dropped their guard.” Jet said, and Zuko nodded again. He didn’t like the idea of acting against his military, but he liked the idea of burning down a forest and killing civilians far less.

 

He and Jet didn’t share any more words until Zuko was awoken for the raid. He would normally have chosen to stay awake until the mission was complete, but he decided to sleep beforehand. He had had a rather exhausting week, and he needed the rest. When the curtain of his hut was opened, Zuko’s eyes snapped open and he leapt to his feet, swords drawn.

 

Jet looked at him with a crooked smile. “Take it easy, Lee. I’m not your enemy.”

 

Zuko grunted and sheathed his weapons. He followed Jet to where the others stood waiting. Once they were all together the small group donned dark clothes and cloaks. Zuko rather liked his; it was warm and served to hide his scar rather well. He thought he might keep it if Jet didn’t ask for it back. It would be useful on his journey.

 

Jet waved his hand in a complicated set of signals, and a larger group of older rebels came out of the huts carrying nets and rope. Zuko stiffened and put his hand on his swords. “They’re going to haul the explosive up once we liberate them. They won't be on the ground. Only the fastest of us will be down there”

 

“Why use signals then? We’re still in your hideout.” Zuko said, relaxing at the explanation.

 

“To mess with you a little.”

 

Zuko glared at Jet. That was completely pointless, there was no need for it. He didn’t bother to say as much, he decided that once this mission was over he would leave. He could make it across the valley in a day, to Gaipan and out of danger.

 

The two teams crossed the forest far more quickly through the trees than Zuko would have guessed. Within minutes they had come to the target, and now hovered above it. They waited for Jet to give the signal, another birdcall different from the ones he had used earlier. The ground team descended silently across the zipline that Longshot had shot into the trunk of a tree adjacent to the munitions tent. Jet stepped forward to rush to the tent but Zuko flung out an arm to stop him. Jet looked at him but Zuko held up a hand and shook his head.

 

Moments later a pair of soldiers walked into view carrying a lantern. Jet smiled when he saw that Zuko had stopped him from entering their line of sight, and when the soldiers passed he ran forwards again with Zuko on his heels. The two of them worked seamlessly together, and the plan went off without a hitch. Longshot stood guard while Smellerbee and Sneers worked as a team in tandem with Jet and Zuko, rolling and stacking casks of munition into the nets and tugging the ropes to give the signal for them to be brought up.

 

When the task was finished, the ground team grabbed onto the last of the ropes and were hauled up as well. The journey back to the hideout was slower than the trip to the target, but they still made it within an hour. Once they had returned, the net team began loading the munitions into wagons. Zuko returned to his hut and collected his things. He turned to the entrance and found Jet waiting for him, leaning against the door frame.

 

“You’re leaving?” Jet said, asking the obvious question.

 

Zuko pushed past him. “Yes.”

 

“That’s too bad. You’re a good teammate. You’d make a good Freedom Fighter.” Jet said, following him. Zuko smiled at the irony. A leader of a band of rebels asking the son if the Fire Lord to join him.

 

“Maybe, but I have somewhere to be. I’ve got to meet my uncle in the north. If I leave now I can make it out of the valley before nightfall.” Zuko said, heading east towards the path he had been traveling on.

 

“Well, if you won’t change your mind, I’ll take you back to the road.” Jet said, placing a hand on Zuko’s shoulder. Zuko nodded and smiled.

 

“And don’t worry. You can keep the cloak.”

 

---

 

Zuko reached the town of Gaipan a few hours after midday, and frowned. He shouldn’t have made it to the settlement so soon, and he could see a wide and shallow river passing between him and the town. Had he misjudged the distance? He could see that the water had once flowed much deeper than it did right now, and if there had been a drought that would’ve explained the high water mark. But there hadn’t been a drought, no in fact it had rained a few days previous. 

 

A sinking suspicion began to grow within Zuko as he crossed the low bridge and entered the town. A single pair of Fire Nation guards stood at the entrance, and he passed them unchallenged. He walked to a stable and asked to see the owner. Soon enough a fat bald man with a long mustache appeared at the counter.

 

“I need an ostrich-horse.” Zuko said, and he pulled his money bag from within his shirt. “Strong and fast, I need to get to the northeastern coast in a few weeks time.”

 

“Well I have a few that could make the journey,” The man said, waving for Zuko to follow him. “We’ve got Old Gray. He’s not old, we just call him that because he’s gray like an old man, and then we have Sugar Foot, she’s a sweetheart, and the last one is Yinglong, named for the spirit of the rain because he was hatched in a thunderstorm.”

 

As the men spoke he pointed to a pale gray mout, a meek looking light brown ostrich-horse, and a coal black steed with an unusually bright beak. Zuko eyed Yinglong. He looked quick and strong, a powerful beast if ever there was. He pointed to him. “How much?”

 

“Fifty gold pieces.” The man said flatly. Zuko whipped his head towards the man. Fifty? There was no way Zuko was paying that, a normal price was a little more than one. 

 

“Fifty?!” He said indignantly. The man shrugged.

 

“Before this town was occupied by the Fire Nation,” The man said, “My family bred ostrich-horses for the Earth King. He’s the last of the line we created for him, so I’m not interested in letting five generations of work go easily. What would my father say if his son, Tun Lao, sold off the great work of our family?”

 

Zuko rolled his eyes. The man could’ve said the bird wasn’t for sale. “Old Gray then?”

 

“He’s only two, but I don’t think you want him. He doesn’t have the stamina you might need if you have to run for it.” Tun Lao said.

 

Zuko tried not to let his anger show on his face. The man clearly just wanted to sell him… Sugar Foot. He took a slow breath. “Sugar Foot, then.

 

“One and Five.” The man said with a smile. Zuko handed him the money and Tun Lao brought his new steed over to him. He met the bird's eye and it immediately started to rub its head against his shoulder, cooing softly. Zuko groaned. He decided never to tell his Uncle the name of the bird. The bird was saddled and Zuko bought a bag of feed for her. He looked at the bird.

 

“You are now called Yoake.” He told the bird. She cocked her head and blinked. Zuko closed his eyes. Could anything just be easy?

 

“Come on, Yoake.” He said, and pulled on the reins. The bird refused to budge. He struggled, but the ostrich-horse refused to move. He called her new name several times before he gave up. He sagged and dropped his head. 

 

“Let’s go, Sugar Foot.” He said in defeat. Sugar Foot squealed in delight, picking him up with her neck and tossing him on her back. Zuko took the reins, flushed with embarrassment. He walked the animal around the town a few times to get used to her, and then dismounted and guided her along behind him.

 

He purchased food to bring with him on the road, and made his way out of the village. He crested a small hill outside the town and looked out over the valley behind him. He saw the forest he had walked through, the town, the river, and a few miles away from there… was the dam. He could faintly see the outlines of figures moving around it. His heart stopped beating for a moment, then resumed the unending cadence of his life.

 

Was that the dam the Freedom Fighters were going to destroy? No, Jet said that they were going to put out a fire that the Fire Nation was going to light. But why would the Fire Nation burn down the forest that only contained villages in their control?

 

Zuko grit his teeth. Jet had lied to him. He had to warn the villagers. Zuko urged Sugar foot into a sprint, and they charged into town. They ran through the village and Zuko pulled his mount to a stop. He leapt off and grabbed the first soldier he saw by the front of his uniform. “Where is the commander?! Take me to him at once!”

 

“Who even are you, kid?” The soldier said, and he tried to push Zuko off of him. He utterly failed to do so, and Zuko threw him to the ground. “Answer me!” He roared.

 

“I’m right here.” Said a deep voice behind him. Zuko spun around and walked towards the man in commander's armor.

 

“A group of rebels are planning to blow the dam tonight. They’re going to destroy this village and anyone nearby. You have to get the civilians to safety!’

 

“And how do you know this? Who are you?” The commander asked, and a squad of spearmen and firebenders surrounded Zuko.

 

‘It doesn’t matter, all that matters is that you can trust me.” Zuko said, glaring at the commander.

 

“Is that so? And why should I?” The commander asked. Zuko grit his teeth. He couldn’t reveal his identity to this man, that would defeat the purpose of him traveling alone. He thought for a second.

“I’m Lee, from Yu Dao.” He ignited a ball of flame in his palm. He extinguished it quickly, once he was sure that everyone had seen it. “Believe me when I tell you, I have always had the Fire Nation's best interest at heart.”

 

---

 

Jet smiled as he surveyed the dam. The charges were nearly set, all that was left was to finish connecting the fuses and…

 

“Jet!” Roared a familiar voice. Jet turned, and saw Lee coming towards him on the back of an ostrich-horse. Jet shrugged, it looked like Lee had figured out his plan. It didn’t matter, he was too late to stop it now. Jet drew his swords as Lee approached.

 

“You’re going to hurt innocent people!” Lee snarled as he leapt from the animal. He had his swords drawn, and the two young men fought furiously. Jet’s blades swung left, then right, and then left again, and Lee was there to meet him on every swing. “They’re not innocent, they’re traitors! They’re living with the Fire Nation!”

 

Lee snarled and kicked Jet’s legs out from under him. Jet landed on his hand and flipped away from Lee. The man was good with those blades, very good. Even as Jet thought this, Lee managed to snag one of his swords away from him. He latched the hook of his remaining sword with that of his lost weapon, and spun them around, doubling the space between him and Lee.

 

“What do you expect them to do, Jet? Leave everything behind? Die?”

 

“Better to die with honor than to live as a traitor!”

 

“You know nothing about honor!” Lee screamed. Jet’s words seemed to have really gotten to him. “You would see women and children drowned just for the sake of your hatred!”

 

“It’s no less than they deserve!” Jet yelled back. The two of them were at blows again, and now Lee had the advantage. Jet grimaced. They were on the northern side of the river, opposite his Freedom Fighters. He could give the signal to blow the dam now, but he would be swept away along with Lee and Gaipan.

 

“You call yourself a freedom fighter, but that’s just a lie! You’re just a killer like the men who took your parents!”

 

It was Jet’s turn to be outraged. He was nothing like the Fire Nation he protected innocents! He didn’t hurt them! He didn’t rip families apart just for the… But wasn’t that what he was doing? Had he become like them somehow? No, Lee was lying, those golden eyes. It was so obvious, how could he have missed it before? Lee was Fire Nation! He must have come to spy on him, to find out where his hideout was!

“Another lie from the Fire Nation!” He roared, redoubling his efforts to fight Lee. “You were sent here to spy on me weren’t you?!”

 

“No you idiot, nobody in the Fire Nation knows who you are!” Lee said. Jet lept into a tree with his hook swords, using them as handholds to swing up from branch to branch. Lee tried to follow him, but Jet kicked him off halfway up the trunk. He reached the top, and an arrow attached to a cable sunk into the wood. He looked down to see Lee getting to his feet.

 

“Goodbye, Traitor! I hope you can swim!” He called out, and slid across the river on the line.

 

He could just faintly hear Lee call out after him. “You became a traitor when you decided to kill innocent people!”

 

Jet snarled as he rushed across the river. When he touched the ground on the opposite side, he saw Lee riding away on his ostrich-horse. He shook his head and cut the line, just in case Lee decided to loop back around and chase after him. Jet climbed to the top of a cliff overlooking the dam, and he gave the signal. Nothing happened. He gave it again, and The Duke leapt from the trees.

 

“Jet!” He said, pointing to the river. Jet looked, and saw that the explosives had been dismantled. A group of Fire Nation soldiers were on top of the structure, wearing clothes with leaves and branches attached to them. He roared and punched a tree. Lee had been a distraction! While his attention was on the swordsman the enemy had crept along and dismantled the explosives.

 

“We need to get back to the hideout. Get everyone out and tell them to scatter. We’ll meet up at the cave in a week.” Jet ordered. The Duke nodded and took off, making birdcalls all the while. Jet groaned and walked through the trees. Longshot and Smellerbee fell in on either side of him. 

 

None of them said anything. Jet couldn’t help but think, now that the moment had passed, that maybe Lee was right. Maybe had become like the men that killed his parents.

 

---

 

 

Zuko sighed in relief as he watched the casks of explosive jelly float past and down the river.       He had worried that his plan wouldn’t have worked, and the men under Commander Zheng wouldn’t be quick enough to sneak past Jet’s rebels and dismantle the bombs. Thankfully it had worked, and it only took a few seconds to cut the ropes tying down the barrels and then toss them into the water.

 

Despite his attempted massacre, Zuko couldn’t bring himself to hate Jet. He could empathize with the guy. He could understand how seeing what Jet had seen would twist him so. No, Jet wasn’t a bad person really. It was the war that was to blame.

A hundred years of fighting had wreaked havoc on countless families, just like those of the Freedom Fighters. All of the polished veneer of generations of propaganda had been blown away, like leaves in the wind. What was left behind was the ugly truth that the war was wrong. A completely pointless waste of human life and an exercise in the destruction of human dignity.

 

As Zuko rode past Gaipan and towards the northern horizon, he vowed that the moment he became Fire Lord he would end the war and sue for peace.

Chapter 14: Good Fortune

Sokka carved carefully away at the pendant he was making for his future wife. It was odd, making a personalized necklace for someone he had never met, but his father had helped him with the design. Swirling waves beneath the moon. Simple, but his dad had said that simple was better.

 

“Do you think Teo and the Mechanist will be okay?” Katara asked Aang. The two had been practically inseparable since they had escaped the Fire Nation, and Sokka was beginning to suspect that his sister had a crush on the Avatar.

 

“Oh yeah, now that they’ve fought off the Fire Nation and have airpower, they’re unstoppable.” Aang said, grinning at her. The two sat side by side on Appa’s head. Sokka wondered if the bison’s neck was sore from the extra weight. He looked at the pendant. It wasn’t bad. Usually his carvings looked like burned excrement, but this one was pretty good. 

 

“Hey Aang!” Sokka shouted. “Come look at this!”

 

Aang and Katara cringed at his volume. Aang leapt over to him. “Sokka, you have to work on shouting. We’re like five feet away.”

 

Sokka blushed. “Right. Yeah. Sorry, ever since I closed the gate of Koh’s power it’s been hard to tell how loud I am. It’s hard to get used to normal hearing again.”

 

“It’s okay Sokka!” Aang grinned, and bent to look at the jewelry. He picked it up, squinted at it, and then gave it back. “I’d say it’s almost done. Now all you’ve got to do is sand the face of it to smooth out the sharp edges.”

 

Sokka grinned at him. Katara came over and he gave her the thing. She picked it up and smiled. She had thought it was strange at first that Sokka and their father had gone for a pure white pendant rather than the traditional blue, but now that she saw how her brother had etched the carving with blue to emphasize the shapes she was impressed.

 

“Good job,” She said honestly, “That’s really good!”

 

Sokka grinned at her in thanks, and then opened the small bag of sand that they had brought with them. He took out a handful and gently rubbed the pendent in it. He continued the process for some time, checking every few minutes to ensure that he hadn’t over done it. Once he was satisfied he blew off the pendant, and attached it to the blue silk ribbon his father had given him. He admired it, and thought he should have someone model it for him.

 

“Katara, will you wear this for a second? I want to see how it looks on a real girl.”

Katara looked at him disapprovingly. “I am not wearing someone else’s betrothal necklace before she gets too. She should be the first woman to wear it.”

 

Sokka groaned. “I want to see how it looks! Aang will you-?!”

 

“Sokka! You can’t let a man wear your betrothal necklace! That’s for Princess Yue!”

 

“But Katara!”

 

Aang laughed, “Sorry Sokka, I only like you as a friend.”

 

Sokka blinked. Had Aang put emphasis on you ? Was he trying to tell them something? Man they had to get to the north pole fast, he did not want to be stuck with these two any longer than he had to. 

 

“Fine.” he grumbled sourly, and tucked the necklace safely away inside his parka. He looked out over the water, large icebergs floated lazily in the calm sea. How close to the pole were they? They had been flying all day, and Appa was barely floating above the ocean. Sokka saw a flash of movement and drew his sword.

 

Ice formed out of the depths and latched onto Appa’s foot. The bison careened to one side, and Sokka dropped his sword as he grabbed Katara and the saddle. He watched helplessly as his newfound weapon tumbled out of the saddle and into the sea.

 

In moments Appa crashed into the waves, and was instantly trapped in ice. Waterbenders and blue clad warriors on long flat boats appeared behind the icebergs and surrounded them. They had found the northern Water tribe

 

---

 

 

Azula tapped her foot as she sat on the throne on the upper deck of Admiral Zhao’s ship. They had made a few stops at various ports and naval stations, and Zhao had disembarked to speak with local military leaders to build his armada. She had been invited to join him, along with her uncle, but she had decided that they weren’t the best uses of her time. She needed to come up with a strategy to capture her brother, along with the Avatar and his companions.

 

Zhao was currently ashore, and he was speaking with a colonel about obtaining a number of his tanks for the coming siege. Usually Iroh would travel with him, but on this stop the old general had opted to stay aboard. Where he was exactly Azula didn’t know, but she didn’t care either. 

 

She was brainstorming, and her friends were there with her. So far they had deduced that Zuko was likely to try and infiltrate the north pole, although how he planned to do so was a mystery. That was about as far as they had gotten. Zuko had somehow evaded their search parties, and gotten away without a trace. More irritating than that, Azula’s mind kept conjuring the image of a pair of ocean blue eyes that seemed to pity her, and hearing the voice of the first person to ever claim she was anything other than a monster.

 

Azula was furious about it, she didn’t know why he kept coming to mind. She pushed her thoughts into order. Zuko was traveling alone through the Earth Kingdom, but she knew what he was after. He had claimed he would capture the Avatar, but she didn’t know if he meant that, or if would simply join him. 

 

She would’ve liked to assume that he wouldn’t do so, but Zuko had already proven his hatred for her and that he would turn against the Fire Nation. That her uncle hadn’t turned against them as well was a surprising comfort. He had offered no shortage of wisdom to her in the days since he began to travel with them. She was glad for his company, for it was nice to feel she could count on somebody in her family other than her father or Zhao. 

 

What to do about Zuko though? He had to be caught. Evidently had grown skilled enough to defeat the Admiral, and she had seen his skill when he battled Iroh. If Zuko joined the Avatar his team would be far more formidable, and she was sure that Zuko would teach the Avatar firebending. That would be the worst case scenario; if her brother turned against their nation it could mean civil war. If Zuko became friends with Sokka, then they could form an alliance between any rebel forces he managed to whip up. Zuko would conspire with him, and then Sokka would come to believe that… and now she was thinking of him again, to her immense displeasure.

 

Evidently, her annoyance must have shown on her face, for Mai asked, “So what’s got your hair in knots?”

 

“It’s none of your concern.” Azula said dryly. Mai rolled her eyes. Ty Lee looked over as she balanced on her elbows with her feet resting on her head.

 

“We can’t help but be concerned, we’re your friends Azula!” Ty Lee said, smiling warmly. 

 

Azula considered her words. She didn’t particularly wish to share her troubles, for she didn’t want to be seen as weak. She had always kept her thoughts guarded, but maybe she could trust her friends. She had always relied on fear to keep them in line, but maybe she could share her thoughts with them. Uncle had said that a little bit of trust would buy a lot of loyalty, and he certainly knew about that. Minus his failure with Zuko, he had been an exceptional leader during his time in the army.

 

“Well, if you must know,” She began awkwardly, “During their escape, Sokka said something to me and I haven’t been able to put him or his words out of my mind.”

 

“Did he insult you?” Mai asked, raising an eyebrow. Azula shook her head.

 

“Did he threaten you?” Ty Lee asked, standing up and walking closer. 

 

Again Azula shook her head. “No, quite the opposite.”

 

“I.. don’t follow.” Ty Lee said, tilting her head to the side. She looked at Mai, who shrugged where she leaned against the bulkhead. They both returned their attention to Azula.

 

“When his sister said that I was a monster, he, well… he insisted that wasn’t the case.”

 

“Is that it?” Mai asked curiously. Azula blushed slightly embarrassed. She wasn’t good at this sort of thing: she didn’t like to share, but so far stewing in her thoughts hadn’t yielded results, so she pressed on rather awkwardly.

 

“Um, no. When I was interrogating him with Zhao, I looked into his eyes and at first it looked like he was empty, almost inhuman. Then I saw something in them, like he felt-” Azuala couldn’t bring herself to say the word pity. Sharing was one thing, but that was too much. “Something for me. I can’t seem to get him out of my head now, and I don’t understand…”

 

She trailed off as Mai did the last thing she had expected from the girl. Mai was laughing. She glanced at Ty Lee, who was just as confused as she was. What was so funny?

 

“Mai, what’s so funny?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“It’s just that Azula has a crush on the prince of the southern Water Tribe.” She said, stifling her giggle. Azula was affronted! She had opened herself up to her friends for the first time, and already Mai was exploiting her weakness.

 

“Most certainly not! This is clearly just some plot he cooked up with the Avatar to get in my head!”

 

Now Ty Lee was laughing too. Azula looked at her indignantly. Ty Lee had seen whatever it was that was inside the boy just as well as, if not better than, Azula had. There was no way she would agree with Mai. “And what are you laughing at?”

 

“You’re the only person who would take a crush to be a plot to get in your head!” Ty Lee said, as her laughter subsided. She hadn’t laughed very hard, and neither had Mai, but the pair of them had never laughed at her before. Azula did not like this development. Evidently this showed on her expression as her friends immediately sobered up.

 

“I do not have a crush.” She declared firmly, glaring at her companions.

 

“Really?” Asked Mai, her voice rife with skepticism. When she spoke again she counted off points on her fingers. “From what you two said, you think he’s rather handsome. He’s the first person who you haven’t managed to scare into submission, he’s not a peasant, he defended your character to his sister, and you got lost in his eyes.”

 

“I did not get lost in his eyes!” Azula shouted at Mai, and that only seemed to make her friend believe the opposite. 

 

“And now you can’t stop thinking about him.”

 

“Ty Lee, tell her about what you saw when fighting him.” Azula ordered, and Ty Lee grimaced, but repeated the story to Mai. Azula felt triumphant as Ty Lee finished speaking, but the feeling vanished as soon as it had appeared. Mai looked anything but swayed after hearing the tale.

 

“So now you’re telling me he has a mysterious dark power? Let me sum it up.” Mai said, “You meet a mysterious and handsome prince with strange dark powers. You can’t control him. He declares you to be a good person and you can’t stop thinking about him. And now we’re chasing him to the ends of the earth.”

 

Azula glared at Mai who spoke again. “That sounds like one of my mother’s terrible romance novels.”

 

Ty Lee crossed her arms indignantly and huffed. They both looked at her. She glared at Azula before saying, “And you made fun of me, saying we weren’t going to find me a boyfriend.”

 

Azula was furious. The two of them had never ganged up on her like that before. If this was what trusting people got her she surely wouldn’t do it again. She did not have a crush on Sokka, she- why did she keep using his name? That wouldn’t help her in this argument. Why were the two of them being so ridiculous? She had shared her thoughts hoping that they might help, and yet they were insisting that she was having a girlish crush on the enemy. She did not get crushes, she had not yet and she never would. Quite frankly, she was now sure she would kill the idiot as soon as she had the opportunity.

 

“I am merely concerned with the threat he could pose. He’s the enemy.” She growled. 

 

“I see,” Mai said, clearly still skeptical. “Definitely not star crossed lovers or anything.” 

 

“Just like that song!” Ty Lee exclaimed. Mai and Azula looked at her. Ty Lee was surprised by their confusion, and she started to sing, bobbing her head from side to side.

 

“Two loveeers, forbidden from one anotheeer! A waaaar di-vides their peo-ple!”

 

Steam rolled off of Azula. Ty Lee snickered.

 

“Alright, that’s enough Ty Lee. I think we’ve teased her enough for one day.” Mai said, and the acrobat agreed with a nod. Azula looked between them.

 

“So you don’t think it’s a crush?” She asked warily.

 

“It might be.” Mai said with a shrug. Azula breathed deeply, trying to calm herself. “It is certainly not.”

 

Mai shrugged. “It would be the simplest answer. It makes sense, doesn’t it?”

 

Azula rolled her eyes. She decided that this whole conversation had been a waste of time. She got up and marched towards the door to go below deck. As she reached it her uncle stepped out and bowed to her. He opened his mouth to speak, but Azula spoke first. “I am going to my quarters, uncle. Alone!”

Iroh watched his niece storm off, and he was surprised at how similar to Zuko her actions were. She was usually far more calculated and dignified. He looked over to Azula’s friends. Ty Lee looked guilty, and Mai was as impassive as ever. He walked over to them, intending to ask what had upset Azula so.

 

“Why was my niece so upset?” He asked, raising an eyebrow to look at the two young women. Ty Lee blushed and looked down. Mai didn’t show any sign that she had heard, so he turned to Ty Lee.

 

“Have you been practicing?” He asked her. He had been teaching her to control her third eye, so that she might make better use of it. She nodded. “I managed to close it for the first time.”

 

Iroh’s eyebrows raised, impressed. She had closed her inner eye in little more than a week? That was impressive. It had taken him far longer, though he had to open it intentionally. She had been born with it open, and so she must have an easier time with it.

 

“That’s good. But if it is closed, then you might not know how upset Princess Azula really is. What happened?”

 

“She has a crush on the First Son,” Mai said. “At least, that’s what it sounds like.”

 

Iroh paused. Azula having a… No, that didn’t seem likely. When he had returned to the palace after the death of his son, and journey into the spirit world, he had found the sweet girl who had followed Zuko around the palace to be gone. Left in her place was a child who was the mirror image of her father. 

 

Ozai had managed to turn his daughter into a copy of himself. Over the next few years Iroh found that she was just as cruel and heartless as his brother had been. Had any trace of the girl she had been before remained, then it would be possible. Unfortunately, Iroh had been convinced she was fully changed when he saw the delight she had shown at her brother's disfigurement.

 

“I find that hard to believe.” He said, not unkindly. Mai shrugged, and Ty Lee spoke up.

 

“It really sounded like it though.” She said, “I don’t think she realizes it.”

 

Iroh stroked his beard thoughtfully. “What exactly did she say?”

 

Mai and Ty Lee shared the details of their conversation with Azula. Iroh nodded along sagely. It seemed like she had taken some of his advice to heart, and confided in her friends. Trusting them with her thoughts rather than keeping them in the dark. That they had teased her told Iroh that they genuinely cared for Azual, and thought of her as a friend instead of just a commander to be feared. What was more surprising than his niece taking his advice, was that it did sound like she had felt at least something for the Avatar's friend. Iroh thought, for the first time in years, that maybe Ozai hadn’t changed her so much as it seemed. Maybe there was hope for Princess Azula yet, and that would be good fortune indeed.

 

---

 

Aang, Katara, and Sokka admired the beauty of the northern Water Tribe in amazement. Huge and elegant buildings surrounded them. The city was almost as astonishing as Omashu had been. Sokka had been trying to remember what Laghima and Kuruk had told him in the spirit world until they had reached the city, but when faced with the wondrous sights he had abandoned his quest.

 

Sokka climbed onto Appa’s tail, and looked out behind them. He was amazed by every detail, even the sidewalks along the canals were exquisite works of art. He was admiring a bridge when Appa lifted his tail, causing Sokka to lose his balance. He shouted and fell into the canal. 

 

It was freezing, which was no surprise, but Sokka had not expected to fall in. He oriented himself and swam for the surface. His head crested the water and a gloved hand appeared before him. He took it, and managed to haul himself onto a boat.

 

He felt the water soaking his clothes being pulled away by a waterbender, and he looked up. He was lying flat on his back in a gondola. Directly above him was one of the most beautiful women he had ever seen. She had pale blue eyes, the dark complexion of the Water Tribe, and hair as white as the falling snow. Sokka blinked as every thought seemed to have escaped him, including his own name.

 

“Uh, hi.” He managed to say, blushing. The mystery girl laughed at his awkwardness. Sokka blushed even more.

 

“Hi.” said the girl. Sokka sat up, and rubbed his arms. 

 

“I’m not usually that clumsy,” He said. “Appa just kind of threw me off balance.”

 

“Oh, don’t worry about it,” The girl said. “You fell like the most graceful stone I've ever seen.”

 

Sokka chuckled at the joke. He looked around, he could see Aang and Katara not far away, and they only now seemed to have noticed he wasn’t on Appa’s back anymore.

 

“So uh, if you’re not doing anything later, maybe we could do an activity together?”

 

“An activity?” She asked with a smile. Sokka felt emboldened by her positive reaction.

 

“Well yeah. I’m from the south, so I don’t really know my way around. Maybe you could show me the sights?” Sokka said, and then he remembered his name. “I’m Sokka by the way.”

 

The mystery girl seemed to frown for a moment, and it looked as though she was thinking about something. The gondola pulled up and stopped beside the sidewalk.

 

“Sokka. I’ve heard that name before. You’re the First Son of the South right?” She asked, “The one who’s supposed to marry-”

 

“Gah! I forgot!” Sokka said, before slapping himself on the forehead. He stepped out of the boat and bowed to the girl. 

 

“Please forgive me.” He said. “I shouldn’t have asked. I’m supposed to marry Princess Yue. I only found out a few days ago, and with the fall it slipped my mind.”

 

The girl in the boat looked at him with a blank expression, “Have you ever met the Princess?”

 

“Well, I did get captured by the Fire Nation princess recently, but I don’t think you mean that one.”

 

“No,” The girl said with a laugh, “I don’t.”

 

Sokka shook his head. “I haven’t. I don’t even know what she looks like, I should’ve asked my dad.”

 

The girl laughed at that, and Sokka wasn’t sure why. He shrugged.

 

“What do you think she looks like?” The white haired girl asked, with a half smile.

 

“Honestly I have no idea,” He said, “But if she’s half as beautiful as you it would be good fortune indeed.”

 

The girl blushed, and the waterbender who steered her gondola snickered. Sokka, realizing what he said, blushed too. He couldn’t go around complimenting random women in the street! He was engaged. Sokka waved goodbye, and thanked them for helping him. He turned and jogged to catch up with Katara and Aang, who were waiting for him.

 

---

 

Iroh approached Azula’s quarters cautiously. He was apprehensive about it, but he felt that perhaps his niece could use his counsel. He had long since thought that she was beyond help, and completely unstable. But the fact that she would appear to share her innermost thoughts with her friends was something he hadn’t expected. He had counseled her to show her friends trust, but he had not honestly expected her to do so.

 

He had hoped that she would, of course. He did not want to believe that anyone so young could be so far gone, and he had done his best to try and help her despite his reservations. He had given her honest and genuine advice. He did care for her, she was family, but he had thought that her fathers influence had been too strong.

 

Iroh knocked on the door, and after a few seconds he heard his niece bid him enter. He stepped inside to find her reading a scroll at her desk. She looked up, and her eyes narrowed.

 

‘What do you want, Uncle?” She asked.

 

“I spoke with your friends. From what they told me, it seems that you took my advice.” Iroh said, watching her carefully.

 

“I doubt I will be doing so again. I do not enjoy ridicule, no matter who it comes from. Once I have thought of a suitable punishment they will know better than to do so again.” She returned her eyes to the scroll.

 

Iroh took a deep breath, and let it out. He had his work cut out for him. Lu Ten had never been as difficult as his cousins, both of whom it seemed had poor social skills. Azula could read people extremely well, but it seemed that she lost her social prowess when it concerned herself.  He stroked his beard, thinking of how to address this. Deciding on his course of action, he spoke.

 

“Ridicule was it? It seemed to me that they showed they care for you as a friend.”

 

Azula looked up from her scroll, and looked at him. Her face was impassive, almost lazy. She seemed not to care for his words, but her own gave her away.

 

“What,” She said slowly, “Do you mean by that?”

 

“Only that you opened up to them, and they reacted in the way they would only if they cared for you.”

 

“By mocking me?” Azula said, and Iroh could hear the ire in her voice.

 

“By teasing you.” Iroh corrected.

 

“And what, pray tell, is the difference?”

 

“One is done to your friends, and another to your enemies. Have you not teased your friends before?” 

 

Azula didn’t answer. In truth she had. She rather enjoyed the flustered look on Ty Lee’s face, and the manufactured apathy that Mai wore when embarrassed. Was that truly what had been happening? Mai had said as much, but Azula had never been on the receiving end of it before. Was it because they hadn’t truly seen her as a friend? Or was it simply that Azula hadn’t opened herself up to them since before she had been taken under her father’s tutelage?

 

“I have.” She said eventually, and Iroh smiled.

 

“And I have seen you mock others. You know the difference.”

 

Azula placed the scroll on the desk and turned to face her uncle fully. “I suppose you’re right Uncle.”

 

Iroh watched Azula. He closed his eyes briefly, and focused on his third eye. He opened his eyes again, and looked upon his niece with his third sight. She was different than he had expected. His brother had been corrupted by the spirit illness that plagued many members of his nation, and he had expected for her to be the same. He had not looked before, as he was unwilling to see a child corrupted, but now she was older, and he had begun to suspect she might not be so far gone.

 

He was astounded to see that she carried no corruption at all. She did not have the dark red flame of her father, or of Zhao. She did not carry the golden sun of himself, or that inside Zuko that fought the darkness. Instead her heart burned with an electric blue flame that roiled and snapped. He had never seen anything like it before, and he did not know what it meant. He met her sun colored eyes, and looked past them. She was worried about something, it bit down on her mind like a viper. 

 

Iroh closed his eyes, shutting the third eye in the process. The whole exchange had taken less than five seconds since Azula last spoke. It was enough time to see that he had misjudged her, and that she was troubled by more than just her friends’ teasing. Had he looked longer, he could have figured out what was troubling her. But he found that a large part of helping someone was letting them come to you.

 

“Something more is troubling you than your friends, Princess Azula. Should you need someone to talk to, I would be glad to counsel you on your troubles.”

 

Azula shook her head. She was not about to reveal any secrets to her uncle. She had taken his counsel, and heeded his advice, but she did not yet fully trust the man. His wisdom had cooled her anger towards Mai and Ty Lee, but she would only share so much in one day.

 

“Thank you, Uncle. I’ll keep that in mind.” She said, and Iroh took it as the dismissal it was. He bowed and left her alone. He closed the door behind him, and walked to his own cabin. As he did so, he began to feel guilt. If his and Zuko’s plan went accordingly, it would mean betraying Azula. He did not think that was something she could take.

 

---

 

Sokka sat next to Katara at Chief Arnook’s table. Aang sat on the chief’s right, Katara sat at his right, and Sokka sat at her right. The seat next to him was yet to be occupied, but Arnook had told him it would be taken by Princess Yue.

 

Sokka had yet to meet the Princess, and the chief told him that she was out for the day to visit friends. Their arrival had been rather sudden, but the northern Chief had ordered a celebration in their honor. Currently, Master Pakku and his students were performing a waterbending routine that was honestly quite impressive.

 

Sokka’s eyes drifted from the waterbending display, and onto a man bearing a sword like the one he had lost. He had a dark complexion, though he was clearly not Water Tribe. He considered asking about him, but there was nobody nearby except for Katara and she clearly wouldn’t know any better than he.

 

There had been some tension when they had first arrived. Chief Arnook and Master Pakku explained that it was not the custom in the northern Water Tribe to teach women waterbending, but part of the treaty with his father had ended that practice. Apparently, one of his fathers ‘vassals’ - they were not called that back home, apparently it meant close friends and advisors- had explained the wisdom in not limiting their fighting power. Sokka guessed that Bato had called Pakku an idiot, and yelled at him until he saw sense. He had a way with stubborn old people.

 

Master Pakku and his students finished their performance, and Chief Arnook took the center of attention. He raised his hands and the applause died. He cleared his throat and began to speak.

 

“We are joined tonight by three honored guests. Joining us is Avatar Aang, Sokka the First son of the South, and Princess Katara.” 

 

Arnook gestured to the three of them in turn, and Katara looked surprised and embarrassed over being referred to as princess. In their tribe, titles were few and far between. Even as the daughter of the chief, she wasn’t given a title. Interestingly enough, had she been born first Katara would have been referred to as the First Son. Most female heirs of their tribe had tried to go by princess, but the official title remained the same as it was engraved on Sokka’s boomerang.

 

“As you all know, Chief Hakoda and I have agreed to merge the tribes once more. It is for this purpose that Sokka and Princess Yue have agreed to marry, and unite our tribes again after eight hundred years.”

 

As Arnook spoke of his engagement, Sokka tried not to let his irritation show on his face. He hadn’t Agreed to anything, nobody had even asked him. He honestly doubted that Princess Yue had been given much of a choice either. He was lost in his own internal grumbling as Arnook returned to his seat and the food was served. He almost failed to notice when someone took a seat to his left. He didn’t bother to look up at his future bride just yet, for he was both irritated and nervous. He began shoveling food into his mouth when Katara flicked his ear. He looked up at her, and she glared at him like an angry mother hen. He swallowed his food and only then did he look to his left.

 

Sokka’s mouth fell open when he saw Princess Yue, not for the first time, but the second. She was the beautiful girl who had pulled him from the canal.

Chapter 15: Stupid Games

Zuko looked at his map. Sugar Foot continued walking. He had been trying to get her to respond to a different name during the week after leaving Gaipan, but he had no luck. She seemed to have a moral opposition to responding to a different one. 

 

He rolled his map up and put it away. They were following a road that ran parallel to a river, and at the end of it should be a town he could spend the night in. So far his journey hadn’t had any more complications. He had passed by Pohuai Stronghold and skirted along the western edge of the Great Divide. 

 

He didn’t have much further to go until he made it to his rendezvous point. The port that he and his uncle decided on was as close to the north pole as you could get. Uncle had been sure that Zhao would stop there to resupply and build his armada. The plan needed Zuko to get there first, a challenging feat, but Uncle was sure that Zhao would make many stops along the way.

 

As Sugar Foot carried on her relentless pace, a town wall appeared in the distance. It wasn’t terribly formidable, but it served its purpose well enough. Zuko noticed that there didn’t seem to be many soldiers stationed here, if any. He assumed that this meant that the town was either neutral or in Earth Kingdom control.

 

He entered the town and approached a blue clad man drawing water from a well. “Is there some place I can find lodging for the night?”

 

Zuko climbed off of Sugar Foot and took the reins in hand. His ostrich-horse nuzzled him affectionately and he pushed her head away. She trilled in disappointment and Zuko grit his teeth before scratching her neck. The animal became sad if he didn’t pay her attention often enough. She would move slowly until he did.

 

The blue garbed gentleman smiled warmly at Zuko. “I’m sure Aunt Wu would let you stay with her for the night. She has plenty of room.”

 

“Uh, I meant more like an inn. I don’t want to trouble your aunt.” Zuko said, and he rubbed the fuzz of hair that had grown in the past week. It had been two weeks since he’d last shaved his head, and he was unused to the growth.

 

“She’s not my Aunt!” Laughed the man. “We just call her that. She’s the town fortune teller.”

 

Zuko looked at him skeptically. The man smiled some more, and Zuko mused that he must get sore from the expression. The man pointed to the nearby mountain, it was smoking slightly, and spoke again. “We used to send someone up the mountain to check if the volcano would erupt, but since she moved to town she’s correctly predicted it every year, so we don’t bother anymore.”

 

Zuko looked up the mountain and back at the man. Were they seriously relying on a fortune teller to save them from volcanic destruction? The Fire Nation had specially trained benders to sooth volcanoes, and even then they didn’t take them lightly.

 

“I guess I’ll stay with Aunt Wu. If she has room I mean.” 

 

“Oh she does alright, she told me this morning that she was expecting someone. An important guest ‘walking on candy’. I don’t know exactly what that meant, but you’re the only traveler to have come today!”

 

Zuko blinked, but followed the man. Sugar Foot remained in place, and Zuko blushed. Why did she have to have such an embarrassing name? “Come on, Sugar Foot.”

 

The villager snickered at that and said “I guess that explains the candy.”

Zuko sat in a fine waiting room. The sliding walls and doors were made from rice paper stretched between a lattice of light wood. A young girl came in and bowed to him.

 

“I’m Meng,” She said, and then seemed to grow nervous. She peered under the hood of Zuko’s cloak. “How big are your ears?”

 

“What? Why do you want to know that?” He asked, perplexed at the question. Meng blushed and touched her fingers together nervously. “Aunt Wu said I’d marry a man with big ears. I couldn’t see yours so I thought maybe…”

 

Zuko looked at this girl, she had to be what? Ten years old? He shook his head. “Never mind how big they are. We’re not getting married.”

 

The girl looked slightly offended, and Zuko figured he could’ve been less rude. But stil, young girls asking to see his ears so they could know if they would get married was a bit ridiculous. Meng stormed off, seemingly offended. As the girl left, a door slid open and a middle aged woman came into the waiting room. She approached Zuko and bowed in greeting.

 

“I am Aunt Wu,” She said. “I have been expecting you.”

 

“Is that so?” Zuko said, eyeing her warily. Did she know who he was?

 

“Yes. I received a vision of a scarred young man with a difficult future ahead of him.”

 

Zuko lowered his hood. If she really knew about his scar, she wouldn’t react the way most people did when they first saw it. He watched her carefully, and she didn’t react in the slightest. She just looked at him. In time he looked away,

 

“Would you like to have your fortune told?” She asked him. Zuko shook his head. 

 

“No,” He said. Zuko didn’t particularly believe in fortune telling. The idea that someone could see into the future was too far-fetched for him. Even if she could, he doubted that whatever was in store for him would be any kinder than what he had already lived through.

 

---

“Did you really not know who I was the other day?” Yue asked. She and Sokka were standing on a balcony overlooking the city. It was part of the wing that served as the living quarters of the royal family. Sokka, Katara, and Aang had been given rooms on that level as a gesture of goodwill.

 

“Uh…” Sokka said, slightly embarrassed. He wasn’t sure what to say. Should he admit that he truly hadn’t known? Or should he try and play it cool and say he had, and that he had just been playing with her? He opted for the latter. He found that he liked Yue, and was hoping to hide the fact that he could be an idiot sometimes. At least, he wanted to put that discovery as far in the future as he could.

 

“No. I definitely knew who you were.” He said, and his voice cracked. He blushed and smiled awkwardly. Yue looked at him with an eyebrow raised and her arms crossed. She could see right through his lie, and she clearly wasn’t impressed. “You’re a terrible liar, Sokka.”

 

Sokka sagged. It was true, he wasn’t usually good at deception. He could pull it off very well when he entered the void, but in his natural state he had no prowess. He looked at his fiance sheepishly, and she was clearly struggling not to smile at the expression.

 

“I… was trying not to look like an idiot.” He said.

 

“Well, try harder next time.” His sister’s laughing voice came from behind him. He turned to see her and Aang walking side by side as they returned from waterbender training. 

 

“Katara!” He said indignantly. Yue chuckled at his reaction. He turned back to her, and was a touch upset. Why was everyone ganging up on him?

 

“You didn’t look like an idiot, I thought it was sweet.” Yue said. “I was worried that you’d be arrogant or mean, but meeting you when you didn’t know who I was showed me otherwise.”

 

Sokka smiled, his mood soothed. Katara and Aang went inside and left them alone on the balcony once more. Sokka wanted to get to know her better, to learn what kind of person she was. He thought for a moment, before asking her a question. “What’s your favorite thing to do?”

 

“I like reading poetry!” She said instantly. Sokka was surprised at the quick response. He didn’t have time to reply before she continued on, “The Grand Tribal Library has an extensive collection! We have works from all over the world, even some ancient Air Nomad manuscripts! There is a book I like from the airbenders especially, but it's not just poetry, it has some philosophical texts as well! It was written by a man called Guru Laghima!”

 

“Really?” Sokka said, amused by the irony. To think that his future wife would like the works of a man who had mentored him in the spirit world. “I know about Laghima. He reached enlightenment and unlocked the secret of weightlessness, and lived the final years of his life without touching the ground.”

 

Yue smiled with delight at the revelation. “You’ve read some of his work?”

 

Sokka shook his head. “No, I met him when I was in the spirit world. A couple of times actually.”

 

Yue looked at him skeptically. “Ha ha. Very funny.”

 

“I’m serious!”

 

“Okay.” Yue said. She clearly didn’t believe him.

 

“Aang!” Sokka called out. Yue blinked in surprise. Why was he calling for the Avatar? Was he trying to get him to convince her of the story? In seconds the young man walked out, his lemur wrapped around his head.

 

“What’s up? Do you want me to perform your wedding ceremony?” He asked.

 

“What? No, that’s not what I called you for. Besides, Yue’s not old enough yet. We have to wait for her birthday next month, and probably a while after that.”

 

Yue blinked. Sokka knew when her birthday was? She hadn’t realized… who had told him?

 

“What day is your birthday?” Katara asked Yue, having followed Aang to see what the commotion was about. She was going to answer, but then she thought better of it. Did Sokka know the actual day, or had he just known the month? She looked at him hopefully, curious if he would answer the question.

 

“The nineteenth day of the second month.” He said when he saw Yue looking at him. She smiled, and wondered when his birthday was. She had to ask Katara later. She felt a little shy, now that he knew hers and she couldn't say the same of him. “Anyway, since you guys are here, tell Yue that I've been in the spirit world and met Guru Laghima.”

 

“He has in fact done so, yes.” Aang said.

 

“Well that’s… cool.” Yue said. “How come you were in the spirit world?”

 

“Oh I… well never mind that. It’s a long story and I’d rather not get into it just yet.” Sokka said, looking away awkwardly. He would in time tell her about his arrangement with the Face Stealer, but he would rather wait until they got to know each other better.

 

“Uh.. okay. What was he like?” She asked.

 

“He’s alright, I guess. Kind of cryptic sometimes, but he’s pretty wise.”

 

“Well, he was a Guru.” She said. Sokka nodded in agreement.

 

“Alright. Aang and I are going to our healing lesson with Yagoda. You two have fun.” Katara said, before taking Aang by the hand and dragging him away. Sokka bid them good luck before turning his attention to Yue again.

 

“So where is this library? I’ve never been to one before, so I’m kind of curious.”

 

“I can take you now if you want.” Yue said, with a small frown. What had he meant? Didn’t they have libraries in the south?

 

“That’d be great!’ Sokka said with a smile. The two of them left the palace and headed across the city to the library.

---

Zuko hiked up the mountain. He had left early that morning, right as the sun began its endless trek across the sky. The small town had an admirable beauty to it when bathed in the soft, clean light of morning.

 

He had felt the fire of the volcano through his bending, and it did not seem very restful. In fact, Zuko would have bet that without intervention the mountain would erupt. The townspeople might have thought it safe to leave it to fate, but Zuko and fate didn’t get along so well. So Zuko had decided to take a look.

 

He wasn’t particularly sure what he would do if he found the volcano ready to erupt, but he’d figure something out. He had read extensively on the theory behind a few rare firebending techniques after his mother had vanished. It was about all he could think to do to try and bridge the gap between him and Azula. She was natural, and he wasn’t. She just instinctively understood the discipline.

 

Zuko had been envious, and in his attempts to catch up he had spent months reading dusty old scrolls on rare and complicated forms of firebending. He hadn’t found any on lightning, but he had found some on others. For example, Fire Lord Sozin had written a treatise on the siphoning and directing of heat. He claimed to use the skill to fight a volcano, and modern volcano soothers read it regularly. He had also read the theory behind combustion bending, but the problem with those fields, with all firebending really, was that you couldn’t learn it from scrolls. Not completely.

 

Zuko crested the lip of the caldera, and found himself filled with a grim satisfaction. The volcano was filled with furious and roiling lava. It was like a sea of fire in a hurricane. How had it not blown already?

 

Zuko grimaced and groaned inarticulately. He turned to race down the mountain and felt the earth shake. He stopped and his eyes widened. He didn’t have time to get down to warn the village, or to escape on Sugar Foot. The mountain was going to blow in the next hour if he didn’t do something.

Zuko paced around the caldera, thinking as fast as he could. He thought back to the theory behind volcano soothing. Basically, all that he had to do was channel the heat stored inside of the lava out into the air. This would cause the top layers of the volcano to cool and solidify, and the more heat he could draw the less internal pressure would be left in the mountain. 

 

According to Sozin’s On heat and Motion, heat was essentially the weakest form of fire. All firebenders could create and control heat inside their bodies, and outside with their flames. Sozin had written that a skilled enough firebender could siphon away the heat from external sources and cool an object, and redirect the energy into the air. All Zuko had to do was redirect the heat out of the volcano and into the air. How on earth was he supposed to guide energy?

 

An idea came to him then, and Zuko grit his teeth. He didn’t know if it would work, but he had to try. It was better than old bones; better than nothing. Zuko climbed atop the caldera’s edge and extended an open hand towards the lava. It was just a few feet away, right below the rim of the crater. As skilled of a firebender as he was, he could barely stand the heat. Zuko closed his eyes and breathed deeply. He took hold of the heat and guided it through his body, just as his uncle had taught him to do with lightning.

 

To Zuko’s amazement, it was working! When he opened his eyes again he could see a thick cloud of steam forming in front of him as the condensed heat from his hand met the moisture in the air. It stretched out and began to drift down the mountainside.

 

He didn’t know how long it would take to drain the heat of a mountain, and he didn’t intend to drain it fully. It took a team of highly trained benders weeks to soothe a volcano. He didn’t need for it to be soothed, just to give him enough time to warn the locals and get away. Zuko maintained his post for five minutes, and then ten. Twenty minutes passed. He turned his head towards the lava, and saw that it had receded and cooled. 

 

He smiled, the entire caldera had returned to stone. He lowered his arms. They wouldn’t move. They remained locked in place as the energy of the volcano coursed through him. Zuko’s eyes widened in horror. He couldn’t move, he was stuck in place as he guided the energy.

 

Zuko racked his brain trying to think of a solution. His uncle hadn’t said anything about this, but that was probably because he had never attempted to redirect the fury of a volcano! Only Zuko could be this stupid, it was common knowledge among firebenders that it took years of special training to calm a volcano.

 

Zuko couldn’t think of a solution. He knew that when redirecting lightning the process wasn’t over until all of the electricity had left his body, but with lightning there was a lot less energy to redirect. It seemed to him that all he would be able to do was sit and wait for either the heat to be fully redirected, or wait until the energy was weak enough for him to break the process. He had played a stupid game, and now he had gotten his prize.

 

Zuko wondered, for perhaps the thousandth time since he discovered the Avatar, why the universe hated him.

 

---

Sokka was enthralled by a book of haiku from Ba Sing Sei. He could really get into this poetry thing, if this book was anything to go by. He was delighted by these simple yet elegant poems. To think that such beauty could be found in a mere seventeen syllables. He decided to read one allowed to Yue.

 

“ Ever reaching shoots. Nature’s beauty dwells within. Unending green life. ”

 

“That’s terrible.” She said, without looking up from her scroll. “What’s it called?”

 

“It’s called Bamboo, and it’s not terrible.” Sokka said, crossing his arms.

 

“Yes it is. It's a haiku: They’re all terrible.” She said, this time looking at him with a wry smile.

 

“Well then what do you think is good?” He asked, trying not to be offended. She scrunched up her nose in thought before finding the answer to his question.

 

“Pretty much anything that isn’t a haiku.” 

 

Sokka snorted in amusement. He decided right then that he would compose a haiku to change her mind. “Alright. I’ve decided that I’m going to work tirelessly until I can write one that you enjoy.”

 

Yue raised her eyebrows. “Is that so?”

 

“It most certainly is. Why don’t you like them anyway?”

 

She shrugged. “It’s not like I hate them. I just think it’s reductive to try and sum up a thing in so few words.”

 

“Huh. I kind of like the simplicity. I think it’s elegant how they can express something beautiful in just seventeen syllables.” Sokka said while rubbing his chin.

 

“I never thought of it that way.” Yue said. She leaned back in her chair and looked into the near distance as she considered his words. Sokka watched her face as she thought, and he was sure that she would change her mind. She raised her hand and extended her finger. “You know, thinking about it now, I realize…”

 

Sokka beamed at her and leaned forwards, eager to hear her new opinion.

 

“... That I still don’t like them.” She said, and then laughed at Sokka’s over dramatic reaction. He threw himself back in his chair and clutched his heart, before sliding to the ground.

 

“A more terrible blow I have never received! That one such as you would reject me so easily! My heart cannot take the strain; for how can I live when I have earned your ire?” He said as he lay on the floor. Other patrons looked at him curiously, before returning to their reading.

 

“That was pretty good actually.” Yue said as she helped Sokka to his feet.

 

“Really?” He asked surprised.

 

“Yes, really.” She said with a smile. Sokka’s chest puffed out proudly. He didn’t personally think it was any good, but if this was the kind of thing she liked then he would keep that in mind. He thought he could work with that, though he was surprised that she liked corny and over dramatic words like the ones he had used.

 

“Let’s head back. It’s nearly time for dinner.” Yue said, before standing up. Sokka nodded in enthusiastic agreement, and they left the library to return to the palace. They had not been walking long before You spoke again.

 

“You said that you hadn’t been to a library before. Don’t they have any in the south pole?”

 

“Technically we do, although nobody’s been to one in over thirty years.” He answered. Yue stopped and looked at him in surprise. “What? Why?” 

 

Sokka shrugged. “Well, we don’t live in cities anymore. Once the Fire Nation captured our waterbenders my grandfather had them evacuated, and our tribe spread out across the continent.”

 

Yue blinked. “So you don’t have palaces in the south pole?”

 

“Are you kidding? I grew up in a block of ice. Because we’re so close to the Fire Nation we have to spread out. Their siege engines are probably the most effective weapons they have, and if we don’t congregate in large numbers the cost is too great for the Fire Nation to invade.”

 

Sokka walked on the low wall on the side of the bridge they crossed over. When they reached the end of it, he jumped off and slid a little, but managed to keep his balance on the ice. He raised his arms triumphantly in the fashion of a gymnast, and bowed to Yue. She laughed and rolled her eyes at his antics.

 

“It must be hard to live there then, if you’re so spread out.”

 

Sokka shrugged and fell in step at her side. “It has its ups and downs. We’re safe from the Fire Nation usually, but not always.”

 

“What do you mean?” Yue asked him, her pale blue eyes filled with apprehension.

 

“There was a raid a few years ago. I don’t think they knew whose village it was, if they had known that my family lived there they would’ve sent a larger force. They came and left so fast. It was over before we could do more than mount a defense. At first I was glad and proud that we fought them off so quickly, but that was before I knew what they had done. Who I had lost. My mother, they…” Sokka trailed off and shook his head.

 

“I’m sorry, I shouldn’t have…” Yue began when she saw the sorrow on Sokka’s face.

 

“It’s fine, she’s in a better place. I asked about her in the spirit world, and they told me that she had gone on.”

 

“Oh, that’s… I always wondered what-” Said Yue, “Well, you’ll see her again one day.”

 

Sokka nodded and wiped his eyes, hoping that she hadn’t noticed the moisture. Her words gave him pause. She was right wasn’t she? But why did he feel like that wasn’t the case?

He again had the feeling that he had forgotten something important, but when he reached for the memory he couldn’t find it. Had he hidden it away somewhere?

 

Sokka was torn from his thoughts when Yue took his arm and leaned against him. Sokka looked down at her in surprise. She blushed slightly when she met his eyes, and looked away quickly. She made to let go of him, thinking that maybe she had overstepped by showing affection so soon. He had only been in the city for a few days, but she really liked this boy. She wanted him to like her too, and after the day they had spent together she thought he did. 

 

They were going to get married no matter what, but she hoped that they would have a real relationship, not just a political one. His look of surprise when she had taken his arm while they walked made her think maybe she was wrong, or maybe he wasn’t ready just yet. Why had she done it now after he had told her what he had? She was so stupid, she couldn’t read the situation. He was sad, he didn’t need her to…

 

“I’m sorry,” She said in a small voice. “I should’ve…” She should have what? Yue wasn’t sure what she was about to say, but it didn’t seem to matter, for Sokka took her arm and pulled her close to him again. A wide smile broke across her face.

 

“Don’t be sorry, I was hoping that we could hold hands or something.” He said, with that adorable crooked smile of his. Yue laughed before she asked him, “Is that the activity you wanted to do?”

 

“I just wanted to see you again, I didn’t really have any plans in mind.” He said, and Yue smiled dumbly. When Sokka saw the silly grin on her face he laughed softly.

 

“So, will you tell me about how you were captured by the Fire Nation princess?”

 

---

Zuko’s muscle’s burned. His back ached. He had been stuck in this position for hours, and only now that the sun had set did the stream of heat begin to wane. Zuko sagged in relief. He had siphoned so much heat away from the volcano that it had affected the weather, causing thick dark clouds to roll down the mountain and into the village. He wondered if the locals had noticed, or if they just brushed it off as fog.

 

Zuko concentrated with all his might, and finally managed to end the process of soothing the volcano. He let his arms drop. He fell to his knees, panting. He wasn’t about to do that again anytime soon, he was sure. He looked towards the volcano, and to his surprise found that there was no heat left to emanate from the mountain. He closed his eyes and tried to feel for the fire that had burned within the earth but could feel none, as if he had fully soothed the thing.

 

That was impossible. It should have taken a team of highly trained firebender weeks to do. But, whether possible or not, Zuko couldn’t sense anything from it. Perhaps this application of his uncle's technique was far more efficient than he had assumed. Zuko stood tall, feeling surprisingly pleased with himself. What he had done was incredibly stupid, no doubt about that, but he had managed to save this village.

 

Zuko turned and headed back down the mountain, exhausted though he was, he wasn’t about to sleep up there. He slowly, painfully, made his way down the peak. The climb down took twice as long as the one coming up. He moved gingerly down the path, stopping often to rest his screaming legs. Despite his fatigue he pressed on, hoping that Aunt Wu would let him stay another night despite the late hour of his arrival.

 

After what felt like hours, Zuko finally made it back to the village. He staggered towards the well, hoping to soothe his thirst. He turned the crank, and when the bucket came up he drank deeply, sloshing water down his body. He sat against the well on the ground. He closed his eyes for a moment, and fell fast asleep.

Zuo awoke to the sound of birds chirping outside his window. He sat up. How had he gotten here? He had been at the well, hadn’t he? He stood and stretched his sore muscles. Zuko was in exemplary shape, but spending hours stuck in a bending stance wasn’t part of his training regime. His thighs burned with every movement, but he forced himself to his feet. He found that he had been partially undressed, and his clothes were neatly folded. 

 

Unfolding his clothes, he found that they bore scorch marks from his labors the previous day. He hadn’t noticed before, or thought to look, but there were long burns stretching along the path that he had directed the heat of the volcano. Zuko inspected his body, but didn’t find any marks on it. The heat must have affected his clothes while he had been protected by his bending.

 

He had to get new clothes, then. Traveling in these would arouse suspicion. He got up and put on his ruined shirt. He wasn’t about to go around half naked to buy new clothing, so for the time being he would have to make do. He had lost an entire day, and he would have to push hard to make up for the lost time. Stepping out into the hallway, he recognized Aunt Wu’s parlor. Had she been the one to bring him here?

 

“Good morning.” Aunt Wu said, as she entered the hallway. Zuko bowed and greeted her in turn. He turned to go so that he might purchase new clothes for his journey, but he stopped when she spoke once more.

 

“You stopped the volcano.” The woman said, and the banished prince turned to face her. “You knew it would erupt?”

 

The fortune teller nodded. “When I foresaw your arrival, my vision showed that you would calm the mountain. I know who you are, Prince Zuko.”

 

Zuko stiffened. She knew his identity? Zuko was afraid of being recognized. He had a rather memorable appearance after all, but he didn’t think that his description would be circulated to even the remote areas he was traveling through.

 

“Do not worry, I have no intentions of selling you out. I read your fortune while you were asleep, and I know that your future is too important to let harm befall you.”

 

What did that mean? His future was too important to- Wait, he had specifically refused to have his fortune read, he did not want to know what the future might hold. He would rather wait and see. His eyebrows furrowed, and he clenched his jaw. “I said I didn’t want my fortune told.”

 

“And I’m not telling you. Surely you already knew what I had said? Or did you think that your future was unimportant? I don’t need to remind you of who you are, surely.”

 

Zuko scowled. Yes, he had known that already. He was heir to the Dragon Throne, and he was hunting the Avatar. He had never assumed otherwise, but why was this woman telling him he was too important to be harmed? Was she loyal to the Fire Nation? Or did she think that he was the best chance for peace? He had already vowed to end the war when he became Fire Lord, but that was decades away. His father was only in his early forties, and Azulon and Sozin had both lived for more than a century.

 

“I have prepared new clothes for your journey, and more supplies for you and your ostrich-horse.” Aunt Wu said, bowing slightly. Zuko’s anger abated slightly. She didn’t have to do that, but she had gone out of her way to help him. He was grateful. “Thank you.”

 

“I also sent a message to your uncle, to tell him of your whereabouts.”

 

Zuko gaped at her. How did this random fortune teller in the middle of nowhere have the means to contact his uncle? Why would she? Did she know him somehow? 

 

Aunt Wu must have read Zuko’s confusion, for she laughed. “I’ve met the general a time or two, we’ve played pai sho together on occasion. Here, I'm sure he’d want you to have this.”

 

She handed him a pai sho tile, the lotus. Zuko raised an eyebrow skeptically. Despite his confusion, he was sure that Uncle would want him to take this. He shrugged, and left the fortune teller. 

 

Zuko changed into his new clothes and donned his cloak, putting his hood up. He walked to the stable and saddled Sugar Foot. He mounted the animal and as he started their journey once more, a group of villagers snickered at him. Why were they doing that? What was so funny? Had Aunt Wu given him a shirt with an odd pattern? He looked down and saw that it was a simple brown like his previous one. Well, whatever they were laughing at it didn’t matter. He had just saved their entire town, and the ungrateful peasants were laughing at him. Typical.

 

“Let’s go, Sugar Foot.” He said, and the mystery of what the villagers thought comical was solved. Upon hearing the name of his steed, the bystanders guffawed with laughter. Zuko blushed and raced out of town.

 

---

 

Admiral Zhao smiled to himself as he sat in his private quarters. His plan was working rather well. Zuko had been officially disowned and branded a traitor. He had gained Azula’s trust. The fact that Iroh had begun to counsel her was an unexpected boon. That would make matters much easier when the time came.

 

He suspected that the Avatar had already taken refuge among the northern Water Tribe, and he had sent a message to his ally in Agna Qel’a. Soon he would receive the man's reply. His order had placed operatives in the inner circle’s of government of the three great societies. The Fire Nation, the Earth Kingdom, and the Northern Water Tribe. There had been some in the Southern Water Tribe, but the Southern Fox had found them out after the woman revealed the location of the last waterbender. The raid to kill the waterbender had failed somehow, as the girl still lived.

 

How had their spy not known that she was the daughter of Hakoda? Maybe she had but chose not to reveal the identity of whose family she was. It hardly mattered now, all of their line had left the south pole, and Zhao knew where they would be. The First Son had been engaged to the Northern Princess, and his father would soon join him in the north. It was too bad for him, that when he got there he would find the Fire Nation had conquered the north and taken his children from him.

 

After Zhao conquered the north, he would be held as a legendary figure in the Fire Nation. With Zuko thrown out, all he had to do was remove Azula and Iroh. He would be next in line for Fire Lord, and then Ozai would have a little accident. When he became Fire Lord, true freedom would be brought to the world. Vaatu would be freed, and the world along with him.

Chapter 16: Civil Disagreements

The moon was falling. How was it even possible? It had only moments before been in its place among the heavens, yet now it plummeted towards the earth. As Sokka watched, unable to move, the moon began to burn. The flame bored a hole in its center, spreading out until the moon was burned to a cinder, and the world was plunged into darkness.

 

Sokka could neither move nor speak. He struggled to move but his limbs wouldn’t respond. When at last he couldn’t struggle any longer, a distorted face swam before his eyes. It resolved itself into the image of Zhao, smiling the predator grin of a tiger-seal. Zhao opened his mouth wide, and a bolt of lightning shot forth to strike Sokka in the heart.

---

Aang stretched himself as he got out of bed. Katara was nowhere to be seen, but that wasn’t particularly unusual; she had gotten in the habit of waking first, so that she didn’t have to wait for Sokka to get out of the bathroom. Aang had thought it was odd that she didn’t just use a different one, the palace had several, but he didn’t think it was important enough to say anything.

 

Momo trilled in dismay, and Aang looked in his direction. Momo was jumping on Sokka’s bed trying to wake him. Aang immediately rushed over to his friend, for Sokka was thrashing in his sleep. Aang grabbed hold of his shoulders and shook him violently to wake him, calling out to his friend. “Sokka! Sokka wake up!”

 

Sokka sat up and lashed out, brandishing Momo like a club he shouted, “Zhao!”

 

Sokka froze and looked around. Aang took Momo from him and the lemur perched on his shoulder, looking at Sokka curiously. Aang put a hand on the non-bender’s shoulder before speaking. “It was a dream, it's just us here.”

 

Aang watched his friend with concern. Sokka rubbed his eyes and looked at his chest, gingerly feeling the skin above his heart. He looked confused for a moment, before saying, “Oh thank goodness. I thought he got me for a second there. It seemed so real.”

 

“What happened? In your dream, I mean?” Aang asked, stepping away as Sokka got up to dress himself.

 

“Well it was pretty strange.” Sokka said, looking at Aang. “The moon was falling, and then it caught fire. Zhao showed up and shot lightning out of his mouth. I couldn’t move at all, so he got me pretty easily.”

 

“That’s… strange.” Aang said, and Sokka shrugged. 

 

“Yeah, but it was just a dream, so it’s fine.” Sokka said. Katara joined them again, her hair as immaculately braided as ever. Aang smiled goofily at her when she came in. She smiled back at him. Sokka rolled his eyes.

 

“So what are you going to do today, Sokka?” Katara asked, “Yue told me that she has to spend the day with her dad, so I guess that means the two of you can’t hang out.”

 

“Yeah, she told me about it yesterday. It’s a little disappointing, but we’ve spent almost every day together since we got here..” Sokka said as he laced up his boots. He finished and stretched himself. The three of them had been in Agna Qel’a, the capital city of the northern Water Tribe, for two weeks now.

 

“I figured that I’d watch you and Aang practice your waterbending today.”

 

“That’s great! You can watch Katara beat the stuffing out of everyone else! She’s way better than me.” Aang said jovially.

 

“I’m really not that good,” She said with a blush, “Aang can beat me easily when he’s concentrating.”

 

“So basically never?” Sokka asked with a smirk. Aang nodded enthusiastically. Katara rolled her eyes. Team Avatar made their way from their room and ate a quick breakfast before heading to train with Master Pakku. Sokka had worried that the old man would treat her rather harshly, since he normally didn’t teach girls. His worries had been abated upon the discovery that Pakku had once been engaged to his grandmother before she moved to the south pole. The old master had seemed to develop a dry affection for the two of them after that.

 

When the three of them arrived at the training area, Pakku was speaking to a stranger. Sokka recognized him as the man he had noticed during their welcoming feast. He had his dark hair pulled up in a top-knot, a fashion usually worn in the Fire Nation. Sokka would have been suspicious, but Pakku seemed to know the fellow, and Sokka trusted the waterbending master’s judgment.

 

“I see you’ve made it on time today. I’m impressed.” Pakku said with a sarcastic smile. Aang grumbled. He had been late one time! Now every day Pakku teased him about it. To be fair, he probably shouldn’t take his training so lightly, playing with Momo wasn’t likely to make Pakku happy with him.

 

“Why don’t you introduce me to the Avatar, Pakku?” The stranger said. Pakku nodded in agreement.

 

“Aang, Sokka, Katara, this is Master Piandao. He’s a friend of mine, visiting from the Fire Nation.” Pakku said, and then he laughed at the astonished looks on their faces. “Relax, he’s not in the army, he hasn’t been in years.”

 

“It’s a pleasure to meet you all.” Piandao said with a bow.

 

“Thank you, it’s a pleasure to meet you as well.” Aang said as he returned the gesture. “But, if I may ask, what brings you so far from home?”

 

“Just visiting an old friend.” He said with a smile. “I’ll be returning to the Fire Nation soon though, I’ll only be here until the Princess’s birthday. After that I must return. Enough about me, though. You need to focus on our training. From what Jeong Jeong and Pakku have told me, you get distracted easily.”

 

“You know Jeong Jeong? Both of you?” Aang said, rubbing his head with an embarrassed smile.

 

“Never mind that.” Pakku said sternly. “You’re going to be partnered with Katara today. Practice the octopus form. And you!” He said, pointing a finger at Katara, “Do not go easy on him.”

 

Aang and Katara bowed to their master before moving off a fair distance and beginning to spar. Sokka watched them for a moment. His plan for the day was to cheer them on with jokes and sarcastic comments, but this Piandao character had stalled him in that. He had heard the name somewhere before, and hearing Jeong Jeong brought up again reminded him. Shing had told him that name! Piandao was his swordmaster, and Shing had said that he was probably the best in the world.

 

Sokka looked back at Piandao with realization on his face, but the man had already turned and walked a fair distance. Jogging to catch up, Sokka called out to him.

 

“Wait!” He yelled, causing the master to turn. Piandao waited while Sokka caught up to him. “I trained with one of your disciples, Shing. He said that you were the best swordmaster in the world.”

 

“Yes, Shing mentioned you in a letter. And I don’t know about the whole world,” Piandao said with a smile.

 

Sokka knelt before him and lowered his head. “I would be honored if you would teach me.”

 

Piandao considered him for a minute. “Usually, my students prove their worth when they ask to train with me.”

 

Sokka paused at that. Was he worthy? He had made mistakes, and plenty of poor choices. But he had always tried to help, and do what he thought was right, or necessary. Before he could respond, Piandao continued on. “Let me guess, you were the strongest warrior in your village. You traveled far to get here, and since you are friends with the Avatar, you think you deserve to train with me.”

 

“I’ve traveled all over the world.” Sokka said, and Paindao turned away from him.

 

“Here we go,” Piandao said. He heard this speech before. Shing had spoken highly of this boy in his message, and he was willing to give Sokka the benefit of the doubt. That didn’t mean he would go easy on him.

 

“I’ve fought many battles since I left home, and I've made many mistakes. I’m not sure if I've made the right choices, but I know one thing for sure: I have a lot to learn.”

 

Piandao turned his head to the side at Sokka’s words. It seemed that Shing was right, this boy wasn’t as arrogant as many who had asked to train under him. He had shown genuine humility, a trait that was rather uncommon in young men.

 

“You said your students had to prove their worth to you. And honestly? I don’t know if I am worthy.” Sokka said, his eyes still on the ground.

 

Piandao smiled, and turned to face the young man once more. “No? Then let’s find out together! I will train you.”

 

---

 

Song worked in a hospital. Well, at least in what passed for a hospital in this small town near the northwestern coast of the Earth Kingdom, in what was now Fire Nation controlled territory. In a larger town like Gaoling, or in cities like Omashu or Ba Sing Se, it likely would’ve barely counted as a clinic. But, as far as the local populace was concerned, it was a hospital.

 

She had risen early. A fence had fallen over in a storm a few weeks ago, and Song and her mother had been unsuccessful in mending it. They had tried, but they were often so tired from working that they didn’t have much energy to spend on anything other than cooking dinner and going to sleep. So today Song had gotten up early to try and mend it. She hadn’t managed to do more than stack up the loose wood and replant the post in the ground. Her father had always taken care of that sort of thing when she was a girl, but the Fire Nation had taken him and the other men from the farming village they had lived in.

 

Now Song and her mother lived somewhere else. She had taken up training as a nurse, and now she made good money for them to live off of, but her mother hadn’t wanted to hire anyone to fix the fence. Song didn’t really understand it, but she decided it wasn’t worth arguing over. They would mend it themselves, unless they were fortunate enough for someone to do it for free.

 

Song entered the hospital, and was greeted by her mentor, Fei. He was an older man, but he was kind and knew his medicine incredibly well. When he saw her he waved a hand in greeting, and told her what was on the docket so far. “Good morning, Song. Not many people need our help this morning. Cho burned his hand cooking breakfast. It’s not all that bad, but you know him. Always making mountains out of mole hills.”

 

“Is that all?” Song asked, surprised. It was rather unusual for there to be only one person that needed help, but if it would be an easy day then perhaps Fei would let her go early. She had that fence to mend, and she thought that if she could get in a few hours of work..

 

“So far, but the day is young. If it keeps up like this, I’ll close up and let you and the others go home early.” Fei said with a smile. He and his family lived there, so even if she and the other nurses left, nobody would go without care. Song smiled and thanked him, and went about tending to Cho and his slightly red hand. 

 

After Cho left, Song busied herself by sweeping and folding blankets. She finished that rather early on, so she and the other hospital workers chatted the morning away. Finally, around noon, another patient walked in. Song was playing a game of mahjong, so she didn’t see who it was, but Fei’s voice called out from the entry room. “Song! Would you come up here please?”

 

She excused herself from the game and went to see what Fei needed. “Ah, there you are. Would you take this young man to the back and see to him? After that you can have the rest of the day off.”

 

Song agreed and cheered internally. She had been hoping for this, she hadn’t had proper time off in a while. Usually they had a pretty consistent work schedule, but since that stom had rolled through their workload had increased. Now that it had finally slowed down to its regular pace, and there were no more sick people, she would get to have her regular days off again. She wouldn’t be back for two whole days!

 

The young man wore a dark cloak, with a deep hood that obscured most of his face. It was a little odd, but Song didn’t pay it too much attention. She led the newcomer to an examination table to take a seat. The stranger rolled up his sleeve to reveal a long scrape. It looked a touch infected.

 

“How did you get that?” She asked curiously.

 

“I got into an argument.”

 

“Fighting?” She asked disapprovingly. The stranger shook his head and lowered his hood. Song’s eyes were immediately drawn to the angry red scar that covered much of his face. It was a miracle that he could still see! The fire had been intense enough to maim his ear. She felt sorry for this man. Whatever it was that had happened to him must have been horrible. It had left his once handsome face marred and broken.

Song forced her attention back to his forearm. She collected some ointment and began to gently dab it onto the damaged skin. In an effort to hide her shock at seeing his scar, she decided to engage in conversation with the young man. “So who were you arguing with?”

 

She glanced up to his face again, and she saw him blush. She also noticed that he had a few cuts and scrapes on his face as well. The young man mumbled something that she couldn’t understand.

 

“What was that?”

 

“... My ostrich-horse.”

 

Song stopped her dabbing and shook her head. Had he said he was arguing with an ostrich-horse? “You had an argument with an ostrich-horse?”

 

“Yes.” Said the man, curtly. Song studied him. He was around her age, and clearly embarrassed. As she looked at him, his awkwardness became apparent. She decided in that moment, either despite the scar or because of it, that she liked his broken face.

 

“I’m Song. What’s your name?” She asked, as she turned her attention to the scrapes on his face.

 

“Lee.” He said, curt as ever.

 

“Alright, Lee, what did you and your ostrich-horse argue about?”

 

“I don’t like her name. Apparently she doesn’t want to change it. I kept calling her by the new one and she threw me off.” Lee said, trying to maintain an even expression despite his evident embarrassment.

 

“What is her name then, since she won’t let you change it?” Song asked curiously. Lee blushed furiously, and grit his teeth. Song resisted the urge to giggle at his reaction. Eventually, Lee answered the question.

 

“Sugar Foot.”

 

Song lost her internal struggle and laughed openly. This only served to make Lee angry, for he shouted, “I didn’t name her that! The breeder did! I tried to change it!”

 

“I know, I know, it’s just that I didn’t expect that! Why would anyone name an ostrich-horse Sugar Foot?” She began giggling again when she said the name, and Lee snickered, and then frowned. Evidently it was against his own best judgment, and now he was disappointed with himself.

 

Song finished tending to him when Lee’s stomach grumbled. She eyed him for a moment, and then she got an idea. She rather liked this boy. He looked strong, he was hungry, and she had a fence to mend. Maybe she could get him to spend more time with her under the guise of exchanging his labor for dinner?

 

“So Lee, I was wondering, could you help me with something? A fence fell down a couple weeks ago, and my mother and I haven't been able to fix it yet. If you wouldn’t mind fixing it, we could give you a hot meal and a bed in return.”

 

Lee seemed to consider that for a moment. It looked as though he was having some kind of internal struggle, but his hunger won out. He nodded.

 

Song smiled. Lee didn’t seem to talk much. That was fine with her: she liked the strong silent type.

Zuko had no idea what he was doing. He had not repaired a fence in his life! He had never even seen one being built. He had grown up in a palace, and then lived the last three years of his life at sea. He looked over his shoulder at Song, who smiled encouragingly. He returned to his work, inserting the horizontal logs into the post.

 

He would have kept moving towards the coast, as he had only another day's travel until he made it to the port, but his money had begun to run out. The offer of a meal and a bed was too tempting to pass up, so he had accepted. He had not, however, anticipated that he would spend the majority of his time being followed by this girl.

 

Song was nice enough, but he didn’t find the idea of making friends with the people his nation was at war with. He had vowed to end the war when he became Fire Lord, but that wouldn’t happen until decades after he captured Aang. The Avatar. He had to stop thinking of them by their first names. Aang, Katara, and Sokka were his enemies, and he had to capture them to restore his honor. Honor that had been taken from him by the Fire Lord.

 

The Fire Lord, who had ordered countless atrocities to nameless and faceless civilians. His father, Fire Lord Ozai. A man who dueled and banished a child, his own son, for speaking out of turn. Zuko shook his head, he couldn't think about that now, he had to stay focused. He had to capture the Avatar so that he could..?

 

Zuko shook his head again, and Sugar Foot cawed merrily from where she was tethered alongside Song’s own animal. Zuko glared at her. She had thrown him off of her back when he had become insistent on calling her Yoake; evidently she didn’t like the name. Why she would refuse to be named for the dawn he didn’t know, but he had given up on it.

 

“Dinner’s ready, Lee, Song,” Song’s mother, Ran, called from the house. Zuko’s stomach growled in anticipation. He refused to acknowledge it, it would be unseemly for a prince to act on his base instincts so eagerly. He stood up and inspected his handiwork: it was terrible.

 

“It’s… Not bad.” Song said. She was evidently trying to spare his feelings, but if anything it had the opposite effect.

 

“You don’t have to lie to me. I can see it for myself.” Zuko said evenly. Song didn’t respond. She instead took his hand, to which Zuko stiffened. He wasn’t sure what to do; part of him wanted to jerk away, and part of him enjoyed the contact. It had been a long time since anyone but his uncle had been so familiar with him.

 

“Come on, let’s go eat. You can work on it some more in the morning.” Song said as she pulled him toward the house. Zuko hesitated for a moment, but he allowed her to lead him inside.

 

---

 

Aang followed Katara into a lavish sitting room in the royal family’s living quarters. Yue was there, reading a scroll to Sokka when they walked in. She stopped reading when they entered, and smiled at them in greeting.

 

“Hey.” Katara said with a wave, before sitting on the couch with Sokka. Aang sat in a comfortable armchair to one side of them. A fire crackled happily in the hearth, which Aang had thought odd at first. He had assumed that everything here was made of ice, but he soon discovered that it was just painted blue. He was wise enough to keep that realization to himself. It seemed obvious in retrospect, and he didn’t want to look stupid.

 

“Where’d you run off to?” Aang asked, “I thought you were gonna watch us learn waterbending.”

 

“I was, but then we met Master Piandao, and he agreed to teach me swordbending.” Sokka said. Yue laughed at his answer. 

 

“Swordbending?” She asked

 

“It’s the only kind I can do! Do you guys remember Shing? He taught me a little bit about it before Azula captured us. Apparently he wrote to Piandao about me!” Sokka said the last part with no small amount of pride. Upon hearing his words, Katara slapped a hand to her forehead.

 

“I completely forgot! When Jeong Jeong and his people were leaving, he wanted to speak with you, but you and Aang were in the spirit world! He asked me to tell you he had written to him, but with everything that happened I forgot!”

 

Sokka shrugged, “It’s fine. Seeing how you rescued us and all, I’m not that mad about it.”

 

“It’s good that you’ve found a master,” Said Aang, “But you really should’ve been there today! Katara and Pakku faced off, and she almost won! It was amazing! He said she’s the best student he’s ever trained!”

 

Katara blushed and tried to wave it off. “It wasn’t that close. He was going easy on me.”

 

“Still, at this rate you’ll be a master in no time!” Aang went on, “Next time we face Zhao or Azula they won’t stand a chance!”

 

Sokka rolled his eyes and snorted dismissively. He had imagined Katara washing Zhao down a river, and thought the idea of him being a threat to them again was laughable. Katara, unfortunately, did not know what he had imagined, and had taken his snort to mean he didn’t believe Aang. She tried not to take it personally, as Sokka hadn’t seen her improved skill, but she was still annoyed.

 

“I can’t wait to fight against Azula again!” Katara said, ignoring her brother. “Let’s see how well that monster does now.”

 

“She’s not a monster,” Sokka said, closing his eyes and leaning back.

 

“And how do you know that, oh insightful one?” Katara asked, her annoyance turning to anger. She glared at him, but his eyes were closed. Had they been open, or had Aang or Katara been looking, they would have seen the look of concern and confusion on Yue’s face. 

 

“I just do.” Sokka said, waving his hand dismissively. Katara’s face grew red at being waved off. First he had dismissed her new waterbending prowess, and now he was basically ignoring her!

 

“You’re just saying that because you think she’s pretty!” Katara said angrily. Sokka’s eyes snapped open and he blushed. How did she know that? He hadn’t told anyone about it, he had been denying it since he first saw her in the spirit pool. She was Fire Nation, and therefore the enemy, and because of that she could not be beautiful. At least that’s what he had told himself.

 

“That has nothing to do with it!” Sokka said indignantly. Yue’s eyes widened and she scowled. So he thought this Princess Azula was attractive then? She crossed her arms as a pang of jealousy coursed through her. She tried to ignore it, but Sokka and Katara’s argument wouldn’t let her.

 

“Well, then, why not? I’m sure you must have a reason. You and your infinite wisdom always do, apparently.” Katara snapped at him, pointing a finger in his face.

 

Sokka was completely confused, how had he upset her? She had been happy only a moment ago. He glanced at Aang for support, but the Avatar was busy staring at his thumbs as he twidled them around. He looked to Yue next, and to his alarm, she seemed to be siding with Katara, if the daggers she stared at him were anything to go by.

 

“I- she-” He stammered. This was not his area of expertise. “She’s not a bad person, really, she-”

 

“She what?!” Yue cut in angrily.

 

“She’s sad! Lonely!” Sokka said, becoming angry himself now. Why were they ganging up on him?

 

“Oh so she’s just a beautiful, sad, and lonely princess! Why, that’s great! Maybe, if you think she’s so beautiful,” Yue said as she got up and crossed the sitting room, stomping furiously away from Sokka, “Instead of me, you should just marry Azula!”

 

She slammed the door behind her. Sokka glared at Katara furiously. “Thanks, Katara, I really appreciate it.”

 

Sokka raced across the room to chase after his fiance.

 

---

 

Azula sneezed. Mai looked at her with a raised eyebrow. 

 

“Are you catching a cold?” She asked

 

Azula shook her head in answer.

 

“Maybe someone’s talking about you.” Ty Lee quipped. Azula rolled her eyes.

 

“I’m sure I’m spoken of far too often for that to be the case, or else I’d be sneezing constantly.” Azula replied dryly. 

 

The three of them were in the command room with her uncle. Admiral Zhao would be joining them shortly, and they would begin to plan the siege of the northern Water Tribe. Zhao had gathered an impressive force so far, but their siege was still around six weeks away.

 

Iroh poured jasmine tea for everyone present, and left the Admiral’s cup empty until the time he would arrive. He didn’t have to wait long, for the Admiral entered soon after he finished pouring. Zhao bowed to Azula, and then repeated the gesture in a slighter fashion to Iroh.

 

“I apologize for making you wait, Princess, General.” He said, and Iroh smiled.

 

“It’s no problem, Admiral Zhao. Let us begin with our preparations.” Iroh said. Azula was annoyed by that, but she let it go. If anyone should have said something about his lateness, it was her. 

 

Zhao laid a map on the long table in the center of the room. On it was marked a few locations. Whaletail Island, their own position, and the Water tribe capital city of Agna Qel’a. He placed a finger on Whaletail island before speaking. “I received a report this morning that Hakoda passed by here late last night. Unfortunately, he has again evaded pursuit.”

 

“What is he doing in the south?” Iroh asked curiously.

 

“My contact in the north has told me that he and Chief Arnook have agreed to merge the tribes once again.” 

 

Iroh’s face formed an expression of astonishment. “Really? After centuries they have finally agreed to merge?”

 

Zhao nodded. “The Southern Fox has arranged for the First Son to marry Princess Yue. He’s gone to the south for an unknown purpose. All the better for us: his absence will make our efforts that much easier.”

 

Azula stared blankly at the map, not taking anything in. Sokka was to marry this Princess Yue, whoever she was? How had she never heard the name before? She shook her head; it didn’t matter, she needed to focus on planning the invasion.

 

“So Hakoda will be absent. Too bad for him, that he won’t be present when we capture the First Son and the Sea Wolf, along with the Avatar.” Azula said, ending the tangent that centered on Hakoda.

 

Iroh glanced at her momentarily, and then drew a line between their position and a port on the northwestern coast. It was sheltered in a large bay, and was under Fire Nation control. They had seized the territory nearly a decade earlier, and the brunt of the fighting had moved eastward.

 

“I suggest that we gather our forces here,” He said, “This is the best location large enough to muster the invasion force. We should make our way there while the rest of the fleet is assembled, and order them to muster no less than two weeks before the invasion.”

 

Zhao nodded, pulling out another map to lay over top of the first. This new map detailed the capital of the northern Water Tribe. Zhao had marked a few different locations on the map, and placed a finger on the first one.

 

“The northern Water Tribe is a great nation. It has managed to withstand a hundred years of war so far, but now that we are fully committing to the invasion they will fall. The first obstacle to overcome to gain access to the city is their glacial gate. A wall of Ice that encompasses the bay during times of war, ten yards thick. The wall will be weakened by our artillery, and once it is damaged enough we can deploy land troops and armored cavalry divisions.”

 

Iroh nodded sagely. “When we arrive, the moon will be near full. I suggest that we wait and form a blockade so that none escape, and that we may invade once the moon begins to wane.”

 

Zhao shook his head. “No. If we give the Avatar too much warning, he will escape to the Earth Kingdom and our efforts will be for nothing.”

 

Azula thought for a moment. Waterbenders' power was strongest during the full moon. Admiral Zhao was right in that they could not afford to delay any longer, but if they kept their attacks limited to daylight hours, then the waterbenders would not be able to take advantage of the moon's strength. She told the two men as much, and Iroh agreed with her assessment, but the Admiral did not share the sentiment. Zhao smiled to himself before speaking.

 

“I am well aware of the moon problem, Princess, and I have found a solution.” Admiral Zhao said, before drawing a scroll from his breastplate. “When I was a young officer on an expedition to the Si Wong desert, I came across a great library. Within I found many secrets, and one in particular caught my eye.”

 

He gave the scroll to Azula, who began to read. The scroll contained an account of the Moon and Ocean spirits, Tui and La, and a description of their mortal form, as well as their location. Azula handed the scroll to Iroh, and looked at Zhao skeptically.

 

“You genuinely believe that the Ocean and Moon spirits are koi fish in the Water Tribe?” She asked, with a raised eyebrow. Zhao nodded, and replied, “My contact has confirmed their existence, and that they have been in the spirit oasis for longer than anyone can remember.”

 

Iroh put down the scroll. He looked at Zhao slowly, and began to speak. “What are you planning to do, Zhao?”

 

Ty Lee drew in a sharp breath, and Azula looked at her for a moment. Ty Lee was staring at the Admiral with wide and confused eyes. Azula was about to question her friend's sudden reaction, when Admiral Zhao began to speak.

 

“I intend to kill the Moon Spirit.”

 

Azula whipped her head around to stare at the Admiral in shock. Kill the Moon Spirit? Was he serious? Did he think that would only harm the Water Tribe? Didn’t he realize that the rest of the world needed the moon too? The Fire Nation venerated the sun, and what would he do if his sister was killed? Would he sit idly by and continue to bless the Fire Nation as he always had? Azula doubted that. She doubted that the Moon Spirit was a fish too, but Admiral Zhao’s answer had shocked her nonetheless.

 

“Zhao!” Iroh said angrily, “The Fire Nation needs the moon too! Harming that spirit in any way could wreak havoc on the world! The Fire Nation, as well as the Water Tribes, depends on the moon.”

 

Zhao opened his mouth to respond, but Azula spoke before he could.

 

“Really, Admiral, why kill the Moon Spirit? Surely we could capture it instead, and use it as a hostage, or even hinder the waterbenders without harming it. It would be a senseless waste to destroy the moon, as it is the moon that forms the tides on which our nation thrives.”

 

Zhao closed his mouth, and Azula could see the anger in his eyes. He breathed to calm himself, before speaking. “Are you both certain of this?”

 

Iroh and Azula confirmed their stance on the subject. Zhao nodded in acceptance, before agreeing not to harm the moon spirit. He bowed and left them, but Azula knew one thing for certain: Admiral Zhao was lying.

Chapter 17: Hard Truths

Sokka followed Yue down the hallway. He had never been in this part of the living quarters before, but he didn’t pay attention to their surroundings. Yue was angry with him, and he was trying to calm her.

 

“Yue, please, can’t we talk about this?” He asked. She ignored him and kept walking. A pair of guardsmen watched them curiously as they passed. Yue opened another door and stepped inside. Sokka made to follow her, but one of the guards placed a hand on his shoulder.

 

“I’m sorry, sir, but you are not permitted in the princesses bedroom without permission.”

 

“But I’ve got to talk with her! She’s mad, and I..” He trailed off. He started to worry about his relationship with Yue, and wondered if maybe it wouldn’t work out. Surely it would, their fathers had signed the pact already. One argument wouldn’t stop that, would it?

 

“Yue, I- Can we please talk? I can explain everything! If you would let me in, I-” He stopped speaking when the door opened. Yue was glaring at him in a way that was frighteningly similar to Katara. She held his gaze for a moment, and Sokka thought that she would send him away, but she stepped aside so that he could enter. 

 

The door closed behind him, and Sokka looked around the room. He was surprised at the spartan furnishings. There was a large bed, with blue curtains that surrounded the canopy. A desk and chair were stationed against one wall. A window opposite the door overlooked the city. A bookshelf and dresser stood beside the left and right of the bed respectively.

 

“Well?” Said Yue. “Explain why you feel so strongly for Azula?”

 

“I don’t feel strongly for Azula.” Sokka answered, “I just… pity her, I guess.”

 

Yue’s face lost its angry expression and changed to one of confusion. “You pity her?”

 

Sokka sighed. He should probably start at the beginning. “It’s a long story. It all started a few months ago…”

 

Sokka told the story of how he had fallen into the spirit world, his deal with Koh, and everything that had transpired since. He explained how when he entered the void everything became so clear, and he told her of his third eye. Yue listened silently as he told his story, and she sat beside him on the bed.

 

“And that’s when I met Azula. Her and Zhao had captured me and Aang, and they were interrogating me about my father. Azula said something and I knew it was a lie. I’m not sure how, but I knew it as surely as I know that the moon will rise again. That’s when I looked at her with my third eye. I met her eyes and I got a look inside. It’s hard to explain, really, but when I meet someone’s gaze with my third eye open I can get a sense of who they are. I think that because I was wrapped in the void at the same time I could really see who she is.”

 

“And who is she?” Yue asked hesitantly. Sokka’s story worried her. She felt something for this boy, something she hadn’t felt before and she didn’t really know what it was. And now she learned that he had been bound to Koh, whoever he was, much like she had been touched by the Moon Spirit. His bond seemed different somehow. Darker. As if the spirit had taken something from him. She was worried now, worried that Sokka was in danger, that somehow the boy she had grown to… grown to like, would be taken from her. Taken by the Fire Nation princess, or by the spirits. Yue didn’t know what was worse.

 

“She’s… alone, I guess. Someone left her when she was young, and she had nobody but the Fire Lord. She’s devoted to him, completely, for she is afraid that if she disappoints him he’ll cast her away, and then she’ll have nobody. She’s sad, lonely and scared. When our eyes met, she was afraid of me, I think.”

 

“Do you… like her?” Yue asked, softley. To her relief, Sokka shook his head. The feeling of jealousy that she had been holding since Katara and Sokka’s argument faded away when he had denied liking the princess.

 

“D- do you like me?” Yue asked hopefully, trying hard not to let worry into her voice. Of course he did, or she thought he did, at least as a friend. She wanted to think that he had feelings for her in the same way that she had for him, but she couldn’t know for sure. He could just be fulfilling his duty to his tribe, and not feel anything for her.

 

Sokka scoffed at her question, and Yue’s heart sank.

 

“Of course I do, Yue. I think that I’m falling in-” He cut himself off. His voice cracked and he blushed. “Falling in… like with you.”

 

Yue looked at Sokka. Sokka looked away, trying to hide his blush. Falling in like with you ? What was wrong with him? Why hadn’t he just said yes? Spirits, Sokka felt stupid. He was almost as bad as Aang back on Kyoshi Island.

 

“I’m falling in like with you, too.”  Yue said, with a smile. Sokka’s face lit up and he smiled back at her. She leaned towards him, tilting her face upwards. Sokka leaned down and kissed her gently. They broke apart quickly and smiled at each other.

 

Yue stood up and took Sokka’s hand, “Let go on a walk, I want to show you something.”

 

Sokka nodded and followed her. “We have something else in common, since you told me about Koh.”

 

“What’s that?” Sokka asked. They walked around a corner and began to descend a flight of stairs.

 

“I owe the Moon Spirit my life. I’m spirit touched, too.” Yue spoke to him as they exited the palace and headed towards the bay. Yue took hold of Sokka’s arm and they walked in comfortable silence as they traveled through the city. Eventually, they walked out over the Glacial Gate. Yue and Sokka looked out over the sea. It was a spectacular view.

 

“When I was born, I was very sick. Most babies cry when they’re born, but I was silent. Our healers tried everything they could, but they couldn’t help me. My parents took me to the Spirit Oasis and placed me in the water, where the moon reflected on the surface. My hair turned white and I began to cry. My parents knew that I would live, and so my mother named me Yue for the moon.”

 

“That’s amazing!’ Sokka said, “I’m so glad that you’re alive.

 

Sokka paused, realizing that what he said sounded a little weird. Yue seemed to like it though, and she smiled at him before turning back to the sea. Sokka couldn’t take his eyes away from her though. He looked down at the beautiful young woman beside him. Ever since they had met, Sokka had been enthralled with her. She was so kind to everyone they met. She would help anyone who needed, going as far as to help the elderly in and out of boats on the canals. She even settled arguments between children.

 

Sokka felt something deep in his chest, a happiness stronger than he had felt since before his mother died. He was so grateful that she had come into his life, and he would have to thank his father for it. He wondered if they would have wound up together if he hadn’t. Would they? Surely they would have met while he was at the north pole with Aang, even if they didn’t spend so much time together.

 

“Sokka,” Yue broke him out of his thoughts, “I was wondering, what do I look like when you use your third eye?”

 

“I actually haven’t looked. I haven’t opened it in a while. I can now, though.”

 

“Oh, no, you don’t have to if you don’t want to, I was just curious.” Yue hastily replied.

 

“I’m curious too now,” Sokka chuckled. “Give me a second, it won’t take too long.”

 

Sokka closed his eyes and touched his forehead. He hadn’t had to do that for some time, but he hadn’t practiced since Katara had confronted him about Koh. He really should, it was a valuable skill even without the Face Stealer’s power. He made a mental note to practice that and reaching for the void more often.

 

He opened his eyes again, and his mouth fell open. Yue glowed with the beautiful white light of the summer moon. It didn’t course through her body the way that chi normally did, no, it emanated from her and illuminated everything around them.

 

“Is it that bad?” Yue said with a smile. Sokka shook his head and wiped his eyes. He shut them tight and closed his third eye once more. He had seen enough, as beautiful as it was, he didn’t think it wise to gaze at her like that for long.

 

“It’s the most beautiful thing I've ever seen.”

 

“Really?”

 

“Yes!” He laughed, “Yue, you’re incredible!”

 

“She is indeed.” A man said from behind them. Sokka looked over to see who had spoken. It was a tall man that he didn’t recognize. Evidently Yue did, as she greeted the man by name.

 

“Thanks, Laluk, but I’m really not all that special,” She said. Sokka shook his head in disagreement. “You most certainly are! I can assure you of that!”

 

Yue swatted him on the arm, and Sokka fell to the ground clutching his arm as he pretended it was a grievous wound. Yue rolled her eyes and laughed at his antics while Laluk looked at Sokka judgmentally.

 

“So this is the man who your father chose instead of Hahn? Well, as long as you like him I can’t hold too much of a grudge. Even if he did beat my own son.” Laluk said, cracking a half smile.

 

“Oh, uh, yeah. I’m sure that Hahn will find a suitable wife soon.” Yue said awkwardly. Sokka stopped writhing dramatically and looked at Laluk. He had been chosen over this man’s son? And he had just been rolling on the ground like an idiot? Good first impression that would make. Laluk was probably a member of the nobility, and Sokka imagined that he would have to deal with him rather often once he and Yue were married.

 

“I’ll see to it, eventually. I must say though, being turned over for… Sokka… has been a humbling experience for him.” Laluk said, before turning away from the and walking across the gate once more. “It’s been a pleasure, Princess, First Son.”

 

“Uh, you too.” Sokka said, watching the noblemen walk away. He had an odd feeling in the pit of his stomach, a suspicion that he should be wary of him.

 

---

 

Zuko sat lotus style on the porch of Song’s home. He gazed out at the fence he had tried to rebuild, and wondered how he could improve it. The structure leaned inwards, and sagged slightly. How had he managed to make logs sag?

 

The door slid open and Song walked out to sit beside him. She followed his gaze to the fence before speaking. “My father would normally fix that sort of thing, back when he was still with us. I haven’t seen him since I was a little girl. When the Fire Nation took control of this territory they raided our farming village, and took him and all the other men away.”

 

Zuko looked at her slowly. He felt a pain in his chest at her story, sorrow for her loss, and guilt. It was his family that started this war, and he felt that he bore at least part of the blame.

 

“I haven’t seen my father in many years.” Zuko said softly. Song smiled at him sadly, before speaking again.

 

“The Fire Nation has hurt you..” She whispered, and she reached out to gently caress his scar. Zuko grabbed her hand gently before she could, and he saw a disappointed look on her face. He felt more guilt, and shame now. He decided to tell her something he had kept to himself for all the years since his banishment.

 

“It still hurts.”

 

Song’s eyes widened at his words. It still hurt? She could tell the wound was a few years old at least, it shouldn’t be paining him still. Not after all this time, unless the burn went deeper than it looked.

 

“It hurts just when you touch it?” She said softly. Zuko shook his head. “It always hurts.”

 

Song pulled her hand back and looked away. Zuko released her and returned to his thoughts.

 

“The Fire Nation has hurt you…” She said again, and pulled up the hem of her dress. She rolled up the leg of her pants to reveal a burn much like Zuko’s own. “They’ve hurt me, too.”

 

Zuko looked at her in horror. This kind and gentle girl had been burned badly, when she was just a child. She must have been even younger than Zuko when he was banished when it happened. Even one as young as her had been harmed by his father’s army, or his grandfathers perhaps. Zuko realized that this war needed to end immediately. It shouldn’t have begun in the first place, the Fire Nation had lost its honor, in a way far greater than Zuko had. His had been stripped from him for refusing to fight his own father, but the Fire Lords had shed their nation's honor through countless atrocities for a century. Zuko knew that as soon as he returned home, he would have to beg for the war to end, to fight his father in any way he could. He needed to bring peace, somehow.

 

“There’s hope, though. The war will end soon, for the Avatar has returned.” Song said, her voice filled with optimism. “He’s going to end the war, and bring back balance.”

 

Zuko closed his eyes and exhaled slowly. “I know.”

 

---

 

Three days after the war meeting, Iroh walked his way towards his niece's cabin. He hadn’t seen much of her, or her friend Ty Lee, since the meeting. He had spoken with the other girl, Mai, who had told him she didn’t know what was going on with those two. During the meeting, while they were discussing the First Son’s engagement as well as Hakoda, Azula had sounded… off. Something in her voice had seemed different. What was more compelling was Ty Lee’s reaction to Admiral Zhao. Had she seen the corruption that had taken him? Iroh hadn’t expected her abilities to advance so quickly, but if they had…

 

Iroh rounded the corner and approached Azula’s quarters. The door was ajar, and that was something that was unusual in and of itself. He approached the door cautiously; he didn’t want to startle Azula in whatever it was that she was doing. As he got closer, he could hear faint voices coming from the cabin.

“Azula, I’m serious! There’s something wrong with him! It’s like he’s sick, his aura was dark, like- like- I don’t know, something rotten! I’d never seen anyone that clearly before, but when I saw Zhao it was…” Ty Lee trailed off. She had heard something in the corridor outside. Azula heard it too, and she looked at the door, surprised to see it ajar. She glared at Ty Lee. “Ty Lee, you left the door open! How many times have I told you to shut doors after yourself?”

 

Iroh opened the door fully and stepped inside. He bowed to his niece in greeting. “Good morning, Princess Azula. I haven’t seen you around the ship in a few days, and I worry that something is troubling you. Is everything well?”

 

Azula rolled her eyes. “Everything’s fine, Uncle. Or it would be if Ty Lee weren’t seeing things.”

 

“I am not seeing things!” Ty Lee said, her shoulders up and her fists balled at her sides.

 

“Right, sure. I believe you.” Azula sniped sarcastically. Ty Lee’s face grew red, and she seemed as though she were about to shout, but Azula just carried on speaking. “Why, Uncle, maybe you should take Ty Lee above deck and brew her some calming tea. Perhaps she can explain to you whatever nonsense she thinks she saw.”

 

“That’s… Yes, of course, Princess Azula.” Iroh replied slowly. He had intended to speak with Azula personally, to try and help her through whatever trouble she was facing. She hadn’t been willing to open up to him yet, and he hoped that he would be able to help her during the few remaining weeks before he would rejoin Zuko. He worried that when he reunited with Zuko, she would feel betrayed and devastated. He loved his niece, but Zuko needed him more. Despite his wishes to help Azula, and how much he had grown to worry for her, he knew that it was imperative for him to help Zuko on his path to becoming Fire Lord. He only hoped that Azula would forgive him in time.

 

Ty Lee did not look pleased with the turn her conversation with Azula had taken. She worried that her friend had placed too much trust in Zhao, and it hadn’t bothered her before she had seen whatever it was that was wrong with him. Now she was being dismissed to try and explain with General Iroh. maybe that wasn’t so bad, maybe he could help her with explaining to Azula what she had seen. Ty Lee wasn’t entirely sure what it meant, honestly, but she was certain that it wasn’t anything good. Ty Lee took a deep breath before following Iroh from Azula’s quarters.

 

They walked in silence until they reached the deck of the ship, where Iroh summoned a servant to bring him a pot of tea. He began brewing quickly, and soon the pair of them were sitting in the morning sun enjoying a cup of jasmine tea. Iroh drank deeply before finally asking Ty Lee what she had seen.

 

“I take it you looked at Admiral Zhao with your third eye.” Iroh said softly. Ty Lee nodded.

 

“He looked sick, like a disease had infected his spirit or something. I don’t know how else to explain it.”

“I have seen it too.” Iroh said, placing his cup down on the table between them. “He has been corrupted.”

 

“So you know about it too? You don’t think I’m crazy?” Ty Lee murmured. Iroh shook his head.

 

“There is a hard truth, one that I had hoped I wouldn’t have to explain so soon, but it seems that you’re more gifted with matters of the spirit than I gave you credit for.” Iroh sighed. “You see, there is a sickness that dwells in the hearts of many in the Fire Nation. It exists in the Earth Kingdom and Water tribes too, though it is incredibly rare.”

 

“What kind of sickness?” Ty Lee whispered, curious and mortified.

 

“One that perverts the mind, and makes one cruel and heartless. It is not an easy thing to come to know. Especially for one so young. It took me many years to understand it.”

 

“And Zhao has it, then? This corrupted spirit?”

 

Iroh nodded, “He has perhaps the worst case I have come across. Whatever the cause is I do not know, but it has him fully. It most often begins in childhood, or at an event so horrible that it can change you forever. Some can fight against it, and others it touches only lightly, but not him.”

 

“Do-” Ty Lee swallowed, “Do I have it?”

 

Iroh chuckled and shook his head. Ty Lee let out the breath that she didn’t know she had been holding. It was a relief to know that whatever it was hadn’t touched her. She was sure that Mai didn’t have it, though she had yet to look at her with the third eye since Iroh had begun training her in it. She thought about what Iroh had said. The corruption made one cruel and heartless, and that didn’t describe Mai. She was gloomy, and apathetic to most things, but never cruel. Azula on the other hand…

 

Ty Lee’s eyes widened. Could it have taken Azula? Her friend had often said cruel things, and acted uncaring. Ty Lee had heard rumors about things Azula had done, but she had never paid them much heed. But now that she knew about this sickness, she couldn’t help but wonder…

 

“Does Azula?” She asked meekly. Iroh shook his head and smiled, glad that Ty Lee seemed concerned for his niece. At least Azula had friends who would watch out for her, and that was more than Zuko could say.

 

“No, she does not.” Iroh said with a smile. “I had worried that she would, but she’s safe. It hasn’t taken her. She’s completely untouched by it, unlike Zuko.”

 

“Zuko has it?!” Ty Lee said aghast.

 

“Partly, though his spirit is fighting it, and winning. When he was a boy, before his banishment, he was completely untouched. After his Agni Kai with the Fire Lord, however, that changed. What was once only the golden fire of sunlight became fraught with darkness. As I said, a cataclysmic event such as he suffered could open one to it, and it did for him.”

 

“But he’s fighting it?” Ty Lee asked hopefully.

 

“Yes, and as I said, he’s winning.”

 

“But if that’s the case, why did he turn against the Fire Nation?”

 

“I said he was winning, I never said he was wise. And besides, Zhao has not turned against us, and neither has Ozai.”

 

Ty Lee paled. Ozai? As in Fire Lord Ozai? If what the Dragon of The West said was true, it meant that their sovereign was sick, with whatever it was that was inside of Zhao. That was bad, it was really bad. It did make sense though, in a way. It would explain how the Fire Lord could have done what he had to his own son, and how poorly he treated Azula. He had always been cruel to Azula, treating her more like a weapon than a daughter.The Princess didn’t see it though. She did anything and everything her father asked of her, and he hardly showed her any affection or thanks in return. Ty Lee’s own parents had never given her much attention, but that was because of how busy they were, and with her six sisters she doubted that they had enough time in general. Her own problems paled in comparison to her friend’s, especially if what General Iroh said was true.

 

“And at any rate, Zuko has not turned his back against the Fire Nation. He has done what he has so that he might regain his place on the throne, and lead the Fire Nation to a brighter future. That said, the way he has gone about is unacceptable.” Iroh hurriedly added the last sentence. He did not want to give any indication of his conspiring with Zuko. If their plot was discovered, it would surely fail, and with it any chance of helping Azula see the error of her fathers ways.

 

“Is there a cure?” Ty Lee asked quietly, a pleading tone leaking into her voice.

 

“Yes, but not for one such as the Admiral. He has been taken by it, and there is nothing to be done for him now.” Iroh answered somberly, and upon seeing the sorrowful look on the young woman's face, he added, “At least none that I know of.”

 

Ty Lee slumped. She didn’t know what to do, should she try to talk to Azula? She had tried that already, and it hadn’t worked out. Perhaps if Iroh helped her, she could try and explain things to Azula and it would actually work? She just didn’t know…

 

“Ty Lee,” Iroh said, and she looked up at him. “I understand how tempting it might be to try and explain this to Azula, but I must ask you to keep this to yourself. When people learn of this before they are ready, it can be… difficult.”

“But, I have to warn her about Zhao! He could be plotting something! She might be in danger!”

 

Iroh shook his head. “I do not think so. Zhao is devoted to the Fire Nation, and he would not act against its best interest.”

 

“Are you sure? You said that the spirit illness causes you to be heartless and cruel.”

 

“Yes, but it does not make someone abandon everything out right.” 

 

Ty Lee sighed in relief. She didn’t want Azula to be in danger, and if Iroh thought that she wasn’t in harm's way, it was enough for her. The old general was wise, and he cared for his niece. If he was sure that she wasn’t in danger, then Ty Lee was certain as well.

 

---

 

 

Azula finished her message. It was a missive from the capital, and it bore tiding that she should have been happy with. She knew that, but despite the fact that it should have been good news, she began to worry. The Fire Lord had gotten engaged. He would be wed after the comet came, on the last day of summer. She should be happy for her father, truly, but she couldn’t shake the feeling of helplessness in the pit of her stomach.

 

Was he getting married again simply because he liked this woman? Or was it because he decided he needed a new heir? Surely the first. Azula had let the Avatar slip through her fingers, and she had so far failed to capture Zuko, but that didn’t mean that he had decided she was unfit, did it? Surely, he would understand. He was reasonable.

 

Even as she thought that, she couldn’t help but remember what he had done to Zuko. He had challenged him to a duel, burned him, and then banished him. Simply for speaking out of turn. A much lesser event than her own failure so far. Would he cast her aside just the same? She would not let that happen, she could not. She had failed him once, and she would not do so again. She would prevail during the siege of the north pole, she would capture the Avatar and Sokka. She would prove to her father that she was valuable, and that she deserved his love.

---

 

Author's Note:

I am terribly sorry about all of the head hopping; I didn't realize how much of it I had written until now. That said, I will try and minimize the phenomenon in the future. Unfortunately, I am already on chapter 27, and I'm not currently planning to re-write the first 26 chapters just for that. If you want to read all the way to where the story is currently, it's on FFN under the same name. I didn't have an AO3 until recently, so this version is a bit behind. I usually post 1-2 chapters a week, and once I get this site caught up, I'll do the same here.

Chapter 18: Moonlight

Sokka stretched himself as he readied for the day. He and Yue hadn’t had another argument since Katara and he fought three weeks ago, and now they had grown even closer since then. His training under Master Piandao had gone really well, and the master had been pleased with Sokka’s progress. He had said Sokka was one of the best students he’d ever had.

 

It would be a bittersweet day. Master Piandao would be returning for the Fire Nation the next afternoon, and Sokka would not likely see him again until after the war was over, if ever. But, on the brightside, it would be Yue’s birthday. Sokka would finally give her the betrothal necklace he had made for her that evening. He really hoped she would like it.

 

Sokka made his way through the city in the dim pre dawn light. It would be his last day of training with his master. At first, Sokka didn’t understand the exercises that Piandao had put him through, but he didn’t question it. In time he had come to understand the importance of the lessons, from landscape painting to calligraphy, they all had a purpose. Piandao had said you must master the art of peace as well as the art of war.

 

He arrived at the house his master was staying in, and he went inside. He bowed when he entered the study where he would meet Piandao every morning. The swordsman was standing with his back to Sokka as he gazed at the sunrise.

 

“Good morning, Sokka. Are you ready for your final day of training?” He said, without turning around.

 

“Yes, Master.” He said, nodding enthusiastically even though Piandao couldn’t see him. 

 

“Good, good. Before we begin, tell me, what do you think of Zhao?” Piandao asked as he turned to face Sokka.

 

“Uh, he’s pretty terrible, I guess. My grandfather killed his father when the Fire Nation invaded the south pole. He’s determined to wipe out my entire family in revenge. I’ve fought him a few times, and he’s a strong firebender. I wish he was weaker, so that he wouldn’t be so much of a danger to us.”

 

“It’s a mistake to wish for your enemy to be weak, Sokka. There are strong men and weak men, and weak men are the far more dangerous of the two.” Piandao said sagely.

 

“That… doesn’t make any sense.” Sokka said blankly.

 

Piandao smiled to himself before replying. “Strong men can indeed be dangerous, and deadly. As dangerous as they are, as much as they can do, just wait until you see what weak men are capable of. The weak man knows that he cannot win outright, and so he makes up the difference with cruelty and cunning.”

 

Sokka pondered his master’s words. While Zhao was a dangerous foe, no doubt, he hadn’t relied on overly complicated plans. He wasn’t weak, although he was cruel. 

 

“I’m telling you this so that you remember to foster courage and strength within yourself, Sokka.” Piandao said, “You have a heart as strong as a lion-turtle, and twice as big. When you first came to me, you said you weren’t sure if you were worthy, and I can say with absolute certainty that you are the most worthy man I have ever trained. It wasn’t your skills that impressed me, it certainly wasn’t your skill. It was your passion and curiosity, your ingenuity and courage. I am sure that if you continue on this path then one day you will be an even greater master than I.”

 

Sokka felt a lump form in his throat at his master’s kind words. He bowed low and thanked the man.

 

“Now, on to your final lesson. It’s time for you to make your own sword.”

Sokka poured over the metals in the forge. He picked some of them up, and then put them down again. A few of them he went so far as to lick, or bite curiously. He had gone over every ingot in the building, and had nearly given up when a shimmer of blue caught his eye.

 

“What’s this one?” Sokka asked curiously as he picked it up. Something about it felt right in his hand, as if it was always meant to be there.

 

“Oh, we’re not quite sure.” Said the smith who ran the forge, Tornaq. “It was found as raw ore on the sea bed when some waterbenders were experimenting. It doesn’t have a name, seeing as those few bars are all of it.”

 

“Master,” Sokka asked Piandao, “Is this metal suitable for a sword?”

 

Piandao came over and inspected the ingot. He closed his eyes and tapped it with a nail before running his finger over it. He nodded and Sokka smiled. He turned back to Tornaq, “Tornaq, would it be possible for me to have this?”

 

The smith shrugged. “It’s been sitting here for years, go ahead.”

 

Sokka took the metal and followed Piandao to the furnace, where they began the long and arduous forging process. Sokka obeyed his master's commands as he folded the heated metal together, timing the force of his blows in accordance with his master’s instruction. The shape gradually formed, and Sokka had to replace the object of his labor in the furnace frequently. They labored long into the night, Sokka wary to keep the furnace burning, so that the metal stayed at the appropriate temperature. Finally Piandao told him that the sword was nearly finished.

 

“All that is left is to quench the blade, and then attach the pommel and grip, of course.” Piandao said. His words gave Sokka pause, and reminded him of a place that Yue had shown him recently. Not far from where they stood was the most spiritual place in the entire north pole. She had called it the Spirit Oasis, and said that the water had special properties. Maybe if he quenched his sword in that water it would gain some of those properties? Sokka wasn’t sure what they were, but he doubted that it would hurt.

 

“Master,” Sokka began, “There’s a pool not too far from here, at the Spirit Oasis. The water is said to have special properties, and I was wondering if it might be possible to quench my sword there?”

 

Piandao considered him for a moment before smiling. His young apprentice was always impressing him with his tenacity and ingenuity. That he would come up with such a creative method to forge his sword should be no surprise.

 

“It would be a sword unlike any other in history!” 

Sokka knelt beside the water in the Spirit Oasis. The idea had seemed clever to him, until he had to navigate through the palace with a red hot sword. He had to get it hot enough that it wouldn’t cool too quickly by the time they arrived at the pool. Now that he was here, he realized that he should have just filled a barrel with the water or something. Not that it mattered now, as he had already made it to his destination.

Sokka pondered if this was as good an idea as it had seemed. Piandao had agreed to it, but his master had often let him make mistakes so that he might learn from them. Was this one of those times? Sokka didn’t think so. He took a deep breath and plugend the glowing weapon into the water, disrupting the reflection of the moon on the surface. He offered a silent plea to the Moon Spirit, asking that his weapon be strong enough to defend himself and the people he cared about.

 

Steam rolled off the water in a great cloud, far more than he would have expected. Too much steam. It billowed around him like sand in the surf, until suddenly it blew away. He looked into the water apprehensively, and saw that the two koi that had circled each other on the opposite end of the pond had come to swim around his blade. As he watched, the white fish touched his blade with its fin.

 

Sokka frowned at the impact. It seemed too powerful a motion for what that fish should have been capable of. He pulled the sword from the water, holding the tang with a pair of tongs from the forge. As he did so, the silver-blue metal from the sea floor seemed to have changed somehow. Sokka looked at it curiously. He took the blade in his hand, the water had cooled it enough to hold, and he twisted the blade. He moved it through the air, slowly at first, and then more quickly. Where the blade had traveled a faint white glow was left in its wake.

 

Sokka smiled. It seemed that the Moon Spirit had answered his plea and blessed his sword.

 

---

 

Walking in through a passageway in Zhao’s flagship, Zuko silently thanked the Sun Spirit that Zhao had not bothered to verify the identity of his firebenders. He had snuck aboard the previous night, and managed to get ahold of one of the masked uniforms.

 

He had been forced to leave most of his possessions behind. He had left Sugar Foot with Song. He was glad that he could at least give Song something, and hoped that it would perhaps make life for her and her mother a little easier. Zuko was surprised to find that he missed the animal, if not the stupid name that Tun Lao had given her.

 

At the moment, he was holding a teapot. He had planned to meet his uncle in port a few days from now, but Zhao’s ship had arrived ahead of schedule. He had heard from a pair of drunken soldiers that they would sail for the Northern Water Tribe by the end of the week, and so he had to change his plans. When he had learned of the imminent departure he regretted spending as many days trying to fix that blasted fence as he had, and then making the last leg of his journey on foot. Walking had made the journey take nearly twice as long as it would have on Sugar Foot.

 

The teapot was an excuse to track down his uncle. He had decided against wandering around aimlessly in an attempt to find him, and against asking for direction to his uncle’s quarters. He figured it would stand out, a random soldier trying to find a member of the royal family. So he had adopted the teapot as a prop to excuse his search. He walked a few steps when a voice called out behind him.

 

“What are you doing, Private?”

 

Zuko turned around to see an ensign, the lowest rank of naval officer, walking towards him. 

 

“I’ve been ordered to take this to General Iroh, Ma’am.” Zuko said awkwardly. His helmet made his voice echo and sound strange, foreign.

 

“Are you new?” The woman asked, looking Zuko up and down.

 

“Uh, yes. Just shipped out from the homeland.” Zuko lied. He had come up with that story the previous night, and hoped dearly that it would stand up to scrutiny.

 

“Who ordered you to bring the tea?” She asked with a raised eyebrow.

 

“Petty Officer… something. I didn’t catch his name.” Zuko said, and sweat started to bead on his forehead. He didn’t want to have to incapacitate this woman. She was just doing her duty to the Fire Nation.

 

“Uhuh,” The ensign said with a nod. “The general’s quarters are on the deck above us, starboard side. It’s the first compartment out of the ladderway. I’m Ensign Tema, officer of the deck for this watch. If anyone asks, tell them that I sent you to the General with haste. The man loves his tea, after all.”

 

“Aye-aye, ma’am.” Zuko said with a bow, before turning in the direction she had indicated.

 

“All officers under Admiral Zhao’s command are to be called sir, Private…?”

 

“Lee. Private Lee, Sir.” Zuko said, turning to face her again. Ensign Tema nodded, and waved at him to continue. “As you were.”

 

Turning stiffly on his heel, Zuko hurried towards his uncle's quarters. He found them before long, and he could hear his uncle playing the Tsungi horn through the door. He knocked on the door sharply. The music stopped and the door opened moments later. Zuko was met by his Uncle’s curious face, though he could see worry etched in his brow.

 

“I have tea, General.” He said, before stepping past Iroh and into the room. It was decorated much the same as his cabin on Zuko’s ship.

 

“What? I already have tea, why are you bringing me…” Iroh trailed off as realization dawned on him. That voice was familiar, even distorted by the helm the man wore. Iroh quickly closed the door and took hold of his nephew. He grasped him in a tight embrace which Zuko returned readily, which surprised Iroh. His nephew had not been so affectionate for many years.

 

“I’m glad to see you safe, Prince Zuko. When we arrived early, I was worried that we wouldn’t be able to reunite as we had planned. You must tell me of your adventures these past weeks. An acquaintance of mine sent word that you soothed a volcano? And in a single day no less!”

 

Zuko grimaced within his helm. Of course she would have told him about the biggest risk he had taken in his journey. “Oh, you heard about that?”

 

“Sit, Prince Zuko, tell me everything.” Iroh insisted. Zuko did as he asked, but made sure to face away from the door before removing his mask. Starting from the moment that he and Iroh parted ways, Zuko told his uncle of his journey. He made sure to leave out the more embarrassing facts, such as how he had forgotten to pack any food, or that he had ridden an ostrich-horse named Sugar Foot.

 

Zuko had just finished telling of his encounter with Ensign Tema when there was a brusk knock on the door. Zuko replaced his faceplate and Iroh pushed him into a closet, closing the door behind him. He was surprised that there was such a spacious accommodation, but Zhao was an Admiral now. He was bound to possess a ship with more luxury than Zuko. The door swung open and Zuko’s stomach lurched when he recognized the voice of the visitor.

 

“Do you have a moment to spare, Uncle?” Azula said, when Iroh opened the door. She stepped inside. Turned as she was, she didn’t see the closet that Zuko had hidden in. 

 

“I-” Azula’s voice sounded strained, as if she was reluctant to speak the next words, but was forcing them out anyway. “I need your help.”

 

She needed help? From their uncle no less? What had happened to his sister since he had left home? She never would have asked for help before, she was too proud. Zuko inched closer to the door, careful not to make a sound. He could just see her from where he stood, the gap between the door and the flame was just enough to see her by. She didn’t look like her usual pristine self. She had dark circles under her eyes, and her movements weren’t as precise as they should have been.

 

Iroh observed his niece curiously, taking in all that Zuko had and more. Azula was tired, and whatever had been worrying her before had taken its toll. He bowed and ushered her into the room, sparing a quick glance at his closet while he closed the door behind him.

 

“What is troubling you, Princess Azula?”

 

“Not a word of this is to leave the room, Uncle.”

Iroh paused, before acquiescing to her request. He poured her a cup of tea. She breathed deeply before taking a sip and placing the cup on the table between them.

 

“Father is getting married.” She said, refusing to raise her eyes from her cup.

 

Zuko was in shock. Their father was taking a new wife? How? Did that mean that his mother…

 

“I see.” Said Iroh, watching Azula with rapt attention. She stared at her tea, her fists clenched at her sides. The corner of her mouth trembled slightly once, and then was still. She was upset by this development, although he wasn’t entirely sure why. Azula hadn’t gotten along with Ursa, at least not since before his siege of Ba Sing Se. he and Lu Ten had received some letters from his sister-in-law,  and she had often spoken of the distance that had started to grow between them. As that was the case, thatt Ozai might take a new wife shouldn’t upset her, even if it meant she would have new half siblings… Unless that was what worried her. Ozai had banished his own son for speaking out of turn, an incredibly minor offense from a thirteen year old boy. A boy that Ozai didn’t hold in high regard.

 

His brother had always held Azula to the highest expectations, and she had never failed him. At least, not until the Avatar escaped her grasp. Iroh did not put it beyond his brother to father a new heir, simply because the children he had already displeased him. Of all Ozai’s failings, his poor treatment of his children was what Iroh despised most about the man.

 

“You are afraid that he will cast you away.” Iroh said quietly. Azula didn’t react, but he could see the truth of it in her eyes. He breathed deeply, before taking his tea and drinking. Still Azula was motionless, tense as if she was near to bolting.

 

“I-” Azula swallowed dryly, “If I do not succeed in the north, if I can’t capture Zuko, then he…”

 

Azula closed her eyes. Why had she bothered coming here? What could her uncle say? All that would be accomplished by this conversation is that she would show weakness, and reveal a liability that could be exploited. She shouldn’t have come here, hoping for someone to tell her that everything would be okay as if she were a child in need of coddling. She did not need any of that, she was a weapon. Her father had sent her on a mission and she would succeed. There could be no other way. That had never been in question before, she had never doubted it. She had not faltered for a moment in her life, not until she had met him…

 

“So what if you can’t? It is possible to do everything right and still lose, Azula. That is not failure, that is life. There are things we can control, and there are things we cannot. Your father knows this. If he cannot accept that, then he is unwise and ignores the truth.”

 

Azula glanced up to her uncle’s face. He looked at her with kind, understanding eyes. Caring eyes. It was seldom that anyone had looked at her in that way, her father didn’t. He looked at her with pride, obvious for all to see, but the genuine affection that she could see from her uncle was a rarity to be sure. Why did he look at her this way? Did he really care? Was it just an act? She didn’t think so. He seemed earnest, but also sad about something.

 

Iroh looked at his niece, this poor lonely girl who he had left alone with her father. He wished he could have helped her sooner, that her mother had not had to leave, that he wouldn’t have to leave her again. His and Zuko’s plan was for the benefit of the Fire Nation, and he hoped that it would benefit the whole world. He believed that his nephew was close to seeing the truth of things, if he hadn’t already. But that would not change it from betrayal in Azula’s eyes, and she would be hurt when the time came. Perhaps in time she would understand, and she might one day forgive them.

 

“If I don’t capture the Avatar, or Zuko, or even Sok- the First Son, then I’ll have failed him for a third time. My usefulness will have run-” Azula stopped herself. She had begun to use his name, again, and now she was rambling. What had happened to her? When did she turn into someone who whined to anyone? The mere thought of losing her father’s love, and she became a sniveling child, terrified of being alone. She grew angry, disappointed with her own weakness. She stood abruptly.

 

“Thank you for the tea, Uncle. Disregard my earlier statements, they were ill advised.” She said curtly before turning to go.

 

“Azula,” Iroh spoke as she reached for the door, taking hold of her hand. “No matter what happens, remember that I will always love you. Even if it’s hard to believe.”

 

Azula jerked her hand away with a snarl. “I don’t need your pity, you washed up old man!”

 

With that, she opened the door and stepped through, slamming it home behind her. Iroh stood there for a moment, and he could hear her angry footsteps receding down the hall. Well, he thought, Zuko and Azula had one thing in common: they both lashed out at him when they were mad. Great.

 

Zuko stepped out of his uncle’s closet. He had taken his helmet off, and Iroh noticed for the first time the short crop of hair that had grown on his head, thinking that it suited the young man much better. He eyed the door warily.

 

“What has been going on aboard this ship?” 

 

Iroh sighed. He explained everything that had happened from the moment that they had separated, going so far as to tell him of Mai’s theory of Azula’s feelings towards the First Son. When that topic came up, Zuko blinked blankly before an indignant expression crossed his face.

 

“There’s no way. That buffoon is too ludacris, even if he is good in a fight. Sokka’s not good enough for her.” Zuko huffed, crossing his arms. “She doesn't like him.”

 

Iroh laughed at the sight. Zuko playing the protective older brother was not something he had expected, at least before his time with Azula, and the conversation between them that Zuko had overheard.

“Be that as it may, it does not matter. Hakoda and Arnook have arranged for Sokka to marry Princess Yue, and the tribes will merge.”

 

“Is that so?”

 

“Yes, but that’s hardly of import right now. Once the siege begins, Admiral Zhao intends to kill the Moon Spirit. He believes that it will leave the waterbenders powerless, and rightly so, but he doesn't care that it will affect the rest of the world. Azula and I advised against it, but it was plain to see that he intends to carry out his quest regardless.”

 

“He’s going to…? That idiot! What will that accomplish? Nothing! All it will do is create another tragedy among the thousands caused by this pointless, useless, meaningless war. A war to share our greatness with the world, only they don’t think we’re great; they hate us! I’ve seen it in their eyes, Uncle, all the weeks I’ve traveled alone, I’ve seen it time and time again! Kind people, good people, innocent people have had their lives ruined over nothing!”

 

The look of shock on his Uncle’s face was sobering. He just said all of his thoughts out loud? Why had he done that?! He was a fool, he shouldn’t have..

 

“Forgive me, Uncle, I misspoke. I did not mean that.”

 

“No, no, I completely agree. This war is pointless, though it took me far longer than you to realize it, I must say.”

 

Zuko looked at his uncle, eyes wide. He agreed with him? Zuko smiled, before donning his helm and stepping towards the door. “I’m glad, Uncle, and once I capture the Avatar I shall ask my father to end the war.”

 

He stepped out and closed the door without saying goodbye. Had he waited a moment longer, or had he looked back before leaving, he would have seen his uncle’s look of astounded disbelief and dismay, as he slapped his forehead at Zuko’s words.

 

---

 

Yue walked around the palace on the morning of her birthday, looking for her boyfriend. Fiancê, technically, she thought, though she didn’t feel like that was the right term. He hadn’t asked her to marry him. Their fathers had made that decision for them. If he did ask, she thought she would say yes, even if their wedding hadn’t already been arranged.

 

She was glad that they would be getting married, all the same. She had decided that the feeling she had for Sokka was in fact love, and that was not something she had expected. Arranged marriages weren’t uncommon in her tribe, and they were often one sided or loveless. She had accepted that as princess she would do her duty to her people whatever the cost may be. That Sokka had been the one her father had selected was an unexpected boon to be sure.

 

She wandered around the palace all morning, failing to find him. By the time noon arrived, she succeeded only in finding the Avatar.

 

“Happy birthday!” Aang said with a smile, Momo perched on his shoulder as ever. The young airbender had grown several inches in the month or so he had been in the city. He was almost as tall as she was now, a fact that he seemed rather happy with. She suspected it was because he had heard Katara tell her that she hoped to marry a tall man some day.

 

“Thanks, Aang. Have you seen Sokka by chance? I’ve been looking for him all morning and he doesn’t seem to be around anywhere.”

 

“Oh, yeah. He didn’t get back from training with Master Piandao until early this morning. He made his own sword! It’s so cool, and it leaves a mirage in its wake! He was still asleep last time I was in our room, but that was a couple of hours ago, so he might be up now.”

 

Yue smiled and excused herself. She hadn’t actually gone into their room, she just knocked. Now that she knew he had been sleeping, she would knock louder and maybe go inside. That would be okay, she thought, no reason why she couldn’t go in there. It wouldn’t be an invasion of privacy, it was fine. Probably. 

 

Before long, she arrived at the door to the room in question, she raised a hand to knock, but the door opened and she wrapped her knuckles on Sokka’s face. She blanched, all color leaving her own. Sokka glared at her. “Well, I missed you too.”

 

“I’m sorry, I- the door- an accident.” She stammered awkwardly, and Sokka cocked a half smile.

 

“I haven’t even given you your happy-birthday-haiku, and you’re already mad at me.” He smirked at her awkwardness. Her eyebrows furrowed. He was teasing her.

 

“I would very much like to hear this birthday haiku.”

 

“It a happy-birthday-haiku.” Sokka corrected, mashing the three words together quickly.

 

“Let’s hear it then, boomerang guy.” She smiled at him, relieved that he wasn’t upset over an accidental goodmorning face-punch. At her words, Sokka blushed, panicking. He had not actually written a birthday haiku, and certainly not a happy-birthday-haiku. He had been working on one that he hoped she might like, as he had not forgotten his promise to her in the library all those weeks ago. Well, he thought, better than old bones. Better than nothing.

 

“Moonlight shines within. Dearest Yue darling dear. Love grows stronger still.”

 

As he recited the poem, Yue felt a gentle heat rise in her chest. It spread out through her limbs and left her face hot. He had done the impossible. He had written a haiku that she actually liked. A feat that she had thought beyond possible, for she had always found them dry and reductive. And yet here she was, blushing like a schoolgirl with a silly crush over his words.

 

“That’s beautiful.” She said, and Sokka beamed at her in response.

 

“I’m glad you like it, but I’ve got more up my sleeve for today.” he said proudly, with his chest puffed up like a kitten who had caught his first mouse. Yue chuckled at his pompous demeanor and rolled her eyes.

 

“Is that so? Aang told me that you’ve got a magic sword, are you planning on giving me a demonstration?”

 

“Well, no, I hadn’t planned on doing that. I can if you want, but it’s not magic. I asked the Moon Spirit to bless it and she did, so now I have Moon-Sword!”

 

Yue’s mouth fell open. The Moon Spirit blessed his weapon and he had decided to call it Moon-Sword?

 

“Don’t call it that!” She exclaimed, and Sokka’s face fell.

 

“Why not? I thought it sounded cool…” Sokka said, before turning from the doorway they were still speaking in and picking up a jian sword in a white sheath. The blade had a coal black cross guard and pommel, but the grip was white. He drew the blade and it glinted silver-blue in the light streaming from the window. He slashed expertly through the air, and frowned. He did it once more, using a complex series of movements that she wasn’t sure were actually swordplay. He looked at his sword with his brow furrowed.

 

“It’s not doing the thing.” He said sadly, as if expected to sing and dance while he swung it.

 

“What thing?” Yue asked curiously.

 

“Last night it was leaving a trail of white light in its wake.”

 

“Maybe it’s only visible under the moon? You said it was blessed by the Moon Spirit, and it’s daytime right now.”

 

Sokka looked at her. “Yeah, maybe that’s it. I’ll have to test it scientifically, otherwise we won’t be sure.”

 

He shook his head. “I can do that later. It’s your birthday! Tell me, Moonlight, have you ever flown before?”

 

Yue shook her head, smiling at his new pet name for her. He hadn’t used it before, and she wondered if he had been saving it for when he revealed his haiku. He reached out a hand towards her and she took hold of it, allowing him to lead her to the Avatar’s bison. She was glad that her father had given her this day free of her duties. He had done so when Sokka first came to Agna Qel’a, but after a few days she had been expected to resume her duties.

 

She didn’t mind it, of course, and she did fulfill her responsibilities without complaint. It was her duty to her people, and duty came before all else. Sokka had found training under Master Piandao, so he wasn’t left to wander around bored while she worked.  And now that the man had departed for his home Sokka would resume warrior training with the rest of the young men. In time, he would be given duties of his own in the city, and he would be responsible for much of the merger of North and South.

 

Yue’s own duties of late had consisted of mediating between noble families, resolving business disputes, and inspecting the city's defenses with her father. He instructed her on what to look for, where their vulnerabilities were, and defensive strategy. Laluk too had been there. As a high ranking nobleman, Arnook had taken him into his council. Partly for the man’s intelligence and partly to soothe the rift that had formed when Sokka had been chosen over Hahn.

 

And speak of the devil, here came Hahn now. His usual pompous and arrogant stride were gone, and he seemed to walk humbly for once. Yue was glad of the change. They were nearly to the stable where Appa stayed at while they were in the city, but Hahn called out to them as they passed.

 

“Yue!” He called out, jogging over to them. She took a deep breath, and Sokka stopped at the voice.

 

“Do you know this guy?” He asked warily, his eyes staring at Hahn curiously. Yue nodded. 

 

“That's Hahn, he’s Laluk’s son.” She said, and her fiance blinked. “Well, I hope this isn't super awkward. Seeing as how I was chosen over him and all.”

 

Yue smiled a little. Finally Hahn arrived at where they were standing and extended a hand toward Sokka. “I’m Hahn, my father’s a part of Chief Arnook’s inner council.”

 

“I’m Sokka.” Sokka said, grasping Hahn's forearm. They shook and Hahn turned to Yue.

 

“Happy birthday, Princess Yue. I didn’t expect that I’d run into you before the feast, so I hope you’ll forgive my uh,” he gestured at his dirty clothes and messy hair, “appearance. We’ve only just broken from warrior training, so I haven’t had the chance to clean up.”

 

“Oh, no. It's fine. Don’t worry about it.” She said, glancing at him up and down. Where had they found mud to drag him through? It was winter, at the north pole. Everything was frozen.

 

“Since you’re here, I… wanted to apologize. For my behavior, I mean. I know that I’ve been a real jerk for the longest time, and arrogant too. My father set me straight after I was rejected, and I had to ask myself some tough questions. So, for what it’s worth, I’m sorry.”

 

Yue didn’t say anything, as she was surprised by his sudden change in character. He had been extremely… annoying… for the past few years, ever since he began warrior training. His sudden apology had been completely unexpected. Before she could respond, Hahn excused himself and left, leaving her and Sokka to stare in bewilderment at his departure.

 

“What… was that about?” Sokka asked in confusion, Yue shook her head.

 

“Hahn was one of the candidates for me to marry. We were friends when we were kids, but once he started warrior training and tutelage with his father, he changed. He wasn’t the boy he was before, but now it seems like his dad talked some sense into him? I’m not really sure, but I’m glad. He seemed more like his old self today.”

 

“Well, that’s good. If he’s nobility, then we’ll probably have to deal with him alot. It’d be nice if he wasn’t a jerk.” Sokka said, before leading them the rest of the way towards Appa. Before they could get there however, it started to snow. The wind picked up and Sokka frowned.

 

“It doesn’t look like we’ll be able to fly today. If this turns into a blizzard, I don’t want to be caught in the air.” He said, and he looked very disappointed by the development.

 

“It’s okay, we can try it another day. It’s not like you guys are leaving tomorrow, is it?”

 

Sokka shook his head. “Aang’s almost mastered waterbending, so in another couple of weeks he’ll need to move on. There’s only a little more than six months for him to learn earth and fire, so we… he’s got to find a teacher soon.”

 

Yue frowned. He spoke as if he wouldn’t be going with them, as though he planned to stay here. She wouldn’t be upset by that of course, but she doubted that he would be happy to sit on the sidelines while his sister and best friend fought for their lives against the Fire Nation.

 

“You’re going with them, aren’t you?” She asked quietly. Sokka shrugged.

 

“I’m not sure. I want to, but, if I go, it might… your dad could change his mind. If Aang defeats the Fire Lord the war will be over. There’ll be no reason to merge, and he might decide it's better for you to marry someone else.” His voice was little more than a whisper.

 

“That won’t happen, I’m sure! I’ll talk to him.. I’ll make him see.” Yue consoled him.

 

Sokka took a deep breath and drew something out of his parka. He held it out to her, and her eyes glistened when she saw it. It was a betrothal necklace, a white pendant with the image of the sea and moon carved in blue.

 

“Yue, will you marry me? Not just because our dad’s want us too, but because you want to? If not, then when I go with Aang I’ll know you could find happiness with someone else.”

 

“And if I do?” She said softly, looking into his eyes.

 

“Then I’ll go with them and fight twice as hard, for I’ll know that you’re waiting for me to come back to you.” Sokka said, half of his mouth raised in a smile.

 

You took a slow breath, and then launched herself at Sokka. She wrapped her arms around his neck in an embrace, and he returned it gently.

 

“Of course I want to marry you! I love you, you idiot!” She said, laughing as they held each other. When they broke apart, Sokka was smiling the brightest smile she’d ever seen.

 

He fastened the betrothal necklace in place, and kissed her gently. “I love you too, Moonlight.”

 

---

Author's Note:

 

Iroh uses a quote from Star Trek. I've never seen Star Trek, but i saw it in a clip and thought it was nice. Someone left a comment that told me what it was from.

Chapter 19: The Calm Before The Storm

Sokka traversed the vaults of his mind. He had entered the void, and he inspected the memory he had sealed away. Now that he was there, he saw that the chest had become unlocked. More than that, the lid wouldn’t stay shut. He forced the lid down, and turned the key in the lock. The chest popped open again.

 

Sokka considered the thing, tilting his head to one side. Now that he couldn’t keep it locked away, he considered taking it back into the annals of his memory. He opened the chest fully, as it had only been ajar, and looked at the memory. Looking at it, he understood fully what it was. He knew now why he had locked it away, and suspected that he couldn’t keep it hidden forever, or even much longer. In time he would come to know the truth fully, even outside of the void. Without the detached clarity of the meditative trance, he wasn’t sure how he would handle the information. He had known it subconsciously for some time, and he wondered if that would take some of the edge off. Perhaps he had grown accustomed to it, and had started to accept the reality of the thing. 

 

Sokka shook his head, before closing the lid as much as he could. It remained open perhaps a finger’s breadth, and he could faintly see the light shining from the memory within. He placed the memory again where he had hidden it, and pondered the issue. Perhaps he could find a way to separate the emotion from the fact? He didn’t know how he would go about doing that, perhaps he ought to go into the spirit world and ask Laghima. No, he couldn’t do that, he had promised Katara he wouldn’t use Koh’s shadow unless he had too. He wasn’t sure that this was strictly necessary.

 

He felt something brush against his shoulder, his real shoulder and not the shoulder he had manifested in his mind. He began to exit the archive of his life, and opened his eyes. Hahn had been nudging him where they sat outside the practise ring used during warrior training. Sokka gazed at Hahn, unblinking as rested within the void. Hahn looked taken aback at Sokka’s stare, and so Sokka left the trance.

 

Cocking a mirthful crooked smile at his friend's reaction, Sokka spoke. “Cat-shark got your tongue?”

 

Hahn’s eyebrows furrowed. “No, dingus. Why do you do that? That empty look you get sometimes? Bah, anyway, I woke you from your nap because we’re up next.”

 

“I wasn’t napping!” Sokka said indignantly, his voice cracking. “I was meditating.”

 

“Ha! Yeah, and I can fly around like an airbender!” Hahn said with a laugh.

 

Sokka rolled his eyes at the other warrior in training. The two had become fast friends since Sokka had joined in the martial training of the northern Water Tribe. Originally, he had been apprehensive at the idea of spending so much time with Yue’s rejected match, but Hahn had proved a ready companion. Sokka was inwardly glad that he was already on such good terms with a high ranking nobleman, for it would make the transition for their separate nation’s merger that much easier.

 

Hahn’s father, Laluk, was a rather skilled waterbender. He had trained under master Pakku in his youth much as Katara and Aang were now, and he didn’t seem to be disappointed that his only son wasn’t a bender. From what Sokka understood, the benders of other nations were often disappointed when their children were not born with the power. That it didn’t seem to be the case in the north was a relief, for it implied that they didn’t treat non benders as poorly as they did in some cultures. He had read that in certain noble families in the Fire Nation, it was seen as a great dishonor. Which was odd, considering that there were many noble families in that country with no benders at all.

 

Hahn stood up and Sokka followed, and they were ushered into the ring. It was a square dias, going twenty feet across. They met in the middle and shook, before taking up their practice weapons. Spears this time.

 

“Wooo! Kick his but, Hahn!” Called out one of their fellow trainees, and it elicited a round of laughter from the otherside of the ring.

 

“I hope you didn’t place money on him, Hak, because Sokka’s going to win!” Shouted Kordak, another trainee from behind Sokka.

 

“In your dreams, you big eared loon!” Hak replied, and his insult generated a wave of good natured laughter from the entire class.

 

“Alright, alright, stuff it you two!” The veteran instructor said, glaring from one young man to the other. He waved impatiently for Sokka and Hahn to begin, and they soon did.

 

Hahn lashed out quickly with the head of his spear, which Sokka deftly stepped under. He stabbed his own spear at Hahn’s stomach, but the man stepped aside and trapped Sokka’s weapon under an arm before wrestling it from his grip. Sokka disengaged and rolled away, avoiding Hahn’s strike. Hahn’s supporters cheered and Sokka’s groaned in dismay as Hahn threw Sokka's spear out of the ring.

 

Sokka fought back the urge to smile as Hahn lashed out at him with the spear, and he stepped within his guard. He broke Hahn’s grip on the weapon and kicked him squarely in the chest before turning the spear around and placing the padded tip onto his opponent's neck. Hahn glared at him while the other trainees hooted and whistled.

 

“Always the show off, aren’t you?” Hahn said bitterly, and Sokka was taken aback at his anger. He extended a hand and Hahn took it, allowing Sokka to haul him to his feet. The two of them exited the ring and the next pair took their turn. Hahnh’s anger seemed to have disappeared. His face was again bearing the jovial expression that he always wore. Sokka frowned, because it didn’t quite reach his friend’s eyes.

 

“You’re better with the spear than me.” Sokka said, causing Hahn to look at him in confusion.

 

“What? No I’m not, you just beat me.”

 

“If I had kept my spear, I would’ve lost. Once I lost mine, I realized what I had to do. If this was a real fight, on the battlefield, I probably would’ve gotten stabbed. I never would’ve been able to win like that without getting run through by another warrior. I’m much better with a sword. I only one today because I was able to think quickly.”

 

“Good to know.” Hahn said with a smile, “Next time I’ll let you keep your weapon. I’ll have to think of something terribly cunning to get you with.”

 

Sokka nodded, “Yeah.”

 

He couldn’t help but remember his master’s words. Weak men make up the difference with cruelty and cunning . Hahn had not reacted well to defeat, but that didn’t make him weak, did it? Sokka himself had relied on quick thinking to win the fight, but he doubted that he would be so angry with defeat. He had lost to Hahn a couple of times already, but he always learned from his defeats. Perhaps Hahn would do the same?

It had been three weeks since Yue’s birthday. He had been in the north pole for two months now, and Katara would be taking her masters test today. If she passed, then they would leave the north pole to find Aang an earthbending teacher. Sokka excused himself early from training that afternoon, and made his way to the palace. He had made plans to watch his sister's test with Yue, and they were to meet on the palace steps.

 

The warrior training compound wasn’t far from the palace, so he soon arrived to find Yue waiting for him. She was looking down the front steps for him, but he had taken an alternate route, so she didn’t see him. With a malicious grin, he snuck up behind her, and wrapped her in a strong embrace, lifting her from her feet. She squeaked in surprise before realizing it was him, and then she berated him.

 

“Don’t sneak up on me like that!”

 

“I got you good though, didn’t I?” Sokka laughed.

 

Yue glared at him, with her hands on her hips. She was pretty mad, but Sokka thought it was cute. He liked the way her nose crinkled. He looked her in the eye before making a goofy expression, which served to make her laugh.

 

“Okay, you got me. Please don’t do it again though.”

 

“Alright, I promise not to sneak up on you again, Moonlight.”

 

“Good, Boomerang Guy. Let’s get going or we’ll be late. I don’t want master Pakku to start teasing us like he does Aang.”

 

Sokka snorted and followed her lead to Master Pakku’s own training ground. The waterbenders trained separately for good reason: inexperienced waterbender had a tendency to freeze people by accident. He had learned that the hard way, as Katara had frozen him to things quite a few times during their childhood.

Before long the pair of them came to the training ground where Katara would take her mastery test. Sokka waved at his sister, who returned the gesture. Aang said something to her before coming over to stand beside Sokka and Yue.

 

“Hey guys!” Aang chirped brightly, sliding to a stop alongside them both. “We worried you might be late!”

 

“We almost were, but only since Sokka decided to sneak up on me.” Yue said, grinning at the Avatar. Sokka shrugged before speaking. “What can I say? She was wide open. Can’t let a good opportunity go to waste.”

 

The three of them chatted idly for a while, and gradually more spectators arrived. It usually took years of training before you could even think of taking the mastery test, but Pakku had declared Katara a prodigy, and she had shattered all previous records. Now all that remained was for her to prove herself before a panel of masters.

 

She would face off against Pakku and two of his instructors, waterbending masters who worked under him. She wasn’t expected to win, instead her performance in the battle would be judged and deemed sufficient or insufficient to be considered a master.

 

Katara walked out to her end of the testing ground. Pakku and his instructors took to their end. The crowd was silent, waiting for the call to begin the test. The gong rang out, and they leapt into action. Pakku’s instructors launched a synchronized attack at Katara, who wrested control of the water before returning fire. She bent the water into a massive wave, and it crashed over her three opponents. When the wave dissipated, one instructor was frozen to the ground, but Pakku and the remaining combatant were nowhere to be seen.

 

Katara closed her eyes, and then with a brisk snapping movement launched herself into the air, moment’s before the two remaining waterbenders launched out of the ice below. Pakku began rotating his arms around his head, bringing in a massive flow of water to circle around the spot Katara had landed. He brought his arms in front of himself and continued the rotational motion. The remaining instructor began shooting disks of ice at Katara, who had split her attention between keeping Pakku’s water from trapping her and dodging razor sharp projectiles.

 

The circle of water closed in, and Katara had to fend off an even fiercer barrage of ice from the other waterbender. With every projectile she deflected, her resistance against Pakku’s trap faltered. Within minutes, the water was barely inches from her outstretched arms. 

 

Aang, for his part, was chewing anxiously on his fingernails. Yue’s hands were clasped in front of her, but Sokka wasn’t nervous. He had faith that Katara could get her way out of this; she was clever like that. And before long, he found himself proven right.

 

Sokka caught a barely concealed smile on his sister's face, and he watched as she rotated on the spot with the next projectile, redirecting it towards Pakku. The old master ducked swiftly under it, but in the second he had to divert his attention, Katara stole the water from under his control and changed it’s trajectory to attack the remaining instructor. The water collided with the man, knocking him off balance. Katara took that opportunity to sink him into the ice, but only managed to sink his hands and feet in before Pakku resumed his attack against her.

 

She slid under his water whip, barely avoiding being hit in the ear. She took a deep breath, and let it out. As she did so, a thick fog rolled up around her. It spread out through the training ground, obscuring everything from sight. Sokka couldn’t see his hand in front of his face, and when he looked around, he couldn’t see anyone else. He could hear them just fine, the sound of Katara and Pakku battling raged closer to them every second.

 

Suddenly the mist cleared, just in time for Sokka to see a water whip slash across his face, leaving a small cut. Pakku had lashed out at Katara, who dodged.  The fact that Sokka was right behind her must’ve slipped them by, at least that’s what he told himself.

 

The blow knocked him off his feet and left him sprawled on his behind.

 

“Sorry!” Pakku and Katara said in unison, before returning to their duel. Katara looked exhausted, and her hair had come out of its usual tight braid, and Pakku didn’t seem to be doing much better. The pair of them rushed at each other once more, but the gong sounded, signaling the end of the match.

 

Katara and Pakku bowed to each other, and then Pakku and his instructors went to consult with the other masters who were judging the test. Katara jogged over to Sokka, who was still sitting on the ground. Yue was touching the cut on his face tenderly, and he was trying not to wince. Katara pulled some water from the ice beneath them and it began to glow. She pressed the glowing water to his damaged cheek, and it healed quickly.

 

“Thanks, Katara. Though, I’ve gotta say, that really would’ve been helpful when I had two fish hooks stuck in my thumb.” Sokka said, rubbing the formerly damaged skin.

 

“How on earth did you get two fish hooks stuck in your thumb?” Aang asked curiously.

 

“He tried to get the first one out with another fish hook.” Katara said with a smirk, causing sokka to blush in embarrassment.

 

“Katara!”

 

They all laughed at his embarrassment, and in a moment, Sokka laughed too. They continued to chat amicably for a time, until Pakku interrupted them.

 

“It seems that you have a long way left to go, Aang.” Pakku said, and the Avatar looked bewildered, as he had not been the one being tested. He looked at Katara, who bore an anxious expression. Pakku continued speaking. “Be sure to continue his training while you travel through the Earth Kingdom, Master Katara.”

 

The group exploded with a mirthful cheer. Aang raced around them on an airscooter, and Sokka picked up Katara and spun her around. Yue laughed with delight, and then laughed even harder when Katara chopped her brother on the head.

 

“Put me down!” She said, trying to sound serious despite her jubilation.

 

“Can’t do that! I’m too proud!” Sokka said, and then he dropped her when he was soaked in cold water. “Now I’m proud and annoyed.”

 

“Be that as it may,” Pakku said, eyeing them skeptically. “I expect that you will begin preparations to set out soon. Sozin’s comet is only six months away, so the sooner you master earth and firebending, the better.”

 

Team Avatar sobered up quickly at that, and they returned to their room in the palace. Yue bid farewell, and went to join her father in his council meeting. Sokka brought out his map of the Earth Kingdom and laid it out on the table.

 

“Alright,” He said, as Katara and Aang joined him around the map. “I figured that the best place for Aang to learn Earthbending is in Omashu, with King Bumi. It’s one of the last safe places in the Earth Kingdom, and we all know how powerful the mad genius is.”

 

“I was thinking the same thing.” Aang said, “We’ll spend around a month there, but then we’ll have to go to the Si Wong desert.”

 

“Why do we have to go to the desert?” Katara asked, raising an eyebrow.

 

“Roku told me that after I started my earthbending training, I have to go to the spirit library. He told me that’s where it is.”

 

“Why do you need to go to the Spirit Library?” Sokka asked.

 

“There’s some kind of prophecy. From what Roku could tell me, Vaatu, he’s the spirit of chaos, is breaking free. Apparently that’s bad. He didn’t have much more information about him though. He said that the answers were in the library.”

 

Sokka remained silent, shocked to hear of Vaatu after so long. Koh had spoken of him in his cave, and said that he was growing stronger. If Aang knew about him too, then he had grown to be a far more serious threat.

 

“Did he say where in the desert it was?” Katara asked, to which Aang shrugged. “No.”

 

“So then it’s Omashu for Aang to learn earthbending, and then the spirit library.” Sokka said, quietly, his thoughts still stuck on Vaatu. Katara heard his change in tone, and looked at him curiously. He looked downcast, though she wasn’t sure what he was thinking about. She realized that he had never said he would be going with them directly. Had he decided to stay behind with Yue?

 

“Sokka,” Katara said softly, not sure how to broach the subject. “Are you.. Coming with us? I know that you and Yue are…”

 

Sokka looked over at her, “Oh, yeah, we already talked about it. I’m going with to help fight the Fire Nation. I’m not going to let you go on a crazy adventure with your boyfriend unsupervised.”

 

“I- He- We-!” Katara spluttered, and Aang blanched, shocked at Sokka’s words.

 

“I’m kidding! Relax, I was trying to break the tension with comedy.” He said, but Katara crossed her arms and looked away from him.

 

“Alright, you two, let’s just get back to planning. This stuff is time sensitive.” Aang said, and the three of them resumed planning their exposition to Omashu. After a few hours, they decided on a final plan of action. Aang would speak with Arnook in the morning to arrange an escort from the Earth Kingdom army.

 

Sokka stretched himself with a yawn, and stood. He picked up his sword and slung it over his back.

 

“Where are you going?” Katara asked him, as he made his way to the door.

 

“Yue and I are supposed to meet in the Spirit Oasis tonight, and it’s about that time.”

 

“And you’re taking a sword?” She asked, raising her eyebrows.

 

“Yeah, I want to show her the light-trail.”

 

“The what?” Katara asked, confused.

 

“Aang can tell you about it. I would, but I don’t want to be late. I’ll be back soon.”

 

With that, Sokka left them behind. He sped his way through corridors and down stairways, until he eventually found himself in the oasis. Yue was sitting on her knees by a copse of bamboo. She was staring up at the nearly full moon, lost in thought.

 

Sokka crossed over one of the bridges, careful to make noise that would announce his presence. Yue glanced over to him and smiled sadly. “You’re leaving soon, aren’t you?”

 

Sokka came over to sit beside her, wrapping an arm around her shoulders. He nodded. “As it looks, we’ll be heading out in a week. To Omashu, and then the Si Wong desert. There’s a magic library, I guess. Avatar stuff, I don’t pretend to understand it.”

 

“That’s… good. The war will be over soon.” She said

 

Sokka nodded. “We'll be together again before you know it.”

 

Yue nodded, and leaned her head against his shoulder. They sat like that for a time, and then Sokka stood, drawing his sword. “Well, I did say I’d show you how it looked some time, didn’t I?”

 

Yue’s eyes widened in wonder as he swung the blade around. It seemed to glow faintly with the light of the moon, leaving a translucent pale glow in its wake.

 

“You know,” Sokka said, looking between Yue and his sword, “It kind of reminds me of  you.”

 

“What? How so?”

 

“Well, it's elegant, beautiful, and it’s been blessed by the Moon Spirit. Plus, you’re both pretty sharp.”

 

“Well, isn't that sweet.” Yue said, sincerely.

 

“I still can’t think of a good name for it though, since moon-sword’s out.” Sokka said, tapping his chin in consideration.

 

“Well, I have an idea.” Yue said sheepishly, “Moonlight.”

 

Sokka paused, and smiled. ‘Yeah, I like that. That way, it’ll feel like you’re always with me. Even when we’re far apart. Although, it would be weird to stab someone with it, since it's named after you.”

 

Yue snorted, and laughing she said, “You just can’t help yourself can you? 

 

“What can I say? I’m just a guy who likes comedy.”

 

The young couple sat together and talked for a bit longer, and as they spoke the winds changed. They picked up speed and blew in from the south, and a blanket of clouds began to obscure the sky. Unknowing of the change in weather, the betrothed pair walked arm in arm through the city, talking and laughing and dancing together. When at last they noticed the change, it had started to snow. It piled up around them, and they saw that the snow was as black as the darkest night. The young woman did not know what it ment, but the man did. Their enemy had come, and war was again on their doorstep. The Fire Nation had come to the northern Water Tribe.

---

Laluk sat in his study, speaking with his only son. Hahn had been tasked with gaining Sokka’s trust, so that they might find him with his guard lowered. The boy had made progress. The Admiral would be pleased.

 

Laluk dismissed his son and began composing a message to the head of his order.

We have succeeded in gaining his trust. The Firs Son has taken Hahn into his confidence, and so far he suspects nothing. The Sea Wolf has mastered waterbending, and they will set out with the Avatar for the Earth Kingdom shortly. I advise you to move within a few days' time, lest he slip through our fingers.

Laluk sealed the message and attached it to the messenger hawk. Striding to the window, he released the bird and watched it fly by the light of the setting sun.

 

---

 

Admiral Zhao opened the message from his contact In the north. He read it twice, and then burned it. Marching up to the bridge, he ordered the signal be given to sail the last leg of their journey to the north pole.

 

They had been waiting a little more than a hundred miles from the pole, and Zhao had finally gotten the message from Laluk telling him that his son had earned the Water Prince’s trust. Now that the trap was set, he could begin his siege of the Water Tribe.

 

As the sun set, hundreds of smoke stacks billowed soot into the air, and the smoke was carried northward by the wind.

Chapter 20: Stormfall

Aang and Katara stood upon the Glacial Gate. Before them, spread out across the northern ocean, were hundreds of Fire Navy ships. The pair of them had volunteered to try and destroy as much of the fleet as they could, while Chief Arnook and his advisors planned the defense of the city.

 

“Are you ready?” Aang said, speaking to Katara without looking at her.

 

“No.” She said, watching the enemy over the water. Aang exhaled sharply through his nose.

 

“Yeah, me neither.” He said, and he reached out to take her hand. She held it firmly before speaking again. “Well, that's settled. Let’s go.”

 

Aang nodded and opened his glider. He launched into the air as Katara jumped into the sea. They had marked the first ship that they would strike against, and swiftly made their way to it. Katara formed a small craft with waterbending, and propelled her way over the water under a shroud of mist. Aang flew high overhead, dodging flaming projectiles that were being sent at the city. The battle had begun.

 

Aang touched down on the deck first, and thought that the ship looked familiar. It was smaller than the rest, and he spotted an evidently new trebuchet. He sent a blast of wind at a firebender, knocking him into the ship's tower. A column of water rose up and Katara was carried over the side to stand at the bow. He waved at her with a smile, as if they were out for a picnic and not to dismantle siege engines.

 

“I think this is Zuko’s ship!” Katara said, as she sliced through the trebuchet. 

 

“I thought it looked familiar!” Aang said.

 

“Maybe we should capture him? We could use him to negotiate!” Katara said, washing a firebender overboard.

 

“That's a great Idea!” Said Aang as he twisted between a pair of spears. He sent the spearmen sprawling across the deck with his staff. “Do you know where Zuko is? Usually he’d be out here already.”

 

The spearmen looked at him in confusion, not sure if they were being spoken to. Katara surrounded them in water, and raised them to their feet before freezing them in place. Striding over to them she asked, “Where’s Zuko?”

 

“Uh, I don’t know. He was branded a fugitive after he freed the Avatar from the Ilah colony. Fire Lord Ozai declared him a traitor and put a bounty on him.” Said one of the soldiers, his eyes wide in fear.

 

“Likely story. Why would the Fire Lord put a bounty on his own son?” Katara said, glaring at the man.

 

“Uh… Look, I’m just a Private! I was drafted, they don’t tell us anything! Please don’t kill me!”

 

“What!? I’m not going to- Ugh! Aang, let’s just go. I’m sure he’s here somewhere!” Katara said, looking over her shoulder to find that the Avatar was nowhere in sight. She whipped her head around, searching for him, and saw him jump from the bridge of the ship to float down and land beside her.

 

“He’s not here, but I found this.” Aang said, and showed her a wanted poster with Zuko’s image. Katara read it in confusion, her eyebrows furrowed. She read it aloud. “Wanted: The Banished Prince. Zuko, the son of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai has disgraced the Fire Nation. Any information leading to his capture will be..”

 

She stopped reading, shocked to see that the soldier had been telling the truth. She exchanged a look with Aang, and was surprised to find herself concerned for Zuko’s wellbeing. Evidently Aang mirrored the feeling, if his expression was anything to go by.

 

“There’s nothing we can do about it. We’ve got a mission, so let's forget about him for now.” Aang said. Katara nodded. They set out to incapacitate the next ship. They cut through them in quick succession, going through dozens of ships. Soon they approached the largest of them.

 

Katara landed on the deck first, slicing through the siege engine at the starboard bow. A trio of firebenders came from below deck and circled her, only to be swatted aside by Aang, using a combination of air and waterbending. He darted between soldiers, evading blows left and right. He grabbed a chain and wrapped it around the nets of two trebuchets, and then activated the mechanism of one. It launched the other a few feet into the air and they both collapsed into each other.

 

He paused to catch his breath and wipe sweat from his brow. The sun was high in the sky now. He and Katara had been fighting for hours, and the toll was beginning to wear on them. Aang heard a crackling sound, and turned in time to see Azula across the deck charging an attack. He thought for a moment that she would be aiming for him, but his eyes widened in horror when he realized that she was aiming for Katara. Time seemed to slow as Azula loosed the bolt.Aang's heart stopped in his chest.

 

Aang was frozen in shock, for absolutely no reason. Katara had heard the sound of  electricity, and knew what it meant. Without hesitation, she pulled water from the sea and a great wave in the shape of a wolf intercepted the lightning. Aang was jerked from his shock when a knife sailed towards his head, and he narrowly avoided being skewered by the projectile. He dashed madly towards Katara, who was locked in furious combat with Azula.

 

He skidded to a halt as Ty Lee leapt seemingly out of thin air, nearly landing a blow on his shoulder. Katara had warned him of her ability to stop bending, so he was wary of the girl. She smiled at him cheerfully.

 

“Hey Ty Lee. Long time no see, huh?” He said, before bending air out in a ring around him, forcing both her and the approaching Mai away from him. He sent a stream of water towards Azula before shouting out towards Katara. “I think it’s time to go!”

 

“Sounds good to me!” Katara shouted, and jumped backwards off of the ship.

---

 

The war room of the northern Water Tribe was rather pointlessly ornate, in Sokka’s opinion. For whatever reason, either Arnook or his predecessors had decided to decorate the room with statues of silver wolves and tapestries of the moon. Perhaps it was his spartan upbringing, but he found the pomp of the chamber rather needless.

 

Arnook and Laluk were standing across from him and Yue, while Hahn and a number of messengers were standing by for instruction. There were many warriors who Sokka was unfamiliar with in the room with them, clustered loosely around the Chief. Master Pakku and some of the other members of the tribe’s leadership were at the Glacial Gate, assessing the threat of the Fire Navy. Occasionally a message was sent from them, bearing only grim tidings.

 

“The leader of the assault is a mystery to us,” Arnook began, speaking to Laluk and the assembled warriors. Sokka coughed and drew the attention of the Chief.

 

“His name is Zhao. He’s an Admiral. Middle aged. Big sideburns, bigger temper. I’ve run into him a couple of times. The last time we crossed paths, he was with Azula- Princess Azula I mean. They’re probably both here, and Prince Zuko might be with them. He’s been chasing Aang since we found him at the south pole, so I’d be surprised if he wasn’t here too.”

 

Arnook looked at him in surprise, motioning for a scribe to take down Sokka’s words.

 

“Describe him for us, and this Azula. Prince Zuko too.” Arnook instructed, and the scribe stood next to Sokka expectantly.

 

“Well, uh,” He began, aware that his description of Azula could be a sensitive topic for him and Yue. He didn’t need her to be upset with him again.

 

“Zhao’s around this height,” He held his hand up to where he remembered the man’s head to be, “grayish brown hair, huge sideburns. He’s a firebender, so he probably won’t be carrying weapons. Oh, and he’s the Fire Lord’s cousin. Apparently my grandfather, Chief Vurak, killed his dad during one of the Fire Nation raids. He’s decided that he wants to kill my whole family now.”

 

The scribe wrote furiously, and nodded for Sokka to continue. “Uh, so Zuko, I guess. He’s a little taller than me, a teenager, mostly bald except for a ponytail. He has a terrible scar over his left eye, and that ear is shriveled from the burn. He’s also a firebender, although he's not that bad. I mean, he’s an angry jerk but that’s the Fire Nation for you. Amber eyes, Zhao’s are brown. I forgot to mention.” He finished awkwardly.

 

“And Azula?” Arnook prompted after Sokka lapsed into silence. 

 

“Uh, yeah.” He glanced awkwardly towards Yue, who rolled her eyes and waved him on.

 

“She’s about Katara’s height, and age think. Black hair, with long bangs on either side of her face that look like knives, or snake fangs. She shoots lightning and bends blue fire, kinda hard to miss.”

 

“Eye color?” The scribe asked. Sokka glared at him, and the man looked at him expectantly.

 

“Like the sun. Brighter than Zuko’s.” He noticed Arnook looking at him skeptically. “I don’t know how else to describe them.”

 

Arnook nodded promptly and ordered for the scribe to make copies of the descriptions and have them delivered to all of the captains. While the scribe began copying, Sokka remembered that there was one particular individual who he had not named.

 

“Uh, yeah, so there might be one more. The Dragon of the West, General Iroh. He’s been traveling with Zuko, so…”

 

“We have a description of him already,” Arnook said, before turning to the assembled warriors. “I need volunteers for a mission to cut the head off the snake.”

 

Sokka volunteered but Arnook shook his head, “Sokka, you’re not going. If Zhao has made it his goal to destroy your bloodline then I’m not sending you to him on a silver platter.”

 

Hahn and several other warriors and waterbenders volunteered, and Laluk cleared his throat.

 

“Chief Arnook, I suggest that you let Hahn take command of this mission. He’s a capable warrior, and if we’re to succeed in defending the city we need all of the senior commanders here.”

 

Arnook shook his head, “This is an important mission, I won’t allow an untested warrior to lead-”

 

“I think he can do it.” A grizzled man said, drawing the attention of everyone in the room. “I’ve been training him for years, and I know what he’s capable of. If anyone can do it, he can.”

 

“Ignick, are you certain?” Arnook asked. The man, Ignick, nodded. “Fine. Hahn, congratulations. You and a team of ten must infiltrate Admiral Zhao’s flagship, and eliminate him. There is no room for failure. Do you understand?”

Hahn nodded, and the warriors who had volunteered walked over to him. They departed immediately. Sokka watched them go, and a knot of worry for his friend's safety planted itself in his gut.

 

The Chief continued to give orders to his assembled warriors and vassals, and the occasional message came from the bay. Sokka was occasionally asked for his input, as well as Laluk and Yue. Ignick gave more advice than the others did, and Arnook seemed to hang on his every word. Every few twenty minutes a messenger was dispatched to share whatever decisions that had been made with Master Pakku. And would return with a report from the front. It continued in that fashion until a few hours before sundown and a runner came through the door.

 

“The Avatar and Master Katara have returned!” The man said, haggard and out of breath from running all the way from the gate.

 

“Sokka! Go to them and gather whatever information they have, and brief them on our plan of action.” Arnook said, turning to the other members of the war council he spoke again. “You all know your duties. Go!”

 

The assembled warriors and vassals dispersed from the war room to begin their assigned tasks. Sokka took off at a sprint from the room, navigating the shortest path to the front. He was nearly there when he realized that he wasn’t alone: Yue had come with him.

 

“Yue, you shouldn’t be here,” He said. “It’s not safe, you could be hurt!”

 

“I’m not going to sit in the palace while there’s a war on!” She said, taking his hand as she passed. “Besides, Aang and Katara are my friends too, I want to make sure they’re okay!”

 

Sokka grit his teeth. “Fine, but stay close to me, or Aang. Or Katara. Or-”

 

“I’m not just going to wander around by myself!”

 

“Right, sorry, it’s just that battle can be scary.” Sokka said as they exited a tunnel and came to the foreground of the Glacial Gate.

 

The damage was intense. Massive junks of the gate were missing, and boulders littered the ground in small craters. Waterbenders were already repairing some of the damage, trying desperately to fill in the gaps without exposing themselves to the enemy. Sokka scanned the field and saw Aang and Katara speaking with Pakku. He pulled Yue by the hand as he made his way over to them.

 

“Katara!” He yelled, closing the last dozen yards between them, “Aang! What happened?!”

 

“There’s too many of them.” Katara said quietly, her eyes downcast. “We must have taken out two dozen ships at least, but there’s hundreds of them.”

 

Aang nodded in agreement, “It’s too risky for Katara to go out there again. She can’t fly; it makes her a target for the firebenders.”

 

“You’re not going out there alone!” Katara countered, glaring around her as if she dared anyone to suggest otherwise. Nobody did, and she seemed appeased.

 

“Chief Arnook sent us to bring you up to speed,” Sokka began, and Pakku nodded.

 

“I’ve already filled them in on everything.” He said, to which Aang nodded solemnly.

 

“Who’s out there? Is it just Zhao?” Sokka asked. Katara shook her head before responding. “Zhao’s here. Azula and her friends too. We fought them on their flagship.”

 

“Did you wash Zhao overboard?” Sokka asked hopefully.

 

“No,” Aang cut in, with a half smile. “But she gave Azula a run for her money. Azula shot lightning at her and Katara caught it with some waterbending that looked like a wolf!”

 

“I thought it would look cool,” Katara said with a blush. At her words, Pakku chopped the top of her head and fixed her with a disapproving glare.

 

“We do not make our defense ‘look cool’ in the middle of combat! A mistake like that could cost you your life, especially if your enemy is shooting lightning! You might have the skills of a master, but not the wisdom of one.”

 

Katara averted her eyes and shame colored her face.

 

“Master Piandao told me the same thing.” Sokka put in, “I spun around while blocking a strike, and he poked me so hard with his practice sword that I had a bruise for a week. ‘Swordplay is no place for pageantry!’ he said.”

 

“And he’s absolutely right! This is war, not theater in the park.” Pakku glared at them.

 

“Moving on,” Yue said, “Are Zuko and his uncle here?”

 

“Zuko’s been labeled a traitor by the Fire Lord.” Aang said, pulling out the notice he had taken form Zuko’s ship. “I didn’t see his uncle, but I don’t know for sure.”

 

“So Iroh might not be here then? That would be fortunate.” A new voice said, startling the kids present. Pakku had seen Arnook and Laluk approach and was unsurprised by his words.

 

“Uh, no, Chief Arnook. At least, we didn’t see him.” Aang said.

 

“Has Hahn left yet?” Sokka asked, looking between the chief and his advisor. Both men shook their heads.

 

“He’s in the armory. I understand that you two are close, so if you feel the need to speak with him you may. I was able to inspect the defenses faster than I had anticipated, so I no longer need you to fill me in on the Avatar’s mission.” Arnook said, “Laluk, you too. I think we can spare you for a few minutes.”

 

Laluk bowed his head in thanks and departed for the armory, and Sokka was about to follow suit when Arnook put a hand on his shoulder. “Sokka, I have an important mission. One I can only entrust to you: I need someone to guard Princess Yue, and you’re the best man I can think of.” 

 

Sokka blinked, and nodded his agreement. Arnook motioned for Yue to follow Sokka, and the pair of them followed Laluk to the armory. When they arrived, Hahn was speaking to his father a fair distance from the chosen warriors. By the time they were close enough to hear what they were saying, the two men had stopped speaking and embraced. Hahn spotted Sokka and stepped away from his father quickly.

 

“Hey.” Sokka said.

 

“Hey.” Hahn said back.

 

“Just, be careful. Alright?”

 

“Really? And here I thought I should just announce my presence and run at him with a spear.”

 

Sokka snorted. “Knowing you, I can definitely see that happening.”

 

“Thanks, man.” Hahn said dryly. “What are you going to do? Will you be in the field with the rest of the warriors?”

 

Sokka shook his head, but Yue answered the question. “He’s going to be my bodyguard. We’ll probably spend most of the time in the palace or the Oasis asking the spirits for guidance.”

 

“You’re never going to get to use that magic sword of yours, are you?”

 

“It’s not magic!” Sokka said, crossing his arms.

 

“Yeah, yeah.” Hahn said, rolling his eyes. “It’s time for us to go. I’ll see you… when it’s over, I guess.”

 

Hahn and his warriors moved out, leaving the armory one by one. They had wrapped their armor in dark cloth, in hopes of blending in with the ocean before they scaled Zhao’s ship.

 

“Hahn!” Sokka called out as the infiltration team filled out of the armory. Hahn stopped and looked at him. “Good luck.”

 

---

 

Aang watched with trepidation as a steel hook embedded itself in the wall of ice. He had already cut down dozens of them, but the Fire Nation was too numerous. There was nothing more that he could do, and he felt powerless to stop the assault. Despite his and Katara’s best efforts, the Fire Navy had still brought enough firepower to bring down a large section of the gate. A single ship approached the section, and braced itself with the steel grappling hooks. The front end of the ship opened and the Fire Nation poured out.

 

A group of warriors ran to intercept them, led by a man that Aang thought he had heard be called Ignick. He raced towards the two groups, intending to help fight off the Fire Nation. He was stopped when a stream of water wrapped itself around his waist.

 

“No. You’ve been fighting all day, Aang.” Pakku said after he dragged the young Avatar to his side.

 

“But I’m the Avatar! It’s my duty to-!”

 

“You are only twelve years old. You are a powerful bender, and you will undoubtedly have a role to play in the battles ahead, but you need to take a break. Both of you!” Pakku said, pointedly looking at Katara as he ended his sentence.

 

Pakku quickly raised a wall of ice as a volley of arrows sped towards them, and he motioned for Aang and Katara to get close to the ground.

 

“It’s nearly nightfall. When the moon rises, the other waterbenders and I will be able to push out the invaders. You kids have done enough, more than enough. Head back to the palace and get some food and rest. If things take a turn for the worst I'm sure you’ll be able to figure it out. Besides, your bison is already over there, I’m sure he’s worried about you.”

 

Aang lowered his head and Katara nodded. The pair of them began their trek back to the palace. Before long, they found Sokka and Yue standing beside Chief Arnook. Sokka was speaking to him quietly, and before long Aang could hear what he was saying.

 

“... That ship has a propulsion system below the water level. Either screw or propellers. If you can get some of your waterbenders to freeze them in place, then we might be able to capture it. Who knows if they have any information about their invasion strategy.”

 

Arnook nodded, leaning to a scribe beside him. “Write down the First Son’s idea and send it to Pakku or Laluk, preferably Laluk. Master Pakku is too important to the defense to send on such a mission, we would be lost without his skills.”

The scribe nodded and gave the message to a runner, who sprinted down the path Aang and Katara had just come from. Arnook watched the man go, and noticed the two for the first time. He waved them over to him, and spoke.

 

“Aang, Katara, I’m glad you're here.” He bore a somber expression as he looked out over the battle. “There’s a real chance that we’ll lose this battle.”

 

“No!” Aang said, “We’ll do everything we can to beat back the Fire Nation. We’ll win!”

 

“Perhaps, and I intend to do everything in my power to defeat the Fire Navy, but we’re not guaranteed victory. If the worst case scenario happens, I want you and your friends to take Yue with you to the Earth Kingdom. Get on Appa and leave this place, get to safety. Even if we lose this battle, you can still win the war.”

 

“I can’t leave you behind! I couldn’t save my people a century ago, and I'd die before I let the same fate befall yours!” Aang said, his voice tinged with emotion.

 

“You must live, Aang! You’re the world's only hope! And besides, I've already sent word to the other cities of our tribe. Reinforcements would come in time and drive out the Fire Nation,”

 

“Then why are you asking me to…? Aang trailed off, looking at Arnook.

 

“The city would be freed eventually. The Fire Nation can’t hold Agna Qel’a against waterbenders. That said, they could easily capture some of us and hold them prisoner, or worse.” His eyes drifted towards Yue, who was talking with Sokka as they watched over the battle.

 

“You think that they would kill her?” Katara asked quietly, her eyes widening. Arnook nodded.

 

“Or me, but I will not leave this city. Even should it cost me my life. As long as Yue survives, then the future of our tribe is secure, even if I perish.”

 

“I.. fine. But not unless there is no other choice.” Aang finally agreed.

 

They watched the battle as the sun set, standing there for nearly an hour. Aang and Katara were given some bread, for which Aang was grateful. He had worked up quite a hunger over the course of the day. Aang could make out some flags moving on the largest ship, and then to his dismay he saw fires being lit aboard the ship. He opened his glider and took off towards the battle, and arrived just in time to bat aside a boulder from crashing into a building.

---

Admiral Zhao stood on the deck of his flagship as he watched the assault. They had managed to land a team of combatants on the ground; A mix of firebenders, Yu Yan archers, and mounted spearmen. He had considered leading the first assault personally, but had decided against it. The princess had wanted to go as well, but General Iroh had advised against it. Azula had become much more receptive to his cousin's words since Iroh had joined them, and the pair had become closer than Zhao had thought likely. He was delighted by this turn of events, and he had shared that information with The Fire Lord. He made sure to mention that increasing number of times that she had gone to her Uncle for advice in his reports. When the time came to convince Ozai of his brother’s treachery, the newfound relationship between Iroh and Azula would aid in discreditment.

 

Zhao wasn’t sure that Iroh was a traitor, of course, but he was sure that he could make something up. Ozai had always distrusted the man, and would likely believe any accusation if it sounded plausible.

 

“Ensign,” Zhao said, waving over a young female officer. “Signal for the fleet to resume the bombardment. Concentrate fire on the side of the bay opposite the ground forces.”

 

“At once, Sir.” She said, before turning towards the communications tower. The message would be sent by a series of flags, a coded form of communication used when it was too dangerous to send messenger hawks.

 

A series of sharp and precise footsteps approached him, and he turned his head to see Princess Azula and her companions. What were their names? Ty and Mai Lee. No, that wasn’t it. Zhao dismissed the thought. It didn’t matter. “Good evening, Princess.”

 

“Good evening, Admiral.” Azula said, stopping beside him to gaze at the assault. Within moments the bombardment began anew, and as he ordered the fire was focussed on the far side of the bay. They could faintly make out the shape of the Avatar as he flew through the air and batted the projectiles into the sea. The fading light was just strong enough to illuminate him as he defended the city.

 

“The moon is nearly full, and now that night has nearly fallen I expect our forces will withdraw shortly?” Azula proffered, her arms clasped behind her back. Zhao refrained from rolling his eyes at her obvious conclusion. He couldn’t let the mask slip now.

 

“Of course, Princess. The bombardment is merely to cover their withdrawal.”

 

Azula nodded, and then a commotion behind them drew both of their attention. A young man with a spear flanked by ten others approached them, but were quickly surrounded by soldiers. The young man broke through, and one of his followers shouted out. “Do it! Take him down, Hahn!”

 

Hahn walked towards Zhao and Azula, and knelt before him. The shock on his companions' faces was evident. Zhao considered him for a moment before the boy spoke. “Admiral Zhao, I am Hahn, son of Laluk. My father sends his regards.”

 

“Ah, good. You may stand.” Zhao said, before introducing Azula. “This is Princess Azula, daughter of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai.”

 

Hahn immediately dropped to his knees again, and prostrated himself before the Princess.

 

“It is an honor.”

 

“You’re right about that of course. You may rise.” Azula said to him, looking down her nose in distaste. She did not mind such deference, but she found men that would so willingly betray their nation to invaders… distasteful. Still, this betrayer might have some useful information.

 

“Tell me, has my brother joined the Avatar in the city? Has he tried to capture him perhaps?”

 

“No, Princess. The First Son and the tribal government believes him to be with you. I take it, however, that is not so?” Hahn replied, remaining low in his bow.

 

Azula rolled her eyes and didn’t deign to dignify him with a response.

 

“Your father briefed you of the plan, Hahn?” Zhao inquired. Hahn nodded, prompting Zhao to smile. “Good, good. Lieutenant! Have the prisoners stripped of their armor and weapons.”

 

Zhao scanned the deck, looking for someone. He frowned slightly, and Azula interrupted him.

 

“What is this plan of yours, Admiral? And why wasn’t I informed of it?”

 

“I didn’t want to act prematurely, but rest assured I will explain shortly.” Zhao said, bowing his head to her in deference.

 

“And why, pray tell, won’t you explain now?” Azula asked, raising an eyebrow.

 

“It is a matter of some delicacy, Princess. I do not wish to explain with so many… witnesses. Top Secret, I hope you understand.”

 

Azula waved her hand vaguely in agreement. She looked around, noticing her Uncle’s absence for the first time. “I assume that we’re going to have to wait for my uncle, then?”

 

Zhao nodded, before stroking his chin. His brow furrowed slightly. Where was General Iroh? 

 

---

Author's Note

Hello, I do hope you have enjoyed so far. There are only two chapters left in part one, and then an interlude between Regret and Conviction, So there's that.

 

If you have any constructive feedback, please share it with me. I'm doing this to get more gooder, so any feedback is apreciated.

12/03/2022

Chapter 21: The Price of Mercy

Iroh stood beside his nephew on the lowest deck above the water line. Zuko was clad in a gray tunic and dark cloak, and he worked to lower a one man craft into the water. Zuko had his Dao swords on his back, and slowly lowered the boat down.

 

Iroh watched, and helped his nephew when needed. He was supposed to be meeting with Zhao and Azula, but this was more important. His nephew, who he loved as his own son, was about to set out on a mission to capture the Avatar. Again. Despite his realization of the unjustness of this hundred year war, he set out to capture the Avatar. The only chance for the war coming to an end.

 

Zuko for some reason believed that if he did this, then his father would heed his pleas and end the war voluntarily. Iroh understood that that would never happen, and it would only serve to get him imprisoned or banished once again, and perhaps even killed outright,

 

“Prince Zuko, tell me again what your plan is?” He said cautiously.

 

His nephew stiffened. “Uhh..”

 

Iroh closed his eyes. He breathed slowly. The young man before him didn’t tell him of his plan before, despite what Iroh might have said. Judging by Zuko’s response, he assumed that he didn’t have one. The plan that they had cooked up together only went so far as to get them here.

 

“First I have to find and capture the Avatar.” Zuko said at last.

 

“And then what?”

 

“I’ll figure something out!”

 

“Zuko! This is exactly what happened at the Ilah stronghold! You got him out, and then you had to fight for freedom! What would have happened if they hadn’t taken you with them!?”

 

“I would have figured something out!” Zuko snapped.

 

“No! You would have been taken to the Fire Lord in chains and tried for treason! You never think these things through!” Iroh said, his voice raised.

 

“I-” Zuko unleashed a breath of fire. “I’ll think of something. I have to do this, it’s the only way I can end the war!”

 

“Ah, yes, ending the war by capturing the only person who can stop the Fire Lord from destroying the world!” Iroh said, pinching the bridge of his nose.

 

“I am begging you, Prince Zuko, think before you act! Why must you capture the Avatar? To restore your honor? Your honor was never lost! Nothing you did that day was dishonorable. You spoke against the pointless sacrifice of inexperienced soldiers, and then you refused to fight your father and Fire Lord!”

 

Zuko looked as if his uncle had slapped him. He staggered a step and braced himself against the gunnel. He wiped his quickly, and regained his footing. He took a deep breath.

 

“I…” Zuko trailed off. He was glad to hear that his uncle believed him to be honorable, and that he had never lost his in the first place. Even still, he had to capture the Avatar. It was the only way he could think to end the war. If he captured him, then his father would listen to him, he would have to. 

 

“I know what I have to do, I know my destiny, Uncle.”

 

“Is it your destiny? Or one that somebody else has thrust upon you?”

 

Zuko turned away at his uncle’s words. He gripped the railing of the gunnel tightly. Iroh placed a gentle hand on his shoulder.

 

“Prince Zuko, whatever you decide to do, I will stand with you. I love you, my nephew. Ever since I lost my son, I-” Iroh’s voice became thick with emotion.

 

“I know, Uncle. You don’t have to say it.”

 

“I think of you as my own. I only want what’s best for you, Prince Zuko. When you get to the Avatar, ask yourself the big questions. Who are you? What do you want?”

 

Zuko nodded, and embraced the old general. They held each other for a few moments, and then Zuko descended the rope ladder to his small craft.

 

“Be careful! Remember your breath of fire, it could save your life!”

 

Iroh watched as his nephew paddled the small boat away from view under the cover of night. Zuko soon lost sight of the ship, and managed to steer clear of the other ships in the fleet. He came to sit behind an iceberg, waiting for the sentries of the Water Tribe to pass by enough times so that he could learn their pattern.

 

He watched for a little more than an hour, and a half dozen sentries passed by in that time. Every five minutes one would walk over the remains of the gate. It seemed that there was a set number of men on watch for that shift, and they walked a rotation around the facility.

 

Zuko waited for the next sentry to pass, and then made for a blindspot on the shore. He got out of his boat and coiled his rope around himself. He fastened his swords to his back and inspected the cliff beside him. It was nearly sheer, and he could see no way to climb it. He considered going further out and then climbing up another spot, when he spotted a group of turtle-seals diving into a hole in the ice. He walked over to them, and watched them for a moment. The moment passed and the seals didn’t come back. He reached into the hole and found that it was a tunnel of sorts.

 

“Where are they going?” He looked back in the direction of the Water Tribe, although he couldn’t see it. He thought he could just faintly hear the sound of seals barking from that direction. He pondered his options. He could look for an alternate route up the cliff face, but that would take time. Judging by the stars, it was already past midnight. He only had a few hours remaining before sunrise, and he didn’t want to be caught scaling a cliff in broad daylight. He could try and swim through the tunnel. The seals would have to come up for air eventually.

 

Zuko grit his teeth, and mentally prepared himself for what he was about to do. He took a deep breath, calmed himself, and dove in the water. It was terrible. Cold as cold could be, but Zuko kept pushing. He forced himself along the tunnel, using the sides to propel himself when he could. When he thought he couldn’t hold his breath any longer, and he began to think he would drown, his head broke the surface. He gasped for air, and pulled himself onto dry land. He curled into a ball and used the breath of fire his uncle had told him to.

 

The relief was instantaneous, warmth spread through his body and he regained feeling in his limbs. He shuddered. He coughed. He sat up and groaned, holding his head in his hands. That had been a terrible idea. Why couldn't he have just found a cliff to climb? Zuko took stock of his surroundings, noticing that he was underground. He could see faintly, as there were some glowing crystals growing on the walls.

 

Zuko felt starved, and he reached inside his shirt for the bag of food he had brought there. It was waterproof, and stocked with a protein rich mix of nuts and dried meat. It didn't taste the best, but his travels through the colonies had instilled in him the belief that he should carry food with him at all times. And that practice had already come in handy.

 

After he had eaten, Zuko got up and stretched, working life into his exhausted limbs. He walked around the cavern, inspecting the different outcrops and tunnels. He saw one that seemed to lead in the direction he remembered the Water tribe was in, and he paused.

 

He was exhausted. He could feel the sunrise was only a few hours away, and he would be hard pressed to find and capture the Avatar before dawn. He could wait, he thought. Regain some energy, sleep a little. It would give him time to come up with a plan.

 

---

Sokka and Katara ate hurriedly. Yue and Aang were talking quietly in a corner, and though they couldn’t hear the words, the siblings could tell that whatever the pair was speaking of wasn’t particularly uplifting. The night before had been largely uneventful, except for when Momo had decided to stick his head into Sokka’s mouth. Sokka had coughed and choked, and somehow he had avoided waking Yue.

 

The four of them had slept together in the same room. Sokka and Yue had fallen to sleep on a couch in the sitting room where their first fight had begun. After Momo’s incorrigible midnight antics, Sokka had found Yue snuggled beside him warmly, and when he looked around he saw that Aang and Katara had fallen asleep holding hands. He wasn’t sure how he felt about that. He liked Aang, they were practically best friends. Perhaps it was just that he didn’t like the idea of his sister being with anyone.

 

The fighting had resumed a few hours after dawn, yet Arnook and Pakku insisted that Aang and Katara remain at the palace. They said that it was important for new combatants to get regular rest and extended breaks from fighting, and promised to send for them if the battle took a turn. So far, the warriors and waterbenders had managed to hold back the tide of war without their help.

 

According to Arnook’s best estimates, the warriors and combatants in general from other cities wouldn’t arrive until nightfall on the fourth day, at which point Pakku would head the counter attack against the Fire Navy. They had taken Sokka’s suggestion of freezing the propelling mechanisms and expanded on it, and he had helped them to plan the operation. They would start on the eastern side of the fleet, and freeze the ships closest to the city first, making a floating barricade that the surviving vessels would have to navigate through.

 

Sokka knew that he should be hopeful at the prospect, and glad that the Water Tribe was able to hold out so well under such short notice. Some things were bothering him though. First off, the assault was not weakening. That implied that Zhao was still alive, which in turn implied that Hahn had failed, or at the very least he had yet to make his assault. Sokka was not inclined to believe the latter. Hahn was quick and decisive, and he wasn’t one to wait until a moment presented itself. He had always made his own opportunities.

 

Second, was how the Fire Nation had managed to sneak up on them. The northern Water Tribe had managed to spot and intercept Appa. A single sky bison that could be taken for an odd cloud from far off. Yet he had been told that the sentires had spotted them days before. If the Water Tribe had lookouts and sentries scattered across the northern ocean, then how could an Armada of massive war ships get the drop on them? They would have to know where the sentries were, and plan their movements precisely to avoid discovery. How…

 

Sokka gasped and dropped his cup. Aang and Yue looked at him, startled. Katara whipped her head towards him, a seaweed noodle hanging from her mouth.

 

“A spy!” he exclaimed, looking between the group.

 

“You want us to get a spy in the Fire Navy?” Yue asked. Sokka shook his head.

 

“No, well yeah but that's not what I mean. The Fire Nation has a spy!”

 

“How do you know that?” inquired Katara.

 

Sokka explained his train of thought, and the group listened. Their faces went from skeptical, to shocked, and then to dismay.

 

“It makes sense. It would explain how they snuck up on us. And why Hahn…” Yue trailed off. “Isn’t back yet. They have someone watching us.”

 

Sokka nodded, but then frowned. “I don’t know how high up they are. If they had been in the war room, then the Fire Nation would know about all of our defensive strategy, and we wouldn’t be doing as well.”

 

“Unless they were biding their time. They could be sitting on that information, waiting until the right moment.” Katara said, staring off into space. “If they acted on every piece of info they got, then it would be pretty easy to figure out that somebody has been compromised.”

 

Sokka stood abruptly, “I have to go find Arnook. I’ve got to warn him about this.”

 

Katara stopped him, “No, I’ll go. You’ve got to stay with your ‘moonlight’, remember?”

 

Sokka froze. He didn’t realize that Katara had known about his pet name for Yue. Although, now that he considered it, he hadn’t exactly been subtle in its use. 

 

“Fine, fine. As long as someone tells him. Pakku too, I guess, but nobody else. The more people we tell the messier things could get.” Sokka said, and Katara moved for the exit.

 

“Katara,” Aang spoke as she was leaving. “If we’re not here when you get back, look in the Spirit Oasis. Yue and I figured that we could go there and I can try to contact the spirits of the Ocean and the Moon, ask for guidance, or, oh I don’t know, some kind of spirit attack.”

 

“Spirit attack?” Katara asked, raising an eyebrow.

 

“Eh, I can dream can’t I?” Aang said, and Katara laughed before bidding them to take care.

 

Sokka crossed his arms, and looked at the sun from out of the window. It was already past noon. The fighting had withdrawn, and the defenders were having a respite. All were grateful, but they didn’t expect it to last. Why was the Fire nation using such short lived landing operations? Wouldn’t it be better to keep at least a section secured and try and bring in more ground troops? That’s what he would have done, if he were laying siege. And why were they still concentrating fire on the gate? Shouldn’t they be trying to take out some of the infrastructure? Sure, the damage could be repaired easily by the Water Tribe, but that would cost valuable time and energy. Sokka’s father had said that Zhao wasn’t particularly gifted at strategy, but he had expected more than this. Was he developing a cunning plot perhaps? Sokka doubted it. Master Piandao had warned him not to underestimate his opponents, but Zhao was impossible to underestimate.

 

Aang gathered his staff, and began walking towards the door. Sokka stood and helped Yue to her feet. The three of them journeyed to the oasis. When they arrived, Aang sat lotus style on the ground, trying to concentrate. Yue started to speak, but Sokka shook his head. He put a finger to his lips and she fell silent.

 

The young Avatar sat in his position for some time, and the shadows lengthened as the sun drew near to the western horizon. Sokka heard the sounds of battle begin anew, and assumed that the Fire Nation had begun their assault once more. This too he found odd, that the Fire Navy would resume fighting so close to sundown on the night of the full moon. Why would they do that? Surely they knew how the moon boosted the power of the waterbenders.

 

“Sokka,” Aang said after the second hour of sitting in a meditative pose.

 

“Yeah?” Sokka answered, coming to sit beside him.

 

“This is not going as smoothly as I had hoped.”

 

“Really? I hadn’t noticed.” 

 

Aang snorted at the sarcasm. “Do you have any tips? You’ve been to the spirit world at least as many times as me. More if you count the time Hei Bai grabbed you.”

 

Sokka paused, and stroked his chin in consideration. “Well, I’ve only gone in on purpose once. The other times were in my sleep or when I was kidnaped. Thinking of it, it’s only been what? Three times? You’ve got the same number, I think.”

 

Aang shrugged. “Any port in a storm. I’m kinda short on options, so I have to ask you.”

 

Sokka considered the question. “Well, for me, when we went to Jeong Jeong’s camp, I had to wait until you had gone. I opened my third eye and once I saw you leave your body I left mine. I ended up speaking to Koh after I learned that…”

 

What had he learned? It was right there, he could almost touch it. Reaching for it, he felt a deep sense of foreboding. He stopped himself. Whatever it was, it was grim. He decided to wait until after the battle was over and the Fire Navy was pushed out. It didn’t sound like a grand undertaking to gain potentially distracting knowledge in the middle of a siege.

 

“Learned what?” Yue asked when he didn’t resume speaking. She had noticed the vacant look in his eyes he got whenever he was lost in thought. Sokka shook his head.

 

“I can’t remember, but I don’t think it’s anything good. I’ll try and figure it out when everything’s over. Can’t get distracted, right?”

 

“...Right.” Aang said, glancing at Sokka sideways. He and Yue shared a concerned look, but didn’t press the issue.

 

“Anyway,” Sokka pressed on. “When I bonded with Koh, a gate was formed in my mind. That’s how I managed to cross back into my body, and I can go through it to the spirit world.”

 

“Maybe you should go through it now? You can ask Kuruk how I can get into the spirit world and come back. Or maybe Koh knows where the Ocean and Moon Spirits are.” Aang suggested. Sokka grimaced.

 

“If I did that, then I’d have to take up Koh’s mantle again. I don’t think that’s a particularly good idea. You know what kind of effect it has on me.” Sokka told his friend, and Aang groaned. He nodded and resumed his meditative pose.

 

More time passed and dusk filled the night. Katara eventually showed up, and she tiptoed over to Sokka and Yue.

 

“What did my dad say about the spy?” Yue asked.

 

“He was skeptical, but I think I managed to convince him. He and Pakku are trying to ferret him out. I wish my dad was here.”

 

“Why?” Yue asked, surprised at the seemingly unconnected end of Katara's statement.

 

“Other than the fact that he’s our dad?” Sokka said, with a half smile. “He’s done this before. There was a ring of infiltrators and spies in our tribe. It’s how the Fire Nation found out that there was another waterbender.” he jerked a thumb at his sister.

 

“Yeah, Dad managed to ferret them out pretty quick after he realized they existed at all. We don’t really know how, we were too young.” Katara finished Sokka’s thought.

 

The three of them began chatting idly, forgetting that Aang had been trying to concentrate. The Last Airbender tried to ignore them, and he managed it for a time. Eventually, he snapped at them.

 

“Oh, please go on! I’m not trying to concentrate or anything!”

 

“Sorry, Aang. We just- Gah!” Sokka apologized and then leapt to his feet, drawing his sword. Katara drew forth water from the oasis, and Aang's eyes snapped open. He whipped his head around, looking for the danger. He found it standing atop one of the bridges. There in a menacing stance, stood Prince Zuko.

 

---

 

Azula chaffed in the Water Tribe armor. It was slightly too big for her, and the furs were a bit itchy. She glanced over at Mai and Ty Lee, who were also clearly unhappy about the wardrobe change. She decided not to reveal her displeasure. It wouldn’t do for her to appear so weak. Her uncle had no such reservations, as he had complained readily.

 

“Really, Admiral Zhao. These disguises are not particularly comfortable. Sure, they’re warm, but couldn’t we have altered them a bit more?”

 

“Unfortunately not, General. We’re on a tight schedule. If we’re to capture the Moon Spirit before the waterbenders can mount a sufficient counter attack, then we must act now. Hahn has informed me that the Water Tribe has reinforcements coming from the other cities, and they will soon be arriving. I imagine you understand the consequences of a sea battle against a legion of waterbenders? Our fleet would be safe of course, but we would fail to take the city in a short time. We would have to prolong our attack, and perhaps even have to wait until the comet to achieve total victory.”

 

Iroh nodded. “Yes, yes, I understand. Please forgive my grumbling. I’m an old man, after all.”

 

Zhao dipped his head, signaling his agreement. Apparently he also thought iroh was an old man.

 

Azula had helped concoct the infiltration plan. According to Hahn, there was a small cove a mile or so outside of the city, and there were no guards stationed there. His father, a nobleman in Chief Arnooks council, had arranged for the cove to be unguarded. It was an easy access point to get to the top of the cliffs that surrounded this side of the northern continent. From there they would cross the tundra and descend into the city, and from there they would head to the Spirit Oasis. The Fire nation would time their attack so as to distract the defenders, who would be rallying to push back the invaders, hopefully leaving the Oasis unguarded. 

 

After the spirit was captured, the waterbenders would be, in theory, powerless. It was fortunate that Hakoda wasn’t in the north currently. He was incredibly capable of defeating the Fire navy with only non benders. Azula doubted that he could take on the entire fleet, but it would be much harder for them if he was there. She wondered if Sokka was as capable. He had managed to thwart their capture of him, and Hahn had said that he was terribly clever. Always finding a way to achieve… She tightened her fists. She was thinking of him. Again. It was possible that she only thought of him because of how likely it was that they would face off in the next few hours, but it annoyed her nonetheless.

 

Mai and Ty Lee exchanged amused glances. They had noticed the pattern of Azula’s behavior whenever Sokka was mentioned, and they had gone one to assume that when Azula scowled and clenched her fists it meant she had thought of him. The poor girl.

 

“Alright.” Admiral Zhao said, and Hahn stood beside him. “Our main objective is the capture of the Moon Spirit. The spirit’s mortal form is that of a white Koi fish that swims in a pool in an Oasis. There is also a black fish, which nobody is to touch. The Ocean Spirit is far more powerful in its mortal form, and any attempt to harm it will be met with devastation unseen since the destruction of the Air Nomads.”

 

Ty Lee raised her hand. Zhao looked at her, and said, “Yes, Mai Lee?”

 

“Uh, it’s Ty Lee, actually.” She corrected. Zhao blinked. 

 

“Oh. Do forgive me, Lady Ty Lee.”

 

“It’s fine,” Ty Lee said in irritation, “but what I wanted to ask was why is the Ocean Spirit so much more powerful?”

 

“La has fully merged with at least one mortal champion. The combination of spirit and mortal gives the Ocean Spirit a greater hold on the physical world. Not as strong as the spirit of the Avatar, of course, but powerful nonetheless. Tui has never fully merged with a human, and so her touch is limited.”

 

“Why hasn’t she done so?” Ty Lee said, absolutely enthralled in the topic. It was Iroh who answered her.

 

“The bond of the Moon Spirit requires sacrifice. One would have to do something so selfless and noble that it’s instinctual. It cannot be planned, it is an action of the heart.”

 

Zhao rolled his eyes. “Moving on. After the capture of the Moon Spirit, we must find and apprehend the Avatar. He won’t be able to waterbend, and this will be our greatest chance to take him.”

 

The assembled soldiers nodded. Some of them wore Water Tribe armor, and others wore the parkas favored by civilians. Laluk had supplied them with those clothes over the past weeks, and Hahn had purposefully garbed his men in armor to aid in the Fire nation’s mission. She would have preferred the parka, but Hahn had revealed that the Sokka had given her description to the war council. Even going so far as to describe her eye color. According to Hahn, he had said they were Like the sun. She wasn’t sure how she felt about that. Ty Lee had snickered, but Azula refrained from setting her on fire. Ever since her first talk with Iroh about it, she had warmed up to her friends teasing her.

 

She had found herself surprisingly happy to have found a confidant in her uncle. It was… comforting. She never felt like she could share her fears with her father, or her advisors Lo and Li. She refused to admit it, but she found that she had come to both love and trust her uncle. His advice had led to her becoming closer to Mai and Ty Lee than ever before, and she was grateful.

 

The briefing ended, and the infiltration teams boarded the small steamers that would transport them to the cove. They were split into three teams. Zhao’s was the largest, consisting of Iroh, Zhao, and eight firebenders and spearmen. Her own team consisted of herself, Mai, Ty Lee, and a young Ensign named Tema, and an additional firebender. Azula hadn’t bothered to ask his name, but she thought it was Tahno, or Kano, or something O. He had served on Zuko’s ship, and had volunteered for the mission. Uncle had vouched for him, so she had taken him in her own team.

 

The third and final team would stay behind to guard the steamers, a combination of Yu Yan archers, spearmen, and firebenders. They were to be commanded by one of the archers, Lieutenant Shang Wen.

 

The voyage didn’t take long, and they were soon at the cove. The rearguard bid them farewell, and the remaining two teams were led by Hahn to the city. Once they had descended the cliff, they split into two groups. Admiral Zhao’s team would take a more direct route, and Team Azula would skirt along the side of the city. Her route was the one Hahn said was the most likely for an escape attempt should the Avatar and his friends flee.

 

At the top of the cliff, the groups paused for a brief rest while they watched the progress of the battle. Dusk had passed a short time ago, and the Water Tribe was fighting furiously. The full ground force was being confined to a few city blocks and the field behind the Glacial Gate.

 

“Azula.” The Princess turned, surprised to hear her uncle drop her title.

 

“Be careful. It’s a dangerous thing we are about to do.” Iroh said, and his eyes appeared wet. Was he that concerned with her wellbeing?

 

“I will, Uncle. Thank you for your concern, but it’s hardly needed.” Azula said arrogantly. When she saw that her uncle was not soothed, her voice softened. “Nearly all of their forces are concentrated in the battle, and we’re taking an indirect route. You’ll be in greater danger than we will.”

 

“I know…” he said softly, and then he shocked her by wrapping her in a strong embrace. “You’re strong, and I know that you’ll survive. Whatever happens, remember this: I love you, my niece.”

 

Azula froze. Mai and Ty Lee shared a look. Admiral Zhao pretended not to notice. Tahno, that was indeed his name, rolled his eyes and smiled. Azula fought back embarrassment and patted her uncle on the back.

 

“Thank you Uncle. I will.”

 

---

 

Zuko stood on the bridge, stuck in a standoff. Sokka held a sword in one hand and his boomerang in the other. Katara was holding an impressive amount of water in the air. Aang was brandishing his staff.

 

There was a white haired girl that he didn’t recognize. She stood a little behind Sokka.

 

“Zuko.” Aang said, eyeing him suspiciously.

 

“Aang. Katara. Sokka. Nice sword.” He said, unmoving from his stance.

 

“Nice hair.” 

 

Zuko’s mouth twitched. He had grown more hair, it was perhaps two inches long now, having been growing for a little more than two months.

 

“Well? What do you want?” Katara snapped, refusing to look away.

 

Zuko was reminded of his uncle’s questions, but he didn’t want to think of that right now.

 

“It doesn’t matter what I want! I have to capture the Avatar!” He snarled.

 

“Why?! You’ve been chasing us all over the world, and for what? To stop Aang from ending the war?! I’ve got news for you, Zuko, the war is bad!” Katara retorted.

 

“Don’t you think I know that?!” He shouted, “I’ve seen what it’s done! I’ve been there, I-!”

 

He cut himself off, clamping his mouth shut and clenching his jaw. “I must capture the Avatar. It is my duty to the Fire Nation. There is no other…”

 

He stopped when he spotted a flurry of motion in the water below. He glanced at it quickly and saw Koi swimming in the pool. His eyes widened in realization. He returned his gaze to Aang, and tried to put it out of his mind. He made a step forward, but his leg wouldn't obey. He tried again, and still his body refused to heed his commands. He returned his gaze to the water. He looked back at the Avatar and his friends, and he could see looks of confusion on their faces.

 

He took a deep breath. It was time to ask himself those big questions. He couldn’t move forward until he did. Who was he? What did he want? He was the Fire Prince. Son of the Fire Lord, blood of the dragon, long descended from agni himself. He had walked the land and sailed the sea, seeing the wrath and devastation of a war with no purpose. A war that killed thousands, and nearly extinguished an entire people. A war that had to end.

 

Zuko felt that he knew the answer to the big questions. He was Zuko, and he wanted peace. The realization hit with the force of a tsunami. He staggered, bellowing his frustration in the night. He righted himself, and saw looks of concern on the Avatar and his friends' faces.

 

“Zhao is going to kill the Moon Spirit.” He said, refusing to look at them.

 

“What?! How?” Aang asked, lowering his staff.

 

“He has found the location of her mortal form.” He pointed at the water, at the white koi, and turned to walk away. 

 

Sokka stared in disbelief, looking between Zuko and the water. He opened his third eye, and saw that the fish glowed with the same light as Yue. He remembered how the fish had touched his sword when he asked the moon for her blessing, and realized how blind he had been not to realize it. This was the Spirit Oasis for a reason, wasn’t it?

 

“Why are you helping us? Why now?” Katara asked, lowering her water.

 

Zuko glanced over his shoulder, and Sokka could see the dark fire of corruption fade and then go out as Zuko spoke. “Sometimes, we find allies where we least expect them.”

 

“Zuko, wait!” Aang said, causing the firebender to pause. “Join us! I need a firebending teacher.”

 

Zuko shook his head. “No. I can’t.”

 

He continued walking. Sokka ran to join him, followed by Katara. Zuko struck a defensive stance, but The pair didn’t attack.

 

“If you won’t join us we won’t force you. But you shouldn't wander blindly through the city.” Sokka said, and Zuko eyed him with suspicion. “Do you have something to write with?”

 

Zuko produced a small bag and pulled out a piece of wax paper. It smelled like dried meat and nuts. Zuko pulled a twig from beneath a nearby bush, and charred the end before handing it to Sokka. Sokka drew a map on it quickly and returned it to Zuko.

 

“A friend of mine showed me this route. It’s a bit long, but it should keep you from most of the fighting. I don’t know if you would, but do you know what happened to him? He was sent to kill Zhao, he would’ve made his move last night. His name’s Hahn.”

 

Zuko shook his head. “I don’t. I was in disguise, and my uncle never mentioned him. Besides, I was making my way here for most of the night.”

 

“Why were you- it doesn't matter.” Katara said, “Thanks, Zuko. You’ll make a great Fire Lord one day.”

 

Zuko said nothing, and turned his back on them. He walked out of the Oasis and out of sight.

 

“Aang!” Sokka said sharply, taking charge as soon as Zuko was out of sight. “Fly off and find Pakku. Tell him of Zhao’s plan, and then tell Chief Arnook and Commander Ignick. We need to guard the Spirits!”

 

Aang nodded and took off, flying close to the buildings to avoid being spotted by firebenders.

 

Sokka, Katara and Yue were left alone in the Oasis. Sokka paced back and forth, thinking furiously.

 

“Do you think we can move the spirit?” He asked, but Yue shook her head. “It’s too cold to keep them elsewhere. This is the only place warm enough. If we had known about it before, then maybe.”

 

Sokka nodded. “Katara, we’re going to need some defenses. Will you put up some barricades? If they get here before we have defenders, it'll give us a chance to slow them down.”

 

Katara began to put up blocks of ice, making sure to secure the bridges. She organized the barricades in a fashion that would force the Fire Nation to be funneled into a few sections. She did her best to make the barriers as thick as possible, so that any firebenders would have to take time to melt them.

 

Before long, Pakku showed up, bringing a team of waterbenders with him. They aided Katara in her efforts, shoring up their defenses. In time Ignick joined them, bringing a small team of warriors. He posted them outside of the gate to the Oasis, and he came to speak with Sokka.

 

“How long do we have?” He asked. Sokka shrugged.

 

“I don’t know. They might be on their way now, or it could be days. Zuko didn’t know anymore than he told us.”

 

“Zuko? The son of the Fire Lord?” Pakku asked, surprised. Sokka nodded.

 

“Yeah, I think he’s changed sides.” Sokka answered, “At least, he’s against the war now.”

 

Ignick and Pakku exchanged a look, and Pakku smiled. “Thank the spirits for that. We should get Princess yue to safety, if they arrive while she’s here-”

The sound of fighting interrupted him. Pakku and Ignick rushed to the other fighters and Sokka followed, unsheathing Moonlight as he ran. He leapt through the gate and cut a spear in half, barely deflecting a blow. The attackers were… Water Tribe?

 

One of the men in armor removed his helm, revealing him to be Admiral Zhao. He rushed Sokka, twin fires burning from each fist, and struck out at Sokka’s head. He dodged, and noticed for the first time one of the attackers was familiar.

 

“Hahn?” he said in shock, and was nearly burned by Zhao. Aang landed on the firebender's shoulders, having returned just in time to save Sokka. Sokka didn’t notice, as shocked by what he was seeing as he had ever been in his life. His friend, Hahn, had betrayed him. His third eye was opened still, and he was seeing Hahn for what he truly was. Inside of the young warrior was no light but a blue so dark that it was almost black. It was coiled in his chest like a snake, ever poised and waiting to strike.

 

Hahn looked at him and smiled. It was the same smile that Zhao wore, the look that a predator gave a fawn. “Yes. Me.”

 

Hahn turned away from his opponent, and drew his spear from the man’s chest. It was Ignick. He still lived, at least for now. Hahn had taken him in the back, and the old warrior rolled to his side, gasping. He looked at Hahn in sheer confusion, watching him walk towards Sokka.

 

Sokka backed away, slowly. His shock turned to anger and he began to yell. “You! You were the spy?! Is your father in on it too?!”

 

“Yes, I am.” Laluk said, lashing out his waterbending towards Pakku.  He knocked the old master off his feet, and leapt through the gate and into the Oasis. Zhao followed suit, and soon half of the combatants had filed into the Oasis. Sokka followed with Aang, but Katara stayed outside to fend off the remaining firebenders.

 

“Excuse me,” An old man said, and Sokka recognised Iroh, who had taken off his helmet and followed inside. He elected to ignore him, as he thought the old general might not be on Zhao’s side. He hadn’t participated in the fighting, instead he merely stood on the sidelines.

 

Sokka dashed madly through the battle, trying desperately to get to Yue. He leapt over a barricade and crossed the bridge, running to her side. “Stay behind me!”

 

Yue nodded, her eyes wide in panic. She looked at Sokka’s sword and he noticed that the blade was wet with blood. When had that…?

 

The fighting seemed to intensify, and the Fire Nation were surrounded. It looked like the battle was turning in favor of the Water Tribe, until Zhao began to cycle his arms. Electricity cracked in the air, and warriors scattered to avoid the bolt. Sokka grabbed his boomerang and whipped towards Zhao, who ducked, and then leaped onto the ice barricade, all while generating his attack. He locked eyes with Sokka, and smiled that manic grin of his. Sokka’s eyes widened in fear. Time seemed to slow as Zhao let free the lightning.

 

Sokka prepared himself for death. And in that moment, the memory he had sealed away broke free, and he knew that he faced the abyss. When the lightning hit him he would cease. He could dodge it, he thought, but then it would hit Yue. It was no choice at all, really.

 

Sokka took what he thought would be his final breath, and then he realized that Zhao wasn’t aiming for him. The bolt was at the wrong angle, it would pass him by and hit…

 

“No!” Sokka cried, realizing that Zhao had aimed for the Moon Spirit. He tried to intercept the lightning, but he had realized it too late. He could do nothing. He was powerless to stop it. He turned and reached out, trying to jump in front of the blast, but he was too slow. The blast soared past him.

 

Nothing could be done, the Moon Spirit was doomed. Nobody could…

 

The sound of thunder split the night, and a body fell to the ground. Sokka turned, and could not comprehend what he was seeing. Behind him, he could hear Iroh yelling, and then a rapid succession of firebending. He heard a commotion, and then running footsteps.

 

He fell to his knees, and wrapped Yue in his arms. She had realized Zhao’s target before he had. She had moved first. She had taken the bolt. With his third eye, Sokka could see her spirit begin to fade.

 

“N-no. No, no, no. Yue, please!” He said, tears filled his eyes. Yue coughed weakly, and met his eyes.

 

“It’s okay.” She said weakly. “It had to be done. It had to be me.”

 

“You’re going to be fine! K-katara can-'' Sokka choked back a sob. He swallowed before bellowing, “KATARA!!!”

 

Yue weakly reached for his hand, and he took hers in his. He watched as the light grew dimmer still. With a shaking and broken voice he said, “Please, don’t go. D-don’t leave me.”

 

“I love you, Sokka.” Yue said. Sokka kissed her, and said, “I love you too.”

 

Sokka watched with tears streaming down his face. Slowly, the light with Yue dimmied, and went out. Sokka held her there, and in an Oasis at the very top of the world, Yue died.

 

Sokka was frozen. He couldn’t breathe. He felt something break inside him, and whatever it was fell away. A hole had been opened up inside, and he knew that it would never be filled again.

 

Footsteps approached him, and he didn’t bother to see who it was. He held Yue to his chest and wept. A pair of figures knelt beside him, and tried to take her. Sokka snarled and looked up, and found Katara and Aang before him.

 

“Sokka, I can heal her, there might still be time!” Katara said desperately, her hands coated in glowing water. Sokka shook his head, but laid Yue’s body beside the pool anyway. One of her hands fell into the water.

 

“No. She’s gone. I saw.” he tapped his forehead and continued to weep. 

 

“Zhao did this. He tried to kill the Moon Spirit, and Yue-” His voice broke. Katara started to cry, and Aang stepped back, stumbling away.

 

“No, she can’t- Yue can’t be-” He stopped speaking. Tears filled his eyes. “I did this. It’s my f-fault.”

 

“No, young Avatar. Only Zhao can be blamed.” Katara and Aang looked over to find Iroh standing with them, a look of deep sorrow on his face.

 

“No.” Aang said. The wind began to howl. Aang’s tattoos began to glow. When he spoke again, his voice echoed with the thousands of Avatars that had come before. “I spared Zhao. It’s because of me.”

 

Aang lifted into the air, wind billowed around him and water was pulled from the pool. The Avatar roared and the noise echoed around the oasis. Aang flew into the air and towards the battle.

 

Sokka didn’t care. He stayed where he was, holding Yue’s hand. Iroh knelt beside him, and placed a hand on his shoulder.

 

“It’s going to be okay, Sokka. One day, you will see her again.”

 

Sokka shook his head, and reached for the void. He found it, and he dove so deeply into the trance that he did not think he would come out again. When he spoke, his voice was haggard.

 

“No, I won’t. She has gone where I cannot follow.” He said.

 

“What?” Katara asked, wiping her face. Iroh stood, and stared at Sokka with concern.

 

“What have you done?” he asked. Sokka stood and wiped his eyes.

 

“What was necessary. The Face Stealer has me now, and my soul is in his keeping. When I die, that's it. My existence will end.” His voice was level. He walked to his sword, and picked it up.

 

Katara looked at him in confusion. The Face Stealer? She called after him, but her brother ignored her.

 

In his mind, Sokka opened the gate and let Koh’s power flow through him. He pictured Koh’s home and called his name. In an instant, he was there.

 

“I need more. They took her from me.” Sokka told the spirit. Koh nodded, and turned to smoke. The smoke billowed forth and entered his lungs. Sokka breathed deeply. As he began to return to the mortal world, Koh’s voice rang out.

 

“Do not say I did not warn you.”

---

 

Author's Note:

 

Please leave a comment of some kind. When readers give me feedback or interact in some way, it makes me feel good about myself.

Chapter 22: Wrath, and Tears.

Zuko hid in the shadow of a building. He had heard the approaching footsteps and taken cover. He did not need to be taken captive by the Water Tribe. He watched silently as they approached, five of them. A man in armor, a young… person also in armor. Zuko thought it was a girl, but the armor of the Water Tribe made it difficult to tell. Three others were with them, a woman and two young women, around his sister's age, all wearing the Parkas favored in the frigid pole.

 

“...let me take the lead, Princess.” The man in armor said. His voice sounded familiar, though Zuko couldn’t place it. Princess? Was one of the women Princess Yue? He had assumed that the white haired girl with Sokka was her, as his uncle had told him of their engagement.

 

“Do not call me that again, Tahno. Need I remind you of where we are?” 

 

Zuko knew that voice. He had heard it countless times.

 

“No, P- Ma’am.” Tahno said, “Forgive me, but if there should be fighting at the Oasis then I should be in front, as a safety precaution.”

 

Zuko’s eyes widened in horror. Azula was headed towards the Oasis, the very place where the Avatar was sure to have brought guards to protect the Spirits. An action he had taken due to Zuko’s warning. If Azula went there now, she would be in the fight of her life. Zuko grit his teeth and stepped into the moonlight.

 

“Azula!” He roared, causing the group to turn to face him.

 

“Why, if it isn’t dear Zuzu. Why am I not surprised to see you here?” Azula smirked.

 

“You’re not going to the Oasis.” Zuko said, staring her down. Her companions lowered the hoods of their parkas, and Zuko recognized all of them. Mai, Ty Lee, and the officer who had directed him to his uncle’s cabin. Ensign Tema.

 

“I didn’t realize that you were in a position to give orders, dumdum.” His sister sneered. She removed her helmet and tossed it to the ground. She took a firebending stance.

 

“They know you’re coming. I told the Avatar that Zhao intends to kill the Moon Spirit.” He took a defensive stance as he spoke. Azula’s face turned into a rictus of fury at his words.

 

“You would betray the Fire Nation?!”

 

Zuko shook his head. “No. We all need the moon. The whole world depends on the balance.”

 

“Uncle would never allow Zhao to harm the moon. He’s watching him even now, I’m sure. You’ve as good as doomed the siege!” Azula said. Zuko thought he heard a touch of desperation in her words. “But it’s not over yet. I can still get to the Avatar.”

 

Zuko scoffed. “No you won’t. He’s left to get reinforcements. Sokka began to plan the defense the second I was out of sight, and sent him away.”

 

Azula’s face colored and she clenched her fist. It was over then. The moon and the Avatar would be out of her reach. Perhaps Zhao would succeed in capturing the Moon Spirit, but she had failed. Well, almost. At least she could capture one person.

 

“It’s over Azula. Get out of here while you can.” Zuko said, not lowering his guard. He watched her, and so did her allies. She snarled and attacked. Zuko barely managed to deflect the fire, and when it cleared Azula was mere feet away. Zuko dodged her next strike and loosed a powerful jet of his own.

 

At least, that had been his intention. What came out was an impotent flatulence of orange candle flame. Azula stopped and stared at him, and rage overcame her expression.

 

“You dare to think you can go easy on me?! Your mistake!” Azula roared. She attacked with a barrage of azure fire, performing some of the finest firebending of her life. Zuko ducked, deflected, and dispersed as much as he could, but none of his own firebending could touch her. She kept pressing him back and he couldn’t resist her onslaught.

 

Zuko heard a distant crack of thunder from the direction of the Oasis, but he had no choice but to ignore it. It was all he could do not to be incinerated by Azula. She punched fire towards his face, and he launched himself backwards. Landing on his hands, he managed to sweep her off balance with a kick. He heard someone scream a name in the distance, but he was on his feet and sprinting away.

 

He wasn’t running from Azula, he wanted to lead her and her team away from the Oasis. Perhaps if enough time passed she would realize that she couldn’t go there. For now though, he had to try and keep her away. And stay alive. 

 

Blue fire rained down around him, and then orange flame joined it as Ensign Tema attempted to aid Azula. The Princess roared out at her companions. “He’s mine!”

 

Zuko turned and kicked fire, but again it was weak and ineffective. What was happening? Why couldn’t he bend properly? Zuko drew his swords and faced her.

 

Azula stopped and took an offensive pose. “What will you tell the Fire Lord when I bring you to him in chains?”

 

Zuko stared at her. He snarled his response. “Only that I’ve learned the truth, and that suffering has been my teacher.”

 

The wind picked up around them, tugging at Zuko's cloak. He heard a distant roar, and saw a glowing figure rise into the air. Air and water surrounded Aang, and Zuko watched in fear and awe as the Avatar flew across the city to the battlefield.

 

“Like I said. You won’t have him.” Zuko said softly.

 

---

 

She couldn’t stop crying. She tried, she tried very hard in fact, but still she wept. She wept for her friend, for her brother, and for herself. Sokka had lost a lover, and she had lost a dear friend in Yue’s leaving. Aang had entered the Avatar State, and he blamed himself for Yue’s death. Now he was facing the assembled might of the Fire Nation. Sokka had taken up Koh’s mantle and followed after. But all she could do was cry.

 

“Wh- Who is the Face Stealer?!” She asked between sobs. She didn’t expect an answer, but she got one all the same.

 

“He is a foul spirit.” Iroh said, “A spirit of order, but foul all the same. Koh is an ancient spirit. He was born near the beginning and still endures.”

 

Iroh knelt beside her in the grass. He put an arm around her, and Katara cried into his shoulder. She took a deep breath, coughed, and wiped her eyes. She forced the tears back and got to her feet.

 

“And he has my brother's soul?” She said in a small voice. It was hollow. Empty.

 

Iroh met her eyes and looked away. “Yes, it seems so.”

 

“Is there any hope for him?” She asked.

 

“There is always hope. If you keep looking, then you will find a way. I’m sure.” iroh said before standing. He began to walk away from her, towards the city.

 

“Where are you going?”

 

“To find my nephew. I know that you see him as an enemy, but I must know that he is safe.”

 

“Zuko was here. He warned us about Zhao’s plan. If he hadn’t, then…” Maybe Yue would still live, but the Moon Spirit would not. She, Aang, and Sokka might not either.

 

“Where is he now?”

 

Katara told him of the way Zuko had taken, and Iroh’s eyes widened. He thanked her and then ran out of the sanctuary. Katara watched him go. She knelt down next to Yue, and tried to arrange her in a more dignified fashion. She closed Yue’s eyes, and crossed her arms over her chest.

 

She placed one hand on her stomach, and then tried to move the other. That hand had fallen into the water, and when Katara tried to lift it from the pool it wouldn’t budge. Katara stared in confusion. She tried once more, but the pool would not release her. The Koi broke from their eternal dance. The Moon Spirit swam to Yue, and placed its brow against the lifeless fingers.

The water began to glow like the moon, and the light enveloped Yue. She lifted from the earth, and faded into nothing. Katara watched in confusion as moonlight concentrated on the spot where Yue had been. It seemed to coalesce into the shape of a woman, and then Yue appeared, alive once more. 

 

“How…?” Katara said in wonder. Yue smiled at her.

 

“I was touched by the Moon Spirit when I was born. She saved my life, and now I have saved her in return. Tui has taken me into her own. We are one now, just as the Avatar and the Light Spirit.”

 

“Sokka! We have to find him, he thinks you're…” Katara couldn’t bring herself to say the word.

 

“I am, in a way. I cannot walk beside him as I did before. I am something else now.”

 

Katara’s heart fell. So Yue was lost to them still, and no miracle would keep her with them. She looked at her friend, perhaps for the last time. Yue turned her head and looked into the distance, and a frown creased her brow.

 

“You must go to him: he needs your help. I will light the way.” Yue said, and she vanished.

 

A beam of moonlight illuminated the path towards her brother. Katara began to run.

 

---

 

The battle raged, water and fire filled the air, swords sang and spears crashed; a symphony of desperation. Men fought. Men bled. Men died.

 

Away from all of this, three men sprinted through the night, wary of pursuers. They ran down side roads, and crossed canals. Eventually, they came to find a squadron of Fire Nation soldiers. Upon seeing the men dressed in the armor of Water Tribe, the soldiers ready to fight once more. The lead firebender stepped forward.

 

“Stand down you idiot,” Admiral Zhao said, punching fire into the air. “I am your commanding officer!”

 

The soldier bowed instantly. “Forgive me, Admiral. I didn’t recognise-”

 

“Back to the ships! Retreat! Now! We’ll resume the siege at dawn.” Zhao ordered. The soldiers paused, before turning back in the direction they had come.

 

Hahn and Laluk stepped in line behind them, following the Admiral. Their identities had been revealed, and now they had no choice but to flee. They continued on their path until a shadow fell behind them.

 

Turning, Laluk called out to the Admiral. “Zhao!”

 

Zhao turned, and saw a long shadow that stretched over ground where none should be. He stared at it in confusion before his eyes found its source. The figure of a young man, dressed in armor and bearing a sword. Zhao smiled. Perhaps this night wouldn’t be a complete failure after all.

 

“So you’ve come for revenge, have you?” He said, his tone mocking.

 

Sokka said nothing. In an eyeblink, he had drawn and tossed his boomerang. It connected with the side of Laluk’s head and the waterbender slumped motionless to the ground. Hahn rushed to his father and tried to wake him.

 

“Sergeant,” Zhao ordered lazily. “Bring him to me.”

 

The sergeant obeyed immediately. His men followed. The squadron charged Sokka, closing the distance quickly, but when they caught sight of his eyes they faltered.

 

Where before there had been eyes as blue as the sea, was now only an unnatural, unclean, and broken darkness. As if twin holes had been bored in the world, and night had filled the space with shadow. The space before them was dim, the colors muted.

 

The sergeant stepped forward, uncertain, and his action drew Sokka’s gaze. He met the man’s eyes. The sergeant felt the talon of fear take him. He turned on his heel and fled. When they saw their leader flee, the soldier fled with him.

 

Sokka and Zhao eyed each other. Zhao sneered. “Cowards, all of them.”

 

He took a firebending stance and Sokka charged him. They exchanged blows, and in moments it was over. Sokka’s sword flashed left, then right, and then left again. Zhao fell to his knees, his arms bloody and imobile. Sokka placed the tip of his sword on Zhao’s neck, but paused.

 

Perhaps he should take him prisoner? He might have some information on the Fire Nation. Maybe there were more spies. Perhaps Arnook would like to deal with this man personally. Sokka thought he would enjoy ending him, had he not been wrapped in the void. As it was, Sokka had cast aside emotion.

 

Maybe he should take it up again, if just one last time. It would be… enjoyable. Yes, that was it. He knew he would not leave it unless he chose to, so much had his mastery progressed. It was a long way from when he had fallen from the trance under Azula’s scrutiny. Now he could….

 

Sokka took a slow breath. He let the world fall into place around him once more. His arm began to tremble. His lip curled in hate. He started to think that this wasn’t his best idea, but he wouldn’t go back now.

 

“You…!” He snarled. He pulled back his sword and kicked Zhao in the chest, breaking the breastplate and sending the man across the ice.

 

“You took her from me!” He roared.

 

Zhao groaned and sat up. His arms dangled uselessly at his side, for Sokka had been sure to hit as many chi points as he could. The Admiral tried to stand, but without the use of his arms his attempt was fruitless. He sat against the building he had slid into and glared at Sokka in fury.

 

“Yes, and if I could, I’d do it again. I wasn’t aiming for her of course, the foolish girl sacrificed herself. But had I known what she meant to you, I would have done it slower.”

 

Sokka screamed in wrath and charged him. He ran past Hahn and Laluk, who was only now getting to his feet. He would plunge his sword into Zhao’s heart, and bring the traitors to Arnook. He could see the glint of fear in his enemy's eye, surrounded by hate and fury. Sokka raised his sword, waiting just long enough for Zhao to comprehend what was about to happen.

 

The spear in his back was unexpected. It was… cold. 

 

Sokka turned his head slowly. It was Hahn, of course. Sokka had forgotten him and his father both. He should never have left the void, he thought, for had he stayed he wouldn’t have made any misstep. 

 

He still lived. It wasn’t a mortal wound, at least not one that would take him that night. Hahn withdrew the spear, backing away. Sokka looked back at Zhao, and deciding that the man wasn’t likely to go anywhere, he followed the man he had counted as a friend.

 

“You’re weak, Hahn. You know that?” He spat, walking towards him as Hahn backed away, towards the canal.

 

“I’m strong enough to beat you.” Hahn brandished the spear.

 

“No. You know that you cannot win outright, and so you have made up the difference with cruelty and cunning. You allied with the enemy. You snuck them into the city. You tried to kill the Moon Spirit. These are not the actions of a strong man, but of a weak and desperate animal.”

 

Hahn bellowed and stabbed at Sokka, who casually batted the spear aside. When his sword made contact, Hahn’s weapon shattered like glass. Sokka paused for a second in surprise, but took the new development in stride. He brought the point of his sword to Hahn’s chest, and saw that frost had coated the blade. Odd, he thought, but acceptable.

 

“Surrender. Arnook will decide your fate-” he was cut off when a rope of water grasped him. He was lifted bodily from the ground and thrown into the air. He lashed his limbs out wildly, trying to find a way to steady himself. He saw water rushing up to meet him, and he took a breath. In moments he was encased in a sphere of ice.

 

Laluk helped Zhao to his feet. The pair walked towards him, stopping to stand beside Hahn. Zhao looked at him in contempt, being supported by Laluk all the while.

 

“It seems that this is the end for you, whatever you are.” Zhao said, “I’ll be sure to tell your father how you screamed. Azula too. She has quite the crush on you, you know. The idiot.”

 

The three of them walked away, leaving Sokka trapped and unable to move.

 

---

 

Iroh slowed to a walk as he gained sight of his brother’s children. Zuko was doing his best to evade Azula’s fire, but he was losing. His bending had weakened, leaving him vulnerable. As he watched, Azula gained the upper hand and defeated her brother. Zuko fell to the ground, unmoving.

 

He approached them, and came to stand beside Mai and Ty Lee.

 

“General Iroh!” Ty Lee exclaimed, looking at him in surprise. “What happened? We saw the Avatar fly through the city. Where’s…”

 

“Zhao attempted to kill the Moon Spirit. The Princess of the Water Tribe sacrificed herself to save her. They knew we were coming.”

 

“Are they dead?” Mai said bluntly. Iroh shook his head. “A few. Most got away, and Zhao was among them.”

 

“Listen to me now.” He told the pair of them. “Sokka is bound to the Face Stealer. The Avatar has become enraged, and the Moon Spirit has likely merged with Princess Yue. Her sacrifice was enough.”

 

“Why are you telling us?” Mai said, and jabbing a thumb over her shoulder she pointed to Azula. “Azula’s right there.”

 

Iroh let out a breath. “There are things in motion that you do not understand, and more at risk than you can know. I am sorry.”

 

Taking the pair by surprise, Iroh lashed out and knocked them unconscious. Hearing the commotion, Azula turned. She saw what he had done, but she didn’t comprehend.

 

“Uncle? What…” Her brow furrowed as Iroh approached.

 

“I am sorry, my niece, but there is more at risk than you know.” He said.

 

“But, I’ve caught him! Father will see, he’ll know! He won’t-” She stopped speaking as realization dawned on her.

 

“So it comes to this then, does it? I was a fool, I should have seen it coming. I should have seen through your lies!” She snarled, and blasted fire at her uncle. Iroh dispersed the fire easily and incapacitated her. She fell to the ground, gasping for air. 

 

She heard running footsteps, and then Iroh spoke.

 

“There is no need for fighting, I only wish to get my nephew to safety. The siege has failed, and we are all in danger. Let us go back to the boats, where you can rejoin the fleet. There has been enough violence this day. Besides, Prince Zuko and I can hardly drag all five of you back ourselves.”

 

Tahno nodded slowly, but the Ensign looked ready for battle. 

 

“We cannot take him, Temma. He’s too strong. The best we can hope for is to help these three out of here.”

 

Iroh walked to Zuko and helped him to his feet. Zuko came to Azula’s side. Rolling her to lay on her back, he began to tie her hands. Azula felt her eyes begin to sting. She had failed. The siege had failed. She had come to trust her uncle and had been betrayed. Now her brother was tying her to take her prisoner. She had no one. Nowhere to go. She was alone.

 

A loud thump filled the night, and Azula stared at her brother and uncle.

 

“Do not tie her up! What are you doing?!” Iroh said, his hand poised to smack the top of Zuko’s head once more.

 

“Uncle!” Zuko shouted in anger. “She’s dangerous, we can’t-!”

 

“I will not see my niece bound!” Iroh said firmly. “I will carry her.”

 

Iroh knelt and picked her up. He maneuvered her carefully so that she rested on his back. He turned and Azula saw that Mai and Ty Lee were being carried by Zuko and Tahno. Ensign Temma was to take point, she guessed. They soon had turned back along the path they had come, and made steady progress out of the city.

 

“I am sorry, Princess Azula.” Uncle said, “ I hope that in time you will understand, and that one day you will forgive me.”

 

Azula refused to make a sound, and she did not cry. No, regardless of the wetness on her face, she denied the existence of her tears.

 

---

 

Katara propelled herself down the canal with her waterbending. She moved like a hurricane, following the moonbeam at blinding speed. It led her left, down a water way, under a bridge, and finally left again. It fell over a sphere of ice, inside of which she could see her brother.

 

She let the waterspout falter and touched down beside him. In seconds she had him free, and he gasped and coughed. He rubbed his eyes and they looked normal, if a touch red. Blood seeped from his back, pouring slowly as if it was reluctant to leave.

 

“Sokka!” She hugged him, "Thank goodness, you’re-”

 

“They got away.” He said. “Zhao. Laluk. Hahn. They’re gone, but we can still catch them. If we hurry, then we can stop them!”

 

“No, you’re bleeding, I have to heal you!”

 

“It’s not deep! Katara, are you coming or not?”

 

“I- fine. But you’re not leaving my side, not until I know you’ll be okay.”

 

“Good enough, let's-” Sokka paused mid sentence when he spotted the head of Hahns spear. He picked it up, and saw how wherever his blood had touched the blade it was stained black.

 

“Do you know which way they went?” Katara asked. Sokka tossed the spearhead into the canal.

 

“I can smell them.” He rose to his feet and began to run.

 

The siblings raced down the street, Katara using the power of her bending to keep pace with her brother. following the scent that Zhao had left behind. They raced through the night, and arrived at the battle field.

 

It was a scene from Katara’s nightmares. Aang stood in the middle of it, the Fire Nation all around him. They shot arrows, they shot fire, yet nothing found its mark. Aang raised a hand and a column of ice shot tanks into the air. Men rushed him with spears and were blasted away by wind. A signal horn blew, and the Fire Nation began to flee towards their ships.

 

“NO!” Sokka screamed, pointing a hand towards three figures on the prow of a receding ship. He moved like the wind, separating himself from Katara as he wove through the fight. He ducked, dodged, deflected, and still his progress to the remains of the gate was inhuman.

 

“ZHAO!” He roared, watching as the ship moved further out to sea. Admiral Zhao stood on the deck of his ship, staring in astonishment at Sokka. Whatever this thing was, it had escaped its prison and nearly got to him again. Zhao turned and walked below deck.

 

“Signal the fleet to resume the barrage as soon as we’re out to sea. I want all infrastructure in range destroyed. We will level their city and plant our fag on the ruble.” He ordered the first junior officer he came across. “And send word to the Fire Lord. General Iroh has betrayed us!”

 

“What of Princess Azula?” Asked the lieutenant, Zhao grit his teeth. 

 

“Send a convoy to the infiltration point. She has likely returned to the steamers.”

Katara stood beside her brother as he watched Zhao slip away. She put a hand on his shoulder.

 

“Sokka…” Was all she could say. So much had happened in what? An hour? The whole world had changed.

 

Aang roared his fury above them, startling the two. He raised his arms and a massive wall of water formed across the ruined gate and froze instantly, repairing all the damage. He slowly descended to the ground and landed beside them. He left the Avatar State and sagged. Katara caught him before he could fall.

 

His wrath had been exhausted, and all that remained was tears and despair. He righted himself and looked at Sokka. “I’m sorry. If I hadn’t stopped you, then Zhao wouldn’t have-”

 

“I don’t blame you, Aang.” Sokka said, succumbing to his grief once more. “He told me this would happen. The Face Stealer, I mean. Koh. He said my strength was insufficient, and that she would die. I put the power aside. I chose not to use it. I let her…”" He took a shuddering breath and continued, “I neglected my duty, and these are the consequences. I’ll never see her again.”

 

“What do you mean, who’s the Face Stealer? What duty?” Aang asked, completely drained.

 

“That's the real name. Koh: The Face Stealer. He needed a champion to fight those corrupted by Vaatu, and I agreed. Now one of his has taken her from me.”

 

“Sokka!” Katara said, breaking them from their conversation. “Yue, she’s-”

 

She was interrupted when the bombardment resumed. The Fire Nation wasn’t aiming for the gate anymore, but the city itself now. Buildings, bridges, anything they could reach. Aang groaned and fell to his knees. Sokka growled and took hold of his boomerang, which he had recovered after Katara had saved him.

 

Waterbenders tried to intercept the projectiles, but there were too many of them. Aang got to his feet, ready to resume fighting for as long as he could, but something stopped him. A concentrated circle of moonlight enveloped him, and he re-entered the Avatar State. He lifted into the air and faced the Fire Navy.

 

Above and behind him, a beautiful woman appeared in glowing white. She smiled down at the Avatar, and Aang raised his hands in front of him. A massive wave flowed from the gate, pushing the Fire navy out to sea. Yue raised her hands and an even greater wave followed the first, pushing them out farther still. Some ships sank outright, others were damaged, or capsized. 

 

Yue spoke, and all who fell under the light of the moon could hear her words.

 

“I am Yue. The moon has taken me into her own, and we will not allow you to harm our people any longer. Leave this place, and never return.”

 

The remaining ships sent out lifeboats to look for survivors, but they had already been pushed miles out to sea. Yue and Aang descend from the sky. Katara caught Aang, and Yue levitated before Sokka. She gave him a sad smile.

 

“You have a long and happy life ahead of you. I can see it.”

 

He reached out to her, and they kissed one last time.

 

“I will always be with you,” Yue said, and she faded away.

 

---

 

A week later, Sokka sat on the Glacial Gate, alone. There had been a funeral for those who had given their lives in the city’s defense. Arnook had given a solemn speech, and Pakku had given one of his own. Ignick had survived, and the total casualties were fewer than he had originally expected.

 

They would be returning to the Earth Kingdom the next day. The world still went on, and it wouldn’t wait for them. It wouldn’t wait for him. He hadn’t eaten much, or slept. He closed off Koh's power, but only until there was trouble. He had practiced opening the gate, and could call forth the mantle instantaneously. He did so now.

 

He laid Moonlight across his knees. He drew out the blackened knife he had taken from those bandit’s so long ago, and opened a small cut on his arm. He dipped a finger into the viscous blood, and wrote a word on the blade of his sword. When finished, the word was burned black where he had written:

 

悔

 

Regret

Sokka cleaned the blade and sheathed it. He reached for the void, and entering it he decided that he would not leave until the passing of time had dulled the sharp edges of his grief.

The End of Part One

 

Regret

 

Alternative Titles:

 

The First Son

Or

The Moon

 

---

 

Author's Note:

 

Well, that's that for Part One. Part Two:  Conviction is still being written, but once AO3 gets caught up to what I have on FFN I'll update this at the same time. I'm working on chapter 28, so this will likely be caught up soon.

If the Moon Spirit bit in this chapter seemed off, I do apologize. Her being the moon is important later on. I didn't want it to seem like "Oh, all this stuff is different but that still happened." So I tried to put in some foreshadowing in the previous chapter, see Iroh's explanation over spirit bonds in the last chapter.

I had a few goals for Part One, and i do hope that I managed to reach them.

First, I wanted to get Zuko on the good side more quickly, so for a plotline I'm working on.

Second, I wanted to flesh out the Sokka/Yue relationship, so that it would feel real. I wanted her sacrifice to be more impactful, and hopefully emotionally devastating.

Third, I wanted to humanize Azula. In the show she was too villainous until the tail end of season three, at which point we got to see some of her struggles.

 

Anyway, the last thing I had to say is really a question for anyone who bothered to read this note (You're awesome) Is there any particular scene or line of diologue/narration that stood out to you? I'd like to know what is most well received, so that I can continue to write similarly.

 

CharLamagne_OR_WHATEVER

Chapter 23: Interlude One

 

Interludes One

 

Jet. Hakoda. Song. Ozai.

 

I

Jet

 

Jet walked down the side road with Longshot and Smellerbee. They had traveled south since the disaster at Gaipan. He had disbanded his Freedom Fighters, coming to realize that his mission was futile. He had abandoned his purpose in pursuit of revenge, and nearly killed hundreds of innocent people. Just like the Fire Nation.

 

Now he, Longshot, and Smellerbee had come to the southern end of the Fire Nation controlled lands. They would sneak past the front, and head up the river hundreds of miles to Ba Sing Se, and make a new life for themselves. He would leave the war behind, and try to move on. Dwelling on it, he doubted that his parents would want him to spend his life seeking vengeance. He would find a better way to honor their memory.

 

They stopped at a food stand for lunch. He had divided the accumulated money from all of the raids he had led equally among the Freedom Fighters, and they had more than enough to get them to the impenetrable city. A hot meal upon occasion wouldn’t hurt, it might help even.

 

“So what are we going to do in Ba Sing Se?” Smellerbee asked. Longshot shrugged.

 

“You could train people with that bow of yours.” Smellerbee suggested. Long Shot cocked his head, evidently considering the option.

 

“You know, that’s not a bad idea.” Jet put in. “We could train people in defense, and help them find jobs guarding caravans or something. I’ll teach swords, Longshot archery, and you grappling. Or whatever your martial art is called. What was it? The art of folding clothes that men are wearing?”

 

Smellerbee scoffed. “No, but it might as well be! It’s called Jiu Jitsu. Your name is pretty accurate, though.”

 

Jet nodded and returned to his noodles. Longshot wore a small smile at the conversation, and continued eating. Smellerbee excused herself and went to find a bathroom. The two boys maintained a healthy silence, sitting on low stools near the food stand. The sound of running footsteps reached them and Smellerbee reapered.

 

“Jet! Longshot! Look at this!” She shoved a wanted poster in their faces. He took it and was shocked to see Lee’s image on the paper. The man who had saved Gaipan, and stopped him from becoming a monster. Only, it seemed that his name was not actually Lee. No, if this wanted poster was to be believed, he was Zuko: son of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai. A traitor to the throne and believed to be in league with… No, not possible. He knew that man, he wasn’t. He couldn’t be…

 

Jet handed the poster to Longshot. He stared into the middle distance. If it was true… then perhaps the Fire Nation wasn’t as bad as he thought.

 

 

---

 

II

Hakoda

 

Waves crashed against the prow of his ship. They had departed from the southern Water Tribe not more than a few weeks ago, as he had allowed his men time with their families. It was long overdue, he understood that. The time he allowed them had greatly improved morale, and the men were more eager to return to the war. Now that the Avatar had returned, they believed that the Fire Nation would be soon defeated. Hakoda was inclined to agree.

 

Now they sailed along the eastern coast of the Earth Kingdom, heading back to the rivers around Ba Sing Se. He would remain there, and a convoy of warriors and shipwrights were to continue on towards the northern Water Tribe. His son would be wed at midsummer, and he had agreed to return home to bring his mother along to witness the ceremony. Apparently, she had once been engaged to Master Pakku, and wanted to see him again after so many years. Gross.

 

One of his youngest warriors hailed him as he approached. “Chief Hakoda, we’ve received a message from the Sea Wolf!”

 

Hakoda turned his eyes on him. He did not like that his darling daughter had been given a moniker by the Fire Nation. “Please refer to her as Katara, Heka.”

 

“Right, sorry. Sir.” He flushed in embarrassment, this had happened before, and he gave Hakoda the scroll. The High Chief unraveled it and began to read.

 

Dear Dad,

 

So much has happened in the last few days, and I do not know if you have heard any of it. For all I know, this could be the first message you’ve received.

 

The Fire Nation laid siege to Agna Qel’a.

 

Hakoda’s heart stopped when he read this, and his eyes grew wide in fear. He shook his head and read on.

 

The Fighting only lasted a few days, but so much has changed and the world feels like a darker place for it. 

 

I should start at the beginning. Sokka and Yue were the first to realize that they were coming, for the Fire Navy had a spy who told them of our sentries and how to avoid them. By the time we realized they were coming, it was too late to evacuate civilians and send for reinforcements. Aang and I volunteered to try and incapacitate as many ships as we could, (I passed the mastery test for my bending, by the way. But it doesn’t seem important anymore.) and we took out dozens of them, but there were hundreds.

 

Sokka was part of the war council and planned a large part of the defense. Sadly, it was no use. The spy, or rather spies, were part of the council and leaked our plans to Admiral Zhao. Sokka was the one to figure out that we had traitors in our midst, but it was already too late. Laluk and Hahn were the turncoats. Hahn was someone that Sokka counted as a friend, and his betrayal was… bad. Not as bad as what came after. For everyone, but Sokka most of all.

 

Laluk convinced Arnook to send Hahn on a mission to kill Admiral Zhao, and they used that mission to secret them armor and clothing to use in an infiltration. I won’t tell you where, just in case the message is intercepted, but Zhao discovered the location of the Moon Spirit’s mortal form. He planned to infiltrate the city and kill the spirit.

 

He almost succeeded, but Prince Zuko and his uncle seem to have realized the truth about the war, and switched sides. Zuko warned us and we were able to mount a defense of the spirits, but even so we nearly lost. Zhao generated a bolt of lightning and tried to kill the Moon, but Princess Yue sacrificed herself and took the bolt instead.

 

General Iroh turned on Zhao and single handedly defeated the Fire Nation, sending them running. I heard Sokka scream for me to help, but I arrived too late and Yue… She’s not here anymore, at least not in the way she was.

 

She was blessed by the Moon Spirit when she was a newborn, and her sacrifice was strong enough that Tui took her into her own and they merged, and now exist as one. It’s… well, it’s better than her dying.

 

Sokka has been taking it hard. They were in love, and he blames himself for her leaving. Aang does too, but Sokka’s in worse shape. He doesn’t eat, or sleep. He hasn’t spoken since Yue and Aang drove out the Fire Navy. 

 

I don’t know what to do, I don’t know how to help him.

 

I just thought that you should know. We’re leaving for Omashu soon, and from there we’ll have to plan our next move.

 

I miss you, and I hope we’ll meet again one day soon.

 

Love, Katara.

 

Hakoda let out a slow breath. He rolled up the message and stowed it inside his armor. He put his hands on the gunnel and stared out over the waves. He knew too well his son’s pain, and he had hoped that Sokka would not have to experience it as he had. 

 

His children had fought in a vicious battle that had cost them dearly. They were headed to Omashu? Perhaps he could send a message there, asking that they visit him while the Avatar trained. It would do them good to be together again. And he knew one thing for certain: his son needed him.

 

 

---

 

III

Song

 

Song untethered Sugar Foot from the cart. Lee had left her with them, and Song had promised to take good care of the animal. Lee had told her that he hoped that she would be of good use, and a helpful friend. So far, the ostrich-horse had been. She was incredibly affectionate, and strong. Their own animal, Tim Sun, was a bit cranky as a general rule. He didn’t enjoy pulling the cart into the port town, but Sugar Foot had no problem with it. Her mother had gone to the port to buy some things for her,  and Sugar Foot had gotten there in a single day.

 

The bird missed her owner though, and Song found that she had missed him too. They had spent a fair amount of time together, before he had to leave and meet his uncle. She had been delighted to discover that, after he warmed up to you, Lee was kind and considerate. He was a good man, and she hoped that they would meet again one day.

 

“Song…” Her mother, Ran, said, holding a rolled up piece of paper. She glanced around nervously, before stepping closer. “You remember Lee, don’t you?” She whispered.

 

Song was surprised. “Of course I do, why?”

 

Her mother gave her the paper and told her to read, which she did. The paper had a picture of Lee on it. A wanted poster. Her eyes widened and she read the bounty.

 

By order of the Fire Nation, the man known as Prince Zuko: son of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai, is to be arrested and brought to the nearest military installation.

 

He has been labeled a traitor by the Fire Lord, and is suspected to have joined forces with the Avatar. He bears partial responsibility for the defeat at the north pole.

 

Any information on his whereabouts should be sent directly to Princess Azula of the Fire Nation.

 

Song read it again. And then a third time. She looked at her mother, who bore a grim expression.

 

“Do you think it’s true?” Song asked, and her mother shrugged.

 

“I don’t know, he seemed like such a nice young man. It’s hard to believe that he could be…”

 

“I think he might have joined the Avatar.” Song said, “He never told me about who he was, but he said that he had met the Avatar. He seemed to hate the war, so maybe…”

 

“I hope it’s true.” Ran said, “it would be good for the world if the next Fire Lord was someone like him.”

 

 

---

 

IV

Ozai

 

“Fully one quarter of the navy present at the north pole was lost. Fortunately, casualties were low, and most of that loss is in terms of ships and equipment.” General Inu said to the other members of the war council.

 

War Minister Qin spoke next. “The reports say that the Avatar has mastered waterbending, and that the Moon Spirit took part in the battle personally.  I suggest we withdraw from the north, and wait until the comet arrives to destroy the Water Tribe.”

 

Ozai nodded. “A wise course of action, minister. I think that would be best, and we should focus our efforts on the Earth Kingdom. The Water Tribe does not have the might to pose a serious threat to us, at least not on their own.”

 

“Tell me, General Tao, how goes the siege of Omashu?”

 

“It goes well, Fire Lord.” He stood and bowed to Ozai. “The Mad King surrendered outright.”

 

Ozai nodded. “Good, if surprising.”

 

A messenger entered the War Chamber, and bowed deeply to the Fire Lord. “Two messages have arrived for the Fire Lord. One from Admiral Zhao, and the other from Prince Zuko.”

 

Ozai waved the man over impatiently and took the messages. He opened Zhao’s message and read it. His brow furrowed.

 

“It appears that my brother has betrayed us, and stopped Zhao from capturing the Avatar, the First Son, and… Well, at least he managed to kill the Princess of the northern tribe.”

 

The assembled officers of the Fire Nation murmured amongst themselves at the revelation. Ozai's brow creased in fury, and he dismissed the meeting. He sat alone and fumed, reading and re reading the message. Iroh had betrayed them, and Azula had turned out to be a failure. She had taken her uncle into her confidence, and failed to see his schemes. 

 

His daughter had failed him three times. She had let the Avatar escape, she had failed to take Zuko prisoner, and she had failed in the siege of the north. Bah! 

 

Perhaps Iroh had compromised her. If he had been influencing her, then perhaps she had meant for the siege to fail. He closed the message from Zhao and looked at the one from Zuko. He considered burning it, but thought better of it. It would be entertaining to read Zuko pleading for mercy, and trying to explain his miserable failure of a life. He opened the message and read.

 

Fire Lord Ozai.

 

At your hand, I have suffered greatly. You banished and burned me for speaking out of turn, at the age of thirteen. You sentenced me to a life spent chasing a ghost, and for that I am grateful.

 

I have seen the world, and know now that this war is pointless and fraught with folly.

 

I have learned the truth, and suffering has been my teacher. You are unfit to be Fire Lord.

 

I know that Aang will defeat you, and cast you down from your throne of fear and lies. I hope that you will one day learn the truth as well, Ozai.

 

Prince Zuko, son of Ursa.

 

Ozai crushed the message and threw it to the ground. The insolence, the disrespect, the sheer..! He lashed out and burned the message. He grit his teeth and decided that banishment was far too merciful. He should have killed his son.

 

Chapter 24: Resolve

Part Two

 

Conviction

 

Chapter Twenty Four

 

Resolve

 

She was running. Zuko was ahead of her, laughing. She laughed too, and the pair of them burst into Azula’s room and slammed the door.

 

“Where can we hide? She’s coming!” Azula said, and Zuko scratched his head.

 

“It’s your room. You pick.”

 

Azula thought of a hiding spot. Full of pride for her ingenious plan, she took her brother by the hand and they dove under the bed. They laid there, trying to pant quietly. The door opened and their mother came in.

 

“Hmm,” Ursa said, looking in the drawers of Azula’s dresser. “Where could they be hiding? Are they in here? Azuuulaaa! Zukooo!”

 

Azula clamped her hands over her mouth as she tried not to giggle. Zuko put a finger to his lips, silently warning her.

 

“Are they under the covers? You won’t get away from me!” Ursa jumped on the bed, pretending to search for her children. She knew where they were, as two pairs of little feet were sticking out from under the bed. They had played this game before. She tried to alternate between which of her children she captured first, so that they wouldn’t get jealous. It was Zuko’s turn today.

 

“I guess they’re not here! They must have gotten away!” She said, sighing dramatically. She flopped on the bed for effect. She heard the sound of barely suppressed giggles, and she snatched Zuko out from under the bed by his ankles.

 

He screeched, and laughing he yelled, “Run, Azula! She got me!”

 

Azula didn’t need to be told twice, “I'm on it, Zuzu!”

 

Ursa suppressed a laugh of her own. Even at five years old, Azula was so serious, always determined to be the best. Ursa pinched Zuko’s nose between her first two knuckles, saying “Love you.”

 

She readied herself over the side of the mattress and waited. Merely a second had passed when Azula army-crawled out from under the bed. She started to run, but Ursa grabbed her by the seat of her pants. She lifted her and warped the struggling child in a hug. Zuko tried to get away, but his mother kept him pinned with a leg. She tickled Azula, making her squeal with laughter.

 

Ursa took Azula’s nose and pinched it between the knuckles of her first two fingers, shaking her daughter’s head side to side and pulling gently. “I love you, Azula.”

 

---

 

Azula’s eyes snapped open. Her face crinkled in anger. Lies, she thought, all of it. Her mother and her uncle both. Iroh had merely been deceiving her, gaining her trust just to double cross her and help Zuko. He knew his business well, the clever old man. The best performance required truth, and so he had given her genuine advice. The worst part of it was that she missed him.

 

Her uncle had helped her in many ways. He had consoled her of her fears, and helped her with her relationship with Mai and Ty Lee. Twice he had begged her to remember that he loved her, but that was the worst part. He had known just where to push, and at the right moment he had betrayed her. For Zuko. Her brother.

 

Her brother, who had always hated her. Always. No matter what she did, he had never been interested in being friendly with her. She had tried to win his affection when they were small, and for a time it seemed that he cared, but all of that changed. She wasn’t sure why. Perhaps he was jealous that their father tutored her personally. Father had always held her to the highest standards, even with how she was to treat Zuko and the palace staff.

 

Now she had failed her father thrice. He would take his new bride, and produce new heirs. She would be cast to the wayside, and her uncle knew that and he had turned on her anyway. Perhaps it wasn’t too late. If she could capture them, and the Avatar, then she could still prove her worth. She could still…

 

Azula got out of bed and readied herself for the day. She would meet with the Admiral, and his Water tribe spies. They would plan their next moves, and Azula would interrogate them about the Avatar and Sok- ugh, not again- the First Son’s plans. She grit her teeth.

 

Walking down the corridor, she headed towards her uncle’s cabin. As of yet, it had been untouched. She had decided to search it, in hopes of finding anything that would reveal information about where he and Zuko would go. For all she knew, they had returned to the Water Tribe after taking that steamer. She doubted it though. Why would they sail away, just to come back? It didn't make sense, so she doubted it to be the case.

 

She came to the door, and the guards stationed there saluted her. She bade them to be at ease and stepped inside the room. It was the same as she remembered, and that did nothing to ease her sour mood. She started with the closet, rifling through its contents for any scrolls or maps. She found none, and turned her attention to the dresser. The first drawer she opened contained his… underpants. She closed that one immediately. She would make Tahno search through it, if she found nothing elsewhere in the room. The firebender was posted right outside, after all.

 

There was nothing in the dresser, aside from a single Pai Sho tile in a bag. She pocketed it absently, making a mental note to look into its significance later on. She turned her attention to the foot locker, and began to search through it. Immediately upon opening it, she found a bound scroll bearing her name. She sat on the bed and began to read.

 

Azula,

 

If you are reading this, then it seems the worst has happened. I am truly sorry that it has come to this. I know that the revelation will have hurt you, but there is no other way. There are things in motion that cannot be undone, and you do not understand them.

 

By the time you find this, I will have rejoined your brother and the siege will have failed. I know that you won’t be able to forgive me, and I can't expect that of you. I will, however, try and explain as best I can.

 

The hundred years war is an act of folly. It has hurt the Fire Nation in countless ways. Hundreds of thousands of men and women have been sent to their death, even by my own command. I did not see the error of it until I lost my own son, Lu Ten.

 

Our people have, in great number, gone hungry, for much of our resources go to the war effort.

The sons and and daughters of our nation are oppressed, and brought into war against their will. Countless other atrocities have been committed for the foolish notion that our war is meant to share our greatness with the world. The Air Nomads were destroyed, not in honest combat, but by ambush. How can we share our greatness with the world, if there is only the Fire Nation?

 

My brother banished Zuko, as you know. What you likely don’t know is that the reason Zuko spoke out of turn was to object to the sacrifice of the forty first division. It was composed entirely of new recruits, and despite Zuko’s objection they were used as bait. None survived. Two thousand, seven hundred and fifty lives lost for nothing. Brave men and women from all across our archipelago, lost in the greatest defeat in the war.

 

My only goal now is for the war to be ended, and for peace to reign once more. I hope that you may one day understand why I have done this, and I am so, so sorry for hurting you. Sometimes we have to do things that we hate, to fulfill our duty.

 

In my dresser you will find a Pai Sho tile. I want you to have it, and it’s more important than you realize. I know that our armies have taken Omashu, and should you visit there on your travels, speak with King Bumi. Show him the tile, and tell him that I asked you to speak with him.

 

It is likely hard to believe, but remember this: I love you, my niece, and I always will.

 

-Uncle

 

Azula hissed out a breath in anger. More lies. Her brother hadn’t objected to anything, he just insulted a general. There had been no forty first division, she was sure of that. She would even look at the records, for she was certain it was just another manipulation. She rolled the scroll and stowed it with her armor. She decided to keep it and the tile both, to throw them in her uncle’s face when she took him prisoner.

 

---

 

“We’ll leave in a few hours, so I guess we’ll just… wait then.” Aang said, looking at Sokka. Sokka didn’t respond, staring into the middle distance.

 

Katara frowned, but this had become the norm in the week since Yue’s leaving. Sokka had barely eaten, or slept. He had pulled himself into the void, that mental state of that guru, and wasn’t willing to come out. She exchanged a look with Aang. He bore a sadness around his eyes that hadn’t been there before, a guilt that ate at him.

 

Turning her head to Sokka, she could tell that he had taken on the mantle again. It was there, the shadow flickering just out of sight. She wouldn’t ask him to put it aside, not after…

 

“I’ll be back soon.” She said, excusing herself from the room.

 

She walked to the Spirit Oasis. She had been searching in vain for anything on the Face Stealer, but the Grand Tribal Library didn’t have any information on him. It had hardly anything on any of the spirits, aside from Tui, La, and Agni. Agni was the Sun Spirit, and brother of Tui. odd, that the brother of the moon would let his people try and destroy hers.

 

Katara walked into the Oasis, and knelt beside the pool. She didn’t know what else to do, and so she had come to plead with the Moon Spirit. Perhaps Yue could help Sokka, or maybe Tui. She didn’t know.

 

“I-” She stopped. She hadn’t thought about what she was going to say. “My brother needs help. He made a deal, and now Koh has him. I don’t know what to do, and he’s hurt too much to do anything himself! Please, he’s my brother; I can't lose him! I won’t let the Face Stealer keep him! Help me find a way.”

 

She waited. Time trudged past, and no answer came. She waited for an hour, occasionally asking again. The Koi didn’t do anything, they just continued in their eternal dance. After a while, Katara thought that she would get no answer from the spirits, and she would have to look through the libraries of Omashu. She stood and turned to go, but when she stepped foot on the bridge, a deep and watery voice spoke behind.

 

“Are you certain in your resolve?”

 

Katara jumped in surprise, whipping around to face the speaker. She was shocked, for where she had knelt beside the pool lounged a huge man, made entirely of water. She stared in wonder at the sight, and the water-man spoke again.

 

“Well? Will you hold to your conviction, or will you falter? If you lose the will for even a moment, then you will fail. Sokka will be lost to you forever.”

 

“I am.” Katara swallowed, “Uh, are you..?”

 

The water-man nodded. “I am La, the Ocean Spirit.”

 

“Will you help me, then?” She asked him.

 

“I will tell you where to find the knowledge you seek.” La answered.

 

“W-where?” She stumbled over the word. She was speaking to the Ocean Spirit , this was Avatar stuff. Had she been in the spirit world, then she wouldn't have been so phased, but speaking to the Ocean was not something she had ever expected. Sure, she had spoken to Yue, but she and Yue had been friends before the…  Moon Incident.

 

“The secret is kept by Wan Shi Tong, he who knows ten thousand things. He does not share knowledge freely, and thus requires knowledge in return.”

 

“What kind of knowledge?” Katara inquired, apprehensive. La tilted his head to one side, as if considering the thought. It was hard to gauge his expression, for he had only the vague outline of a face.

 

“Worthwhile knowledge, I suppose. The definition of worthwhile depends on The Owl, though.”

 

“I… Thanks.” Katara bowed to the Ocean Spirit. When she stood straight again, he was gone.”

 

She stood in the oasis, not far from the spot where her friend had died. Yue had left the world of the living, and now existed as the Moon Spirit. She had lost a friend, and she would not lose her brother too. She took a deep breath, and was resolved in her conviction. She would find a way to save Sokka, whatever the cost may be.

 

---

 

Zuko punched out, firebending with all his might. It was pitiful. He tried again, and then for a third time. He ignited a pair of fire daggers, but they looked more like fire letter openers. He tried his breath of fire, which was more of a heated exhalation. He groaned. He looked towards his uncle, who stroked his beard in consideration. His hair was down, as he had cut his top not when they took their steamer out to sea.

 

“It seems that your source has changed, Prince Zuko.” Iroh said.

 

“What?” The Prince was confused. Wasn’t the source in firebending the breath? Air became energy, and the bender pushed that energy out through his limbs, creating fire. That was what his uncle had always told him, and what he had read. Even in the theories he had read concerning combustion bending, the key to the art was in the breathing technique. He had tried to master that himself, but without a demonstration of some kind, it was beyond him. He had heard of an assassin who used the art, but he had never encountered him. He was banished before he could track the man down.

 

“For many years, you have used your negative emotions to fuel your fire. Now that you have realized the error of the Fire Lord’s ways, you seem to have lost the hate that powered your bending.”

 

The scarred man frowned. He looked out over the ocean as they traveled southward. He had let go of his hate, and that was what had weakened his bending. He didn’t feel as angry, and he thought that was a good thing. But if it would keep him from bending…

 

“It’s good that I refused their offer then, if my firebending is gone.” he mumbled to himself. His uncle heard him, though.

 

“What offer?” Iroh asked, curious.

 

“Aang and them asked me to join them. To become his firebending teacher.” Zuko said in response.

 

Iroh’s eyes widened slightly. His nephew had… Ah, why did Zuko make so many poor choices?

 

“Why did you refuse?” He asked. Zuko turned to him in surprise.

 

“It’s… I can’t. I can’t work against the Fire Nation. Even if I know the war is wrong, they’re still my people.”

 

Iroh nodded sagely. His nephew just wasn’t ready yet, but in time he would be. He was sure of it. The problem now was to help his nephew regain his firebending prowess. He could venture into the philosophical elements of firebending, but Zuko had never much cared for philosophy. He needed hands-on instruction, a demonstration, to learn properly.

 

“Returning to the subject of your bending…” Iroh began slowly. “I believe I know of some masters who could help.”

 

“Really?” Zuko said, surprised. “Couldn’t you? You’re one of the best firebenders alive.”

 

“Perhaps I could, but these two are the ones who taught me.” Iroh answered. Zuko’s face fell.

 

“Well, that means they’re in the Fire Nation. Not exactly an option right now.”

 

“They’re not in the Fire Nation. Close, I admit, but not quite.” Iroh spoke and brought out a map. He spread it open on the crate that they had been using as a table for the past week. He placed a finger on the map, pointing to a seemingly innocuous place in the middle of the ocean.

 

“I believe that this is our present location.” He drew a line to a small island not far from the western Air Temple. “This is the isle of the ancient Sun Warriors. The masters reside within the ruins.”

 

Zuko nodded. The island was outside of Fire Nation territory, strictly speaking. Traveling so close to home would be dangerous, but it was still a possible destination. Perhaps they could decide on their next moves while he studied under the masters.

 

“How long until we reach the island?” He asked. Iroh stroked his beard again, thinking.

 

“If the weather holds, then we should be able to make the voyage in a week's time or so.”

 

“Alright, Uncle. We should sleep in shifts, then. That way we won’t lose time, or get lost.”

 

Iroh nodded, and changed the ships heading to travel southwest. Zuko remained where he was, staring out over the rolling waves. He thought about the future. If he regained his bending, then perhaps he should join the Avatar, if only to ensure that his people weren’t treated unfairly. They would need an advocate, wouldn’t they?

 

Zuko would sit the throne one day, he was sure of that. Aang would depose his father, and the war would end. He thought that his uncle would take over, for the throne should have gone to him after Azulon’s passing. But in the meantime, wouldn’t it be best for the Fire Nation if someone could speak on their behalf? Even if Zuko didn’t ally with the Avatar outright, then he should at least begin a friendship with him; Wouldn’t it be better for the future Fire Lord to have a good working relationship with the bridge between worlds? It was possible that his people would reject him for that, but he felt that he had to do it anyway.

 

It was at that moment that Zuko chose his path, even if he did not realize it. He was filled with an unbreaking resolve to restore the honor of his country, even should it cost him the world.

-

 

Katara sat against the mast. The ship had set out from Agna Qel’a a few hours ago, and now all they had to do was wait. She considered what La had told her. The secrets were kept by Wan Shi Tong. Wan. Shi. Tong. She had heard that name before, but where? Perhaps it had been while she was reading in the library?

 

Library. That struck a chord. The Spirit Library! She could look into whoever the spirit was when they got there! And since they were going there anyway, it wouldn’t take anytime out of their journey to help Aang! It was perfect.

 

Aang… She was saddened when she thought of him. He had been withdrawn lately, not as bad as Sokka, but still sad. Far more than she had ever seen him. Maybe he would want to talk about it? She decided to go to him and try and cheer him up.

 

He didn’t take long to find, as he was laying across Appa’s tail. Momo was curled up in his lap. The Avatar was lost in thought, and his eyes were grim.

 

“Hey, Aang.” Katara said, clasping a hand around her elbow. Aang glanced over to her and forced a smile.

 

“Hey Katara,” he said, “Did you find anything that could help Sokka?”

 

“I found a lead, but that’s not what I wanted to talk to you about.”

 

“Oh, what did you want to talk about?”

 

“Are you okay?”

 

Aang looked away, turning his head to face the sky. He shrugged. “I’ve just been thinking, I guess.”

 

Katara sat beside him. Momo jumped into her lap. She scratched his head for a moment and pressed on. “Do you want to talk about it?”

 

A sigh was Aang's initial response. After a few seconds he began to speak. “I saved Zhao. I saved him because the monks taught me that all life is sacred. But by sparing Zhao, so many more people were killed. Fire Nation and Water Tribe, in a pointless battle. Yue sacrificed herself, because I wasn’t willing to do my duty as the Avatar.”

 

“No, Aang, you can’t blame yourself, you didn’t know! It’s not your fault.” Katara said.

 

“It is my fault! And even now I don’t know if I can do my duty! I am the last Air Nomad, and if I don’t carry on the traditions and beliefs of my people, then they’ll truly be gone. But how can I do that, if as the Avatar I might have to…” He stopped speaking, and dragged a hand down his face.

 

“I have an obligation to the world, and an obligation to carry on the traditions of my people. If I can’t do that, then there will be no true Air Nomads left. But if I don’t fulfill my role as the Avatar, then who knows how many people will suffer?”

 

Katara thought about his words. She had no idea what to say. She decided to go with her gut. Taking his hand, she spoke. “Aang, you’re strong, and smart. I know it’s a hard decision, and you’re going to struggle with it for a long time.”

 

Aang closed his eyes tightly, but he squeezed her hand in return. “I don't know what the answer is, I wish I did, but I know that you’ll alway do your best, and choose what you think is right.”

 

“You think so?” he asked softly.

 

“I do, and no matter what, remember that I’ll stand with you.” She said, scooting  closer to lay down beside him.

 

“Thank’s, Katara,” Aang said. “That means a lot.”

 

The pair of them remained there for a few hours, enjoying each other's company in a comfortable silence. The sun set, and the pair laid next to each other and fell asleep.

 

---

 

“I have been recalled to the capital by the Fire Lord.” Admiral Zhao said, lowering the scroll.

 

“I see.” Azula said evenly. “Give my father my regards.”

 

“Of course, Princess.” The Admiral said, dipping his head in respect.

 

Hahn and Laluk sat there awkwardly, not sure what they were to be doing. Now that their cover had been blown, they had no choice but to leave the Water Tribe, and would have to rely on Zhao for their livelihood.

 

Azula tapped her nails on the table, watching the two spies. She could see from their body language that they were unsure of what to do. Hahn glanced sideways at his father, giving way to how lost he was in that moment. She decided to begin her questioning of them now.

 

“Hahn. You were in the First Son’s confidence, before you stabbed him in the back, both figuratively and literally.” She was careful not to use his name. “Has the oaf told you where they would be going?”

 

Hahn stiffened. He didn’t know; it was obvious. “Uh, no, Princess. They had only just begun to plan when the invasion began.”

 

“So you failed in your mission. Can’t say that I’m surprised, given…” She looked him up and down and her lip curled in distaste. She despised betrayers, now more than ever. This one in particular, though she wasn’t sure why. Hahn paled and averted his eyes.

 

“Is there anything of use that you can tell me?” She said in a scathing tone.

 

“Uh… He has a magic sword?” Hahn proffered.  Azula scoffed.

 

“A. Magic. Sword.” She enunciated the words with derision.

 

“I-it was blessed by the Moon Spirit! It leaves a trail of moonlight in its wake!” He stammered. Azula rolled her eyes. She turned to the Admiral.

 

“What do you intend to do with them? Drop them off on an island somewhere to fend for themselves?”

 

Zhao smiled, and seemed to consider the idea. “Sadly not, I’m afraid. They will be returning with me to the Fire Nation.”

 

Azula nodded, glad that she wouldn’t have to endure their company. Turning to Laluk, she asked, “What about you? Do you have any information about the Avatar’s plans?”

 

Laluk nodded. “I had the opportunity to search through Arnook’s communications. The Avatar and company will be heading to Omashu, where he will begin his earthbender training.”

 

Azula paused, thinking. Omashu was under their control, and what was more, her uncle had mentioned the city’s king in his letter. She could arrive there first, and set a trap for the Avatar. Yes, that could work. And after she captured him, she knew of a bounty hunter who could track a man anywhere across the world. She could arrange for the woman to meet her there, and then they could pursue her uncle and brother.

 

She decided on her course of action, and was resolved in her mission to capture her brother, uncle, and the Avatar. She would prove her worth, and show her father that he could keep her by his side, that he didn’t need to cast her away.

 

The rest of the meeting was rather dull, just a question of logistics. Zhao would be returning to the capital, and the remains of the fleet would be dispersed around the Earth Kingdom and Fire Nation. Damaged ships would go for repairs. That sort of thing. After the meeting ended, Azula went to search for her friends.

 

She found them in her cabin, waiting for her. She hadn’t sent for them to go there, but she was glad to see them. She entered the room and Ty Lee leapt off the bed, as if hoping that Azula wouldn’t see that she had been laying across it. Mai rolled her eyes from her seat at the desk.

 

“Azula! We were looking all over for you!” Ty Lee said

 

“I’m sorry, I was in a meeting with the Admiral, I forgot to mention.” Azula responded.

 

Ty Lee’s mouth fell open in shock, and Mai’s eyes narrowed. Azula looked between them in confusion. “What?”

 

“You… apologized.” Ty Lee said in wonder. “You’ve never apologized to us before!”

 

Azula rolled her eyes and sat down on her footlocker. Hadn’t she? Looking back, she couldn’t remember having done so… She thought that she ought to take more consideration for her friends in the future. Now that Iroh had betrayed her, they were all she had left. She decided not to dignify Ty Lee with a response. Evidently, this was enough to tip off Mai that something was amiss.

 

“What’s wrong?” The gloomy girl said. Ty Lee closed her eyes and breathed deeply for a second before opening them again. Azula looked at her, and saw sorrow flit across Ty Lee’s face. She raised an eyebrow, and then shrugged.

 

“I don’t know what you’re talking about.” She decided to deny any feelings caused by Iroh’s betrayal, or her own failings.

 

“Really? That doesn’t sound true.” Mai said, and Ty Lee agreed.

 

“And since when have you been an expert on my emotional wellbeing?” Snapped the Princess.

 

“Oh, I don’t know, maybe since we met when we were four? Ten years has been enough time to get to know you, if you hadn’t noticed.”

 

Ty Lee nodded and cut in with her opinion. “I see it too, you’re sad. Hurting, even.”

 

“And what makes you think that?” Azula said. Mai responded by counting on her fingers.

 

“You’ve barely eaten. You just apologized, and for something when you didn’t even need to. Your uncle double crossed you. Zuko and the Avatar got away.”

 

Azula hunched in her seat. “Alright, so what if I am? We still have a mission to complete.”

 

“You can’t keep it all bottled up inside! It’s not good for you.” Ty Lee said. She touched her forehead and continued. “I can see it hurting you, like a stormcloud over the ocean. It’s not helping to keep it locked up.”

 

She considered Ty Lee’s words. Mai’s too. Her uncle had told her to trust her friends, and even though he had betrayed her, he had given genuine advice. She had taken it before, and the three of them had grown closer. She decided to confide in them a little.

 

“Father’s getting married. He’s going to wed someone, I don’t even know her name, at the end of summer.”

 

“Is that what’s bothering you? Why?” Ty Lee asked, tilting her head. Mai didn’t say anything.

 

“I… I’ve failed him three times. When the Avatar and Sokka escaped from the Ilah colony, and then again when I failed to capture Zuko at the shrine. Now with the siege… If he banished Zuko for speaking out of turn, what would he do to me? I-” Azula clenched her jaw. “I’m afraid that he’s decided that I'm no longer useful, and that he wants to make a new heir. If I can’t capture the Avatar, my brother, as well as Uncle.”

 

Her friends were silent.

 

“I told Uncle all of this, and he betrayed me anyway. He still chose Zuko…” She trailed off, a lump in her throat. Her uncle had chosen Zuko, and abandoned her just as her mother had. At least Iroh had said goodbye. Now Azula would have to fight twice as hard, but she still had her friends at least.

 

She was surprised when Mai got up. She sat beside Azual and wrapped an arm around her. Azula swallowed and let her friend comfort her. Ty Lee sat on the other side and hugged her too.

 

“It’ll be okay, Azula. We’ll capture them, and take them back to the Fire Lord.” Ty Lee said. They broke apart. Azula wasn’t much of a hugger as a rule, and while she appreciated it in the moment, it had gone on long enough.

 

“Yes. I know where the Avatar is heading. And I have a plan to track down my brother and uncle. You should be excited, Mai. We’re going to visit your parents in Omashu.”

 

Mai sighed. “Wow. I can hardly contain my joy.”

 

---

 

Author's Note:

Perhaps I put to many notes in. Anyway, the next two chapters are not particularly exciting. They're laying the groundwork for elements that come into play later in the Saga, and chapter twenty six is mostly to build up for chapters twenty seven and twenty eight. That said, I did rather enjoy writing the Team Azula plotline in chapter twenty five. 

Chapter 25: Friends Left Behind

Aang tied the reins to Appa’s horns. His dear friend grumbled, to which the Avatar replied, “I know, I know. You don’t like spending so much time at sea. We’ll be airborne before you know it.”

 

Appa groaned, and Aang took it to mean that he understood. He lifted the saddle to Appa’s back with his bening, and stood inside of it. Sokka threw up their packs and supplies, while Katara spoke with Pakku and the other Water Tribesmen. Master Pakku gave her a small chest, and a vial of some kind. Aang guessed that it contained water, or maybe perfume?

 

A slight movement from Sokka’s direction drew his attention. He turned his head just in time to see the warrior sprint a dozen feet and leap into the air. He sailed through the space between the ground and the saddle gracefully, and landed softly. Aang was impressed.

 

“That was… pretty cool.” He said, looking his friend in the eye. Sokka tilted his head at him curiously. Aang couldn’t see anything behind Sokka’s eyes, as if looking at a painting of a man, rather than his friend. A shiver ran down his spine, but the nomad suppressed it. He decided to try and speak to Sokka again, hoping to get a response this time. “Are you feeling any better?”

 

His voice trailed off as he spoke, realizing that it sounded as if he had asked if Sokka was sick, rather than grieving. Sokka only shrugged in response before sitting down at the back of the saddle. He took out his boomerang and gazed at the inscription. He had taken to doing that of late. They had been at sea for a week, and it had been two since Yue… left. Sokka still had not spoken. He had eaten, finally, but only after Pakku had told him it wasn’t a matter of hunger; It was about not starving to death. Sokka had simply nodded and taken his meals, letting his silence carry his grief.

 

Aang still bore his own grief, and guilt. Katara had helped him with it, and it didn’t weigh on him as heavily. He wasn’t sure if Sokka would be able to move on, wrapped in the void as he was. In truth, Aang had no idea if the emptiness had any effect on the emotion attached to the fact. He had never entered it himself, and he didn’t really know that much about it. He understood that the passage of time would dull the sharp edges of cutting memory, but did you have to feel them for them to dull? Must you blunt the edges on the tender fingers of your heart? It very well may be that you must let the pain run its course to overcome the sorrow. Or it could be that time and distance alone were enough.

 

He was moved from his internal monologue when Katara climbed up beside him.

 

“Master Pakku said that he’ll be going to the south pole. Arnook and he want to help defend our tribe.” Katara recounted.

 

“That’s good,” Aang said. He glanced at Sokka, who didn't react to the news. He returned his attention to Katara. “What did Master Pakku give you?”

 

“Oh, just some waterbending scrolls, and water from the Spirit Oasis.” She said in answer.

 

The three of them flew through the sky for a number of hours. Aang and Katara chatted amicably, occasionally trying to get Sokka to join in. He didn’t seem to be particularly interested in the conversation, although it was rather inane. Perhaps if they spoke of their plans, he would cut in on the conversation. Dwelling in the absolute detachment of the void, it didn’t seem that Sokka felt the need for communication unless absolutely necessary. He would nod, shake his head, or shrug, but he did not show the need for audible speech. Had Aang or Katara gained access to his internal monologue, they would have known that he simply didn’t think that anything they asked him warranted a spoken response. Their questions seemed unimportant, and slightly irrational. He could not feel the emotion behind the words, and it was nearly as if he had forgotten them altogether; all that he allowed himself was the cold steal of reason.

 

Aang was questioning Katara about the naval practices of the southern Water Tribe. Apparently, Chief Hakoda took the watch incredibly seriously. He held that the task was one of the most important when at sea. It was this strict adherence to the duties of a maritime sentry that allowed him to sail through contested waters so efficiently. The sailor on watch could see the smoke of a Fire Navy ship from miles off, as long as he did his duty, and woe onto any under Hakoda’s command who shirked it.

 

Eventually, they arrived at the Earth Kingdom fortress under the command of General Fong. They were greeted by the General personally, as well as by an unexpected friend.

 

“Haru!” The Avatar exclaimed, delighted to see the young earthbender.

 

“Hey Aang!” replied Haru. He waved to Sokka, who merely looked at him calmly. Haru frowned, but was still glad to see his friends. Katara climbed off of Appa and gave the young man a hug.

 

“Nice mustache.” she said, and Haru smiled in pride. Katara’s brow furrowed in curiosity, and she asked, “What are you doing here?” 

 

“I’ve joined up with the army. I’m just a messenger, though. My parents said they’d only allow it if I didn’t join the infantry. Dad said I’m not old enough.” Haru explained.

 

“What made you want to do that?” Aang asked. Haru turned to the young airbender, and when he saw the impatient body language of the general, he said, “Uh, we can talk about that later.” 

 

“Greetings, Avatar Aang. I am General Fong.” The general said, now that the airbender was noticing him. Aang and Katara bowed to the general. Sokka remained in the saddle. A fact that did not go unnoticed by the general, who frowned in his direction.

 

Noticing this, Katara explained her brother’s actions. “Please excuse my brother. His betrothed, Princess Yue, did not survive the siege at the north pole. He’s taken it pretty hard, we all have.”

 

Fong glanced between the siblings, and realized their resemblance to a certain man.

 

“I see. I’m sorry for your loss, Lady Katara, First Son. I have met Chief Hakoda and worked with him on a few occasions, and I hope you will give him my regards when next you meet.”

 

Katara stared in surprise, not having realized that the general had met with her father.

 

“Oh, uh, yes, of course. You can call me Katara though, we don’t really use titles in the southern Water Tribe. It’s just the chiefs and their heirs, with a few exceptions.”

 

“Anyway,” Aang cut in, “Will we be leaving for Omashu soon? I need to master the elements as quickly as possible.”

 

“I have a matter I wish to discuss with you, and that may change your plans. At the very least, should you accept my idea, they would be delayed.” Fong said.

 

Aang was curious, and he allowed the general to lead him away to his office. Office was a loose term, for the man worked at the top level of the fortress, taking up the entire top floor of the building. He, Katara, and Sokka stood before the ornate desk that the general worked at. Fong explained his idea of trying to learn how to trigger the Avatar state purposefully. A tempting idea, very tempting.

 

When in the Avatar State, Aang was a force of nature. If he could master it, then he might not have to wait until hastering earth and fire. He could in theory go directly to the Fire Lord and… end the war. He looked over to Katara and met her eyes, she didn't seem to know if they should. He looked over to Sokka, and when he met the man’s empty gaze, Sokka nodded.

 

“Yes,” He said with a bow. “I think we should try.”

 

---

 

Iroh watched his nephew climb the stairs that led to the masters. He sat with the sun warriors, who had graciously agreed to allow Zuko meet with the dragons Ran and Shao. The warrior chief sat beside him, and spoke.

 

“It is good to see you after so long, old friend. I am surprised that you would take your nephew with you to this island, and allow the masters to judge him.”

 

“I am confident that he will prevail, and the masters will deem him worthy. Prince Zuko has grown much in the past months, and has seen the error in his father’s ways.” Iroh replied without taking his eyes from Zuko. The young man in question knelt on the top of the stairs, holding part of the everburning flame aloft. For a moment nothing happened, and then the dragons burst out of their caves and Zuko let loose a surprisingly high pitched squeal of surprise. The two dragons flew around him, and then unleashed a powerful gout of colorful fire.

 

It was over nearly as soon as it began, and when the dragons were gone, Zuko stood alone. He stared into the sky. Eventually, the prince walked down the steps and returned to his uncle. Iroh watched him curiously, and waited for the young man to speak.

 

“Fire… it’s life, it’s a gift from Agni himself, it the power of the sun. Did you realize…” His brow furrowed and he whipped his head around to face Iroh. “Why didn’t you tell me they were dragons?!”

 

The chief of the Sun Warriors stepped in to answer his question, “Iroh took a vow of secrecy, he could not reveal to any the identity of the masters, for their own protection.”

 

Zuko nodded. He understood, as dragons had been hunted to near extinction. “I’ll keep the secret too, then. It wouldn’t be safe for them.”

 

The chief nodded, and the royals bid farewell as they returned to their small ship. 

 

“What do you plan to do now, Prince Zuko?” Iroh asked. Zuko shrugged, staring into the distance over the open ocean. He had a few ideas, but he wasn’t ready to commit to them yet. He supposed that until he decided, they had better go into hiding in the Earth Kingdom. A smile tugged at the corner of his mouth when he thought of revisiting a friend he had left behind.

 

“I can’t say for sure. But for now, there’s a friend waiting for me in the east.”

 

---

 

She was tired of all the bowing and scraping, Mai’s family was evidently hoping to gain her fathers favor through Azula. What more favor he could grant them was a mystery, as Mai’s father had already been named governor. Still, she had to admit, it was nice to be off of a ship. She had spent a little over two months traveling with the Admiral, and she was glad to be on solid ground, even if she had to deal with the nobles vying for favor. It wasn’t that hard, actually.

 

They had only gotten to Omashu that day, and Mai had begrudgingly allowed her mother to inquire of their adventures. When learning of their involvement with the siege, despite the fact that they had barely been involved, she became fraught with worry. Azula thought that Mai was a touch surprised by the development.

 

She had sent for June, a bounty hunter of some renown. She was said to be able to track anyone anywhere, so long as she was provided with a sample of their scent. Azula had the letter Iroh had written her, and she assumed that it would be proficient.

 

Azula considered speaking with the mad King Bumi, but decided it would be best to wait to know for certain that Iroh had lied about the forty first division. If the King was in on whatever plot her uncle had concocted, she wanted to be sure of the facts beforehand. If she could verify that the two had coordinated their stories, and that they were lies, it could indicate a larger organization. So, she had to learn the facts, and then interrogate the King.

 

“Governor Ukano,” Azula addressed Mai’s father, “Tell me, what records of past military operations do you possess here?”

 

Ukano started, not having expected such a question. “Uh, we have records regarding several operations having taken place in the past few years.”

 

“Do you have anything concerning the forty first division?”

 

Ukano tensed, and his eyes darkened. Azula took his reaction in, and was surprised at his dismay. She decided to press the issue. “Well? I do not have all day.”

 

“Uh… no, not records so much, but I was present at the, uh, incident. Has the Fire Lord sent you to look into the battle?”

 

Azula was surprised to hear that the Governor was involved, but she didn’t show it. She shook her head, but narrowed her eyes. It wouldn’t be prudent to let the man think he didn’t have to answer her.

 

“My reasons for investigating that subject are not for public knowledge. I assume that you can tell me what I wish to know?” She asked, her tone scathing. Ty Lee watched her curiously, but didn’t say anything. Neither of her friends knew of Iroh’s letter, and she wasn’t sure of sharing it with them.

 

“What do you wish to know, Princess?” Ukano asked nervously.

 

“The level of experience of the soldiers in that division, the goal of the operation, and the outcome of the battle to start.” She said, inspecting her nails for dirt idly as she spoke. She lounged in the former King’s throne and waited for the Governor to answer her questions. The man in question swallowed dryly, and glanced around the room. Seeing nobody who could help him out of his predicament, he was left with no choice to comply.

 

“Well,” He started out with a shaking voice, “The forty first was composed of-” He stopped speaking and swallowed again. “N-new recruits. They were used to distract the battalion of Earth Kingdom forces, and the operation was- the battle was lost. Our veteran forces were overtaken by a second battalion that had been unknown to us. We the experienced soldiers were able to escape, but none of the forty first were able to- the division was lost.”

 

Azula whipped her head in the Governor’s direction, her eyes scathing.

 

“And what was the purpose of the battle? What objective was being pursued? She demanded. Ukano seemed to shrink in his frame and grow smaller under heer unforgiving stare.

 

“I- I do not know, I was not given that information. I was not in charge of the force involved, I was under the command of General Zon, who perished in the battle. As far as those under his command were aware, the only objective was to kill as many Earth Kingdom soldiers and burn as many fields as possible. The only major settlement in the area was Ba Sing Se, and as you know that city has been beyond us, even if the war has been in our favor for the last two decades.”

 

Ty Lee gasped and covered her mouth when she heard of the nature of the mission, but Azula ignored her. She glanced over at Mai, who appeared not to have reacted, save for the lines formed at the corners of her eyes. Azula showed no outside reaction to the news, but she was internally shocked at this alleged proof of Iroh’s veracity.

 

“Do you know who approved of the operation?” She asked, dreading the answer.

 

“Fire Lord Ozai, though it was suggested by General Zon.” 

 

“When did it take place? Was it before my brother's banishment?” Azula asked, her throat tight with the expectation of an answer that she did not want to hear. Mai glanced between Azula and her father.

 

“It was just a week after the banishment, it was said that Prince Zuko was present at the meeting.”

 

"How many soldiers were lost?"

 

"Uh.." Ukano said as he muttered the number. Princess Azula stared at him as she took in his answer.

 

Azula closed her eyes and nodded. “That will be all, Governor.”

 

She stood from her seat, and her friend followed suit. The trio descended the city, and Azula didn’t share the destination with her friends. She led them up and towards the statue of her father that was being built, and to the place where the old earthbender was being kept prisoner.  She ordered a soldier standing guard to lower King Bumi so that she might speak with him. 

 

The king laughed and snorted as he was lowered in his iron coffin, descending and rotating at the same time. By the time he was low enough for Azula to speak with him, he was facing the opposite direction. A pair of firebenders spun the prison so that he faced toward her. Azula eyed the two benders, and ordered them to leave her alone with the prisoner.

 

“What do you know of this?” She asked, showing him the tile Iroh had left her. Bumi immediately stopped laughing and stared at her.

“It’s a Pai Sho tile, it’s used in…” The King began to ramble on about the history of Pai Sho, and the various strategies that the lotus tile was used in. Azula stared in disbelief, and cut of the king.

 

“I know what Pai Sho is, believe it or not. If this is all you have to offer, then I don’t know why my uncle said to speak with you.” She began to turn her back for the king when Ty Lee spoke.

 

“Iroh told you to talk to this guy? When?” Ty Lee asked. Azula rolled her eyes.

 

“He left a letter for me to find, along with the tile. It said that the reason Zuko was banished in the first place was because he spoke out against the plan to sacrifice the forty first division. That and Iroh’s opinions on the war. “ She started to walk away, but Bumi spoke again.

 

“Iroh sent you? Iroh of the Fire Nation?” Bumi asked.

 

“What other Iroh’s would I know?” Azula snapped, walking to the ancient man again.

 

“Iroh of the Water Tribe, Iroh the bandit, Iroh the cave hermit, Iroh the thatcher, or Iroh the turtle-duck.” He listed, glancing up and away as if trying to remember all of the Iroh’s he knew off. Azula stared at him in astonishment. The man was mad after all.

 

“It was Iroh of the Fire Nation.” Ty Lee answered his question. “Do you know him?”

 

“We met at a Pai Sho tournament a few years ago. We got to talking because I saw that he looked much like Fire Lord Sozin did when I saw him, but that was over a hundred years ago.”

 

Azula raised an eyebrow. “How old are you, and why would my uncle want me to speak with you? And when did you see Fire Lord Sozin?”

 

“I think I’m around one hundred and eleven years old, but you lose track after sixty four. Aang was about a year older than me when we first met, and he was frozen at twelve the year the war started, so I think I’m a hundred and eleven.” The bizarre man cackled with laughter at his rambling thoughts.

 

“I met Sozin when I was, oh around ten I think. My father, King Bumo, was sent by the Earth King as a diplomat. It didn’t go well, and we had to cut the trip short. The war started around that time, you see.”

 

“Yes, I am aware of the timeline of the hundred years war, thank you. You still have not explained why my uncle asked me to speak with you.”

 

“Well, to be honest I’m not sure. He never mentioned you in any of his letters, but they stopped coming a few months ago. I assume it was to tell you of the world before the war, if anything. I’d offer you some rock candy, but I'm indisposed at the moment!” He chortled again, though none of the Fire Nation girls present could tell what was so funny.

 

“And what, if anything, was so interesting about the world before the war that he thought I might want to know?”

 

The old King thought about her words. He scrunched his nose in consideration.

 

“Well, a century ago, everyone loved the Fire Nation. We all read your books, watched your plays, and the wealthiest among us purchased your silks and fashions at the time. The ingenuity of you people was prized the world over, and many of our brightest minds would study at the Capital University.”

 

Azula frowned. Capital University? She had never read or heard anything about that.

 

“That all changed though, after Sozin ordered the Air Nomads to be extinguished.” His eyes grew sad at the memory. His next words were spoken softly, and in a small voice. “I lost many kind and noble friends that day, and for a century I thought Aang was among them.”

 

“Everyone hates the Fire Nation now, no matter where you go. Some few of us remember the time before, but there are probably less than fifty of us left who are old enough to remember. Soon enough the Avatar will defeat the Fire Lord, and then we will have… well, if not peace, then at least an armistice.”

 

Azula raised an eyebrow. “You think the Avatar will defeat us so easily?”

 

Bumi fixed her with a serious gaze for the first time. “Yes.”

 

“It’s sad that I have to be the one to break it to you, but the boy’s no serious threat.” She said, but even as the words left her mouth, she could remember the look of fear and awe on her brother's face when he saw the Avatar flying across the north pole.

 

---

 

Aang bowed his head before the general. He had just told the man that he didn’t think he could trigger the Avatar State on purpose, and now the general in question bowed his head for a moment. Sokka stood silently at one side with Haru, and Katara had elected to stay in their room.

 

“Are you sure about this?” General Fong asked. Aang nodded, and then said, “I am. I can only enter the Avatar State when I’m genuinely in danger.”

 

“I see.” Fong said. He stood abruptly, and nodded at his soldiers. Fong blasted his stone desk at the Avatar, forcing the airbender to fly across the room and out the opposite wall. The earthbending general rushed himself to the opening through his bending, and ordered his men to attack the Avatar, before jumping to the parade ground below.

 

When the general nodded to his soldiers, they moved towards Sokka. They attempted to restrain him, but he slipped out of their grasp like an eel. They lashed out to trap him with bending, but he dodged their attacks. He put a hand on the pommel of the sword on his hip before leveling his empty gaze on them. The pair glanced at each other, and then stepped towards him. Haru moved to stand beside Sokka, but the young warrior shook his head, causing him to stop.

 

The earthbenders raised stones from the floor, but before they could begin their attack something about Sokka changed. His eyes were concealed by darkness, and his shadow stretched across the floor. The pair of soldiers paused, looking at each other with trepidation. The older of the two lifted a fist to strike, but the young Water Tribesman drew his sword. The pair could see a single word burned into the silver-blue metal with the deepest black: Regret.

 

“Agh! My back!” Cried out one of the pair, fainting injury and collapsing to the ground. The other leapt at the chance to avoid a battle with the seriously creepy swordsman, and desperately feigned first aid. Sokka sheathed Moonlight and rolled his eyes. He sprinted to the stairs after motioning for Haru to stay put.

 

When he eventually made it down to the parade grounds, he saw the general attempting to trap Katara underground. Aang was pleading with the man, and Sokka sprinted towards him.

 

General Fong twisted his fist, and the Avatar's waterbender friend was pulled underground. She would be fine, of course, he had no desire to make an enemy of Aang or Hakoda. Even so, the performance was exquisite. The Avatar shed tears, and then suddenly the wind began to howl. Stones blew away and the boy began to glow.

 

The brief sense of accomplishment gave way to fear as the Avatar turned his terrible gaze on Fong. The general had never been a coward, but in the face of this force of nature, of the sheer power and fury of the Avatar, he realized that he had gotten into more trouble than he could have realized. He turned to flee, forgetting the girl trapped in a cavern beneath the surface.

 

He was stopped in a moment, for a sword was leveled at his throat. The blade was white, no, not white. It was covered in a thin layer of frost, save for one space. A word was burned into the blade with a black so dark it seemed to devour the light. Fong looked down and read a single word: Regret . 

 

He flicked his eyes up to the man holding the sword, and saw it was the girl's brother. Fong could not look away from the man's eyes, they were empty, save for the distant echo of anger; as if war-drums that were heard from far away. He thought the sword was aptly named, for he regretted now that he roused this man to violence.Fong twisted his hand, bringing Katara up from the underground.

 

“She-” Fong coughed as dust entered his lungs, “She’s fine, she was never in danger. It was a trick to trigger the Avatar State.”

 

Sokka eyed him, but sheathed his weapon, and Fong took note of the pale light that traveled in its wake. Sokka turned and helped Katara to her feet. Katara ran to where Aang hovered in the air, and took his hand. The boy lowered to the ground as he left the Avatar State.

 

The three of them denied the need for an escort, and bid farewell to Haru. Sokka’s eyes didn’t leave the general until they were in the air, and Fong would never forget that haunting and empty gaze, or the frozen sword that was lit by the moon.

 

---

 

Admiral Zhao sat back in his office in the Fire Nation capital. He had arrived that morning, and had a rather tense discussion with Ozai. He had explained the siege in its entirety, and done his best to further sow the seeds of Azula’s downfall. He didn't think there would be much more to be done, for it seemed that his cousin had already begun to hold the Princess in low regard.

 

Now he sat before a new man, one with a metal arm and leg.He bore the tattoo of an eye upon his brow, and he had said nothing. Zhao was not certain that the man could speak, and he didn’t care to find out. Placing a sealed envelope and a heavy coin pouch on the desk, he said, “Do give the Princess my regards.”

 

---

 

Author’s Note:

 

I had much trouble writing this chapter. Not very much happened in this update that wasn’t very close to what happened in canon. For that reason, it was not particularly interesting for me to write. I even find it hard to go back and proofread/edit. It might be the weakest chapter I've put out, but that can’t be helped. It contains the seed of elements that come to fruit later in Part Two.

 

I did rather enjoy the Team Azula POV, though.

Chapter 26: An Odd Reunion

Waves lapped at the hull of their battered little steamer. The sea had been calm, but even calm stretches on the open ocean were damaging to a vessel not designed for such voyages. It was only due to the skill and perseverance of the men who sailed it that the ship had made it at all. Zuko and Iroh had been at sea for over three weeks. The distance between the north pole and the isle of the Sun Warriors hadn’t been that great, but combining that with the trip back to Earth Kingdom waters had taken its toll on the vessel.

 

Now the pair of them had arrived a few dozen miles south from the port that Zhao’s fleet had set sail. Zuko and his uncle stood on the shore, and watched as their faithful little boat sank beneath the waves. Zuko eyed Uncle Iroh sideways, for the older man seemed a little upset over their decision to scuttle the steamer.

 

“Uncle? Are you okay?” Zuko asked, turning to face the older man. The first light of dawn broke over the horizon and fell upon the right side of his face. Iroh nodded and shouldered his pack.

 

“Yes, but these old bones of mine are not looking forward to the walking we have ahead of us. Or rather they are, but they’re not happy about it.”

 

A snort was his only reply, rolling his eyes at his uncle. Zuko wasn’t entirely sure if it was a joke or a serious complaint, so he decided it was both.

 

“It won’t be too far.” Zuko said. He shouldered his own pack and walked into the woods. They were near a town that Zuko had passed through on his travels through the Earth Kingdom. It wasn’t technically in Fire Nation territory, but it wasn’t Earth Kingdom either. It was a sort of neutral ground. It had actually been near the town where he had been thrown from Sugar Foot, and that was the incident that caused him to meet Song.

 

The pair walked quietly though the morning light. Zuko enjoyed the sun at his face, the sea wind blowing at his back. They would go east for a bit, and then turn northwards. He thought they would arrive at their destination in a few hours, as it didn’t take him long to get there the first time he had been near this point. That said, he didn’t have a map of this area, so he wasn't entirely sure of their exact location.

 

“Prince Zuko,” Iroh began, “Have you thought of what you would like to do in the future?”

 

“Honestly,” Zuko replied, “My main goal is to not die or get caught by Azula.”

 

“Aside from that, I mean.” Iroh said.

 

“No.”

Iroh sighed internally. How to broach the subject? He knew that his nephew wanted to join the Avatar, but there was something keeping him from it.

 

“Have you considered the Avatar’s offer?” He asked, looking at Zuko.

 

“Yes.” Was the younger man’s reply.

 

“And?” Iroh prompted.

 

“I…” Zuko began, and then shook his head. “I cannot. How could I, a prince of the Fire Nation, work against my own people? Even though I know that they would need an advocate, I cannot turn against them.”

 

“You would not be turning against them, you would be freeing them from oppression. The Fire Lords of the past century have all labored to keep our people downtrodden, my father and yours included. Should the Avatar overthrow Ozai, who should take his place? An outsider? Perhaps the Earth King would be given dominion over our lands. It would be fitting, I suppose, as our own rulers have been seeking to hold the Earth Kingdom for a century.”

 

Zuko stopped walking, turning to face his uncle. “Wouldn’t you take your rightful place on the throne? It should have gone to you after grandfather Azulon’s passing. Maybe if it had, the war would be over already.”

 

Iroh shook his head. “No, I will never sit atop the dragon throne. The other nations have suffered too much at my hand, and should I take the throne then we will not know true peace. Someone new must take the throne, someone with a pure heart, and unquestionable honor.”

 

Zuko scoffed. “Well, who then? Master Piandao?”

 

Iroh chuckled. “No, but we can worry about that later.”

 

The pair continued walking as the sun rose higher in the sky.

 

“The Avatar needs a firebending teacher.” Zuko said.

 

“That he does.” Iroh responded.

 

“I think it should be you, Uncle.”

 

“No, Prince Zuko. It should be you. It is not my destiny.” 

 

Zuko nodded, in acknowledgement if not agreement. Taking the lead, he said, “We should be there in a few hours.”

 

He thought to himself, and spoke quietly, as if he hadn’t realized he was speaking aloud. “I wonder what my destiny is.”

 

---

 

Katara passed the water back to Aang. He passed it back to her. Sokka stood on a stone in the middle of the river, and practiced his swordsmanship. He still refused to speak.  Katara and Aang began to practice combat forms of waterbending, with Aang surrounding himself with water in the shape of an octopus, using the tentacles to catch the ice projectiles she threw at him.

 

She bowed to her student, and then turned to watch her brother practice his swordplay. Standing on one foot, Sokka swung his sword in crisp movements. Silver-blue steele whistled through the air, and even though it was nearly mid morning, she saw faint traces of light left in its wake. Odd, she thought, hadn’t it only done that at night?

 

“Sokka! Think fast!” Aang shouted as he bent a few icicles towards him. Sokka barely looked his way as he cut the projectiles from the air. He sliced them all in half save one, which he tossed back at Aang after changing its momentum with a quick circular motion. Aang wasn’t able to block the icicle, but he was able to melt it into water before it smacked into his arrow. Katara laughed at the sight.

 

Music broke them from their practicing, well, Katara and Aang. Sokka remained on his rock. The other two travelers wandered towards the sound of the music, and were soon met by a quintet of wandering musicians.

 

“...don’t fall in love with the traveling girl, for she’ll leave you broken, broken hearted!” Sang the lead man, strumming on his lute. A heavy set fellow in a white kimono with pink trim slapped a drum, and a woman played a flute. The two remaining travelers danced around, waving their arms about their heads as if beset by invisible bee-wasps.

 

“Woah, river people. And a sword guy.” Said the lead man, stopping his strumming and looking at the three younger travelers.

 

“We’re not river people.” Katara stated, watching the newcomers curiously. Aang sidled up next to her.

 

“What kind of people are you?” Said the lead man.

 

“We’re just… people.” Aang answered, looking around between his friends and the newcomers.

 

“Aren’t we all, brother!’ The man stated, and his portly companion flopped onto the grass.

 

“I’m Chong, and this is my wife, Lilly. We’re nomads, happy to go wherever the wind takes us!” Said the man, Chong, and he gestured to the flute player, Lily.

 

“Really? That’s great! I’m a nomad!” Aang said, elation filling his eyes. Chong smiled in surprise.

 

“No kidding? So are we!” Chong said.

 

“I know, you just said that.” Aang raised an eyebrow at the luthier. Chong shrugged and smiled.

 

“Uh, anyway, I’m Aang. That’s Katara, and he’s Sokka.” Aang jerked a thumb behind him towards the young warrior, who was still practicing on his rock.

 

“Cool. I’m Chong, and this is my wife, Lily.” Chong said again, and Katara snickered.

 

The nomads seemed content to sit and relax by the water with them, so the two groups shared lunch together. Sokka leapt from his rock to the shore, and Chong seemed impressed by the action. He moved to speak with Sokka, but evidently changed his mind when he saw the emptiness behind Sokka’s eyes. He sidled over to Aang, and said, “That guy’s kinda creepy.”

 

Katara huffed, and looked at her brother. Chong had a point, Sokka had become a little… unsettling. She didn’t think he was using Koh’s shadow, at least not always. Even when he wasn’t, he remained in the void. And that state of emotionless clarity was unnerving, especially if you didn’t know what he was really like. She wondered if she had better ask him to come out of it, and live like a normal person.

 

The nomads were braiding her hair with flowers, and doing the same for Appa. Sokka walked over towards them, and when he caught Katara’s eye, he looked up towards the sun. She didn’t bother following his gaze; she could guess his meaning. He thought it was time to go.

 

She stood, and stretched. She turned to the group at large. “I think we’d better get going. We’ve got to get to Omashu, and Sokka’s getting impatient.”

 

“It sounds like you’ve got a case of destination fever.” Chong said in response.

 

“I wouldn't say that, we’ve just got a schedule to keep. We have to get to Omashu as soon as possible.”

 

“You should focus less on the where, and more on the going!” Lily said, and the other nomads nodded in agreement.

 

“We’ve got to get to King Bumi so he can teach Aang Earthbending.” Katara responded, and then she wondered why she was bothering to argue with them at all.

 

“It sounds like you’re headed to Omashu!” Exclaimed Chong. Katara pinched the bridge of her nose in exasperation.

 

“You know, there’s a story of a secret pass to Omashu, which goes right through the mountains.” Chong said, leaning forward where he sat.

 

“Really?” Aang asked curiously.

 

“Really. There is an old song about it too.” Chong said, and then he stood and started to sing. The song told the story of two lovers, divided by war. They built a path through the mountain, and apparently Chong forgot part of the song, but the gist of it was that there was a secret tunnel.

 

“Thanks,” Aang said, “But Appa hates going underground. We've got to do what makes Appa the most comfortable.”

 

They bid their farewells, and were soon on their way to the mountain city. They

 had not been flying long when their path was interrupted by an incredible bombardment of Fire Nation siege engines. They immediately turned around and returned to the nomads.

 

“Alright, let’s check out that secret tunnel of yours.”

 

---

 

They were sequestered in Mai’s room. It was strange, thought Azula, that Mai would have a room here despite the fact she had never been to the city before. Thinking more of it, would it not be more odd if her parents hadn’t selected a room for her?

 

On the subject of Mai, the girl had grown even more withdrawn than usual since their meeting with the Mad King. Azula suspected that it was directly a result of the revelation of the reason for Zuko’s disastrous Agni Kai with the Fire Lord. Azula rather understood, she too was unsettled by the revelation. Disturbed, even. Zuko had not done anything particularly wrong, other than speaking out of turn, and it was for good reason no less. And he had been disfigured and banished for it. It wasn’t the greatest of mysteries why he would turn against the Fire Lord. 

 

She wondered why she still cared about him, he had never done the same. Even now, when he had turned against the Fire Nation, she still… Azula decided to stop thinking about it. If none of her family loved her, then that was what it was. No use dwelling on what she couldn’t change. She didn’t need them, she still had her father. At least, she hoped she did.

 

For a time, she thought that her uncle cared for her, and the man had managed to weasel his way into her confidence. Then, at her moment of triumph, he had delivered her defeat from the jaws of victory. He had betrayed her, and it weighed more heavily on her then she would like to admit. In the weeks since, she had been… angry. Odd, for her at least. Anger was not usually something that took hold of her. Where before she was cold and rational, save for rare occasions, like when the Sea Wolf had covered her in mud, she carried an ever present anger. It was not something that she liked to have, a weakness she would have to work to quash.

 

“Why are the two of you being so depressing?” Ty Lee asked, breaking the silence that had filled the room. Mai shrugged, and Azula rolled her eyes. Ty Lee crossed her arms and glared at them, a most unusual expression from the girl.

Mai sighed. “I was thinking about Zuko.”

 

“I’m shocked.” Azula deadpanned. Mai rolled her eyes.

 

“I’ve been thinking about him too,” Ty Lee said, but added quickly, “Not like that, though. Just about why he was banished.”

 

Azula nodded, trying not to succumb  to her ever present irritation. “There’s nothing we can do about it. What’s done is done, and he’s made his choices since then.”

 

“Yeah, I know, but…”

 

“But what?” Azula snapped. “Shall we go to the Fire Lord and demand he change the past? Or perhaps ask him to pardon my brother and uncle, I'm sure that will go well. No, we have our mission, and we must follow through, or there will be consequences for all of us. We know what happens to those who displease him.”

 

Mai and Ty Lee shared a look, but it went unnoticed by Azula. She stood up from the chair she was sitting in and stalked towards the door. Her friends followed her, unnerved by her sudden reversion to her past demeanor. She hadn’t been that sharp with them for a few months, and it wasn’t an attitude they were excited to see again.

 

Azula walked out of the governor's mansion, which had previously been the palace of the Mad King. She stood at the top of the stairs in the late morning sun, watching the mountains north of the city. She had positioned sentries on various mountain tops to alert them of the Avatar’s approach, and it seemed that her efforts had paid off. Smoke was drifting from the top of one of the mountains.

 

Azula ordered for their mounts to be readied and the three of them were on their way to face the Avatar. The mountain that sighted the bison was several miles away, but that was not her destination. Several units of the Fire Nation army were stationed around the landscape, and they had orders to send a messenger hawk to her should the Avatar be encountered.

 

Before long, one such message arrived. Azula and her friends arrived at the sight of the battle, if it could be called as much. The commanding officer told them of the encounter, which had consisted of the Avatar flying towards them and almost immediately turning around again.

 

“We believe that their most likely path is through a tunnel that goes underneath the mountains.” The captain said, pointing to a spot on the map not far from where they were presently.

 

“What tunnel is that?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“The, uh,” The Captain flushed, “Cave of Two Lovers.”

 

“Wait, like from the song?” Ty Lee asked for clarification, and the captain nodded. Ty Lee smiled and looked at Azula mischievously.

 

“What are you up to?” Azula asked, her eyes narrowed in suspicion.

 

“Well I am not up to anything.” Ty Lee said as they walked back to their mounts.

 

“The Captain then? If he’s betrayed us-” Azula began, but was interrupted by Mai’s snicker. Azula glared at her now. She was missing something, evidently, but she wasn’t sure what it was.

 

“So… are you excited to see Sokka again?” Ty Lee asked in a tone that was clearly an attempt to sound casual and disinterested.

 

“Why would I be?” Azula asked.

 

“Oh, no reason.” Ty Lee said. “But if it were me, I’d be pretty happy to follow my boyfriend into a secret love cave.”

 

Azula whipped her head around. So that was what they were snickering about. “He is not my boyfriend!’

 

---

“Hey, I just remembered the rest of that song!” Chong said. He jumped ahead of the group and struck a chord. “And die!” 

 

“Okay.” Said Aang, glancing at his friends. Sokka remained as stoic as ever, while Katara merely raised an eyebrow. So it was a cursed hole in the side of the mountain then. Fantastic. So their options were to try and fly through the Fire Nation forces, or go through a tunnel that Chong claimed was cursed, and that the only way through was to trust in love.

 

“Hey! A big campfire!” Said Moku, the portly fellow wearing a kimono. Everyone turned their attention to the smoke the man was pointing at, and Katara corrected him.

 

“That’s no campfire, Moku. The Fire Nation is tracking us.”

 

“Chong,” Aang said, “All we have to do is trust in love?”

 

“That’s correct, Master Arrow-head.” Chong answered. Aang let his eyes fall onto Katara, who was still focused on the smoke. “We can make it.”

 

The group headed into the cave. Before long, they came to a place where the tunnel split into three forks, and Chong chose to light one of his torches, and he handed one to Katara to carry. Had they waited longer, or perhaps taken the first turn, then they wouldn’t have been seen. They would have gotten through the tunnel un-hindered, but as it was, the light of Chong’s torch gave their presence away.

 

An all too familiar crackle filled the air. By the time Aang and Katara noticed it, Sokka was already in motion. He drew his weapon from his hip and intercepted the bolt, though it wasn’t aimed at anyone. The lightning stuck to the sword and he was able to plunge it into the ground, dispelling the electricity.

 

Aang was surprised that the nomads didn’t scream, instead they began to play action music, as if they weren’t in any danger themselves. The same couldn’t be said for Appa, unfortunately. The bison's eyes swiveled madly as fear took him, and he began to charge around, colliding with the walls.

 

Aang tried to calm his animal companion, but had to jump aside when a volley of knives sailed through the air and nearly cut his ear. He unleashed a gust of wind at Mai, but she dodged it, and then Aang had to distance himself from Ty Lee.

 

He took a quick look around the scene, and saw that Mai had turned her attention to Sokka. Sokke blocked each of her knives, the dim light having no effect on him. Katara was locked in combat with Azula, and Aang blasted airbending towards the Fire Nation Princess. Azula dodged, launching herself into the air and coming to land beside Mai, who was still combating Sokka.

 

A stream of water wrapped itself around Mai’s waste, and she was sent flying towards Aang. An action that took him by surprise, for he had no idea that Katara had thrown her to intercept Ty Lee. Ty Lee and Mai collided in the air, and fell to the ground just as the cave began to rumble. The commotion of the fight, combined with Appa crashing into things, had disrupted the stability of the tunnel. Rocks began to fall, and Aang had to move fast. He sent a current of wind that pushed Mai, Ty Lee, and the Nomads into the center tunnel. With another blast of airbending, he sent Sokka and Azula into the left branch of the cave, and he tackled Katra and used his feet to kick out a final effort of bending as they rushed into the branch that Appa had run into. A heartbeat later the tunnel they had been in before collapsed, and they were all plunged into darkness.

 

---

 

Iroh stoked his now ragged beard. He used to keep it trim and short, but now that they were fugitives, he had no choice but to let it go. He and Zuko had been traveling for most of the day, and the morning had changed to mid afternoon, and his nephew had answered few questions about their destination. Iroh was begging to think that perhaps this ‘friend’ waiting for him in the east was a young lady.

 

“So, Prince Zuko,” Iroh began trying to get information out of his nephew. “This friend of yours, is she nice?”

 

Zuko nodded, and Iroh grinned, but then Zuko stiffened and turned to him. “Uncle, I think we should use cover names. I went as Lee before, and I will do so again.”

 

Iroh waved a hand vaguely. “Just call me Uncle, I’m sure that no one will be that curious. And what by chance is the name of this friend of yours?”

 

“S-” Zuko began, but he stopped himself. “Never mind what her name is!”

 

Iroh shrugged and acquiesced, grinning broadly the moment Zuko turned away. So, this girl they were seeing had made enough of an impression on his nephew that he was embarrassed to speak of her. Interesting.

 

The Uncle and Nephew continued walking until the road became a quaint country lane, and not far from them stood a house with a horribly maintained wooden fence. Iroh grimaced at the fence, and then he saw a pretty young woman unsaddling an ostrich-horse. Was this the girl?

 

“There she is,” Zuko said quietly, and then flushed slightly as he realized he had spoken.

 

Iroh tried to conceal his grin. “You go on ahead, I’ll catch up. I need to, uh, stretch.”

 

Zuko looked at him for a moment. Iroh coughed and jerked his head towards the girl. Zuko began walking and the girl noticed them for the first time.

 

“Lee!” She cried out, and ran towards Zuko. He smiled and waved at her awkwardly, and could barely keep his balance when she leapt on him and wrapped her arms around his neck. He had to grab hold of her and spin slightly, as to avoid falling down. When Song kissed him on the cheek, he did lose his balance and fall to the ground. He looked up in time to see his Uncle punch the air in celebration, a move that confused him greatly.

 

“You came back!” Song said, smiling as she stood. She helped Zuko get to his feet. “I missed you, Lee, or should I say Prince Zuko.”

 

Zuko flushed, and sputtered a denial, his voice rising slightly. “No, I’m Lee, and that's my Uncle… uh, Mushi.”

 

Iroh stared at Zuko, affronted. “There’s no use in hiding it, Prince Zuko. She already knows who you are. I, however, do not know this fine young lady’s name. Would you be so kind as to introduce me?”

 

Song didn’t let Zuko respond. “I’m Song. Lee and I met a few months ago, while he was on his way to find you. He stayed with us a few days, and mended our fence.”

 

“Ah, I see. My nephew may not show it, but he missed you as well I believe. We made our way here to meet up with his friend waiting for him, who I believe to be you.”

 

“Really?” Song asked, looking at Zuko hopefully. “You came back just to see me?”

 

Zuko blinked, but nodded his head. In truth, he had only come here to get Sugar Foot. Seeing Song again was just an added bonus. Why his uncle thought that it would be Song was a mystery, but it would be really awkward for him to deny it now.

 

“Well, isn’t that the sweetest thing?” A new voice interrupted them.

 

---

Author’s Note:

 

I hope you have enjoyed this chapter, and I hope that you like what I have in store for you. I am excited to torment Mai as she has to put up with the near magical bond that Ty Lee has with Chong and his nomads.

 

11/28/22

Chapter 27: Spelunking

Their single torch flared to life when Katara struck it against the ground. She started trying to move rocks and boulders desperately. Aang groaned from his spot on the cave floor, and Appa did his best to look embarrassed. Momo chittered at him in rebuke for his loss of composure.

 

“Sokka! We’ve got to save him! And Chong and the rest of the nomads!” She said, shoveling stones aside with one hand. She looked at the massive pile of broken earth and reality set in: there was no saving anyone, if they had gotten trapped in the cave-in, they were dead.

 

“They’re okay, Katara.” Aang placed a hand on her shoulder. “I got everyone clear. Chong, Lily, Miku, Sokka too. Even Azula and her friends; they’re all still alive.”

 

“Oh thank goodness!” Katara threw her arms around him when she heard his reassurances. “But that means that Sokka’s trapped with Azula and her friends!”

 

“Uh, no, not quite. He’s just with Azula, and Mai and Ty Lee are stuck- I mean Mai and Ty Lee are with Chong and the others.” Aang scratched the back of his head, “I didn’t have much time, but it’s the best I could do. We’ll just have to find him in the caves, or wait for him outside of it.”

 

Katara nodded and started walking. Aang and their animal companions followed suit.

 

“How long will that torch last?” He asked, jogging a few steps to catch up with her.

 

“I’m not sure, an hour or two? I didn’t get a chance to ask before Azula attacked us. How did she even find us here?” Katara asked, not really expecting an answer. Aang furrowed his brow, thinking about the question. How had she found them? They had run into that Fire Nation battalion, but why would she have been with them? And so far south, almost at Omashu.

 

“Hahn!” Aang spat when the realization dawned on him. “He must’ve known somehow, or maybe his dad. Laluk was part of Arnook’s inner council, so he might have known where we were headed. They probably told Azula, and Zhao too.”

 

Katara stopped walking and he nearly bumped into her. She turned on her heel with her eyes wide. “Do you think they’re attacking Omashu?

 

Aang’s breath caught in his chest, and he imagined the city of his friend, the last surviving friend of childhood, under siege or even occupation by the Fire Nation. He put his head in his hands. “Oh no, Bumi! What if something’s happened to him, what if he’s-”

 

He couldn’t finish the thought. He shook his head and kept walking, and his mind was filled with memories of all those who had lived entire lifetimes while he had been frozen. Katara kept pace with him, and they walked in an anxious silence. They continued on for a long while, before she broke the silence.

 

“What if they can’t get out?”

 

“What?” Aang asked, jared from his thoughts of his long dead friends, who to him had been children mere months ago.

 

“Sokka, and the nomads. Azula and them too, I guess. Mai and Ty Lee.”

 

“Oh, I didn’t even think of that!” He said, and truthfully the idea hadn’t even crossed his mind. “I can’t earthbend yet, how would I be able to look for them?!”

 

“Maybe we can get some earthbenders from Omashu?” Katara suggested.

 

“Unless it’s been conquered by the Fire Lord!”

 

“We can’t say that it has! And why would the Fire Lord go to Omashu personally?”

 

Aang paused, “Alright, we don’t know that it has, and he probably wouldn’t go personally.” He took a deep breath to calm himself. “We can wait for Sokka for an hour or two, and if he’s not out by then we’ll go for help.”

 

Katara agreed with him, and they continued walking.  Aang was tugging at his ears anxiously while he considered the fate of Omashu, and Sokka. They hadn’t made it another hundred yards when Katara stopped again. “They don’t have a torch! They’ll just be wandering around in the dark!”

 

“What? You mean Sokka? He can see in the dark, remember? And even if he doesn’t use his spirit powers, Azula’s a firebender. She can create light for them.”

 

“That doesn’t make me feel better!” Katara exclaimed, and she looked anxiously behind them towards the cave-in. “My brother’s trapped with Azula, the evil firebending mad-woman! What if she kills him?! We’ll never see him again, Koh owns his soul now!”

 

“She’s not going to- what? Koh has what?”

 

Katara looked at him, and then quickly looked away. “I guess you had already left when he told us.”

 

“Told you what?” Aang asked, as an entirely new kind of fear began to form in his chest. When Katara spoke again, her voice was small, and quiet.

 

“After you went into the Avatar State to fight the Fire Navy, Sokka told me what his deal had cost him. When he dies, he won’t exist anymore. Koh has his soul now.”

“Agh!” Aang cried, his face showing the horror and revulsion he felt. “No. Not if I have any say in the matter! I’ll find Koh and make him give Sokka his soul back!”

 

“I don’t know if it works that way, but it would certainly make me feel better. And besides, I have a plan. Sort of.” Katara said.

 

“Really?” Aang asked hopefully.

 

“Like I said, sort of. Before we left the north pole, I went to ask the Moon Spirit, or Yue, maybe both, -whatever the fish version is- for help. I waited there for hours, and as I was about to leave thinking they couldn’t help, La spoke to me.”

 

Aang was silent for a moment, and then asked with apprehension, “What did he say? He didn’t ask for your soul in return, did he?”

 

“No, he said he didn’t have the answers I wanted, but he told me who does: Wan Shi Tong. I just wish I knew who he was.”

 

---

 

The man in the odd hat lit his torch again, as it had been extinguished during the cave in. Mai took quick stock of her surroundings, noting that it was just her, Ty Lee, and a bunch of strange musicians. She inspected the rocks that blocked the cavern they had been in mere moments earlier. It was totally inaccessible, and she doubted that there was any chance that they could dig their way out.

 

“So,” the man in a pink kimono started awkwardly, “Are you guys going to attack us too?”

 

“No, I don’t think so,” Ty Lee said, and asked, “You guys aren’t with the Avatar are you?”

 

“The sword guy is the Avatar?!” Asked the man in the hat, in an astonished voice.

 

Mai closed her eyes tightly for a second. She was not looking forward to the next few hours, possibly days, of her life.

 

“No, that’s Sokka. The Avatar is the one with the arrows.” Ty Lee corrected him.

 

“Oh,” Said the hat-man. He paused, and then looked from Mai to Ty Lee a few times. “Who are you?”

 

Mai sighed as Ty Lee introduced them to the musicians. Chong, the hat-man, had only met the Avatar a few hours ago, and was evidently not very sharp. Mai considered their options. They could wait where they were, for the army knew where they had gone. They would eventually dig them out of there, but she didn’t know how long that would take. The tunnel supposedly went straight through the mountains, so she figured that if they kept going they would eventually make their way out. If this passage was a dead end, they would just have to sit by and wait.

 

“How long do those torches last?” Ty Lee inquired.

 

“Oh, about two hours.” Chong said, and his wife nodded in agreement. She took the remaining three torches and struck them on the ground. “And we have four torches, so that’s eight hours!”

 

Mai snatched the torches from the woman and put them out. “It’s only eight hours if you light them one at a time.” She said dryly.

 

“Ty Lee, let’s get moving. We might be able to find a way out of here, and if not then we’ll have to wait for someone to dig us out.” Mai took the lit torch and started walking as Ty Lee cartwheeled over to her. Chong and his nomads followed suit.

 

“You know,” Ty Lee said to the wanderers, “I used to be in a traveling circus.”

 

“Really? I met my wife in a traveling circus.” Moku said, before looking sad. “She’s still there, and we haven’t seen each other in a while.”

 

“What? Why not?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“Well, she wanted to stay with them, and I wanted to travel. We decided that I should travel for a while, and then we could meet up again with them.”

 

“But you said it was a traveling circus.” Ty Lee said.

 

“It was,” Moku shrugged.

 

“Why couldn’t you travel with them?”

 

Moku stopped in his tracks, his face awash with realization, and then he laughed. “I didn’t even think of that!”

 

Mai sighed. She was stuck with odd company, and now she had to deal with the illogical thought process of the nomads. Fun. She quickened her pace, hoping to cut the time spent with these people as short as possible. They needed to get out of this tunnel as quickly as possible, and find help. For all she knew, Azula could have been… she decided not to think about that as likely, but knew it was possible. She didn’t want to believe that Azula might not survive, yet she wouldn’t allow herself to deny the possibility.

 

Her friend had, up until recently, kept them at a distance. Azula kept her fears and worries close to her chest, although Mai had her suspicions. Now that they were confirmed, and in some ways surpassed, Mai felt a closeness that hadn’t been there before. 

 

Originally, Mai had become friends with Azula because Ty Lee did. She hadn’t been sure about her originally, and wasn’t certain until she met Zuko. That had been when they were children though, and as they grew older Mai found that she genuinely liked spending time with the princess. Getting to see Zuko occasionally was an added bonus.

 

Now she was torn. They were on a mission to capture Zuko, the Avatar, and General Iroh. She still had feelings for Zuko, but she was equally concerned for Azula’s well being. If they couldn’t capture Zuko, then the Fire Lord might do something unspeakable to Azula. But could she hand Zuko over to the Fire Lord after learning why he had been banished? After hearing the story of the forty first? And now Zuko had as good as left the Fire Nation, having aided the Water Tribe during the siege.

 

She didn’t know what she would do when the time came, and she hoped that she wouldn’t be the one to face Zuko. She would much rather deal with Iroh.

 

Ching began strumming on his lute, and to Mai’s irritation, Ty Lee began to sing. Mai tried her best to ignore the music, she really did. Moku began beating on his drum, Lily began playing her flute, and the two other nomads who had yet to introduce themselves began dancing as they walked. Mai drew in a breath and let it out slowly.  They came to a fork, and Mai chose the left hand tunnel. The nomads and Ty Lee followed promptly, still singing. Mai glared sideways at Ty Lee, and saw that one of the dancers had stopped dancing and was putting flowers into the acrobat’s hair. Flowers. Where had they even gotten them?

 

“Don’t let the cave-in get you down!” Ty Lee sang, waking closer to Mai, “Don’t let the falling rocks turn your smile into a frown! When the tunnel seems darkest, that is when you need a clown! Don’t let the cave-in get you down, Mai!” Ty Lee drew out the name as she and Chong leaned in towards her.

 

Mai scowled. “Why shouldn’t it? Azula might be dead for all we know!”

 

“Oh is that why you’re so gloomy? Gloomier than usual, I mean.”

 

Mai turned her attention away from Ty Lee. Mai decided that Ty Lee was in denial. There was no other way that the girl wouldn’t be in tears at the idea of Azula’s possible demise. A concept that felt more and more possible with each minute.

 

“Azula’s fine. The Avatar pushed her into another tunnel when the cave began to collapse. I saw it before Chong’s torch went out.”

 

“Oh, so she’s just trapped underground by herself, that’s fantastic.” Mai said. Relief washed through her upon Ty Lee’s revelation. Why she hadn’t said something an hour ago when they started this blind journey Mai didn’t comprehend, and she was secretly jealous of Azula’s solitude.

 

“She’s not alone,” Ty Lee said, “She’s with Sokka. ” Saying his name with a smirk. Mai stopped walking and turned to Ty Lee.

 

“What?”

 

“Azula was blown into a tunnel with Sokka.”

 

Mai’s blood began to freeze, and evidently her dismay shone through her expression.

 

“What?” Ty Lee asked, her smile fading.

 

“Don’t you remember what Iroh told us? Sokka is bound to the Face Stealer! He’s dangerous!”

 

---

 

“Wan Shi Tong?” Aang asked, and Katara nodded. Aang smiled broadly and said, “I know who that is! We’re already planning on meeting him! He’s the knowledge spirit that the spirit library belongs to!”

 

Katara whipped her head around as she walked. “Seriously!? That’s great, we’ll be able to ask him about helping Sokka while we learn about the prophecy.”

 

The pair of them walked in silence for a time, and Aang dwelled on the trials ahead of him. He couldn’t help but remember his failing in the past. When he learned that he was to be sent to the eastern Air Temple, he had run away. That decision had gotten him trapped in ice, and plunged the world into chaos. A century of war and ruin had followed his choice to shirk his duty, to put himself and his desires first. Again when he had stopped Sokka from killing Zhao, he had put his own beliefs before the needs of the world. And what had that wrought? A battle that killed hundreds of people, Fire Nation and Water Tribe alike. 

 

What would he do the next time he faced a hard choice? Would he put his own desires first? Could he afford to? Could the world? He wondered if he would make the hard decision. Was he even capable? Would he be able to do his duty to the world? Or would he let his own desires cloud his judgment? He wished that he had mastered the ability to let things go, and detach himself from his own selfishness. He was the Avatar, and his was a role of sacrifice. Even if it meant his own happiness.

 

The torch Katara carried was starting to burn low when they came across a door at the end of the tunnel. Katara ran up to it, and tried to push it open.

 

“Aang! I think this is the way out!” She said, and Aang ran over to help her push against the door. They heaved with all their might, but the heavy round stone refused to move. They gave up after a few moments, and jumped aside when Appa charged the door.

 

The bison crashed into the stone, causing it to roll aside. The chamber within, sadly enough for Aang and Katara, was not an exit. In fact, it was a tomb.

 

“Ughhh!” Aang said in exasperation.

 

“This isn’t the exit.” Katara observed. Her voice was shallow, and her disappointment bled through.

 

“I know, but it looks like there’s writing on the walls.” Aang answered her, though it wasn’t a question. The pair of them squatted down and read. Katara read the story aloud through the light of their dying torch. It was a tale of star crossed lovers, of war, hope, life, love, loss and despair. In the end the man died, and his lover forced the war to an end with her earthbending. The warring clans lived together ever after in the city they built, and named it Omashu.

 

“That was interesting, but it wasn’t very helpful.” Katara said, and Aang agreed.

 

They sat in silence for a time, and their torch grew steadily dimmer. Eventually, Katara broke the silence.

 

“The legend says that we have to trust in love, or we’ll be trapped in here forever.”

 

“Yeah?” Aang said.

 

“Well, I was thinking, it’s a crazy idea actually. Nevermind.” Katara blushed slightly and looked away.

 

“No, what is it? It’s better than no idea.”

 

“Well, here it says that love is brightest in the dark,” She pointed to the last passage in the wall, “And it has a picture of them kissing.”

 

Aang was confused, so he asked for clarification. “Where are you going with this?”

 

“Well,” Katara began hesitantly, “What if we kissed?”

 

“You think we should kiss?!” Aang asked in surprise.

 

“See, I told you it was a crazy idea.” Katara said as she looked away.

 

Aang paused, looking at her. The torch was nearly burnt out, and they were out of time. That, and her suggestion was perhaps the greatest idea he had ever heard. “I don’t know, I think it’s worth a shot.”

 

Katara looked at him with a soft smile, and they leaned closer to each other. Moments before their lips met, the torch went out. Aang closed his eyes, and Katara gasped and pulled away. Aang opened his eyes and saw the tunnel was illuminated by glowing crystals leading towards the far end of the tomb.

 

“The crystals must glow in the dark!” Katara cried, “Maybe they will lead to the exit!”

 

Aang sagged. Of all the times for a miracle, it had to come at the worst moment.

 

---

 

Mai walked with purpose, Ty Lee at her heels. She had indeed forgotten what Iroh had told them about Sokka, and now that she realized that Azula was trapped with a potentially deadly enemy rather than a silly crush, her lighthearted demeanor was forgotten. Now they and the nomads were practically jogging to find an exit. Their strategy so far had been to take the left hand turn at every fork, figuring that it was like a maze. If you keep taking the same turns you will eventually find your way out.

 

It didn’t seem to be working, as they were already on their second torch. 

 

“Do you think she’s okay?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“Who? The waterbender?” Chong asked, uninvited,

 

“No, Azula. The firebender.” Ty Lee corrected.

 

“Oh, I wouldn’t know.” Chong said, “You should ask Lady Knife-thrower.”

 

Ty Lee smiled at him. She had been asking Mai, and Chong seemed to be a little slow. Mai didn’t understand how the man could have gotten through life without hurting himself, or falling off of a cliff. She decided that the man must be extraordinarily lucky.

 

“I don’t know. It’s Azula; she can handle whatever Sokka throws at her, probably, but we don’t know what he’s capable of. From what I heard, he nearly killed Admiral Zhao, and Zhao only escaped because Hahn and Laluk were there to help.”

 

“Azula’s way more powerful than Zhao,” Ty Lee said, “But still, he managed to chi-block him.”

Mai nodded. “We’re just going to have to plan for the worst. She might have been taken prisoner, or maybe…”

 

Ty Lee shook her head. “No, they wouldn’t have done that. Remember when we were interrogating the Avatar? He said they rescued Zuko and brought him back to his ship, so I think they’ll probably do the same with Azula, or maybe she’ll surprise us and have them all tied up by herself.”

 

Mai exhaled quickly through her nose, “That does seem like something she could do. Then it’s just Zuko and Iroh.”

 

The group walked in silence for a while, until Ty Lee spoke again. “What do you think about capturing Zuko?”

 

“It doesn’t matter what I think,” Mai answered evenly, “We have a job to do.”

 

“Well, yeah, I know that. But it’s just, if Zuko was banished- if he was burned- just for protesting to, well, the thing,” Ty Lee said, hesitating before she continued on, “It makes me think, what else might the Fire Lord have done?”

 

Mai glanced at her friend. This was getting dangerously close to treason. “I’m sure that the Fire Lord has always acted in the Fire Nation’s best interest.”

 

“I… Mai, I have to ask you something.” Ty Lee said, falling into step to speak quietly to Mai. Mai raised an eyebrow. Ty Lee took a deep breath, and asked, “Are we the bad guys?”

 

Mai paused, and while considering her friend's question, she heard something. “Ty Lee, did you hear that?”

 

“What?”

 

“There’s something coming!” Mai said, and Chong and his nomads began to panic. They began to whimper, and backed into the cave wall. Suddenly, a horrible face rushed into the light. A wolf bat darted past their heads, followed by dozens more. The cave began to tremble, and the passage through which they had come was suddenly blocked off by a wall of stone. 

 

Mai grabbed Chong and forced him to hold the torch aloft while she and Ty Lee prepared to fight the earthbenders who had found them. Evidently they knew the two young women were Fire Nation, otherwise they wouldn’t have blocked off their escape. Ty Lee waited beside the nomads, while Mai took a position in the shadows of the opposite wall.

 

They waited, and when a few minutes had passed, the wall behind Mai disappeared. She whirled, and was faced by an enormous animal. Mai jumped back, and the wall that blocked their escape was brought down by another animal. Mai recognized them: badger-moles.

Mai backed away slowly, trying to come up with a plan. None of her weapons were large enough to damage the creature. She took a slow step backwards, and the badger-mole made a motion with its foreleg, causing the ground to shift. Mai fell back, and began to crawl backwards. The badger-mole advanced, and just as Ty Lee began to run to her aid, not that Mai thought she could do much, Mia’s hand struck one of the strings of Chong’s lute.

 

A single note split the air, and the badger-mole paused. Mai picked up the lute, and the badger-mol cocked its head curiously. Mai plucked the chord a few more times, and Ty Lee took Moku’s drum and started to play.

 

---

 

Aang stepped into the late afternoon light with a sigh. Katara followed him and the two embraced. They laughed in relief, but the relief soon died when Aang saw something not far from them.

 

It was Azula. She had lost her hair piece at some point, and she was standing over Sokka, holding him up by the shirt front. She had somehow managed to get his hands in cuffs behind his back. Aang saw her giving Sokka a smirk, and the expression left her face the moment she noticed the pair of them.

 

“Sokka!” Aang shouted, and Katara whipped around.

 

Katara charged at Azula, yelling as she drew the water from her pouches, “Get away from him!”

 

She lashed out at Azula, who dodged to the side. She flipped and spun to avoid the attacks, but she didn’t use any bending of her own. Aang waited for her to be in the air, and then sent her flying to the side of the cliff with his airbending. Katara froze the princess to the wall, and glared at her.

 

“I’ll watch her, you get Sokka into the saddle.”

 

Aang moved quickly, and in seconds he had Sokka in the saddle with him. “Katara! Let’s go!”

 

Without taking her eye’s off of Azula, Katara climbed into the saddle. In moments they were airborne, and Aang broke Sokka out of his cuffs.

 

“Sokka, are you okay?” Katara asked, and Aang looked back at them. Sokka was rubbing at his wrists, and for the first time in weeks, he spoke.

 

“That…! Woman…!” He shouted, his face screwed up in anger, “She is conniving! Manipulative, clever, irritating, funny, smart, annoying! She just has to…!”

 

Sokka crossed his arms. Aang and Katara looked at each other. Sokka had spoked for the first time since leaving the north pole, and the fact that his insults towards Azula had at one point contained compliments did not escape either of them. Aang examined Sokka’s face and saw that he had something a dark shade of red smeared on his lips.

 

“Uh, Sokka, you’ve got something on your…” He trailed off as he pointed to his mouth. Sokka wiped his own with a hand and then blushed, turning angry again. “I cannot stand that woman, she’s so…! She just can’t leave well enough alone, she always has to win!”

 

Katara stared at Sokka. She glanced at Aang, who shrugged. He, for one, was glad that Sokka was at least back to normal, though he didn’t know what had happened to him in the tunnel. The irritation was reminiscent of his attitude back on Kyoshi Island, after Suki had caught them. That situation had ended with a kiss… And now Sokka had been captured by Azula, extremely vexed, and had… something on his lips. Did the two of them…?

 

“Sokka,” Katara said, “What happened in that cave?”

 

Sokka blinked, and then crossed his arms. “I don’t want to talk about it.”

 

---

Mai and Ty Lee rode with Lily and Chong on the back of one badger-mole. They exited the mountain, and immediately spotted Azula, frozen to the cliff and smiling with her eyes closed. The pair of them leapt down, and ran to Azula.

 

“Azula!” Ty Lee cried out, and Azula’s smile immediately vanished as she opened her eyes.

 

“What happened? How did you get stuck to the cliff?”

 

“Sokka managed to chi-block me, and his sister and the Avatar froze me to this cliff. My firebending isn’t back on yet, so as you can see…” She nodded towards her ice covered torso and arms. “I could use your help getting out of here.”

 

Ty Lee quickly grabbed one of the torches from Chong and lit it. She maneuvered it around Azula to thaw the ice, but stopped soon. Mai noticed the smile on Ty Lee’s face, and followed her line of sight to Azula’s face. Her lipstick was… smudged. Her hair was down. What had happened in that tunnel?

 

“Did you have fun?” Ty Lee said, the corners of her lips flying upwards as she resumed thawing out Azual.

 

“Why would I have had fun?” Azula asked.

 

“Well, you just spent a little under two hours with Sokka… and your lipstick is smudged.” Ty Lee said.

 

Azula blushed, and denied it. “No it isn’t!”

Mai rolled her eyes. She took the torch from Ty Lee, and began thawing out the Princess.

 

“I’m sure it happened in the fight,” Mai said, deciding not to pressure Azula.

 

“With everything that’s happened, we forgot something. Back at the north pole, before Iroh knocked us out, he told us about Sokka.”

 

Azula cocked an eyebrow. “Told you what?”

 

“Sokka is bound to the Face Stealer. He didn’t tell us anything else, but he’s dangerous.”

 

“I know about that. He told me in the tunnel.” Was Azula’s response.

 

“And you kissed him anyway?” Mai asked flatly. Azula glared at her.

 

“So what if I did? It’s hardly any of your business.”

 

“So you did kiss him!” Ty Lee said, jumping into the air.

 

“I never said that!” Azula snapped.

 

“Well, tell us what happened? How did you get out if he chi-blocked you? It was pitch black, you couldn’t have seen a thing.” Mai asked, deciding that she would in fact pressure Azula.

 

“He has a magic sword.” Azula muttered, glancing away.

 

“What?” Mai said, not believing what she had heard.

 

“Hurry up and get me out of here, we have to get back to Omashu.”

 

---

Author’s Note:

 

Hello, I do hope you’ve enjoyed this update. The next chapter will contain Sokka/Azula’s travel through the tunnel, as well as the advancement of the Zuko plotline.

 

Please consider reviewing, and if you have any constructive criticism I’d be happy to hear it. I’m trying to limit the head hopping, so hopefully this has less of it.

Watch One Piece.

 

12/03/2022

Chapter 28: Necessary Actions

Author's Note: double update. Please go back and read chapter 27 first.

---

“Isn’t that the sweetest thing?”

 

Zuko whirled on the newcomer, for he recognized the voice. Lieutenant Jee and Tahno were standing at the side of the road. How they had caught them, or snuck up behind without his notice was a mystery to Zuko. He placed himself between Jee and Song, and struck a firebending pose. Jee merely waved a hand dismissively.

 

“I’m not looking for a fight, Prince Zuko.” He said. Tahno removed his helmet and shook his head in agreement.

 

“Then why are you here? How did you find us?” Zuko asked, his voice rife with tension.

 

“Perhaps we could sit down and discuss things over a cup of tea? The road has been long, and my old bones could use a rest.” Iroh cut in, raising his hands placatingly.

 

Zuko heard a sound behind him as Song swallowed. He was about to reassure her that things would be okay when she spoke. Her voice was shaky, and her anxiety over the situation was apparent. “I have some ginseng tea inside. We could…”

 

“No, it’s-” Zuko began to tell her that they wouldn’t intrude on her home, but his uncle interrupted him. In an extremely excited, and perhaps too loud, voice his Iroh said, “We would love to!”

 

Zuko groaned internally. He did not want to force Song to take two strange firebenders into her home, especially considering that he did not yet know if they were enemies. Thinking of a solution, he said, “On the porch. We won't intrude on your hospitality more than we already have.”

 

He shot his uncle a glare, and then almost shot a fireball at Tahno, who chose that exact time to scratch his nose. He glared at Tahno, who smirked. Zuko decided that the young man had waited until the right time so as to mess with Zuko. Such had been his habit as a palace guard before Zuko’s banishment. He had started merely a month before the fateful day of his agni kai, and had volunteered to go with him on his search.

 

Iroh nodded his acquiescence, and Song led the way towards the house. Zuko was loath to take his eyes off of the newcomers, even if he had known them for years. Neither of them had shown him any great degree of loyalty, and he suspected that they were in the midst of Azula’s machinations.

 

Uncle Iroh followed Song, and Zuko nodded for his two former crew members to follow. They did, and Zuko walked a few paces behind them, ever vigilant for an attack. When they passed through the fence gate, Jee and Tahno paused to look at it. The men frowned, and Tahno said in a carrying whisper to the lieutenant, “This fence looks horrible.”

 

“Can you hurry up?!” Zuko said angrily, slightly embarrassed at their comments. He had been the one to mend the fence, and he knew it was bad. That didn’t mean that he liked to have it pointed out.

 

“Always so quick with the orders. You’re not my commanding officer anymore, in case you had forgotten.” Tahno quipped. Zuko clenched his fists. He took a slow breath and let his anger slip away.

 

In a short time, they were seated around a table that Song had procured for them and, when she made to serve tea, Zuko took the pot from her. He could see that she was uncomfortable with the presence of the uniformed firebenders, and he tried to alleviate some of her stress by serving the tea himself. If he could help by putting at least some distance between them, he would do so. Jee and Tahno exchanged a look at the action, but said nothing.

 

“Song,” Zuko said softly, “You can wait inside if you want, you don’t have to be out here if you don’t want to.”

 

“N-no, it’s fine, Lee. Or, Zuko, apparently.” Song spoke, and the young prince thought he could hear a touch of irritation at the end of her statement. He decided to ask about it later, although he assumed it was because he had accidentally brought Jee and Tahno here. Zuko nodded in response and turned his attention on the two men.

 

“How did you find us?” He asked, looking at Jee.

 

“Tahno here spotted a small boat while on watch this morning. He informed me of it, and I decided to check the shore in the direction it was heading. We saw an indistinct mass in the water that appeared to be the right size, and a pair of familiar tracks leading away from the scene. We decided to follow you.”

 

“Why? Surely you sent for reinforcements. You know the two of you could not defeat us on your own.” Iroh said, examining the pair over his cup. Jee shook his head, but it was Tahno who spoke next.

 

“No, we didn’t. We… have some questions.”

 

“What questions?” Iroh inquired politely. Zuko stared down the two men in disbelief. He was not inclined to believe… well, maybe they were telling the truth. He had never known either of them to lie, so perhaps they spoke the truth.

 

“When I arrived at the infiltration point to search for Princess Azula,” The Lieutenant began, “Ensign Temma told me that you betrayed the Fire Nation, and aided the Avatar by telling him of the plot to capture the Moon Spirit.”

 

Zuko didn’t respond. He watched the older man in silence. Jee nodded, taking his silence as admission.

 

“What I want to know, is why?”

 

Taking in a slow breath, Zuko closed his eyes for a moment. Opening them again, he could see Song watching them from the corner of his eye. He focused on the pair in front of him and spoke, “I have come to realize that the war is wrong. The reasons given for it are a lie. It was here, in this exact spot, that I finally understood, even if I didn’t accept it at the time. The Fire Nation has dis-honored herself, and I can’t continue to help her do so.”

 

He took a sip of his tea. “The Air Nomads were destroyed. The southern Water Tribe was crippled, and Zhao intended to kill the Moon Spirit. We all depend on the balance, and so it was for the good of all nations, including ours, that I told the Avatar.”

 

---

 

“Well, I want to hear about it!” Katara said, looking at her brother. He had been completely unresponsive and mute for weeks, and now he was acting like a child!

 

“It’s really not important…” Sokka said, rubbing the back of his head absently.

 

“I don’t know, Sokka, I think it might be. Whatever happened in there made you choose to leave the void, and I for one really want to know.” Aang added, steering Appa low over the treetops.

 

“Ugh… fine.” Sokka said with a groan. “And I didn’t leave it, I kind of fell out, I guess.”

 

“How do you fall out of the void?” Katara asked curiously. Sokka shrugged.

 

“I… just listen, and don’t interrupt!” He said with a glare. And with that, he began his story.

 

---

 

“Won’t you just tell us?” Ty Lee quipped. Azula was still stuck in ice, and Mai was working from the feet up to thaw her. Azula scoffed in response.

 

“And why would I ever do that?”

 

“Because otherwise we’ll just have to guess. I doubt that what happened there was any more embarrassing than what we could imagine.” Mai said without looking up. Ty Lee’s eyes lit up at the idea.

 

“Actually, Mai’s right! Don’t tell us! I can already see you and Sokka in the tunnel, ‘Oh, Sokka, my love, we’re trapped in here together, whatever shall we do?’ “ Ty Lee used a completely inaccurate and swooning voice to impersonate Azula, and it had the desired effect. The princess glared at her and her cheeks flushed.

 

“Ty Lee! I would never say anything so… so…!” She couldn’t think of a word that would aptly describe her displeasure.

 

“Well what happened then?” Mai said, “If you don’t tell us something then I’ll have to believe in Ty Lee. Nobody here wants that.”

 

“Hey!” Said Ty Lee, but she was ignored.

 

“Fine!” Azula snapped. She thought back to the cave-in and began a summary of the events.

 

---

 

Azula groaned. She wasn’t entirely sure what had happened, but it was completely dark. She couldn’t see anything. She had landed on something soft and warm. Once she began to move, the soft thing became colder, until it seemed as cold as the grave. She sat up, and whatever it was made a sound as it hurried away. There was a brief illumination by a soft, pale light, and she could see the figure of a man before the light was doused. Azula remembered what had happened. She had been fighting Sokka, and then she had been tossed into the cavern. By the Avatar no doubt.

 

Igniting a fireball, she assumed an offensive position. She was given pause when the light from her fire did not extend past her hand. She frowned, and tried to make the flame grow bigger. It worked, but the increase in light was fractional. It didn’t reach nearly as far as it should, and barely illuminated the space around her.

 

Sokka watched the enemy princess. When he had drawn his sword, it had glowed with the light of the moon. Odd, he thought, as it had only done so when he swung it before. Perhaps it was the total darkness of the cave, or perhaps it was something else. It was a matter that he could ponder at a later date. For now, he had to find a solution to this problem.

 

He leapt silently to the side as a jet of flame shot past him. He eyed the firebender. He wasn’t sure what to do about her. Wrapped in the emotionless stillness of the void, he considered killing her. It would have been easier than trying to drag her though the cave with him, but he didn’t think that was necessary. He met the young woman's eyes, though she couldn’t see him while he suppressed the light of her fire.

 

He furrowed his brows. There was something different about her. He opened his third eye with a thought, and looked inside. She was still free of Vaatu’s influence, of that he was certain, but there was a cloud over her heart. As if a storm had rolled across once calm waters and ravaged the shore. She was hurting, although he could not say why. She was hurting, yes, but not broken. There was something else, something brighter. Perhaps it was new, or maybe he just hadn’t seen it before. She had fire in her eyes.

 

As the flames in Azula’s eyes caught hold of him, Sokka felt a shock, as if lightning had struck inside his mind. He was ripped from the void with such force that he took a stumbling step back, the noise of which caused Azula to kick fire at the place he had been. Sokka took no notice of the attack however, as the storm of emotions that were part of the human condition warred for dominance within him.

 

Azula heard a staggering footstep and a gasp, followed by labored breathing. She kicked a wave of fire in the direction, but it didn’t connect. She was considering charging toward the sound, when Sokka spoke.

 

“How did you do that?” Sokka asked. Azula rolled her eyes.

 

“I’m a firebender, genius, it’s what we do.” She hadn’t thought he was dense, but perhaps he had been hit in the head by a rock.

 

“Not that, I know what a firebender is, obviously.” Sokka replied from the darkness.

 

“Then what? Stand? Look around? I have no idea what else you would be talking about.” She said, and she was honestly confused.

Sokka heard the honesty in her voice, and he didn’t get the sense that it was a lie. Maybe there was a time limit after all, or maybe she just had some unknown abilities that even she was unaware of. He was glad he had decided not to kill her. When he remembered how casually he considered the action, he felt sick to his stomach. How could he have even considered doing that when he could just… leave her there. Surely she wouldn’t be able to follow him, and who knew how long it would take for someone to dig them out. Sokka assumed that Azula had some Fire Nation soldiers following her who would try to free her. Probably, he thought, they might just assume she was dead…

 

A sharp pain of emotion lanced through his chest at the thought. Not because he was overly concerned with her wellbeing, no, but because he knew that Yue would have been disappointed in him, and thinking of her made his heart ache with despair. She would not have left someone to suffer alone in the dark, even if she was an enemy. Sokka looked at Azula with his third eye, and could see her more clearly. After he went to Koh for more power, as the Face Stealer predicted he would upon their first meeting, his third eye was more perceptive. He could see the most direct paths taken by chi in the body, and even the weak points along them. He picked his targets and rushed forward.

 

Azula heard a flurry of footsteps approach her and she shot out with her firebending. She felt a quick succession of light punches across her arms and back and her fire went out. She tried to loose a gout of flame from her other hand, and then both of her legs. Nothing happened. She took a step back. Non-bending combat hadn’t been something she had studied, but she was strong, and she would try and capture the First Son regardless.

 

“I propose a truce.” Sokka said from beside her. Azula whirled in his direction, and still she could see nothing. She swung a fist towards the voice and missed, and again Sokka spoke.

 

“What is wrong with you?! We’re trapped in a labyrinth under a mountain! Calm down!” He said with irritation.

 

“I am calm, and how can you see me? It’s completely dark. Surely your hearing isn’t that good.” She answered. There was a pause, and then the pale white light from before filled the cave. Sokka had drawn his sword, and it radiated light like the summer moon. Azula blinked at the weapon, and remembered Hahn’s comment about Sokka’s sword. Maybe it was magic after all.

 

Azula was unarmed, unable to bend, and trapped in the dark where the only source of light could easily spell her undoing. A truce sounded pretty good at that point.

 

“Fine then. A truce until we get out of this sun forsaken cave.” With that she began to shift rocks to the side. She moved a few middle sized stones, and then attempted to move the larger ones.

 

“There’s no point in doing that.” Sokka said, looking at her with an expression she couldn’t identify. Azula glared at him.

 

“In case you had forgotten, my friends, the Avatar, your sister, and a group of dimwit musicians were standing exactly where the rocks fell. In addition to that, as far as we know, this is the only exit.”

 

Sokka shook his head. “The others are okay. I can hear them.”

 

“How can you possibly hear them? And people think I’m the liar.”

 

“I don’t have to explain myself to you!” Sokka snapped back. “Suffice it to say that I just can.”

 

Azula scoffed, and rolled her eyes. She turned her head to look at him, and when she met his eyes she was surprised by what she found. When she first looked upon them, they had been empty, as if just the living shell of a dead soul. Now, they were filled with an allconsuming, ocean colored despair. He bore a hopelessness and sense of loss that bit deeply into his soul.

 

Sokka blinked in surprise at the sudden look of concern on the Princess’s face. It was quickly shed by a mask of irritation, and Sokka looked behind him. There was nothing there, and he thought it could have been a ruse, to get him to lower his guard so that she might strike him with a rock. He quickly returned his sight to Azula, but she had not moved.

 

“Are you planning to just stay here then? There is an exit, and we’ll find it eventually. If you want to stay here in the dark, be my guest. I’m sure that you’ll dig your way out in a few years, or perhaps Iroh will find a way to get through.”

 

He saw the subtle flame of anger flash across her face. But in a moment it seemed to be chased by sorrow, and he couldn’t begin to understand why. His third eye was opened, and it seemed that the storm cloud within her flared when he said her uncle’s name. He thought back to his last encounter with the man. He had fought off Zhao, right before…

 

A knot formed in his throat, and his instincts told him to flee into the void. Before he could, he remembered the words of a long dead guru. Instinct is a lie, told by a frightened body praying to be wrong. The words gave him pause. Why was he so desperate to get away from the pain? Wasn’t that part of what it meant to be human? He remembered what his father had told him years ago. Fear, hope, love, and pain were part of life. He thought that perhaps loss was too.

 

“He’s a traitor, and he won’t be coming.” Azula said firmly, her anger and sorrow leaking into her words. She stood, and began to walk off into the tunnel. Sokka followed after.

 

---

 

Zuko watched as Jee absorbed his words. The man nodded slowly, and Tahno didn’t react. Zuko spared a quick glance for Song, who wore an unreadable expression. His uncle merely sipped his tea, his calm demeanor disarming the others.

 

“Another matter then,” Jee said, “When I was in port waiting for the armada to depart, I took a trip to a tavern. While there, I heard a rumor. This particular rumor came from a man who had been a high ranking palace guard, and he told me of a war meeting that took place the day of your banishment.”

 

Zuko stiffened. He saw Song move her hands anxiously, but Jee continued. “Is it true? Did you try to save the forty first?”

 

Zuko eyed him, and said, “Yes.” he then gestured to his scar. “But I failed, and this is what I got for my efforts. The Fire Lord said it was for my refusal to fight, that I would learn respect. But now I think he would have done it anyway, or perhaps more…”

 

Song gasped, covering her mouth. “You mean that-” She cut herself off. Zuko nodded, guessing her meaning. He met her eyes and saw pity, a look that he never cared to receive. He returned his attention to the two men, both of whom had a wetness to their eyes. He gave his uncle a confused look, but Tahno spoke.

 

“My little brother was in that division.” His voice was rife with a long held sadness, “He was just a boy, only seventeen.”

 

“My nephew, he perished in the battle.” Jee said, “My sister’s never been the same. He was her pride and joy.”

 

“I’m sorry,” Zuko said, “I didn’t know, I should’ve tried harder, I could’ve-”

 

“No, you did all you could, Prince Zuko.” Tahno said, regaining some of his usual formality. Zuko found it odd that he would switch back so quickly. “What more could you do? A boy of thirteen, and the only one brave enough to defy the Fire Lord.”

 

Jee nodded, and then swallowed. He looked down slightly, as if gathering his strength, and said, “Please, Prince Zuko, you must join the Avatar! Help him to dethrone the tyrant that is your father, and take his place as Fire Lord!”

 

Zuko’s mouth fell open in shock, astounded at his former lieutenant’s request. He stared at the man, who had always seemed to hold him in low regard, and spoke of him as a spoiled child when he thought Zuko could not hear. Had one fact changed the man so much? Or maybe he was desperate to bring peace, that he thought that even Zuko would be a better Fire Lord.

 

“You want me to openly turn against the Fire Nation and rebel against the throne? To cast aside our people and join the Avatar? Who would support me in my claim for Fire Lord?” He got to his feet and paced, running his fingers through his hair. He laughed, “I can see it! I’ll just walk in with the Avatar and sit on the throne. It’ll be great!”

 

He shook his head. “No, should I do that then the people would never support my rule. They would call me traitor, and decry me as usurper. At best it would be civil war, but far more likely that I’ll be killed to make way for Azula, or Zhao. Even if I join Aang, someone else would have to take the throne.”

 

Jee and Tahno looked at iroh, who shook his head. They exchanged a glance, and then Tahno spoke. “We have considered that, and, well, we’ve thought up a plan. We didn’t want to begin until we knew the truth behind what rumors we heard, but now that we know…”

 

“So, what is it?”

 

“There is… a lot of discontent in the military.” Jee stated. Tahno nodded his agreement and continued the lieutenant’s thought, “It’s true, we’re all tired of war! Especially in the newer colonies, like this one!” He waved a hand around vaguely.

 

“If the people knew the truth, about why you were banished, and how you got your scar, they would support you! Nearly three thousand men were in the forty first, and they came from almost every village, city, and town in the homeland.”

 

“You want me to start a full on rebelion?!” Zuko asked in disbelief, “That would mean civil war!”

 

Iroh cleared his throat. “Not necessarily, Prince Zuko. If the people knew the truth, then they would accept you as Fire Lord, they may even refuse to fight if you joined the Avatar.”

 

Zuko dragged a hand down his face, exasperated. The subtle burning that he felt every time his scar was touched hurt, but he ignored it as usual. This conversation had really gotten away from him; how had he let it get here?

 

“Even if I did join Aang, how will I get the people on my side? Fly around on his Bison and drop leaflets?” Zuko said. He could just see it, he and the airbender flying across the archipelago and deploying thousands of leaflets. The foolish boy always flew too low, they would be shot down. He made a mental note to address the issue when he joined him.

 

“We’ve thought of that.” Jee said, “We would spread the word. Us, and a few others. The men who sailed with you, and some of the survivors of the siege. After that fiasco, the war has become even more unpopular.”

 

Zuko sat down. He opened his mouth, closed it again, and pinched the bridge of his nose. He took a deep breath, and said, “I need to think. I’m going on a walk.”

---

 

“Is he here too?” Sokka asked, his voice carrying a bitter anger.

 

“I assume you don’t mean here literally, and I don’t know who you’re speaking of.”

 

“Zhao.”

 

Azula briefly considered lying, and then she did. “Yes, he’s-”

 

“Don’t lie to me, Azula.” Sokka said. This gave Azula pause, for again he had known she was lying.

 

“How do you do that? How do you know that I lied? I’m a very good liar, and you’re the only person to catch me.”

 

“I’m not sure, but tell me, what of Hahn? Is he around here?” Azula could sense a subtle hunger in his words, as if he longed for the betrayer's death, and she guessed that he did.

 

“No, Zhao took that clown with him to the Fire Nation, along with his father.”

 

The corner of Sokka’s mouth turned slightly upward for a second when she called Hahn a clown, but it resumed its neutral station in a second.

 

“He is no clown. He is cunning and cruel, do not underestimate him.”

 

Azula put on a thoughtful expression and tapped her chin. “I don’t think that I could underestimate him, you see, that’s quite impossible.”

 

Again his mouth tugged into a light smile, and he exhaled rather sharply. For a reason she couldn’t explain, she felt that she wanted to see more of that. She thought for a moment, and decided that it would get him to lower his guard. Yes, that was it. No other reason.

 

“Thinking more on it,” She continued, “I guess that you’re right. He is no clown; he is the entire circus.”

 

She was rewarded by a slight smile, and then a small chuckle. The chuckle grew, and Sokka began to laugh. The laughter was short lived, however, and he soon regained his dreary countenance.

 

The pair walked in silence for a time, and eventually Sokka asked her a new question.

 

“What happened to you?”

 

Azula raised an eyebrow. She glanced down her armor, but saw nothing amiss. She reached up and felt her hair, thinking that perhaps it had come undone, but it was still in place. She looked at him, and asked, “What are you talking about?”

 

Sokka held his sword in the other hand. The leather on the grip creaked as it rubbed against his skin. “Something happened to upset you. It looks like it hurt pretty bad.”

 

Azula scowled. How could he tell? It was disconcerting how perceptive he was.

“Oh, your sister didn’t laugh at my Zuko impression when first we met.”

 

Sokka stopped in his tracks to look at her. What she had said didn’t seem like a lie, but maybe he couldn’t always tell. Or maybe what she said was true, but it wasn’t the reason she was upset. As he stared at her, she covered her left eye with a hand and spoke in a gruff voice that sounded nothing at all like Zuko, “I must capture the Avatar to restore my honor.”

 

He stared, and then he closed his eyes. The absurdity of the situation hit him, and he began to laugh at it all. Here they were, enemies on opposing sides of a century long conflict. They were trapped under a mountain and separated from their respective people by a cave-in. He had neutralized her bending, and now she was doing bad impressions of her older brother? It was insane, so much was so serious, and this girl was making jokes? All he could do was laugh. And then he laughed some more. He wiped his eyes, and saw her smirking in triumph. He decided he rather liked that look, and immediately felt guilty for doing so.

 

Azula felt pride in herself. Now it would be easy to get him to let his guard down, surely that was why she had done it. She just wanted to make him feel at ease, nothing more. That’s what she told herself anyway. She almost believed it.

 

“If you’re done,” Azula said. Gesturing to the cave ahead of them. Sokka nodded, and the pair of them continued. They walked down the tunnel for a bit, and came across a drop off. The tunnel looked to continue after the drop, but they would have to descend at least twenty feet. Azula would have no qualms about it usually, but without the use of her bending, she wouldn’t be able to control her fall. It meant that she would have to climb down by hand and foot. She started to lower herself over the edge, but stopped when she saw Sokka just peer over the edge. He seemed to be judging the distance.

 

“You’re not going to jump, or are you an idiot?” she asked.

 

Sokka smirked slightly, and replied, “Oh, are you suddenly concerned for my well being?”

 

Azula’s face reddened slightly. How dare he… “Of course not. But if you get yourself hurt, I’m not going to carry you through the tunnel. I’ll be more than happy to watch you limp your way through.”

 

Sokka rolled his eyes. He stepped to the edge and sheathed his sword. Suddenly they were plunged into a full darkness, and Azula heard the slight rushing of wind and then the light scuffing of boots. The light returned, and she looked down to see the First Son grinning smugly.

 

“Just jump and I’ll catch you!” Sokka called up. Truthfully, he harbored no illusion that she would even consider doing that, and was only trying to irritate her. A task at which he succeeded. 

 

Azula glared at him, and briefly considered prying rocks from the wall to throw at him, but decided against it. She decided to ignore his request and began her climb. The handholds were sparse, so in order to find purchase in the small crevices, she removed her hair piece and stabbed it into one such opening. She tested it briefly, and when it seemed to hold she continued down the wall. She made it a little over a quarter of the descent when the crevice she had lodged her foot in crumbled. She instinctively tried to kick a jet of flame to steady herself, but without her bending the motion just threw her off balance. She lost her hold on the wall with her left hand, and her entire weight rested on her hair piece. It held for a moment, and then she was falling backwards.

 

She flipped over in mid air, preparing to land into a roll that would change her downward momentum in a forward one, but Sokka darted under her with a look of panic on his face. He dropped his sword and stretched his arms up toward her to break her fall. Azula had enough time to think he was a fool before the pair of them collided. Sokka managed to catch her, but the energy of her fall caused him to stumble backwards off balance. His foot caught on a small crack in the floor and the pair of them fell to the ground. Azula landed on Sokka’s chest, and when she looked up she found that their faces were so close they were nearly touching. Their eyes met, and Sokka flushed before looking away. When he turned his head, his nose rubbed the tip of her own.

 

Azula froze for a second, and then rolled off of her enemy. She didn’t say anything, and tried to crush the slight fluttering in the pit of her stomach. She wasn’t sure what that meant, but she doubted that it was a coincidence. She moved to straighten her hair, but remembered that she had let it down during the climb. She scanned the ground for the elaborate golden ornament, but her eyes landed on the glowing sword. She hadn’t noticed, or perhaps Sokka had intentionally kept that side of the blade hidden from her. On the flat of the blade was a word that looked as if it had been written in shadow. It was so dark, that against the light emanating from the blade it looked as if it were an unending abyss in the shape of a single word: Regret.

 

“You named your sword Regret?” She said, staring at it.

 

Sokka didn’t answer. Instead he picked up the weapon and held it aloft. He looked around at the cave floor, and spotted her hair piece. He bent down to pick it up, and noticed how sharp it had become. He didn’t know if it had always been that sharp, or if it had been damaged during Azula’s descent. Either way, he picked it up and slid it into a pouch at his belt.

 

“That belongs to me.” Azula said, stalking towards him. Sokka rolled his eyes.

 

“Really? And here I thought it belonged to that rock over there.” He started walking again. “You’ll get it back once we're out of this cave.”

 

“I will get it back now.” Azula snarled, stepping in front of him.

 

“Oh, yeah, sure. I’ll just arm the girl who’s constantly trying to kill me and my friends.”

 

“I have never tried to kill you! I only wanted to capture you.”

 

“Oh yeah, that way Zhao and the Fire Lord could do it personally.” Sokka glanced at Azula and saw the look of fury on her face. “Look, I’m not a thief. I will give it back, I promise. But honestly, I don’t really trust you, so the idea of handing you something to stab me with is not something that sits well with me.”

 

Azula stared at him, but had to admit to herself that she would do the same in a similar situation. Had the roles been reversed, she would have restrained him with the steel cuffs she had stowed within her armor. She begrudgingly conceded the point. “Fine.”

 

“I wasn’t going to stab you.” She said after a few minutes of walking in silence. 

 

“You’re still not getting it back until we get out of here.” Sokka said.

 

Azula pondered how she was going to capture him. She needed a way to get in close, and a way to get his guard lowered. She considered her options, and recalled what had happened only a few minutes ago. They had gotten remarkably close when he had caught her. Yes, if she could get that close again, she was sure that she could get him in her cuffs. How to… She got an idea. If it worked, it would be a small price to pay for his capture. She just hoped that Mai and Ty Lee wouldn’t learn of it.

 

But how to get him to trust her enough? She couldn’t lie; he could tell when she did that. She would have to be truthful, but not enough that he would catch on to her plan. What to do, what to say? She had to get close enough, and when they…

 

Remembering how confiding in her friends had brought them closer, she decided that if she did the same with Sokka, it might lead to the situation she was aiming for. She glanced up at him at her side and said, “My uncle betrayed me.”

 

“What?” Sokka asked, confused by the seemingly random revelation.

 

“Earlier you asked what happened to me.”

 

Sokka nodded. Azula swallowed and pressed forwards.

 

“He conspired with Zuko. He led me to believe that he was on my side after Zuko freed the Avatar and you from the Ilah stronghold. All the while he was planning to betray me.”

 

Sokka nodded slowly. That would be enough, he thought, and he knew the sting of betrayal.

 

“My father sent me to investigate claims that Zuko had betrayed the Fire Nation, and when I had finally caught him, Uncle attacked me and my friends. He knocked Mai and Ty Lee unconscious, and incapacitated me.”

 

“I see,” Sokka said, slightly unsure what to say in the moment.

“He knows what happens to people who fail the Fire Lord, and he chose Zuko anyway. I trusted him, and he-” Azula stopped speaking. A knot had formed in her throat, and she couldn’t get the words out.

 

“I… I’m sorry that happened to you.” Sokka said, “I’m not going to pretend that I want the Fire Nation to win, because I obviously don’t. But, I am sorry. I know how much it hurts.”

 

Azula nodded but didn’t say anything.

 

“Hahn. He was my friend, and he stabbed me in the back. Literally. Because of him… wait a minute,” He stopped walking and turned an accusatory eye on Azula. “Were you part of that plan? Did you help plot Hahn and Laluk’s betrayal?”

 

Azula shook her head. “No. I didn’t learn of it until the invasion had begun, and Hahn was already on our ship.”

 

Sokka nodded. He continued, “I figured out that there was a spy in our midst, but by then it was already too late. Had Zuko not warned us that Zhao had planned to kill the Moon Spirit, he probably would have succeeded. He nearly did anyway, but Yue…”

 

He stopped speaking. He took a breath and shook his head. “She has gone where I cannot follow.”

 

“What?” Azula asked, confused.

 

“I made a deal with a spirit. Because of that, I can’t go into the afterlife. I’ll just…” He trailed off and stared into the distance.

 

“What spirit?” Azula asked, her curiosity getting the better of her.

 

“Koh.”

 

“You made a deal with the Face Stealer?!” Azula asked, astounded that anyone would be stupid enough to treat with someone named The Face Stealer.

 

“You’ve heard of him?” Sokka asked in surprise.

 

“My uncle told me about him. I didn’t believe that he was real.” Azua returned. 

 

“It doesn’t matter now. What’s done is done.”

 

Azula frowned. “So this Yue woman, she was the one that merged with the Moon Spirit, right?”

 

Sokka nodded. Azula opened her mouth to speak, but thought better of it. Why would the Moon Spirit go into the afterlife? Or maybe there was a specific part of the spirit world where only the great spirits could enter, and that was what he meant? Either way, this topic wasn’t going to help her advance her cause.

 

The pair walked in silence, and Azula casually walked closer to Sokka. This did not go unnoticed by him, but he decided not to push more distance between them. She probably didn’t want to get separated. He ignored the voice telling him that didn’t make any sense.

 

“Is the light from your sword getting dimmer?” She asked, looking around as the cave seemed less illuminated. 

 

---

 

Zuko walked in the late afternoon sun. He hadn’t gone far, but the house was out of sight. He wondered where Ran had gone. Song’s mother hadn’t been seen by him all day, and their original ostrich-horse was gone. He considered asking about it, but figured it wasn’t important; he had more dire thoughts to consider.

 

What was he to do? He didn’t want his father to remain in power, that much was certain. He didn’t want the Fire Nation to devolve into civil war, which he was certain would follow should he take the throne and his father live. He wondered if Aang would spare him. Even now, after suffering so much at his hand, Zuko did not want his father to die.

 

He was jared from his thoughts when light footsteps scuffed the packed earth of the road. He turned and saw Song coming toward him. She smiled at him nervously, and he returned the gesture, if a bit forcedly. 

 

“I can’t imagine what you’re going through.” Song said, “I never even thought about what it must be like in the Fire Nation.”

 

“It’s not so bad,” He said, “Well, for most people.”

 

Song nodded, and looked away. Zuko remembered the look she carried earlier, and thought about what it meant. Venturing a guess, he said, “I’m sorry I lied to you. I wish I didn’t have to do that, but…”

 

“I understand,” Song said. “You couldn’t just go around telling people who you are, it wouldn’t be safe. I mean, I’m still a little disappointed, but I’m not mad.”

 

Zuko closed his eyes for a moment and leaned against a tree. He slid along the trunk to sit on the ground among the roots. After a second Song sat beside him. They stayed there quietly for a second, until Zuko spoke.

 

“I will join the Avatar. Other than that, I don’t know.”

 

“I see.” Song said, “But who will become Fire Lord after he defeats your father?”

 

Zuko shrugged. In truth, he wasn’t quite sure. His uncle had already refused. That left himself, Zhao and Azula. Zhao was certainly not a viable option. Azula might be, and Zuko thought her capable. But unless she somehow saw the error in the war, and became a much kinder person, he doubted her rule would be well received. Honestly, Zuko did want to become Fire Lord. Not for the love of power, but because he believed he could help his nation and the world. He cared for his sister, but a peacemaker she was not. Zuko didn’t express his thoughts to Song. Instead, he stood and took her by the hand to help her to her feet.

 

The pair walked side by side as they returned to the house. When they got there, Jee and Tahno were waiting anxiously for his return. Uncle was merely sitting and enjoying his tea, as if they had not been discussing the future of a nation. Zuko looked at Jee and Tahno, and then nodded.

 

“I will join the Avatar, and I will take my father’s place on the throne.”

 

---

 

The light was growing very dim indeed. Sokka wasn’t sure why, but the sword was still rather new to him, and he hadn’t taken the time to test it yet. He couldn’t think of a reason why it was glowing in the first place, when originally it had only left a faint trail of light behind it. When first he had drawn it in the cavern, it had shone as bright as any torch, but now it’s glow illuminated barely a few feet around them.

 

Azula was angry about this situation, that much was obvious. He could tell because she told him as much. Several times. Apparently, she thought him an idiot.

 

“Just in case I wasn’t clear, I think you’re not smart.”

 

“Okay!” He said, becoming angry himself now, “I get it, you don’t like me. But, even now, I would not do anything differently. And besides, I don’t need to wield my sword to see. That was only ever for your benefit.”

 

“What on earth are you talking about?” Azula asked, raising her eyebrows. Sokka began to respond, when his sword winked out altogether. Azula groaned, and started feeling around for the wall. If they were going to have to wait for her firebending to kick in, she might as well get comfortable.

 

“What are you doing?” Sokka asked, and she rolled her eyes at him.

 

“Can’t you lose sight of me for five seconds before you think i’m up to something? I’m trying to find the wall so I can sit against it. We’re going to have to wait for my bending to come back.”

 

“No, we can just keep going. Like I said, I can see in the dark.”

 

Azula laughed sarcastically, “Well, then, how many fingers am I holding up?” She finally found the wall and lowered herself to the floor to sit against it.

 

“None, you're sitting on the ground.”

 

“Lucky guess.” Azula said, leaning back.

 

“No, it’s not.” Sokka said, and he pinched the tip of Azula’s nose. She flinched back in surprise and slapped his hand away.

 

“Don’t do that!” She snapped. He had reminded her of what her mother had done when she was small, and that was not something she wanted to think about.

 

“Sorry, probably a bad time. Didn’t really think about it.” He said back, and Azula thought his tone sounded apologetic. She considered holding it against him, but decided otherwise. Not that she would tell him it was okay, either.

 

She felt his hand take hers, and she felt that unfamiliar fluttering in her stomach once more. “What are you doing?”

 

“I can see, you can’t. I’m not interested and waiting for your firebending to return, and I’m not going to leave you alone here either.”

 

“Why?” She asked.

 

“It would be wrong.”

 

Azula allowed him to pull her to her feet, and to lead her through the tunnel. Occasionally, he would warn her of a stalactite, or treacherous footing. They walked for several minutes, and Azula held onto his hand the entire way. She told herself that the only reason she enjoyed doing so was because she didn’t want to stay trapped in this dark cave until her bending returned.

 

Sokka, on the other hand, had conflicted feelings. He remembered well the first argument that he and Yue had, concerning this specific princess, and he thought that by holding her hand in this manner was somehow a betrayal of her memory. He wouldn’t have thought that at all, if he hadn’t come to enjoy her company, or notice the softness of her hands. It was odd, he thought, that they wouldn’t be hard and calloused by training. Then again, he hadn’t held the hand of a firebender before.

 

Ahead of them, he could see the faint glimmer of light. It broke the monotony of grays and the shifting depths of darkness that was his vision in this eternal night. He thought that it was the absolute lack of light that caused the odd sight. He could still see, somehow, but it wasn’t quite the way he was used to. When he noticed the faint light up ahead, he pulled Azula close to him and asked, “Up ahead and to the left, do you see that? There’s a light.”

 

Azula squinted into the darkness, and thought she could just faintly make out a change in the degree of darkness ahead. “I think so.”

 

Sokka pulled her along towards it, and gradually they came into a tunnel lined with glowing crystals. To one side, there was a chamber. The pair quickly glanced into it, and deciding it was unlikely to be the exit, they went the other direction. Azula realized that she could now see, but decided to forgo releasing Sokka’s hand. It would fit into her plan if she maintained this level of closeness.

 

The two of them proceeded down the tunnel, and in time they were met with the light of day. Sokka laughed and began to run, pulling Azula along behind him. When they were at last out of that cave, he released her hand. To his surprise, Azula did not let go. 

 

He turned to her in confusion, and found her looking up at him. He blinked, and she stepped in closer, her face tilted upwards, her lips slightly parted. He realized that she wanted to kiss him, and was going to. Part of him wanted her too, but even now his heart belonged to another. He leaned in for the briefest moment, but then closed his eyes and looked away.

 

“I can’t.”

 

Azula’s heart fell at his words, and she was surprised by her own disappointment. She quickly pushed down the emotion as she remembered that she was trying to capture him. Perhaps that part of her plan had failed, but she could still take him prisoner. Thinking quickly, she leaned down and placed her forehead onto his chest. Sokka released her hand, and Azula struck. Putting all of her weight behind the blow, she punched him in the diaphragm. The wind was knocked out of him at the surprise attack, and he staggered backwards as he tried to suck in a breath.

 

Azula swept his legs from underneath him and managed to spin him around to land on his stomach, the shock of which prevented him from drawing another breath. She moved quickly, taking the cuffs she had stowed with her armor, and trapped his hands behind his back.

 

Sokka finally managed to suck in a breath, and he coughed violently. He rolled onto his back and saw Azula smirking down on him.

 

“I cannot believe you did that.” He said, the hurt obvious in his voice.

 

“What can I say? I’m a monster.” Azula replied, staring at him.

 

“No, you’re not. You are, however, really mean.” Sokka returned.

 

Azula scoffed. “And what makes you so sure that I’m no monster?”

 

Sokka’s expression darkened and he seemed to look at something that wasn’t there. “I have seen and fought with monsters, Azula. Believe me when I say that you are not among them.”

 

Azula fell quite at his words.

 

“But still,” He said, “You are a jerk!” He yelled the last sentence. “Manipulating me into thinking you were going to kiss me, just so I would let my guard down!”

 

“Oh, come now. You said so yourself that the truce would only last until we got out of that cave. We are at war, if you didn’t know.”

 

“Ha! So is that your excuse? Were you planning all along to trick me like that? Was that whole thing just a ruse?”

 

“Wouldn’t you like to know?” She asked, leaning towards him. She picked him up by the shirt, hauling him to his knees. Suddenly, she felt the urge to follow through with her original plan.

 

“That was really underhanded, taking advantage of me like that.” Sokka said. Azula glared at him.

 

 “Shut up.” She said, drawing him closer to gare at him.

 

“I don’t have to, and you can’t make me! I think I’ll just-” Sokka was cut off when Azula pressed her mouth against his. His mouth fell open in genuine surprise, and she took that as an invitation to continue. After a moment, Azula pulled away and smirked at him. Sokka’s face grew red, and before he could say anything, Azula dropped him.

 

Suddenly he was on his side watching Aang and Katara fight Azula. Despite not yet having reimagined her bending, she was giving them a challenge. It didn’t last long, though. Eventually Katara froze her to the cliff face, and soon the three of them were airborne again.

 

---

 

Mai finally managed to thaw Azula out of her bonds. The princess shook the feeling back into her limbs.

 

“And that’s everything?” Ty Lee asked. Azula nodded. Mai rolled her eyes.

 

“Did he kiss you back?” Ty Lee asked.

“A little.”

 

“Well, I’m glad you’ve come to terms with it.” She said as she stomped out the torch.

 

“Come to terms with what?” Azula asked. Mai gave her a disbelieving look. Ty Lee crossed her arms.

 

“Fine.” Azula said through clenched teeth. “Maybe I do like him.”

 

---

 

 

“...and then you guys found me. Just in time to, otherwise she might have dragged me off to who knows where.” Sokka finished his tale.

 

Katara watched him with an unreadable expression. Aang, however, was not inclined to hide his reaction.

 

“I can’t believe she did that!” He cried, “What an underhanded trick! And then she had you in chains and kissed you anyway!”

 

Sokka nodded. “Yeah, I’m pretty mad about that.”

 

Katara continued to watch him, but then she said, “Are you going back?”

 

“What?” Sokka asked, confused, “To Azula? Uh, no, I hadn’t planned on it.”

 

Katara shook her head. “I mean are you going back into the void?”

 

Sokka shook his head. “No, I don’t think it’s a good idea. It made me consider things I normally would abhor, and besides, emotions are the best and worst part of being human. Only the dead don’t feel them, right?”

 

Aang and Katara exchanged a look, but nodded their agreement. Soon, Appa touched down just beneath a mountain top. The three companions hiked to the top to get a quick look, to see if their suspicions were unfounded. Cresting the top of the peak, they saw that their fears were confirmed. Omashu had fallen.

---

 

Author’s Note:

 

Hey all, I know I put lots of notes in here, but I like to communicate with the reader, even if you don’t always say anything back.

 

This is by far the longest chapter I've written, at 8,620 words not including this note. It’s roughly double the length of the previous updates in Part Two.

 

I made a few small changes to the last couple of chapters, mainly to increase the number of men lost in the 41st. Other stuff was to make it smoother and sound better. If you’re interested, go back and take a second look at Sokka’s fight with Fong in chapter 25.

 

If you feel so inclined, please let me know what, if any, scenes or lines of dialogue/narration stuck out if any. I particularly enjoyed, “...an allconsuming, ocean colored despair.” Really the whole end of that paragraph was something I enjoyed writing.

 

For those of you on AO3, you are now officially caught up with FFN. I wish there was a way to boost engagement/views, if only to get more feedback. I’d like to write as a career one day, so I hope to improve through this. Considering how much I’ve gotten better since chapter one, I'd like to think that it’s working.

 

Thanks for reading, Charlemagne OR WHATEVER

 

12/10/2022

Chapter 29: Planning and Preparation

Aang stood atop the mountain and that overlooked the city of Omashu. The once proud Earth Kingdom city had been humbled by war. Its sturdy wall had been covered with the cold steel of the FIre Nation, a measure to drive home a message: You are not free anymore.

 

He stood there as a sentinel; giving witness to the fallen city. He was still, but he wanted desperately to fly into motion. His friend, the last vestige of his childhood, was in that city, and quite possibly he had died. Aang wanted to fly in on his glider and cast out the invaders.

 

But his own doubts held him still. Twice before he had put his own desires before his duty to the world. A century ago he fled from his home at the temple, trying with all his might to leave behind a destiny that he had never wanted. In doing so, he was frozen in ice and lost to the world. A century of bitter war had followed in his absence. Thousands, perhaps millions, were slaughtered in a pointless conflict. His own people had been destroyed and he alone remained. Since his waking head felt as though a stranger in a strange land.

 

He had put his own beliefs before his duty when he had saved Zhao, and hundreds had suffered for it. One of his newfound friends had died, and another had changed. Possibly for good, and certainly not for the better. It was his own inability to separate from his desires and attachments that caused this suffering. All of it, and the burden of guilt was his alone. Aang thought he would forever carry it on his back.

 

Regardless, his dilemma remained. Could he afford to intervene? Could the world? What should he do? He wondered all of this and more. A soft spring wind tugged at his clothes. It kicked up loose stones and dirt. The scraping of leaves and the light clatter of small stones was all that could be heard. He took a deep breath.  The soft scent of life returning to the world filled his nose. The late afternoon sun danced across his skin, and still he found no answer.

 

How could he leave Bumi behind? But how could he risk the future of the world? He was not yet a fully realized Avatar, and he doubted that he and his friends would be enough to drive out the Fire Nation. He rubbed his eyes in exasperation. This was getting him nowhere.

 

“Sokka.” He called his friend. Sokka sauntered over to him.

 

“Yeah?”

 

“I don’t know what to do.”

 

Sokka looked out over the mountain city. He rubbed his chin, and spoke, “I know what you mean. Bumi’s your oldest friend, in every sense of the phrase, but you’re too important to risk. You might get captured, or killed.”

 

Aang nodded. “That’s the thing, isn’t it? I have a duty to the world. I must master the elements before the comet arrives, and then I’ve got to fight Vaatu, I think. It’s all a bit confusing, especially since I hardly know what’s going on with him.”

 

Sokka nodded his understanding.

 

“And still, how can I leave him? He’s my friend, the last of them from before. But how can I not, when I know what might happen if I shirk my duty?”

 

Sokka took a long and drawn out breath. He looked to be lost in thought, but when he turned his blue eyes on Aang they were filled with understanding. “So you’ve got to choose between duty and friendship. A hard choice if I’ve ever heard of one.”

 

Aang watched as his friend took out his boomerang. Sokka read the inscription and traced a thumb over the words. The young warrior licked his teeth before returning the weapon to its scabbard. Sokka closed his eyes, and when he opened them again they were concealed by darkness. He gazed out at Omashu as if searching. In time, he spoke and his voice seemed to echo as if speaking from far away.

 

“I do not know what we should do, Aang, but I know one thing at least. Bumi is alive, and I think he’s trying to spit on the soldiers patrolling near him.”

 

“What?” Aang said in surprise, his voice cracking. Sokka’s voice was disturbing, and the fact that his eyes were shrouded in shadow was even more so. Even with all of that vague… creepiness, Aang’s heart leapt at his words.

 

“I can see him,” Sokka’s mouth quirked up in a short lived smile, and when he spoke next he waved his fingers around theatrically, “With my… spirit powers!”

 

Aang snorted, despite the seriousness of the situation. “Well, they’re pretty useful, even if they’re not laser eyes. How is he? Where is he?”

 

“Uh, he’s not facing us. Give it a second he’ll turn around again, I think he’s doing that on purpose,” Sokka said, “Alright, he looks… well not good, but as good as you can expect for a man of his age. He seems unharmed, and they’ve got him locked in some kind of metal box held in the air. It’s not very big, it looks like a coffin really, but they left his face uncovered. He just spit again, and… Haha! Right on target! The guy looks confused, he thinks it’s raining!”

 

Aang smiled in relief. So at the very least, Bumi was still alive, and at least he had something to pass the time on. But knowing that his friend was alive and well did nothing to assuage his struggle. He thought it would have, but if anything it made it worse. He glanced over at Sokka, who’s eyes had returned to normal. A light scraping of leather on stone caught his attention and he saw Katara climbing up from where Appa and Momo waited.

 

“Hey,” She said, coming to stand beside him and overlook the city. She slipped her hand into his, and he too turned his attention to the city.

 

“I don’t know what to do.” He said to her, “Sokka can see Bumi, and says that he’s still alive. I want to rescue him, to try and drive the Fire Nation away, but..” He trailed off.

 

“I can’t tell you what we should do, Aang,” Katara said softly, “But whatever you decide, we’ll be with you.”

 

A strong hand landed on his shoulder. Sokka gave him a crooked grin. “Both of us. Where you go, we’ll follow.”

 

“Thanks guys,” Aang said with a smile. “I know I can count on you.”

 

He detached himself from the others and went to the single tree that stood atop the mountain. He sat down lotus style and pressed his fists together, closing his eyes. His friends had helped him, at least emotionally, but it was clear to him now. Whatever they were to do, it was his decision to make. The choices ahead were his burden to bear.

---

Jee and Tahno bowed deeply at the waist, their hands in the traditional Fire Nation style. Zuko returned the gesture, and said, “Go. You know what you have to do, and please be careful on your way.”

 

Both men stood at attention and saluted, and they spoke in unison, as if they had rehearsed the words, “As you wish, Fire Lord Zuko.”

 

Zuko recoiled as if struck, and before he could sputter his response the two men were already out of the gate and on the road. His uncle raised an eyebrow.

 

“Their work must be subtle, and they are not subtle men,” he mused.

 

Zuko turned his attention to his uncle, still flabbergasted at the exchange. He looked at Song, whose mouth was hanging open in shock. She too, evidently, had not expected for them to recognize him as Fire Lord outright. Zuko rubbed his face, ignoring the pain from his scarred eye as always. 

 

“Would, um- do you two want to come inside, your, uh, grace?” Song said awkwardly, unsure of what she was supposed to do in that situation.

 

“Song, please don’t call me that.” Zuko said, his discomfort evident. He did not miss the slight upward twitch of his uncle’s mouth.

 

“Okay, your eminence.” Song said, still not sure of the correct title, but partially teasing the young man as well.

 

“No, that's not-! Just call me Zuko, please.” He said, and his uncle smiled more broadly. His uncle stood and picked up his pack before heading inside. Song waited for Zuko to do the same before following them inside.

 

“Mom’s not going to be home for a day or two.” Song said, “And I don’t have to go back to the hospital for a few more days.”

 

Zuko nodded absently, and he drew a map of the Earth Kingdom from his pack. He laid it out on the low table and stared at it. His uncle sat down across from him and looked at it. Zuko broke the silence as he placed his finger on the map.

 

“We should be around here, right Uncle?” he asked, but it was Song who answered him.

 

“Actually we’re…” She took hold of his hand and moved it a little to the south east, perhaps an inch on the map. Zuko flushed slightly at the contact, something that surprised him.

 

“Th-” His voice hitched in his throat and he coughed into his other hand. “Thanks”

 

Song smiled at him and sat down beside him, her shoulder gently brushing against his side. Zuko was… confused. He didn’t know what was going on, but his uncle seemed to have an idea. The scarred prince elected to ignore it.

 

“Without access to FIre Nation information, tracking the Avatar is going to be difficult. We know that he’s going to be needing an earthbending teacher, so I think we can rule out the Air Temples. It’s likely that he’s gone to a major city, either Ba Song Se or Omashu.”

 

“Ba Sing Se, you mean.” Iroh corrected him.

 

“That’s what I said!” Zuko snapped. Iroh raised his hands placatingly.

 

“I do not believe that he would go there.” Iroh said, “it is very far, and from what records I have read, Air Nomads alway avoided that city. And I doubt he would be in Omashu. It was taken by General Ukano, who is now governor. The city fell without resistance, and no were lives lost on either side.”

 

“What? When did that happen?” Zuko asked. Song grew pale at the revelation.

 

“A month before the siege.” Iroh answered. “It isn’t important now, and the city will be liberated soon enough, should the Avatar defeat the Fire Lord. We need to go to a trade city, someplace where information flows freely.”

 

“Do you have a suggestion?” Zuko said, and his uncle stroked his beard in thought. Song, however, did seem to have an idea. She placed a finger on the map, at a point not far from Omashu.

 

“What about Gaoling?”

 

“Hmm…” Iroh said, “It would take a while to get that far south over land, but otherwise it’s a good destination.”

 

“How long?” Zuko asked.

 

“Eh,” His uncle said, shaking his hand in an unsure gesture, “Perhaps a month, maybe more. On top of that, we would have to pass by Omashu.”

 

Zuko nodded slowly. Gaoling was outside of Fire Nation territory, but it was very close to the front. On top of that, it would take them a month to travel there by land, perhaps more… Still, they could barter for passage on a ship. A colony merchant vessel could get them to Yu Dao, and that was significantly closer to their destination. There were problems with that plan though. First and foremost, the ships would be searched by the port authority upon docking. Thanks to the Fire Lord, he was going to stand out wherever he went. His Uncle might stand a chance, as his beard had grown out a bit.

 

Maybe he could pose as a sailor again? He doubted that it would work on a merchant vessel. He might be able to wear a mask… no, they would ask him to remove it. He needed a way to conceal his identity. He decided to voice this thought aloud.

 

“I can’t think of a way to conceal my identity. My picture is likely posted all across the occupied territories, and I’m kind of hard to mistake for someone else. Do either of you have an idea? If we could disguise me in some way, then we could book passage on a ship and get closer to Gaoling.”

 

Iroh considered the idea, and in time he came up with a solution. “We could cover you in bandages, and say that you were injured on the front, or perhaps in a bandit attack. If we made them look realistic enough, then I doubt that anyone would examine you too closely.”

 

Zuko nodded. It was decent enough plan, and simple plans tended to work out better than the more convoluted machinations, like the ones Azula preferred. Well, they usually worked out for her, but she was an exception.

 

“That’s a great idea!” Song said, “I can travel with you and pose as your caretaker!”

 

Zuko’s heart stopped in his chest at the idea of Song accompanying them on their journey. It 

had already been fraught with danger, deception and violence fell on every turn. He had no 

illusions that she wouldn’t be caught in the crossfire.

 

“Absolutely not.” Zuko said without a moment of hesitation.

 

“But, I can help! I-” Song argued, but Zuko cut her off.

 

“Song, you cannot come with me. The path I walk holds nothing but war and ruin! It is lined with ash, and shattered bones!” Zuko was shouting now, Though he didn’t realize it. The idea of Song coming across the likes of Zhao was enough to bring him to anger, not that it was hard to anger him. “I've already put you in too much danger as it is, I cannot, will not, put you in any more.”

 

Song stared at him for a moment. She bore a crestfallen expression, and quickly excused herself from the room. Zuko pinched the bridge of his nose, and his uncle cleared his throat. Zuko glanced at the man, and was surprised to see a look of disapproval on his face.

 

“What?” He asked, “Surely you don’t think she should come with us.”

 

“That is not the issue, Prince Zuko. That girl likes you, and you shouted at her when she offered to come with you on your journey.”

 

“What?!” Zuko gaped, “How can you tell?”

 

Iroh closed his eyes. He took a deep and slow breath, before opening his eyes again.

 

“I am not going to dignify that with an answer. Get up, and apologize for shouting at her. There is no excuse for such poor treatment of such a kind young lady.”

---

The last vestiges of the light cast by the setting sun fell upon Aang's face. He opened his eyes after a few hours of meditation. He watched Katara play a little game with Momo using her waterbending, and Sokka practiced his sword forms a short way down the mountain side. He smiled when he saw Sokka frown slightly. The warrior carefully re-placed his feet and repeated the motion he had been trying to execute.

 

Aang wasn’t happy that Sokka hadn’t performed perfectly, or that he was disappointed with the action. Aang was happy to see some emotion on the young man’s face. It was a relief to have him with them again. Glancing up at the sky, he saw that clouds were blowing in from the east. The night would be dark.

 

Katara was the first to notice that he had finished meditating. She returned the water into her pouch and came over to him. Noticing the movement, Sokka came to join them. Aang watched as he sheathed his sword. When his hand brushed against the pouch on his belt, his brow furrowed slightly. He reached into the pouch and drew out something that Aang couldn’t see. Sokka fingered it for a moment before frowning and returning it to his belt pouch.

 

“What did you decide?” Katara asked. Aang took a slow breath before answering.

 

“I know a way into the city without having to go through the gate. Getting in would be easy enough, but getting Bumi and getting out would be too dangerous.” Aang felt a tightness at his throat, “I- We have to go on. We’re not strong enough to retake the city, and it’s too dangerous for us to try and rescue Bumi.”

 

His eyes were wet. He shut them tight, and tears leaked from them all the same. Katara wrapped an arm around his shoulder. Sokka nodded and frowned, stroking his chin in thought. He again looked toward the city, and his eyes became shrouded in darkness.

 

“I… Maybe we don’t have to be strong.” Sokka said, his voice echoing slightly.

 

Aang opened his eyes, hope racing through his chest. “What do you mean?”

 

“Well,” Sokka began, “At first I could only do it when I entered the void, but now I can do it regardless.”

 

“Do what?” Katara asked with trepidation. Aang harbored her sentiment, he did not know what Sokka was talking about, and when his eyes seemed to disappear like that it was really creepy.

 

“It’s easier if I just show you.” He walked into the long shadow of the tree Aang was sitting against. “Can you see me?”

 

Aang was a little confused. Perhaps Azula wore poisoned lipstick and it was making him delirious. Regardless of his concern, he and Katara nodded. In an instant, the shadow darkened and Sokka disappeared. 

 

Obviously, their reactions were enough to tell Sokka that whatever he had done was working. He stepped out of the shadow and it returned to normal. He began to explain. “Part of my deal with the Face Stealer. I can manipulate shadows a bit, I guess. I was doing it subconsciously before, but now I think I can do it on command.”

 

“That,” Katara said, “Is really creepy.”

 

“I managed to figure that out, thanks. I didn’t really get to choose what he gave me. He didn’t even tell me there was a cost, he basically…” Sokka frowned. A look of profound sadness came across his face. He shook his head and produced an obviously forced smile. “Anyway, I think we can get in and out unseen. At the very least, you should be able to talk to him, even if we can’t get him out of there.”

 

Aang stared off into the middle distance. Could they do it? As Sokka said, at the very least he could speak to him, perhaps for the last time. Maybe they could get him out of there, and take him with them. Maybe they could try. Was it a risk worth taking? If he was captured by the Fire Nation then all would be lost. But if he could get Bumi out of the city then he would be that much closer to mastering the elements.

 

“I…” He started to speak. He swallowed and started again. “How much of the city can you see?”

 

Sokka titled his head to the side. He looked towards Omashu and his eyes were again concealed by shadow. “Not too much. A lot of the roads and streets are blocked by buildings, but I can see Bumi alright. He’s suspended in the air on a long chain, not far from the palace. It looks like a team of guards is going on rounds… no, more than one. A second group just came into view.”

 

Aang nodded slowly. He considered that if they could come up with a good enough plan, they might just be able to get the king. He used his staff to draw a rough sketch of the city in the dirt. He placed a small mark by the entrance of the drainage pipe that he knew could serve as their ingress. Sokka stooped next to him and observed his crude drawing. The older boy marked a spot just below the palace to indicate where Bumi would be located.

 

“Any ideas?” Aang asked him. Sokka looked thoughtful for a moment and nodded.

 

“It looks like they’re building a giant statue at the top of the city. It’s surrounded by scaffolding and canvas. If we can get Bumi to the top of the scaffolding, you can call Appa with your bison whistle.”

 

Sokka glanced upwards before he continued speaking, “It looks like it might rain, so I don’t think there’s much chance of him being spotted if he moves quickly. The three of us can get into the city and sneak our way over to Bumi.”

 

Aang looked over the valley towards Omashu. He was beginning to think they could do it, get his dear friend and leave undetected. He was jared from his musings when Katara spoke.

 

“We’ll need someone to play lookout. If Bumi’s being held in the open, somebody’s gotta watch for guards.”

 

“I can do it.” Sokka said, “You two are benders, so you’ll probably be more useful getting him out of his cell. Well, it’s more of a box really. And besides, I can see and hear much better, especially in the dark.”

 

Aang’s eyebrows raised in surprise. “You can hear in the dark?”

 

He immediately realized how stupid that sounded. Aang had meant to ask if he could hear better in the dark, but it had come out wrong. Before he could amend his statement, Katara laughed and Sokka answered him.

 

“Yeah, and I can also breathe in the rain!”

 

“I meant hear better.” Aang said flatly. Sokka shook his head.

 

“No, I can just see in the dark better than you guys. My hearing and other senses have gotten stronger too, since the north pole.”

 

Katara nodded slowly. Aang watched her carefully, but didn’t say anything. She had been a little withdrawn since they had come out of the tunnel and Sokka shared the story of his trip with Azula. He wondered what she thought about it. Standing up, he stretched himself and stared at Omashu for what felt like the hundredth time.

 

“Let’s do it then. In a few hours, when it’s fully dark, we’ll rescue Bumi.”

---

Zuko followed Song out and into the yard of her home. She had gone to the small building that served as the shelter for Sugar Foot and the other ostrich-horse. He could see her gently stroking the feathers of the animal’s face. Zuko wasn’t quite sure what he was going to say.

 

“I…” He said, rubbing the ever lengthening hair on the back of his head. Song didn’t look over at him. He sighed and continued on. “I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to shout. It's- I just don’t want you to get hurt, and if you come with me you will.”

 

Song glanced over at him but looked away quickly. He reached out and took her hand.

 

‘Song,” He said, “I know that you’re not a child, but I can’t take you with me.”

 

She squeezed his hand gently and met his eyes. “I know,  Zuko. I can’t fight, and I’ll probably just get in the way. I didn’t think about it, or anything really. I just… How can I sit back and do nothing when others are out there, risking their lives and trying to save the world?”

 

Zuko nodded, and he was sympathetic towards her. “What does it mean to save the world? Is it alway fighting in great battles? Do you have to charge recklessly into the fray? I don’t think so. At least, I hope that’s not all it is.” He remembered the kindness she showed him on their first meeting, and of how her story had helped him to see the truth.  “Maybe it’s something anyone can do. Small things, like showing kindness to a stranger who’s lost his way.”

 

Song seemed to consider her words, and smiled up at him. She stepped in closer to him, and suddenly Sugar Foot let out a mighty caw and stuck her head between the two. She nuzzled Zuko affectionately and gave Song a scathing look. Zuko was confused by the sudden outburst, but Song just began to laugh.

 

“Okay, okay!” She said to the bird, “I’m not going to steal him from you.” She held a hand out for the animal and was eventually allowed to stroke the feathers on its head. She continued to pet Sugar Foot for a while, and eventually looked at Zuko.

 

“Will we ever see each other again?”

 

“I-” Zuko frowned. He didn’t know if they would meet again, and honestly he had not expected to see her a second time until recently. He thought that he would like to come back here, after everything was over. If he survived, of course. With his luck, he doubted that was a certainty.

 

“I don’t know.” He said sincerely. “I hope so.”

 

Song smiled. She looked back at Sugar Foot. “You’ll have to take her with you, at least. I doubt she’ll let you go a second time.”

 

The ostrich-horse in question shook her head and stomped her claw, as if agreeing with Song’s assessment. Zuko rolled his eyes at the steed. In truth, his original plan had been to come and get Sugar Foot, so that his uncle wouldn’t have to walk all the way too… wherever they decided to go. It had been barely a single day, and yet his plans had been thrown completely aside. Although, he had to admit, not dying or being caught wasn’t much of a plan. It was more of a life goal, really.

 

“When are you leaving?” Song asked.

 

“Soon,” Zuko said, and then he thought she might have been hoping for them to leave immediately. Zuko found that possibility to be rather upsetting, and he realized that he liked Song.

 

“Oh, right. That makes sense, I mean, you do have to find the Avatar.” Song said, and Zuko thought she sounded a little put out by the idea. He sighed, and realizing that he was still holding her hand, he led her back to the house.

---

The three of them rode on across the bridge and back into Omashu. Once they had gotten her out of the ice, Azula had been able to access the whistle that would summon their mounts. The gecko-lions were incredibly well suited for traversing over the mountains, and were able to pinpoint the signal from miles away. After they had finally gotten started on their journey,  it had taken them only a few short hours to return to the city. The sun had set a couple of hours ago, and now the trio were back in the city.

 

“And that’s when the badger-moles carried us out of the mountain. You know the rest.” Ty Lee said cheerfully. Mai sent a puff of air at her bangs, causing them to lift from her forehead.

 

“That must have been hard for you, Mai, being stuck with those idiots. I’m sure Ty Lee fit right in though.” Azula said.

 

“You know, I did fit in with… wait, Azula! That’s so mean!” Ty Lee said, and she began to pout.

 

Azula smiled slightly at her friend's indignance, but Ty Lee’s words brought her back to a couple of hours previous. Someone else had called her mean, and then he had managed to get away. It was odd. She should be upset, but in reality she felt… relieved. Why, though? She had set out to capture Sokka and his friends, to take them back to her father in chains. It wasn’t the exact mission given her by the FIre Lord, but… She knew it was an obligation to her people that the Avatar be captured. If he went free, then the war might well be lost. They were so close, and if the boy mastered the elements then the Fire Nation would snatch defeat from the jaws of victory.

 

Why didn’t that idea disturb her as it once had? Was it because of what the mad king had told her? Or was it the story of the forty first? Perhaps it was because after spending so much time with Sokka she had come to realize that the other peoples of the world weren’t just faceless automatons to be conquered and destroyed. They were just as real as the people of the Fire Nation. Azula shook her head. She knew her duty, and she would follow through with its completion.

 

They made their way to the palace. Azula’s hair was whipped against her face by the wind as it picked up. She hadn’t gotten her hair piece back after she and Sokka had gotten out of the cave. She had gotten distracted, and it had slipped her mind. She wondered if he would keep it, or if he would throw it away at the first opportunity.

 

“Finally.” Mai said as they entered the governor's palace. “I can’t wait to take a bath.”

Chapter 30: A bad idea

Appa hovered in the air beside the mouth of the drain. Aang tugged at it a few times, and Sokka began to think that it wasn’t going to budge. Perhaps their desperate rescue attempt would end in failure before it began, and they would have to set off without the king. Or maybe they could come up with another solution.

 

Finally, Aang managed to pry the drain open and a flood of horrid water and other… things flowed out. Aang took the lead, and Katara followed him. The two of them used their bending to keep the horrendous fluid from covering them, but they had evidently forgotten to extend such courtesy to Sokka. He grew annoyed quickly, and called to his sister in a hoarse whisper.

 

“Katara! Help me not get covered in this filthy water too, if you don’t mind!”

 

“Oh, right, sorry,” Katara said, and she immediately included him in her protection. Sokka was grateful. He was beginning to feel the fatigue that he should have felt in the long weeks since… well, he had forgone food and sleep for too long, he realized. He had eaten sparingly, and slept very little. He had relied on the Mantle to sustain him, and he was beginning to feel the desire to wear it now. Perhaps it was for the trials ahead that he wanted to take it up, to let the shadow course through him. Or, maybe, he just wanted to feel the strength.

 

They made their way out of the sewer in short order, and Sokka took the lead before they came out of the underground. He opened the gate, and pulled Koh’s Shadow to his ears. With the power concentrated in that spot, he could hear with incredible clarity. He could hear the tromp of a squad of soldiers turning a corner and moving away from them, and the quiet and fearful conversations of families in their homes. He swallowed and ignored the voices of the conquered citizens, focusing instead on his search for approaching footsteps. There were none.

 

“Alright,” He said quietly, “Let’s go. Stay together, and Katara, guard the rear. I’ll be able to hear anyone coming close, but stay alert anyway.”

 

The two others nodded, and Sokka was disturbed when he found he could hear the tendons and bones in their necks move around. It was not a pleasant discovery; he found it rather nauseating for some reason. He grimaced and pulled himself out of the sewer. With an effort of will he condensed the shadow around them to conceal their presence. In a few moments Aang and Katara were out and the grate was replaced.

 

With a quick hand sign that they had come up with while planning the mission, he motioned the group forward. Katara and Aang bent low to the ground while they walked, but Sokka carried himself normally, albeit with a sense of urgency. Upon noticing his companions walking in the most suspicious manner possible, he stopped. Aang and Katara stopped too and glanced at him.

 

“What?” Aang asked, and then looked around as if he was expecting an owl-cat to jump out at them with a flaming spear.

 

“Stop walking like a pair of goblins!” He hissed.

 

“What’s a goblin?” Katara asked.

 

“It’s an ugly little greenish-gray man who walks around like the two of you! We’re trying to be inconspicuous. We probably won’t be seen, but if we are then all of this,” He crouched down and bent over, waving his hands in the air in a very ridiculous fashion, “is going to make us stand out!”

 

Aang grinned sheepishly, and Katara furrowed her brows in annoyance. The pair of them straightened up and then the three of them began walking again. Before long, Sokka held up a hand in the gesture that they had assigned to mean stop. The infiltrators stood in the shadow of two buildings, and though it was already dark enough in the starless night that they were unlikely to be noticed, Sokka pulled at the shadow to help conceal them.

 

A contingent of nine soldiers walked past them. They stopped before the gap between buildings that the would-be rescuers were hiding in. A spearman carrying a lantern walked towards them and casually held up his light. He frowned slightly when he couldn’t see any farther into the darkness. He moved to step forwards and inspect more closely when one of his comrades called out to him.

 

“Eh, it’s probably fine, Shen. I doubt that there’s anyone lurking around here, and besides, I want to finish our patrol before the rain starts.” The lead soldier said.

 

Shen paused, and turning around he said, “Are you sure Sergeant?”

 

The sergeant nodded and Shen rejoined the group. They walked off to finish their patrol, and Katara smiled. She leaned in to Aang and whispered, “...And they’re off like a herd of turtles.”

 

Aang’s eyebrows rose in mild curiosity. “What does that mean?”

 

“It means that they’re not very good at their jobs.” Sokka said dryly.

 

Aang snorted quietly and they continued on their way. The darted through a few allies as they followed Aang’s directions to the upper tiers of the city. Before long they came to the first stair leading to the next tier. It was heavily guarded by dozens of bored and discontent looking soldiers. The three of them exchanged worried looks, and Aang bid them to follow him. They raced through the city around the high wall made by the next tier for a short time, until Aang made the sign for them to stop. 

 

“If we can climb up here, we’ll be able to cross the city without running into any of the other stairways. We’ll have to climb a lot though since they’re probably guarding all of the steps.”

 

Sokka nodded. Katara pulled water from a rain barrel and coated her arms in it, forming the water into long tentacles. She looked at Sokka and said “I can lift you when I get to the top.”

 

Slightly affronted at the suggestion, Sokka narrowed his eyes. “Only if you get up there first.”

 

Katara snorted and shot him a quick smile before latching onto the stone wall with her bending. She started to climb but Aang bid them to wait. “Let me go first, that way I can make sure that nobody is coming.”

 

Sokka nodded at the suggestion but focused on his hearing. “ I can’t hear anything, but go up first anyway. I don’t know if I can concentrate on my hearing and still have the ability to climb faster than Katara.”

 

Katara rolled her eyes, and Aang flew up the wall with his glider. When he reached the top he alighted and gave his surroundings a quick scan. Seeing nothing he waved the hand signal for them to follow. Katara was about to ascend when Sokka lightly smacked her on the shoulder.

 

“What?” She said.

 

“Wanna race?” Sokka said back.

 

Katara looked at him and smiled slightly. “Is this the time for games?”

 

“Chicken!” Sokka said with a crooked grin. His sister rolled her eyes.

 

“On three. One. Two. Three!”

 

The pair of them rushed to the wall and began to climb. Sokka had expected the race to be close, as he had become far faster than Katara since his last meeting with the Face Stealer. Evidently, he wasn’t fast enough to keep pace with her when she used her bending to help her along. In seconds she was up and over the top of the wall, while Sokka was still climbing the thirty feet of stone. He made remarkable progress. Far better than he would have done without the Mantle, but it still took him half a minute to crest the tier.

 

“What was that about getting up here first?”

 

“I may have overestimated my abilities.”

 

Aang snorted with laughter. Sokka grinned in mild embarrassment, and the three of them continued on their way. They didn’t come across any unexpected obstacles, and soon they were on the tier that Bumi was being held on. They sheltered in the shadow of a building, and waited for the first patrol to pass them by. There were six squads patrolling this tier of the city. They would make a circuit of the perimeter and then march through the courtyard that the Mad King was being held over. Once this squad passed through, they would have a little more than ten minutes before the next one came. As soon as the first group passed, Sokk would make his way to the palace and scale the wall to stand watch on the roof.

 

“...Alright, here they come,” Sokka said.

 

“Which group is it?” Katara asked.

 

“I think its squad pig-chicken.” Sokka replied. They had assigned each squad of soldiers a name. Sokka had intended just to number them, but Aang had suggested giving them animal names that were relative to how efficient each group was. Pig-chicken was one of the less efficient squads.

 

“That’s good. Means the next group will be turtle-duck. Should be easier to get up there with them than others.” Katara whispered. Sokka nodded in agreement. He put his hand on his sword and drew it out partially. The silver glow had returned.

 

“Alright.” He said in a whisper, “Once this squad gets outside the courtyard, I’ll get into position. One of you keep an eye on the palace roof. I’ll draw my sword and the light will be your signal. One flash means they’re almost here, two means you’re good to go.”

 

“What if we have to get out of here?” Aang asked.

 

Sokka shook his head, “If it comes to that, then you’ll hear the signal. Won’t be able to miss it.”

 

They waited in silence for a moment, and Aang spoke again. “What’s your sword called? I never asked.”

 

Sokka was silent for a moment as he looked in the middle distance, his eyes focused on the past. He frowned slightly before returning to them. “It was named Moonlight, but I changed it after…” He trailed off.

 

Katara and Aang exchanged a quick look, a message of compassion flowing between them. Katara broke the glance and asked, “What’s it called now?”

 

“... Regret.”

 

Aang opened his mouth to speak, and then he closed it again. He blinked once and nodded. Katara, however, was not willing to let the name pass without comment.

 

“Regret?” She asked. Sokka wasn’t sure how to interpret the tone, so he decided to explain.

 

“It’s… Because I wish it hadn’t come to this. After the siege of the north pole, after Yue… I guess I understand what it means to take a life. I realized how many mistakes I've made, and I wish that I knew then what I do now. So when I bare my sword at an enemy, I want them to know that I regret what might come of it, and that they should regret making an enemy of me.”

 

There was silence for a few heartbeats, and Sokka continued. “More than that, I guess, it’s… If I had been faster, or stronger, or smarter, or... I don’t know. If I hadn’t hesitated when I had the chance to kill Zhao, then she might still be with us.”

 

“There are others like him. I can see it in them, it’s like their spirits are rotten, beyond saving. Maybe if I had…”

 

Sokka felt an ache in his chest, and the hole that had been born with Yue’s leaving seemed to burn and freeze inside of him. He swallowed past the tightness in his throat and shook his head.

 

“Sokka…” Katara said, but her brother raised a hand in the signal they had designated to mean silence. She was going to protest, but the tramp of armored boots alerted them to the presence of the pig-chicken guard squad.

 

“...and then I said, ‘you look like you eat sand! Don’t throw stones, lady!’ and well, she didn’t take kindly to that. Yeah, so, that’s how I got the scar on my ear.” One of the soldiers said, and it was followed by a roar of boisterous laughter.

 

“I can’t believe you’re not married, with that silver tongue!” One of the other squad members quipped. A third man snorted, and the first man said, “Right?! And my mom always said it was made of lead!”

 

More laughter sounded as the guards walked out of the courtyard. Sokka was surprised that the conversation of the guards could force his mouth to quirk upwards, but the idea of someone eating sand did the trick. Despite his previous melancholy, the gaiety of their conversation had managed to lift his spirits. The people of the Fire Nation weren’t so bad, he thought, it was their Fire Lord who was the problem. No, he reconsidered, it was Vaatu. He had taken hold of the Fire Lords, starting with Sozin. He had almost taken Zuko, but the prince had thrown it off. He wondered why he hadn’t been able to influence Azula… 

 

His hand floated down to the pouch at his belt. He brushed his fingers against the ornament he had taken from her. He wondered what he should do with it, perhaps he should throw it away, or maybe return it to her when next they fought. He shook his head to clear himself of his distractions. He turned to his companions and spoke.

 

“Alright, I’ll get in position. Remember to stay hidden until I give the signal.”

 

Aang and Katara gave their agreement and Sokka left them to their task. He darted along in the shadow until he came to the building. The palace wall had been plated with metal to prevent earthbenders from successfully taking it down or breaking in. Sokka considered it to be a boon, for the metal plate provided better hand holds. Overlapping steel panels and protruding bolts were easier to grasp than the small crevices in the walls of the lower tiers. Soon he was high up on the wall, passing by balconies unseen. 

 

He was nearly on the top of the building when he caught the faint scent of something familiar through one of the last balconies. He paused as his heartbeat quickened. He spared a quick glance into the room within and saw that it was empty, although a few lamps were dimly lit. He decided to push past it, but stopped again almost instantly. He had gotten an idea that he was sure would cause him no small amount of catharsis. It would irritate her to no end, but that was part of the appeal. Sparing a quick glance at the courtyard, he determined that he still had another five minutes to get in position, and he was only a few dozen feet away.

 

Sokka climbed over the railing and into Azula’s room.

 

---

 

Aang and Katara watched the palace wall. They knew that Sokka would soon be on the roof, and he would give the signal for them to begin. Katara drew her attention away from the palace for a moment and scanned their surroundings. Seeing nothing in the sparing light of the lamps and torches, she looked up towards where King Bumi was being held. She could almost see him, and she thought she could almost see motion in the sky above them.

 

She turned her attention back towards where Sokka was climbing, and was just in time to spot her brother ducking into an open balcony.

 

“What?!” She said in a hoarse whisper.

 

Aang looked at her and shrugged. “Why would he go in there?”

 

“Maybe there was something he thought we could use?” Katara said, though she didn’t really suspect that to be the case. Aang reached out and tentatively took her hand. She let him and he squeezed lightly. The two watched Sokka in confusion and worry as rain began to fall.

 

---

Sokka surveyed the room quickly, and determining that he was alone, he went about his business. He took the hairpiece from his beltpouch and placed it on the desk. Spotting some paper and writing instruments he decided to write a note.

 

It seems that you’re not back yet, so I guess we missed you. Ah, well, some things can’t be helped.

 

As I said before, I am not a thief, so I think I’ll return this while you’re away. Too bad you couldn’t capture me, so better luck next time.

 

-Sokka

 

He snickered as he imagined the indignation and outrage that Azula would surely experience when she found the note. He began to feel rather smug, and pleased with himself. As he was rather sure that Azula and her friends couldn’t have made it to Omashu yet, he wasn’t worried about the note being found before they left with King Bumi. He had been a little surprised that she would have been here at all, but it made sense that she would be staying in the captured city. He wondered if she had known they would be coming here, or if it had been chance.

 

Taking out Azula’s hairpiece, he placed it and the note on the bed before climbing out of the balcony and up the last few dozen feet of the palace wall. Within a few minutes he was in position. He pulled on Koh’s shadow and looked for the patrols. He was right on time, as the turtle-duck squad was nearly at the courtyard. He glanced over and could make out Aang and Katara looking at him through the darkness and the rain.

 

He partially drew out his sword, and the pale white light flashed. He saw recognition in their faces as he plunged Regret into its sheath fully. Aang and Katara stepped further away from the courtyard and into the shadows, but not so much as to be hidden from his sight.

 

The turtle-duck squad tramped through the courtyard, slightly out of step with each other. They weren’t a very good team. He waited for them to make their way through the courtyard and further along their route before he gave the signal.

---

Aang saw the signal to begin, and he jumped into the air with his glider. Katara stayed on the ground, collecting water from the rain and drinking barrels. Sokka had guessed that the courtyard was being used as a training yard, at least that’s why he thought that the barrels were there. She figured it was in case of fire. Either way, it was extremely convenient.

 

Aang alighted at the top of Bumi’s metal box. The old king was snoring happily, as if he did not have a care in the world for being held prisoner in a city that he had ruled for most of his life. Aang hung onto the side of the cell and tried to rouse his friend. 

 

“Bumi! Wake up!” He said, gently blowing wind in the old man’s face. Bumi jerked his head around with a snort, and recognizing Aang, he said, “Where’s Momo?”

 

Aang smiled and huffed a small laugh. Bumi was the same, just as he remembered him.

 

“He’s with Appa. We’re getting you out of here, so just hold on tight.” Aang began to pull up some of the water that Katara was gathering, but he stopped when Bumi spoke again.

 

“Hold on a minute, Aang, let’s not be too hasty!”

 

“What? Why not? We’ve only got a few minutes before the Ostrich-horse squad gets here! They’re one of the best squads!”

 

Bumi nodded in agreement, but asked, “Animal names in relation to the efficiency of the squads?”

 

“Yeah, we got lucky and got here in time to do this with the Turtle-ducks, but we still have to-”

 

“I can’t go with you Aang. I need to stay here.” Bum cut him off.

 

“I- what? Why?” Aang said, nearly losing his grip on the box in surprise.

 

“When the Fire Nation began their assault on the city, I knew that the cost of defense would be too great, and that a better opportunity to defeat them would soon present itself. I know I had to wait and listen for the right time to fight off the Fire Lord’s army, otherwise I wouldn’t be able to defeat them at all.”

 

“Wait, so you’re just… waiting?” Aang said in astonishment. The rain pattered against the metal prison the Bumi was locked in. Water streamed down the Avatar’s face and into his open mouth. He shut it promptly. “But you’re trapped in this box, how can you do anything?”

 

“Trapped? No, I’m not trapped. I can get out if I want.” Bumi said with a delighted grin.

 

“Wh- how?” Aang asked. Bumi chuckled and then screwed up his face. A stone flew up and landed in Bumi’s mouth. Aang recognized it as the rock candy that his oldest friend was so partial to.

 

“You can still earthbend?” He asked, once more astounded by the mad genius. Bumi swallowed and nodded.

 

“Of course I can! They didn’t cover my face! Anyway, like I said, you’ve got to get out of here. I’m fine, and I’m waiting for the right moment to strike.”

 

Aang hung his head. “But, if I leave you behind, who is going to teach me earthbending?”

 

Bumi looked at him thoughtfully. “Aang, the key to earthbending is to wait and listen for the right moment. Firebenders make their own openings, and waterbenders use their opponent's energy against them. When you find someone who waits and listens before they move, then you will find your teacher.”

 

---

 

Azula walked with Ty Lee towards her room. They had just come out of the bathing wing. Azula was rather annoyed that her quarters did not have their own attached bath, but somehow the palace had been equipped with an entire wing of individual bathing chambers. What had the foolish monarch been thinking? At least they weren’t communal. Not that Azula would have deigned to use such a thing. She would have ordered the wing vacated until she had finished, and that was the worst case scenario.

 

“So, yeah, I think I’ll go back to the circus when everything is over. Or maybe I’ll join the royal guards! Wouldn’t that be great?! I could be your guard when you become the Fire Lord!” Ty Lee said. Azula laughed at the thought.

 

“I don’t think you have what it takes to be a royal guard, Ty Lee.” She said, and Ty Lee pouted.

 

“What? I can fight!”

 

“I know that Ty Lee, but I can’t see you strutting around at attention all day. Besides, you already said you don’t like how stiff the soldiers act.” Azula said.

 

“When did I say that?” Ty Lee asked, raising her brows curiously.

 

“Oh, back when all of this started, on Zhao's ship. You remember, you made us eat breakfast in the galley.” Azula answered.

 

“Oh, yeah… I had forgotten. I guess since we haven’t been on a ship for a while it slipped my mind.” Ty Lee said, and she changed the subject without segue. “When do you think that Mai’s going to be done?”

 

Azula raised an eyebrow. Mai had gone to spend time with her mother and infant brother, while her father sat through a meeting with some of his officials. Azula hadn’t bothered asking about the meeting, assuming that if it was important she’d hear about it. 

 

“I don’t really care. When she gets bored, I assume.” Azula said, and Ty Lee accepted that answer. They reached Azula’s room and went inside. Azula thought she saw a flash of movement at her balcony.

 

“Did you see that?” She asked Ty Lee. The acrobat shook her head.

 

“I saw something moving out on the balcony.” Azula said and she ignited a blue fireball in her hand. Her bending had returned shortly before they arrived at Omashu. She walked out to the balcony and scanned the small space. She didn’t see anything, and when she looked over the edge, she didn’t spy anything through the darkness. She narrowed her eyes. She quickly looked up, but couldn’t see anything above her in the rain.

 

“Azula…” Ty Lee said from inside her room. Azula came inside and shut the door to the balcony. They were a hundred feet off the ground, so she hadn't bothered to close this door. Now though…

 

“What is it, Ty Lee?” She answered her friend. Ty Lee was standing beside the bed, holding something in her hands. When she turned, Azula saw that it was her hair piece. The one that had been taken from her hours ago.

 

Azula’s eyes widened, and she took the ornament from Ty Lee. 

 

“I thought you lost this… didn’t Sokka take it from you?”

 

Azula didn’t answer. She looked around the room warily, as if expecting an attack. Her eyes landed on the bed, where she found a folded sheet of paper. She took it and unfolded it, and quickly she read the note. She stood rigid for a moment, and then dropped the note back on the bed. He had been here, just moments ago, and he was likely the source of movement that she had detected on the balcony. He couldn’t have gotten far, if he was here, then the Avatar might be here too.

 

King Bumi. he had said that he and the airbender were friends, and going off what she knew of the annoying little monk, she assumed that he would try to rescue the old man.

 

“Sokka was here? In your room?!” Ty Lee said, reading the note for herself, and looking at the ornament in Azual’s hand. Ty Lee smiled to herself for a moment, and then frowned.

 

“He might still be nearby.” She said, and her eyes fell on the closed door to the balcony. “We can sound the alarm and capture him. The Avatar might be here too, along with the Sea Wolf.”

 

Azula nodded, but she was still lost in thought. Sokka was clever, why would he risk coming here and leaving a message? Was it a trap of some kind, or did he think she wouldn’t have returned to find the message so quickly? “Why would he leave the note? Why would he come here?”

 

“I…” Ty Lee said, “I think you made an impression.”

 

Azula rolled her eyes. She motioned for Ty Lee to follow her, and they nearly collided with Mai as they exited the room. Azula jerked her head in the direction they were going, and Ty Lee explained the situation as they walked. They found an army captain after one turn down the hallway.

 

“Captain, send three squads of soldiers to the courtyard where the deposed king is being held. I expect that the Avatar is currently trying to free him. I want you and another squad to come with us up to the roof.”

 

The man saluted and took off to fulfill her orders. Azula, Mai, and Ty Lee were soon joined by the same captain and a squad of his men. The officer gave a briefing to his soldiers, and gave Azula the amount of time before the other squads would converge on the courtyard. They had five minutes to get into position on the roof.

 

Azula wasn’t sure that there would be anyone up there, but she had determined that it was the most likely rendezvous point for them. If Sokka had gone into her room and then climbed out of the balcony again, then he was likely assigned lookout. Given his ability to see in the dark, she thought that was a reasonable assumption.

---

Sokka watched in horror as three squad rushed towards the courtyard. They were as of yet unknown to him, and he doubted that they were a routine patrol. He crouched down to the lip of the roof and drew out his boomerang. He grit his teeth as he began to suspect the cause of this sudden change in the patrols.

 

He struck the boomerang on the edge of the roof, and the symbol of his office reverberated with a sound that carried across the city. Aang and Katara’s head whipped around to look in his direction, and he took his Regret in hand. WIth his sword fully drawn, the light would hopefully draw the attention of the forces approaching Aang and Katara.

 

Seeing an opportunity to at least waylay some of the soldiers, Sokka tossed his boomerang through the air, and it collided with the leading soldiers of the squad nearest his compoins. The man fell to the ground and some of his men tripped over him. The boomerang returned to him, and he caught it. He straightened and heard a slow clapping behind him.

 

Turning around, he saw Azula and her friends, as well as a squad of soldiers. Azula was smirking at him. Sokka gritted his teeth. So it was his fault then. Leaving the note and hairpiece had been a bad idea.

 

“Well, color me surprised. You’re more of an idiot than I took you for.” Azula said dryly. 

 

“An idiot, am I?” He said, and then he raised a hand to lightly touch his mouth. He saw the corners of Azula’s own twitch, and then it was gone. Ty Lee looked very upset, as she had been dragged out into a rain that she was not ready for. Mai looked like Mai.

 

“Do you not understand? Let me rephrase. Dumb. Slow. Unenlightened. Dim. Shall I go on?”

 

“Are you done questioning my intelligence? I’ve got plans tonight so…” Sokka quipped back.

 

“Oh, no, you misunderstand. I am not questioning your intelligence. I’m denying its existence entirely.”

 

Sokka snorted beside himself. He rolled his eyes and took a ready stance. He opened his third eye. He observed the soldiers with it and felt a cold knot of dread form in his stomach. One of the soldiers was taken. Completely taken by the… Rot. Sokka took a breath and focused on the gate in his mind. He opened it fully and let the power flow unchecked.

 

Had there been light from the moon, or had the torches and storm lanterns been lit, the Fire Nation assembled against him would have seen a shadow stretch across the ground towards them. They would have seen it writhe and curl with a life of its own. But, the only light to be found was that of Sokka’s sword, and it was not strong enough to show them the truth.

 

---

Katara heard the sound of her brother's weapon. She whipped her head in his direction and watched him draw Regret. She saw him toss his boomerang and heard a crash not far from them.

 

“Aang!” She shouted, “We need to get out of here!”

 

She whipped her arms in the circular motions her master had ordered her to practice for hours and she rose into the air on a small water spout. She poured more of the rain into it and rose higher. Aang looked down at her from his perch and said something to Bumi before leaping off of the man's cell. He blasted dual currents of air past her and toppled two full squads of soldiers. He formed an airscooter and the pair of them raced toward Sokka.

 

Katara dropped her water spout and formed a mass of liquid tentacles around herself as she scaled the side of the palace. In moments they were at the top and found Sokka in the fight of his life. A full squad of soldiers attacked him in coordinated strikes, and he could only just avoid them. A spear plunged towards his chest, and he narrowly cut the head off before it skewered him.

 

“I want him alive!” Azula snapped as she sent a blast of concentrated fire towards Aang. “None of them are to be killed!”

 

Katara dove into the throng of soldiers and helped her brother gain breathing room. He nodded to her in thanks and continued to fight. He swung his sword around them just in time to deflect the knives that Mai had hurled in their direction. Even still, between all of the soldiers, Azula, and Mai, Ty Lee got in close and immobilized Katara.

 

Seeing his sister collapse to the ground, Sokka roared in fury. The cry caused the men around him to pause for a split second in fear, and that was the opening that Sokka needed. He swung regret around with prodigious speed. Frost had coated the blade, leaving it as white as the moon.

 

Sokka kicked one man in the chest and sent him rolling across the roof. Aang leaped beside him from nowhere and sounded a blast on his bison whistle. Lashed out with his foot and both hands, leaning back as he blasted multiple soldiers away from them.

 

Katara managed to get to her feet unsteadily, but she was unable to waterbend. She took up a position between the two boys who fended off the Fire Nation. There were few left to face them. All that remained in fighting shape were Azula and her friends, two firebenders and the man who had been taken by the spirit-rotting effect of Vaatu.

 

The Fire Nation surrounded them. Azula took a firebending stance.

 

“Bumi?” Sokka asked, watching their enemy warily.

 

Aang shook his head. “He’s not coming with us. We’ve got to move on.”

 

“Can you do anything about that light?” Katara asked, “It’s telling them exactly where you are! If it weren’t for that, it’d be too dark for them to…”

 

Sokka realized what she was getting at. He thought that Azula was right, he was an idiot. He would have a far better time fighting them if it was completely dark, and if his sword wasn’t giving off light. He focused Koh’s shadow and felt the familiar tugging sensation in the back of his mind. Darkness spread out across the blade from the word he had written in his own blood. Within a second, they were in near complete blackness.

 

The firebenders didn’t intend to stand by to let their prey escape. Immediately, the firebenders, save for Azula, loosed three jets of flame at the group. Aang dispelled the fire with a quick kick of wind, and Sokka pulled Katara behind him.

 

A familiar groan sounded, and Appa landed close by. Sokka hauled his sister over to the bison and she managed to see him through the sporadic flares of the firebenders. She began to climb, and Sokka ran back toward Aang. He deflected another of Mai’s knives, and he wondered briefly how she could possibly see him well enough to be so accurate.

 

Aang heard Appa groan and ran toward the sound. He couldn’t see his animal companion until he was only a few feet away. The rain and the late hour made it nearly impossible to see farther than a few feet, and even that was difficult. He leapt on the saddle and hissed, “Katara? Sokka?”

 

“Sokka’s not back yet!” Katara said back.

 

Sokka could hear them whispering through the rain, but he paid them no mind at that moment. He felt sick to his stomach, and his hands were unsteady. Azula, Mai, and Ty Lee were silent. They scanned the darkness and listened. Sokka paid them no heed either, nor the two uncorrupt firebenders. His full attention was given to the one man who had been fully taken by Vaatu.

 

He wanted to leave, to turn his back on the man and never see him again. He thought maybe he would recover from the poison in his heart, perhaps like Zuko had. But could he? Was it even possible to come back when there was no good in him? Sokka shuddered. He turned to go, but ten words echoed through his mind. The price of mercy shall weigh heavy on your shoulders.

 

He remembered another night when he had fled from Azula. Aang had stayed his hand, and they showed a different man mercy. He knew well what that had wrought, and he would never forget. He took Regret in both hands, and in a moment it was over. A body fell, but it did not hit the ground. Sokka looked all around, but the man was gone. One second he was there, and the next he was not. What had happened to him.

 

He searched silently for a moment, hoping that he was mistaken, praying that he could take it back, that the man still lived and he could be saved from the rotting evil. No matter where he looked, the man was gone. Sokka hoped that he had escaped him.

 

---

There was a scraping of footsteps. A man was walking around, angry and confused. He was a firebender, taken wholly by Vaatu. His spirit had been corrupted and destroyed. He stumbled around the dark cave, trying desperately to find a way out.

 

“Hello? Tell me where I am or I’ll burn it out of you!” He snapped. He told no lie, for he had done so before to countless prisoners.

 

“Burn it out of me?” A hideous voice asked. The sound of scuttling filled the air. The man shot fire toward the voice, but hit nothing.

 

“No, I don’t think you will.” Said Koh.

---

 

Author’s Note

 

Thank you to the wonderful individual who beta read this for me.

 

And that ends the first major arc of Part Two. Although, Zuko’s first arc ended a little earlier.

 

12/19/22

Chapter 31: Interludes Two

 

Interludes Two

 

Hahn. Jet. Arnook. Haru. Tema. Kuei.

 

I

Hahn

 

Hahn stepped back and ducked under the lightning-quick whip of water his father had attacked with. Rolled closer quickly, taking care to not tangle his spear in his movement. He bounded to his left and was caught in the face with the butt of his master’s spear. His concentration broken, he stumbled to the side and was caught by Laluk’s bending attack. He was hoisted in the air, and he admitted defeat.

 

A slow clapping filled the training yard, and Zhao spoke. “That was better. Not good enough yet, I’m afraid, but better.”

 

Laluk placed his son on the ground again as he walked to join the Admiral. Laluk had been commissioned as an officer in the Fire Navy, serving as Zhao’s right hand and doing anything the Admiral assigned him to do. How that had been arranged, Hahn didn’t know, but he was glad all the same. Anything that benefited Zhao and his father would benefit their order.

 

“I’ve just got to learn to be faster, Admiral.” Hahn said as he bowed to the older man. Qiang, Hahn’s spear master, cleared his throat.

 

“It is not a matter of speed. It’s a matter of timing and intuition. You must learn to read your opponent, to predict where he is going to strike, and then be elsewhere when he does.” Qiang said.

 

Hahn looked at him. He considered the man’s words and nodded. He had a point. He knew that he had little chance of meeting Sokka’s speed, for his enemy had some strange supernatural power that made him at least twice as fast as a regular man, if not more. Hahn would have to already be in motion by the time Sokka struck, or he would fail. His mission would result in his own death. If he could not master the skills, he would be unable to kill the First Son.

 

---

 

 

II

Jet

Jet opened the door to the small apartment he shared with Longshot and Smellerbee. The three of them had made it to Ba Sing Se a little more than a week ago, and they had found this apartment rather quickly. He and Longshot shared a room, while Smellerbee had one to herself. She had protested that just because she was a girl didn’t mean that she required special treatment. Jet had just shrugged and threw her stuff in there anyway.

 

Now he walked in on the two of them in the main room of their home. Smellerbee sat on the one stool they had while sharpening her knives, and Longshot was at the stove making dinner, while wearing a pink and frilly apron for some reason.

 

Jet let out a slow whistle. “Wow, Longshot, that’s quite the look.”

 

The silent archer looked at him. He smiled and gave a thumbs up, at which Jet snorted.

 

“Any luck on the job front?” Smellerbee asked. Jet nodded.

 

“Yeah, I went to the army office down the street. They’re taking me on as a wall guard,” He said. Smellerbee frowned slightly and stood. Her knives clattered to the ground as she walked over to him. 

 

“You’re joining the army? I thought we came here to get away from the war.”

 

“We did, and it’s not the regular army. The wall garrison doesn’t go on deployment, they just… guard the wall. Besides, it’s not that much of a big deal. I come back here after my shift each day, as long as we’re not under siege.”

 

Smellerbee looked slightly appeased, and Jet asked, “What about you two? Have you found anything?”

 

Longshot looked over to them and nodded. Smellerbee elaborated on his response. “Longshot’s entered an archery competition. The top five competitors win some money. We figured if he makes a good showing, then some nobleman or rich merchant would take us on as guards. Too bad there’s no grappling tournament that I could enter.”

 

“Give it time, eventually we’ll have enough money to start our own dojo.”

 

Smellerbee laughed as she bent to retrieve her weapons. “Yeah, that’s true. No matter how you look at it, things are looking up.”

 

---

 

III

Arnook

“What do you mean it’s binding?” The chief asked, staring at the scholar before him. He sat in his council chamber with the entirety of his government officials and the heads of noble houses, as well as various elected representatives.

 

“W-well, Chief Arnook, sir, they fulfilled their end of the agreement in good faith.” Said the nervous, balding man. The assembled officials and representatives murmured amongst themselves. The scholar swallowed and continued to speak.

 

“Chief Hakoda sent the shipwrights and warriors that you had agreed upon, as well as his son. And, when you sent Pakku and many other waterbenders to the South Pole, you, uh, fulfilled your end of the treaty.”

 

“How can there be any treaty when the marriage between Sokka and Yue, the crux of the whole agreement, shall never come to pass?!” Demanded an angry official from somewhere out of sight. Arnook shot a glare in the direction the voice had come from.

 

“There was no clause stating that the treaty would become null if one or both of the heirs died, only that the treaty would be binding if both parties carried out their obligations in good faith. In other words, it doesn’t matter that the pair were never wed; all agreements and obligations were fulfilled to the best of either party’s ability.” The scholar looked around the room, as if hoping that he had not offended anyone.

 

Arnook rubbed his mouth absently. The casual mention of his daughter's death caused a sharp pain in his chest, but it had dulled over the month since her passing, if only slightly. He mulled over the subject at hand: Sokka was still the heir apparent of the northern Water Tribe. Arnook considered that he could do much worse for an heir.

 

Sokka had a sharp mind. He had been the one to realize there were spies in their midst, he had planned much of the city's defense, and he was very close with the Avatar. He also seemed to have a somewhat not terrible relationship with Prince Zuko, who allegedly had turned against the war. He licked his teeth as he pondered the problem. Or, he thought, perhaps, it was a boon. 

 

---

 

 

IV

Haru

 

Haru walked in a military manner as he marched his way to the General’s office. Each precise and sharp step took him closer to the destination. General Fong had summoned him, and he assumed it was to berate him for not helping to arrest Sokka in his endeavor to assist Aang and Katara.

 

He thought about Sokka. When he first met the Avatar, he hadn’t spent that much time speaking with him. Most of his conversations had been with Aang and Katara, but he had shared some laughs with Sokka. The young man he had met then was a far cry to the empty shell he had seen the previous week. A whole week, and only now was he being summoned before the General. It was odd, he thought, both that it would be a whole week, and that Fong would see to it personally that he was punished. 

 

He arrived at General Fong’s office and was allowed up the stairs. When he stood before the man in question, Haru gave a smart salute and stood at attention.

 

“At ease.” Fong said as he pressed the seal on a scroll. There was another scroll, but that one had been sealed already. “I have messages for you to deliver. Both are to be delivered to the Earth King, though you won’t likely get through to see him. Nobody has had contact with the Earth King since the last one died, around twenty years ago. Even still, Ba Sing Se is the communication hub for the Earth Kingdom.”

 

Fong handed over the message and Haru stowed them in the belt pouch of his messenger's uniform. Fong spoke again. “The scrolls may be given to the grand secretariat, a man named Long Feng. He will see to it that the information is given to the pertinent generals. I explained in one of the scrolls that you are friends with the Avatar, and given a description of him and his companions, that they may be recognized if they visit the city.”

 

“Don’t worry, Haru,” Fong said as he saw the look of dismay on the messenger’s face, “It’s a letter of introduction. I don’t harbor a grudge, if anything, I’m chagrined at my behavior during their visit. I was… well, never mind that. I merely advised that they be given every courtesy. The second letter is a request for reinforcements and a convoy to retake Omashu. It might be weeks before the letter even gets to Ba Sing Se, as we’re no longer permitted to use eagle-hounds to carry messages. If we were still, then we would have heard of the city’s capture before and warned the Avatar. But that’s beside the point. You have your assignment.”

 

Haru stared at the general. Omashu had been captured? That was where his friends were going, they might have already gotten there, they might have-!

 

He was cut off from his monologue when the general spoke once more, “I’ve never understood the position. Around fifteen years ago, the Earth King decreed that eagle-hounds were no longer permitted for military correspondence. It made no sense then, The Earth King was only a child, and his regent shouldn't have-!”

 

Fong stopped speaking and looked at Haru. The man stood and raised his voice, “What are you still doing here?! You have a message for the Earth King! Go!”

 

Haru turned on his heel and ran from the office. He raced to the quartermaster and requisitioned supplies and a steed for his journey. Within the hour he left for Ba Sing Se.

 

---

 

V

Tema

 

She took a slow drink of her tea in the mess. She had disembarked from Admiral Zhao’s ship and been assigned to another vessel that was being repaired at the same port that the fleet had mustered in. She drained the cup and placed it on the tray. She raised her eyes to meet those of a man she had spoken with a few times, and now she was beginning to wish she had never met him. He said nothing that she disagreed with, but…

 

“I don’t know, Jee, it’s risky.” She said. The lieutenant nodded, but didn’t press the issue.

 

“I understand, Tema. Take some time to think about it, but at least promise me you'll hold your silence.”

 

Tema closed her eyes and nodded. She opened them again and stood from the table. “If you would excuse me.”

 

Jee bid her a polite goodbye and she returned to her assigned room in the barracks. She placed her helm on the desk and leaned against the back of her chair. She exhaled slowly. She considered Jee's words, his attempt to recruit her into his subtle rebellion. Honestly, she felt no love for the Fire Lord. He had sacrificed thousands of men in the siege of the North Pole, and many other doomed operations, and for what? What did the Fire Nation gain? Nothing, and neither did anyone else.

 

She looked at the portrait of her grandfather on her desk. She slumped into her chair as she remembered him, his wisdom, of how he had taught her to live. He had remembered the old ways of the Fire Nation, the way to live and die with honor. Her grandfather had been ancient: already a teenager when the war began. He had never approved of the war, and had he still lived, he wouldn’t have approved of her joining it.

 

What would he have done in her place? Tema snorted, for she knew what Grandpa Kuzon would have done. He was a warrior, a man of the old breed. Stoic and strong, he had thrown aside fear and replaced it with the desire for justice. He would have joined the subtle rebellion in seconds. Had he known about the Avatar’s return, he probably would have started it.

 

She took out a cloth and polished the glass covering the small picture. She remembered what he told her when she was just beginning to learn to fight, back when she still cowered in fear. She had been, what? Ten? She was frightened by her firebending. He had taken her by the hand and soothed her worries. He asked her what she was afraid of, and she had said she was afraid to die. The old man had laughed at that, as if one’s own death was nothing. To him it was.

 

“I know how to fix that,” He had said, “You must rehearse your own death, every morning and night. Do that and you will not be afraid, and when you do not fear death, you will awaken from your dreams.”

 

Tema had been horrified at her grandfather's words. In later years, her father had explained to her that her family followed the old ways. Bushido, the way of the warrior. She still followed, and that gave her strength. She sat on her bed and meditated, following the traditions of her family. Once she had done so, she knew the answer to Jee’s question. She would join him.

 

---

 

VI

Kuei

 

The Earth King sat on his throne. He wondered if the chief of either Water Tribe had issued a reply. It had been months, and nothing had come. Surely they would have gotten the message by now. The eagle-hounds his army used were fast and sturdy, surely they couldn’t have taken much time at all to get there. Maybe the hounds had gotten lazy, as there was little need of them at times of peace.

 

He shifted on his throne and looked at Bosco. The bear chuffed at him.

 

“That’s a great idea, Bosco.” Kuei said. He knew the bear didn’t have an actual idea, but he enjoyed talking to the animal. He turned his attention to a servant and waved them over. “I need you to take a letter. Address it to Fire Lord Ozai.”

 

The servant paled, and sweat started to bead down his face. Kuei took no notice, and he closed his eyes before beginning to speak.

 

“The land of the earth sends their greetings to the land of the sun- no, that’s terrible.” Kuei said, “I’ll start again.” He cleared his throat.

 

“To the esteemed Fire Lord Ozai, from Earth King Kuei.” Kuei nodded, that was good, at least to start.

 

“In order to foster peaceful and beneficial relations between all nations, I humbly invite your nation to send representatives to the City of Ba Sing Se, so that we might join with the other peoples of the world in noble competitions of a game and sport.”

 

Kuei nodded, thinking that it was good so far. “In centuries past, a series of athletic competitions was held every few years, and the four nations would take it in turn to host them. I wish to restore that tradition, and to reopen trade with your great nation.”

 

Alright, now to come up with the end. Better to keep these things short. Kuei rubbed his chin in thought. He finished the message, “I seek only to promote peace, and healthy relations between our people.”

 

He opened his eyes to see Long Feng, his most trusted adviser, standing beside the servant.

 

“Ah! Long Feng, you’re just in time. I’ve just dictated the letter for Fire Lord Ozai. Please ensure that it has the proper seals in place. Oh, and while you’re here, have you heard back from the Water Tribes? I know that the Air Nomads have been rather elusive, but I’m sure one will come down from their temples and into Ba Sing Se soon”

 

“Of course your majesty,” Long Feng bowed, “And no, the Water Tribe has not yet responded to the message you have sent.”

 

“Are you really going to sue for peace?!” The servant blurted out. Kuei turned his attention to the man. He frowned. What was so surprising about wanting to establish stronger ties with the other nations…

 

“Do not address the king so casually!” Long Feng snapped, glaring at the servant. “You are dismissed, and I have half a mind to have you flogged for your insolence!”

 

Kuei was taken aback by Long Feng’s outburst. He had never known the man to be so quick to anger. The servant bowed low and backed out of the throne room. Kuei frowned. He had the feeling that there was more to this than met the eye.

 

“I shall see to it personally that the Fire Lord is sent this message, your majesty.” Long Feng said, and he too left the throne room.

Chapter 32: Experimentation and A Love Letter?!

Bandages. So many bandages. His uncle managed to get by with a hat and some temporary hair dye, but Zuko was covered in bandages. They made it hard to move, and he worried that if it came to a fight he would be hampered by the stuff. He was not very enthusiastic, but it couldn’t be helped. This was their best and only plan to find passage without being recognized.

 

Song was still with them, and she walked beside Sugar Foot with Iroh. To bolster the facade of injury, his uncle had insisted that Zuko ride atop the ostrich-horse. He had refused to tell Iroh her original name, and began anew his endeavor to not own an ostrich-horse named Sugar Foot. She was Yaoke, named for the dawn. He wished that she would accept it, though if anything, she had begun to hate the name more than ever.

 

“Come along, Yaoke,” Iroh said, lightly pulling the reins as they approached the ship he had booked passage on. The animal squawked in rebellion and pulled against the old general. Iroh stopped in surprise at her sudden change in attitude, for she had been very sweet and obedient until that moment.

 

“What did you say, Mushi?” Song asked, using the cover name. Zuko gritted his teeth. He had hoped that it wouldn’t come up and that his steed’s name would be forever changed, but, as usual, his luck was nonexistent.

 

“I was encouraging Yaoke to follow us, but she seems to have a bad feeling about…” He trailed off as Sugar Foot clawed at the ground. His brow furrowed slightly, and the beginning of concern filled his eyes. It was dispelled quickly as Song laughed.

 

“Not this again; Lee, you know how she feels about her name!” Song said, placing her hands on her hips and looking at the bandaged and disguised prince. Zuko looked away. Iroh glanced from Zuko to Song, and then at the ostrich-horse.

 

“Her name is Sugar Foot, and she really doesn’t like when she is called anything by else.” Song explained, “When I first met Lee, she had thrown him from the saddle because he kept calling her a different name. He had to come to my hospital.”

 

Iroh chuckled heartily at the revelation and covered it by pretending it was a cough when he saw Zuko’s irritated expression. “Oh, well, I like Sugar Foot better. It’s a sweet name for a sweet lady.”

 

He scratched the small feathers of her face as Sugar Foot cooed. The beast gave no further trouble as she followed Iroh towards the dock. When they reached the dock where their ship was moored, Song stopped walking. She bid farewell to Iroh and Zuko, and wished them luck with a bow. She didn’t watch them leave, instead she turned away and walked back into the town.

 

Song thought of her feelings for Zuko. She had been rather smitten with him, and he seemed to harbor at least some affection for her. He would be the Fire Lord though, and that was not the kind of life that Song wanted to pursue. She didn’t love him, of course, she didn’t; they had spent hardly any time together and the majority of that time was while he was lying to her about who he was. She couldn’t really blame him though, for she understood his reasoning.

 

Now as she walked further into the city she didn’t turn in the direction of her home. She stood at a crossroads. If she took the left-hand path, she would return home and resume her life as a nurse. If she took the right-hand path, she wasn’t sure where it would take her. Maybe it would lead her nowhere, or perhaps it would take her across the world. Could she help more people if she stayed with her mother? Or maybe she could help people in little ways, in the everyday acts of kindness that the world so desperately needed, if she took this strange, new road. She tapped her foot and made up her mind. She turned right and began to walk, her pack hoisted onto her shoulders. She was sure that her mother would worry, and it filled her with sadness to imagine the distress her absence would cause, but Song knew that she could send a message back home. She would help anyone she could, wherever she went. No matter where this road took her, even if she found her way to the Fire Nation. She thought people there might need her help most of all, for they knew little of their banished prince, of a man she was proud to call her friend.

 

---

 

Katara opened her eyes. The sky was beginning to grow bright with the first rays of the morning sun. The soft and clean light of a new day seemed to chase away the remnants of the cold and trying night, scouring clean the refuse left by the hardships and trials of the day before.

 

Stretching herself, Katara yawned and rubbed the sleep from her eyes. She climbed out of her sleeping bag and saw her brother was still asleep. For the first time since the siege, he had slept longer than her. She idly wondered if he had slept much, if at all, before that morning. Either way, he was asleep now. She assumed that with the return to his normal personality, or at least close to it, his appetite would resume its monstrous capacity as well.

 

Bending water from the small mountain stream beside their camp, Katara filled a pot to start making breakfast. She built a small fire, and then wondered if it was possible to heat the water with her bending. She rubbed her chin as she pondered the possibility. If she could freeze it, and then melt it, it stood to reason that she could get the water to at least near a boil. She thought of how she melted water back into liquid form. Perhaps she should just… Do that harder? She tried, and then carefully tested the water. Nothing. It was still cold.

 

“Hmm,” She said slowly. She licked her teeth as she thought of the issue. She had to think of how to make the water hot. Fire was hot. How did firebenders make fire? They always took a breath first, and she thought she recalled Zuko exhaling sharply with each gout of flame. Maybe that was it? She took a deep breath and performed the movement to melt the ice. She was rewarded for her efforts when a cloud of steam wafted up from the now boiling pot.

 

Katara let out an inarticulate cheer over her success, waking Aang and Momo from their sleep. Momo jumped into the air, and Aang snapped into a combat stance, his hands raised towards the non-existent foe.

 

“What’s going on?! Is it Azula? Did Zuko decide to be evil again!?!” He said, turning in circles as he looked for a foe.

 

“Oh, sorry,” Katara laughed, “It’s, well, it’s something cool! I boiled water!”

 

Aang lowered his guard and raised an eyebrow at her. “Well, yeah, we do that almost every day.”

 

Katara’s smile died as she realized he had misunderstood. “No, I meant like this!”

 

She swiftly froze the water, melted it, and made it boil again. Aang was astounded. “Oh my goodness! I didn’t know that was even possible!”

 

“Neither did I,” Katara said, smiling again. “I just thought about how firebenders create their fire, and tried that on the water.”

 

Aang narrowed his eyes at her, and then smiled coyly. “Are you sure you’re not secretly the Avatar? You know, I don’t think I’ve ever bent anything except for air without you around.”

 

Katara snorted. “Well, that’s just not true.”

 

“And how would you know? You weren’t there.”

 

Katara rolled her eyes. “Alright, alright, I guess I’m the Avatar.”

 

“See?” Aang said, “I always knew you were special.”

 

Katara blushed at that. He said she was special. The corner of her lips twitched upward. “Well, if I’m the Avatar, then you should teach me some of your airbending.”

 

Aang's smile seemed to rival the sun for its brightness. His elation was so great that he practically shouted, “That’s a great idea!”

 

“Hmrph” Sokka grunted from his sleeping bag. Aang looked chagrined.

 

“Well, jokes aside, I can’t really airbend, so I don't think there’s much use in learning…” Katara began, but Aang shook his head in disagreement.

 

“Maybe you can’t airbend, but look what you did by imitating a firebender.” He gestured to the pot. “I bet if I taught you some airbending moves, you could come up with something really great!”

 

“Like what?” Katara asked, her curiosity peaked and all thoughts of breakfast and the boiling water were forgotten.

 

“Uhh… Something?”

 

Katara shrugged, and smiling brightly she said, “Let’s try it!”

 

The pair walked behind Appa, where Aang started explaining the theory of airbening to her. “Airbending is all about circular movements, finding the path of least resistance.”

 

He raised his arm toward her in a practiced motion and Katara did the same. Their wrists met, and Aang began guiding her through the winding forms of the Air Nomad tradition. She was focused on her footwork, keeping in pace with his. She felt a slight pressure against her wrist and she turned with the motion.

 

“There you go; you’re a natural!” Aang said.

 

Katara looked to meet his eyes, but found that they weren’t at the level they used to be. When had he grown? She hadn’t noticed before, but now their eyes were at around the same height, and his might have even been a hair above hers. She stopped moving and so did he. Their arms slowly lowered, and the space between them shrank. He was so close to her, and she couldn’t look away from his striking gray eyes. She leaned into him and…

 

“What are you doing?” Sokka asked. Katara and Aang leapt apart at his sudden interruption.

 

“Uhh…” Aang said, and his face became a bright pink.

 

“We…” Katara began, for some reason not wanting to explain the intimate moment to her brother. “Were… having a staring contest.”

 

Sokka looked surprised. “You just lied to me.”

 

“No,” Aang said, and then he bumbled an awkward explanation. “We were staring. A contest of stares. A staring contest: A competition in which you stare. That was the thing that you saw.”

 

Sokka looked at Aang, and he bore a slightly hurt expression. “You too? If you don’t want to tell me that’s fine, but you don’t have to lie. I can probably guess anyway.”

 

Katara started to respond but Sokka waved her off. “Food’s done. Rice, and some fruit I found.”

 

Sokka rounded the bison again and was out of sight. Katara looked at Aang sheepishly. Aang shrugged, still a touch red. They too walked to the food.

---

 

Zuko laid in his bunk in the small cabin that Iroh had arranged for them. The voyage to Yu Dao would only take a few days, a week at most. According to some of the crew, it was possible to make it there in a little more than a day if they had favorable currents and weather. Zuko hoped that was the case on this trip, and he was trying to calculate the likelihood when his uncle came into the room. Iroh closed the door behind him and withdrew something from the satchel on his hip.

 

“I bought you these books while I was getting supplies in town.” Iroh said as he handed Zuko a pair of old and tattered books. “Since you won’t be able to walk around the ship much, I thought that this would give you something to do.”

 

Zuko took the books and examined him. One was a book of the philosophy of an Earth King from centuries ago, and the other was… “ The Methods and Theory of Combustion Bending ?”

Iroh nodded. “I know that you have always had an interest in it, and when I saw the book I thought it would be an interesting read.”

 

Zuko smiled, despite the discomfort of his disguise. He appreciated his uncle going out of his way, even for the small things like the books.

 

“Anyway, Prince Zuko, there’s a Pai Sho tournament that I intend to participate in, so I won’t be in the cabin until late…”

 

Zuko glared at his uncle. He would have bet good money that the old man had orchestrated the tournament himself. Well, he thought, it didn’t matter much. If his uncle was happy, he was fine with it. His glare softened. He nodded and began to read as Iroh left the cabin. He was immersed in the theory almost instantly.

 

It seemed that opposite normal firebending, the combustion bending style was released through the focus of one’s mind almost entirely. It was new information to him, as the scrolls he had read in the palace as a child had little to no information beyond the basics. Combustion benders condensed the flame until it was at the target, and then released the pressure in one instant. Perhaps the lack of information given by the scrolls available to him at the time was the reason he could never create the smallest explosion? He had used the classical stances and moves used in traditional firebending.

 

He flipped through page after page of the thin book, until he came across a diagram of a man. The pictures indicated the man taking a breath, and then a line formed from his eyes to the target, and the third image showed the man exhaling and the target was obscured by an explosion. It… wasn’t very helpful. There was no instruction besides the pictures, just a message advising extreme caution.

 

“That doesn’t tell me anything!” Zuko snapped at the book. “Just breathe and look at the target?! And be careful? Wow, I never would have thought to be cautious while firebending, thank Agni for that tidbit!”

 

The cabin door creaked open and Iroh stepped through the door.

 

“Lee!” He said as a hulking man followed him into the room. The man had a shaved head and a short, neatly trimmed beard. He had evidently lost his arm and leg, for he wore two iron prosthetics in their place. On his brow lay a tattoo of a vertical red eye.

 

“This kind man is a combustion bender, and he has agreed to give a demonstration!”

---

 

“So King Bumi is just waiting then?” Sokka asked with his mouth full of rice and fruit. Katara grimaced and averted her eyes. Gross.

 

“Yeah, pretty much.” Aang said, after having the decency to swallow his mouthful first.

 

“That’s good; I was worried that you couldn’t get him out because we got caught.” Sokka said, and he looked towards the ground as he spoke. Aang shook his head and assured him it wasn’t the case. Katara frowned, as she had no idea how they were discovered.

 

“How did Azula know we were there?” She wondered aloud. Aang shrugged and grunted his confusion as he ate. Sokka, however, flushed and looked away. Katara narrowed her eyes. Sokka had gone into the palace during his ascent of the wall. Had she seen him there?

 

“Sokka…” Katara began, and she gave him a suspicious look. “Did Azula see you when you climbed into that room?”

 

“Oh yeah, why did you go inside of the palace?” Aang asked.

 

“Uh, no reason. And no, she didn’t see me.”

 

“Sokka.” Katara said, and her voice carried an accusatory note. He was hiding something from them.

 

“Uh… the thing is, well, I still had her hairpiece, and then I was passing her room so I-”

 

Aang gasped, staring at him in shock. “You broke into her room? Did you at least jam her door shut or something? Like, I don’t know, move her furniture a few inches to the left so that she would bump into it when she’s in a rush?”

 

“You went into her room to return her hairpiece?!” Katara said. She got to her feet and put her hands on her hips. “After all that ‘stop acting like goblins! You’re being suspicious!’ stuff! What were you thinking!?”

 

“I didn’t think they would have been back yet! Her or her friends! If I had, I wouldn’t have left the hairpiece, or the note!”

 

It was Katara’s turn to gasp. “You left her a love letter!?!”

---

Zuko hobbled his way up to the main deck of the ship. He took care to stop frequently, and leaned on his uncle often. It wouldn’t do to be found out already, and he hoped that he wouldn’t have to be. He already had one successful voyage in which he hid his identity, so why not two? Maybe he would make a hobby of it. No, he thought, that was a terrible idea.

 

They eventually made it to the main deck, and then towards the stern. When they finally made it to the back of the ship, the unnamed stranger motioned for them to step back. He gestured for Zuko to watch carefully. The man took a sharp, deep breath and clenched his abdominal muscles. A line of condensed fire shot from his forehead and out to sea. There was a few seconds,  a series of sharp pops and snaps, and then an explosion a few hundred feet away.

 

Zuko had watched carefully. He observed everything that the man had done, but he still did not understand how he had done it. “How do you do it?”

 

The man turned his head towards Zuko, and raised his still intact fist. He punched out towards the stern and a blast of fire shot out. “Learn the feeling.”

 

The man walked away from them, and disappeared below deck. Zuko frowned. He punched out with his one non-bandaged hand and bent a stream of fire. He focused on the feeling, but he still couldn’t tell what the behemoth had meant. He looked to his uncle, who seemed lost in thought.

 

“Uncle, do you know what he meant?”

 

Iroh shook his head as if to clear it. “What?”

 

“Do you know what he meant by ‘learn the feeling’ ?” Zuko asked.

 

Iroh paused and stroked his now chestnut beard. “When he performed his combustive strike, he pooled the energy in his mind and focused it through his tattoo. I suppose he meant to focus your energy, and then release it without letting it catch fire.”

 

Zuko raised his eyebrows. “How do you know he did that?”

 

“I could see it.” He said and gestured vaguely to his forehead, still lost in thought. “With my third eye.”

 

“Your what?”

---

“it was not a love letter!” Sokka nearly shouted, his face red as an apple.

 

“Oh I find that so easy to believe!” Katara said. She wasn’t sure if she was angry or amused, so she decided to be both. “She kissed you, and then only hours later you sneak into her room to leave her gifts and notes! Of all of the stupid things, of all of the women, you just had to pick her!”

 

Sokka stood up and walked over to Katara. He pointed a finger in her face and said, “I was handcuffed! I didn’t have a choice. And, might I add, I had said I would return the hairpiece after we got out of the cave, so that's what I did. Oh yeah, and that ‘love letter’ was a note bragging about our successful infiltration and rescue, that I left just to make her mad!”

 

Katara scoffed. “Yeah, okay.”

 

“That’s exactly what I did.” Sokka crossed his arms as he sat back down. He shot a final glare at Katara. “I don’t care if you believe it. It’s still the truth.”

 

Katara threw her hands up in exasperation and walked across the small campsite to sit beside Aang. Aang had just been sitting there while he twiddled his thumbs awkwardly. Evidently, he was eager to move to a different subject, for he said, “Moving on from all of that, I still need to find an earthbending teacher. Bumi said that I need to find someone who waits and listens, but I don’t even know where to look!”

 

Sokka uncrossed his arms and stroked his chin. He licked his teeth as he considered the problem, but Katara proffered a solution first. “We know that we have to go to the library in the Si Wong desert, so maybe we should look in the cities and towns near there? That way we can find a teacher and then get to the library as fast as possible.”

 

“Yeah,” Aang said, “That could work. The sooner we can find out more about Vaatu and the stuff La told you about the better.”

 

“What? When did you talk to the Ocean Spirit?” Sokka asked, looking at his sister with confused curiosity. Katara was still rather annoyed with him, if only for his hypocrisy over not being suspicious in Omashu. She pushed down the feeling and answered him.

 

“On our last day at the North Pole, I went to the spirit Oasis and asked for help from the spirits.”

 

“Help with what?” Sokka asked

 

“With your bond with Koh. La told me that he didn’t know how to get your soul back, but that…” She trailed off. As she had begun to explain, the light in Sokka’s eyes had gone out. He stared out into space as if he couldn’t see anything, as if he was someplace far away. Had he entered the void? Why would he do that, if he had said just the previous afternoon that he had no desire to live in the vast emptiness anymore?

 

“Sokka?” Aang asked, for he too had noticed the change that came over the swordsman. He walked over to him and waved a hand in front of his face. No reaction was forthcoming. He shook Sokka lightly, but there was still no reaction. Aang looked at Katara, and his concern was evident in his expression.

 

---

 

Zuko lay awake in his bed as his uncle snored violently. Third eyes, chi, spirit energy, bending, all of that and the kitchen sink. He wondered now if he could open his third eye, or if only some people could manage it. He thought it would be easier to learn new forms of bending if he could see the energy flow through the body. He guessed that was what made Uncle Iroh such a good teacher.

 

The combustion bender had said to learn the feeling of his bending. Learn the feeling. How could you learn a feeling? Didn’t you just feel it? He blew his hair out of his eyes. He thought about cutting it, as it had started to get out of hand. He disregarded the errant thought and returned to the question he was mulling over.

 

When he was a young boy, his mother had told him that the blind man has heightened senses to make up for the lack of sight. Perhaps that was the key? Close his eyes and firebend. Not the safest course of action, but not the most dangerous either. He raised his hand and closed his eyes. He focused on the feeling of his arm, and then released a flame. He felt… something. A light pressure that rushed past his limb. Was that what the behemoth had meant? Focus on that feeling?

 

Zuko began to channel more energy into his limb for a stronger blast of fire, but paused. He opened his eyes and lowered his hand. It occurred to him that experimenting with firebending, so that he could eventually try combustion bending, was not an indoor activity to be practiced on a passenger ship. They would be disembarking in Yu Dao soon enough, and then they would be off to Gaoling. He could wait.

 

He closed his eyes for a final time that night, and the rocking of the ship sent him into a much-needed sleep.

 

---

 

“What’s wrong with him?!” Katara asked. Aang threw his hands in the air and paced around. “I don’t know! It’s like he’s gone into the Spirit World!”

 

“No, this is different,” Katara said, “When he goes into the spirit world shadows stretch across the ground and cover his face.”

 

Just then, Sokka shuddered and stamped a foot on the ground. He shook his head once and looked around. “Sorry, I must’ve spaced out for a second. What were you saying about the Ocean Spirit?”

 

“Sokka! What happened? What was that?” Aang asked. Sokka raised an eyebrow in confusion.

 

“What was what?” He asked.

 

“When Katara brought up a way to get your soul back, to break the bond with the Face Stealer, you- Gah! Not again!” Aang shouted the last part of the sentence when Sokka seemed to lose all awareness. His vacant, lifeless eyes stared unblinkingly into space. Aang looked at Katara.

 

Katara felt her heart skip a beat as suspicion formed in her mind, and she hoped that it would not be true. “Aang, we need to talk about something else, quick!”

 

Aang’s face went blank. He looked around at the morning light. “Uh, nice weather we’re having today.”

 

“Aang, why are you talking about the weather? You were just telling me what Katara wanted to say. What was it?” Sokka said. Aang and Katara shared a look. Katara took a deep breath. She decided to test her theory, rather than dance around the subject.

 

“I want to break your bond with the Face Stealer.” She said in a rush. For the third time, Sokka seemed to enter a sort of coma; a state of total unawareness. Katara groaned in displeasure.

 

“Everytime we bring it up, he leaves, like he falls out of his own mind or something. Aang, I don’t think Sokka will be able to help us. I think we’re going to have to do this on our own.”

 

The Avatar looked at Sokka with sad eyes, and a shadow of doubt flitted across his face. Katara couldn’t see it, and it was fortunate for her that she did not, for if she had, it would have broken her heart. Aang was worried that Sokka couldn’t be saved at all. He wiped his face of expression and turned to Katara.

 

“Maybe I should go and speak with him.” Aang said. Upon the change of subject, Sokka snapped out of his stupor and looked at Aang quizzically.

 

“Speak with who?” He asked. Katara looked between the two boys, a knot of fear filled her stomach, and she wasn’t quite sure why. Aang would be fine, wouldn’t he? He was the Avatar, after all.

 

“The Face Stealer.” Aang answered quietly after a few seconds.

 

---

 

The sun shone brightly over the city of Yu Dao. Zuko and his uncle disembarked from the ship and entered the bustling port city. They had made surprisingly good time, as strong currents and favorable weather shortened their journey from one of  a few days into a single night and morning. Now Zuko led Sugar Foot across the city towards the road that led east, towards Earth Kingdom controlled territory and eventually Gaoling.

 

“How long until we get there, Uncle?” Zuko asked. Iroh unrolled the map and read it for a moment. He stroked his beard for a few seconds, and said, “Well, it would be a week on foot, but it depends on how fast and for how long Sugar Foot can carry us. A few days at best, I think.”

 

Zuko nodded. A few days was better than the month of traveling that they had avoided, and he hoped that the Avatar would be found soon. He idly wondered if he would have already found a firebending teacher by then, but he doubted it. Aang still had to learn earthbending, and though he had picked up waterbending rapidly, it would still take a while for him to master the next discipline. 

 

Before they made it out of Yu Dao, Zuko double checked their food supply, and that of Sugar Foot. He did not want a repeat of his last crosscountry expedition.

 

---

 

Author’s Note:

 

She is in the wings. I know that a few of the more regular readers have been excited for her introduction, and I can now say that Toph will make her grand entrance quite soon.

 

I hope that you all have had a wonderful new year and wish everyone good fortune in the days to come.

 

1/1/2023

Chapter 33: Ghosts and Infiltration

“Still no sign of him, Princess.” Said the sergeant. Azula tapped her manicured nails on the arm of the throne. She dismissed the soldier with a vague gesture, and soon she was alone with her friends. Ty Lee was braiding her hair at her left, and Mai sat to her right as she spun one of her knives around.

 

“Do you think the Avatar took Captain Wei with them?” Ty Lee asked, looking up from her braid to address her friends. Azula shook her head and Mai shrugged.

 

“I don’t believe they would have done that.’ Azula said, “For one thing, that’s not something they would have done. None of their actions suggest that they would take a prisoner, and why would they take a random officer when any of us would make better hostages? I’m sure the Governor would gladly give up King Bumi for Mai, and I’m sure your father would pay a handsome reward for your safe return, Ty Lee.”

 

“I guess. Not to mention what the Fire Lord would do if you were kidnapped, Azula.” Ty Lee said, “I bet he’d go to Ba Sing Se himself to get you back.”

 

Azula didn’t respond. She doubted her father would do much at all to ensure that she was delivered from their enemies. Her usefulness might have run out as far as she could tell. She had been met with nothing but failure and betrayal since setting out on this sun-forsaken mission. Every endeavor she had undertaken before this had been an unequivocal success. Never before had she been dealt such… bad luck. So much for being born lucky. She wondered if this was how Zuko always felt. She chided herself for such foolish thoughts, she did not need to dwell on Zuko’s struggles.

 

The door to the throne room opened, and Governor Ukano walked through and down the room. His face was illuminated by the slightly greenish tint of the crystals used by the former king, as they had for some reason not yet seen fit to replace them. The pale green clashed horribly with the blacks, reds, and golds of the Fire Nation.

 

“Good morning, Princess.” The Governor said as he knelt, “I have sent a report to your father detailing how you valiantly thwarted the resistance’s attempt to free King Bumi. That you managed to defeat not only them, but the Avatar and the children of Hakoda, is truly an inspiration to us all.”

 

“Why should Sokka and Katara make a difference?” Ty Lee asked curiously. Azula raised an eyebrow. What resistance? Why had she not been told of this? She wasn’t about to argue the fact, not after the Governor had just sung her praises to the Fire Lord…

 

“Uh… Well, Lady Ty Lee,” Ukano began, “Chief Hakoda, the entire royal line of the Southern Water Tribe really, is widely regarded as a genius. He is said to be among the greatest strategists and commanders of our era, and from what I gathered the Sea Wolf mastered waterbending in a few months.”

 

“Some of the intelligence reports I've received from the War Minister and Admiral Zhao have stated that the First Son had a major role in defense of the Northern Water Tribe, as well as organizing the rebellion at the Northern Air Temple.” Ukano continued, “From those reports, I believe it is a safe assumption that he has inherited his father’s intellect.”

 

Azula scoffed. “Sokka, the genius? Governor, I hadn’t taken you for the comedic type. I have faced the First Son on multiple occasions, and I assure you that if he is, then he might be the world’s only stupid genius…”

 

Azula trailed off. That gave her an idea. She remembered the note that Sokka had left her, an obvious attempt to irritate her. A failed attempt, no doubt, but an attempt nonetheless. She decided to commission an updated wanted poster and bounty on him, and give him a new moniker. Yes, that was a fine idea. Sokka: the Stupid Genius. That would surely aggravate him.

 

“Oh, I see.” The Governor said awkwardly, “Be that as it may, if we might move on? We’ve received word from the capitol. Admiral Zhao is sending someone to assist you in your operation to capture Prince Zuko and General Iroh. He’s a combustion bender, though the Admiral didn’t include the man’s name.”

 

Azula cocked her head to the side as the Governor's words registered. Zhao was sending an agent of some kind? A combustion bender… well, at least it wasn’t Hahn.

 

“Oooh!” Ty Lee said while raising her hand enthusiastically, as if she were a schoolgirl who knew the answer to the teacher's question, “I have an idea! How about we call him The Combustion Man !”

 

It was now Mai’s turn to scoff. She let her head drop behind her as she reclined across her seat. Giving Ty Lee a judgemental stare, she said, “That’s the worst name I’ve ever heard. Why would we call him that? Just wait until he gets here and ask him what his name is.”

 

Ty Lee blushed and pouted, “It is not terrible!” Glancing at Azula from the corner of her eye, she said, “I bet Sokka would like it.”

 

Mai scoffed again and rolled her eyes. “How would you know? You’ve never even spoken to him.”

 

“Neither have you!”

 

“I’m not the one making assumptions about his naming practices!”

 

“Girls!” Azula snapped, “Now is not the time.” 

 

Turning back to Ukano, Azula said, “Governor, tell me everything that you know about the resistance. Intelligence and unconfirmed rumors both. Now.”

 

The governor nodded, and answered her. “The city, as you know, surrendered without a fight. We believe that was a trick of King Bumi, as he’s a famously devious man. We’re not sure what he’s planning, if anything, but we think that the resistance is part of it. They’ve been secreting away citizens from the city for weeks, and their numbers are estimated to be a few hundred at most, but we expect that there may be fewer than that, given the number of civilians that have been taken out of the city. The nearest city wealthy enough to support a large number of refugees is Gaoling, and we suspect that the Earth Kingdom forces stationed in Omashu are escorting the refugees to Gaoling and then on to Ba Sing Se.”

 

Ukano waited for a response from the Princess, but when none was forthcoming he continued. “We have triangulated areas around the city where we are most likely to encounter attacks by the resistance. I would of course have a map brought in for you to observe, with these areas highlighted.”

 

Azula nodded and tapped her fingers on the arm of her chair. “Have there been any attempted kidnappings? Robberies, intercepted correspondence?”

 

“Well,” Ukano said uneasily with an almost imperceptible glance toward Mai, “There have been a few attempts on my life, and one attempted kidnapping of my wife.”

 

“I see.” Azula said, and her eyes flicked towards Mai. Any who did not know the girl would assume that she was unperturbed by the news, but to her friends and family the slight tension in her jaw and the pause in her breathing were practically an emotional outburst. “In that case, Governor, I demand that you, your wife, and your young son have your security detail doubled. Mai will be leaving the city with me soon, but until then I expect her to remain in the company of myself, Ty Lee, or a detail of guards.”

 

“Azula,” Mai started, “That’s hardly necessary, I can take care of myself.”

 

“I will decide what’s necessary, Mai.” Azula said sharply, cutting off Mai before she could go on a long tirade. She returned her attention to the governor. “As for the Omashu problem, I have a few sol-”

 

She stopped speaking when the door to the throne room opened. A tall woman with dark hair and makeup burst through the door. She wore a red tattoo of a snake on her right shoulder, and carried a whip at her belt. A small bald man with a drooping mustache followed her inside.

 

“No, Lady June, Please! The Princess is meeting with the Governor!” Said the small man, “if you would just wait in the hall and allow me to announce your-”

 

“Quit your blubbering! I’m already inside, and you clearly can’t stop me. The Princess paid me to meet her here, so I’m here. If she’s too busy then oh well, I tried.” June snapped at the man.

 

“You must be the bounty hunter.” Azula said. “I’ve been expecting you.”

---

 

“I don’t think that’s a good idea,” Sokka said warily. He had stiffened at Aang’s suggestion, and the tension in his shoulders did not go unnoticed by the Avatar. “Why do you want to speak with him?”

 

Aang rubbed the back of his head with a hand. He wasn’t sure how to explain this, as any mention of their intention to break Sokka free of Koh’s grasp had led to him becoming unresponsive. He decided to go with the truth, or at least as much of it as he could without Sokka conking out on them. “Sokka, something weird happens every time we talk about… a thing.”

 

“A thing?” Sokka asked, looking from Aang to Katara. Aang nodded. “Yeah, when we bring it up you kinda just lose focus, like you can’t hear or see anything.”

 

Sokka’s eyebrows furrowed. “And that means that you have to talk with the Face Guy?”

 

“Face Guy? Sokka,” Katara chided, “This is serious.”

 

“I know that,” Sokka said, “But if I say his name in the Spirit World, he shows up.”

 

“We’re not in the Spirit World.” Katara stated. Sokka nodded his agreement and explained, “Yeah, but I don’t want to get in the habit of calling him by name, just in case I do it by accident and a bunch of spirits get their faces pulled off.”

 

“Wait,” Aang said, “You mean he steals actual faces? Like from the front of your head?”

 

Sokka nodded. “Yeah. Why did you think he was called that?”

 

Aang threw his hands up and began to pace, “I thought that he just copied faces and pretended to be other people! Why would I think he literally stole faces?!”

 

“Why would you make a deal with something like that?” Katara asked. “For a smart guy, you can be really stupid sometimes!”

 

“Yeah, I know!” Sokka said, “Trust me, I figured out that it was a mistake and I regret it plenty! But what’s done is done, and there’s no going back. It’s better to accept it and move on.”

 

“What, you expect me to believe that you're okay with dying and just not existing anymore?!” Katara bit out scathingly. Sokka shrugged.

 

“I’ve been thinking about it a lot lately.” He said, “As far as I can remember, nothing came before this life. So what, if nothing comes after? Why should I let it bother me? I’m sure there are worse things.”

 

Aang stared at Sokka in disbelief. So what if nothing comes after? That was absurd. “Well, now I’m definitely going to speak with him!” He said with finality. 

 

That idea was so completely unlike Sokka that it was strangely frightening, to think that his friend would just go quietly into the night, and accept the unmaking of his soul. Aang suspected that the Face Stealer’s influence was having a stronger effect on him than they had thought, even if his personality had at least somewhat returned to normal.

 

“What, like now?” Sokka asked, looking around their camp. The sun was moving steadily through the sky, and the morning was nearly spent. “Here?”

 

Aang looked around the camp, taking note of how open it was. He grit his teeth, but Sokka spoke again before he could say anything.

 

“I don’t think that’s really a good idea,” He said cautiously. “I know that you guys are worried and all, but we’ve got a war to fight, and then this whole evil chaos spirit situation to deal with. We’ve got responsibilities to take care of, even if there are other things that we want to handle.”

 

Aang sagged and felt as if the wind had abandoned him, letting him fall from the heavens unaided. Responsibilities. Obligation. Duty. He wished that he had not been born the Avatar, that his burden had fallen to another. He sat on the ground and his friends saw his struggle as easily as they might a mountain beneath the summer sun. After a while, he spoke.

 

“I know. I have to defeat the Fire Lord. I have to master all four elements, and I have to stop Vaatu from escaping and wreaking havoc on the world. I have to do all of it before the comet comes, and I’m sure there will be more problems after that. And then more, and even more are sure to follow.” he looked at Katara, “But I promise you this, we will find a way.”

 

Katara nodded, and Sokka looked a little confused, and then suspicious. He looked between the pair of them and narrowed his eyes. “Is there something going on here that I should know about?”

 

“What? No.” Aang said, “At least, I don’t think so.” he looked at Katara again. “Maybe?”

 

“No. At least, not now anyway.” Katara said, confused. It dawned on her what her brother was implying, and she flushed. “Sokka!”

 

“Hey, all I’m saying is that I should know if Aang becomes your boyfriend. It’s my prerogative as the older brother.”

 

Aang turned bright red, and Katara started shouting at her brother. Aang decided to change the topic before things got out of hand. “Sokka, that’s not what we were talking about. And anyway, it’s time we head out. I’ve got to learn earthbending and the comet is only getting closer.”

 

The others paused in their newfound argument, and called a temporary ceasefire. They began breaking down their campsite and loading their supplies on Appa. Once they were airborne, Sokka unrolled the map of the Earth Kingdom. Aang sat beside him as Katara guided the bison to the northwest. Momo was draped across Aang’s shoulders, napping peacefully.

 

Aang marked the map at various points around the desert, using random small objects. “These villages are the closest, but I don’t know if they're going to have the right people to teach me.”

 

Sokka nodded. “Yeah, I agree. We need the best, especially given our time constraint.”

 

“We could go to Gaoling, it’s pretty close. Plus, it’s big enough that I'm sure they would have some pretty top rate earthbenders.” Aang suggested, placing his finger next to the point marked by his bison whistle.

 

“Let’s try out these other spots first. We might get lucky. If not, we can try for Gaoling or Ba Sing Se.” Sokka countered.

 

Aang nodded, and in short order they chose a town not far from the desert, a small farming village.

---

 “Unhand me this instant!” Azula roared. “Do you know who I am? By the time my father gets through with you, this city will be littered with ash and shattered bones!”

 

An earthbender placed a gag made of solid rock over her face, keeping her from making more protestations. Azula kept up the struggle for appearances sake, but she grinned internally. Everything was going according to the plan, and even now she was fully confident that she could free herself and annihilate these men with little struggle. But, that would defeat the purpose of allowing them to capture her. She needed to be brought before their leader, at which point she would give the signal for Ukano’s forces to begin the attack. With the arrival of June and her shirshu, it was quite easy to devise a plan to ferret out the so-called resistance. All that she had to do was allow herself to be captured, and then once she was in their den she would smash the vial of perfume that would signal the Fire Nation to begin their campaign to capture the resistance.

 

They were taken into an alley and down into a sewer system, something that Azula was not particularly pleased with, and from there they headed down a series of convoluted tunnels. They passed no sentries, which Azula found odd. Perhaps these earthbenders simply didn’t think anyone would think to look down here? A needless oversight on their part. It was a miracle that the city had managed to stay unconquered for as long as it had.

 

Soon, they stepped out of the sewer and entered a long corridor. One of the men ignited a torch to light the way. The earthbender who had gagged and bound her closed up the entrance behind them, and that gave Azula pause. Could the shirshu track through solid rock? She wasn’t sure, but she decided it was best not to take that chance. She kicked out with her feet at the earthbender, the only one in the team of four who had captured her. Using her bending to charge her strike, she launched the man directly into the barricade he had just made, causing it to crack. She heard the slight sound of water from the sewer coming through the stone wall the man had created, and then proceeded to run down the tunnel and away from the would-be kidnappers. She wasn’t intending to get away, but she wanted to put as much distance between them and the now weakened wall as she could.

 

A few hundred yards down the tunnel, she allowed herself to be caught. This earthbender wasn’t very good. He had no subtlety, and he projected his attacks and traps so obviously that Azula wondered if he had just learned to earthbend the previous day. It took some effort on her part to make her own capture appear natural, and not an obvious ploy.

 

“Aren’t you a fighter.” The earthbender said. He placed restraints around her ankles and pointed to one of his companions. “Tzun, you carry her. We’re nearly there, but we can trade off if you get tired.”

 

“Why do I have to carry her?” Tzun asked. He was enormous, and the other men present came up to his shoulder. The earthbender shrugged. “You’re the biggest, and therefore the strongest. Best suited to the task, I’d say.”

 

“What if she burns me?” He said nervously.

 

“Make sure you fall on her.” Quipped a man wielding a quarterstaff. The earthbender and the last man laughed. Azula gave him a scathing look. Not because of the laughter, but because the last man had nunchakus . She was of the opinion that they were perhaps the least useful weapon in all of existence, and that their only value was in an exercise of coordination. Seriously, she thought, even a stick would be better. You could at least hit someone with a stick and not worry about if the stick would rebound and hit you in return.

 

The giant of a man picked Azula up, and he was surprisingly gentle about it. He placed her over his shoulder and said, “I am sorry, Princess, but you have been a tad difficult. We’ll get to headquarters soon.”

 

The groups started walking again and soon crossed an intersection in the tunnel. They hadn’t moved far past it when they were stopped in surprise.

 

“Hey!” A new voice said. Azula and the four men turned their attention to the newcomer. The man stepped into the torch light and everyone paused at the sight. The newcomer had moss green hair, and his right eye was scarred shut. He wore an odd green robe that wasn’t fastened fully closed, leaving his massive chest exposed. A scar ran diagonally across it, until it disappeared beneath a red sash, in which he had tucked a trio of katanas. He had a headscarf tied around his right bicep, and wore an earring from which three swords dangled.

 

“Have you seen a moron with a straw hat, and a long nosed guy with a slingshot?” The swordsman said. All present shook their heads in mild confusion. The earthbender regained his wits first, and asked, “Who are you, and how did you get in here?”

 

“I’m Roranoa Zoro, and you didn’t answer my question.” The man said. He placed a hand on one of his swords.

 

The giant, Tzun answered him. “No, we haven’t seen either of the men you described.”

 

“Gah, those idiots got lost!” The man said with a groan. He looked around, as if noticing the fact that they were underground for the first time. “Do you know where the exit is?”

 

“Uh, it’s down that tunnel, you can’t miss it. I can let you out, I guess. You don’t work for the Fire Lord, do you?” The earthbender said. Zoro shook his head.

 

“No.”

 

“Uh… okay.” The earthbender looked to his companions, “I’ll be back in a minute.”

 

The earthbender and the swordsman took off down the corridor, and they remained visible as the earthbender had taken out a second torch. “It’s just a straight shot from here, so- Hey! Not that way, that’s a dead end!”

 

Zoro had taken a left turn at the intersection, and the earthbender followed him. A few moments later, the earthbender returned. He looked extremely confused.

 

“He just… disappeared.” The man said.

 

“What?” Quarterstaff - that was how Azula decided to refer to him, as she didn’t know his name - asked.

 

“That turn led into a broom closet. There was nothing else in there, but somehow he just… vanished.”

 

“Do you think it was a ghost?” Nunchakus asked. Azula decided that the man was, in fact, an idiot, as he believed in ghosts. The three other men shivered.

 

“Let’s just keep going,” Tzun said. The earthbender nodded and the group continued on their way, with the gentle giant gingerly carrying Azula over his shoulder. They kept walking, if just a bit faster than before, and soon they arrived at the headquarters of the resistance.

 

Tzun took Azula from his shoulder, and placed her in a chair in front of the commander of the remaining Earth Kingdom forces in Omashu. The commander removed her helmet and looked at the princess carefully. Azula met her eyes and could tell she was intelligent, even now thinking of new ways to defeat the Fire Nation.

 

“I am Major Wen. I’m in charge of this force, or what’s left of it. I have some questions for you, Princess Azula.” The woman said. Azula rolled her eyes at that. She made inarticulate noise at her captor, and Wen frowned. She raised a hand and snapped her fingers. Azula’s restraints crumbled away into dust, and she was left completely unbound. The act gave Azula pause, for she had never heard of an earthbender with such fine control over their element. Major Wen seemed to recognize this, for she said, “Ah. I think we’re starting to understand each other.”

---

 

The sun was setting over the horizon when team Avatar landed to make camp. Sokka idly noticed the fur scattering the ground around the bison, he picked some of it up and then let it fall again. He wondered if he could use it in a pillow or bed stuffing. Perhaps he could line a coat with it? He cast aside the random thought. It was springtime, and he didn’t need clothes with such a strong aroma. He began setting up the tent for himself and Katara, but thought better of it. It was a clear night, and their proximity to the desert made it rather warm.

 

He took out some rope and a tarp, and set up a canopy between some trees. He took care to stake it down, and then went to join in for the evening meal. He had managed to catch some fish when they stopped for lunch, so he and Katara ate that for dinner while Aang munched on some rice from earlier that day.

 

“We’re pretty close to the first town.” Katara observed. Aang nodded. Sokka remained silent as he gobbled his food like an inhuman maniac.

 

“I think we’ll be there by tomorrow. Probably around mid morning. If we don’t find anyone good in one of the villages around the desert, we’ll try Gaoling and then Ba Sing Se.” Aang said. Katara smiled at him.

 

They didn’t say much else after that, and the pair of them turned in. Sokka, however, stayed awake for a bit longer. He sat up as the first stars appeared in the sky, and the moon rose above the horizon. When he saw it, a knot formed in his throat, and he bore a sad smile. Moisture filled his eyes, and he felt that his heart would break all over again.

 

“H-hey.” He said to the moon, in a hoarse voice. “I don’t know if you can hear me, but I miss you. A lot.”

 

“I-” He stopped speaking and tears flowed silently down his face. He wiped his eyes and took a few slow breaths. “It must be pretty boring up there.”

 

No response came, and to be honest Sokka hadn’t been expecting one. He let out a mournful, choking laugh. It was silly, she couldn’t hear him. As far as he could tell, she was gone. He wished that he had been faster, or that he knew more about the threats they were facing. Vaatu and the Fire Nation both, and he didn’t want to wait until they made it to the Spirit Library. He wondered if there was any way that he could get the information before then. It was in that moment, under the moonlight cast by his fallen lover, that he had an idea.

 

Reaching down, he picked Momo up from his lap and held the lemur at eye level. “Momo, if anything happens in the next hour, bite my hand.”

 

Momo tilted his head at him curiously. Sokka shrugged and placed the animal back on his lap. He closed his eyes, and brought forth the image of Koh’s lair in his mind. 

 

“Koh.” He said. 

 

Sokka wasn’t sure if it had worked. He looked around, but he could still feel the log he was sitting on. He tried to open his eyes, but it felt as though they were already open.

 

“To what do I owe the pleasure?” A foul voice whispered in his ear. Sokka jumped and whirled on the spirit.

 

“Don’t do that! It is seriously creepy!” He snapped. Koh laughed, and Sokka felt as if his bones might jump out of his body.

 

“Have you come for more power already? I didn’t expect you so soon.” Koh said. Sokka shook his head in denial.

 

“No, I’m here for information. I need to know more about Vaatu, and how to stop him. Also, if you have any ideas about how to defeat the Fire Nation, that would be pretty neat.”

 

Koh hummed to himself and wound his way around Sokka. His many legs sounded an endless cadence across the floor. He tapped his stolen chin with his mandibles, and eventually he spoke again. “Vaatu is trying to break free, as I have told you before. Now you wish to know more on how to prevent it.”

 

Sokka nodded and motioned for the spirit to continue. Koh stopped his spiraling and stared at Sokka, switching faces rapidly. “There exists an order, dedicated to freeing him. Without them, he cannot escape his imprisonment. All you must do is find and destroy their members, and detach the anchors.”

 

“What anchors?”

 

“Those who have been taken by his influence.”

 

“You mean…” Sokka trailed off as it dawned on him. “The Rot.”

 

Koh changed his face to that of a wizened old airbender. He cocked his head to the side.”The Rot? Yes, that sounds right. Corrupted souls, decayed chi. The Rot.”

 

“Who are the members of the order?” Sokka asked.

 

“You have met some of them already. The Admiral, and the spies.”

 

Sokka grit his teeth. Zhao. Laluk. Hahn.

 

“These anchors. How many must be- How many?”

 

Koh cocked his head again. Sokka was beginning to grow annoyed by the motion. “Do you doubt still? You know the price paid should you put aside your duty. You have already begun to cut away the anchors.”

 

Koh switched faces again, and this time it was a face that Sokka recognized. It was the Fire Nation soldier he had fought in Omashu, the one he had hoped got away. The one he killed. Sokka shuddered and stepped away, fighting the urge to wretch.

 

“How did- Why do you have his face?” Sokka managed to say, still revolted. Koh laughed again, and the cavern was filled with the sound of a hundred broken things crashing together.

 

“It is the nature of our bond, as I told you when first we met. You shall take them, and they will fall to me.”

 

Sokka fell to his knees and wrapped his arms around himself. He stayed there for a minute, panting as if he had just run for miles. Eventually he spoke again. “What happens to them?”

 

“They’re separated from Vaatu, and their spirits go on. Well, most of their spirits. I keep the rest.”

 

Sokka stood, and placed a hand on his sword. He was prepared to put an end to this foul creature at that very moment, but Koh spoke again. “They will be reborn, and become whole once more in time.”

 

Sokka sagged in relief. Koh eyed him curiously. Whatever thoughts were running through his head, Sokka couldn’t say, but at least he hadn’t doomed anyone to a fate of eternal suffering.

 

“Is there anything more you can tell me about Vaatu? And the Fire Nation? You haven’t said anything about them.”

 

“I have given you all I know of how to defeat Vaatu. Wan Shi Tong knows secrets that even I do not, and when you find your way to his treasury of knowledge, he shall provide you with the answers that you seek, about Vaatu and the Fire Nation both.”

 

Sokka nodded and began to turn back, but Koh called out to him before he returned to the mortal world.

 

“I will give to you one final warning: Do not shirk your duty, for the price will be paid not in blood alone. More than one life hangs in the balance.”

---

“What have you done with Captain Wei?” Azula demanded of the Major. Major Wen raised an eyebrow. She looked to her officers and they merely shrugged.

 

“I do not know who that is.”

 

Azula rolled her eyes, but she could tell that the woman was speaking truthfully.  “He disappeared last night while I was fighting the Avatar, and foiling his attempt to rescue King Bumi.”

 

The Major's head rocked back in shock. Azula realized that she was truly ignorant, and had no idea about the Avatar having been in the city. Well, that didn't matter. She had them where she wanted them. She took the small vial of perfume from her sleeve and smashed it discreetly against the arm of the chair. She didn’t notice any difference in scent, but June had assured them that it would work.

 

“The Avatar tried to rescue King Bumi?” The major said. She seemed like she was about to say more on the subject, but thought better of it. “It doesn’t matter now. What matters is that we have you. Once it reaches full dark, we’re going to leave this city. We’ll travel underground to Gaoling, and unite with General Long to deliver you to Ba Sing Se. From there, we’ll negotiate your safe return to the Fire Nation. I doubt that it will end in peace, but perhaps we can at least get our city back. Who knows. Maybe Long Feng will arrange the end of the war with a marriage contract to the Earth King, though I doubt-”

 

Wen was cut off by the sound of an explosion from down the passage through which Azula had been delivered. The second Wen looked away, Azula leaped from her seat and rained a barrage of fire at Wen and her men. The man with the nunchakus rushed at Azula and she released a breath of fire at him, incinerating the cord connecting the stick of his weapon in addition to his eyebrows. The man paused and looked at his sticks. He spoke, and the random thought he voiced nearly made Azula laugh.

 

“I think my cousin was right. I should have gone into the cabbage business with him.”

 

Azula, instead of laughing, punched him in the face. “Nunchakus are stupid, they match you quite well!”

 

A rock whistled towards her, and Azula had to boost her evasions with her bending. She wished she had time to charge a lightning bolt, but she was not yet fast enough to generate one in active combat. Commander Wen appeared behind her and placed stone cuffs around her wrists and hands. She reached towards Azula’s mouth to cover it with more stone, but was stopped when the Princess broke free of her restraints.

 

She was surrounded by Earth Kingdom forces, and when she was beginning to fear that she would be unable to overcome them all, her reinforcements arrived. There was a terrific cry from the entrance. Dozens of soldiers poured through the tunnel and fought their way into the cavern, led by Mai, Ty Lee, as well as June and her shirshu.

 

In mere seconds it was over. June’s beast had paralyzed the entire force of resistance fighters, and the Fire Nation soldiers were restraining the immobile fighters and carrying them out of the cavern. Ty Lee ran up to Azula and punched her on the arm.

 

Azula stared at her in shock. “Why did you do that!?”

 

“Because you went into enemy territory alone! What if something had happened to you? Azula, you could have been killed. And what about Mai?! She was so worried, she was practically crying.”

 

Azula looked at Mai, who seemed no different than her usual self. She looked back at Ty Lee, and said, “I’m fine, Ty Lee. And don’t punch me.”

 

She flicked Ty Lee in the forehead to punctuate her message, and the Chi-blocker's eyes started to water. Before she could say anything, Governor Ukano walked up to the group.

 

“All of the resistance has been restrained, and are now being taken to a holding facility waiting for transport to a prison in the Fire Nation.”

 

“Good work, Governor. Please have Major Wen brought to me before she is taken away, I have some questions for her.”

 

“Uhh… I don’t believe that any women were captured, Princess.”

 

Azula rounded on the man. She glared at him and then went to inspect the prisoners personally. Ukano was right: Major Wen had gotten away.

 

---

Author’s Note:

 

Roronoa Zoro is a One Piece character. A popular meme in the One Piece and anime community at large is Zoro getting lost and winding up in different shows, stories, or manga. I had the idea when writing chapter seven, and decided that now would be a fun time to put it in.

 

It might affect the tone of the Azula POV, but I still had fun with it.

 

Also: remember Major Wen.

 

1/7/2023

Chapter 34: The Greatest Earthbender in the World

Finally, after four days of riding, training, sleeping, riding, eating, and then riding some more, Zuko and his Uncle made it to the rich trade city of Gaoling. Zuko was tired, sore, and quite frankly a little nauseated by his Uncle’s… aroma. He did not smell much better, but he was blind to that malodorous truth. Four days of constant travel and exercise was not a recipe for soft scents and leisure.

 

His uncle had begun training both Zuko and himself anew, stating that he expected there would be a battle ahead of them. Zuko was inclined to agree: he was well aware of the danger awaiting them. Although he had to admit, he was rather surprised by his Uncle’s progress. The man had begun to return to his previous physical prowess far more quickly than Zuko had thought possible. After less than a single week, Iroh’s stomach had shrunk significantly and his muscles seemed to swell of their own accord. It was actually quite impressive.

 

Iroh brought Sugar Foot to a halt, jarring Zuko from his thoughts. The pair dismounted the animal and walked alongside her as they crested the hills surrounding the city. They progressed rapidly down the path towards the city in an amicable silence until Iroh spoke.

 

“Now that we have made it to Gaoling, I must confess that I am looking forward to a hot bath, and a steaming cup of jasmine tea.” He said with a wistful expression on his face.

 

“I agree, Uncle,” Zuko said, “Though I think that I’d rather have a meal of something other than rice and jerky in place of the tea.”

 

Iroh laughed, “I don’t see why we can’t have both.”

 

Zuko rolled his eyes but smiled to himself anyway. He had taken to being much cheerier on this trip than he had been in years, and he felt optimistic about the next few days, even if he would have to fight against the Fire Lord in the weeks to come.

 

Before long they made it to the city gates, which seemed redundant as there were no guards. They just let people walk through, as if there was no war going on, the idiots. Zuko was astonished that the Earth Kingdom had lasted as long as it had without falling completely. And then he saw the second gate, which was heavily guarded.

 

“Name and business.” Said a bored guard. 

 

“I’m Mushi, and this is my nephew, Lee.” Iroh said, “We’re looking for some friends of ours.”

 

The guard rolled his eyes. “You may enter, but keep in mind that any trouble will see you in the stocks for a week.”

 

“Of course, of course, we will be careful not to cause trouble, sir,” Iroh said with a bow. When Zuko didn’t follow his example, Iroh stomped heavily on the younger man’s foot. Zuko grunted in pain and bowed as well. The guard waved them on without as much as a second thought, and soon the Fire Nation royals were past the gate and into the city proper. 

 

They did not have to go far before they found an inn with a stable for Sugar Foot, and it even had a bathhouse in the building next door. In minutes they had a room, a stall for Sugar Foot, and were scrubbing themselves clean in the bath.

 

In less than an hour, all of the accumulated filth of the road and short voyage by sea had been scoured from them, and both men were enjoying a meal. In a piece of additional good fortune, the innkeeper had a fresh stock of jasmine tea.

 

While the pair were resting and eating, Sugar Foot was having the time of her life in the stable, for she was being brushed and petted by every stablehand in a mile radius, for the news of her affectionate and sweet disposition had reached far in the short time she had been there. Before the end of the day, a group of local children would sneak into the stable to toss her treats, and put ribbons in her feathers.

 

Zuko was completely unaware of the treatment given to his faithful companion, for he was busy plotting his next moves on his mission to join the Avatar. He tapped his chopstick on the rim of his bowl as he thought. How could they quickly track down Aang and his friends, without them leaving before Zuko got there?

 

He supposed that Aang would stay with whoever he had found to teach him earthbending for a number of months and that all he needed to do is find out where that was. He leaned back in his seat and stared at the ceiling. The answer was simple enough, he just had to go looking for information. Now that he decided on his next course of action, Zuko stood.

 

“Uncle,” He said, “I’ll be back shortly.”

 

“Where are you going?” Iroh asked, his eyebrows raised. “It’s nearly sundown.”

 

“I… I’m going to find out if anyone knows where the Avatar might be.” Zuko said, but he hesitated to take a quick scan of their surroundings to ensure that there were no eavesdroppers

 

“Perhaps it would be better to start in the morning,” Iroh advised cautiously, “We have been exerting ourselves more than usual of late, and a man needs his rest.”

 

Zuko paused on his way to leave the inn. He turned to his uncle and replied, “I know, Uncle. I won’t be out all night, just an hour or two. The longer we wait, the harder it will be to find them, so I want to start as soon as I can.”

 

Iroh nodded and waved at Zuko to continue. Zuko smiled at him and left the inn, turning left to progress further into the city. He noticed a group of children carrying ribbons hurrying past him, but he paid them no mind. A soft spring breeze tousled his hair, and for a moment it fell into his line of sight. He brushed it away with a hand and considered getting a tie for it, but discarded the thought as unimportant. He had a mission to complete.

 

Zuko walked through the city, looking for a market or tavern he could hear some news in. Perhaps he would ask one of the guards if they had heard anything. He pondered the idea of impersonating a postal worker and snooping around the post office, but decided that he wasn’t likely to fit in, given his appearance. He crossed a narrow river that cut through the city. A number of small boats floated on the waterway, and some of them were manned by merchants selling any number of goods. It seemed to Zuko that the money and goods were exchanged by a bucket on a pole from the boat to the top of the wall along the canal.

 

Zuko crossed over the bridge and spotted a notice board not far away, but before he reached it he overheard a pair of men speaking.

 

“...Did you hear what happened in Omashu a few days ago? The resistance was destroyed.” Said one man, and the second man’s mouth fell open in dismay.

 

“No! How?” The second man replied. The first man nodded and said, “I heard that the FIre Lord’s daughter found where they were hiding and defeated them single-handedly.”

 

“That’s just the Fire Nation propaganda, Kakashi.” The second man said, but the first man, Kakashi, shook his head in disagreement.

 

“No, Major Wen of Omashu made it here by herself, and from what I heard she was the only one to escape. I’m telling you, Tien, it’s not propaganda.” Kakashi said.

 

“You can say that, but we both know that there’s only one person in this city with enough connections to really know what’s going on.” Tien chopped his hand into his open palm as he spoke. Zuko’s ears perked up. Perhaps these two would be able to tell him something useful after all, and he wouldn’t have wasted time standing in front of this message board and pretending to read.

 

“Lao Beifong.” Kakashi said sagely. He and his friend started walking, and Zuko turned away and headed in the opposite direction. Had he followed them, he would have been privy to the next part of their conversation, and that would have saved him a lot of trouble.

 

“No, you idiot!” Tien said, “It’s General Long! The Beifong’s might be the richest family in the kingdom, but their connections are all business arrangements. Why would he know anything about the war?”

The sun had just barely dipped below the western horizon, and the world was cast in the pale blue haze of twilight. Zuko reentered the inn, and he was pleased with himself as he had found a lead, as well as the location of the Beifong estate. He decided to get a few hours of rest before heading out to investigate the estate in the night. He would prefer to meet with the man in the morning, openly and ask him without subterfuge, but Zuko did not believe that a member of the Earth Kingdom peerage would welcome a prince of the Fire Nation into his home. He also rather doubted that the man would willingly tell him where Aang was.

 

Zuko scanned the common room, but didn’t see his Uncle. He made his way to the stairs and up to their room. When he got there, he found his uncle doing pushups on his knuckles. He pushed himself into the air and clapped his hands at the top of each repetition, and stopped when he noticed Zuko enter the room, although he did not rise. Instead, Iroh maintained his position and spoke to Zuko from a plank.

 

“Did you find anything?” Iroh asked. Zuko nodded.

 

“I heard some rumors, and learned of someone with contacts all over the Earth Kingdom.”

 

“What rumors?” Iroh asked. He lowered himself and started doing sit-ups with his feet anchored under the bed.

 

“Just that Azula single-handedly crushed the resistance in Omashu.” Zuko answered. Iroh paused in his exercise for a second, and then continued.

 

“That sounds like her, but I imagine her friends and the army probably helped. She’s close.”

 

“I know.” Zuko said. He didn’t like the idea of Azula being so near, especially if she thought him to be her enemy. He admitted that she probably did, as their last encounter had not gone well. He realized that since he had agreed to let Jee and Tahno start their stupid rebellion he had become her enemy. Not a good thought. He brushed his hair from his eyes and said, “We need to find Aang as fast as possible. Although, I still think that you would be a better teacher for him.”

 

Iroh stopped his exercise and sat lotus-style on the ground before his bed. He looked at Zuko and stroked his beard. “It is not my destiny, Prince Zuko.”

 

“You keep saying that, but I still do not understand!” Zuko countered.

 

“In time you will.”

 

“What does that even mean?” Zuko asked, exasperated.

 

“It means,” Iroh stood up and stretched, “That I am going to take a bath.”

 

With that, Iroh left the room. Zuko raised his hands in exasperation and ran them through his hair. He pinched the bridge of his nose and flopped onto his bed. He decided to put aside his uncle’s cryptic response and get some sleep, for he had a long night ahead of him. Within minutes he was asleep and willed himself to awake a few hours before dawn.

Zuko crept along the wall of the Beifong estate, carefully keeping a lookout for guards. After the first pair turned around a corner of the large house in the center of the grounds, Zuko leapt from the wall and rolled to slow his momentum. He clung to the shadows of the statues and topiary as he ran towards the building. He made it to the building and climbed onto the roof, just in time for the second pair of guards to miss him. He stayed where he was, the guise of the Blue Spirit in place to hide his identity. After the voices of the patrolling guards had faded, Zuko continued his infiltration of the building. It was two stories, and there were several smaller buildings around that he assumed served as homes for the servants, as well as a stable. He was operating under the assumption that Lao Beifong would keep his messages and correspondence, anything that would be of value to Zuko, inside the main house. Probably on the top floor.

 

Zuko stalked across the roof until he came to stand above a shuttered window, which he opened a crack to peer inside. The window was at the end of a long hallway that led along the exterior wall. The right side of the hallway was lined with a few sliding doors. Zuko noted that the floors were made of solid marble, which he thought a bit odd. He decided that wasn't important and continued on his mission. He crept inside and quickly opened the first door. What he found was who he could only assume to be the Beifinongs, sleeping in their bed. He closed the door silently and moved on.

 

He had roughly an hour to find information on where Aang might be, and he wanted to be gone by that time. He did not want to be on the property at sunrise, and he figured that he could come back the next night if he didn’t find anything. He rounded a corner and opened a new door. This room contained a child, a girl around twelve years old, and she was snoring violently. Zuko blinked in surprise, as he had not heard anything about the Beifong family having any children. Maybe she was a niece who came to visit for a while?

 

The girl stopped snoring and stirred. Zuko held his breath, but the girl only rolled over and faced away from him. Zuko carefully closed the door and continued his way down the hallway. He found a final door and opened it, revealing it to be a study. Maps were framed along the walls, with red strings connecting separate points. There was a desk and filing cabinet at the far end. Zuko smiled to himself. He found what he was looking for.

 

---

 

Toph rolled over for the seventh time. She closed her eyes. It didn’t really make a difference, but she heard that it was what people did to go to sleep. If they could see.

 

Before long, she decided that she wasn’t going to get any more sleep that night. She wondered what she would do that day. Probably the same boring things that she did almost every day, for there were no earthbending fights for her to participate in. She could sneak away again. Meander through town, or go into the mountains to visit the badgermoles.

 

Her mother would likely insist that she spend the day with her tutors, being read accounts of history, philosophy, or other pointless high society junk that her mother wanted her to learn. Toph was just glad that she could sneak away from time to time. But still, she wondered, would she do that today? And why couldn’t she sleep? It was nearly dawn, but she felt like she could almost hear something. Like paper shuffling just on the edge… no, she definitely could hear paper shuffling. She furrowed her eyebrows.  Was her father awake so early? That was unlike him.

 

Toph tossed on the tunic that she donned whenever she left her family estate. Her bed was wood, feathers, and silk, so she couldn’t see anything just yet. She wasn’t sure why, but she had an odd feeling about whatever that sound was. Once she was dressed, she got out of bed and sensed around. Her parents were still asleep, the guards were patrolling, and that sound was… an intruder! Toph realized that she would be fighting today after all.

 

Toph slammed open her door and bolted into the hallway. The intruder heard the sound and she could sense him hurriedly stashing the papers he had been scanning back where he had gotten them. Toph charged into her father’s study just as the intruder drew a pair of swords. The man rounded on her and stopped when he saw Toph.

 

“Who are you and what do you want?” She demanded of him.

 

“I’m not going to tell you that.” The man said, “and besides, it’s not here. I was just about to leav- ooof!”

 

Toph launched a rock into the man’s stomach, knocking the wind out of him. The man doubled over and stepped back but was able to dodge the next projectiles. He regained his breath quickly and drew his swords, deflecting the next volley. He hooked his sword around the first thing he saw and threw it at Toph, failing to realize that it was a blanket that would do little more than hamper her movements for a few seconds at best.

 

Blanket or not, it gave him a chance. Toph sensed the intruder dive through the window and onto the roof, but she was already moving. She quickly opened a hole in the floor and fell through it into the dining room. She landed with ease and sealed the dent she had made, and then discarded the blanket still wrapped around her shoulders. She dashed to the wall and opened another exit, leaping through before sealing that one as well. She didn’t particularly care if the house was full of holes, but her mother hated when the house was destroyed by the earthbending.

 

Toph paused to search for the would-be thief, and felt through her bending that he was scaling the wall of the estate. She smiled to herself and resumed her pursuit, crashing right through the wall as the man touched down on the other side.

---

 

Zuko landed on the ground outside of the Beifong estate and breathed a sigh of relief; it seemed that he had gotten away from the small earthbender. He straightened to his full height and took a step just in time for the child to crash through the wall beside him.

 

Zuko dodged an earthbending attack and started running. He had stayed too long, and the occupants of the estate had risen, and somehow the girl he stumbled upon turned out to be an earthbending prodigy. Great. How had she followed him? He knew that nobody had seen him get over the wall, and he doubted that he had left footprints. He knew he had been silent, so he thought that perhaps it had merely boiled down to luck.

 

He did not want to fight this girl, both to avoid hurting her and because he doubted he could win without resorting to firebending. Though it galled him, he took the other option: he ran.

 

“Hey! Get back here so I can kick your butt!” The girl said as she gave chase, tossing rocks at Zuko with incredible precision. He barely managed to avoid being hit and was almost encased in rock. He evaded the would-be prison and vaulted over it. He sprinted as fast as he could, trying to maintain an unpredictable path as he ran, but it seemed like this earthbender was able to read his movements before he made them.

 

The chase continued in that fashion as the pair of them entered the city proper, with Zuko barely keeping his feet all the while. He took a desperate leap over a fence and into an alley, landing in a roll. He righted himself quickly and started to run forwards again, but the moment his foot touched the ground the earth beneath it shifted, causing him to slide to one side and making him fall. He balanced himself with a hand, which was immediately encased in rock.

 

“Now that I have you here,” The girl said, “I want to know what you were doing in my house!”

 

“Uh…” Zuko said through his mask. Well, he thought, firebending it is, if only a little bit. He broke the rock holding himself in place and scrambled up the side of a building. He sprinted across the roof and leapt over another alley. He scanned quickly and saw no pursuit. He gave a sigh of relief, and quickly divested the mask and black garb of the Blue Spirit, tying them into a bundle which he attached to the regular clothing he wore beneath the disguise.

 

The sun shone brightly and the spring wind blew gently through the morning air. The city of Gaoling was rising. Zuko was glad, for it was something he could use to his advantage. Tucking his dao into his belt, Zuko merged with the crowd. It wasn’t common for the people of this city to carry swords, but it wasn’t rare from what he had seen. He hoped that moving his dao from his back would be enough to establish his anonymity.

 

Zuko started his way towards the inn, keeping an eye out for the small earthbender as he went. He was near the river that flowed through the city when he ducked around a corner, quickly scanning the way he had come from to be sure she hadn’t followed him.

 

“You can’t hide from me, genius.”

 

Zuko almost jumped out of his skin. She was right there, standing a foot away from him. How had she gotten the drop on him? He turned to run again, seriously considering that he might have to firebend at her, despite his misgivings. He had gotten a grand total of zero steps when he was shot into the air by a column of rock. He flailed his arms wildly trying to gain some semblance of control, yelling in surprise. He landed and was immediately shot into the air again, and again, and then a fourth time.

 

“Why.” The girl said as she threw him again. “Were you going through my dad’s things?”

 

Zuko fell to the ground again and was launched with far greater force than he had been previously. He sailed over the buildings and across the street, and when he started to fall he saw that he was over the river. He did his best to right himself so that he landed feet first into the water, which was surprisingly deep. He was fully submerged and had not yet touched the bottom when the water arrested his momentum. He kicked for the surface.

 

Alright, Zuko thought, that was it. He was going to unleash a rain of fire on that earthbender like she had never seen before. He was angry enough that the concept of blowing his cover was no longer enough to keep him from defending himself. His head broke the surface, and he made for a small boat that was moored along the side of the wall that lined the river. He climbed in and readied himself for the girl’s reappearance. A minute passed, and then another. Ten. Then twenty. Zuko suspected that she was lying in wait for him to reappear, and after nearly a half hour of sitting in wet clothes, he was willing to oblige her.

 

He climbed up the wall and leapt onto the ground at the side of the river opposite from where he had last seen her. He scanned the area, swords drawn, but couldn’t find any sign of her. The girl was gone.

---

Toph thought she had overdone it a little. She hadn’t meant to throw the intruder so far, but she was a little angry at both his crime and his refusal to fight back. At first, she had assumed he wasn’t an earthbender. He didn’t walk like one, and that he was willing to run away didn’t help with that assessment. She had gotten the feeling that he would rather have fought than retreat, but he had fled all the same. And then he had gotten out of the earth cuff she had trapped his hand with, which made her think he was an earthbender, although it hadn’t felt like earthbending. She briefly considered that he was a firebender, but dismissed the thought. From what she knew of firebenders, they were more likely to take ground than give it. Too bad, Toph thought. She had never fought a firebender, and she wanted to give it a try.

 

 A waterbender maybe? The ground had been still damp from the morning dew, so it was plausible. He had such a strange feeling, as if he could burst through any barrier put before him. Like he held the power of the sun in the palm of his hand. Maybe he was Fire Nation? But that didn’t make sense; why would the Fire Nation want to search her family estate?

 

She clicked her tongue. Why hadn’t he hit the ground yet? She hadn’t used enough force for him to stay up this long, and she was beginning to worry that the impact upon his landing might kill him. She cocked her head and listened, but couldn’t hear anyone screaming as they fell from the sky.

 

She waited, and ten minutes had passed before she gave up. Maybe he was an airbender and had flown away? Toph snorted. It was more likely that he had landed too far away for her to sense clearly with all of the people walking about. She turned on her heel and began to walk home, thinking about what he could have been after. Why would he bother going through her dad’s office?

 

“...Corporate espionage?” She said aloud. She couldn’t believe that he had managed to get away from her. Now she would never know the answer.

 

Rather abruptly, a portly old man carrying a basket piled high with random oddities backed out in front of her. Toph tried to grab the man’s attention with a warning, but it was too late and the man crashed into her, knocking himself and his purchases to the ground. Toph was unfazed by the impact, and retained her footing easily.

 

“Oh, excuse me. I didn’t see you there,” The old man said as he began to pick up his belongings.

 

“It’s fine.” Toph said, and she bent down to help. She began placing the items back in the basket in the same order they had been in before.

 

“You… must have quite the memory,” The stranger said, “You could only have seen the basket for a moment, and yet you’re placing them in the same order.”

 

“Oh, I didn’t see them at all.” Toph said. She grinned at the man and waved a hand over her eyes, saying in a stage whisper. “I’m blind.”

 

“I… see.” The old man said, and Toph sensed a touch of confusion. She smiled more broadly and said, “I don’t.”

 

The old man exhaled sharply through his nose at her joke. They had finished stacking his belongings in his basket by then, and the man bowed to her and said, “Thank you for your help.”

 

“It’s no problem,” Toph replied, “I'm Toph by the way.”

 

“I’m Iro- Uh, Mushi.”

 

Toph frowned. The man had lied when he had given his name, and she likely would have known even without her earthbending. She crossed her arms and glared at him. “We were getting along so well, and now you’re lying to me. What’s your real name?”

 

The old man looked around for eavesdroppers, of which there could have been plenty. He leaned in a little bit. “I’m afraid I can’t say.”

 

“Why not? Are you in hiding?”

 

“Maybe.”

 

Toph whistled. “Wow. Why?”

 

“It’s not something that should be spoken of so openly.” The man said. Toph shrugged.

 

“I can keep a secret.”

 

The man laughed and handed her his basket. “Carry this for a tired old man, and we’ll see.”

 

“So if I carry this for you you’ll tell me?” She asked, following him down the road and towards the river.

 

“I can’t make any promises, Toph. It’s dangerous.” He said.

 

“I can handle myself,” came her response. “I’m the greatest earthbender in the world.”

 

The man paused for a second before saying, “Is that how you can get around so well while blind?”

 

“Yeah, I can see with earthbending, but not how most people do. I sense the vibrations in the earth and that shows me where everything is.”

 

“So that’s how you managed to get so far into the city by yourself.” The man said. Toph frowned.

 

“I don’t need help! I can carry my own weight.”

 

“Need? No, I guess not. But sometimes it’s nice to let others help you even when you don’t need it.” He said. They took a left turn and walked over the bridge crossing the river.

 

“I was chasing someone. He broke into my house and was going through our things, but he got away.”

 

“I see.” The man said thoughtfully.

 

“Are you on the run?” Toph asked, an idea forming. “Is the Earth King after you?”

 

“No.”

 

She groaned. This was less interesting than she had hoped. They were approaching an inn when she felt a familiar person in the yard behind the building. The would-be thief. She had found him.

---

Zuko had finally made it back to the inn. It hadn’t taken him long to get there, but after waiting for half of an hour in wet clothing for an attack that never came, he was more than ready to be back. In his opinion, it was too early in the spring to be soaking wet. He could have dried himself, but that might have revealed his status as a firebender. Now that he had calmed down a little, he accepted that it was not something he wanted to get around the town.

 

He sat in meditation in the morning sun. He had found that the inn had a small yard behind it, and taken to calming himself further before entering the room. He wasn’t sure that his uncle would be awake by now, but he didn’t need to find out when he was wet and angry. He breathed in a slow and measured cadence. In, and out. In, and out. In, and… he was encased to the neck in rock.

 

He tried to move his arms inside the prison, but the stone had been bent far to snuggly to allow even the slightest movement. He had been caught.

 

“Well, well, well. What do we have here?” An all too familiar voice drawled out. Zuko clenched his teeth. The Beifong girl had found him. He chose to say nothing.

 

“Still not feeling talkative, eh?” The girl walked into sight, carrying an overly stuffed basket.

 

“Toph! Where are you going? I need my- Zuko?!” Uncle appeared as well, forgetting to use the cover names. Zuko glared at him.

 

“What are you doing with her?!” Zuko glared daggers from his uncle to the girl. Toph, apparently.

 

“You two know each other?” Toph spun towards Iroh, raising her arms in a fashion that was reminiscent of a mantis. “Maybe you can tell me what he’s up to.”

 

Iroh raised his hands placatingly. “I don’t know why. My nephew doesn’t like to share his plans with me very often. We don’t have to discuss things so heatedly, maybe we could all sit down and enjoy a cup of calming jasmine tea.”

 

“I don’t need any calming tea!” Toph and Zuko barked at once. They glared at each other after having spoken in unison.

 

“If you’re not going to explain,” Toph made a seat for herself using her earthbending, “I’ll have to report you to the police, or get creative.” She punched a fist into the palm of her hand to punctuate the idea.

 

Zuko growled at her. “Did you just wake up and choose violence today?!”

 

“Oh, I don’t know. Did you break into my house ?!”

 

Zuko had the decency to look away in chagrin as he mumbled, “That’s fair.”

 

“My nephew and I are… looking for someone. A friend of sorts, you could say.” Iroh sat on the seat beside Toph. She stood up and made another seat for herself.

 

“And the best way to do that is by looking through my father's business dealings?”

 

Iroh looked at Zuko with a raised eyebrow. Zuko blew his hair out of his eyes. “No. I heard that he was in touch with people all over the Earth Kingdom, so I assumed he was some sort of communication officer in the army.”

 

Toph rolled her eyes, and Zuko noticed for the first time that they were cloudy, sightless. He stiffened, or he would have had if he had not been encased in stone. Had he been chased and caught by a blind girl? He was thankful that Azula wasn’t there to see this, for she would never let him hear the end of it. And then he was thankful she wasn’t there for a few other reasons too.

 

“They’re trading contacts, genius.” Toph pinched the bridge of her nose, “So what? You’re working with the Fire Nation?”

 

“Uh, quite the opposite really, if anything.” Iroh stroked his beard. It had grown even further in the past week.

 

“You’re saying that you’re not Fire Nation?”

 

“Uh…”

 

“Uncle!” Zuko hissed. Why was the man failing at maintaining cover? “Of course we’re not Fire Nation.”

 

Toph stood up again and pointed a finger at Zuko, although she wasn’t looking at him directly. “I can tell you're lying!”

 

“I am not!”

 

“You are. A person's body gives off subtle hints, and I can feel them through earthbending.”

 

Iroh sighed. “We are Fire Nation.”

 

Toph nodded. “Rebels? Spies?”

 

“Rebels.” Zuko said in defeat. The secret was out, so there was no use denying it. Maybe if he was honest she wouldn’t turn them in to the army. If only he could get free, then he could get out of there. He idly wondered why his uncle hadn’t tried to free him yet.

 

“Who are you looking for?”

 

“The Avatar.”

 

Toph formed a puzzled expression. “Why?”

 

“Teach him firebending.” Zuko glared at her.

 

The stone encasing Zuko crumbled away. He rubbed at his arms to regain some feeling and then eyed Toph with confusion. “Why?”

 

“You told the truth.” Toph turned her head towards the inn and frowned. “You guys shouldn’t be staying here.” She said, “This inn is lame, you can stay with me.”

 

“What? Why would we do that? Why would you want us to?” Zuko said suspiciously.

 

“Because we have lots of room and a great chef. You’ve seen the place.” She lowered the seats she had made back into the ground. “And I've never fought a firebender before.”

 

“A great chef you say?” Iroh said, his mouth watering. “Where do you live exactly?”

 

“How do you plan to convince your parents to let us stay with you?” Zuko asked. He wasn’t on board with the idea just yet, but he could admit that it would be easier to get by with a free place to sleep. “And we’re not interested in fighting you.”

 

“Don’t worry. I have a plan.”

 

Zuko felt an uneasy sensation in the pit of his stomach. Did she mean for her parents or for fighting him?

 

---

 

“Scrambled on toast!” Ty Lee said, and she sounded a little irritated.

 

“Wrong. Sunny side up with bacon.” Mai countered. Azula had been listening to them argue about the best way to eat eggs. She had had enough.

 

“You’re both fools!” She slammed a palm onto the table. Her friends looked at her in alarm, and she continued. “Poached, medium. Over a bed of jasmine rice with tangerine sauce.”

 

Ty Lee opened her mouth to argue, but her stomach growled. She closed her mouth again and nodded in defeat. Mai blinked slowly and said, “Well, that certainly does sound enticing.”

 

The three of them had already eaten, and were just about to begin their training for the day. After being stuck without bending, Azula had decided to learn some non-bending forms of combat. Mai and Ty Lee were more than happy to help. Before they could begin, however, a messenger appeared followed by a large man. The newcomer had two prosthetic limbs and the tattoo of an eye placed vertically in the center of his forehead.

“Your highness,” The messenger said, “The man sent by Admiral Zhao has arrived.”

 

The behemoth walked to them and handed Azula a scroll. She recognized Zhao’s seal and opened it.

 

Princess Azula,

 

I took the liberty of hiring this man to assist you in your efforts to find your brother and uncle. He is an accomplished bender, and the Fire Lord has authorized the use of lethal force if necessary. He is of paramount skill, and should be of great use to you in your mission.

 

Best regards,

Admiral Zhao.

 

Azula stared at the scroll. Authorized lethal force ? Against Uncle and Zuko? That was… she decided not to think about it. She had heard nothing from her father about killing either of them, so she would not act on that information unless it came directly from the Fire Lord.

 

Now that the last member of their party had arrived, they could set out after her uncle and brother. She would have preferred to go after the Avatar first, but she didn’t have a smell sample strong enough to pinpoint their direction. She had offered up the note Sokka had left for her, but June had said that it wasn’t strong enough. The note had been returned to its place in Azula’s belongings.  Azula had ended up using the bag containing the Pai Sho tile her uncle had given her, as that was strong enough. She was glad the man had arrived early. They could leave that day.

 

“So… what do we call you?” Ty Lee asked. The huge man reached into his pocket and withdrew a business card. He handed it to Ty Lee, who read it and cheered. Mai read it next and scowled. Azula was handed the card and read it last. It said: The Combustion Man.

---

 

Author’s note:

 

Please share any constructive criticism, if you don’t mind. I’m doing this for fun, but also because I want to write professionally one day.

 

I’ve been having computer trouble, and I’m too poor to buy a new one right now, so if updates slow down I’m sorry. That said, I have no intentions of abandoning this story.

 

We’re almost to the halfway point plot wise. Leaving the Spirit Library will be the official halfway point as far as plot and arcs are concerned, although I can’t say about length.

 

Anyway, this year is off to a bad start for me. Caught the flu, almost got fired, absolutely broke, and now my computer is acting up. Plus there was some issue with my tax form at work and I paid just shy of 10,000 dollars in taxes last year. I make less than 40k, so it does explain why everything is so not cool. Oh yeah and my foot hurts. Sorry for whining, but I won’t do it IRL so I’ll do it anonymously. Except for my beta reader, for who I am very grateful.

 

To end this note, wish me a happy birthday. I’ll be at work because I used the vacation day I was saving when I was bedridden with the flu, so I'll be miserable. Man alive, I’ll be 25!

Chapter 35: Earth Rumble

Zuko had to admit that he did not expect this to be Toph’s plan. He figured that he and his uncle would disguise themselves as servants or something, but instead, he was standing in front of Lao Beifong soaking wet and muddy.

 

“Dad,” Toph said, “This is my friend Lee, and his uncle Mushi.” 

 

Toph clung onto Zuko’s arm for effect, and his uncle waved at Lao and Poppy. The plan had been to allow Toph to dump buckets of river water and mud on him, and then on her as well. She had concocted a story in which Zuko had heroically dove into the water to save her after she had been knocked in by a passing cart. She couldn’t get out of the way, being blind and all.

 

“Toph, we were so worried! When we woke up, you were nowhere to be found!” Poppy said. Lao eyed the two strangers with suspicion.

 

“How did you two men come to find my daughter? And how did she get so far from home?” Lao interrogated them as if they were personally responsible.

 

“I fell into the river. I was trying to go for a walk, but I must have wandered off the estate and gotten lost again. Lee saved me from drowning, and his uncle helped get me out of the water. They let me ride on their ostrich horse, and took me back here.”

 

Lao nodded, seeming to accept the story without hesitation. “Well, it seems that I owe the pair of you my gratitude. Leave your address with a guard on your way out and I’ll see to it that a reward is given to you.”

 

“Actually, Dad,” Toph said, “Lee and Mushi are only in town for a few days while they’re getting in touch with a friend of theirs.”

 

“I see. Well then, whatever inn you're staying at should do fine.”

 

“These two just saved my life and you’re going to make them stay at an inn?” Toph said in an offended tone. Zuko raised his remaining eyebrow at her.

 

“Lao,” Poppy cut in, “Perhaps we can offer them a place to stay for a few days, until they get into contact with… whoever it is.”

 

Lao sighed and nodded his assent. “I suppose that can be arranged.”

 

---

“The trick to earthbending is pretty simple.” Kwan said, “You just gotta go for it!”

 

He lifted a stone from the ground and hurled it away from him. Evidently, he hadn’t been paying much attention to where he was aiming, for a man cried out at the destruction of his cart, “My cabbages!”

 

The man fell to his knees and wiped his tear-filled eyes. “I should have gone into nunchakus like my cousin in Omashu.”

 

Aang smiled awkwardly, “Uh…”

 

“We’ll keep you in mind.” Sokka came to the rescue. He steered Aang away by the shoulders and towards their camp. “I’ll catch up, I’m going to get some supplies before we head to the next town.”

 

Aang nodded and bid farewell to Sokka. Katara had elected to stay in the camp and keep watch over their things that day. She and Sokka had agreed to trade off that role, though Aang questioned if it was really necessary. The siblings had shrugged, saying it was better safe than sorry.

 

As he walked back into camp Katara waved in greeting. “Hey, Aang. Did you find anyone?”

 

“No.” He sighed, “Just the same as the last two places we checked.”

 

“Large brash men, who decree that muscles are enough to win any fight?”

 

He nodded. He took a seat on a tree stump and propped his head on one hand. “Bumi said the key to earthbending is to wait and listen, but everyone else seems to think it's to just go for it.”

 

Katara got up from where she had been laying on Appa’s tail and walked over to him. She stopped to squat next to the stump. “I’ve been thinking. Maybe you could ask Roku for help? He might know, or he could send you a vision or something.”

 

Aang exhaled through his nose, and his airbending caused a cloud of dust to billow up around them. “I’ve been trying, but all that ever happens when I try and speak with him lately is that I hear a girl laughing.”

 

“You went to the Spirit World?” Katara asked, surprised.

 

“No.” Aang rubbed his eyes. It had been a long couple of days, and it was getting late. The sun had nearly dipped below the horizon. “I don’t want to go into the Spirit World while we’re so exposed. After what happened at Jeong Jeong’s camp I don’t think it’s a good idea.”

“I can understand that,” Katara said, “But Sokka and I are much better fighters now. Plus, unless Azula gets the drop on us with an army I think we can get away, even if we have to carry you with us.”

 

“I don’t know, Katara,” Aang rubbed the back of his head, “If something happened to you I don’t think I could live with myself.”

 

“Oh, we’ll be fine.” Katara smiled at him, “There’s nothing around here that we can’t handle. And besides, your duty as the Avatar is more important than my safety.”

 

Aang frowned slightly. Duty, Sacrifice, obligation. Was his responsibility as the Avatar truly more important than her safety? To him it wasn’t, but he was starting to understand what could happen if he didn’t carry out his role. The Air Nomads were gone. The southern waterbenders too. Huge swaths of Earth Kingdom territory had been conquered by the Fire Nation. The Northern Water Tribe had been invaded, and Yue had died because of his inability to put aside his emotions. He couldn’t afford to keep doing this, to keep placing his own wants first. Even though it broke his heart not to.

 

“I… I know.” He said, “It’s… It’s just hard. I’ve got so many lives depending on me, but I’m just one kid. Sure, I’m the Avatar, but I’m still just… me. You and Sokka are my best friends, I don’t know what I'd do without you.”

 

Katara warped him in a hug, which was a bit awkward since he was still sitting. He appreciated it all the same. “Thanks, Katara.”

 

She let him go, and Aang crossed his legs on the stump. “I’m going to meditate for a while.”

 

She nodded and Aang closed his eyes. He focused on his breathing. The spring wind gently caressed his scalp, it tugged on his clothes and played gentle music in his ears. He tried to capture that melody, the subtle pattern of the wind. He fell deeper into his meditative state and had a vision.

 

Aang stood in a cavern. A square ring stood in its center, surrounded on all sides by stands. In one corner of the ring was a young girl, and opposite her was a one-eyed dragon. It stood tall, waiting for only moments before it struck. The dragon leapt forward, and maw opened to breathe fire, but the girl was ready for him. She swept her foot to one side across the ring, and a stone shifted. It moved the dragon's foot to one side, breaking it’s root.

 

The pair were fighting, but Aang thought they were friends too. They sparred, but the dragon cocked it’s head and looked right at him. Aang waved nervously, but the dragon didn’t seem to see him. It’s eye narrowed, and it was hit in the head by a rock. The girls spoke to the creature, but Aang couldn’t make out the words. She laughed, and the dragon took off. An animal leapt from below the ring, one that Aang had not seen before. A great boar, with emerald wings and golden fur. The girl climbed on the beast and joined the dragon in the air.

Aang opened his eyes. The sun had fallen below the horizon and Katara had built a fire. A pile of food and other supplies was stacked beside Appa, and for some reason, Sokka was chopping at a tree with Regret .

 

Aang unfolded his legs and walked to the pile where Katara was sorting through the goods that Sokka had gotten, and she was evidently trying hard not to laugh.

 

“Hey, Katara,” He said. She jumped a little.

 

“Aang, you scared me for a second there.” She put a package in a bag, “Did your meditation help?”

 

“Eh, maybe?” He started sorting the packages, wondering why Sokka had gotten three different coils of rope. They didn’t even need rope. “I had a vision.”

 

“Really? About what?”

 

Aang explained his vision to Katara, who nodded along. Sokka heard their conversation and slowed in his mauling of the deceased vegetation.

 

“Throughout the whole fight, she just seemed to know the right time to move. I have no idea what the dragon was supposed to mean, but…”

 

“Maybe the dragon was Zuko?” Katara suggested. Aang shook his head.

 

“Zuko had two eyes.”

 

“Had? What do you mean? Do you think something happened to him?” Sokka cut in, evidently calmed enough to stop mutilating dead trees.

 

Katara smirked. “Oh, I’m sure your girlfriend's brother is fine.”   

 

Sokka’s face turned bright red. “She’s not my girlfriend!”

 

He yelled something inarticulate and began his assault once more. Aang’s eyebrows shot up and he looked at Katara. “Did I miss something?”

 

“Not really. Sokka’s got a new wanted poster.” She grabbed a rolled-up piece of paper from the side pocket of one of their packs to show him. “I suggested that she likes him.”

 

Aang’s mouth fell open when he read the new bounty. He read aloud, “ Wanted alive by Princess Azula of the Fire Nation. Sokka: The Stupid Genius.”

 

He started to laugh. His laughter caused Katara to laugh, and that made him laugh harder. Sokka whirled on them and said, “It’s not funny!”

 

“It’s pretty funny Sokka. She’s obviously trying to irritate you.” Aang said.

 

Katara wiped her eyes and started sorting through Sokka’s purchases again. “No, she’s obviously succeeding.”

 

Aang snorted and started to help once more. Sokka rolled his eyes and came over to help. Aang picked up another package and read the back. He paused when he saw it. There was an insignia. A flying boar. He read it to his friends, “Product of the Beifong Family Goods company.”

 

He flipped it over looking for more, to see if there was a city of origin written on it somewhere. There was none.

 

“The flying boar, it was in my vision.” He stated, tossing the package to Sokka.

 

Sokka eyed it and licked his teeth in thought. He gave the parcel to Katara. “Well, at least we have a name.”

 

---

“So, basically, you’re scared.”

 

Zuko rolled his eyes. He was trying to read his book on combustion bending. Uncle had gone into town to look for some contacts of his, and Zuko was left to try and fend off Toph’s efforts to fight.

 

“I am not scared.”

 

“So you admit that you’re willing to spar with me.” Toph kicked her feet up on a boulder. They were in the gardens of the Beifong estate. Lao had allowed Toph to follow Zuko around after his wife had suggested it would be nice for Toph to have a friend. Zuko didn’t think that Toph would have left him alone even if her father had refused. Zuko wondered why she had even asked.

 

“I admit to no such thing.” He continued to read. Following the advice of the combustion bender they had met on their ship to the best of his ability, he could now feel the energy flowing through himself, though he had yet to achieve anything resembling an explosion. So he had gone back to the book. There was a rather interesting passage concerning skin markings allowing the bender to release a concussive blast. A tattoo or other mark of enough significance to the individual could act as a focus to harness the explosive power. Perhaps that was why he’d had no success. Would he have to get a tattoo? He didn’t want one, but being able to cause an explosion with his mind would be an invaluable skill. Would a tattoo make him look bad as Fire Lord? He tried to remember if any past Fire Lords had had any.

 

“So you think you’ll lose.”

 

Zuko snapped the book shut. “No. There’s just no place to spar that wouldn’t be so easily visible. I don’t exactly want the Earth Kingdom to know who I am.”

 

“A random turncoat? Why should we care? I don’t.”

 

Zuko shrugged. Toph crossed her arms. She had been trying to get him to agree to a sparring match since Lao Beifong had agreed to let him stay there the previous afternoon. Less than twenty four hours.

 

“Eh,” She waved her hand dismissively. “Excuses. If you don’t want to show off your loserbendiing, I understand. I am the greatest earthbender in the world, so it’s okay to be scared.”

 

Zuko took a slow breath. He did not know why, but Toph was expertly good at irritating him. She reminded him of Azula. He had the feeling that they would have gotten along if it weren’t for the war.

 

“Fine. If you can think of a place where we can practice without being caught then I’ll do it.”

 

The near predatory grin on her face should have been a warning to him. Zuko stood up and Toph bid him to follow her behind a large topiary. She opened a hole in the ground and jumped in. Zuko followed her and she closed the entryway, plunging them into darkness. Zuko paused and lifted a hand.

 

“What’s wrong? Scared of the dark?” Toph teased. Zuko rolled his eyes and ignited a flame in his hand. Toph’s smile fell for a second. “Oh yeah. Fire.”

 

The pair of them walked down the tunnel Toph had made, though Zuko wasn’t sure if she had made it that day or a while ago. He looked around and noticed that she wasn’t wearing any shoes.

 

“Toph,” Zuko said, “You’re not wearing shoes.”

 

“Oh no, what a tragedy.” She deadpanned without looking back. “I use my feet to see. Wearing shoes is like wearing a blindfold.”

 

“I… see.” Zuko said.

 

“I… don’t.” Toph joked.

 

“Anyway,” Zuko said, “The lack of shoes is going to be a problem. Lots of firebenders spread flames across the ground in warning if they’re surprised. It’s usually not harmful, but most people are wearing shoes.”

 

“Are you threatening to burn my feet?”

 

“No, I’m just saying. Maybe you could earthbend some shoes for yourself.”

 

Toph stopped and frowned. She stomped on the ground, once with either foot, and her feet were covered in a layer of rock. Zuko thought it was granite, given the pink color. He decided not to address the fact, as Toph was blind. He idly wondered if her high society attire would negatively impact her fighting ability, but he didn't think he should ask.

 

After almost an hour, they came out of the tunnel to an underground arena. It was massive, with a square ring raised above the ground. Stands surround the arena, with the words Earth Rumble carved into the wall.

 

“What is this place?” He asked.

 

“Earth Rumble.”

 

He exhaled and pinched the bridge of his nose. “I have no idea what that is.”

 

“An unregulated fighting tournament. I’m the champion”

 

“Yeah, okay.”

 

Toph scowled. “You don’t believe me?”

 

Zuko shrugged. Toph glared at him more and bent a stairway to the top of the ring. The two of them walked to opposite corners. They stood in silence for a bit, each daring the other to strike first. Zuko got tired of waiting.

 

He took a few running steps and leapt into a firebending stance, but when he landed his foot was dragged to the side. He clenched his jaw, embarrassed to have been caught by the same trick twice. Toph made sharp breaking motions with her hands and sent boulders flying out of the ground and towards him. He evaded and shot gouts of fire towards her. Top raised a wall in defense and Zuko closed the distance, using one of Azula’s favorite moves. He used his fire to propel himself forward with a rapid speed.

 

The battle continued for a while until Zuko got distracted. He thought he heard something coming from the stands. He stopped his attack and eyed where he thought he heard something. He couldn’t see anything, except for a slight motion in the air. He wondered if it was an insect of some kind. when a rock smacked into the side of his head, sending him sprawling to the ground. He groaned.

 

“That’s what you get for not paying attention.” Toph was panting. “What were you looking at?”

 

“Thought I heard someone.” Zuko rubbed at the spot where she had struck him.

 

“There’s nobody anywhere near us.” Toph reached out her hand to help him up. “The next tournament isn’t for two more days.”

 

“And you’ll be competing? Zuko asked as he got to his feet.

 

“Yeah,” She said, “I’ve got a title to defend.”

 

---

Two days after his sparring match with Toph, Zuko and Iroh sat in the stands of the Earth Rumble arena watching a large man speaking in the third person. The Boulder was aiming to take back the championship belt from the Blind Bandit. He was pretty good, and he made quick work of the other fighters. One of his opponents had taken on a Fire Nation persona and was evidently not a crowd favorite. The man sang a horrible rendition of the Fire Nation national anthem.

 

Now the final match of the day was beginning. Toph, or the Blind Bandit as she was known by the earthbending fans, was facing off against The Boulder. Zuko watched the fight with rapt attention, leaning toward the battle and perched on the edge of his seat. Iroh, on the other hand, stroked his beard in consideration. He watched the fight with interest, but his thoughts were on another matter.

 

Toph made quick work of her opponent, using the same trick that she had on Zuko. In moments The Boulder was flung out of the ring. The announcer lifted Toph above his head and pronounced her the champion. The crowd roared, and there was no small amount of boos mixed in.

 

“Some of my contacts have heard of where the Avatar has been,” Iroh said.

 

“What? And you’re only telling me this now?” Zuko said.

 

Iroh waved his hand in a vague motion. “I only heard this morning.”

 

“Where is he?”

 

“He’s going from village to village near the Si Wong desert,” Iroh said, his eyes still locked on Toph. “He’s looking for an earthbending teacher.”

 

“He hasn’t found one yet?” Zuko followed his uncle’s line of sight. His eyes landed on the young earthbender as well. “Toph.”

 

Iroh nodded slowly. “Maybe.”

 

Zuko frowned. Toph, teaching earthbending. Well, she was certainly good enough. He had learned that first hand, and seeing her so soundly defeat The Boulder was further proof. He didn’t like the idea of putting her in danger, but… she probably wouldn’t mind. In fact, he thought that she would feel offended if she knew he was worried about her safety.

 

“We’d have to tell her everything.” Iroh said. Zuko paused but nodded his agreement.

 

The pair of them walked out of the arena. They followed the crowd for a bit before heading to the place they had arranged to meet Toph after her fight. It wasn’t long before they got there. They stood around, just waiting for her to show up. Eventually, a hole opened up beneath them and they fell into it. They landed gracefully and the hole closed off behind them. Iroh ignited a flame in his hand and Toph waved over her shoulder for them to follow.

 

“Come on.” She walked a few steps and they started following. “What’d you guys think? Am I great or what?”

 

“You were spectacular.” Iroh answered, “What did you think, Prince Zuko?

 

“Yeah, ‘Prince’ Zuko, what did you think?” Toph laughed, evidently assuming that Iroh was mocking his nephew.

 

“You’re at least as good an earthbender as my sister is a firebender,” Zuko said.

 

“Oh? Is she that good?” Toph asked.

 

“Princess Azula is a prodigy, as great as my brother was at her age,” Iroh said.

 

“Oh yeah? That’s Zuko’s dad then. Who’s he?” Toph asked.

 

“Fire Lord Ozai,” Zuko said. Toph stopped. She turned to face them.

 

“What?”

 

---

Five towns. Five failures. No leads on the flying boar. Fantastic. Aang was not in a good mood. He imagined that he could feel the comet getting closer. He glowered over the side of Appa’s saddle. Momo chittered happily as he curled up in Sokka’s lap. Katara was steering the bison.

 

“I’m thinking we should try something different.” Sokka unrolled the map and put it between him and Aang. “If we make our way towards Gaoling, we can stop in smaller towns along the way.”

 

“Maybe we should go straight to Gaoling, or Ba Sing Se. We haven’t had much luck with the smaller settlements.”

 

“Yeah, I know what you mean.” Sokka said, “But if the officials in Ba Sing Se are like General Fong, I don’t relish the idea of going there if it’s not absolutely necessary. And besides, Katara and I were in a small village, remember?”

 

Aang couldn’t help but smile at the memory. Penguin sledding, meeting his friends, Zuko falling into the snow. “Yeah, I remember. You’ve got a point.”

 

“So we head south-west.”

 

“I guess that’s fine. Can’t have worse luck.”

 

---

“Who exactly are you?!” Top demanded. She had begun to think of Zuko as her first real friend, and she rather liked his uncle. But she was beginning to get suspicious.

 

“I am Zuko, son of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai. Heir to the throne.” Zuko said, and Toph sensed that he was telling the truth.

 

“And why are you looking for the Avatar?” She asked. She took a defensive stance, but neither man made any aggressive moves.

 

“To teach him firebending, and help him end the war.”

 

“Why don’t you just ask your dad to stop being evil?!” Toph bit out sarcastically. She was not happy. She had invited the son of the Fire Lord to stay at her house, she had become friends with him.

 

“We’re not exactly on good terms,” Zuko shouted, pointing to his face. She had no idea why he would do that, but she paid it no mind.

 

“Oh, boo-hoo, poor little fire prince. Daddy’s too busy to pay any attention to him.”

 

Zuko did not say anything. Toph continued, “So you tell me that you’re rebels, but you’re actually just a spoiled prince throwing a tantrum.”

 

“I am not throwing a tantrum!” Zuko said heatedly. “My father is-”

 

“Yeah, yeah, I’m sure he’s just misunderstood. A great man if ever there was.” Toph held her defensive position, but still, neither of them moved.

 

“My brother,” Iroh said, “Has always been a great man.”

 

Zuko turned to Iroh in shock, but Iroh continued. “He is strong, ruthless, cunning, and brilliant. He might be the greatest firebender in the world, a man with vast capacity. Throughout his life, I knew he would be a great man. Despite my hopes, I know now that he will never be a good one. For all of his talent and intelligence, he is cruel and heartless. He delights in the suffering of others and takes no notice of those he sees as beneath him. And unfortunately, he sees all the world as beneath him.”

 

Toph squinted at them, though it was just an expression and not anything to do with seeing them better. She knew that Iroh spoke the truth, but she still wasn’t sure what they wanted from her. Why were they telling her this?

 

“My father banished me, and sent me to chase after the Avatar,” Zuko said. Toph interrupted before he could continue.

 

“Is that why you’re looking for him? To bring back to your father in chains?”

 

“No. I’ve traveled across the Earth Kingdom, and I’ve been to both of the Water Tribes. I know firsthand what this war has done, and I want to play my part in ending it.”

 

“Why are you telling me this?” She finally asked, no longer willing to beat around the bush.

 

“The Avatar needs an earthbending teacher,” Iroh said. “We know the general area where he is, and we’ll be going soon, but as I said, he needs an earthbending teacher.”

 

“And you think it should be me?”

 

“Yes.” They both said in unison. Toph blew her hair out of her eyes. She did that when she was annoyed.

 

“I’ll think about it.” She turned back in the direction she was going. 

 

“So, does this mean that you’re not mad?” Zuko asked.

 

“Oh no, I’m furious.” Toph continued marching, “But we can still be friends. Gives me more time to plan my revenge that way.”

 

---

Azula looked at the Beifong estate from a mountaintop. A small mountain, but a mountain nonetheless. She passed her binoculars back to Colonel Mongke. She had met him and the other Rough Rhinos on the journey that ended in Gaoling. She had requisitioned them to help her in her mission. Now her team had grown from four to nine. She decided that it would be simple enough. The Earth Kingdom had a small army regiment stationed in the city, and the Rhinos would serve as a distraction.

 

She climbed down from the peak and returned to the group. Ty Lee was busy, gambling. Azula did not approve and was beginning to think that June was a very poor influence on her friend. She would have intervened, but Ty Lee just… kept winning. Mai had opted not to get involved and was instead learning archery from one of the Rhinos. The Combustion Man was reading Love Amongst The Dragons. Azula did not care for that story, be it the novel or the play.

 

“Listen up.” She said, and her tone carried through the late afternoon air. “They’ve just returned to the Beifiong estate. We’ll go in tonight. The Rhinos will wreak havoc on the opposite side of the river. Once the Earth Kingdom forces are engaged, they will withdraw and sound a horn. That will be our signal to move in. June will immobilize the guards with her Shirshu. Mai and Ty Lee will come from the opposite side, while the Combustion Man will aid me.”

 

Everyone nodded. “Good. I suggest you all try and get some sleep. It’s a long night ahead of us.”

Chapter 36: Does it Run in the Family?

Sokka lounged against a rock, his feet propped up on a log. Katara and Aang were practicing their waterbending before the group would head to the next village. The afternoon was warm, and there were still a few hours of light left in the day. Sokka didn’t mind the stop for food and practice.

 

As he sat, he opened the gate to Koh’s shadow in his mind. He felt the power course through him. He inhaled deeply through his nose, noticing the soft scents of the spring day. He could hear fish swimming in the river, and ants walking on a log across the water. He felt the wind’s gentle fingers trace across his skin, and saw the feathers on an eagle-hawk far above.

 

The shadow coursed through his body and filled his muscles with power. Sokka smiled, thinking it was a very pleasant sensation.

---

Late afternoon sun fell onto her face as Toph lounged in the gardens of her family home. Her hands were clasped behind her head while she sat in companionable silence with the son of the Fire Lord. Prince Zuko. Son of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai. How had she gotten to be friends with him? 

 

Her anger had dissipated somewhat over the past few hours. She reasoned that Zuko was trustworthy, as he hadn’t once lied to her since trying to use an alias at that seedy inn. Sure the inn seemed okay to the average passerby, but she had sensed some of the less… respectable denizens of Gaoling present. Men who bet more money than they had on Earthbending tournaments, and would do anything to get enough to settle their debts.

 

Zuko and Iroh had asked her to go with them, to find the Avatar and teach him earthbending. Could she do that? Leave everything behind and go off to who knew where? She was certain she could teach earthbending, for she was the greatest earthbender in the world. She wouldn’t be stuck at home, playing the innocent, defenseless, fragile girl that her parents thought she was. She wondered if Iroh would try and boss her around. She dismissed the idea, as the old man didn’t seem that way. Odd that the Fire Lord's brother was…  wait a minute. The Fire Lord’s brother… Iroh. The Dragon of The West? Was that who she would be traveling with? If she decided to go with them that is.

 

“Hey,” Toph said, “When are you leaving?”

 

Zuko glanced at her from his seat in the grass. He had been meditating in the waning sunlight. “Tomorrow. Maybe the day after”

 

Toph blew at her bangs, “I thought you said it would be a few days.”

 

“We changed our minds.” Zuko closed his eyes again, “My sister’s not far from here. The sooner we get moving the better.”

 

“Your sister, huh?” Toph asked, curiosity rising, “You said she’s a strong bender, right?” 

 

She felt Zuko open his eyes again. Oddly, one eye didn’t open as wide. She wondered if he did that on purpose.

 

“Yes.”

 

“Stronger than you?”

 

“...”

 

“I’ll take that as a yes.” Toph said, “What’s she like?”

 

Zuko snorted. “She’s… difficult. One of her great joys in life is showing me up, and another is tormenting me.”

 

“I can’t blame her for the latter, it is pretty fun.”

 

“And what is that supposed to mean?” Zuko asked sharply, evidently irritated.

 

“Oh, you’re just easy to annoy is all.”

 

“I am not easy to annoy!” Zuko bit out in a reply, disproving himself with the annoyed tone in his voice.

 

“Okay. I believe you.” Toph spoke in a tone that made it quite obvious to any observer that she did not, in fact, believe him. Zuko’s only response was to breathe out sharply and try to resume his meditations.

 

“Why does it matter that she’s nearby?” Toph could feel his heartbeat increase the more she interrupted him.

 

Zuko calmed himself with a slow breath. “Father wants to put me in prison, so Azula was sent to capture me. She nearly succeeded the last time we met, and it was only because of my uncle that I got away.”

 

“She beat you pretty easily then?” Toph asked. Zuko shrugged.

 

“Things weren’t going that well for me at the time. Unlike her, as usual.” Zuko spat, “Father says that she was born lucky. He says I was lucky to be born.”

 

“You two must really hate each other. You and your sister I mean.”

 

Zuko paused, and Toph thought she had struck a nerve, and not in the fun way that would just make him grumpy. She waited for a few seconds, and eventually, Zuko spoke.

 

“We haven’t always. And, for the record, I still don’t hate her.”

 

“What changed?” Toph asked.

 

“Azula… she’s a firebending prodigy. She started firebending when she was five. Mastered the basic forms at seven. Our father took her into his own private tutelage and after that…. Things weren’t the same. Then I was banished, and we didn’t see each other for many years.”

 

“Wait, you were banished?”

 

“I… oh, hey, it’s my uncle!” Zuko changed the subject when he saw Iroh had returned. Toph decided not to push the issue just yet. Zuko stood and waved at the older man. “Uncle!”

 

Toph sensed mild surprise from Iroh at being hailed so enthusiastically by his nephew, but she thought he was pleasantly surprised.

 

“Lee, I was just looking for you,” Iroh said as he led their ostrich-horse over. “The most recent news of our friends is that they were seen in Honshu, and seem to be traveling southwest.”

 

“They’re getting closer,” Toph observed.

 

Iroh nodded. “Have you made your decision?”

 

Toph shrugged noncommittally.

 

“We should leave in the morning.” Zuko said, “I don’t want to let the information go stale. They move fast.”

 

Iroh sighed and nodded. He agreed, and the three of them walked towards the sprawling house of the estate. While walking, Iroh took out an envelope and handed it to Zuko. Toph wondered what it was, but was soon answered.

 

“Here,” Iroh said as Zuko took the envelope. “It’s a passport. If we go through a checkpoint, it’s better to be prepared.”

 

Zuko took the envelope without much to say about it. He tucked it into his shirt, and that was that. They ate dinner with Toph’s parents, and Iroh thanked the hosts for their kindness and informed them of his and Zuko’s intent to leave in the morning. Lao was visibly pleased with the development, but Poppy did not seem to fully share his sentiment. She thanked them once more for helping Toph out of the river, and asked Zuko to keep in touch, saying that she would read aloud anything he wished to send Toph. Zuko blinked in confusion and said that he would be sure to do so. Toph was surprised to find out that he was telling the truth.

 

It was the fact that he would keep in communication with her if she chose to stay home, that made her choice. She would not sit around and wait for her mother to read her letters of all Zuko and the Avatar’s adventures. It was entirely unacceptable. She packed a bag that night and slept for a few hours. She rose a little after midnight and snuck out of the house and to the stable, where she found Zuko’s ostrich-horse. She thought it was odd that they hadn’t given the creature a name.

 

Toph stuck her bag into the larger of the saddlebags, which was already in place on the bird. She turned to go, but paused when she sensed something odd. There were strangers outside of the estate’s walls. Five of them, and one large animal. Four women and one huge man. She thought about alerting the guards or just chasing them off herself. Something stopped her though. One of the women, a girl only a few years older than she was, was walking. That wasn’t anything special, but the way she carried herself… it was that same surefire way that Zuko had. As if she had the sun in the palm of her hand.

 

Toph turned back toward her house and walked inside. Maybe she should wake up Zuko and his uncle.

---

It was an hour past midnight. Azula stood beside The Combustion Man - she thought that was a ridiculous name - not far from the western wall of the Beifong estate. She had counted a total of sixteen guards, walking in pairs around the grounds and standing at the gate. Half of them were in the guard house, and she had to wonder exactly how wealthy this family had to be to afford so much security.

 

She had amended the plan slightly after realizing the number of earthbenders and warriors the Beifongs had on hand. She would give the signal, and Ty Lee would break into the sleeping quarters of the off-duty guardsmen to immobilize them before they could react to the operation. Once the chi-blocker had begun her work, the attack would begin in full to prevent the night watch from interrupting. Zuko and Iroh would surely react to the strike, but she had planned for that. Should they try to sneak over the walls, The Combustion Man would strike and incapacitate them. She had given him strict orders not to use deadly force.

 

Now, all that she was waiting on was for Colonel Mongke to give the signal indicating that the Earth Kingdom military force was in pursuit of his team. Azula heard the first explosion from the far side of the city, a dull echo of destruction that rolled sonorously across the landscape. Good. His attack had begun. Azula started to pace, taking calculated and sure footsteps across the small patch of ground hidden behind some boulders. She watched the sky in the distance, waiting. Minutes passed, and eventually, she saw the signal. Colonel Mongke had unleashed a mighty gout of flame into the air, visible even from her position. She waited for half a minute and withdrew a slender brass whistle from a pouch at her waist. She blew it, mimicking the song of an owl-canary.

 

She heard the faintest sound of leather on stone and waited. Ten seconds. Fifteen seconds. Thirty seconds. No outcry came from the estate, indicating that Ty Lee had begun her work. Or at least that she hadn’t been seen. She looked at The Combustion Man and nodded. The behemoth leapt onto the boulders they were standing behind and drew in a sharp breath. A series of sharp snaps and pops filled the night, and a line of fire shot from the man.

---

“Wake up!”

 

Zuko was on his feet with his swords drawn before the first syllable had been finished. He scanned the room for threats, but saw only Toph. He reasoned that she wasn’t likely to attack him, or she wouldn’t have said anything. He sheathed his swords quickly.

 

“What’s going on?”

 

“There’re some people here, on the outside of the estate- no,” She squinted in concentration for a moment, “One of them’s in the guard house, but she’s just… poking the guards? They’re not even waking up, they’re just lying there.”

 

Zuko’s eyes widened and his heart fell through his chest. “Ty Lee!”

 

“Who’s Ty Lee?”

 

“She’s one of my sister's friends,” Zuko answered as he pulled on his shirt, “A chi-blocker. If she gets a hit on you it takes away your bending for a while.”

 

Toph paled at the revelation, but Zuko spared no time for further explanations. He pushed past Toph and into the hallway. He slammed open his Uncle’s door and the old man leapt to his feet in his underwear. Zuko gagged at the sight and tried to cover Toph’s eyes. She swatted his hand away and glared at him. Right, Zuko thought, she’s blind. He briefly considered picking her up off the ground so she couldn’t see with earthbending, and then he realized how stupid that was and decided against it.

 

“What’s going on?!” Iroh asked seconds after his door was slammed open.

 

“She’s here,” Zuko said. His uncle’s mouth fell open and he threw on his clothes.

 

“We need to-” An explosion sounded and they heard bits of debris falling. Men shouted outside and a woman screamed on the next story of the house. Poppy, Toph’s mother, Zuko realized. He dashed down the hallway and towards the front doors, his uncle and Toph in hot pursuit. Lao flew down the stairs and started yelling for Toph to get upstairs while he investigated what was going on. She ignored him and broke a hole in the front wall with her earthbending, which allowed Zuko, her, and Iroh to get outside quickly.

 

He was met with chaos, and standing in front of it all was his sister.

---

Her brother and uncle leapt from the house and into the courtyard. For some reason she didn’t care about, a girl followed after. Azula watched the three of them for a moment and then spoke.

 

“Why, if it isn’t little Zuzu!” Azula drawled vindictively. “And a treacherous, backstabbing snake.”

 

Iroh winced, and the girl’s mouth fell open for a moment. She laughed, “Zuzu?!”

 

Lao Beifong, she assumed that was him, stormed out of the building, “What is going on here? Who are you, and why have you attacked my home?”

 

Azula rolled her eyes. They always asked the same questions, at least according to the reports she had read. She hadn’t exactly performed many home invasions herself. 

 

“This doesn’t concern you, you papery twit!” She replied without giving him a second glance.

 

“I think it does concern us,” Toph barked.

 

“What happens between me and my brother is no concern of yours, little girl,” Azula answered dismissively.

 

“Little girl?! I’ll show you little when I beat the snot out of you!” Toph bristled, and turning to Zuko she said, “No wonder you hate her. And tell me, Zuko, is home invasion some kind of family pastime? Do any of you idiots know what knocking is? Does breaking into houses in the middle of the night run in the family?”

 

Zuko hated her. Well, she wasn’t surprised. She had known it since their early childhood, but she couldn’t avoid the sting of its final confirmation.

 

“Now is not the time for banter, Toph,” Iroh said calmly. “She is not alone.”

 

Azula narrowed her eyes at her uncle, a mix of largely negative feelings raging inside her. She glanced to the barrack to find Mai and Ty Lee flanking the group. Combustion Man clanked his way to stand beside her. June lounged lazily on the back of her shirshu, wholly disinterested in the goings-on.

 

“So, Toph is it? Has my brother finally made a friend? I was so worried about him, stuck all alone with the old spider.” Azula said, her ire for her uncle growing every second she was in his presence. Iroh had a sorrowful expression for a moment, but it was quickly banished to a look of resignation.

 

“You know,” Toph said, “I’m surprised that you know what a friend is. After two minutes of being around you, I want to bury you alive. I don’t think that anyone would choose to spend time with you if they had something better to do, like pulling out their teeth.”

 

Azula curled her lip at this impudent child. She ignited a flame in her palm, but Zuko stepped in front of the girl. “This is between you and me, Azula. Toph and her family have nothing to do with this.”

 

Azula scoffed. “Really, Zuzu? The son of the Fire Lord is concerned with Earth Kingdom bystanders?”

 

Lao choked, “The son of…”

 

“You didn’t tell them?” Azula sneered at her brother. “I’m so disappointed in you, Zuko.”

 

Zuko shrugged. “They’re not part of this.”

 

“We’re at war, dum-dum.” Azula mocked him, “They’re our enemies.”

 

“The war is wrong, Azula. It needs to end. These people,” He pointed a thumb over his shoulder at the girl, “Toph, isn’t your enemy.”

 

Azula scoffed. “She’s Earth Kingdom. If she breathes, then she is my enemy.”

 

She extinguished the flame in her hand and motioned to Combustion Man, but she noticed recognition in Iroh and Zuko’s eyes. She elected to ignore it, for it was likely that they knew him by reputation. “Remember what I said. Use the appropriate force.”

 

With that, the banter and preamble were finished. Mai launched a series of knives, which Toph blocked with a wall of earth. Azula rolled her eyes. Earthbenders, always so sure of themselves. She kicked a wave of fire at the girl, but it was intercepted by her uncle. She snarled at the old man, who had trimmed down significantly since the North Pole. The old man charged at her, sending powerful gouts of fire her way. Azula dodged and deflected them, shooting back at her uncle.

 

Azula heard the sounds of explosions and blasts of fire coming from her brother and Combustion Man, but she focused on her own battle with her uncle.

 

The fight between them was intense and close, but the Dragon of the West pulled ahead. Azula propelled herself in the air with her bending, whistling for June to help her in her fight. The shirshu struck it’s tongue at Iroh, and he dodged deftly before unleashing a spinning wheel of fire at the animal, who leapt aside to avoid it. Azula took advantage of the distraction to bombard him with a series of sharp, compact bolts of fire. She scored a glancing blow on his clothing, but was forced to cease her attack when he roared a billowing inferno in her direction.

 

Iroh’s attention was diverted for a second, and a look of panic crossed his face. Azlua heard the clank of Combustion Man’s footfalls. So he had beaten Zuko. She spared a quick look toward her brother, and saw him unmoving, partially buried under a pile of rubble. Her heart stopped. Had he killed him? She had expressly forbid the use of lethal force. Was Zuko…? No, she saw his chest begin to rise, he was alive. If only barely.

 

Iroh quickly began to cycle his limbs to generate lightning, but was stopped when June’s whip latched onto Iroh’s arm and yanked it towards her, but her attack was stopped when an explosion knocked everyone off of their feet.

---

 

 

Toph raised a wall with one hand, turning to face the assailants who had been flanking them. She had known where they were, and paid them attention as they approached. She felt one of them send a volley of knives towards them, which caused her to begin her defense.

The second assailant sprinted up the wall she had made and flipped into the air, at which point Toph lost track of her. She put her hands up quickly and listened carefully, waiting for the girl to land. She stood stock still for a few seconds, until the moment the girl's foot made contact with the earth, entirely too close for her comfort. Toph flicked out her arms and forced the ground she was standing on to move her away just in time to avoid a punch to the shoulder. She stomped her foot and caused a stone to erupt towards her opponent, who merely cartwheeled away. Cartwheeled.

 

Toph opened her mouth to speak, but had to raise another wall to dodge more knives, which somehow broke through the wall and nearly hit her anyway. Toph grinned with savage delight.

 

“I like you two!” She said over the sound of explosions and firebending, before crumbling a stone into a series of small projectiles to chase the two girls with.

 

“I wish I could say the same about you.” The knife girl said dryly, before sending a barrage of arrow-like projectiles towards her. Toph launched herself away from the bolts with her earthbending, sliding across the ground to get away from them. She needed to close the distance with the knife thrower, but keep her distance from the chi-blocker. Suddenly an idea formed in her mind, and she maneuvered the fight onto the stone patio beside the house.

 

“That’s too bad.” Toph said, and then she pointed a finger to the chi-blocker without facing her, “You’re Ty Lee, right? Zuko told me about you.”

 

“Really?” Ty Lee asked in surprise, and then glancing at her friend she asked, “Did he say anything about Mai?”

 

Toph heard the other girl sigh dramatically, but felt that Mai, apparently, was intrigued.

 

“No, sorry. It didn’t come up, but probably because she wasn’t punching the guards into submission in their sleep.”

 

“What did he say about me?” Ty Lee asked curiously. Toph smiled slyly and held up a finger. She spread her arms and fell backwards into the ground. When she shot out of the ground again, she was covered in rock from head to foot.

 

“He said not to let you touch me.”

 

“Oh.” Ty Lee said, and deftly dodged Toph's next attack. Toph sent an array of stones towards Mai, who leapt aside and hurled more knives at Toph, who decided to dodge them despite her new armor. If they had gone through her barrier before, she didn’t want to test if they would go through her protective layer.

 

She bent toward Ty Lee, sending pillar after pillar towards the girl. The chi-blocker made a final leap, and when she landed she was knocked from her feet by a massive explosion.

 

---

Zuko charged at the combustion bender. He had seen his uncle face off against Azula, and Toph was fighting Mai and Ty Lee. That left him with the big guy. 

 

Zuko unfurled two whips of fire, spinning them through the air and towards the behemoth, but was stopped when the  man sent an explosion in his direction. Zuko had barely enough time to put up a defensive barrier to shield himself, and the force of the blast sent him backwards several feet towards the gardens.

 

He snarled, punching strong jets towards the man, but the combustion bender merely stepped aside, turning far more quickly than he should have been able to, given his size. Zuko grit his teeth, realizing he needed to close the distance. He sprinted towards the man, changing direction to avoid another blast of his explosive power. He got in close and formed a pair of fire daggers, but was stymied when the man blasted fire from his remaining hand. Zuko kicked out with his bending, causing the man to stumble back. That only caused him to gain space, which was something Zuko did not want to give him.

 

A breath of fire shot from his mouth, a favorite trick of his uncle, though Zuko’s was less potent. He and his enemy fought bitterly, exchanging blows for minutes before the combustion bender roared.

 

“Enough!” He reached out with a massive hand and grabbed Zuko around the throat, cutting off his air supply. Zuko couldn’t draw breath, he couldn’t create fire. So he did the one thing he had left to do. He drew his swords, aiming to slice through the man’s arm. He was stopped when a metal hand slammed into his gut. Zuko dropped his swords at the shock of the blow, and was lifted bodily from the ground by the neck.

 

Zuko’s vision began to fade as he scrabbled at the enormous hand holding him. The combustion bender drew him in close and said, “I’m going to enjoy killing you. Zhao didn’t tell me just how irritating you or your sister could be, but the price for your heads more than makes up for it.”

 

Upon seeing his mark’s eyes bulge at his words, the combustion bender smiled. “Yes, you’re beginning to understand. I was sent to kill you, and then the princess. The Admiral was very clear on the order of operations. Place me in her service to get in close and gain her trust, and once you’re out of the way, well…” The man smiled sadistically.

 

He hurled Zuko toward the garden wall and shot an explosion at him. The explosion stunned Zuko, and he lay unmoving, partially buried under rubble. The combustion bender sneered at the prince’s form, and, believing him finished, turned towards Azula and Iroh.

 

Zuko tried to move, but the shock of the explosion and collision with the wall left his body unresponsive. He drew in a ragged breath and tried to use his breath and strike against the man who would kill him if Zuko didn’t stop him. Nothing followed his efforts, and Zuko could feel the energy swirling around his body, failing to be released. It built, but there was nothing Zuko could do. He gasped desperately, willing his body to move. To keep fighting.

 

Zuko watched from where he lay as the combustion bender walked toward where his uncle and his sister fought, along with a woman and a giant beast. Iroh noticed the newcomer and his eyes grew wide, and Zuko saw Azula glance his way when she noticed the combustion bender, but he couldn’t make out her expression.

 

A searing pain began to form inside of Zuko’s head, as the unreleased energy he had tried to bend into fire pooled in his mind. He thought desperately for a way to release the energy, but could think of nothing. He saw the combustion bender stop, but he didn’t face Iroh. Instead, he turned to Azula, with murder in his eyes.

 

Zuko began to panic, for if he couldn’t find some way to intervene, Azula would be killed in a point-blank attack. He could not, would not, let his sister die. He saw the tattoo on the demon of a man's forehead, and he realized what he had to do. Taking a sharp breath, he channeled the burning energy into the only mark he had of any significance to him, and a series of sharp snaps and pops filled the night as a line of fire shot from Zuko’s ruined eye.

 

The explosion hit the behemoth of a man with enough concussive force that everyone within the estate was blasted from their feet. With the sudden release of energy, Zuko was able to move again. He stumbled to his feet, but the power of his bending was still coursing through his mind, causing searing pain. He groaned and held his head in his hands. He felt the power building up again, screaming to be unleashed. He looked around the battlefield, trying to find his own enemy, to stop him from hurting the people he cared about. He saw his uncle get to his feet, and then Azula.

 

She made eye contact with him, and he could hardly hold in the power of his bending. He grit his teeth against the pain and sucked in a sharp, involuntary breath. To his horror, a line of fire shot from his eye once more and bolted straight towards Azula.

---

Azula stared at Zuko in shock. Had he been the one to cause that explosion? The Combustion Man was out of the fight, lying unconscious at the opposite end of the estate. She watched as her brother seemed to curl in on himself from pain. He held his head in his hands as he took a sharp breath, and time seemed to slow as a beam of explosive fire shot forwards from his left eye. It raced towards her, snapping and popping through the night air. Azula’s eyes widened, and she realized that she was deathly afraid, for the first time since she had seen that empty thing, that void in the shape of a man.

 

Azula realized it was too late, she couldn’t put up a defense in time, she was going to-! Strong hands gripped her and threw her to the ground, and she was covered by her uncle’s body as the explosive jet shot past her. It collided with the far wall and tore down what remained of that section.

 

Iroh rolled off of her and Azula sprang to her feet. She eyed her uncle with confusion, but her attention was quickly turned back to Zuko when another explosion sounded high overhead. He was screaming, and he kept shooting explosive blasts into the sky.

 

“He can’t control it,” Iroh said, racing towards his nephew.

 

Azula considered chasing after him, but realized that if  Zuko needed to be incapacitated, she needed Ty Lee.

---

Iroh sprinted towards Zuko, ignoring everything. He leapt over the astounded Lao Beifong, who was staring in disbelief.

 

“Zuko!” Iroh bellowed.

 

“Uncle!” Zuko said, “There’s too much, I can’t control the chi! My fire it’s-!” He stopped speaking as he loosed another blast.

 

Iroh opened his third eye, and saw the energy pooling inside of Zuko’s mind. Iroh sighed in relief, as he immediately realized the problem. Zuko had let the energy build for too long, and the explosive blasts weren’t releasing enough for it to dissipate.

 

“Zuko! Roar like a tiger-dillo! NOW!” He yelled to his nephew. Zuko did as he was told, blasting as much fire from his hands and mouth as he could. Massive pillars of flame shot from him, and the chi pooled in his mind instantly channeled through his limbs and out of his mouth.

 

The flames dissipated. Zuko collapsed and sighed in relief, “This is like the volcano all over again.”

 

Iroh chose to put a pin in that, there were more important things at hand. That beast, the one the woman was riding. He recognized it. A shirshu, a powerful tracking animal that could track them anywhere in the world by scent. He thought of a plan to keep it off of their trail: he had to teach it that their scents were dangerous scents.

 

He looked around the devastated estate and quickly spotted the beast battling Toph. He began to cycle his arms to generate a weak bot of electricity. Once it was ready, he bellowed, “Toph! Get Down!”

 

The young earthbender simply fell into the earth as if it were water and disappeared. Iroh shot lightning at the monster and it struck, eliciting a yelp. The shirshu sprinted across the ruined gardens and flipped the woman who had been riding it onto its back and disappeared over the wall of the estate.

 

“Well, uncle, I guess it’s just you and me.” Azula said from behind him. Iroh spun around and saw her, and her two friends. “You, and us I should say.”

 

“Wrong!” The earth shattered behind her and the greatest earthbender in the world shot out of the ground.

 

“I see your pet weasel-hog is joining us,” Azula deadpanned.

 

“Enough chit-chat,” Toph said and began her attack on Azula and her friends. Iroh helped Zuko to his feet. The scarred prince shook his head to clear it and started blasting fire at Azula, although it was a weak fire. A horn sounded from the distance, and Iroh recognized it. The Earth Kingdom army was on its way.

 

Zuko charged into the fight, but was instantly immobilized by Ty Lee. Iroh thought furiously, and coming to a decision he bolted for the stable. Once inside, he untethered Sugar Foot from her stall. He leapt into the saddle and raced back into the courtyard.

 

He arrived just in time to leap down and intercept a bolt of lightning being sent at Toph, redirecting it into the sky. He shot a fury of fire punches at Azula and her friends, not trying to injure them but to create distance. Once he had it, he picked Zuko up and placed him in the saddle.

 

“The army is coming!” He shouted. He got on the ostrich-horse. He reached a hand towards Toph, “Are you coming?! It’s not safe here for you anymore, not any of you!”

 

He looked pointedly at Lao, who had been immobilized by Ty Lee at some point. He saw Azula and her friends sprinting across the estate towards the downed combustion bender. As he watched, a man he recognized showed up on a komodo-rhino. He grit his teeth. Mongke.

 

A horn sounded again, and he could hear the tramp of soldiers running towards the estate. Toph reached up and took his hand, and he swung her onto the saddle. She looked in her father’s direction. 

 

“Dad, I'm sorry, but I have to go with them!” She waved around them, “I have to help them find the Avatar! We can’t stay here, I’ll look for you in Ba Sing Se!”

 

Iroh wondered about Toph’s comment about the impenetrable city as he got Sugar Foot to run. They leapt over the crumbling wall of the Beifong estate as Lao shouted, “TOPH!”

---

Hours later, and dozens of miles northeast, the three of them stopped beside a stream. Sugar Foot drank deeply, and Zuko crawled to the stream. He submerged his head in the water for a few seconds and pulled it out again. He shook his head and sat.

 

Toph walked over to him and sat down, placing her feet into the water. She sighed and leaned against him. “I don’t like your sister very much,”

 

Zuko snorted. He glanced over to his uncle, who was digging through their saddlebags, and untying his pack from them. “How did she find us?”

 

Iroh stood up and turned to him. “The animal, it was a shirshu. It can track someone anywhere by scent, and Azula had plenty of samples in my cabin on Zhao's ship.”

 

Zuko frowned, “What about me? She could have gotten one from my things on the Wani. ”

 

Iroh shook his head. “She.. had your things burned. She was upset when you escaped at the shrine. It doesn’t make a difference now. After the battle, the shirshu has associated our scents with danger.”

 

Zuko scowled. He hadn't had anything of much value, but still. Rude. Remembering what the assassin had told him, he said, “The man who was with them, Zhao hired him to kill me and then Azula. I don’t know if he’s still…”

 

Iroh closed his eyes and looked away, “What did he tell you?”

 

“Not much, just that Zhao wanted me dead, and that he wanted Azula killed after I was.”

 

Iroh seemed to be lost in thought for a moment, and then he looked back the way they had come. His brow furrowed slightly and he clenched his jaw.

 

“You have an assassin after you?” Toph asked, breaking her silence.

 

Zuko sagged where he sat, but nodded. “It seems that it is the case. We met him once before, but we didn’t know he was after us.” Zuko turned his sight to Toph and said, “I’m sorry we dragged you into this.”

 

Toph looked away for a second, “I…”

 

She shook her head. “Are my parent’s going to be okay?”

 

“Most likely.” Iroh said, “The army arrived as we were leaving, and Azula didn’t have many with her. If she had, we would have seen her coming. Even so, it would be best if they left Gaoling.”

 

Toph nodded. “My family has a house in the upper ring of Ba Sing Se. They’ll probably head there.”

 

“Is that why you said that you’d look for them there?” Zuko asked. Toph nodded and wiped the moisture from her eyes.

 

“Yeah. I know that they wouldn’t leave if they thought I might come back, so…” She trailed off, her voice tight in her throat.

 

Zuko put his arm around her shoulders to comfort her. She let him for a moment and then pushed him off.

 

“Enough of the emotional junk.” She said, “I was planning on going with you guys, I just didn’t expect it to be so…”

 

“Loud?”” Iroh offered, causing Toph to chuckle dryly.

 

“That’s one way to put it.” She jerked her head towards Zuko. “I didn’t know you could blow stuff up like that.”

 

Zuko rubbed his good eye, “I just figured it out. I’ve been trying for a while, but until earlier I didn’t have much luck. Screwed it up somehow and couldn’t stop.”

 

“I believe I know what happened, Prince Zuko.” Iroh said, “Before releasing the energy, too much of it pooled within your body. Not enough was released with each blast, and it was left clamoring for freedom.”

 

Zuko nodded slowly, understanding dawning on his face. Iroh smiled at him, but it quickly turned sad.

 

“She will be on our trail before long.” he said somberly. Zuko groaned, but Toph punched her fist into her palm.

 

“She has recruited the Rough Rhinos. A deadly raiding force, and a talented singing group. I do not think we can defeat them all at once.”

 

Zuko wasn’t sure where his uncle was going with this, but Iroh plowed ahead. “It is imperative that you find the Avatar, and teach him. Both of you. I will lead them away, for as long as I can.”

 

“No, Uncle, you can’t just-!”

 

“I must.” Iroh said with conviction, “I’ll keep ahead of them, and make for Ba Sing Se. Once I’m in the city, you will have found the Avatar.”

 

“Uncle, I… Thank you, for everything.” Zuko grabbed his uncle in a tight embrace. They broke apart after a few seconds, and Iroh shouldered his pack. Toph, who had been silent for the exchange, spoke.

 

“You’re going to lead them away on foot? But they’re chasing an ostrich-horse.”

 

Zuko looked at Sugar Foot and sighed, “You take her, uncle. She’ll help you keep in front of them.”

 

Iroh nodded, and he agreed to give Toph his pack. Zuko was surprised to learn that she had stowed her things in one of the saddlebags, but he helped her put them into her hand-me-down pack anyway. After removing his own pack and another hug with his uncle, Zuko walked up to his bird. She cooed affectionately and he scratched the feathers around her beak. “You’ve been a good girl, Sugar Foot. Take care of my uncle, okay?”

 

The bird cooed, and Iroh mounted the steed once again. He waved goodbye and took off down the road, leaving very obvious tracks.

 

“So, Sugar Foot, huh?” Toph asked. Zuko said nothing and blushed. Toph smiled mischievously.

 

“I like it. Zuzu and Sugar Foot, best friends forever.”

 

Zuko groaned and pinched the bridge of his nose. It was going to be a long walk.

Chapter 37: Twenty Questions

Ten miles north of Gaoling, the indomitable Princess Azula was having a bit of a melt down. Her blasted Uncle had gotten away, and her brother tried to kill her. Well, she was pretty sure that’s what had happened. Iroh, who she did not trust anymore, had claimed Zuko couldn’t control his new- how in the name of the sun had he learned to do that- bending skills. Combustion Bending. Zuko, who had always lagged behind her, was now on another level entirely.

 

Azula continued her efforts to melt the rock that had become a victim of her displeasure. It made her feel better. She kept her composure, so the Rough Rhinos wouldn't realize how very upset she was. Mai and Ty Lee knew, she was reasonably sure, but as far as the others were concerned, this could pass as a regular training exercise. She paused, focusing on her breathing, and then bathed the stone in fire once more. She was furious! They had been so close! If not for that insufferable little earthbending girl, they likely would have succeeded, Zuko’s new ability be forgotten.

 

He had been on the ground, and then her uncle had been all that stood between them. Azula was sure that herself, Mai, and Ty Lee would have been sufficient to take him. They had worked out a strategy for exactly that scenario, and then the girl had popped out of the ground like spring weeds after rain. Even still they might have taken Zuzu, but then the Earth Kingdom had come. Colonel Mongke had helped bring The Combustion Man away from the ruined estate. June, the bounty hunter, was nowhere to be found. Her uncle had shot the woman’s beast with lightning, and the pair had disappeared.

 

Perhaps they would have succeeded, had it not been for her. Major Wen. She had been present in the city, which was not a surprise really, and had ordered a force of earthbenders and light infantry towards the Beifong estate. Maybe she had heard the fight, or maybe she had just gotten a hunch, but she had been the one to charge towards the estate and force Azula to retreat. Had it not been for Mongke, then perhaps they would have left The Combustion Man to die.

 

“Azula?” Ty Lee said quietly, “I think you should eat something.”

 

Azula stopped her murder of the now mostly melted boulder and turned to her friend. She said nothing, but took the canteen of water and the bread Ty Lee held out to her. She was a tad hungry.

 

Azula looked over to the Rhinos. They were all sitting against their mounts, napping in the midday sun. Mai was watching her with calculating eyes, lounging against an evergreen in the shade. The Combustion Man had recovered from his collision with the wall and sat in the shade reading A Song of Knights and Maidens. Ty Lee had told her that it was the last book in the series. Evidently, it was the story of an orphaned farmer who learned the way of the warrior, saved a kingdom and won the heart of a nobleman's daughter. Azula could not, for the life of her, understand the man’s fascination with melodramatic romance novels. She was already angry, and the sight of the giant man reading the silly book wasn't helping. She rolled her eyes and took a drink of water. It helped somewhat.

 

Mai sauntered into the soft spring sunshine and crossed her arms. She raised an eyebrow at Azula. “They’re on an ostrich-horse.”

 

“No,” Azula said sarcastically, “It can’t be!”

 

Ty Lee snorted and chortled. Mai glared at her. “What I mean, is that they can’t have gone far. Three people on one bird.”

 

Azula nodded, understanding Mai’s point. She would have realized it herself far sooner if she wasn’t so… not happy. Azula weighed her options. The resources she had at her disposal were limited. She had her friends, the Rhinos, and an extraction team. They were nearby, a small unit of armored cavalry, only three tanks. She hadn’t taken them into Gaoling, as they were meant to transport her uncle and brother back to Omashu. They would be here soon, though they wouldn’t find Iroh or Zuko. Or maybe they would…

 

A plan began to form in Azula’s mind, and she shared it with her friends.

 

Azula stood on the hilltop, overlooking the valley they were in. She could see the road leading north, and a small patrol of soldiers meandering across a streambed. She wondered what they were looking for.

 

A strong breeze crashed against her, causing her hair to whip around her head. She leaned into the wind to keep her balance. It was a powerful gust, and it seemed to rage northeast, taking some of her anger with it.

 

---

 

“The Legion of Aang,” Sokka suggested to his sister and best friend, both of whom groaned. Sokka had been trying to come up with a good team name for them all morning, and so far they had been very unimpressed.

 

“Why do we need a team name?” Katara ventured.

 

“Well, I just think it makes us sound more professional. You’ve got the Kyoshi Warriors, the Yuyan Archers, the…” He trailed off.

 

“That’s only two.” Aang pointed out. Sokka shrugged.

 

“Yeah, but I’m sure there’s more.”

 

The three of them had stayed overnight in the mayor's home. Aang and Katara had gone out looking for earthbending teachers, and Sokka had gone looking for any information on the Beifong family. He hadn’t come up with much, as the library in town was rather small. The two others in their group had come up with zilch, at least as far as earthbending teachers go. They had, however, found out how to hold hands. Sokka wasn’t sure how he felt about that.

 

“What about the Boomeraang Squad?” he drew his boomerang, pointing to it. He got pitying stares back. “You know, because it’s got Aang in it?”

 

“Tell us about your vision again,” Katara said to Aang. Just then, the mayor walked in with a basket of food.

 

“I have those supplies- a vision?” He changed topic mid-sentence, his eyes lighting up with a ravenous curiosity.

 

“Oh, thanks Mayor Tep,” Aang said, “Yeah, I had a vision a few days ago. I can tell you about it, it’s not exactly a secret.”

 

Aang told the story of his vision of the earthbender and the one-eyed dragon. Mayor Tep interrupted him before he got to the end, “So, this dragon, are we talking was like cyclops, one-eye-in-the-middle, one-eyed, or one eye was missing?”

 

“Uh… one eye was missing,” Aang answered. The mayor nodded.

 

“Anyway, that was pretty much it. The girl’s got on a flying boar, and then she and the dragon flew away.” Aang finished, “We’re pretty sure that it has something to do with the Beifong family, but we haven’t been able to learn anything other than a name.”

 

“The Beifong family?” The mayor looked surprised. “I’m familiar with them, I could get into contact with them for you.”

 

“Wait, really?” Sokka asked in surprise.

 

“Yes, of course,” Tep answered, “They're one of the wealthiest noble families in the Earth Kingdom.”

 

“Do they have a daughter?” Aang asked, and Mayor Tep looked at him in disapproval.

 

“Now, Avatar Aang, that’s hardly an appropriate question. You shouldn’t seek to marry into a rich noble family so brazenly!”

 

“What? No, I mean the girl from my vision.” Aang said, “As my earthbending teacher.”

 

“Oh.” The mayor grew red in the face, embarrassed, “I apologize, I shouldn’t have- uh, you know what, I’ll just send a letter to Lao right now.”

 

The mayor stood, but Katara stopped him. “Maybe you could just tell us where they are, and we can fly there on Appa.”

 

“Yes, yes, that would make more sense,” Tep said. Sokka wondered how he had gotten the position of mayor. He wasn’t the most eloquent speaker. “They live in Gaoling.”

 

Aang’s head whipped over to Sokka, and gave him an annoyed expression. Sokka, feeling a tad stupid, stood up. “I’m gonna… go check on Appa.”

 

Sokka excused himself and walked through the mayor's home, politely telling his four daughters that he did not require assistance, and went outside. Appa was lying in the yard on the side of the house, bits of loose fur shed all around him, evidently enjoying the topiary. He was eating it.

 

“No, Appa, you can’t eat that! It’s decorative!” Sokka said to the bison, who promptly spat out the once beautifully designed plant. It now loosely resembled a pile of chewed-up leaves. Sokka hung his head. “Well, it’s too late now. Go ahead and finish that one, but leave the others alone.”

 

Appa winked at him, an act that Sokka didn’t know the bison could perform, and scarfed down  the rest of the plant. Sokka rolled his eyes and walked away, where he faced southwest. He looked around to see that nobody was in sight, and he took on the mantle of the Face Stealer. He felt the darkness swirl through him, charging his muscles with power. 

 

A gentle breeze wafted in as Sokka focussed on the shadows at his feet, trying to manipulate them. He wanted to form words, to see how fine his control was. He stopped in his efforts when he caught a familiar scent. It was faint, very faint, but… he could smell it. Smoke, lilies, a thunderstorm. Sokka smiled lightly without realizing he had done so. He knew of only one thing in the world it could be: Azula.

 

She was… close? No, she couldn't be. The scent was faint, far fainter than anything nearby would be. He thought for a few minutes, and remembering how he had pooled Koh's shadow into his vision, he tried to do so with his sense of smell. He took in a new breath, and he could tell the scent was stronger, but he couldn’t tell how far away it was. He frowned. The crunch of gravel alerted him that he was not alone. Odd, he thought, shouldn’t he have been able to smell whoever it was that had come to him?

 

“Sokka,” Katara said, “Are you okay?”

 

“What? Of course, I am, why?” 

 

“You’re sniffing really hard and smiling a little.”

 

“Uh…” Sokka said eloquently. Well, now he felt creepy. He quickly thought of an excuse to explain why he was doing that, and one that did not include the fact that he could smell Azula on the wind. “I was experimenting with my…” He pointed to his shadow. Katara nodded slowly.

 

“And then I remembered that I could make my vision better, so I tried it with my sense of smell. Someone’s cooking, I don’t know what, but it smells great.”

 

Katara’s eyes lit up, “Really? That‘s pretty cool!”

 

“Yeah, it's..” He trailed off as another breeze brushed past them, stronger this time. This one carried more than just Azula’s scent. There was anger on the wind. Sokka’s eyes narrowed and his smile fell. He turned towards the wind and looked southwest. Azula was angry, and for some reason, he couldn’t understand, it made him sad.

 

“Sokka?” Katara asked when she noticed her brother's sudden change in mood, “What, did someone burn dinner?”

 

“N-no.” Sokka answered, “I can smell her, she’s far away but… she’s angry. Furious, I think.”

 

“What? You can smell anger?”

 

Sokka nodded, and Katara looked in the same direction. “Who?”

 

Sokka was silent for a few moments. Speaking softly he said, “Azula.”

 

 

---

“So, you’re telling me, that the Fire Nation has it so that candy recipes are labeled a state secret, and sharing them with other nations is considered treason and an act of confectionary espionage?”

 

Zuko was silent for a few moments as they walked through the wide, shallow stream - or maybe it was a river? He had never studied potamology-  that was lined by trees on either side before answering Toph’s question. “Yes.”

 

“Why?”

 

“I don’t know.”

 

Toph nodded. “So, have you met the Avatar before?”

 

Zuko nodded. 

 

“What’s his name?”

 

“Aang.”

 

“You suck at this.”

 

Zuko stopped. “Suck at what? Walking?!”

 

“Conversation.”

 

“I do not suck at conversation!” Zuko nearly shouted. Where had that come from? They had been walking peaceably, and how was it his fault if he was distracted? He was watching the sky for the Avatar.

 

“Yes you do! You’re giving only yes and no answers, or just one word answers! Unless I ask something specific like ‘what kind of candy do they have in the Fire Nation? I’ve never had any. ’ It’s boring.” Toph pointed a finger at his face.

 

“That’s because you’re terrible at asking questions!” Zuko cut back, anger in his voice.

 

“You’re terrible at answering them!”

 

“I-” Zuko pinched the bridge of his nose in irritation. “Fine. I could probably do better at it.”

 

Zuko turned back in the direction they had been going. Toph started clicking her tongue. Click. Click. Click. Zuko closed his eyes. Was she doing that just to annoy him? He glanced at her over his shoulder, She was grinning evilly. So yeah, just to annoy him. Her boredom meant his irritation. Man, she reminded him of Azula from before their mother… That gave him an idea. He stopped and Toph bumped into him.

 

“Don’t do that.” She snapped at him. “I’m blind!”

 

“I thought you could see with earthbending,” Zuko said curiously.

 

“I can, but this water and the sand make everything really fuzzy,” Toph said, and Zuko nodded in response. Realizing she might not have been able to tell, he said, “I see.”

 

“Do you want to play a game?” Zuko said quickly, and Toph thought he seemed embarrassed to have asked.

 

“Sure, Zuzu. What do you have in mind?” She smiled when she felt Zuko bristle.

 

“Have you ever played Twenty Questions?” He said, slightly annoyed.

 

“No. What is it?”

 

“I used to play it with my mother and Azula, before… well, I guess that doesn’t matter. One person thinks of something, and the others have to ask questions until they figure it out. If they can’t do it in twenty questions or less, they lose.”

 

Toph was silent for a few seconds. “Alright, sounds fun.”

 

Zuko nodded and then moved aside for Toph to walk slightly ahead of him. “I’ll ask the questions since you’ve never played before. Think of something. It can be anything, as long as it’s something the other person probably knows about.”

 

Toph nodded. She thought for a second and said, “I got it.”

 

Zuko walked in the shallow water for a bit, and said, “Is it something you can touch?”

 

Toph said “Yes.”

 

“Is it alive?” Zuko asked. Toph shook her head. “Is it something you can eat?”

 

“Uh, no. I mean, you can if you try hard enough,” Toph said. Zuko rolled his eyes at her.

 

“Is it sharp?”

 

“No,” Toph answered.

 

Zuko thought for a few seconds. How many questions was he at? Four, he always lost count at this game.

 

“Is it bigger than a person?” Zuko asked.

 

“No,” Toph answered.

 

“Does everyone own one?” Zuko asked.

 

“Uh, probably?” Toph answered.

 

“Do you use it every day?” Zuko asked.

 

“Nearly,” Toph answered.

 

“Is it something you keep inside?” Zuko asked.

 

“Yes,” Toph answered.

 

“Can it be taken outside?” Zuko asked.

 

“Yes,” Toph answered. Zuko nodded, and said, “Alright, this next one doesn’t count, since I'm just listing what I know about it.”

 

“It’s smaller than a person, it’s used nearly every day. You can’t eat it, but it’s not sharp. It’s kept in the house but you can take it outside, and most people probably own one.” Zuko said. Toph nodded.

 

Zuko thought about what was used every day, that everyone would have. Or, at least what Toph would have used almost every day. Cleaning supplies were out, as the Beifongs had a maid. He suddenly had an idea.

 

“Shoes?”

 

“No. That’s nine questions by the way.”

 

Zuko huffed.

 

“It heavy?” He asked. Toph shook her head.

 

“Uh… Toothbrush?”

 

“No. Also, I forgot mine.” Toph said. Zuko groaned.

 

“We’ll find one in a village or town. Maybe I can make you one.” Zuko said, “Do you keep it in the kitchen? Not the toothbrush, the thing you’re thinking of.”

 

“Yes. Eleven.” Toph answered.

 

Zuko smiled, he was getting close. It was probably food related. “Do you cook with it?”

 

“They have some for that specifically.”

 

“A spoon?” Zuko asked.

 

“No, but you’re getting close.”

 

“Chopsticks!” Zuko said confidently. Toph laughed at him.

 

“No, and what kind of chopsticks can you cook with?”

 

“I forgot about that,” Zuko said, blushing with slight embarrassment.

 

“Does it hold liquid?”

 

“Yes, but not always,” Toph answered.

 

Zuko pondered the matter. He was on fifteen questions. He could think of a few options.

 

“A cup.”

 

“No.”

 

“A bowl?”

 

“Yes.”

 

Zuko grinned, very pleased with himself. “So, what do you think? Do you like it?”

 

Toph took a deep breath. She tapped her chin with a finger, frowned, and said, “Yes.”

 

Zuko smiled again. “Alright, I’m thinking of something.”

 

“Can you touch it?” Toph asked. Zuko nodded.

 

“Do you wear it?” Zuko nodded again.

 

“Shoes,” Toph said. Zuko’s mouth fell open. “Yes.”

 

Toph laughed with glee. “See? I’m not terrible at asking questions!”

 

“Three questions. I’m impressed,”

 

Toph laughed and shrugged. “What can I say? I’m incredibly talented.”

 

 

---

Major Wen stopped on the road north from Gaoling. General Long had given her orders to report to the council of five in Ba Sing Se, but something had stopped her in her tracks. It was tracks, literally. Not the ostrich-horse tracks that had preceded them up the road, but human footprints. She knew that the Dragon of the West and Prince Zuko had taken the Beifong girl with them, but she hadn’t been able to pursue them. Sure, she was on their trail in a literal sense, but she and her soldiers were on foot. They couldn’t run down an ostrich-horse that way.

 

But along the north road, the tracks stopped and went into the small river. They were surrounded by more, smaller, human footprints. Two different men, and a child. One man and a child had walked into the stream, leaving occasional prints in the sand that rose above the water. Wen rubbed her hands together in thought. Was it possible that one of the Fire Nation royals had taken the Beifong girl this different route on foot? Why would they do that? General Long had said they were being hunted by Princess Azula… Yes, that made sense. If the princess was following their trail, she would be looking for the ostrich horse. The dirt road was wet from recent rainfall, so the tracks were obvious. One of them would have led her away, while the other took their hostage wherever they were going. She hadn’t been given orders to pursue, but things had changed now. The enemy was on foot.

 

“Ping.” Major Wen said. The sergeant saluted her.

 

“Change of plan. We’re following these tracks to rescue Lady Beifong and capture the Fire Nation royal.”

 

---

Author’s Note:

 

Sorry for the short update, all. I’ve been taking mad L’s this year and it’s not yet let up.

 

Anyway, this chapter has had the least amount of plot advancing content, although that is not to say none of it advancing the plot. Actually, now that I think of it, almost the entire chapter is relevant. The bit with Toph and Zuko was just to let the reader see their friendship build up, so that it doesn’t feel unnatural.

 

Anyway, if you’ve made it this far, thanks! Maybe follow, or subscribe or whatever it is. Or don’t; it’s your choice lol

Chapter 38: By Any means Necessary?

Two days after Mayor Tep had told them where to find the Beifongs, Aang, Katara, and Sokka were in the office of General Long of the Earth Kingdom. They had flown fast to get there, as Aang was anxious to find his earthbending teacher.

 

“Unfortunately, Avatar Aang, the Beifongs have left Gaoling for Ba Sing Se.” The General said. Aang sagged in his seat. Sokka groaned in disbelief, but Katara didn’t react much other than to place a reassuring hand on Aang’s shoulder.

 

“Our city was attacked three nights ago by a group of Fire Nation raiders known as the Rough Rhinos, as well as Princess Azula. It seems that the Rhinos were merely a distraction while she went after the Beifong family personally.” Long explained, “Or rather a pair of guests that were staying with them, though it is unclear. Lao Beifong didn’t explain much to Major Wen other than that his daughter had been kidnapped by the two men staying with them. They fought with the Princess and the men, firebenders both, fled north with Lady Toph Beifong.”

 

“Azula again?” Aang said in despair. “Sokka, why does your girlfriend like to make my life more difficult?”

 

“I- What?! She’s not my girlfriend!” Sokka spluttered indignantly.

 

Katara laughed, but covered it with a cough. “Now’s not the time for jokes, Aang.”

 

“I know, I know.” The Avatar said tiredly. He stood and bowed to the General. “Thank you for your time, General Long.”

 

“It’s an honor, Avatar Aang. Before you go, I should warn you that our scouts have reported a number of Fire Nation raiding parties in the province. I could arrange an escort to take you wherever you…” He trailed off, as he wasn’t sure where the Avatar would be going.

 

“Thanks, but we won’t need an escort. We’ll be flying on Appa, so we couldn’t take them anyway.” Aang said. He and his friends left the room and made their way out of the army compound.

 

“So now what?” Katara asked.

 

“We fly north again, and try to find Toph.”

 

“I don’t know Aang,” Sokka said, “If she could be captured by just two firebenders, she might not be cut out to be your teacher.”

 

Katara smacked him on the shoulder. “Yeah, because none of us have ever been captured by less than fifty seven. Sokka, what’s the matter with you? It shouldn’t matter who it is, we can’t just let the Fire Nation abduct people.”

 

“I know that!” Sokka rubbed at his shoulder.

 

“And besides,” Katara said, “If they’re being chased by Azula, it stands to reason that they’re not working for the Fire Lord. Maybe it’s Jeong Jeong or someone who can teach Aang firebending.”

 

“Eh, maybe.” Aang said as he leapt onto Appa’s saddle. “That’d be lucky. Maybe we’ll find people to teach me both earth and fire.”

 

“Oh, hey!” Katara said, “I have an idea! We could track them by scent!”

 

Aang looked at her as if she had just confessed a deep and undying romantic interest in Appa. “And how exactly are we supposed to do that?”

 

Katara blinked at him and realized she hadn't explained her thought process. She jerked a thumb towards Soka and hurriedly explained. “Sokka’s nose. He could smell Azula while we were in Shin Village, at Mayor Tep’s house. She would’ve been around here at the time. Plus he followed Zhao through Agna Qel’a by scent.”

 

“You could smell Azula from Shin Village?” Aang asked with a confused expression. It quickly turned to disgust. “That’s pretty gross. I’d have thought she bathed regularly.”

 

Sokka looked affronted. “She doesn’t smell gross! It was carried by the wind!”

 

“That still doesn’t sound very clean…” Aang said.

 

“I’m sure she has impeccable hygiene! She smells like fire and lilies! And a thunderstorm!” Sokka's voice cracked. Katara raised an eyebrow at him.

 

“That sounds a bit creepy. Maybe stop describing how your girlfriend smells.” She cut in.

 

“She’s not my girlfriend!” Sokka shouted.

 

“Anyway, back to the original topic,” Aang said placatingly, “Do you think you could track them by scent?”

 

“I… don’t know,” Sokka said. “I only did that once, and they weren’t all that far away. I can try?”

 

“Worth a shot,” Aang said. “I guess we need to head north.”

 

“But I don’t know what they smell like.” Sokka replied.

 

“That’s a fair point.”

 

“We should go to the Beifongs estate.” Katara suggested. “We could probably find something of theirs.”

 

In less than half an hour, Team Avatar had found the Beinfong home. It was surprisingly easy, as it was the only one half burned to the ground. Parts of the wall had been destroyed, and laborers and earthbenders were only now beginning to clean up the mess. Twin statues of flying boars sat on either side of the strangely intact gate. There were few guards, and one of those who remained explained that lord and lady Beifong had taken the majority of their security with them to Ba Sing Se. After explain who they were and what they were doing, the head guardsman allowed them to investigate the ruined estate

 

Aang looked around the grounds after guiding Appa to land beside the house. Sokka had gone inside, but Katara remained with him. He observed the grounds. Stones littered once immaculate gardens, scorch marks and carters could be seen all across the courtyard. Soon, Sokka returned with… a toothbrush.

 

“I figured this would work.” Sokka said.

 

“How do you know it’s hers?” Katara asked. Sokka shrugged.

 

“It was the only one. I figured that if her parents went to Ba Sing Se, they would’ve brought theirs.” Sokka said, “Plus, since she was kidnapped she probably didn’t have time to pack.”

 

“Okay. I guess we’ll get started.” Aang said, and Sokka nodded. He closed his eyes for a second, and a shift seemed to come over him. A flicker of movement just out of sight. His shadow lengthened, and he took a slow breath. When he opened his eyes, they were obscured by a blackness so dark that they seemed to drink in the light.

 

Aang shivered. It was like looking into an opposite reflection of the Avatar State. Where there should be light, only darkness lay. Sokka was silent for a while, and he took a few careful breaths through his nose. When he spoke, his voice was distorted, and echoed as if coming from underground.

 

“She’s far.” Was all he said. He climbed onto Appa’s head and waited for the others to get into the saddle. When everyone was ready, he sent Appa skyward. The sun was dipping low towards the western horizon, but they still had some time before dark. Aang wanted to get as much ground covered as possible.

---

Zuko and Toph walked across an endless grassland. They had been walking for two days, heading northward all the while. Zuko was worried about his uncle. Sure, Iroh was an impressive firebender and had regained much of the strength and agility he had in his youth, but he was still just one man. An old man. Against Azula, Mai, Ty Lee, the Rough Rhinos, and Zhao’s assassin. Assuming the ploy had even worked and they had followed him and Sugar Foot instead of Zuko and Toph.

 

“Do you even know how to read a map?” Toph asked for the fifth time.

 

“Yes!” Zuko snapped.

 

“Then why are we lost?” She replied.

 

“We. Are. Not. Lost.” Zuko said, his nerves thoroughly tread upon.

 

“Then where are we?” Toph asked, crossing her arms and glaring, although not looking at Zuko directly. Zuko pinched the bridge of his nose in irritation. How was he supposed to answer that? With longitudinal coordinates? They weren’t anywhere near any named settlements, just some small farming villages.

 

“The Earth Kingdom.” He said eventually.

 

“Do you have any idea how little that narrows it down?”

 

“Yes.” Zuko said, pushing aside his irritation. He continued walking in silence until he found a trail of all too familiar white fur.

 

“The Avatar.” Zuko said, “Finally.”

 

“Well shoot some fire or an explosion at him! Get his attention so he’ll land.” Toph said as she let herself flop into the dirt.

 

“No, he-” Zuko sighed. “He’s not here, but he was here. He’s flying that way.” Zuko pointed to the southwest, toward Gaoling.

 

“Are you serious?” Toph said as she picked loose strands of bison fur. Zuko nodded. He looked towards the western horizon. The sun was getting low.

 

“We should camp here for the night.” He said. “Get an early start in the morning.”

 

“Oh wow,” Toph drawled with mock enthusiasm. “More walking.”

 

“How did you think we were going to get around?!” Zuko barked in irritation. He saw the smirk on Toph’s face and realized that she was just trying to irritate him. It would be more accurate to say that she was succeeding to irritate him, to be honest. Zuko refused to admit that to himself, however. “You just love trying to annoy me, don’t you?”

 

“You make it too easy!”

 

Zuko rolled his eyes and flopped onto the ground next to his short, blind friend. The pair lay in a comfortable silence for a time, and eventually, Zuko began preparing their meal. It consisted of nearly stale bread, dried meat, and some fruit he had found. Lychee nuts, or berries. He wasn’t sure, but he thought it should’ve been obvious. Were berries ever this tough?

 

“So, what’s the Avatar like?”

 

Zuko paused as he was cutting the bread. What was Aang like? “He’s… nice. Bald. Saved my life once.” He thought for a few seconds, “Maybe twice?”

 

“What do you mean maybe?” Toph asked, lifting some sats for them with earthbending. Zuko scratched his head.

 

“Well…” He wasn’t sure how to broach the subject. Aang, Sokka, and Katara had taken him with them after he had been knocked out by Azula in the Ilah stronghold, but he doubted she would’ve killed him. Zhao might have, or perhaps his father, but Zuko didn’t know for sure. If they didn’t plan to then, they certainly did now. “I broke him out of prison. He and his friend Sokka, he’s the First Son of the Southern Water Tribe. Azula captured them, and I teamed up with Katara -another friend of his- to get them out.”

 

“During the fight, I was knocked out cold.” Zuko continued and resumed cutting the bread, “And they brought me out with them.”

 

“Well, that's not a surprise. I mean, you’re friends, right?” Toph put in.

 

Zuko paused again. Were they friends? Outside of that one event, he hadn’t spent much time around them that didn’t involve attempting to imprison Aang. Sure, he had warned them about Zhao’s plan to kill the Moon Spirit, and they had asked him to join them, but… He sighed. 

 

“... No.”

 

“What do you mean no?!” Toph said in astonishment. “You just said you broke them out of jail!”

 

“We didn’t get off on the right foot,” Zuko said.

 

“Oh, let me guess,” Toph said sarcastically as she slid a hand down her face. “You invaded their home too?”

 

Zuko’s silence was obviously enough to answer her. Toph pinched the bridge of her nose. “Is that the only way you know how to meet people!?”

---

Sokka wasn’t sure if he was awake or not. He wasn’t in the Spirit World, of that much he was certain of, but it was strange all the same. He was underground, in a labyrinth of tunnels and corridors illuminated by a sickly green light. It was different from the cave of two lovers, as this was obviously a fortress of some kind. Metal doors lined the sides of the corridor, and one door seemed to grow in its frame at the far end. Sokka tried to walk towards it, but he didn’t draw nearer. 

 

He quickened his pace and began to run. Doors passed him by, but the corridor he had found himself in only seemed to lengthen . The door had grown to enormous proportions, but even still it seemed impossibly far away. Sokka didn’t know why, but he was desperate to get there before it was too late.

 

Suddenly, the door slammed open, revealing flames burning in the darkness. Two golden rings of perfect sunlight trapped underground. A drum beat from somewhere within. Even as he ran, the drum’s cadence grew hurried and unsteady, beating wildly. Two wheels of perfect fire flickered and went out. The drum began to spasm and rage, before it too was snuffed out. Sokka tried to call out, but he didn’t know what to say. Suddenly, he was falling. Falling into shadow and through the night, until he found himself standing in Koh’s lair. He looked around wildly, but couldn’t see the Face Stealer.

 

“There is another,” Koh’s voice spoke from behind him. Sokka spun around but he still couldn't see the spirit. “She is strong, but still only human. Do not refrain. Do not shirk your duty, my champion. You have an obligation to the world,” Sokka felt as if the voice was echoing from his very bones, “and should you leave it unfulfilled, you know well the cost.”

Sokka jerked suddenly awake, staring into the moonless night. He shivered in a cold sweat and wiped his brow. He glanced over to Katara and Aang, who slept side by side on Appa’s tail. He thought back to his dream, or vision, or warning, or whatever it had been. He remembered his last vision, before the siege. It had been a warning. A message. Zhao had tried to kill the Moon Spirit. Maybe someone was trying to kill the sun?

 

He hadn’t closed the gate to Koh’s shadow. He left it open to keep track of Toph and whoever it was that had kidnapped her, but more than that, he just… liked the way it felt. The strength. The power. The sharpness of his senses. He could see better, hear better, he knew where things were around him. It was almost intoxicating.

 

Sokka whipped his head south. He heard something; someone far away. He focused Koh’s power, his power, and listened.

 

“It’s the Avatar.” A man said, “Him and his companions, they’re sleeping! Just ten minutes march.”

 

“Are you sure, private?” 

 

“Yes, Captain.” The Private said. “It can’t be anyone else.”

 

Sokka licked his teeth. They could be Earth Kingdom. He looked to the trail of fur that Appa had left behind. Or, he thought, they could be Fire Nation. He wasn’t sure which it would be. He glanced at his sister and Aang. He decided to let them sleep while he looked into the potential threat. He could go without sleep for a very long time, and they couldn’t. They didn’t have his strength.

 

He strapped on his Regret and followed the trail of bison fur, calling on Koh’s Mantle to speed him as he began to run. Trees and boulders darted past him as he moved like the wind. He kept up his pace until he could hear that the object of his search was close at hand. He slowed his pace and crept silently along, until the soldiers came into view.

 

They were Fire Nation, perhaps twenty men in all. A group of the raiders that General Long had warned of. None of the men bore weapons, but they all walked with confidence nonetheless. Firebenders. Sokka looked back the way he had come. He could get back to the others and escape, but that would leave these raiders to roam the countryside, attacking indiscriminately. Sokka grit his teeth. He opened his third eye and looked into the hearts of those men.

 

Sokka shivered when he saw them. The Rot. All of them, to a man, were burning with that putrid fire. It made sense, in a way. An elite unit of firebenders sent to torment the countryside? Why wouldn’t they be taken by Vaatu?

 

Sokka glanced over his shoulder, thinking to run back and get himself and his friends out of there, to get them away from danger. He turned to go, but he remembered what Koh had said in his mind mere minutes ago. He wouldn’t ignore another warning, he wouldn’t shirk his duty. He knew the cost.

 

Sokka’s stomach heaved at the thought of what he was about to do. He didn’t have the fortitude to do this, at least not as he was. Sokka reached for the void and began to carry out his obligation to the world. Sokka wrapped himself in the perfect emptiness of the void, walking toward his foe. The path was so clear; he didn’t understand why it hadn’t seemed so before.

He drew his Regret, and pale light illuminated the earth before him.

 

---

 

Toph walked beside Zuzu. They had gotten an early start, the firebender rising at the crack of dawn again. Unfortunately, this meant that he would wake Toph as well, as he practiced his firebending every morning. She could sleep through most of it, but when he neared the end of his training he would occasionally blow something up. She wasn’t sure how he did it, as he just stood still and took a sharp breath, pulled in his stomach muscles, and then BOOM! An explosion. It wasn’t hard to tell when he was firing one, but she had no way of knowing how far away it would hit until it did.

 

“Zuzu,” Toph said to get his attention as they walked. He really didn’t like that nickname, but that was his problem.

 

“Stop calling me that,” Zuko said shortly, his words clipped.

 

“No.” Toph responded, “I’ve been meaning to ask you, why do you make those explosions?”

 

Zuko took a slow breath. “I just learned how to do it. I need to practice, otherwise I won’t be able to-”

 

“No, no, I get that.” “Toph said, “What I mean is, why do you make such an obvious display of firebending? The normal stuff is easy to hide, but anyone could probably hear the explosion bending from miles off”

 

“I…” Zuko trailed off. “It’s called combustion bending.”

 

“You didn’t think of that, did you? I thought maybe you were trying to signal the Avatar, but after your story yesterday I wasn’t so sure.”

 

“I did not think of that.” Zuko groaned. “Uncle’s right, I don’t think these things through.”

 

Toph let the matter drop. She sensed that this wasn’t a topic to annoy Zuko with. She continued to walk in an amicable silence, but she wished that she had brough t a toothbrush. She had to use some twigs so far, and they really weren’t effective. She wished she hadn’t left hers at home. In Gaoling.

 

Her mind drifted into thoughts of where she had grown up, and the battle that had taken place there. It had been exhilarating at the time, but looking back on it she realized how close the fight had been.

 

She wondered if she would've won without Zuko’s warning about Ty Lee, or if she had fought Azula immediately. She had fought her, but only after she had been disoriented by an explosion and had expended much of her energy in her fight with Iroh. Was the Princess giving it her all? Iroh had created lightning, could Azula? What defense did she have against that? Other than dodging, but was she even fast enough? Was she faster than lightning? Was anyone? Toph wanted a rematch. She didn’t like those questions left unanswered.

 

Toph's brow furrowed. Could Zuzu shoot lightning? Did he even need to? He could blow things up with his mind. She wondered if she could earthbend with her mind. She was the greatest earthbender in the world, as far as she could tell, so if anyone could it would be her. She had a gift, and as far as she’d ever heard, nobody else used earthbending to see. What was the difference between using her arm and using her mind, really? She could move her arms without earthbending, she had to choose to bend. 

 

Maybe that was it, the will. If she willed the stone to break, then surely it would, wouldn’t it? She decided to try it when they made camp for the night. It would be a fun project to- Toph narrowed her sightless eyes. There were people behind them, just on the edge of her senses.

 

“Someone’s coming.” She said as she slapped Zuko on the arm. Zuko turned around to see what she was talking about, but they were still far off. “A group of them, fifteen.”

 

Zuko nodded. He quickly scanned the plane they were walking over. Not much around but short grass and occasional trees. “We keep moving.”

 

Toph put her hands on her hips as Zuko gave her a command. “Who put you in charge?”

 

“What?! Zuko said in surprise. “I’m- look, do you have a better idea?”

 

“We wait for them to catch up and fight.”

 

“Why would we- We don’t even know if they’re following us!” Zuko said.

 

“Pretty sure it doesn’t matter.” Toph said, “They’re moving fast, and they don’t feel very friendly.”

 

“Look,” Zuko said, “I’m not afraid of a fight, you know that. But that doesn’t mean that we have to go looking for them! Not every battle needs to be-” He stopped speaking as he dodged a rock that came hurtling towards his face.

 

“Yeah, not every battle needs to be fought.” Toph said as she raised a barrier to shield them, “But this one is getting fought anyway.”

 

“Yeah, I figured that one out, thanks.”

 

“You’re pretty dense. I wasn’t sure that rock would get the message across.” Toph said. She checked to see how far off the attacker was. She was impressed; the leader had an exemplary  aim to almost hit Zuko from so far away.

 

“I guess we’ll just wait here then.” Zuko said, crouching down to wait for the attackers to come into range.

 

“Wow, what a genius plan!” Toph said in mock wonder. “How’d you think of it?”

 

“Ha-ha,” Zuko said dryly.

 

“They’re nearly here,” Toph said. “You want to blow them up or something?”

 

“No.”

 

“What’s the point of all that practice if you don’t plan on using it?” Toph was exasperated. She didn’t exactly have a massive arsenal of long-range attacks at her disposal.

 

Zuko leapt over the wall and saw their attackers clearly for the first time. “I’m not going to convince the Earth Kingdom I’m on their side by blowing up their soldiers.”

 

Toph smirked as she dropped her barricade. They waited for the soldiers to attack, but they didn’t. Instead, they just fanned out and encircled the pair. The leader, a woman, stepped forward.

 

“Surrender and you won’t be harmed.” The woman said. Toph scoffed.

 

“You almost took his head off. There’s no way we’d surrender to you.” She said bitingly. “Won’t be harmed. Yeah right.”

 

The woman looked at Toph for a split second, and said, “I am major Wen of Omashu, Lady Beifong. We’re here to arrest Prince Zuko, and deliver you to your parents safely.”

 

“Why are you arresting him? He’s on our side.”

 

“I very much doubt that. The son of the Fire Lord? A rebel? Please.” Major Wen said, “Even if he hadn’t kidnapped you, that would be hard to believe.”

 

“I didn’t kidnap her!” Zuko shouted, “She wanted to come!”

 

“I may have been born at night, Prince Zuko,” The Major said evenly, “But it wasn’t last night.” 

 

Toph felt the Major begin to move. She slid her foot to the side and snapped her right hand forward, sending a stone hurtling towards the woman. Wen made a flicking motion with her fingers and the stone crumbled to dust as it made contact, leaving her unharmed.

 

“That’s a neat trick,” Toph said.

 

“The Fire Nation had brainwashed the girl.” Major Wen addressed her men. “Don’t hurt her too much. She’s going to Lake Laogai.”

 

---

 

Appa flew close to the tree line as they approached a broad grassland. The plane stretched across the Earth Kingdom until it reached the Si Wong Desert far in the north, and was populated by small farming villages and trade towns. They had been to a number of them while looking for a teacher.

 

“How much farther?” Aang asked. Sokka shrugged. Aang gave him a sidelong glance. His friend had been morose all morning as if something had happened during the night. It wasn’t just that; after using his power continuously, Sokka was reverting to how he had been. He wasn’t himself, he wasn’t as quick with a joke, or as susceptible to teasing. He was darker, sadder. As if a great weight had settled over him once again.

 

“Maybe you should take a break.” Aang suggested, “Give your Spirit Powers a chance to rest.” He wiggled his fingers in the manner Sokka did when he called them that, but his friend paid him little mind.

 

“It’s fine.” He said quietly.

 

Aang looked at Katara and saw his own worry echoed across her face. He looked back over the plane. A vast expanse of green hills that rolled like waves on the autumn ocean, almost hypnotic in their unending grace. A memory of his childhood emerged from the recesses of his mind, and Aang gazed wistfully across the earth. Saddened now, by both his friend’s burden and his own loss.

 

“You know,” Aang said to nobody, or everybody, “This is where the wild bison would graze in the fall. The grass would grow so tall that you couldn’t even see Appa unless he took to the air.”

 

“Really?” Katara asked, glad for the momentary distraction, “I’m sure the grass still grows as tall, it’s just springtime.”

 

“Yeah, probably,” Aang said, his eyes locked onto a distant memory. Suddenly they grew dark and his expression fell sour. “There’s no bison left though.”

 

“We can’t know that for sure!” Katara argued, “There might be! The world's a big place, after all.”

 

“I don’t think so.” Aang said, “We would have seen them by now. We’ve traveled across most of their natural range, and…” He shook his head. “This war needs to end.”

 

“By any means necessary?” Sokka asked, almost below the point of hearing.

 

“I don’t know,” Aang answered. Thinking about the destruction wrought at General Fong’s fort, he said “Depends on the means, and if they are really necessary.”

 

“What if they are? And what if you hate what you must do?” Sokka asked, his eyes locked on the horizon, though no longer masked in shadow.

 

“I,” Aang swallowed, “I’d try to find another way.”

 

“What if there is no other way? You have an obligation to the world, we all do. You, Katara,” Sokka spoke in barely more than a whisper, “Me.”

 

“Sokka,” Katara began, “What are you talking about?”

 

“Fire. On the horizon.” Sokka said, gesturing straight ahead of them. Aang looked, but he couldn’t see anything. No smoke, no fleeing animals.

 

“I don’t see anything, no smoke or… right,” Katara said. “Magic eyesight.”

 

“Firebending. I think there’s a fight up ahead.”

 

Aang strained to see what Sokka was talking about, and then suddenly he saw the flash of fire in the distance, faint but there. Aang unfurled his glider, “I’ll go ahead. ‘see if it’s the girl from my vision, and whoever those firebenders are.”

 

He leapt off Appa’s back. Momo tried to follow him, but the lemur wasn’t as fast as Aang when he needed to move. In moments, he had left his friends behind. He sped across the sky and towards the direction of the firebending Sokka had seen. He soared over the plane and soon the battle was in sight. It was an odd fight. A lone firebender and a small girl were fighting a patrol of Earth Kingdom soldiers.

 

Aang landed next to the girl and recognized her as the girl from his vision. He opened his mouth to speak, but was launched away by a pillar of stone that shot out of the ground beneath his feet. He regained his footing and was nearly struck by another wave of earthbending from one of the soldiers

 

“Hey!” He said as he dodged the soldiers, “Stop attacking me, I’m the Avatar!”

 

“And I’m the Earth King!” One of the soldiers shouted at him, before launching a series of earthworks from the ground. Aang tossed him across the ground with airbending. He saw the girl from his vision again, Toph he assumed, and leapt over to her.

 

“I need an earthbending teacher!” He said. Toph continued fighting, but said: “I’m a little busy right now!”

 

A woman in a soldier uniform launched a rock towards the firebender, who spun to the side and sent a stream of fire at his assailant. Aang recognized him. “Zuko?!”

 

“Aang?!”

 

“Isn’t that the Avatar’s name? Wait, this guy’s the Avatar?” Toph asked in astonishment, “But he stands so daintily!”

 

Aang was confused by the statement, but shrugged, “I’m light on my feet.”

 

Earthbenders continued their assault, and Aang was impressed by Toph’s ability to 

weave through the fight untouched. She counteracted every strike, broke every stance, moving like a force of nature.

 

“Can you guys stop fighting?!” Aang asked, trying to calm the situation. “We can talk this out!”

to him. Eventually, Aang gave up on diplomacy and stood on the sidelines, watching helplessly

Nobody listened as the two sides fought. He was considering separating them by force when his friends got there.

 

“Hey guys,” Aang said in a melancholic greeting. “It’s the girl from my vision. And Zuko.”

 

“Why are they fighting?” Katara asked. Sokka stayed on the bison and watched in apathy.

 

“I’m not sure.” he sighed. “Nobody is listening to me. I think I’m gonna have to,” He made a series of kicks. Katara nodded in agreement. Aang crafted a gust of wind and forced the combatant’s apart.

 

“I am the Avatar.” He declared, though he felt a bit foolish, “What is going on here!?”

 

“Prince Zuko abducted and brainwashed the daughter of a nobleman. We are going to take him into custody and bring her to Ba Sing Se for treatment.” The leader of the soldiers said.

 

“I am not kidnapped or brainwashed!” Toph said. “I chose to go with Zuzu so we could find Twinkle Toes over here!”

 

“Zuzu?” Aang snickered.

 

“Twinkle Toes?” Katara raised her eyebrows.

 

“Zuko, what are you doing in the Earth Kingdom?” Aang asked.

 

“Uh, looking for you.” Zuko said awkwardly.

 

Katara narrowed her eyes and uncapped her waterskin. Aang put a hand on her shoulder, slowing her in her response. He looked at the scarred prince and said, “Why?”

 

“I, uh. Well, the thing is, I’m good now. I mean, I thought I was good before, but now I realize that I was wrong.” Zuko vomited the least eloquent explanation that had ever been heard, “What I'm trying to say is that I’m sorry for trying to capture you, and I want to join your group.”

 

“Uh… okay.” Aang said, “And what are you doing with Toph?”

 

“We met in Gaoling.” Zuko said, “Uncle and I thought that you were still looking for an earthbending teacher, and she’s the best earthbender I’ve ever seen, maybe in the whole world.”

 

“So you just asked a stranger to come teach me earthbending?” Aang raised an eyebrow, confused.

 

“Uh, well, I wouldn’t say stranger. I mean, we’re friends, right?” Zuko looked at Toph, who nodded,

 

“How did you know my name?” Toph asked, her tone almost accusatory.

 

“We’ve, uh, been looking for you.”

 

“You’ve been looking for me?” Toph cocked her head. “Why? Did my parents put you up to it?”

 

“N-no,” Aang said. This was getting a bit awkward. He glanced at the soldiers, who all looked incredibly bewildered. “I had a vision of you fighting underground about a week and a half ago. I was trying to ask my past lives for guidance while finding an earthbending teacher.”

 

“That’s when I had a sparring match with Zuko.” Toph pointed a thumb at the banished prince. Aang looked at Zuko.

 

“You’re the One-Eyed Dragon?!” He asked in surprise.

 

Zuko spluttered. “One-eyed-? I- I have both my eyes!” He shouted.”

 

Toph turned to him, surprised by his genuine anger. She wasn’t sure why he would be upset over the dragon comment, but she decided not to question it.

 

“This has gone on long enough,” Sokka said from his seat at Appa’s reigns. Aang looked over at him in surprise. “We’ve got a war to end, a spirit library to find, and two elements for you to master. Zuko, welcome to the team. Toph, I’m Sokka. That’s my sister Katara and her boyfriend, Aang.”

 

“He’s not my boyfriend!” Katara snapped.

 

“Yeah, it’s not so fun on that end is it?” Sokka said. “Earth Kingdom soldiers, we’ll take Prince Zuko with us.” He turned his attention to Toph, “Toph, I’m tired of flying all over looking for earthbenders. Are you coming or not?”

 

“Yeah, I guess.” Toph said, “Although I thought it’d be a little more dramatic when we caught up with you.”

 

Sokka shrugged. “If it helps, we have your toothbrush.”

 

---

 

Author’s Note:

 

If the last few chapters have had an inconsistent feel to them, I apologize. I’ve been experimenting with my writing style. Hoping to be more consistent with the tone and pacing going forward.

 

Charlamagne OR WHATEVER

02/04/2023

Chapter 39: Interludes Three

Long Feng. Ozai. Hakoda. Tahno. Song.

 

I

Long Feng

 

The Grand Secretariat to the Earth King looked out over the outer wall of Ba Sing Se. The sky was dark and cloudy. Rain would fall that night. He inhaled the scents of the city behind him, basking in his power. Since the death of the previous Earth King at his hands, he had used Kuei as a puppet. He had ruled through him for decades. It wasn’t always easy. The man was clever, very clever, and it was only through the Dai Li and strict control of the information flowing into the palace that the king hadn’t discovered his misdeeds.

 

Footsteps sounded the approach of two men. Long Feng turned to see one of his agents escorting a young messenger. The youth had a mustache, and a darker complexion prominent on the southwestern coast.

 

“I have a message for the Earth King, Sir!” The messenger saluted him. Long Feng nodded to Dai Li, who promptly removed the bag from the young soldier and tossed it to him. The messenger tried to protest, but was silenced by Long Feng's next words.

 

“I am the Grand Secretariat and chief advisor to He Who Carries Our Nation on His Back, The Beating Heart of the Earth, and Lord of the Impenetrable City, his majesty Earth King Keui. Nothing shall reach his ears except through me.” 

 

Long Feng opened the first letter from General Fong. He read it quickly. Apparently, the messenger, Haru, was friends with the Avatar, and the letter was little more than one of an introduction for the Avatar and his friends. He replaced the letter in the satchel and opened the second one, a missive requesting troops to retake Omashu. Long Feng rolled his eyes and replaced the second message. “I commend you for your swift delivery, Haru. I shall deliver these to the Earth King personally.”

 

“Thank you, Sir.” Haru bowed. “I’ve been instructed to deliver the response to General Fong personally, as soon as a decision has been made.”

 

“That won’t be necessary, Private. You’re being resigned.” Long Feng said, placing his hand in his sleeves behind his back.

 

“I- What?” Haru asked in shock.

 

“General Fong describes you as a talented Earth Bender. You will be joining the newest patrol of  wall guards.” Long Feng began to walk away from the messenger and the Dai Li agent. “Take him to the barracks, and inform him of the rules.”

 

Long Feng entered the building on the top of the wall, and another Dai Li agent dropped from the ceiling and knelt beside him. Long Feng raised an eyebrow. “A missive sent by Major Wen, by eagle-hound.”

 

Long Feng took the proffered scroll. He broke the seal and read the message.

 

Long Feng

 

Prince Zuko of the Fire Nation has joined the Avatar. I was unable to kill the boy before the Avatar and his companion s arrived to save him and Lady Toph Beifong.

 

He along with the Dragon of the West was in hiding at the Beifong estate until confronted by Princess Azula of the Fire Nation. A battle ensued, and there was a report of Prince Zuko firing a combustive blast from his scarred eye.

 

We pursued them north from Gaoling after discovering their trail. He and the Beifong girl had left the company of the Dragon of the West and were on foot. We intercepted them and commenced the battle, but the pair proved strong enough to hold us back until the Avatar and his companions arrived.

 

It seems that the Last Airbender was given a vision, in which the son of Ozai was portrayed as a one-eyed dragon. The Avatar referred to him as such, and they fled together before we could execute the Fire Prince.

 

Forgive me, my beloved. Even now I am marching towards Ba Sing Se, by order of the fool General Long. I hope we shall be together again once I rejoin the Dai Li.

 

-Wen

 

Long Feng rolled up the missive and stored it inside his sleeve. Admiral Zhao would need to hear about Prince Zuko’s union with the Avatar. He cared little for Wen, but she was a useful tool, all the same. Driven, power-hungry, and devoted to him alone.

---

 

II

Ozai

 

“Hail the Flame of Civilization, long descended from Agni himself, He Who Bears the Blood of the Dragon, and the Storm that Shakes the World, Fire Lord Ozai.”

 

The council meeting wasn’t meant to be a long one. Ozai had arranged a meeting of his governors and generals to promote Admiral Zhao to Field Marshal and allow him control of the eastern armies. He had other things to address as well.

 

“Rise,” Said the Fire Lord. “Admiral Zhao, step forward.”

 

Admiral Zhao stepped forward and approached the dais. He knelt before the Dragon Throne. Ozai stood and raised his hands.

 

“Do you swear to advance our march of civilization?”

 

“By my honor, Fire Lord,” Zhao said.

 

“Shall you seek to destroy our foes, and water the ground with the blood of our enemies?”

 

“With my own hands, Fire Lord.”

 

“Would you give your life to the crown?”

 

“My very heart, Fire Lord.”

 

“Then rise, cousin. I name you Field Marshal, and commander of my armies.”

 

Applause filled the throne room from the assembled nobles and officers of the Fire Nation. Ozai motioned for silence and bid Field Marshal Zhao to sit at his left hand.

 

“There are more matters to discuss,” Ozai said, “Interior Minister Xin Tao, you may give your address.”

 

Minister Xin Tao stepped forward and stood before the Fire Lord. He bowed, and Ozai allowed the curtain of fire to erupt between his throne and the court. Xin Tao turned and faced the crowd.

 

“Prince Zuko has turned against the Fire Nation and joined the Avatar.” Murmurs rippled through the crowd. “Field Marshal Zhao’s spies in the Earth Kingdom have informed us that he has proclaimed himself The One-eyed Dragon, and started a rebellion in the Homeland and colonies.”

 

His words were met with shocked silence. “The members of the movement are calling themselves the Subtle Rebellion, and propaganda has been spreading from the colonies to the homeland. The baseless rumors that stir civil unrest are being propagated by a woman known only as the Light-Bringer.”

 

More silence, and then hurried whispers. “Industrial output to the war effort has fallen in the past weeks, and desertion has increased exponentially in the same time frame.”

 

It was true that desertion had increased exponentially, but the numbers were few. Throughout the entirety of the war, only a few men had deserted and lived.

 

The minister bowed and retook his pace among the officials. Ozai stood and stepped through the flames. “My orders to the nobility are simple. Any attempt to aid this so-called ‘Subtle Rebellion’ will be met with immediate consequences. You are to ferret out any conspirators in your staff, and question them. The guilty will be sent to Caldera for further interrogation.”

 

Ozai turned away from the assembled officials. “Get out.”

---

 

III

 

Hakoda

 

“Bato!” Hakoda said as he saw his second in command. The taller man nodded in acknowledgment and walked over to him.

 

“Vanuk fell asleep on watch,” Hakoda said. Bato’s eyes grew wide, and then an expression of fury crossed his face.

 

“Keel hauling it is,” Bato said, turning to go and wake the young warrior.

 

“No,” Hakoda said, pinching his nose. “It’s his first offense, and he’s young. Besides, it wasn’t murder. Just throw him overboard and make him swim back to shore.”

 

“Yes, Chief.” Bato said, “You’re not going soft on me, are you?”

 

“No,” Hakoda ran his fingers through his hair, “You just don’t like him.”

 

“Well,” Bato said, “Can you blame me?”

 

Hakoda laughed. Bato had held a grudge against Vanuk since he found out he was dating his niece. “Just follow him in a skiff. Don’t let him drown.”

 

Bato dipped his head in acquiescence and stalked toward the starboard bow. Hakoda leaned over the gunnel and watched the moonlight dance across the water. A storm had blown through to the north of them a few previous days, and the rain had scoured the land of the dead remains of the winter's burden.

 

A squawk sounded above him, and a sparrow-seal landed beside him on the deck. Hakoda removed the message from the animal, and it promptly dove beneath the waves. He inspected the seal of the scroll, to ensure it hadn’t been intercepted. It was intact, and Hakoda began to unravel it when he heard screaming and a splash. Bato’s bellowing voice could be heard across the deck.

 

“YOU WILL STAND A PROPER WATCH!” His second shouted, followed by no small amount of profanity.  “If you do not, I will fill your bones with lead and cast you into the open ocean! Do you understand!?”

 

A sputtering sound emanated from the water line. Hakoda winced, knowing from experience that Bato’s throat would be sore by the time he got back to the ship.

 

“Swim!” Bato roared at the poor sentry, “The shore’s only a few miles away!”

 

More spluttering from Vanuk. Again Bato screamed at the man. “Oh you’re cold? Well, that makes it okay then! I’m sure the enemy would understand. ‘Don’t attack them! Their sentry’s cold!’ Shut up and swim, you blithering idiot!”

 

Hakoda rolled his eyes. He remembered his first time at sea with his father. He had fallen asleep on watch, and Chief Vurak had made him cling onto the anchor for seven hours. In the rain. It was the kind of mistake you only made once.

 

He went to his cabin, shutting the door and lighting the lantern. He had a message from Chief Arnook he hadn’t opened yet. He opened the message he had received a few moments ago and read. It was from one of his spies in the Fire Nation colonies. No name was given on the message, to protect the anonymity of his agents if the letters were intercepted.

 

“ Unrest in the Fire Nation. Prince Zuko has begun a rebellion, though no violence is thought to come of it.

 

Workers are slowing output, merchants are charging the navy more. News of the Prince’s banishment and reasons thereof are spread by an unknown woman referred to as the Light-Bringer.

 

Contacts in the Fire Navy and Army report that deserters are moving east, or being jailed for refusing to fight. Numbers are unknown, suspected to be less than two hundred.

 

A mark has been spreading through Yu Dao. A dragon with it’s left eye seared shut. First seen two days past, now commonplace.

 

Blue Orchid.

 

Hakoda blinked, and read the message again. Then a third time. He rolled the message up and placed it in a chest on his desk. Blue Orchid was a good man, around his own age. Smart, dependable, and creative. He hailed from a village far from Hakoda’s own. He would’ve liked the man on his ship, but he was more suited to the role of the spy. He was born after the raids had ended, by only a few months. The Orchid was well suited for one reason: he was a firebender.

 

More than a few Fire Nation soldiers had deserted during the raids, faking their deaths and running off to join the Water Tribes. Most of them hadn’t made it, but The Orchid’s father had. A local chief vouched for him. Took him in. Lee had lived in that village for the rest of his life, and had a few children. One of them being The Orchid.

 

Hakoda wrote a quick response, coded it as an order for wool, and sealed the scroll. He then took out the letter from his northern counterpart.

 

“The Long Mind of the Sea, Guardian of the Ocean and the Moon, his noble eminence Chief Arnook of the Northern Water Tribe-”

 

Hakoda shut his eyes tightly for a second. Why did the other nations insist on such pomp and pageantry? And the titles? You couldn’t be just a blacksmith, no, you had to be an esteemed member of the order of metal workers. The Fire Nation even gave their enemies monikers, pseudo titles of their own. What was the point in that? It was just a waste of time, and- Hakoda shook his head and returned his attention to the letter.

 

“ Sends greetings to Hakoda, the Southern Fox, Fleet Admiral and High Chief of the Southern Water Tribe.

 

Due to legal precedent, the treaty signed by Arnook and Hakoda is considered binding under Northern law. As such, Sokka, Bearer of the Moonlit Sword, hero of the battle of Agna Qel’a, beloved of the Moon Spirit, and First Son of the Southern Water Tribe has been named crown prince and heir of the Northern Water Tribe.

 

For this reason, his noble eminence Chief Arnook has sent a detachment of waterbenders to join the Southern Armada in the Earth Kingdom for the duration of the war, as well as a number of benders and craftsmen to the southern tribe to protect and rebuild.

 

It is the prerogative of Chief Arnook to maintain power until he is no longer fit to rule, and upon passing the throne to Prince Sokka, the aforementioned Prince shall be named emperor of the Water Tribes and Living Soul of the Sea, provided that he has taken the mantle of High Chief of the Southern Water Tribe.”

 

Hakods’s mouth fell open. He shook his head, drank some water, and read the scroll again. He closed his eyes. What on earth had happened in the North Pole? He picked up the tube the scroll had been sealed in, and felt something rattle inside. He upended the tube and a smaller, rolled piece of parchment fell out. Hakoda unrolled it quickly.

 

“ Hakoda,

 

The other scroll is pompous and long-winded. I decided that a more personal note would be more appropriate, but the council wanted to send a more 'official’ message as well.

 

The gist of it is that since our agreement was carried out in good faith by both parties, the death of Princess Yue does not negate the treaty, and Sokka will take on the responsibilities of both parties.

 

We can negotiate further if you choose so, but I personally believe this arrangement is beneficial to both of our peoples. Termination of the treaty would be detrimental to all.

 

-Arnook

 

That was more appropriate. Hakoda despised the ridiculous pageantry of the sister tribe. He tapped his foot. He licked his teeth as he thought about the matter. Should they negotiate? Emperor of the Water Tribes? Living Soul of the Sea? It was quite frankly the most ridiculous… well it did sound pretty cool when he said it aloud.

 

He would have to talk with Sokka about this, too.

---

IV

 

Tahno

 

Ensign Tahno, formerly master chief petty officer Tahno, stalked into the bridge of the FNS Tsuyo-sa. A smaller ship, when compared to the empire class, but still a proud warship. It was larger than the Wani by far, and was manned by a crew of nearly a hundred. All of the ship's officers were on shore at the Lu Ten Naval Station, near the Southern Ocean. The majority of personnel and ships from the failed siege had been sent there for reassignment. Tahno thought it was odd, as much of that fleet had been dispersed less than a month ago.

 

Odd, but fortunate. Many of the would-be deserters had been assembled here, and they were moving that night. While the high officers and loyalists were in the stronghold, three ships would be stolen, fully manned, and sailed to the east. Lieutenant Tema, formerly ensign Tema, was in charge of the second ship, the Hokori. Captain Chet Lu, a staunch detractor of the war since losing her brother in the siege, was taking the Arashi.

 

Any moment now, Captain Jee would give the signal, and all three ships would head out to sea. Fully manned, stocked, and armed, the ships would be the first to ever desert the Fire Navy during the Hundred Years war. Jee would stay behind, as well as most of the rebellion. Theirs was another mission...

 

Tahno watched carefully for the signal, and suddenly there it was. A burst of fire, quick and bright as a shooting star. Tahno extinguished the light on the bridge, and the rebel crew did the same across the rest of the ship. They moved out to sea, waiting until they were out of sight of the port to relight the ship.

 

They stalled the engines. They waited, and in the darkness a ship’s light began to shine, followed by a second. Tahno grinned and pressed forwards, sailing east towards the dawn.

 

As the sun rose the next morning, the former Fire Navy ships sailed in southern waters. New flags were raised on each vessel. A golden dragon, snarling on a red field, its left eye seared shut.

 

Tahno smiled to himself, knowing that Prince Zuko had no idea what was happening. He’d be furious when he found out about his nickname.

---

 

V

Song

 

Fire Fountain city was aptly named, in Song’s opinion. That said, she didn’t care for the statue of Zuko’s father.

 

She had spent some time in the Fire Nation colonies, and found her way onto a ship to the homeland. She worked as a traveling nurse, stopping by factory towns and villages across the islands. She was going to a factory that morning, actually.

 

The front door opened, and she was let into a reception area. “Just one moment,” The disheveled man who had let her in said, “The plant manager will be down in a few minutes.”

 

“Oh, it’s no problem!” Song said hurriedly, “May I sit?”

 

“Yes, of course, miss?” The man didn’t know her name, but Song had one prepared. She didn’t want to give her real name, in case it somehow put her mother in danger.

 

“I’m Nurse Guang Yi.” Song said. 

 

“I’m Duyi.” The man said with a bow, before leaving her alone. Song sat in one of the short, wooden chairs and looked around the room, her bag of medical supplies on her lap. A large painting was placed on one wall, depicting a lone man struggling under a heavy burden; a great stone hoisted on his back. The man's face was a mask of determination and pain, and sweat covered his brow. To one side of the painting was an inscription:

 

Suffering builds character. - Fire Lord Ozai.

 

Song was astounded by the picture. Suffering builds character? Sure, adversity could help you grow as a person, but suffering? What kind of ruler would purposefully spread that message? The kind that burned his own son for speaking out of turn. A cruel one. Maybe even a mad one.

 

“Guang Yi?”

 

“Yes, that’s me,” Song stood to meet the manager.

 

“Are you looking for work? We have a few positions available,” The Man said. “I’m Mr. Fu, by the way.”

 

“Um, sort of, Mr. Fu.” Song said, “I’m actually a nurse. I know that injuries are common in factories, and I’ve been stopping in and giving medical care to workers as I travel.”

 

“That’s wonderful,” Mr. Fu said, “We don’t have enough medical workers right now. Most of them are busy on the front.”

 

“I know, it’s terrible!” Song said.

 

Mr. Fu nodded. “Yes, but we’ve been lucky here lately, no one is injured at the moment.”

 

“Well, I’m glad. Even if that means I'll have to go elsewhere, it’s always nice to hear that everyone is healthy.”

 

“Yes,” Mr. Fu said. “But I know of someplace that might need your services. There’s a firebending tournament today. In the town square beside the fountain. They’re sure to need some first aid at the very least.”

 

Song bowed to Mr. Fu. “Thank you for your time, Mr. Fu. I’ll be sure to ask if they need help.”

 

She left the factory, both disappointed and relieved. Nobody was hurt, which was good. Unfortunately, that meant that she wouldn’t be able to tell them the truth about Zuko. She had been visiting factories and inns across the Fire Nation to spread the word about Zuko, the Forty First, and how Zuko had gotten his scar, telling his people that even now he was trying to end the war and bring peace once again. She was met with some resistance, but most towns had lost at least one man in that division. Everyone had lost a parent, a child, a lover, or a friend to the war.

 

She walked towards the square when she paused at a billboard. A familiar face was looking back at her from a wanted poster. She read the poster and said aloud, “The One-Eyed Dragon? But Zuko has both his eyes.”

 

Another poster caught her eye, although there was no image. It merely described a young woman, spreading rebellious propaganda, known only as the Light-Bringer. Light-Bringer. Was that her? Her cover name could mean something similar, Guang Yi could be read as Light Gift, or to give light, but she hadn’t picked it for that. She had just liked the name, taking it from two different women she had met in her home village as a girl.

 

“What was that?” A man said beside her. Song jumped. Had she said something out loud? Did she give herself away?

 

“W-” She cleared her throat with a cough, “What was what?”

 

“I’m sorry,” The man said, “I thought you said something about the prince.”

 

“Oh.” Song said in relief, “Yeah, I did. The wanted poster calls him the One-Eyed Dragon, but he has both his eyes.”

 

“Have you met him?” The man said curiously. He was a handsome man, with light brown eyes and dark hair. Song thought he was around her age, perhaps a year or two older.

 

“Yes, a couple of times actually, in the colonies.”

 

“Is it true what they say about him?” 

 

“What do they say?” Song asked.

 

“He’s leading a rebellion. That he joined the Avatar.”

 

“Yeah, it is,” Song said, “He’s a kind man. A bit short tempered though.”

 

Song turned to go, although she wished she could have continued talking to the stranger. She started walking to the square. Where a competition ring was being set up, but stopped again when she realized the stranger was walking beside her. When she stopped again, the stranger kept walking. Song started again, and asked, “Are you competing in the tournament?”

 

“I am,” The man answered, “I normally wouldn’t condone showing off, but it’s a good chance to hone my skills.”

 

“I see,” Song said. “I’m G- glad you’re so humble.” Song had almost given her fake name, but stopped at the last second. She would have to change it, lest it gives her away.

 

The man smiled a little, and Song couldn’t help but do so in return. She liked his smile.

 

“I’m Song.” She said without thinking.

 

“My name’s Rui Shi.”

 

---

 

Author’s Note:

 

Hello all. I wanted to give everyone a look into what is going on with the other players in the world. This Interlude takes place over the course of two weeks, with Long Feng’s POV The evening after chapter thirty eight

 

Zuko’s (Really Jee, Tahno, and Tema’s) rebellion is moving fast. Song decided to do what she could to help, by spreading word to the people of the Fire Nation, and helping in little ways. It’s super effective.

 

I gave Zuko the nickname “The One-Eyed Dragon” for two reasons. First, I think it’s pretty cool. Second, he’s touchy about his scar and this will infuriate him.

 

Even though she’s not given a POV in this interlude, I’ve expanded on Tema’s background. I don’t know why I’m telling you this now, because it won’t be revealed until interlude four at least. (There will be several.) An important part of it was revealed in Interludes Two if you’re interested, concerning her grandfather.

 

Rui Shi is a character from another fic, Sayary Minmato’s Gladiator. It’s one of my favorite works, of either original fiction or fanfiction. I was given permission to use him in this story. I’m glad, because I like him and Song together. So, a big thank you to her.

 

I actually finished this before posting chapter thirty eight, but I’m not going to put it up until a couple of days after.

2/7/2023

Chapter 40: Tales of Iroh the soldier

Mai, Ty Lee, and Azula were lounging atop one of the tanks requisitioned for the pursuit of Zuko and Iroh. They had been tracking the pair – and their little earthbender – for two days, and were drawing nearer. The tracks left by the ostrich-horse were more recent than they had been. Azula felt confident that she would soon catch up with her brother and treacherous uncle.

 

She wondered what other tricks the old snake had up his sleeve. She didn’t know much about Iroh’s past in the army, other than his spectacular failure and the death of her cousin at Ba Sing Se. Azula didn’t remember much of Lu Ten. He was more than a decade older than her and had been in the army for years before his death. Her few memories of him were pleasant, as he would take the time to play with her and Zuko, and help practice firebending. His time in the palace had been limited once he was old enough to fight with his father in the war, so it was only natural that she didn’t carry many memories of him. She discarded her thoughts. Lu Ten wasn’t there anymore, and her prey was Iroh. She needed more information on him to predict his actions.

 

“Colonel Mongke,” Azula said in a clipped tone. “You served under my uncle for many years, correct?”

 

The colonel glanced at her from his mount that kept pace with the tank. “Yes, Princess. I assure you, I harbor no sentiment towards him. I am loyal to you and the Fire Lord.” 

 

“I am confident in your loyalty, Colonel. I do not seek assurances. No, what I require is information.”

 

“Information?”

 

“Yes. The old snake is cunning and devious. You will provide me with whatever information you have regarding his tactics and deeds while serving in the army.”

 

“Uh, yes. Of course, Princess.” Mongke looked ahead for a moment. “General Iroh, the Dragon of the West, was the pride of the Fire Nation. Our top general, and the most ruthless weapon in Fire Lord Azulon’s arsenal. In his youth, he was widely regarded as the greatest firebender of his generation, until the death of the late Prince Lu Ten.”

 

Azula waved the man to continue. “After that, he wasn’t the same man that I served under for over two decades. Or perhaps he was, and only then showed his true colors.” Mongke’s eyes grew distant. “It’s impossible to say.”

 

“He was a forgiving leader,” Mongke continued, “He would approve leave requests more often than not, and was highly invested in the morale of his armies.” A sudden light danced in his eyes: “There was one time, in my first years in his service, when he put on a one-man show. A full cast of characters. A comedy. It wasn’t very good, but the men needed it. We all did, it made us feel like he was human.”

 

Azula scoffed, “And what else could he be?”

 

Mongke’s eyes grew distant as he looked into the darkest corners of his memory. “A demon. A monster.”

 

That caught Azula’s attention fully. Her fuddy-duddy uncle? The tea-loving Pai Sho addict? A demon. A monster. A liar and traitor, yes, but no monster. She would believe that only when she saw it.

 

“Explain,” She commanded. 

 

“I suppose I should start when I first met him, twenty five years ago,” Mongke said.

---

Private Mongke was usually glad of his assignment. He had been stationed in a small, rural town in the eastern colonies, far from the front. He was serving under the command of Lieutenant Peizhi, along with nineteen other soldiers. It was usually a relaxed post, or rather as relaxed as the army could be. Unfortunately, all sense of security and calm had fled, chased away by the Earth Kingdom, only to be drowned by the Southern Water Tribe.

 

The Earth Kingdom had joined forces with a fleet of Water Tribe ships, helmed by High Chief Vurak. The Earth Kingdom, commanded by an unknown general, had broken through the Fire Nation expeditionary force and was heading west to retake lands long held by the Fire Lord. Unfortunately for Mongke, and everyone in Hemu, that just so happened to include them.

 

A scout had run for two days and three nights, arriving at dawn on the third day. His unit had been utterly destroyed, and he had been the only one left to bring warning of the devastation. The Water Tribe had seized control of the river and laid it with traps that would sink any ship bringing aid. The Earth Kingdom’s archers were intercepting messenger hawks, and the army was only days behind him at best.

 

“Teng Da,” Lieutenant Penzhi ordered,  “Send word to the General. The Fire Nation must be warned so that they can prepare for an attack, and send a force to meet the threat.”

 

“Yes, Sir!” Teng Da snapped to attention. He touched a fist to his palm and bowed, before leaving for the rookery.

 

“Do you think they’ll make it in time?” Mongke asked, before realizing he had questioned a superior officer. “Sir!” He added hastily.

 

Penzhi raised an eyebrow. “The message should make its way to the command center in just a few short hours. The General will be able to mount a defense and call for reinforcements long before the Earth Kingdom reaches them.”

 

“W-what about us, Lieutenant?” Mongke said. Penzhi raised an eyebrow at him.

 

“How old are you, Private Mongke?”

 

“Seventeen, Sir,” Mongke answered, unsure of what his superior was getting at. To his surprise, Penzhi just looked at him with sorrow on his brow.

 

“I… We will do our duty, and die with honor if we must. The townspeople need our protection. They’re Fire Nation, one and all. The Earth Kingdom and Water Tribe will leave no survivors.”

 

Mongke paled. Just a few men against an entire army? And the Water Tribe? It wasn’t possible, they couldn’t possibly win. They had to retreat, to join together with a larger force! He wasn’t ready, he was too young! He still had so much to-

 

“You’re on midnight watch tonight, Private.” Penzhi said, “I order you to get some rest beforehand. Spend the rest of the day in the barracks, or in the mess.”

 

“Y- yes, Sir,” Mongke said, turning to follow instructions. 

 

How he would be able to rest was a mystery to him. And why was he being sent to the barracks already? It was dawn. Did the Lieutenant think he was a flight risk? If so, why give him a midnight watch? It was Penzhi's own watch, that he took every night. Why would… unless he wanted Mongke to run. It was possible, Mongke was the youngest soldier by at least five years. He was one of the fastest, beaten by only one other. A nonbender. Mongke would have the greatest chance to escape, but that would mean abandoning his post and deserting. He would have to leave his friends to die.

 

Mongke rolled his eyes. There was no way that was going to happen. Did the lieutenant think him a coward? No, Mongke would fight and die – probably painfully – with his comrades.

 

Mongke walked into the barracks, and upon seeing the other soldiers in the room he broke the news. He was met with cries of dismay, disbelief, and even panic. One man sprinted out to ask his girlfriend to marry him and find a sage to perform the ceremony. Another calmly wrote a letter to his father and carried it out to the rookery. Mongke sat on his bunk and took off his shoes. He rested his face in his hands and closed his eyes. He laid down, still in armor save his boots, and spent what was likely one of his last days on earth staring into nothing.

 

Hours later Mongke marched to the watch post. He had managed to get some rest, though probably less than he wanted. He arrived at the pitiful tower, dilapidated and insufficient now more than ever, and relieved the previous sentry. He stood at attention and gazed out into the night, towards the east, along the river bank. For hours it was silent. Nothing could be heard, and Mongke stood alone beneath a blanket of silver stars.

 

He heard the sound of scampering footsteps, an animal running in the distance. He heard the clink of metal on metal, the rubbing of leather on steel. He looked around wildly, and thinking that the enemy was upon them already he started to sound the alarm. He realized at the last moment that the noise was coming from the wrong direction. From the west. Mongke whipped around to search for the noise, hoping beyond reason that it would be their salvation. He stared into the shadows, and a lonely cloud blocked the moonlight. Mongke stared, and when the cloud passed a lone man was sitting atop a giant eel-hound, his features concealed by a red hood.

 

“Halt!” He cried out to the hooded figure, “Who goes there? Identify yourself!”

 

The man lowered his hood to reveal a strong jaw and raven black hair. He gazed at Mongke, and after a moment he said, “I am Iroh, son of Ilah and Fire Lord Azulon!”

---

 

“I thought you said they were too far, and the army wasn’t going to make it on time?” Ty Lee interrupted.

 

“I did,” Colonel Mongke said. 

 

“Then how could Iroh show up?”

 

“General Iroh came alone, as one man can travel faster than an army.”

 

“Oh,” Ty Lee said with a blush. Azula rolled her eyes at her friend's pointless interruption. Obviously, Iroh would have shown up, otherwise, he wouldn’t have prefaced the story by saying it was when he and the fool had first met.

 

“You may continue, Colonel.”

---

 

The next morning, Private Mongke stood at attention with all of the other soldiers in the mess. The mess was really the local tavern, but the army paid for them to be fed there. General Iroh sat at the table before them, eating breakfast and drinking jasmine tea. Lieutenant Penzhi stood beside him, awkwardly holding a teapot. General Iroh noticed this, and said, “Lieutenant, I don’t think you need to hold that the entire meal. I am capable of pouring my own tea, thank you.”

 

Penzhi blushed. “Of course, General.”

 

“Do you know when the enemy is expected to arrive?”

 

“As early as tomorrow, Sir,” Penzhi said.

 

Iroh nodded as if he had expected that. “Not enough time for our reinforcements.”

 

“What?! You mean it’s just you?” Mongke said in shock, forgetting himself. Penzhi sent him a look that made his hair curl, but General Iroh just laughed. “Just me, I’m afraid.”

 

Another soldier spoke next, in a calm and sure manner. “General, we are honored by your presence, but should you not return to the command center? It is deeply touching that the son of the Fire Lord would come to aid us in our time of need, but you are far more important than we are. You should not put yourself at risk.”

 

“No, perhaps not,” Iroh said, “But I am here all the same. I require no army to win this battle.”

 

“Well, I certainly do,” Mongke said. Iroh laughed again. He pointed to Mongke and the other soldier who had spoken out. “You two. I shall require your assistance during this battle. Stay beside me at all times.”

 

“Lieutenant Penzhi,” Iroh said in a tone of command, “Send out a scout. He should be no more than a mile to the east from here. Give him a spyglass and a hawk. He shall wait there until the first sign of the enemy, at which point he will send a report by the hawk. After that, he must run as fast as he can to cover, and make his way back without being seen. This is crucial, he must not be seen.”

 

Penzhi nodded and pulled forth a lean soldier with brown hair. “Hirohito, this will be your mission. Go out of uniform, in brown and green. Keep to the trees.”

 

Hirohito bowed low and sprinted from the mess to prepare. Iroh looked on with approval. “The rest of you, carry out your duties as normal. We must make it look as though we are unconcerned.”

 

He was met with confused looks. “Do you question my orders?! Do it now!” He barked, and then men sprang to action, save for the lieutenant.

 

“Lieutenant,” Iroh said, his voice grave. “I require a folding table, a Pai Sho set, and three chairs.”

---

 

“What?” Ty Lee said, “Why did he want that?”

 

“Maybe if you could wait ten minutes without interrupting you’d find out,” Mai said. She had been trying to act uninterested, but her words gave her away.

 

“Sorry,” Ty Lee said, “I can’t help it.”

 

“It is no trouble, Lady Ty Lee,” Mongke said before continuing his story.

---

 

He could not believe that this was their General’s plan. It was crazy, there was no way it could work. It was bound to end in failure, and Mongke would die. He would die horribly, killed by wild beasts. Or worse yet, earthbenders.

 

“General Iroh,” The other soldier asked. He was a nonbender. A swordsman, “Are you certain that this is the best course of action?”

 

“Even if I were not,” Iroh said, “There is no time to change. They’re close enough now. Let us begin.”

 

Mongke closed his eyes. He was going to die. This was not how he had expected to go, to be honest. Not many soldiers spent their deaths drinking tea and playing Pai Sho in the sun while a general serenades them with his liuqin.

 

Mongke placed the first tile, extremely aware of his orders to not look worried. Iroh began to play his instrument and sing as the negotiating procession walked into earshot.

 

“To the Great Caldera came an earthen man one day! ” The general sang. Mongke focused on his breathing. He took a sip of tea. “Where the sun was always shining and the sky was never gray!”

 

“The people sang of fire, of their nation fair! ‘Till Rocky got excited and he shouted to them there!” The General drew out the last word of the verse and sped up his tempo. Mongke looked lazily to his left.

 

Oh Agni, he could see their faces. It was High Chief Vurak and the First Son, Hakoda. They were doomed. The Orca himself was upon them, and Iroh just kept singing. Why couldn’t the man at least carry a tune?

 

Oh , it’s a long way to Ba Sing Se! It’s a long way, I know! It’s a long way to Ba Sing Se! To the sweetest girl I know” Iroh kept singing, acting as though he was completely unconcerned about the conquering army at his feet. Oddly, Mongke was both shocked and relieved by this. Vurak and Hakoda looked almost worried. The older warrior searched the sky in the west and peered into the treeline. Iroh sang without interruption. The Earth Kingdom general’s eyebrows were furrowed in confusion.

 

“Farewell, land of fire! Goodbye, nation fair! It’s a long, long way to Ba Sing Se, but my heart’s right there!”

 

The General stopped singing and plucked his liuqin. Mongke continued his game of Pai Sho, carefully moving a piece, as he had been ordered to play his best. Iroh finally spoke.

 

“Why, Chief Vurak! General Pao! We meet again,” Iroh said. General Pao looked around nervously, as if expecting a full battalion of firebenders to leap from the sky.

 

“General Iroh,” Vurak said. “We’ve come to discuss your surrender.”

 

Iroh laughed, playing his instrument all the while. “Why would I do that? And would you gentlemen care for some tea? How about you, young man?” Iroh addressed Hakoda personally.

 

“Another time, perhaps,” Hakoda said coolly. He glanced up at his father. Mongke guessed the youth was even younger than him. What was he, sixteen?

 

“You would surrender,” Vurak said evenly, “because you are outnumbered and cannot hope to win.”

 

“Is that so?” Iroh asked, and he let smoke begin to trail from his fingers as he played. “Are you certain?”

 

As he spoke, Iroh gave a knowing smile. Pao and Vurak looked at each other and walked away, their contingents of warriors and soldiers behind them. A lanky Water Tribe youth sidled up to Hakoda to speak with him, but Hakoda only shrugged.

 

After a few minutes of speaking, the two processions walked away. The water Tribe boarded their ships and sailed east, and the Earth Kingdom marched back towards Ba Sing Se. Iroh watched them go, and Mongke continued his game. After their enemies had faded into the distance, Iroh let out a great sigh.

 

“I’m going to be honest with you,” He said to the soldiers beside him. “I cannot believe that worked.”

 

“Y-you mean that was the plan all along?! I thought you had a secret army or something!” Mongke said.

 

Iroh shook his head. “No. I was just bluffing.”

 

Mongke just stared at the General, but the other soldier lost his composure for the first time since Mongke had met him. He laughed, and then Iroh joined him. Mongke couldn’t help it, so great was his relief at not being killed, and so he joined in with them.

 

Iroh wiped a tear from his eyes. “What are your names? In all the trouble, I forgot to ask.”

 

Mongke introduced himself. “I’m Mongke.”

 

The other soldiers stood and bowed to the General, holding his hand above his fist. “I am called Piandao.”

---

 

“Iroh took a liking to the pair of us after that. Piandao and I were asked to join him, and serve in his guard. I wasn’t much of a firebender back then, but Iroh saw to it that I was trained properly.”

 

Ty Lee spoke again. “Colonel Mongke, you don’t mean that he scared them off just by playing music and Pai Sho?”

 

“No. It wasn't the music itself, but what it meant. The dragon would take the field, and death would follow him,” Mongke said, and after a pause, he said, “I think the Pai Sho game was just to put them on edge, somehow. I still don’t understand it.”

 

“What do you mean, about the dragon taking the field?” Mai asked.

 

“Have any of you heard the expression ash and shattered bones ?”

 

“Of course, we have,” Azula said, “Everyone has.”

 

“Yes, I thought you’d know it,” Mognke sighed. “Do any of you know where it came from?”

 

Mai and Ty Lee denied knowing it, but Azula remained silent. She wasn’t sure where the expression had come from, but she didn’t really care.

 

Mongke stared straight ahead. “It was coined to describe the devastation left when General Iroh and his son took the field. Iroh and Lu Ten would play music before each battle they fought in personally, on the no-man’s land. Always the same song. Eventually, the enemy learned that when the Dragon played, it brought death. The pair of them were strong enough that any caught by their fury would be reduced to ashes, and their bones would shatter from the heat.”

 

“I’ve always wondered about the mechanics behind that. Did the marrow boil? Or did they just break? I don’t know. It doesn’t really matter now.”

 

“Why doesn’t it matter?” Mai asked. 

 

Mongke looked at her. “General Iroh isn’t the same man he was. The siege broke him, and his bending wasn’t the same afterwards. I think the loss of his son weakened it, weakened him. Or perhaps he had always been that man, and wasn’t able to hide it anymore.”

 

“What do you mean?” Ty Lee asked. 

 

Mongke stared ahead, before saying: “Fifteen years ago, General Iroh spoke to me. I thought it was nothing, but now I wonder if he was showing his true colors.”

 

 

---

The battle had been fierce. Mongke and Piandao had been serving directly under General Iroh for a decade, and even then they were impressed by his ferocity. He had desolated the battlefield, defeating dozens of earthbenders

 

The Dragon of the West had taken to the battle himself. His son had asked to accompany him, but Lu Ten was not yet old enough in his father’s eyes. He had been forced to stay at the command tent and watch from a distance, as his father and his cadre of elite warriors entered the fray. His father had allowed him to play music in the no-man's land, and when the young prince had asked why they would play, Iroh told him it was to calm the heart and soothe the mind over what followed after.

 

Mongke and Piandao had stayed by the General’s side through the battle, along with a few others. The swordsman cut through the enemy like he was death itself, leaving none but the surrendered in his wake. Mongke fared much the same, though his skill with firebending did not match the swordsman’s prowess. Both of them were like drops of water beside an ocean, when compared to Iroh’s power. The battle had been hard fought, but in the end the Fire Nation was able to take the plateau. After weeks of fighting, Iroh had made the difference. It was finally over.

 

“See that the prisoners are well treated,” General Iroh ordered a staff officer. The man bowed and began to take count of the prisoners, of which there were many. Iroh waved Mongke and Piandao to follow him as he approached his pavilion. The three men entered and began to wash the grime of battle from themselves, scouring clean the stains of ash and blood.

 

Mongke looked at Iroh and thought the man looked old beyond his years. Though his hair was dark, his face had become lined that day, as if he had aged ten years in the span of hours. He looked at Piandao and thought that his friend looked much the same as the General. They both carried a hollow look in their eyes. Once clean, both of them sagged into ornate velvet cushions trimmed in gold.

 

“Tea,” Iroh said, and Mongke began to brew. He did not bear the weariness that had overcome the others. He often felt frenzied after a battle, as if his spirit thirsted for more. He steeped the leaves in the pot and began to stir as the General had taught him years before. He poured the drink for the General and Piandao. He served the others before placing the pot on the low table between the two.

 

“Sit, Mongke. Please,” Iroh said.

 

“As you command, General,” Mongke said. Iroh glared at him.

 

“Where is the boy I met all those years ago?” He asked. “I did not take you into my service for your rigid protocol, Lieutenant Mongke. We have been friends for many years, must you call me general even now? We have fought side by side for too long. My name is Iroh.

 

“I… Of course, Iroh,” Mongke said, “As you wish.”

 

“Bah!” Iroh scoffed. “You met my brother for less than an hour, and now you’re as stiff as any soldier I have ever met.”

 

“Prince Ozai has that effect on many, Iroh,” Piandao said as he lay exhausted on his cushion.

 

“Too true,” Iroh said, and his voice carried the barest hint of worry. “Ozai is a great man,” Iroh continued softly, as if thinking only to himself, “But is he a good one?”

 

Mongke sank into a velvet cushion that was nearly as large as he was. He poured himself some tea after being prompted by Iroh. He had met Ozai for only half an hour when the Prince was visiting the army and his older brother. It had been… memorable.

 

“Do you ever wonder why we’re fighting?” Iroh asked softly. His voice was drained, and his brow was heavy. “I trust the two of you with my life, and I keep no secrets from you. After days like these, I can’t help but wonder. Must so many die, just to share the greatness of our nation? Is there not another way?”

 

Mongke was speechless. The great General Iroh, Crown Prince, and top general was- no, he must have misunderstood. It was a test, surely. To ensure his most trusted companions would not betray him. It had to be, there was no way that-

 

“I must confess that I too hold doubts,” Piandao said. Piandao. Captain of the elite guard of Prince Iroh. Mongke’s heart stopped in his chest. How could his friend be so foolish?

 

“The bloodshed weighs heavily on me after these long years. I fear that no matter how long I scrub, the stains on my heart may never be washed clean,” Piandao said, lighting his own pyre.

 

“Surely you don’t mean that,” Mongke said, “Our march of civilization must continue! It is the Fire Lord’s command.”

 

“Of course, of course,” Iroh said, rubbing his tired eyes. “Forgive us our lapses, Mongke. It has been a long battle, and we do not share your youthful vigor.”

 

---

They continued in silence for a time, until Mongke continued his monologue. “Fifteen years ago, before even Lu Ten was old enough to join his father in battle, Iroh confessed that to me. Perhaps it was just exhaustion, or maybe he’d tried some cactus juice from the Si Wong,” Colonel Mongke said, “But looking back, I think that was when he first showed us his true colors.”

 

“And what did Fire Lord Azulon say of it?” Azula inquired. Mongke shifted in his saddle uncomfortably. “Such treasonous rhetoric from his firstborn surely did not sit well.”

 

Azula noticed Ty Lee fidget beside her. Was she merely uncomfortable? Azula would be the first to admit that riding through the rural Earth Kingdom atop a tank was not a luxurious way to travel, but it was better than inside the vehicle. Maybe she was bored by the story, but Azula doubted it. The chi-blocker had been uncomfortable since Mongke had first mentioned Iroh’s doubts about the war. Azula’s brow furrowed, and she began to wonder.

 

“I doubt he ever heard of it,” Mongke said.

 

Azula focused her attention on him once more. “You said nothing? You told no one?” 

 

“Who was there to tell?” Mongke asked. “It would have been my word against his. A lowly lieutenant against the Crown Prince. No, I said nothing. I believed that Iroh would one day sit atop the Dragon Throne. I convinced myself that it was merely a lapse in judgment, or a trick to see if we were truly loyal. I assumed that was the case, for Piandao retired soon after.”

 

“I see.” Azula said. “Continue, Colonel.”

 

Mongke was silent for a moment before speaking. “There were other battles, but they don’t stand out as much as the first one. It’s the most similar to our present situation. A larger force pursuing a greatly outnumbered foe. The only problem is that the foe is Iroh. And Prince Zuko, of course, but he’s the least of my concerns. If Iroh should forsake his oath..”

 

“What oath?” Mai asked, curiosity evidently getting the better of her.

 

“It’s the one he took at the end of his siege. I’ll get to that, but I should start at the beginning of the six hundred days,” Mongke scratched at his jawline. “As you know, a little over seven years ago, General Iroh and his armies set out for the great city of Ba Sing Se.”

“The start of the siege was largely without incident. The first months were actually rather boring if I’m being honest with you. The Earth Kingdom had been less capable since King Junjie died and Kuei took power. The rumors said he was just a child, and that explained the faltering communication of the Earth Army. There were some minor skirmishes of course, but there was no answering force like in past attempts to take the city. We marched to the western gate largely unopposed.”

 

“General Iroh was glad. He had hated the deaths, he had always hated them. But if he had to kill to save his soldiers, then he would. His son had joined Iroh's company a few years before, and he once told me that he hated it too. He said his father had never wanted to be a soldier, but he didn’t realize Iroh was standing behind him at the time. The poor kid was so red, embarrassed at being caught by his old man. Iroh just laughed, and said, ‘It’s true. I never wanted to be a soldier. When I was a small boy, I wanted to open a tea shop!’”

 

A smile crossed Mongke’s face. It was quickly chased by sorrow and anger. “Lu Ten was a good man. He deserved better than he got.”

 

Shaking his head as though to clear it, he said, “Eventually, the Earth Kingdom sent out forces to try and dislodge us. It didn't work, but the nearly constant loss of life weighed heavily on the General. He grew fat and stopped training. He planned the attacks and commanded troop movement from his command pavilion with signals, but through the siege, he took to the battle only once. On the six hundredth day, after Prince Lu Ten was…” Mongke trailed off.

 

“Were you close?” Ty Lee asked. “I met Lu Ten a couple of times when I was very young, but I remember him being nice.”

 

“I…” Mongke said, “Yes. We were friends. We saved each other's lives more than once, dozens of times probably.”

 

“I’m sorry for your loss,” Azula said with a roll of her eyes, “But do get on with it.”

 

The Colonel nodded sharply and continued. “It was a dark day for everyone. We had broken through the outer wall only a month before, and then, at the loss of one man, it was over. We had lost thousands, but when Iroh lost his son he finally broke. I don’t know if that was the only thing that did it, or if it was the last straw, but that was the end. When he received the news, Crown Prince Iroh, the Dragon of the West, a descendant of Agni himself, wept before the army. In front of the very walls of Ba Sing Se.”

 

“That night he donned his armor, had his liuqin brought to him, and played it for the final time,” Mongke spoke, wrapped in a crystal clear memory. “He brought a detachment of elite soldiers with him into the battle. The other Rhinos and I, Yu Yan archers, spearmen, swordsmen, firebenders. We went in and fought our way to find his son and his killer.”

 

“Iroh brought the man before our forces and executed him on the spot. There was nothing left of the man, just ash and shattered bones,” Mongke exhaled heavily. 

 

“General Iroh called off the siege and ordered the men to return home. I argued with him, saying it was a dishonor to all who had been killed, that we were so close. It was his destiny to conquer Ba Sing Se!” Mongke’s voice grew heated. “Why couldn’t he see that?! All of those men died for nothing! Six hundred days of fighting and for what? For us to turn tail and run? Bah!”

 

“We argued for hours, and Iroh dismissed me from his service. Before I left, he swore an oath that he would never take another life, even to save his own. He said that he was through with his days of war. That after he had lost his son, there was nothing left in this world so precious to him that he would kill to protect.”

 

Mongke’s dragged a hand down his face. “We did not meet again for many years. When we did, he asked me to join him for a cup of tea, as if nothing had ever happened. I said I would if he demonstrated to our recruits his skills as a firebender. He agreed. He was still a powerful warrior, that cannot be denied, but he was but a shadow of his former self. He had lost the drive, the will to fight. He had left it with his honor beside the walls of Ba Sing Se.”

 

“A riveting tale,” Azula said, “But much too lengthy. I asked for information, not your life’s story.”

 

Mongke didn’t respond, he just bowed his head. Azula rolled her eyes. “Tell me, Colonel, when my cousin and uncle did their little song and dance routine, would they go into battle alone?”

 

“No, Princess. They merely joined the front lines and led the troops personally.”

 

“Then why,” Azula said lazily, “Would you tell your story as if they had? As if the pair of them were an unstoppable force dealing out death and destruction to hundreds at a time? Surely you cannot contribute to them alone the victories of our army?”

 

“No, not to them alone. But had they not been there, we would have lost. It is no exaggeration to say they were vital to our success. Iroh and his son could face dozens of Earth Kingdom troops by themselves, allowing for our forces to carry out their mission.”

 

“Mai, Ty Lee, and I can do the same,” Azula said in a bored tone.

 

“Of course, your highness.”

 

“Let me sum up the useful information you’ve provided us with,” Azula said, “Iroh is not as powerful as he once was, which we knew already. He has been opposed to the war for many years, possibly decades. Not surprising. He hated to carry out the commands of his father, and the deaths during the war. He failed and gave up on the siege of Ba Sing Se, which again we knew already.”

 

“The only useful information is that he has in the past relied on trickery to frighten off his enemies. Also that he is unwilling to kill. Even when he betrayed us at the North Pole, he took no lives. He incapacitated soldiers, and used the element of surprise to rescue Zuko.”

 

“Forgive me, Princess,” Mongke placated Azula, “I was caught in my own memories. I shall be more concise in the future.”

 

“See that you are, Colonel,” Azula waved him away and the firebender sped up his mount to create distance from Azula and her friends.

 

“You didn’t have to be so hard on him,” Ty Lee said.

 

“It is my prerogative to tell long-winded officers to be more concise,” Azula said.

 

“Oh, please,” Mai said. “You’re just annoyed that he didn't have anything useful for you.”

 

Azula did not dignify her with a response. She briefly considered using her own mongoose-dragon, if only to get a break from the monotony of the tank. She decided against it, leaving the animal to be led by one of Mongke’s companions.

 

“Do you think it’s true?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“You’re going to have to be a little more specific,” Azula replied.

 

“Could Iroh really have turned a man into a pile of ash and broken bones?”

 

Azula pondered the question. Honestly, she did think it was possible. She knew her father was capable of such a feat, and she believed that she could have done the same. She decided that Ty Lee didn’t need that information.

 

“You have nothing to worry about, Ty Lee,” Azula said. “Uncle’s not strong enough anymore.”

 

---

Author's Note:

 

The song Iroh sings is basically just  It's A Long Way to Tipperary. I had originally amended the whole song to fit into the avatar universe, but decided to only include the first verse.

 

Iroh playing music and having Mongke and Piandao is based off of a thing that really happened! A Chinese general known for being clever did the thing that iroh did. I can't for the life of me find him online for two reasons. One, he's long dead. Two, I'm tired.

 

A big thank you to my beta reader, the divine lady who i will not name without express permission.

 

To celebrate the six-month anniversary of my story, people who asks for a spoiler in the comments gets one, unless it's too big of a spoiler. Can't be giving everything away.

 

Also; we've surpassed the 200k words mark.

 

2/12/2023

Chapter 41: The Dragon of The West

The Dragon of The West

 

Sugar Foot squawked with exhaustion and discontent. Her usual jovial nature chased away by the winds of long toil, running for two days and nights with little rest had brought to her the edge of her endurance. Iroh knew he was pushing her hard, harder than she could maintain for much longer.

 

Finally, four hours past dawn on the third day, they came to the town he had been aiming for. Iroh knew that his niece and her soldiers were not far behind, and Zhao’s assassin was among them. Furrowing his brow, the firebender dwelled on the subject. His cousin was making a move for the throne, it was obvious to him now. Sending a killer after Zuko, and ordering him to kill Azula directly after. He himself was declared a traitor and disinherited, leaving him unable to take the throne. After Ozai’s children, Zhao was next in line for the mantle of Fire Lord.

 

He slowed Sugar Foot to a walk as they entered the town of Bao Hu, beside the Red River. Iroh dismounted and Sugar Foot trilled in relief.

 

“I’m not so heavy these days,” He said to the bird, “But you’ve worked very hard. You’ve earned your rest.” He scratched the feathers around the base of her skull, where she liked best. Sugar Foot blinked at him, before nuzzling into his chest. Iroh led her by the reins to a stable beside a tavern. He drew out one of his few remaining silver pieces and paid the stablehand to feed and water her, giving precise instructions that she be well cared for until his return. Iroh quickly entered the tavern.

 

The establishment was of middling quality. A few patrons drank beverages of a dubious nature at the counter, while others ate their meals in groups of three or four. Iroh spotted at once what he was looking for. He sped directly across the taproom. He had no time for subtlety.

 

“Might I join you in a game?” He asked, his calm tone hiding his urgency.

 

“Of course.” The small man at the Pai Sho board said. “The guest has the first move.”

 

Iroh sat down immediately and placed a tile on the board. The small man raised an eyebrow at him, saying, “I see you favor the white lotus gambit. Not many remain who favor the old ways.”

 

“Those who do can always find a friend.”

---

 

Azula would have enjoyed basking in the late afternoon sun, had she been in the Fire Nation. Spring days like the one she and her companions were experiencing were one of the great joys of life, and the chance to enjoy the life - giving warmth of the sun was the one she savored. This time , however, trekking through the backwater Earth Kingdom in pursuit of her traitorous family made the golden rays of early springtime rather less than enjoyable.

 

She was tired, annoyed, and had had just about enough of the whole experience. Ty Lee, unfortunately, did not seem to know how to read the room.

 

“Isn’t the sun just wonderful?” She asked, clearly unaware of Azula’s dour mood. “I can feel my skin getting so healthy, like it’s glowing.”

 

An image of a glowing sword casting rays of the palest moonlight crossed Azula’s mind, followed closely by the glowing tattoos of a boy in the grips of righteous fury. A failure, one of her first. She understood that Ty Lee was not trying to irritate her, but her friend was doing so all the same.

 

“That’s good.” Azula said, “It will distract from your titanic intellect.”

 

Ty Lee, who had missed the sarcasm, beamed at her. “Do you really think so?”

 

Azula considered saying several more cutting things, but decided against it. She merely impersonated Mai, by sighing and rolling her eyes. Mai, ever observant as she was, took note of Azula’s foul mood.

 

“Ty Lee,” Mai said, “Could you go and get us some water?”

 

The acrobat nodded pleasantly and flipped off of her seat on the tank, jumping from each of the war machines until she was at the back of the column.

 

“We’re close.” Mai said, “They might be mere hours ahead of us.”

 

“Maybe.” Azula replied, “But I’ve come to doubt it will be both of them.”

 

“What? Why?”

 

“This is the third day. One ostrich-horse carrying three people shouldn’t be able to keep ahead of us for so long. It’s likely they split up so that at least one of them would get away. It stands to reason that they would at least attempt to join forces with The Avatar.”

 

Mai was silent for a time before saying, “So who do you think we’re following?”

 

Ty Lee returned with the water at that moment, passing a canteen to Mai and Azula in turn. “What do you mean? I thought we were following Iroh and Zuko. And that girl.”

 

“Azula thinks that they split up , ” Mai said. “One to lead us away, and the other to join the Avatar.”

 

“Oh,” Ty Lee said, letting the idea take place in her mind, “That makes sense. We saw those Earth Kingdom soldiers wander off the road outside of Gaoling, so maybe they found the other tracks.”

 

Azula blinked once in surprise. Ty Lee had made a reasonable assumption, which wasn't really all that surprising, but it was not one that Azula had considered. Why hadn’t she considered it? She needed to meditate. Her worries over her recent failure were distracting her, keeping her from being the weapon her father needed.

 

“So, I guess the question is whether we’re chasing Iroh or Zuko.” Ty Lee said, providing further insight that was unexpected from her. It wasn’t that the girl was unintelligent, despite any barbed comments that Azula might make, but rather that she didn’t often tend to consider the direction of their mission. Ty Lee would often leave the planning to Azula.

 

“Logically, the best person to teach the Avatar firebending would be Iroh. We can assume that would be the reason for his joining them. Iroh has experience training others if Zuko and Colonel Mongke can be any basis of judgment. What’s more, Zuko is younger and faster, making him the most capable of escaping us.”

 

“We’re tracking down Zuko?” Mai said sullenly.

 

“That would make the most logical sense.” Azula said, “But my brother does not think logically. He does not think things through. He is brash and too quick to act. If it was him we were following, it would have come to a fight by now.”

 

“So Iroh then.” Mai summarized. Azula did not miss the slight uptick in her tone. She rolled her eyes.

 

“Yes. Odds have it that we’re after T he D ragon of the W est, and nothing more.”

---

It was with a heavy heart that Iroh pocketed the coin. He would need the money, and where he was going he could not take Sugar Foot. She seemed sad at their parting, having cooed with melancholy as the stable owner led her away. Iroh had hope, however, that she would have a good life. There were a few other birds in the care of the stable owner, and he would sell them to traders who came through from time to time. Still, he knew that Zuko would be distraught. Though his nephew tried to hide it, Iroh had caught the young man giving the ostrich-horse a kiss on the head more than once. He had not addressed the action, if only to spare the youth embarrassment.

 

He had made his preparations for departure in a matter of minutes, as there had been a small boat leaving for Ba Sing Se, helmed by Chet’s brother. Chet was a member of the lower tier of the White Lotus, and he was more than willing to give aid to a grand lotus.

 

Iroh wound his way quickly through Bao Hu, going from merchant to merchant, purchasing what meager supplies he could carry. He wouldn’t need much, as Chet’s brother, Ta , was a fisherman as well as a river driver. A stroke of good fortune, following another. Chet was an earthbender, who had spent much of his early days tunneling and mining before moving in with his brother. The earthbender was only too happy to aid Iroh in his next task as well.

 

Iroh finished buying the necessities for the trip to the walled city, and entered the town's only music shop. Various instruments lined the battered wooden walls. Woodwinds and drums took up little space in the already small building, and a larger selection of stringed instruments was available. The woman at the counter shot up with delight as Iroh entered.

 

“G-goodafternoon!” The shopkeeper said, “Can I help you today?”

 

The young lady saw the sorrowful look on the disinherited prince’s face, and her smile diminished significantly. She took in the travel worn and nondescript clothing that Iroh wore, close to threadbare as it was. She plastered on another smile, though it surely pained her, and said, “I’m afraid we’re not looking for help at the moment, if you’re looking for work. Shu at the docks might be able to take on more hands, but I’m not certain.”

 

Iroh took a slow breath to ease his low mood, allowed himself to smile, and said, “No, no, but thank you for the tip! I am just passing through, and had hoped to purchase a liuqin. It’s a long journey by boat to Ba Sing Se, and I think it should help us all to have a little music!”

 

“Oh,” The woman said, her smile becoming genuine. “Of course. We have some fine instruments, a few from the best craftsmen of Omashu!”

 

“Really?” Iroh said, raising his eyebrows. “They must play wonderfully, but I’m afraid that the poor old fingers of mine wouldn’t do them justice. Perhaps a battered old instrument for a battered old man?”

 

He was met with gentle laughter, “Surely you’re not so battered, and not so old! Even so, we have a secondhand instrument that might do.”

 

Iroh blinked. He looked down towards his formerly vast belly. Perhaps the loss of weight had been mirrored by a loss of years. He laughed in turn and bought the instrument that the woman had shown him, and paid a reasonable price for it.

 

With his passage secured, his provision bought, and his new instrument in hand, Iroh walked southwest towards a bluff a few miles out of town. It was a lovely little place, where families might have had a picnic. Or where lovers might have basked in the summer sun. Now he planned to use it to speak to Azula, to warn her of the danger she was in. Of the company she kept. He would try, but he doubted she would listen. To her, his words were naught but lies.

---

 

Ty Lee sat beside Azula, her eyes closed as she tilted her face towards the sun. A memory from the bright days of her early childhood, when she was only a little girl, slipped to the forefront of her mind. When she was small, she didn’t understand how the happy, bright candle of the sun wasn’t quenched by the endless blue ocean of the sky. It wasn’t until she was a little bit older that her mother explained that the sky wasn’t an ocean, that it wasn’t water at all - even if the clouds did look like foam upon the waves. Her mother had taken Ty Lee’s small hand and smiled at her, saying that the sky was nothing but endless space that stretched on and on. She had said that the sun burned so bright and hot that no water could quench it, that it was stronger than anything. Stronger than everything.

 

Ty Lee had taken that to mean that the Fire Nation, the land of the sun, was stronger than everything. Better even, as that was what everyone had always said. The eternal flame, the spirit of fire and the sun, had even once taken human form to rule as the first Fire Lord, and his children had sat atop the D ragon T hrone ever since. She even sat beside one of them now, one of her best friends in the world. Nobody could know Azula and doubt the divine providence of her family’s rule. Even Zuko, despite his weaker bending, seemed to carry Agni’s fire within him. He had burned with a bright gold en fire in their childhood, a warm flame that spoke of someone sweet and kind. Azula’s light, her aura, and her chi w ere different from that of her brother. It was blue, and it roiled and snapped like the sea in a storm, like lightning danced with her. How could anyone know the pair of them as Ty Lee did and not blindly follow the Fire Lord’s command?

 

And so Ty Lee had. She hadn’t questioned Azula, she had never doubted. Until now, that is. Meeting with the mad king in Omashu, and his story of the world before had planted the seeds of doubt. Was the Fire Nation right to conquer the other nations? Did their might make it their right? She wasn’t so sure, after having traveled through the Earth Kingdom for a time. The citizens of Omashu had seemed so sad, as if their greatest fears had come to pass. And then when Colonel Mongke told his story about General Iroh, speaking of how even the mighty Dragon of the West had begun to doubt, at the very height of his time at war, the necessity of the fight in it’s entirety.

 

She had been wondering already, going so far as to ask Mai if they were the villain, back in the cave of T wo L overs. They had been traveling with Chong and his friends through those awful, dark tunnels, and she couldn’t hold back her doubt any longer. Mai had stiffened enough that even Ty Lee had noticed the change in her demeanor, so she hadn’t broached the subject again.

 

She turned her head away from the sun and opened her eyes. She had heard something. Just on the edge of her senses, there was…

 

“Azula,” Ty Lee began, “Do you hear that?”

 

“Your pointless humming?” Azula asked. “Of course I can, I’m less than a foot away from you.”

 

Ty Lee chortled. Azula was always making little snips like that. “No, Azula. I think I hear music up ahead.”

 

The Rough Rhinos stiffened at her words, if only a little. The Combustion Man raised his eyes from his book, Make Out Paradise , and scanned the trees. They had begun to thin slightly, and there appeared to be a clearing ahead of them. Ty Lee watched as Azula’s eyes narrowed. The princess ordered their column to a halt, cutting the sounds of their travel to nothing. Azula cocked her head and listened. After the roaring noise of the tanks and animals, the silence was almost aerie. It was broken by the soft, carrying note of liuqin in the near distance.

 

“It is my uncle then,” Azula said flatly. “Is he trying that same tactic from Mongke’s story? It won’t work, sadly for him.”

 

Azula tapped her fingers against the sides of the tank. Ty Lee could hear the cogs turning in the logical machine of her friend's mind. She waited for a moment, and then Azula began to speak.

 

“The Red River is one hundred yards to our left. The trees have thinned, and we’ve been ascending an incline for the last mile. It is most likely that he’s on a bluff, with his back to the river. It gives him security in knowing that we cannot come from behind, even if it leaves him with less chance for escape.” Azula closed her eyes for a matter of heartbeats, before opening them again. “Colonel Mongke. You and your team loop around the far side clearing. Captain Juu Han, I want your armored cavalry spaced equidistantly around the perimeter. Combustion Man, you follow Mai, Ty Lee, and me. Nobody is to enter the clearing until I give the order.”

 

The response was immediate, the Rough Rhinos dashed around the clearing. The captain started issuing commands to her soldiers. The Combustion Man stowed his book in his satchel and dropped it into the tank he was sitting on. Ty Lee waited patiently, if a little nervous. Iroh had incapacitated her and Mai easily, even if he took them by surprise. She was sure that the three of them together could defeat him, and possibly Azula on her own if in even combat - like an Agni Kai - but she doubted that would happen.

 

After a few minutes had passed, Azula motioned for her friends to follow. She ordered the c ombustion b ender to stay at the clearing’s edge, and come no further. She would give the order and all of their force would strike at once.

 

Azula, Mai, and Ty Lee walked into the clearing. General Iroh sat on a low stool, playing a battered old liuqin. Four cups sat beside a steaming teapot on a small table. The old man played beneath a towering oak, merely a dozen feet from the edge of the bluff. He slowed his song as they approached, and opened his eyes.

 

“It’s nice to see you again, Princess Azula,” Iroh said, and a wall of fire erupted around the perimeter.

---

 

Iroh called upon the wall of fire with a breath. It wasn’t usually a useful skill, but his father had demanded that both he and Ozai learn it. It was to separate the throne from the advisors, but in this circumstance, it would separate Azula from the assassin. Iroh could see the man over Ty Lee’s shoulder, just outside the ring of fire.

 

“I’m sure,” Azula said flatly, staring at him with hate in her eyes. Iroh took a slow breath. He had known what his betrayal would do, but it had been necessary. It had been the right choice. It was for the good of the world. Despite understanding these things, Iroh knew in his heart that it had been cruel.

 

“I am sorry.” He said, shifting in his seat so that he could sling his instrument over his shoulder.

 

Azula scoffed, but her friends looked at her through the corners of their eyes. “I’m sure. You must be, now that I am going to drag you back to father in chains. Tell me, where is dear little Zuzu?”

 

“Prince Zuko has gone. I know not where. He and Toph have taken their own path to find the Avatar, and teach him earth and fire.” Iroh poured tea into each of the glasses. “I am not sorry for my spat with Ozai. He has never loved me, and the love I bore from him burned away when he banished your brother. I am sorry only for hurting you.”

 

“Tut, tut, Uncle,” Azula said, her lip curling in distaste. “Do you really think that I would so willingly believe your lies? After I have learned your true nature? That of a snake in the grass, coiled and waiting to strike.”

 

“I do not lie, my niece,” Iroh said. He wordlessly offered the tea to the three young women, who ignored it. Iroh took his own cup and sipped it calmly. “I wish it had never come to that. As I have said before, I love you. It breaks my heart to think of how I hurt you so.”

 

Azula laughed, though there was little humor in it. “Is that so? I doubt that, Iroh. Just like Zuko, and mother before him, you do not care for me. You might think your words are honey, but in truth , they are nought but brine.”

 

“What lies has Ozai filled your head with?” Iroh asked, a cold knot forming in his chest. “Do you really think that your mother and brother never cared? That they lied to you in all things? Were there confessions of love in the bright days of your childhood false?”

 

Azula’s hand drifted up to the tip of her nose, resting on it briefly before she tapped her chin. “There is a man from The Caldera, a man with amber eyes. He speaks to you so sweetly, and he tells you that he cried. But the man is just a demon, he is an animal inside. Listen not to what he says, for the words he speaks are lies.”

 

Iroh took another breath. It was a line from Amor Infernica, which warned a young lady not to trust the daring soldier. In the story, the soldier was a spy from another land, seeking to gain information from the daughter of a high-ranking minister. The young woman was misled and betrayed by the spy, and trapped in a dungeon in his homeland until she was saved by a darling prince. The two fell in love, until the prince’s tragic death, and afterwards the young woman tore the world apart in vengeance. Iroh supposed that the line was fitting, given what he had done. Even if it was over the top.

 

“I have made three great mistakes in my life,” Iroh said, pressing forward.

 

“It was certainly more than three.” Azula rolled her eyes at him.

 

Iroh smiled weakly, and gave a sad chuckle. “True, very true. But there are three that stand above the rest.” Iroh raised three fingers.

 

“The first was allowing my son to fight at Ba Sing Se.” He lowered his middle finger, leaving two others in the air. “The second was taking Zuko into the war meeting. He was not ready, this I should have known.” He lowered his ring finger.

 

“And the third?” Azula asked scathingly. “Tell me, was it not buying your wife flowers? Was it not cheating in Pai Sho?”

 

“The last mistake,” Iroh said, lowering his little finger and his arm. “Was leaving you alone in that place with your father.”

 

There was silence for a moment, broken only by the crackling of Iroh’s wall of fire. The assassin shifted, inching closer to the ring. The silence was suddenly broken by the sound fo Azual’s mocking laughter.

 

“Really, Uncle?” She said, “Your greatest regret was leaving me in the care of the only person who loves me? You are an old fool, aren’t you.”

 

“Perhaps,” Iroh said, “But all the same. Ozai has poisoned your mind against your mother and brother, saying what he knows will turn you into his ultimate weapon. He has even allowed you to travel with such foul company.”

 

“Oh? Do you not approve of my friends? Or is it Colonel Mongke?” Azula asked, feigning concern. “Either way, it doesn’t quite matter. If you dislike them, then I am in fine company.”

 

Iroh waved his hand in the air vaguely, dismissing her assumption. “Fine men, fine friends you have. I am concerned with the assassin that Zhao has sent with you. He has been ordered to kill you and Zuko.”

 

“Oh no! What shall I do?” Azula deadpanned.

 

“I do not lie, and I do not jest. Your life is in danger, the combustion bender is not your ally!” Iroh said, willing her to believe him. Behind Ty Lee, the man in question stiffened.

 

“I’m sure.” Azula said. Her flat tone made it obvious that she did not believe him. “Well, if anything, you can plead the case on the way to the Fire Nation.”

 

“I am not going to the Fire Nation with you,” Iroh said, “Despite the danger of the company you keep, I must go to Ba Sing Se.”

 

“And why is that?” Azula asked.

 

“It matters little,” Iroh said. “All that matters is that you understand. I am not your enemy, the people of the Earth Kingdom are not your enemies. Your enemy is in your midst, walking beside you. He is ordered to kill you.”

 

“Then why has he not?” Azula asked, obviously refusing to consider the idea. “The Combustion Man has been a steadfast companion. He follows orders without question.”

 

“Because Zhao wants Zuko killed first!” Iroh said.

 

“Zuko, the Avatar, the First Son, even the Sea Wolf and your little earthbender friend, I could almost believe. But me? I don’t think so. Really, Uncle, your lies are less and less believable.”

 

“It is true!” Iorh said, “I don’t know what Zhao cares for the deaths of the Avatar or his friends, though I imagine that he wishes for Sokka’s death now more than ever. What I do know is that you are in danger.”

 

Azula looked confused for a second. “Why would Admiral Zhao want Sokka killed now more than ever?”

 

Iroh blinked at the sudden change in subject. “My friends have told me that Chief Arnook still wishes to merge, that upon Hakoda’s agreement, the First Son shall be named emperor of the Water Tribes.”

 

Azula blinked. A twitch of her mouth followed and was smoothed. “Liar.”

 

Iroh slowly shook his head. He grit his teeth. He had hoped that it wouldn’t come to this. He stood slowly, and Azula took a firebending stance. Iroh met her eyes, and then in less than a second , he whipped his arms in the circular motions that necessitated lightning. He saw her eyes widen in sudden shock, and he flicked his own to face the C ombustion M an. Azula saw him move his eyes, and she was in motion. Iroh loosed the lighting and something crashed to the earth.

---

Azula watched as her uncle generated lighting. He was fast, nearly as fast as her father. She met his eyes, and saw in them a grim determination. She felt shock, and a frozen tendril of fear snake into her heart as he neared the completion of his attack. Suddenly his eyes flicked to her left, towards… Ty Lee! He was going to kill her, for what reason she couldn’t begin to understand, but she wouldn’t allow that. Summoning forth her fire, she used it to launch herself into her friend, knocking them both to the ground. Thunder roared, and an odd wet thumping sound came from behind them in the trees.

 

Azula leapt to her feet to fight Iroh, but, impossibly, the man was gone. The wall of fire had followed him to wherever the man had fled. Ty Lee lay stunned on the ground, looking up at Azula.

 

“Y-” Ty Lee started, “You saved me!”

 

“Obviously.” Azula said, scanning for Iroh. “I wasn’t going to let him kill one of my best friends. Any of my friends, for that matter.”

 

Ty Lee got to her feet, and Azula pulled herself up. She scanned again, but saw no sign of her uncle. She saw Mai, who was looking behind them. She had an unfamiliar expression on her face.

 

“I don’t think he was aiming for Ty Lee,” Mai said.

 

Azula turned to the direction she was staring and saw what she meant. The Combustion Man was lying in the grass. He might have just fallen over or taken cover, if not for one thing. His head, or what was left of it, smoldered a foot away from his neck.

---

 

Author’s Note:

 

Hello all, I am sorry for the late update. I met a girl and she has taken up much of my free time.

 

Also, I ended up deleting almost the entire chapter last week and starting over.

 

Thirdly, the quote Azula says to Iroh is something taken from the final book of the inheritance cycle. I always thought it was kinda cool, so I figured I should put it in. It’s a bit hypocritical of Azula to be mad at Iroh for lying. Glass house and all that.

 

Bonus: The White Lotus love to gossip about the goings on. This has coincidentally created the quickest and most accurate information network of all time.

Chapter 42: Your Mother Was a Hamster, You Stupid Cow!

Your Mother Was a Hamster, You Stupid Cow!

 

Toph was frustrated. Aang. Twinkletoes. The Avatar. Whatever you decided to call him, he wasn’t getting it. Supposedly, he had mastered the elements a thousand times before and would do so a thousand times again. You might be forgiven if you expected him to be better at it by now. You would be forgiven, but you would also be wrong.

 

“I’m trying!” Aang whined, for the hundredth time. He had improved somewhat over the course of the day, it was true, but he couldn’t actually move the rock. He had managed to blast wind at it, but that was about all. He couldn’t even stop the rock from rolling down the hill and crushing him. Toph had wanted to try that a few more times, but dear old Zuzu advised against it. He said something about not crushing the world's best hope for dethroning Ozai. It was a bit weird that he called his dad by his first name, but Zuko was a bit weird sometimes.

 

“You’re not trying the right way. You’re thinking like an airbender, you need to think like an earthbender.” Toph said back.

 

“How do I think like an earthbender?” Aang asked, half curious and half frustrated. “Can’t we call it a day and start again tomorrow?”

 

“No,” Toph commanded. “Just sit on the rock for a while and meditate. Think about how the earthbenders you know might think.”

 

“How do you think?” Aang asked.

 

“I think you should shut up and do what I said.”

 

Toph was tempted to call the lessons over for the day, but that would mean returning to the camp. It wasn’t a bad camp, really. She and Zuzu had dealt with worse, but if they went back now It would be there. Katara’s brother. Sokka. It. She wasn’t sure what was wrong with him, but he didn’t seem human. Not fully, not all the time. So, she decided to nickname him It. At least in her own head until she thought of something better…

 

Aang sighed and leapt onto the boulder he was supposed to have moved. He sat down and closed his eyes. Toph formed a seat for herself with earthbending. She decided to ponder the Sokka question. What was it about him that was off? She thought of the way he walked. She compared to the other people she knew. Zuko, for all of his inability not to shout, was sure-footed. He walked with a sense of purpose, and there was power in his gait. Firebender, go figure.

 

Katara was fluid, always ready to move. Adaptable. Quick. Aang, for all his faults as a student, had the most unique walk of them all. He trod lightly upon the earth as if he might float upwards at any second. Like the weight of the world couldn't quite hold him down. He was… happy. Free.

 

Toph stood from her seat and raised a pillar of stone from the dry, rocky earth. She leaned against it and stared upwards, towards what she was told was the sky. She let the sun fall upon her face, closing her sightless eyes. Somehow, despite the inability to see, staring at the sun still hurt. It didn’t make much sense, but all the same, she closed her broken eyes. Toph clicked her tongue and thought about how Sokka walked.

 

He was… heavy. He sunk into the earth just a little farther than he should , d espite how light on his feet he was. He was nimble, quick like his sister, and purposeful like Zuko. But for all that, something was missing. Like a little part of him had been lost somehow, and something foul had taken it’s place. Something unclean. She wasn’t sure what it was, or what it meant, but she just knew. He walked as if he was already dead. At least, part of him was.

 

And then there were times when he didn’t seem to be that way. He would blink and the extra weight would go, his heart would beat a little faster, and he would stand lighter on the earth. If he was still a bit sad, well, that was okay. People were sad sometimes, it was part of being human.

 

Toph listened to the sound of Twinkletoes breathing and decided to check on what the others were doing. She planted her feet more firmly onto the earth and focused on their campsite.

Sokka carefully swung his sword. It seemed to shine even brighter, the more he exposed it to the daylight. He disregarded the thought and placed his feet. He feinted, stabbed, and parried his invisible foes. He leapt atop of a small outcropping of rock. Out of the corner of his eye, he could see Zuko and Katara sparing by the stream. Katara was winning, but this was their fifth match. So far, she and Zuko were tied, so this was the tiebreaker .

 

He returned his attention to his swordplay. He lunged, blocked, and swung.

 

“Maybe this.” He said quietly, before trying out another sequence of moves. “Or this.”

 

“Or maybe…” He threw his boomerang, watching the imaginary opponent dodge it as so many did. He stepped into their guard, stabbed, and caught the boomerang. “Perhaps that.”

 

He had been practicing, asking himself again and again, day after day since leaving the void, was this the strike that could have saved her? Or was it this one? Perhaps none of them, or all of them, could have made the difference. It was too late now, and it would forever be too late. He couldn’t go back, he couldn’t undo the decisions he had made. He had been given a task. He had been given power. He had taken up the mantle and accepted the duty, and then he pushed it all aside. He had set it down, because of what? It was changing him? Maybe he should let it. If he had changed, maybe she… maybe Yue would still be with him.

 

He tightened his grip on the pommel. Leather creaked beneath his grip. He took a slow breath, let it out, and began anew. Up, around, down, forward. He swung his Regret. Left, forward, roll, a dive to the side, backwards. He practiced his footwork. Again and again, until his hands ached and his feet bled; the bare soles left cut and ragged by the rough terrain.

 

“Sokka!” Katara said, noticing his bloody footprints. “You absolute moron! Why aren’t you wearing shoes?”

 

“Because,” He said slowly, taking note of Zuko’s confused look. He pushed aside his sorrow and guilt, if only to not worry his friends. “If I only train when I’m comfortable, I won’t be able to fight when I’m uncomfortable.”

 

Zuko tilted his head curiously. “My swordmaster told me the same thing once.”

 

Sokka raised an eyebrow. “Really? I heard that from mine. Maste- agh!”

 

He was cut off when Katara stretched out a tendril of water from the stream and hauled him off his feet. He protested, but she only cuffed him upside the head. “Quit your whining! Azula is right, you really are a stupid genius.” S he lowered the tone of her voice, making a crude impression of Sokka. “Me man. No wear shoes so sword fight good.”

 

“Really, Sokka, what if we were attacked?” She returned to her regular tone. “Would you fight a bunch of firebenders barefoot?”

 

“Well, I wouldn’t stop to put my shoes on!” He said, his voice cracking. Katara enveloped his feet in glowing water, healing the cuts and scrapes.

 

“What is it with people not wearing shoes?” Zuko said, pinching his nose. “You’re at war with the FIRE Nation. It’s the most basic thing! W EAR SHOES!!!” He started shouting. He stopped, took a breath and shook his head.

 

“Sorry,” He said, “I’ve had this argument with Toph at least six times.”

 

“To be fair,” Sokka said, “She does see with her feet.”

 

“Yeah, he’s got a point.” Katara stopped the healing before she had finished. “Actually, maybe Aang should do this. He needs practice,”

 

“Well, that’s just great,” Sokka said. “First you demand to heal me, and then you stop halfway through. Sister of the year.”

 

“Well,” Zuko said, still awkward around the sibling s he had attacked several times. “If you compare her with my sister it’s not so bad. At least she’s not trying to capture… Sorry.”

 

Sokka and Katara had given him bemused expressions.

 

“Alright, fine! I’m sorry for attacking you, and Aang. And the Southern Water Tribe. And that island where Sokka wore a dress.”

 

“I-! It wasn’t a dress! It was uniform!” Sokka said, indignant. Katara rolled her eyes.

 

“Twenty three hours.” She said, Sokka grinned at her. Zuko looked confused because he was.

 

“What?” He asked. Katara crossed her arms. Sokka took his turn and rolled his eyes. 

 

“She said you wouldn’t ever apologize. I said you would.” Sokka explained. “We made a bet. I won.”

 

“What? You're betting about me?”

 

“Yes.” The two said in unison. Zuko crossed his arms. 

 

“Don’t.”

---

 

  

Azula watched as the column of Fire Nation traveled west. She had sent them away, as she didn’t want them to draw more attention to her than they had already. Azula, Mai, and Ty Lee had decided to pursue Iroh alone, as he appeared to be less willing to kill any of them, and a small elite team could pursue him unnoticed. Azula had taken an unusual course in her decision-making, having allowed Mai and Ty Lee to voice their opinions on the matter. It hadn’t been very helpful, as Mai had shrugged and Ty Lee was still thrilled that Azula had saved her life. Never mind that she had never been in any actual danger, to the acrobat it was the thought that counted.

 

“So now we wait?” Mai asked, clearly bored. She shouldered a pack taken from the Fire Nation. It was brown and dark green, of the sort used by the Earth Kingdom. Aside from that, the three of them had taken up disguises to better fit in with the locals. A mix of greens and browns, not so fine that they would stand out, but of sufficient quality that Princess Azula wouldn’t feel dirty from wearing peasant rags.

 

“No.” Azula responded, “Now we go looking for my uncle, and find a river passage to Ba Sing Se.”

 

“But we don’t even know if Iroh’s going to Ba Sing Se.” Ty Lee pointed out. “It could be a trick, he might be going to, oh I don’t know, the Southern Air Temple.”

 

“That’s true.” Azula said, “But it doesn’t matter. We are at the edge of an unprecedented opportunity.”

 

Mai raised an eyebrow. Ty Lee looked bamboozled. Azula rolled her eyes at them. “For one hundred years, the Fire Nation has been hammering away at Ba Sing Se from the outside. If we can get inside, then we can coordinate with the army and help them to take the city.”

 

“That’s a great idea!” Ty Lee said. “But how are we going to get in?”

 

“Disguised as refugees, or travelers, or merchants, or just about anything. The Earth Kingdom has had lax security for the last few decades, or so I’ve heard.”

 

“So the plan is?” Mai drawled, affecting a disinterested tone.

 

“Just shut up and do as I say. I’ll explain it later.” Azula said, before turning in the direction of Bao Hu. The three of them made their way to the town and were there in less than an hour. Azula eyed the muddy roads with distaste, and then quickly smoothed her expression. Refugees did not blink at being covered in mud. She briefly thought of the time that the pathetic waterbender had covered her in mud near the Ilah colony, shook her head once, and continued forward.

 

They went to the docks to find passage to Ba Sing Se, but there were no passenger vessels going to the city for the next few weeks. Apparently, they had been convinced to leave early and none of them would be returning for some time. A coincidence? Maybe. Azula was more inclined to believe that her uncle had something to do with it.

 

“So.” Mai said, “Not traveling by river.”

 

“No. Obviously, that’s not an option. We could commandeer a vessel of course, but I don’t know how to sail one of these little boats.”

 

“I don’t either,” Ty Lee answered Azula.

---

 

“I’m sorry Sifu Toph,” The Avatar whined, “I just don’t think I’m cut out to be an earthbender.”

 

“You’re an idiot,” Toph said, “You’ve been an earthbender since the dawn of time, stop being a baby.”

 

“I- I’m not being a-”

 

“Yes, you are , ” Toph said. Aang crossed his arms. She exhaled, looking at the monk. This wasn’t working. She had to think of a better way, a way to describe it to him more clearly.

 

“Say, Aang,” She began, “What does airbending feel like?”

 

“Uh… I don’t know. Fun, I guess?” He said.

 

“No, I mean the air, does it resist?” Toph clarified.

 

Aang shook his head. “No, it wants to move. It shifts around by itself, you’ve just gotta kinda show it where to go.”

 

“What about waterbending?” Toph asked.

 

“Waterbending isn’t very different from airbending, really. The way it feels, I mean. The moves you use are different, but the feeling’s similar. Water wants to move, it wants to melt, it wants to flow. Unlike airbending, you have to push and pull, you can’t just push it in the right direction. It will get out of hand.”

 

Toph nodded. “I see. Well, not really, but it’s a figure of speech.”

 

“What’s earthbending like?” Aang asked.

 

“It’s…. Earth is stubborn. It doesn't want to move. A rock is more than happy to sit in the same place for a thousand years rather than move. If you don’t make it do so, it will just sit there. You’ve got to put your will to move out there and tell it who's boss. If you ask it nicely, it won ’ t do anything. If you say, ‘Please , break.’ the rock just sits there, and you’d have better luck with a sledge hammer.”

 

“But, if you understand that you are the earthbender, you move the world around you, it stays whole or crumbles at your command. You tell that rock to break, it will shatter. It’ll turn to dust and that’s that.”

 

The two of them sat in silence for a while. Toph could make out the sounds of the others training or gathering food, or whatever they were doing. Aang stared into the distance as he considered Toph’s words.

 

“I think I get it,” Aang said. “I want to try again.”

 

Toph nodded, and Aang walked to the boulder he had been practicing on. He got into his horse stance and took a deep breath. He squared his shoulders, furrowed his brow, and punched out at the stone. As his fist made contact, the rock shattered.

---

“We’re going to ride ostrich-horses to Ba Sing Se?” Mai said, with a raised eyebrow and a hint of despair in her flat voice.

 

“Ty Lee and I will. You’re more than welcome to walk.” Azula said.

 

Mai rolled her eyes. Ty Lee giggled. Azula walked to the stables near the western gate of Bao Hu. Bao Hu. She considered the name. To protect? Or perhaps it was to defend? She was unfamiliar with the history of the town. It didn’t have a strategically important location, as far as she could tell. Maybe it had something to do with the founding of the settlement. Either way, it didn’t seem to matter much.

 

Azula pushed open the door to the stable’s office. A man with a potbelly stood at a counter reading a scroll. Without thinking, Azula held the door open for her friends, which for some reason caused a scene. Mai stared at her as if she had grown a second head, and Ty Lee started to cry.

 

“What? What happened to you?” Azula asked Ty Lee. Mai was still staring in shock.

 

“Y-you held the door open for us!” Ty Lee blubbered. “Yesterday you saved my life and now you’re holding open the door! I just-” Ty Lee threw her arms around Azula and tried to shatter her spine- or at least that was what it felt like.

 

“Let go of me!” Azula said, “I just held- Mai, stop! What is going on?! Stop touching me!”

 

Mai had joined in the hug as well, albeit in a supremely awkward fashion. Azula fought her way free and stared at her two friends in bewilderment. She placed her hands on her hips and scowled. Ty Lee tried to hug her again, but Azula was ready for it this time. She stepped to the side and lightly slapped the girl on the back of the head.

 

“That is enough!” She said, thoroughly confused and alarmed. Had they been poisoned? Was there something in the water? “I expect proper behavior from the two of you!”

 

Ty Lee looked chagrined, and Mai had returned to her usual stoic self. Azula narrowed her eyes at them in suspicion, before turning her attention to the pot - bellied man. He had moved away in front of the counter and was staring at them in confusion. He was a greasy, balding man. Azula guessed he made a hobby of going through his neighbor's trash, going by the smell of him.

 

“Good afternoon,” Azula said. “I require three ostrich-horses.”

 

“Ah, yes, of course.” The gross little man said, in a far more elegant voice than she would have expected. “I am Tim Tsun. I assure you, that this establishment has some of the finest and most reliable steeds to be found anywhere in the province! Why, there was a time when the nobility of Ba Sing Se would purchase our stock, although the war has stopped such lucrative business in recent years.”

 

Azula paused. The man, despite his unclean appearance, was rather well-spoken . He seemed educated -for an Earth Kingdom commoner that is- yet his hygiene was… bad. She looked him up and down, and evidently , the man noticed her confusion.

 

“Ah, yes.” He grimaced, “I do apologize. You see, I’ve gotten into an argument with the soapmaker, and he won’t do any business with me. He’s taken offense at some of my, uh, words.”

 

“I don’t care,” Azula said. “After we’re done here, bathe in the river. You stink.”

 

The man frowned at her. He seemed to consider a retort, but thought better of it. He turned and said, “Right this way.”

 

Tim Tsun led them into the stable. There were many stalls, all of which housed ostrich-horses. A few of them caught her eye, one was a rich golden color, with an onyx beak and sharp eyes. She walked up to it and gave it a quick inspection.

 

“I’ll take this one.” She said, Tim Tsun smiled at her without mirth and said, “Wonderful. Two hundred gold pieces.”

 

“Very funny.” She said, “How much?”

 

“Two. Hundred. Gold.” Tim said. Azula slowly turned to him. 

 

“Are you insane?”

 

“No, but you’re rude. I’m not selling my best stock to you.”

 

Azula’s lip curled, and she was moments away from electrocuting the man when Ty Lee stepped in.

 

“We probably couldn’t afford him anyway.” She said, “We’re traveling to Ba Sing Se, so we can’t spend all of our money in one place. Do you have anything more affordable?”

 

Tim Tsun turned his attention to Ty Lee. “Well, if you’re traveling all the way to the great city then I have just the birds for you.”

 

He turned and led them to the end of the stable. Three animals were tethered in the stall. A dull gray bird, a bored-looking ostrich horse with mottled white and brown feathers that resembled spots, and a tired, meek-looking light brown animal. Upon seeing Azula, however, the light brown bird got to her feet and squawked. She walked to the gate of the stall and tried to nuzzle the deadly firebender.

 

Azula, who had never been liked by animals, was astounded, confused, and for some reason nervous. She looked at Ty Lee, who was smiling broadly. Mai was bored, although she had raised an eyebrow in acknowledgment of the odd situation.

 

“Ah, that’s Sugar Foot. She’s new. The other two are Plain Rice,” He pointed to the gray animal, “And Dots.” He pointed at the gray and white bird.

 

“Well, then.” Ty Lee said, who under her own volition had taken over the negotiations. “How much?”

 

Tim Tsun tapped his chin and scratched his belly. He gazed at the three young women and then at the birds. “ Two gold ten silvers.”

 

“Deal!” Ty Lee exclaimed. Azula rolled her eyes and handed over the money bag to Ty Lee, who gave the man three gold and was given change. And then they negotiated for the saddles, feed, and other supplies. Ty Lee ended up giving over the forty silvers she had gotten in change from the man.

 

Tim Tsun showed them how to saddle the animals, and then they were off. Mai was given Plain Rice, and Azula had tried to take Dots, but Sugar Foot put up a fuss over those arrangements. She refused to let Ty Lee ride her, so Azula ended up riding the ostrich-horse herself. She took a slow breath and said to the animal, “I don’t know who your last owner was, but if they were okay with calling you Sugar Foot then they were an idiot. From now on, you are called Yaoke after dawn.”

 

Sugar Foot, much to Azula’s ignorance, was fed up with people trying to call her that. First Zuko, and now Azula. She screeched angrily and shook the princess.

 

“I don’t think she likes that name,” Mai observed. 

 

“Oh, really?” Azula cut out sarcastically, “And here I thought the angry screeching and bucking meant she liked it.”

 

“I should mention,” Tim Tsun said, “If you are heading directly to the capital, there have been reports of highwaymen and robbers along the main road. A group of warriors endeavored to track them down a few days ago, the… Uh…” H screwed up his face as he tried to recall the memory, “Oshinama Fighters? I don’t really recall the name. The point is to be on the lookout.”

 

“Uh, is there anything you would like to say to the nice man?” Ty Lee asked, looking at Azula pointedly.

 

Azula glared at her. Did she really expect her to thank the stable master? The man was stinking, fat, and greasy. He needed to bathe. Azula plastered on a smile and said, “As a matter of fact, yes!”

 

She turned to Tim Tsun: “Your mother was a hamster, you stupid cow!”

---

Aang was rather pleased with himself. He had managed to earthbend! Sure, in theory , he had learned earthbending thousands of times, but it still felt like the first time. Now he and Toph were walking back to camp, and after a long day of bitter work, he was exhausted.

 

“So, Aang,” Toph began, “What’s going on with Sokka?”

 

The Avatar paused, “What do you mean?”

 

Toph clicked her tongue and blew the hair out of her eyes. “There’s something strange about him. Like he’s… I don’t know how to explain it. Sometimes he’s like a normal person, and sometimes he’s not. Like something creepy crawled inside of him or something.”

 

Aang blinked and waved dismissively. “Oh, that. Yeah, he’s got some kind of weird, creepy spirit thing going on.”

 

Toph’s face screwed up for a moment. “What does that even mean?”

 

“Eh,” He said, drawing out the sound, “It’s probably better to let Sokka explain it himself.”

 

“Fine,” Toph said, before taking an earthbending stance, grabbing Aang by the shirt, and then launching the pair of them into the air. Aang, surprised and elated, laughed raucously at the sudden flight. Toph, for her part, looked serious and ready for a fight. In a few seconds, the pair had landed, with Aang slowing their fall to alight gently on the ground. 

 

Aang stepped away from Toph with a bright smile on his face. He was always on board for spontaneous acts of air travel. Toph, unfortunately, was scowling. She stomped over to Sokka who was still barefoot, still practicing with his sword, still bleeding from his feet, and somehow… empty. Toph stepped inside his guard and poked a sturdy finger in the middle of his chest and said, “What is your deal? Why do you have weird and creepy spirit powers?”

 

Sokka did not so much as blink. He held all the emotion of a stone. He paused, lowered his sword, and met her eyes. Well, he looked at them, she couldn’t exactly meet his gaze.

 

“It’s complicated.”

 

“Wow, that really helps. Glad you explained that to me.”

 

“Wait,” Zuko said, “Spirit powers?”

 

“Yeah, he made a deal with a spirit and sold his soul by accident,” Katara said, glaring at her brother.

 

Zuko stared blankly at her, and then at Sokka. He looked at Aang, and then back to Sokka. He walked over and lifted Toph from the ground and, much to her protest, carried her over to sit beside the fire. He took a slow breath, pinched the bridge of his nose, and exhaled. Speaking under his breath he said, “I swear, if I have to be the voice of reason for this group we’re doomed.”

 

“My uncle mentioned something about a bond to a face spirit of some kind.” Zuko said, louder so that he would be heard, “But I wasn’t paying attention.”

 

Katara looked at him with a half - annoyed, half - confused expression : “Why weren’t you paying attention?”

 

“I was trying to learn a new firebending move,” Zuko said.

 

“It better be pretty impressive if it took precedence over the Face Stealer,” Katara said.

 

“As a matter of- wait, face stealer? ”

 

“Yes,” Katara answered. Zuko whipped his head to look at Sokka, who was taking a seat on a log. He shrugged.

 

“He was very convincing.” Was all that Sokka said.

 

“Okay,” Aang said, “We’re getting off-topic here.” He raised his hands in a placating gesture as he spoke, “Sokka, please explain the whole spirit powers thing again. From the beginning, and then we can go over the Vaatu problem.”

 

Toph leaned over to Zuko, “What’s the Vaatu problem?”

 

“How should I know?”

 

“You said that Iroh mentioned the spirit thing!”

 

“I also said I wasn’t paying attention!”

 

“Guys!” Aang shouted, “I can believe I'm the one who has to say this, but let’s just be quiet and pay attention to Sokka for- Sokka, why are your feet bleeding?”

 

“Katara wouldn’t finish healing them because she thinks you need to practice healing.”

 

Aang dragged a hand down his face. He wondered why there were so many distractions. “Fine. I’ll do that while you explain the thing.” He waved at Sokka to begin his explanation. Sokka shrugged, and Aang got to business healing his feet.

 

“Alright, so basically, a couple of days before the Winter Solstice, I was abducted into the spirit world. I met Avatar Kuruk, he said we were related, and then he took me to go meet with Koh, also known as the Face Stealer. He offered me power, I said no, he said that if I didn’t that someone would die.”

 

Sokka’s face darkened, and his voice faltered for a step. He closed his eyes for a second. He opened them again and continued, “That changed my mind. I agreed, he gave me some power, and now I can do stuff.”

 

A silence followed, and it was broken by Toph, “And that’s it?”

 

“Basically, yeah. That’s the gist of it.”

 

“Well, what about the Vaatu thing? What is that?” Zuko asked.

 

“Oh, right. So Vaatu is the spirit of chaos. The opposite and nemesis to the Avatar Spirit. He’s imprisoned right now, but he’s trying to break free. He infects people and rots their chi, and he started his plot to escape by infecting Fire Lord Sozin. There are alot of people who have the Rot, Fire Nation, Water Tribe, and probably the Earth Kingdom too, but I haven’t seen any with my third eye yet.”

 

“Sokka,” Katara said, “You’re not doing a good job of explaining things.”

 

“What? Yes, I am!” Sokka said, “It’s literally everything! Well, almost everything.”

 

“Yeah,” Katara said, “But you make it sound boring.”

 

“How did I make it sound boring?!”

 

“You just listed it out like a…: She struggled for a moment to think of the right word. “List!”

 

Sokka glared at his sister. Aang rolled his eyes. Toph and Zuko exchanged concerned looks. Being blind, Toph just stared in the direction of Zuko’s chest, but she did the best she could.

 

“What do you mean by almost everything?” Aang a sked.

 

“Eh,” Sokka said, “Well, I haven’t gone over how to stop Vaatu from escaping yet.”

 

“You know how to do that?!” Aang shouted, “Why didn’t you say anything?”

 

“I- We-” Sokka said, “there’s alot going on!”

 

“This is kind of important!” Katara said.

 

“Alright, yeah, that’s fair.” Sokka said, “You’ve got a point.”

 

Sokka took a breath and began to explain what Koh had told him upon their last meeting, although he chose to leave out some of the more unsavory details.

 

“So,” Aang said, “to sum it up, we’ve just got to get Zhao and his spies someplace where they can’t do anything.”

 

“Uh, yeah, something like that.” Sokka said, “But we’ll cross the bridge after we talk to Wan Shi Tong.”

 

“Who’s Wan Shi Tong?” Toph asked. Sokka groaned. He was done explaining things.

 

“Alright, I call the first official meeting of Team Avatar to an end.”

 

“Team Avatar?” Katara asked.

 

“That’s what we’re called now. Unless you want us to be called ‘ Those weird guys with the bison. ’ I think it works.” Sokka answered.

 

“But nobody told us who-” Toph shook her head, “Never mind. I’m sure I’ll figure it out eventually.”

 

---

Author’s Note:

 

I’m terribly sorry for the delay. I have developed a social life, which is every fanfiction writer's nightmare.

 

Also, for those who are interested, Christopher Paolini is publishing a standalone novel set in the world of the inheritance cycle. It's titled Murtagh, so we can assume that Murtagh at least once shows up in it. The book comes out on November seventh

 

3/13/2023

Chapter 43: The Kyoshi Warriors

 

A full week had passed since they had set out from Bao Hu. Azula, Mai, And Ty Lee had made what Azula deemed to be acceptable progress towards Ba Sing Se, having come over a hundred miles. The problem was, unfortunately, that Azula had not bought enough food for their journey. Perhaps it was because she had been emotionally compromised after another defeat by her uncle, or maybe it was simply an unfortunate byproduct of her royal upbringing that she didn’t accurately estimate the amount of food that they would need, as logistics for a large host of trained soldiers did not translate well to three teenage girls, but all the same, as of that morning their food had run out.

 

Azula had developed a strategy to negate the negative fallout of this blunder, or at least part of it. She had decided to blame Ty Lee.

 

“Really, Ty Lee, this is ridiculous.” Azula said, “You really should have thought ahead. This is exactly the sort of thing that Zuko would do; remembering to bring money but not food.”

 

Little did Azula know, Zuko had done exactly that.

 

“I’m sorry.” Ty Lee said in a small voice, “I didn’t realize, but I should’ve known it was my job. I shouldn’t have expected you to buy everything.”

 

“It’s not your fault, Ty Lee,” Mai said, “There are three of us, and so the three of us should’ve checked over everything. The blame should be carried by us all.”

 

Azula rolled her eyes. She could live with that, and making Ty Lee upset was not nearly as fun as it used to be. Had she grown soft?

 

“I suppose you have a point, Mai.” Azula admitted, “At least the animals have enough food. We might be able to hunt for more, though I don’t know how exactly we’re supposed to cook it.”

 

“Maybe,” Mai said, “And this is just an idea, so hear me out, we use fire.”

 

Azula rolled her eyes again, and Ty Lee snorted. “Wow, what an ingenious plan. I never would have…” Azula trailed off, noticing the signs of past battle on the road before them.

 

The broken haft of a spear protruded from a thicket of brambles, the remnants of a bow lay splintered against a stone. Shattered arrows were scattered across the road, their heads salvaged for later use. Azula raised her hand and called for a halt, Mai and Ty Lee ceased their banter and stopped. Azula dismounted, taking Sugar Foot by the reins and leading her forward. Mai and Ty Lee followed suit.

 

“There was a fight here!” Ty Lee gasped. Azula nodded, forgoing any cutting remarks, as Ty Lee had not been ordered to watch the road before them. Azula eyed the battlefield, wondering if it might be in their best interest to follow the fighters, but decided against it. For all of their collective skills, their immense education, and their sheer prowess in battle and strategy, they had the combined tracking ability of an unwashed teaspoon. The best they could manage would be to establish if either side had lost, or if the battle had ended in a draw or even a route. Maybe.

 

Azula handed her reins to Mai and bid Ty Lee to do the same. The two of them inspected the stretch of road.

 

“The archer laid in wait behind the stone outcropping, which was likely put there by an earthbender going by the look of it.” Azula said.

 

“How do you know that?” Ty Lee asked.

 

In answer, Azula pointed to the sharp edges and corners of the rock. “A stone like that wouldn’t look so precisely cut if it were a natural formation. Even if it was placed here as a marker, a mere few months would be enough time for the wind and rain to erode the sharp edges, rounding them and wearing them down.”

 

“How long ago do you think it happened?” Ty Lee asked, “I don’t think it could have been more than a few days. It might have been only yesterday.”

 

Azula raised an eyebrow in curiosity. “Why do you say that?”

 

Ty Lee tugged at her braid awkwardly for a few moments before continuing. She stepped lightly towards the shadow of the trees and picked up a metal object, a broken sword. “It’s like the rocks; if it had been here for very long, the metal would have rusted. But,” She tilted the blade for Azula to see that just a light sprinkle of the red-brown corrosion had taken hold of the weapon, “There’s barely any on here.”

 

“When I was with the circus,” Ty Lee continued, “If a tool like, an axe or a hammer, was left out for more than a day or two, it would be covered in rust and whoever left it out would have to spend hours scouring it with sand to get it off.”

 

Azula nodded in understanding, before looking back towards Mai, as she assumed that Mai would have at least a working knowledge of such things, given her proclivity for knives. The young woman nodded in confirmation to what Ty Lee had said. Azula returned her attention to the section of road that had been an impromptu battle field. She couldn’t glean much more, other than that it appeared the ambushed group had prevailed and routed their attackers. Down the highway, strangely enough. Azula thought that was odd: why would a group of highwaymen, as it was likely these were the same robbers they had been warned of, flee down the road instead of into the forest? She wouldn’t expect them to jump into the river, but… the river. Maybe that was it. Maybe, just maybe, they had a small fleet of riverboats stashed for a short trip down the road or were hiding out in a town nearby. Either way, Azula wanted to find out. If there was a town, she wanted to get there to resupply, or even find passage to Ba Sing Se.

 

Azula remounted and ordered Mai And Ty Lee to do the same. Within moments, the three of them were off at a run.

---

Sokka wondered if the dull ache in his chest would ever go away. It had been nearly two months since Yue’s passing, and still, his heart pained him. She had been gone for nearly as long as he had known her, yet the pain was with him all the same. Would it ever go? Would he carry it forever? In every waking moment, through all the long years of his life, in bright summer days and through long winter nights? Would his only respite and relief be the time spent in the void? He didn’t know, and he wasn’t eager to find out. So, he found ways to distract himself.

 

For example, at that moment, he was sparring with Zuko. The Fire Nation prince was surprisingly, annoyingly, infuriatingly good with his swords. Sokka knew that he had been trained, and had seen him fight with them before, but this was the first time he had been his opponent directly. Sokka was tempted to use Koh’s Mantle, but his honor as a swordsman was on the line. If Zuko didn’t resort to using his fire, Sokka wouldn’t use his… shadows.

 

“Your footwork is pretty good,” Zuko said, “But you’re announcing your feints.”

 

“How so?” Sokka asked, curious, one eyebrow raised as he lowered his sword.

 

“Your left shoulder dips down when you plan to pull a strike.” Zuko answered. Sokka nodded, and resolved to correct the mistake. Before long, the pair broke for lunch, as prepared by Katara, who was the only member of the group who knew how to cook.

 

Aang and Toph returned from their own training, and Appa lounged on the dry, cracked earth, freshly bathed. Zuko had informed them that he and Toph had been following a trail of bison fur, and Sokka had done the obvious thing and suggested giving Appa a bath. It had washed clean all of the shedding hair, and in everyone’s opinion did the far more important job of removing the horrendous smell of the animal.

 

Sokka looked over to Katara, who had been incredibly bored. As they drew nearer to the desert, water had been in shorter supply. Zuko had asked if they could stock up on as much as they could, because he didn’t want to be stuck in the desert without enough to drink. Katara had agreed, but there was a point of argument when Zuko had asked her not to practice bending, as he was concerned about losing water to evaporation. Katara had admitted to not knowing how to draw water from the air, so she had reluctantly not been practicing her bending. This left her nothing to do but read one of Zuko’s two books, the one about the philosophy of a long-dead king. Now that the others were done training, she was overjoyed to have something else to do.

 

“So, Zuko,” Katara started, “How do you like being a firebender?”

 

Zuko paused, his rice halfway to his mouth. “Uh, it’s okay, I guess. I mean, I don’t really have to worry about getting too hot or too cold usually. And I never have to worry about being without my element, since I can make fire.”

 

“That must be nice,” Katara said, with a hint of jealousy creeping into her voice.

 

“Uh…” Zuko said, trailing off as he realized his mistake. Katara would be largely without water once they got to the Si Wong. Fortunately, Aang came to his rescue.

 

“Zuko,” The Avar began, “What’s the most impressive thing you’ve done with firebending?”

 

Zuko paused again, and this time he set his bowl and chopsticks down. He looked thoughtful for a second, before saying, “I soothed a volcano once.”

 

“How long did it take you to do that?” Toph asked, propping her feet up on a pillar of earth.

 

Zuko waved a hand in the air vaguely, “Uh… six hours? I lost count.”

 

Aang blinked at Zuko. His eyebrows furrowed and he frowned. “It takes a team of highly trained, specialized firebenders weeks to soothe a volcano. You don’t have to lie to impress us, or exaggerate.”

 

“He’s not lying.” Toph and Sokka said at the same time. They looked at each other. Well, Sokka looked at Toph and Toph looked in Sokka’s general direction, but she did her best.

 

“How can you tell?” Sokka asked, confused.

 

“People’s bodies react when they lie, and I can sense it with earthbending. How can you tell?”

 

“Um,” Sokka wiggled his fingers, “Creepy spirit powers.”

 

“I… see.” Toph said. Aang blinked in wonder at having two lie detectors on their team, and then blinked in astonishment at Zuko’s feat.

 

“Zuko! That’s amazing! Can you teach me how to do that?”

 

Zuko rubbed at his good eye, careful not to touch the scar on his left. “I can and will teach you the technique I used, but maybe hold off on the volcano thing. It’s complicated.” The vivid memory of him being stuck in place as heat rushed through his body and into the air passed through his mind. “I think I’m the only person to have ever tried it, so the kinks haven’t been worked out.”

 

Aang looked a bit dejected, but he nodded in understanding. “I understand. When I first tried to learn firebending, I got impatient and started playing with the fire I was supposed to be holding. I ended up starting a forest fire, and that’s how Azula and Zhao tracked us down and captured Sokka and I.”

 

“Yeah, I saw the smoke from my ship,” Zuko said.

 

“Anyway,” Aang said, “What’s your best firebending move? Can you make lightning? I know you can catch it and then throw it back, but…”

 

“No, I haven’t mastered lightning yet,” Zuko said, “And it’s called lightning redirection. It’s probably my second-best move.”

 

Sokka, who along with the others had been paying close attention to the conversation, raised his eyebrows. “What is your best move? Was that the one you were trying to figure out when Iroh told you about the spirit thing?”

 

“Yes, that is the one.” Zuko said, “And I think I’ll just show you rather than try and explain it. I need to practice more anyway.”

 

“Is it the loud one?” Toph asked. Zuko nodded. Toph stood and walked over to Zuko. “How far?”

 

“A hundred yards?” Zuko said, though his answer sounded more like a question. Toph focused on the distance and stomped a foot, causing a man-sized pillar of stone to appear exactly one hundred yards from Zuko. 

 

Sokka, curious about what was about to happen, opened his third eye. He watched as Zuko measured his breathing, and the golden light that was his firebending chi swirled through his body. It pooled in his mind and condensed. Zuko took a sharp, clean breath. His stomach clenched tightly and a line of fire shot from his ruined left eye.

 

The line of fire zipped across the open ground in a few seconds, and the stone pillar exploded when it made contact. Sokka’s jaw dropped open, Katara stared in awe, and Aang leapt into the air and sped around on his airscooter. The Last Airbender was chanting “He's got a laser eye!” over and over again.

 

“That’s called combustion bending.” Zuko said, “And it’s one of the most powerful attacks in the entire discipline of firebending.”

---

Azula slowed the group to a walk as they neared the crest of the hill. The sound of fighting could be heard on the other side, and she did not plan on running into the fray at a full sprint, if at all. She dismounted, and her friends followed suit.

 

Azula was the first to crest the hill, which was only natural given her station, and was… surprised by what she saw. Five young women clad in ornate green armor were fighting at least fourteen grown men, two of whom were earthbenders. The female warriors had ostrich-horses, or at least that was the reasonable inference given the five animals that meandered along the side of the road a safe distance from the battle. Mai and Ty Lee crested the hill soon after and were evidently surprised by what they saw.

 

“Do you think we should help them?” Ty Lee asked. Azula frowned with slight confusion.

 

“Why would we do that?” She inquired with a raised eyebrow.

 

“It’s the right thing to do.” Ty Lee said in a small voice, barely audible despite their close proximity. Azula looked at her in incredulity. Mai offered another answer.

 

“They might have food.” Mai began, “They’re wearing uniforms, so it stands to reason that they are some official Earth Kingdom force. Making a good impression could help us get into Ba Sing Se, should we convince them to vouch for us.”

 

Azula nodded slowly, agreeing with Mai. She decided not to press Ty Lee for her childish reasoning, for the girl had always been rather soft-hearted. She gave quick orders and led the three of them into the fray. Limited to non-bending as she was, she assigned Ty Lee to pursue the benders, as she had the best close-quarters combat skill among them for dealing with benders. One of the highwaymen was using a bow, so naturally, she ordered Mai to neutralize the weapon.

 

As for herself, Azula opted to fight the spearmen who had cornered one of the female warriors. She fell into a low sprint, close to the ground, and dodged strikes from various weapons as she ran. As she closed the distance, one of the spearmen thrust towards the warrior, who ducked to the side and quickly snapped the head off the spear. Before she could follow through with a strike of her own, the two remaining spears stabbed at her. She barely twisted out of the way, and her back was nearly pressed against the large stone they had cornered her against.

 

As the man with the now broken spear tossed aside his weapon and drew a horribly spiked mace, Azula made it to the fray. She swept the legs from under the leftmost man, knocking him to the ground. In a sharp wheel kick, she slammed her heel into the sprawled man’s solar plexus, driving the air from his lungs and cracking his ribs. As the man gasped and moaned in pain, she sprung into further action against the remaining spearmen, who had changed their attention to focus on her instead of the warrior, much to their own doom. The moment their gaze shifted, the warrior struck like a viper and shattered the hand of one man before she rendered the last man unconscious.

 

“Thanks.” Said the young woman with a smile, “That was getting too close for comfort.”

 

Azula, who had never been gracious by nature, was struggling to find something that was appropriate to say in the context of the moment when there was a startled cry from across the battlefield.

 

“Witch!” Screamed an earthbender, struggling in vain to earthbend, “She’s a witch! She stole my bending with her dark magics!”

 

“What?!” Azula said in disbelief, “You are an idiot, you blithering buffoon. There’s no such thing as magic!” Except, she remembered, for a single, glowing sword.

 

“Then explain how she-!” Said the bender, before being completely immobilized by the chi-blocker, “Oh spirits, she’s killed me! Is this what death is like? Can anyone hear me? Oh please, please, no!”

 

“You’re not dead, Chin.” Said the other earthbender, the judgment and disdain evident in his voice. “Although, you are perhaps the worst criminal leader in the history of crime. Why did any of us ever listen to you?”

 

“Because you are a collection of violent dullards who lack the intelligence given to a pair of stones when you rub them together?” Said one of the warriors, a different girl from the one Azula had rescued. Azula took a quick scan of the battle, and saw that it was over. Two men were pinned to trees by Mai’s knives, and the archer was being hog-monkey tied by one of the warriors, the other soldiers were either tied or unmoving, and Azula presumed them to be unconscious.

 

Azula looked at Ty Lee. “Would you get on with it? Stop toying with him.”

 

Ty Lee frowned. “You’re no fun.” And in less than a second she had the last of the criminals unmoving on the ground. The bender groaned, and said. “I never should have dropped out of dentistry school.”

---

“Alright,” Sokka said, pointing at his diagram with a long, thin stick he found. “So this is the plan. We go into the Si Wong desert and make for the Misty Palms Oasis. Once there, we will ask around to find if anybody has heard anything about a strange library or spirity building in the desert.”

 

“Spiritual.” Aang corrected, and everyone turned their attention to him. “Spirity isn’t… a word. Sorry.”

 

“Moving on,” Sokka said, “To maximize our effective information gathering, I have split the group into three teams.”

 

“Nah, I’ll just go with Zuzu,” Toph cut in.

 

“Sorry Toph,” Sokka answered, “But Zuko’s going with Aang. You’re with Katara.”

 

“What?! Why?” Toph asked. Katara looked mildly offended, but Sokka explained before she could say anything.

 

“I’m glad you asked!” Sokka said, “First off, you and Katara have spent almost no time together since you joined our group. I know you and Zuko are close, but it’s important to build friendships with everyone to maintain a healthy group dynamic. Second, Katara is a waterbender, and there is no water in the desert. She’ll be limited to whatever water she can carry, so I want someone without those restrictions to be nearby if something happens.”

 

“Then why not Zuko? Or Aang?” Toph asked.

 

“I’m pairing Zuko with Aang because he’s a firebender and prince of the Fire Nation. If he’s recognized or has to firebend at some point, it’s better that the Avatar’s with him to vouch.”

 

“Then what about you?” Zuko asked, “Who are you going with?”

 

“Maybe his girlfriend sent him a secret message to meet her there,” Katara said innocently.

 

“I do not have a girlfriend,” Sokka said, glaring at her.

 

“See, you say that, but then you and Azula get all smoochy whenever you too meet,” Katara said.

 

“She is not my girlfriend, and that was literally one time. And she had me in chains, I didn’t get a choice!” Sokka barked back at her.

 

During this exchange, Zuko held an expression that went from amusement to confusion, to horror, and finally to fury in seconds.

 

“What are you talking about? Answer me!” Zuko asked, at what he decided was a reasonable volume. Unfortunately, what was reasonable to Zuko coincidentally happened to be the volume appropriate for a sea battle in a hurricane.

 

Sensing an impending disaster, Aang decided to play mediator and explained the situation, from Sokka’s time in the void to the note that he left in her room to mock her. Zuko calmed somewhat, and then measured his breathing.

 

“I see.” Zuko said, before looking at Katara, glaring sharply enough to cut steel, “She is not his girlfriend.”

 

Katara paused, before saying, “Okay. Sokka, let’s get back to your plan.”

 

Sokka nodded, “Alright, so I’ll be by myself, well actually I’ll be with Momo but that’s beside the point. After we gather what information we can, we’ll comb the desert by air until we find it. Once inside, we’ll have to search for anything we can find on the prophecy, v-”

 

“What prophecy?” Zuko interrupted.

 

“Eh, I only know a little about it,” Aang said, rubbing the back of his head as he shrugged. “Basically, it goes, ‘ When the Avatar and the First Son unite with the heir to the dragon throne, the world will face great peril’  or something like that.”

 

“Oh, great,” Said Zuko, throwing his hands in the air, “By switching sides I’ve made it worse.” he shut his eyes tightly and pinched the bridge of his nose. In a whisper he said, “Why am I so bad at being good?”

 

“Eh,” Sokka began, “I don’t think that your joining up with us was some sort of catalyst. I think that a prophecy is more of an identifier of imminent danger than a warning not to do something.”

 

“Let’s get back to the plan.” Toph said, laying back where she sat and staring sightlessly at the sky. In her expert opinion, the entire discussion was rather boring.

“Right, so, yeah,” Sokka continued, “At that point, when we’re in the library, I say we split up again. No point in everyone searching for the same thing in the same place. Aang will look for stuff on Vaatu, Katara will look for …. something” At this point, Zuko gave him a confused look, and so Sokka waggled his fingers at him, “Weird spirit powers. Zuko can help one of them, and I’ll look for ways to fight the Fire Nation.”

 

“Uh,” Zuko said, as he wasn’t comfortable with the idea of finding potentially disastrous information that would lead to the destruction of the people he was meant to save, “I don’t like that idea.”

 

“Zuko,” Aang said carefully, “I know you’re the Fire Prince and all, and I don’t like the idea of fighting either, but this is the best way of defeating the Fire Lord. We have to end the war.”

 

Zuko frowned and looked like he was fighting some grand internal struggle, and coming to a decision he said, “If it’s something that can get us past their defenses, sure. But if it’s something that will kill thousands of people then I won’t be able to support that.”

 

“No,” Sokka said, “I don’t for a moment believe that anyone here would even consider that,” He had at times considered the idea himself, wrapped in the void. In that cold and barren trance, that empty place of perfect stillness, the concept had seemed viable. When separate from his emotions, from his humanity, the human soul seemed to be worth very little. “If I find something like that, I’ll put it back where I found it.”

 

Zuko crossed his arms and furrowed his brow. “You would know, still, that such a way was possible. What if it came to the worst, and the only path to victory was slaughter? Could you ignore it even then?”

 

Sokka was silent for a long moment. He knew that in the darkest hour, when all seemed lost and the light of hope had faded, that men were capable of terrible things. His father had told him when he was a boy that the greatest cruelty lay buried in the depth of the human soul; that even a kind man could be driven to evil if all that he held dear was taken from him. He thought for a moment that if he were to enter the void, he could do anything. He would do anything, if he fell deep enough. Even still, he knew of a way.

 

“If I find something like that, a weapon or power that could destroy them, or even pull the sun from the sky, I shall scour the memory from my mind. I will take it, and hide it somewhere I would never think to look.”

 

The group was silent for a moment, and then Toph said, “What does that even mean?”

---

Azula ate with little of the grace she usually carried. She ate, if she was being honest, like a peasant. The act of it was rather appalling to her, but if the Kyoshi warriors were to be deceived, such a sacrifice was needed. She viewed it as a sacrifice, but Ty Lee viewed it as a fun hobby to do with her new friends, never mind that the Kyoshi Warriors ate with poise. Mai just ate at her regular pace, albeit taking larger bites.

 

“So,” Suki began, wiping her mouth with a cloth. The warriors had removed their face paint before sitting for the evening meal. “I don’t believe that we’ve all introduced ourselves. That’s Himari,” Suki pointed out each warrior as she named them, and they all waved or bobbed their heads in turn. “Akara, Sara, and Haruhi.”

 

Ty Lee waved energetically at the warriors, eager as ever to make new friends. Azula did not roll her eyes at the bubbly girl, despite wanting to. It wouldn’t do to let slip the mask she had crafted, before even having a chance to show it off properly.

 

“I’m Ty Lee!” Ty Lee said, forgetting entirely the plan to use fake names. “That’s Mai,” Mai sighed and waved apathetically, “And this is Azula.”

 

Azula grit her teeth for a fraction of a second, before smiling in what she hoped was a friendly way. Suki and her team didn’t seem to recognize their names, not that Azula had expected them to recognize Mai or Ty Lee, but the fact that there was no reaction to the princess's name did irritate her a touch. She was the princess of the Fire Nation, and her beauty and cunning should be known the world over.

 

“Where’re you girls from?” Suki asked, looking at them curiously.

 

“Omashu.” Azula provided. She had come up with a cover story in advance and shared it with her friends. “We left before the siege.”

 

“Siege?” Suki asked, alarmed. The other warriors looked up from their meals with concern. Evidently, the news of the fall of Omashu hadn’t spread everywhere.

 

“Sadly,” Azula said, “The city was taken by the Fire Nation. King Bumi simply surrendered, he put up no fight at all.”

 

“I see…” Suki said, trailing off as her eyebrows furrowed in thought.

 

“How do you know that?” Asked one of the highwaymen, from his place tied to a tree. “If you left before the siege, then how do you know that King Bumi just gave up?”

 

Azula scowled at him. “It’s no concern of yours.”

 

“My sister lives in Omashu, I’d say it is a concern of mine.” The criminal snapped back at her.

 

“I can’t believe this.” Mai said, “Azula, arguing with a criminal? Look, we heard it from another refugee in Gaoling. Now shut up before I tie your feet to my saddle and ride around for a while.”

 

“Why were you in Gaoling?”  Haruhi asked.

 

“We were looking for Azula’s uncle.” Ty Lee said.

 

“Oh? What’s his name?” Akara inquired, “We might know of him.”

 

“His name is Orochi,” Azula said, with more speed than was strictly necessary in her effort to stop Ty Lee from giving away more information.

 

“Orochi… as in snake?” Suki asked slowly. Azula nodded.

 

“My grandfather was a herpetologist. He liked snakes.”

 

Suki, after a pause and a perplexed facial expression, responded slowly. “...Okay.”

“So where are you three headed now?” Haruhi asked.

 

“Ba Sing Se.”

 

“That’s where we’re headed,” Suki said. “There's a village a little under a day's walk east of here, where we’ll drop off these criminals. We’ll resupply there and head straight for the city. You’re welcome to join us if you’d like.”

 

Azula blinked in surprise. That had been her goal, of course, to get the Kyoshi warriors to bring them into the city. She had not expected that it would be so easy. “That is most considerate. We would love to travel with you.”

---

 

Author’s Note.

 

Hello all, I am terribly sorry for the long wait. I had meant to finish the chapter in a few days, yet here we are nearly three months later. To be honest, I had intended to have the entire thing done by July, but I highly doubt that will happen.

 

My Life has been pretty busy for a while. I got a GF, made a bunch of friends for the first time (I was a loner and a homeschooled kid) and then my brother got into a motorcycle accident and lost his leg. So I spent a few days a week for around a month driving from where I live to a university hospital, which took up a lot of time as it was nearly a hundred miles away.

 

Anyway, I’m single again now so I’ll have more free time to write. It’s good for I now have time to practice writing so that I can pursue my life ambition. I’m going to get on the New York Times Best Seller List. Unless AI takes over the field of writing fiction, which it might.

 

If you’re still with me after all this time, thank you. I’ll try not to make you wait anymore.

 

Charlamagne OR WHATVER

Chapter 44: Thirst

Chapter Forty Four

Thirst

 

Sand. Sand for miles. No matter where he looked, for hundreds of miles sand was all that Sokka could see. It looked remarkably like the ocean in a way, Sokka thought, as he saw the dunes that seemed to rise and swell, the golden hills that seemed to shimmer under the springtime sun.

 

“It shouldn’t be too much longer,” Aang said as he lounged beside Toph against the saddle wall. “From what I remember, the Misty Palms Oasis should only be another hour or so.”

 

Sokka nodded absently as he continued to stare into the distance. Katara looked up from the book she had borrowed from Zuko and said, “How can you tell? Everything looks the same as it did an hour ago.”

 

Aang shrugged. “It’s an airbender thing. Monk Gyatso explained it to me once when I was younger, but I wasn’t really paying attention at the time.”

 

“I see,” Toph said. 

 

“No, you don’t,” Zuko answered as he steered the bison, not bothering to look over his shoulder. Toph snickered at the response.

 

Sokka stood up and tried to nonchalantly make his way to the waterskins when Zuko turned and glared at him.

 

“You’ve just had a drink!” Zuko snapped.

 

“It’s hot!” Sokka said, glaring back. “I’m just going to have a sip!”

 

“You’re going to drink our whole supply!” Zuko said, “And I don’t want to be stuck out here without any food!” The scarred man was vividly remembering his sojourn through the Earth Kingdom.

 

“I- Zuko I just want water, I’m not taking any food.”

 

“Wait a bit longer! It hasn't even been twenty minutes.”

 

“Fine!” Sokka grumbled. He sat down again and resumed looking towards the horizon. He smacked his lips together and moved his tongue around. It felt thick and dusty. He considered entering the void in order to ignore it but decided that it would be a frivolous use of the trance.

 

“So what did you guys do every day? The Air Nomads I mean.” Toph asked, deciding to ignore Zuko and Sokka. Sokka made that difficult, as he continued to make loud slapping sounds with his mouth. Now she was getting thirsty. Great, she thought, thank you Sokka.

 

“Well, we trained mostly when we were at the temple. Airbending, reading, math, a surprising amount of aeronautical navigation,” Aang said, “And then you know, horsing around when we weren’t doing all the boring stuff. Although, we didn’t spend that much time at the temples. We traveled more than anything else.”

 

Sokka turned his attention momentarily away from the horizon and looked towards the two youngest members of Team Avatar. Seeing her brother turn, Katara crawled over to him, asking, “Did you spot anything with your… spirit-vision thing? Like at Omashu?”

 

Sokka blinked at her, realizing that the idea hadn’t even occurred to him. He would have a better chance of spotting danger or even the library if he used his spirit-vision. “Uh… No. And don’t call it that.”

 

Katara looked taken aback. “Why not?”

 

“It’s not- it doesn’t sound cool,” Sokka said. “And besides, Aang didn’t use any avatar powers so-”

 

“What do you mean ‘it doesn’t sound cool’? Who cares if it sounds cool!?”

 

“I care,” Sokka snapped, “And since they’re my powers, I should decide what they’re called.”

 

Katara took a deep breath. She clenched her fists and closed her eyes, before asking, “Did you see anything?”

 

Sokka looked mildly abashed as he looked away and said, “No.”

 

Katara’s eyebrows furrowed. “You didn’t even use it, did you?”

 

“No, I did not.” Sokka said with chagrin.

 

Katara decided that hitting Sokka in his eye would not help him use his spirit-vision. She decided to call it that and nothing else until all the lads of the earth fell into the sea. No young men would remain by the time she had finished with it “Well, maybe get on with it, and use your spirit-vision ”

 

Sokka glared at her. “I told you not to call it that.”

---

Azula rode beside Suki at the head of the procession. Despite Suki’s best effort s , Azula remained aloof and self-righteous in her denial of the possibility of friendship forming between them. Suki, in Azula’s opinion, was a dimwitted country bumpkin from an unimportant backwater island of cowards. Suki, in turn, thought Azula was a bit of a pompous snob.

 

“Suki. How much further are we from Ba Sing Se, by your closest estimation?” Azula asked, refraining from referring to the warrior as ‘peasant’.

 

Suki rolled her eyes. “About ten quadrillion miles.”

 

Mai snorted from her mount a short distance behind them. Azula shot her a disapproving glare.

 

“And how long should it take to travel such a distance?” Azula asked.

 

“Another day or two.”

 

“I see.” Azula said, before returning to her position of fierce and burning apathy towards the Kyoshi warriors. Suki let out a breath.

 

“So, your uncle.” She asked, “How long have you been looking for him?”

 

Azula mulled over the question. Did she owe the girl an answer? Not really. Would not answering be rude? She had to stay in good graces with the warriors if she wanted to get into Ba Sing Se, so perhaps it was better to maintain a reasonable level of reciprocated interest, despite her low opinion of the peasant fighters. So, the question. How long had she been searching for Iroh? Since the siege. How long ago had that been?.. Only two months. Azula was surprised at that, as she had felt like this mission of hers had been going on for over a year.

 

Azula heard a sigh as she opened her mouth to answer. She turned to glare at Mai and was surprised to find it was actually Hamari, one of Suki’s fighters. She rode alongside Mai, and both women had a disinterested look on their faces. Azula returned her attention to Suki, and said, “Two months.”

 

Suki raised an eyebrow. “Is that so?”

 

“Yes.” Azula said flatly, and swallowing her own distaste for the lower classes, asked, “How long have you been traveling?”

 

Suki blinked once and returned her attention to the road before her. She shrugged. “Four or five months now I think. After the Avatar stopped at our village and helped us defeat Prince Zuko-”

 

“You’ve met Aang?” Ty Lee asked, interrupting the conversation. Azula shot her a warning glare.

 

“I- yes,” Suki said, taken aback. “And his friends, Katara and Sokka.”

 

“Oh, only met Sokka , did you?” Sara teased, emphasizing ‘met”.

 

Suki held an embarrassed expression for a moment, before banishing it. “Well, I did make him wear our uniform.”

 

“And kissed him.” Haruhi butted in.

 

“I- Har- That’s neither here nor there,” Suki said, blushing through her face paint. Azula twitched, barely stopping herself from electrocuting the girl.

 

“Is that so?” Azula asked, attempting to sound casual. Then, she added through gritted teeth, “Good for you.”

 

It was fine. That was months before they had even met, Sokka had- why did she even care? He was an enemy that she would hunt down and bring back to her father. Maybe keep him around as a servant. Yes, that was actually a good idea. She would take him home with her, and make him carry her around on his back. She would insist that he care for her personally, fanning her and feeding her grapes as the summer sun shone on his dark shoulde- Azula shook her head. What was that? She blushed slightly and hoped that nobody had noticed her vacant expression.

 

“Azula?” Ty Lee asked, with a tone of concern.

 

“What?” Azula asked quickly.

 

“Did you hear what I said?” Suki said, a tone of mild irritation seeping through.

 

“Of course.” Azula lied.

 

“So what do you think?” Suki asked.

 

“I don’t really care,” Azula answered. Suki looked aghast.

 

“You don’t care if the prince of the Fire Nation is teaching the Avatar firebending?”

 

Azula reeled for a moment and then shrugged. “It’s just a rumor.”

 

“It’s a lie!” Suki said vehemently. “There’s no way that Sokka would let that snake join…”

 

She trailed off. She gave Azula an appraising look. Then she did the same for Mai and Ty Lee. Azula stiffened. Mai and Ty Lee exchanged a look out of the corner of their eyes.

 

“You’re not really from Omashu, are you?”

---

Sand. Lots of sand. Sokka squinted with his sight enhanced through Koh’s mantle, and with a jolt , he realized he could see… more sand. If he looked directly at the ground below them, he could make out the individual grains of the stuff.

 

“Do you see anything yet?” Aang asked. Sokka decidedly didn’t snap at him. The team had taken it in turns to ask him every fifteen minutes.

 

“No. I can see sand, but that’s roughly the size of it.”

 

“Oh,” Aang asked. He looked at Sokka, still unnerved by the shadows that obscured his eyes. It seemed to him that ‘shadows’ didn’t adequately describe it. Better to say a sheer absence, as if part of the world had fallen away, leaving naught but blackness in its wake. It reminded him of crooked, broken, unclean things.

 

“Well, let us know when you do. We should get to Oasis pretty soon.”

 

“Would it help if we flew higher?” Zuko asked from his position on Appa’s head, having switched with Aang earlier in the afternoon. Sokka shrugged. “Give it a try.”

 

Zuko steered the bison skyward , a scending hundreds of feet in a few moments. As they climbed ever upward, Sokka realized that for the past half hour, he had only bothered to look over one side of the saddle. He blushed slightly and blamed the heat and Zuko’s insane water rationing. Heat and thirst had been playing tricks on him, leaving him slow and dimwitted. In such a state, he would be no match for any foe, such as Zhao. Sokka’s lip curled in anger as he thought of the mad admiral, the man who had taken Yue from him. If he faced him in that moment, exhausted and thirsty, could he beat him? Sokka doubted it. He stood and went to his waterskin, carefully not alerting Zuko. He uncorked it and drank deeply. He wiped his brow with the bandages wrapping his forearms. He wondered how he would fare against Azula, should they meet that day.

 

He would lose certainly, as he found his legs shaky with exhaustion. Would she be in the same predicament in this heat? He spared a glance for Zuko, who seemed largely unaffected by it. He shook his head. Firebenders.

 

He plopped down in the saddle and looked out over the side he had been neglecting. His enhanced vision raked the horizon, but his mind dwelled with Azula. Raven hair lining a perfect face, eyes the color of sunlight. Lips like... A tower. Sokka shook his head and rubbed at his eyes. There, on the eastern horizon, a tower rose from the desert sands.

---

Author’s Note

 

Sorry guys. I’ve been busy, working seven days every week leaves little time for hobbies. Just got back from a little vacation though, and am hoping to get back into the swing of things with this and other hobbies.

 

Sorry for the poor quality, i work way too much and have way too little money,

 

We’re nearly at the library, and after that, Azula has an arc that has had me drooling with anticipation since day one. Oh, I can’t wait, I’ve been building to this for so long. Man, I am so excited for it.

 

Hopefully I can get back to posting 1-2 chapters a week like I did last year.

 

Charlemagne OR WHATEVER, Or Charlie. That's not my name, but it's way easier to type.

 

10/08/2023

 

Chapter 45: He Who Knows Ten Thousand Things.

He Who Knows Ten Thousand Things

The monolithic tower stood as a lone sentinel. It rose from the ever - shifting sands as a pillar of majesty. Sokka placed a hand on the stone and was surprised to find it cool to the touch, despite the heat of the desert sun. He glanced over his shoulder at the others, who were talking amongst themselves.

 

“I’m not going in.” Sokka heard Toph’s voice carry the short distance from where she stood. Zuko rolled his eyes and began to climb the bison's tail.

 

“Fine then.” Aang said. He leapt skyward and continued speaking as he alighted on Appa’s head. “You can keep Appa company.”

 

“And stand watch for the Fire Nation.” Katara added as she clambered up the tail.

 

“Eh, not really.” Toph said, “I can’t really see much in this sand. Everything ’ s all fuzzy.”

 

Appa grunted in response as he rose. Sokka glared at his friends as he stood at the tower's base. He reached into his pocket , drew out a piece of stale bread, and tossed it at Aang, hitting the Avatar in his left ear. Aang yelped and looked around for the source of the projectile and saw Sokka standing on the ground. Aang grinned at him in chagrin, before returning Appa to the sand. Sokka took a running leap, using Koh’s shadow to force power into his limbs. He arced gracefully through the air, flipping once and landing on his sister's foot. Katara’s eyes watered and she punched her brother in the neck, before clutching at her foot.

 

“Oh, Sorry, Katar-argh!” Sokka’s apology cut off as his sister's fist connected with his larynx, causing him to choke and splutter, gasping for breath. Zuko stared at the pair of them in outright disbelief, and the feeling of shame rose up in him. How had these bumbling buffoons evaded him for so long?

 

Zuko shut his eyes for a moment and took a deep breath. “Can you two just stop? We have to stay focused, we have no idea what might be in there.”

 

“It’s a library. There are books in there.” Katara snapped as she rubbed at the throbbing mass of flesh attached to the end of her leg. She unstoppered the water at her hip and began healing the appendage. She wasn’t sure if it was broken, but it certainly felt like a squashed melon. She snarled at Sokka, “Why are you so heavy?!”

 

“No, it might be a library.” Zuko said back, “For all we know it could be an old watch tower, or a hideout for cannibals, or maybe some kind of man - eating desert monster has taken up refuge inside.” Zuko saw Aang looking at him with an incredulous expression. Zuko pinched the bridge of his nose in exasperation. “The point is, we can’t say what it is, or what’s inside. We have to be careful.”

 

“I’m not heavy,” Sokka rasped, rubbing his neck, “I was moving fast and landed on your foot. Anyway, Zuko’s right. We don’t know what is in there, we have to be cautious.” He ended his sentence with a coughing fit. He reached for his own water, and stared Zuko down, daring him to intervene. Zuko just rolled his eyes.

 

Reaching the top of the spire, Team Avatar stared into the open window. It was dark inside, and only Sokka could see the interior. Aang and Katara looked at him expectantly, and Zuko raised an eyebrow in confusion, as he was unsure what the First Son was expected to do.

 

“It’s just masonry. I can’t see any more than that, the tower’s too tall.” Sokka reported.

 

Zuko paused and looked at Sokka, surprised. He had been in the process of igniting a fireball for light when the swordsman had spoken. Zuko squinted into the darkness of the tower and couldn’t make out a thing.

 

“How can you tell?” Zuko asked, “I can’t see anything.”

 

“Sokka can see in the dark.” Aang said, “It’s one of his spirit powers.” Aang waggled his fingers and made a ominous voice, causing Katara to chuckle and Sokka to roll his eyes.

 

“How many spirit powers does he have?” Zuko asked curiously, his hand still poised to create a flame.

 

“It’s not important right now.” Sokka said, fastening a rope to the window. He tossed the rest of the coil in and began his descent into the structure. As he passed the threshold, he felt a subtle weight settle over him. He climbed down to rope and became morose, and his sorrow increased as he saw the contents of the building.

 

It was a grand library, perhaps hundreds of times greater than that of the north pole. The space was illuminated with a soft, pale light given off by lanterns that shone without flame. The Library stretched down for countless floors, and S okka could hardly make out the ground floor without enhancing his vision. Shelves upon shelves of books and scrolls stretched out as far as the natural eye could see. Sokka grimaced as he took in the sight, and a lance of fire seemed to strike his heart. Yue would have loved that place.

 

Sokka came to the end of the rope, and was impressed to see that it hung only a few feet from the floor of a catwalk that spanned a wide open space in the library’s center. He glanced over the rail and found that he could just make out a seemingly small square of tiled ground. The majesty of the building was overwhelming, and the strange effect it seemed to have on his mood made it even more so. He felt like weeping, like throwing himself into the open air and falling to his death. Sokka shook his head and dragged a hand down his face. He had to stay focused, he needed to maintain control of his senses. He couldn’t fathom why it was affecting him so, he glanced back up toward the rope and saw the others making their way down. Aang glided down and chatted with Katara, and the two chatted amicably. Zuko looked to be his usual grumpy self. Sokka doubted that they were being influenced in the same way. He licked his teeth and stared idly into the distance. What could be the cause? A random episode of… teenage angst? A delayed effect of a blow to his larynx? Maybe his thyroid had been damaged. Sokka didn’t know. He was certain, however, that it could not be allowed to continue. He closed his eyes and reached for the void. Calm suffused him as he entered into great emptiness, the open space that filled his soul felt… like nothing. Sokka blinked and waved his hand through the air. It was thick, viscous even, and seemed to weigh him down as he moved.

 

A nagging sense of familiarity filled him as if he had suffered this before. He strove for the memory, but couldn't quite find it. It was almost as if he had entered the Spirit World, but… no. It could not be. He had not left his body behind, he had not stepped out from his mortal vessel.

 

Katara and Aang alighted on the bridge, followed closely by Zuko. The three of them marveled at the splendor of the spirit library. Aang and Katara stared over the edge of the catwalk. Zuko looked around, his eye narrowed as he watched for danger.

 

“Do you feel it?” Sokka asked, addressing his companions. Before they could respond, Sokka used the hand sign he and the others had designated for silence. He turned his head to stare into the shadows behind him, and saw nothing. He listened carefully, and heard a light clicking sound. He closed his eyes and focused on his hearing, and spoke to the others. “Be quiet. We are not alone.”

 

Sokka listened carefully, hearing the light scuff of something soft on stone, and the click of something sharp on the tiled floors. He turned with the sound until it stopped, and opened his eyes to stare right at Zuko. He couldn’t see anything, and the Fire Prince stared at him in confusion. Sokka blinked and it was there.

 

A great owl, towering over Zuko as it stood behind him, its wings spread as it stared down at the scarred man. Katara gasped and Aang turned his staff on the creature. Before either of them could move, Sokka had drawn his Regret and the glow of moonlight spilled across the floor. Zuko whirled in place and took a step back, igniting twin flames in each of his hands. Before any of them took so much as a step towards the monster, it spoke.

 

“I am Wan Shi Tong, He Who Knows Ten Thousand Things. You have come unbidden into my domain, and I do not suffer your kind to live.”

 

“Wan Shi Tong,” Aang said, straightening, “I am the Avatar, and I have come because I need to know things that I can’t learn anywhere else, please allow us to-”

 

“I care nothing for you, or your quest, Avatar.” The Owl said, still glaring at Zuko. He took a step towards him. His shape changed, he moved, and his voice distorted, “I find you in an ill company, it is he that I despise.”

 

Wan Shi Tong bent low into Zuko's face and spoke once more. “You should not have come to this place, firebender. You are not welcome here.”

---

Azula rolled her eyes. “Okay, Rocky.”

 

Suki glared at her. “That only makes me more sure.”

 

“How does that make you think we’re not from Omashu?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“Only people from the Fire Nation colonies say that,” Haruhi said. “So, what’s the real story? Are you looking for a better life in Ba Sing Se? Hoping to get away from the ashmaker savages?”

 

Ty Lee looked taken aback at the offensive term, and Mai slouched in her saddle even further. Sugar Foot squawked in merry enjoyment over being ridden.

 

“So what if we are?” Azula asked. Suki shrugged.

 

“It’s common enough.” The Kyoshi said, “Most people of Earth Kingdom descent are treated like dirt. Refugees that spread from the occupied territories move east and settle in new villages or cities. I’m guessing that's why you’re looking for your uncle? He moved to Ba Sing Se for a better life?”

 

“You caught me.” Azula lied. “What now?”

 

Suki shrugged. “Nothing really, but you can get off your high ostrich-horse.”

 

“I have no idea as to what you are referring to,” Azula said, lifting her chin disdainfully.

 

“That! That, right there!” Suki said irritably, “The way you foppishly treat everyone like they’re beneath you! It’s the most annoying thing ever seen by man or spirit.”

 

Azula glared at Suki. “I do not act foppishly.”

 

Yes, you most certainly do.” Sara said.

 

Azula considered setting the Kyoshi Warriors on fire. She decided against it and said, “Define foppish.”

 

There was a pause, for the Kyoshi Warriors did not know the official definition, nor did they know if it was an actual word. As the silence lengthened, Azula began to smirk in smug triumph, until Akara said, “Foppish: to act in a manner reminiscent of Azula’s behavior from the past few days.”

 

Laughter, snickering, giggling, a guffaw or two followed. To Azula’s utmost irritation, Ty Lee joined in.

 

“You could tone it down a bit.” Mai told Azula, “It’s not doing much good.”

 

Azula raised an eyebrow at… was that a rebuke? Mai, rebuke her?! Azula, princess of the Fire Nation, firebender of the highest order, a descendent of Agni himself! The next to sit the Dragon Throne?! Her lip twitched in anger. She took a deep breath, forcing herself to not strike down her insolent, disrespectful, closest friends. Perhaps Mai had a point. Pretend the peasant was not a peasant, don’t disdain their very presence. 

 

“Perhaps you have a point,” Azula said, maintaining a demeanor of outward calm, throwing in a touch of embarrassment. “I suppose I can be…” She waved her hand in a vague gesture.

 

“Azula can get a bit awkward around new people.” Mai supplied, “She had a very strict schedule growing up.”

 

“Oh,” Suki said, “That makes sense. I’m sorry we got off on the wrong foot, let's start over and try to be friends.”

 

Azula paused for a second. She would not deign for a moment to befriend such a lowborn Earth Kingdom girl, but she had a role to play. “Of course.”

---

Sokka moved like lightning, moving dozens of feet to stand beside Zuko with his sword held in a high guard. A mighty wind billowed around them and the Avatar was on Zuko’s other side, staff in hand.

 

“We mean you no harm!” Aang said, as Katara joined them. “All we seek is -!”

 

“I care not for what you seek.” The Owl said, his neck stretching and contorting like a serpent, “Humans are hardly welcome in my library, and firebenders are forbidden entirely. He has come here unbidden, and I do not take such violations lightly.”

 

“Great Spirit,” Zuko said with surprising humility, “I meant you no disrespect. I have come only to help The Avatar. We need to know things, and the information can only be found here! Please, I did not know that firebenders were forbad to enter your library! I meant no disrespect! Please, allow us to gain the knowledge we seek!”

 

Wan Shi Tong blinked a slow, ponderous blink. He spoke, “You are a gracious one, and for that, I am pleased, but gracious or not, you are a firebender. Your life was forfeit the moment you entered my library.”

 

Silence fell like mist, and Zuko stepped back. He began a firebending form. Sokka shifted his grip and stepped sideways to flank the spirit, but before they could move more than a few steps Aang spoke. The wind swirled around him, and his voice rang out in the silence.

 

“No. Zuko is my friend, my teacher, and my ally. He is under my protection. You will not harm him, or any of my friends.” As the airbender spoke, his tattoos flickered briefly. Wan Shi Tong cocked his head to the side as he studied the monk.

 

“Is that so? He cannot remain in this library and remain alive.” Wan Shi Tong said.

 

Aang’s face twisted in anger, and it seemed as though battle was inevitable. Then, Katara spoke. “Zuko, maybe you should wait outside. Keep Toph company.”

 

Wan Shi Tong looked at her, and then studied the Avatar. “I find this compromise... Acceptable.”

 

Aang straightened up and smiled. “Great!”

 

“I don’t want to wait outside! I-” Zuko was cut off when Sokka smacked him on the back of the head.

 

“Fine.” Zuko walked over to the rope and began to climb out of the library.

 

Wan Shi Tong watched Zuko with narrowed eyes until he climbed out of the window they had come through. As the Prince departed, the Spirit turned to consider the others. He cocked his head to the side and spoke.

 

“The rest of you may stay, though I have stipulations. None of the knowledge in my collection may be used to destroy your enemies. Never again shall I allow my work to be used for such a purpose.” As The Owl spoke, Aang and Katara exchanged a look and then glanced at Sokka. The First Son did not so much as blink. Wrapped in the void, he was unaffected by the tension of the moment, as m ight a great stone be unaffected by stormwinds on a winter sea. He stood as a monolith, still as starlight and barren as the desert sands. An empty vessel, devoid of soul.

 

“That’s fine with us, right guys?” Aang answered, forcing a smile. Katara agreed and gave a forced smile of her own. Sokka tilted his head in much the same manner as The Owl, but said nothing. Wan Shi Tong met his gaze and raised an eyebrow.

 

“Tell me,” Sokka said in a cold, empty voice, “What is this place?”

 

“...It’s a library?.” Katara said, confused, turning her statement into a question.

 

“Yes,” Sokka answered, “But it's… something more.”

 

“I feel it too.” Aang said, “It’s almost like being in the Spirit World, but not quite. I can’t put my finger on it.”

 

Wan Shi Tong gazed at Sokka, his avian eyes filled with suspicion. “It does not surprise me that the Avatar sensed it, but how did you come to know this? Are you Spirit…” The Great Owl’s eyes filled with distaste. “Very clever. Bringing the firebender to distract me, that one of his may go undetected.”

 

“What?” Katara asked, “One of whose?”

 

“The Face Stealer.” Wan Shi Tong flicked his eyes to her for an instant, and then returned his attention back to Sokka. “How much power has he given you? It appears that you would have gained near nothing, else you would not be able to bear the spell of misery on this place.”

 

“Spell of misery?” Aa n g asked, looking around as if he might see it. “I don't notice anything..”

 

“You would not. As the Avatar, you are both human and spirit. There is no bond, you are one. The Spirit Bound, however, would be so overcome with grief and misery that the mere effort to stand would seem an insurmountable challenge, they would wither and die as summer grass under autumn’s chill. It is a precaution to keep the other great spirits from meddling in my affairs. La especially likes to play his little jokes. He has sent more than one champion here to vex me. After four millenia, I still find glitter on occasion. He is why I have built my library in the desert, when once it stood on a cliff by the sea.”

 

“You still have not answered me.” Sokka said, his voice seeming to echo as if from afar.

 

“This library is my domain, and as such exists in both the physical and spirit worlds. In this place they are not separate, but the same.” Wan Shi Tong said.

 

“If that’s true, then where are all of the spirits?” Aang asked, looking around as if to spot one hiding behind a shelf.

 

“That brings us to my second stipulation. To be allowed entry and perusal of my archive, you must provide an addition to my collection. Any knowledge that I do not already possess shall grant you entry. It is seldom that new discoveries are made by the spirits, and there is little in that realm that I do not know.”

 

“Uh…” Aang said, looking at his friends for ideas.

 

“Ooh, here!” Katar drew out her own wanted poster and presented it to The Owl. Wan Shi Tong examined it and nodded. Taking her lead, Aang drew out Sokka’s poster. Wan Shi Tong stared at it in amusement. “Sokka: the Stupid Genius. How imperial.”

 

The Owl let his eyes fall on the First Son. “And what do you bring to my collection?”

 

Sokka pulled Zuko’s copy of  Fire Lord Sozin’s On Heat and Motion, which the new combustion bender had found in a side pouch inside of his pack quite unexpectedly, and handed it as tribute. Wan Shi Tong’s eyes flashed for a moment, but returned to their original outlook so quickly Sooka would have thought he had imagined it, had he not dwelled with the space of perfect clarity.

 

“I find your offerings acceptable. You may search through my collection, and my knowledge seekers shal attend and assist you as needed.” As he spoke, he gestured with a wing and three foxes appeared as if from nothing. Each of the foxes dipped their head and trotted over to stand at the feet of one of the members of team avatar. “I hope you find the knowledge that you seek.”

 

As he spoke, Wan Shi Tong spread his wings, and with a mighty gust he leapt into the air and was gone.

---

 

Azula, her friends, and the Kyoshi Warriors had entered the village of Putao two hours past, and after making use of the baths, Azula and Suki went into town for supplies and news. Putao was a neutral town despite its close proximity to Ba Sing Se, at less than a day’s journey from the capital. As a neutral town, it acted as an information hub from all sides of the war. Messages and rumors blew on from all the distant corners of the earth, carried as if by wind.

 

Azula stalked along beside Suki, and the two didn’t speak much. Azula stopped to examine and examined a message board, and frowned as she read allowed, “Wanted: The O ne-Eyed Dragon, also known as the banished Prince Zuko of the Fire Nation, for treason and treachery to the D ragon T hrone.”

 

“One-Eyed Dragon? But he has both his eyes…” Suki trailed off as she spotted a notice bearing the crest of both Water Tribes. An image of Sokka was present on the poster, his eyes cold and distant as he wielded a white sword. Her eyes widened slightly and read the poster as Azula had, “Chief Hakoda of the South and Chief Arnook of the North have agreed to unite the tribes into a single nation, under the leadership of the First Son, henceforth known as the Long Mind of The Waters, Master of The Moonlit Sword, and Living Soul of The Sea. All hail Sokka, Emperor of The Water Tribes.”

 

“What?!” Azula exclaimed, pushing Suki out of the way. She read the notice several times, before accepting it as fact. Her uncle had spoken the truth, and she was shocked by how the news had spread in the course of a week and a half.

 

“That’s… amazing.” Suki said, “I knew he was the First Son, but now he’s the Emperor of The Water Tribes… And he’s kind of an idiot.”

 

Azula snorted despite herself. For yes, Sokka was kind of an idiot.

 

Suki noticed the snort and smiled slightly. It wasn’t much, but it was a start. Azula was a good fighter, and Suki thought she might yet be persuaded to join her team.

 

“So, what is it like in the Fire Nation colonies?” Suki asked, as they resumed their walk to the market.

 

Azula shrugged. “Not too bad, really. The food there is better than anywhere else I’ve been.”

 

“Really? Is it all Fire Nation food?” Suki asked.

 

Azula, having never had anything other than Fire Nation cuisine and travel rations, said, “Yes. The Fire Nation have dominated the Earth Kingdom in all ways, be it war, culture or cuisine.”

 

Suki bore a look of great sadness. “It’s awful, I know. I can’t imagine what it must be like for you, having to live under the boot of those tyrants. Have you ever even had Earth Kingdom food? Read any of our stories? Do true, proud Earth Kingdom folk sing our songs in secret?”

 

“I- No.” Azula said, just as a small hoard of children raced past them in the street, chased by one boy in an ill-fitting black cloak, which he likely took from his father for the game they were playing. Suddenly the boy drew two sticks and shouted, making the other children stop and face him.

 

“Beware!” Shouted the boy, “Abandon all hope and quake in fear! Draw tight the rope, his blade is near! ‘Someone save me!’ the brave man says, ‘Cometh nigh The Rez!’”

 

As one, the children shouted, “Cometh nigh The Rez!”

 

The group scattered in all directions, fleeing the boy in the cloak, obviously playing the  part of The Rez, although Azula didn’t know what that was. 

 

Suki laughed at the sight of the children playing, and upon seeing Azula’s confused expression she said, “This is what I mean! You haven’t even heard of The Rez, have you?”

 

“No.” Azula rolled her eyes. “What is ‘The Rez’?”

 

“It’s a fairy tale, a story about The Shadow Knight, also called The Rez. There’s even a sort of poem about him. I- hold on, I think I have a copy-” Suki began digging in her bag and pulled out a small book entitled King’s Dark Tidings . She opened the book to the first page and handed it to Azula. The Princess of the Fire Nation looked disdainfully at the small book. Suki looked at her expectantly and Azula began to read. *1

At the hour, on the morrow, not with certain sadness, woe, or sorrow, Prey ye never see him coming, never feel thy heart’s hard thrumming. May ye never mind the missive, forbidden song unsung in writings – In dark and devilish dirge, “Come I to thee with King’s Dark Tidings,” Fall to dream, thy breath deceased, dance with sylph, a soul released, But ‘twas day! – with bright and luminous halls – no shadowed walls! Knight of Shadows, ruler’s summons; ride thee swiftly, bear no sightings – “Kingdom calls,” yon mark says – “Cometh nigh, the Rez.”

“How quaint,” Azula said as she returned the book. Suki blinked at her in disbelief.

 

“You’ve never even heard of it? The Rez? Brother to the Earth King? Elite assassin?”

“Never in my life.”

 

“Of course not.” Suki said, “The Fire Nation marches in, destroys our homes, and erases our culture, even down to the stories we tell our children. Even a make-believe story is burned away. And for what? Does anyone know why they burn and pillage and murder? I don’t think they even have a reason.”

 

Azula stared at Suki for a moment, baffled. Was the Kyoshi so ignorant? Was that pathetic, backwater island so isolated that they didn’t even know the purpose of the war? Azula decided it was her prerogative to enlighten the warrior.

 

“Fire Lord Sozin started the war of enlightenment to share the greatness of the Fire Nation with the other, more primitive nations of the world,” Azula said.

 

Suki stared at her unblinking. “Seriously?”

 

“Wha- Yes!” Azula said, “That’s what they teach us in schools-”

 

Suki cut her off. “That doesn’t make any sense! Share their greatness with the other ‘ Primitive’ nations?” She used her hands to draw quotations in the air, “I’m sure that the Air Nomads were super impressed by how advanced the Fire Nation’s method of burning them all to death was.”

 

“I’m not surprised that’s what they think, as it’s the stupidest thing I’ve ever heard.”

 

Azula said nothing, but silently realized that Suki had a point, it was… a poor reason. If that was truly the purpose of the war, then it was wholly ineffective. The other nations didn’t hold them in high regard. Quite the opposite really, even the mention of the Fire Nation was met with scorn and contempt. The Fire Nation was truly hated the world over when once they were loved and admired if King Bumi’s testimony was to be believed. In fact, she had once read of a tournament of games in which all the nations gathered to compete in good faith, and many first - hand accounts claimed that the Fire Nation had been the nation to found the games in the first place, and it was mostly sports created by her country that were played the world over. Other historical accounts had claimed that Fire Nation goods had been in enormous demand before the war, their art and music traveled to the distant corners of the earth. These things gave validity to the Mad King ' s claims. Where the Fire Nation was now hated, they had once been loved. It made Azula question her father, her grandfather, and her great-grandfather. A crack was wrought in her conviction that day, and a sliver of doubt took residence in the gap.

---

Ash. Rows and rows of burned out shelves. An entire wing of the library burned to ruin. Sokka looked upon the destruction wrought within the great library and felt nothing. He stepped forward into the ruined section of the archive and inspected the piles of crumbled cinder. He dug through it, despite the darkness of the ruined wing. There was nothing, no scrap of parchment remained unburned, save that in the display case in the entryway. Sokka turned from that place and walked silent throughout the blackened halls of the devastated wing of the library.

 

He came upon a room fashioned to look like the sky. In its center, there was a set of dials representing days, months, and years respectively. Sokka set the date he had found on the scrap of parchment in the display 

 

He did not walk alone, for ever out of sight lurked the great owl, watching, waiting, spying. Sokka stopped and drew his Regret. The blade glowed with the soft white light of the moon as he spoke. “I know you’re there. I can hear you.”

 

Wan Shi Tong stepped into the open and inspected Sokka with a disgusted look. “I know what you seek. Despite your lies, I have not been fooled. I know you mean to use my archive to destroy your enemies.”

 

“Yes.” Sokka said, as if the issue was of no consequence.

 

“I shall not let you. Never again will my collection be used for such a purpose.”

 

“You will,” Sokka said, leveling Regret at the spirit. Wan Shi Tong’s eyes locked on the blade and filled with curiosity. He stepped towards Sokka and inspected the sword as if he felt no danger at the threats of the First Son.

 

“You haven’t a chance at defeating me.” The Owl said, “Despite the remarkable sword that you carry. I can see the mark of two great spirits. Tui and Koh. However, did you find such a thing?”

 

“I made it,” Sokka said, eyes never leaving.

 

“Is that so?” Wan Shi Tong asked. “It’s fascinating the way that it stores light, absorbing it through Koh’s mark and storing it within the blade. I wonder what other properties it may have. It shall make a fine addition to my collection.”

 

Sokka abruptly lowered his sword. “It belongs to me.”

 

“That matters little. You shall not leave this place, for I am taking my knowledge back. You will dwell within my library forever more.” Wan Shi Tong spoke as he spread his wings.

 

“I cannot defeat you.” Sokka said, “But he can.”

 

“The Avatar is not fully realized, he does not possess the strength to best me here, in my domain.” Wan Shi Tong began to beat his wings, causing dust to billow through the air.

 

“Not Aang , ” Sokka said, and as he spoke he took up Koh’s mantle. His shadow lengthened and writhed across the ground. It stretched and bent unnaturally until it surrounded Wan Shi Tong.

 

“If I call him, he will appear.” Sokka’s voice grew distant, and it twisted and warped like cloth in the wind. “In this place where the spirit and physical worlds overlap, he can reach us. It is the nature of our bond.”

 

Wan Shi Tong’s eyes widened, and for a moment they held an echo of fear, and were soon filled with the roar of fury. “You would call the Face Stealer, in hopes that he defeat s me? I, He Who Knows Ten Thousand Things?! I, the keeper of knowledge both known and lost!?”

 

“Yes,” Sokka said. “You’re afraid. Terrified. You hide behind your anger, but I can smell it on you. You know that should I call him, he will strike you down.”

 

Wan Shi Tong scowled. “Collect your companions and get out”

 

The knowledge spirit spun in place and was gone. Sokka listened carefully but could hear nothing of him. He began to seek out Aang and Katara when he heard a faint rumble, nearly the sound of distant thunder. He channeled more of Koh’s Shadow into his hearing and listened. He could hear Aang and Katara flipping through their tomes, looking for secrets to aid them, and he heard in the distance, outside the library… fire. The rumble of an explosion, sands shifting unnaturally. Shouting. A battle outside the library.

---

 

*1

An excerpt from the poem at the start of Reign of Madness, Book two of Kel Kade’s Kings dark Tidings. The scene regarding The Rez is a reference to that series. I highly recommend it to all of you, I've gone through it on audible seven times this year. It's my most enjoyable series to date.

 

Author’s Note:

 

Hello all

 

I hope you’re doing well. I’ve had a bit of an eventful month. Work, relationship, too much work, no time for relationship, relationship ends. Girl gets in car crash hours later, is fine. Spend hours in hospital waiting with her and her parents. Wild day.

 

Anyway, I hope that you like this update, though I’m not 100% satisfied with how the end turned out. I’m sure its a shock to see an update in less the 2 months after the last

 

Please comment. It makes me write faster lol

 

Charlemagne OR WHATEVER

Chapter 46: The Giggles

Chapter Forty Six

 

The Giggles

 

Aang moved through the dusty halls of the library. He followed his fox-guide as it presumably led him toward the prophecy… section? Department? Maybe there was some sort of divination nook? Aang wasn’t really sure and he didn't want to ask, just in case it made him look stupid.

 

Left. Then a right. Down a flight of stairs, up two more, across a bridge, and down more stairs. Well, the point is that it was a needlessly complicated route, and Aang thought that the fox was trying to keep him from finding it again. He wouldn’t have trouble getting out, as he would simply fly back to the tower window on his glider.

 

Eventually, the fox led him to a plain wooden door with a placard that read: 預言者と破壊者. The Hall of Prophets and destroyers.

 

A shiver ran down the avatar’s spine as he read the name on the door.

 

“Well,” Aang said, pushing the door open and entering, “That inspires confidence.”

---

 

Katara watched as her brother walked in unnatural silence after the knowledge seeker, waiting for him to disappear and then for a time afterward. She turned her head to see Aang following his own fox-guide-spirit-thing. She took a deep breath, knelt down, and spoke softly to the fox, “I need all the information you have on the Face Stealer and his champions.”

 

She took care to speak as softly as she could and started when she heard the soft rustle of feathers. When she turned to see where the noise had come from, there was nothing to be found. Looking back at the fox, she found it with its head tilted to the side, watching her curiously. “Well?” Katara prompted, “Can you help me or not?”

 

The fox yipped once and darted off, forcing Katara to run after it. She didn’t follow it long before the fox ducked behind a tapestry, and when Katara moved the decoration to follow after, she could see nothing. All was in the shadow.

 

She took a cautious step, finding herself at the top of a spiraling staircase. There was, she noted with grim acceptance, a complete lack of light. It was the kind of dark you usually only experience when sleeping blindfolded, at night, in a cave several hundred feet below ground. She was delighted. It was time to learn how to cheat a spirit of the shadows and misery by fumbling her way through complete darkness down a stairwell that was probably very tall.

 

She made her way slowly down the staircase, and couldn't have gone more than six feet when she came to a wooden door. Surprise and relief flooded through her as she found the handle, turning it, and pushing the door open.

 

A sudden, bright light assaulted her when she stepped into the vast room. The light fell on every surface. It came from nowhere and everywhere, leaving not a sliver of the room unilluminated. As her eyes adjusted, Katara saw a single shelf, filled with perhaps a hundred scrolls. A low table sat beside the shelf, upon which sat the fox, looking at her intently.

---

“So, you’re saying… you don’t know what math is?” Azula said, with mocking condescension.

 

Suki took a slow breath, before saying, “I cannot do calculus, and I have never heard of it before in my life. That is what I am saying.”

 

Azula smirked and shook her head, making a tut-tut noise. “You poor country bumpkin, never heard of calculus, can’t perform quadratic equations in your head. Why, I'd be impressed if you could rea-” Azula was cut off by Suki.

 

“Fop. Fop fop, foppity-fop, fop. That’s all I can hear right now.” Suki said, rolling her eyes.

 

Azula narrowed her eyes, before waving her hand in a vague, dismissive gesture. “You’re just jealous.”

 

“Okay.”

 

“You’re taking all the fun out of this.”

 

Suki raised an eyebrow, “I’m taking all the fun out of this?! What fun is there in it?”

 

Azula shrugged. “I’ve always enjoyed teasing my friends.” She said, thinking of Mai and Ty Lee. “Although, I will admit that it’s not so enjoyable on the receiving end.”

 

“Oh, so we’re friends now, are we?” Suki said, raising an eyebrow.

 

“No,” Azula said, wondering why the peasant would think such a thing.

 

“You just said we were.” Suki countered.

 

“I said no such thing,” Azula stated.

 

“Aww,” Suki said, in a testing voice, “Is someone a bit shy? That explains so much! It’s okay Zuzu, I know it’s hard for some people.”

 

“I- Wha-” Azula was beginning to feel rather angry. “Don’t call me that!”

 

“Call you what? Zuzu?” Suki asked, the malicious grin rendering the innocent tone of voice she used ineffective, “Why not? It’s such a cute name, isn’t it Zuzu?”

 

“That is my brother’s name,” Azula said, considering setting Suki and the rest of the village on fire.

 

“Oh.” Suki said, “Is he back home then?”

 

“No.”

 

“I see. Is he…” Suki trailed off. Her face formed a grim expression.

 

“Dead? No, not as far as I know.” Azula said, staring ahead as they made their way back to the inn.

 

“That’s good. Do you know where he is?”

 

Azula shook her head.

 

“Is he fighting the Fire Nation?” Suki asked.

 

Azula ignored her.

 

Suki turned her eyes away from Azula. “Zuzu is a stupid name.”

 

Azula snorted before she could stop herself. It was a stupid name, which was exactly why she called him by it. That, and it irritated him. Suki, hearing Azula’s snort, began to laugh. Suki’s laughter made Azula laugh, and in a matter of seconds, the pair of them were laughing like a pair of hyena-bunnies.

 

They were still laughing when they entered the inn and found most of the Kyoshi warriors clustered around Ty Lee at a table in the common room. Mai, for her part, was lounging against a wall by herself, watching the door. When Azula and Suki came in, carrying their supplies and laughing, Mai’s normally impassive face became awash in shock.

 

“Azula! Are you okay?” Mai asked, rushing over to the Fire Nation Princess.

 

“What?” She said, suppressing her laughter, “Of course I am. Why?”

 

“You…” Mai’s face returned to its usual stoic mask, “You have the giggles.”

 

A slow, bright, righteous anger filled Azula. “I do not have the giggles.”

 

“I do not have the giggles!” Suki said, in a high-pitched tone that sounded nothing like Azula.

 

Azula tried to stay angry, but as Suki began to chortle she lost her composure and started… giggling. She fell to her knees, dragging Suki with her in a fit of laughter. She was Azula, blood of the Dragon, Firebender of the highest caliber, long descended from Agni himself and the heir to the dragon throne. She did not balk at any bender, she did not blink at quick men with clever swords… but all the same; she had the giggles.

 

The more she thought of how ridiculous the idea was, the harder she laughed. She laughed and laughed, and then Mai joined in. They laughed until there were tears in their eyes, and they couldn’t breathe for the burning in their muscles.

 

As Azula laughed, unbeknownst to her another crack formed in the foundation of her convictions. Her resolve, her absolute belief in the divine right of the Fire Nation, in their destiny to conquer the Earth, began to crumble and fall away.

---

Katara carefully poured over the scroll, entitled: On the subject of the Face Stealer

Koh, The Face Stealer, The Deceiver, The Worm, are just a few of the countless names given to that particular spirit, the ‘The Deceiver’ is rather inaccurate, as he is physically incapable of lying. A more accurate name would be “The Manipulator’ as he is a master of half - truths and letting people come to their own conclusions.

 

Katara sighed in exasperation and began to skim, looking for more relevant information. After going through the entire scroll, she came to the conclusion that it was most likely that the tome had nothing that would help her on her quest, or be relevant to her search. The writing was interesting, sure, and whoever had come up with it was clearly a master at his craft, if a little bad at updating, but all the same it wasn't what she was looking for. She put it down and picked up another, though the next was unnamed.

 

She skimmed through the scroll, until she found a passage that piqued her interest.

 

“Those bound to this particular spirit gain many odd abilities. They become faster and stronger of course, and their senses become hundreds if not thousands of times more powerful - provided that they channel the shadow into that particular ability. Most interestingly, they gain control over shadows - and in some accounts have been reported to move through them and travel great distances in a single step, though there is much to be desired regarding the veracity of that claim.

 

Koh’s champion also gains many passive abilities. For example, the body's ability to heal is magnified to an astonishing degree, depending on the depth of the bond. Some have been known to view the future, in the form of prophetic, metaphoric dreams. Other passive effects include the changes to the blood, causing it to turn black when the mantle is in use. Aside from the change in color, the blood will permanently stain any metal it falls on, and if it touches the flesh of another it burns them as would a flame - though more slowly.”

 

“Okay,” Katara said, drawing the word out, “Don’t let Sokka bleed on you.”

 

“No,” Said Wan Shi Tong, appearing behind her suddenly, “I do not believe that would be wise.”

---

 

Azula walked down the steps from her room at the inn, having just returned from the baths. It took her an absurdly long time to recover her dignity and cease the childish giggling that had overcome her like a disease, like a horde of water tribe barbarians swarming the walls of a seaside town.

 

Azula pondered the value of continuing to travel with the Kyoshi warriors, until she heard Ty Lee’s voice coming from the common room.

 

“...And then you just cover the filling in the casing and roll it in your hands to make a ball, like this!”

 

“What’s this stuff called again?” Himari asked, sounding confused.

 

“It’s Mochi! It’s kinda like candy, I guess. Maybe it's more of a dessert?”

 

“Ty Lee!” Azula called sharply, “Upstairs. Now.”

 

Without waiting for a response, Azula turned and marched back to her room. She took a seat facing towards the door, the green wall ahnging so common in the Earth Kingdom irritating her more than it should. She did not have long to wait before Ty Lee entered the room, traipsing in on her hands.

 

“What’s up, Azula?” Ty Lee said cheerily, “Did something happen?”

 

“Why, yes, actually.” Azula glared at her friend. “Someone has been giving away state secrets.”

 

The acrobat looked at her in confusion, before apprehension dawned. “Mai has been giving away stuff about the Fire Nation!?!”

 

“No, you idiot, I mean you. You have been revealing confidential information to the subhuman animals of the Earth Kingdom.”

 

“I- sub- what?” Ty Lee said, in a moment of astonished bamboozlement.

 

“Downstairs, mere moments ago, what were you doing?” Azula asked, as she would evidently have to explain it to her friend.

 

“...Teaching himari to make mochi?”

 

“Precisely. In violation of Fire Nation culinary code forty one, subsection d paragraph two : No recipes of couture significance may be shared with non-citizens.”

 

“What?” Ty Lee asked, mouth open in shock.

 

“You have committed confectionary espionage, the punishment for which is twenty lashes of fire.” Azula said, anger simmering. She had no intention of administering any such punishment, as not only would it reveal her status as a fire bender, it would also injure Ty Lee and render her useless for weeks. More than that, over the past few months, Azula had found that the idea of her friends coming to harm had begun to… upset her. She wasn't sure why, or what had changed, but the idea of anyone harming her friends angered her greatly. Where before the idea was an insult, as they belonged to her and anyone who took from her would suffer, it was now almost a fear. It’s contemplation caused a subtle tightness in her chest.

 

“Azula,” Ty Lee backed away a step, “I don't think that its so serious. I mean, it just mochi, and the Kyoshi warriors are good people.” As the nonbender spoke, sweat began to break on her brow.

 

“No,” Azula sighed, “I suppose not. I am not without mercy, so just this once I shall let it go. Remember, Ty Lee, you are to reveal nothing that connects us to the Fire Nation; no matter how small.”

 

Ty Lee breathed a sigh of relief and turned to go, and Azula frowned as she remembered words her father had often shared with her, that she had once believed.

 

“Don’t get too close to them, Ty Lee.” Azula began. “They’re Earth Kingdom; they just look like people.”

 

Even as she spoke, she realized that those words had been a lie. A man with amber eyes indeed.

---

“Ak!” Katara jumped at the Owl’s sudden appearance, she uncorked her waterskin and took a defensive posture.

 

“There is no need. I am simply curious as to what you are doing here.” Wan shi Tong cocked his head.

 

“I’m…. reading.” Katara said.

 

“I’m shocked.” The Spirit deadpanned.

 

Katara looked at him and shrugged. Wan Shi Tong rolled his eyes.

 

“He cannot hear us in this place. The worm cannot touch this place of light, for there are no shadows for him to reach.” Wan Shi Tong said.

 

“I see.” Katara said.

 

“If you’re trying to break the pact between the Face Stealer and his champion, then perhaps I can be of some assistance to you.”

 

Katara stared at the spirit, suspicious. “Why?”

 

“From the moment I first walked the Earth, I have hated him. Where I seek to spread the light of knowledge, it seeks only to cover the world in darkness. His strength is far above my own, I admit, but for all his power he is my enemy. There is little I would not do to irk him. To steal his first champion on milenia would wound him more grievously than you know.”

 

“So you’re willing to help me?”

 

“Yes, I suppose I am.” Wan Shi Tong spread a single wing and swept it across the ground at Katara’s feet. Where his wing touched the floor, a single bag was left.

---

The Hall of Prophets and Destroyers was, in Aang's honest opinion, enormously underwhelming. Given the sign, the name, and the convoluted path it took to get here, he had expected something more dramatic. Maybe some statues, gold filigree. Maybe a few skeletons or crazy amazing spirit guardians.

 

Instead, what he found was a small, plain, brown room covered in dust. A few dead spider-flies were scattered on the ground in what could be considered decoration… if you were a blind vegetable with bad taste.

 

“This is…. Anit-climactic.” Aang said. Looking around the small room. There were some shelves, none of them full. Maybe prophecies were rarer than he thought? Aang dragged a hand down his face. At least he didn’t have too much to search through. He picked up the first scroll and read it.

 

“Three rings for the elven kings, under the sky. Seven for the dwarf lords in their halls of stone. Nine rings for mortal men, doomed to die. One ring for the Dark Lord on his dark throne, in the land of Mordor where the shadows lie. One ring to rule them all, one ring to find them. One ring to bring them all, and in the darkness bind them, in the land of Mordor where the shadows lie.”

 

…What? What were elves? Dark Lord? Jewelry? Aang decided to figure that one out after he had defeated the firelord. He picked up another scroll and read again,

 

“Slowly through the fire’s of time, we have waited patiently. When all seven balls you find, the dragon is set free.”

 

Aang shook his head and stopped reading. He knew enough about the hundred year war to be reasonably certain that he didn’t need any of these dragon balls. He opened and read several more scrolls, one about a rider on a pale horse, one about someone born at the end of the seventh month, one about a warrior of black and white who would destroy an evil bird or something. Aang desperately hoped that when he found the right scroll it would make more sense than the others. After what felt longer than his century stuck in an iceberg he found it.

“Son of Fire, son of Water. Man of wind and Agni’s daughter, Wolf of sea, girl of stone, free at last the Dragon Throne.:

Darkness rises, Possession’s boon, stopped by only the Sun and Moon.

 

The red flower unmade, its garden overrun, lest chaos reigns and the world is done unless intercession by the Moon and Sun.”

 

Aang read the scroll again, and then a third time. He was pretty sure this was the scroll he was looking for, at least that made more sense than the others. The first line described himself and his friends, at least he thought so. Son of fire, son of water - obviously that meant Zuko and Sokka. Man of wind- Well, he was the last airbender. As for Agni’s Daughter, he wasn’t sure. Were they supposed to meet a spirit or something? Another firebender? Aang didn’t know.

 

Girl of stone - Toph. Wolf of sea? Probably Katara. The whole first paragraph was pretty clear - except for the bit about the spirit lady- he and his friends would defeat the Fire Lord. Aang felt a lot better about that as it seemed pre-ordained.

 

But the rest of it, he could make no sense of. Perhaps his friends would have a better understanding of it.

---

 

Author’s Note

 

Ope- that took longer than expected. On top of that, this chapter is 2000 words shorter than they usually are.

 

Anyway, I've been busy lately. I have online schooling for work, a 95 mile commute, a social life to maintain, and a rather time consuming pair of new hobbies- Muay Thai and Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu.

 

So what I'm trying to say, is that I am sorry, and I suck. I’m gonna restructure part three when we get there so that it’s easier to write- I think Ill go back to a similar structure to part one, which i wrote and finished in like 3 months.

 

The library arc is over, so I hope you know what that means. Prepare yourselves. It's Interludes Four Y'all.

Yours, truly. Charlemagne OR WHATEVER

 

02/16/2024

 

Chapter 47: Interludes Four

Chapter forty seven

 

Interludes Four

 

Rui Shi. Hakoda. Iroh. Zhao. Ozai.

 

Rui Shi

 

Rui Shi walked beside a cloaked figure. His thoughts were on keeping Song safe and building further upon the work she had begun, albeit that was not her intention at the start. He had not known the girl long, but she had grown special to him, and he… it wasn't important. He had to stay focused. He was walking into a trap.

 

“Stay close to me,” Rui Shi whispered as the cloaked figure fell slightly behind.

 

“I don’t like this,” said a feminine voice. Rui Shi glanced over his shoulder, noting the air of discomfort that surrounded the woman, with the ill-fitting cloak leaving the folds of their dress exposed at the knee. “Are you sure the tip was good?”

 

“Everything will be oka-” He began, but was cut off when a squad of firebenders flooded down the alley in front of them. Rui Shi grabbed the hand of the cloaked woman, turning to run, only to find that the way behind them was blocked by more soldiers.

 

“Are you the girl known as the Lightbringer?” the lead firebender asked.

 

The cloaked woman said nothing. The soldiers stared at them before the lead man spoke again. “By order of Fire Lord Ozai, the woman known as Lightbringer is found guilty of treason and sedition, by royal decree she is sentenced to execution, carried out on sight.”

 

Without another word, the leader, a sergeant, punched out a fist of fire, which was immediately countered by Rui Shi. The woman threw off her cloak to reveal, not Song, but rather Captain Jee. The Captain had joined them mere days ago, but Song had vouched for him. The ruse had actually been his idea, though he didn’t realize it would involve him wearing a dress. Or makeup.

 

The two stood back to back, and battle commenced. The battle was over in minutes, with J ee and Rui Shi unharmed.

 

Rui Shi stalked towards the sergeant and picked him up by the collar. “So this is what the elite corps of Ozai’s guard are capable of? I’d have thought better. Perhaps it was something you ate.”

 

Jee rolled his eyes at Rui Shi. The man was putting on a show for effect, and Jee knew that he didn’t care for the drama. He was a rather serious fellow.

 

“I need you to deliver a message for me. Tell Ozai that by now he should know that not a word in that palace can be written, whispered, or spoken aloud without me hearing it. We will not serve such a cruel and uncaring tyrant. Hail, Fire Lord Zuko.”

---

Hakoda

 

Hakoda, Bato, and a number of warriors and waterbenders boarded a Fire N avy s hip in C hameleon B ay. Three ships had sailed into the bay and raised white flags upon seeing the fleet of the united tribes. Hakoda was perplexed, as the ships bore a flag he had heard of, but not yet seen — a dragon on a red field, with one eye seared shut.

 

It had been only a couple of weeks since his spies had informed him of this Subtle Rebellion, but he was wary. Stealing three Fire Navy ships didn’t seem very subtle.

 

As the last of Hakoda’s team boarded the ship, a woman flanked by two sailors with the same dragon emblem on their uniforms approached them. As she drew near, she stopped and bowed.

 

“I am Lieutenant Tema, formerly of the Imperial Fire Navy. We seek sanctuary from the tyrant Ozai, and to find and serve Fire Lord Zuko.”

 

Hakoda blinked, but before he could say anything a northerner stepped forward.

 

“May I introduce Hakoda, The Southern Fox and Chief reagent of the Southern Watertribe, Father of the emperor. He speaks with the full authority of Sokka, Master of the Moonlight Sword, Beloved of the M oon Spirit. The Living Soul of the Seas, and Emperor of the Water Tribes.”

 

“Uh… Yeah.” Hakoda said, rolling his eyes.

---

Iroh

 

The Dragon of the West, the most feared general in the Fire Nation since Fire Lord Sozin, woke up in the soft light of a spring morning. He stretched and yawned, blinking the sleep from his eyes. He moved to his dresser, where he had placed three pictures he painted himself. The first was of his late son, Lu Ten. The second was of his nephew Prince Zuko. The third was of his niece.

 

He gazed at her image longer than the other two, wondering what he could have done differently, what he might still be able to do to save her. He hoped that she would find her way, as Zuko had. He prayed that she would not fall to the same fate as his own son, and asked the spirits to guide her on her way.

 

Iroh got dressed, and ate quickly. Today was an important day, it was the opening of his own Tea Shop in the upper ring of Ba Sing Se.

The morning had gone swiftly, and the girl he had hired, Jin, was doing an excellent job. That was until she had gotten distracted by a tan young man in a wall guard uniform. The youth carried twin swords on his back and was accompanied by another soldier, with long hair and a mustache, a quiet boy with a bow, and a young… boy? in a martial arts gi, who looked rather annoyed with the swordsman's flirting. Iroh decided to bring the tea to that table himself.

 

“Hello,” He said with a warm smile, a tea tray held before him as he bowed. “I am Mushi, I hope everything is to your liking.”

 

“Yes, it is.” The young man with the mustache took cups from the tray and introduced himself. “I’m Haru, that's Jet, Longshot, and Smellerbee.”

 

“I see, what an unusual name for a young man,” I roh said conversationally.

 

“I’m a girl.” Smellerbee said, angrily.

---

Zhao

 

“Admiral, or should I say Field Marshall Zhao? I must congratulate you on your promotion.

 

I am sending you this missive to maintain standard operating procedure as per the code of covert operations. I have infiltrated a group of Earth Kingdom fighters known as the Kyoshi Warriors and shall be inside the walls of Ba Sing Se in a matter of days, in pursuit of the traitor Iroh. As for Zuko, I fear it will be some time before I am able to locate and subdue him, as he has joined with the Avatar.”

 

Field Marshall Zhao steepled his fingers as he read the decoded message sent by Princess Azula. So she was in Ba Sing Se, or would be in a few days… 

 

Zhao took out a brush and ink, before writing two messages, one for Azula, and one for Long Feng. He finished them quickly and sent them at once, before calling out for a secretary.

 

“Zhu Li, send for Hahn at once.”

---

Ozai

 

“That was all he said, Fire Lord.” Sergeant Ping said.

 

Ozai looked at him, considering. Inside he was a sea of wrath, boiling as if in a hurricane, but he maintained a cool demeanor. He took a slow breath before dismissing the sergeant. Ozai gave himself a few moments before considering the problem. So there was at least one spy, if not more, in his palace. He tapped his fingers on the polished wood of his desk.

 

More than the issue of the spies, he had an idea. The people found him to be uncaring and cruel. Perhaps it was time to work on his public image.

 

“Zhu Li,” He called, and in moments the secretary he shared with his cousin stepped into his office. She knelt before him and bowed her head.

 

“Bring me the requests for pardon, and the petitions for aid from out island villages” He commanded.

 

Zhu Li’s mouth fell open in shock, before saying, “Yes, my lord.”

Author’s Note

 

Heyo, I know that was pretty quick. I just posted the last update this morning, but the Interludes are pretty short so it wasn't too much of a challenge to get this out. I hope to keep frequent updates, but I say that every time.

 

Charlamagne OR WHATEVER

 

02/18/2024

 

Chapter 48: The Watcher in The Wall

Chapter Forty Eight

 

Who is the Watcher on the Wall?

 

Hot. Dry. Dry and h ot. Dusty. That was Zuko’s opinion of the Si Wong Desert. He was rather put out over not being allowed entry to the library, but there was nothing to be done. He wasn’t about to fight a giant bird spirit to read some books, that was just… not a wise move. All the same, he was disappointed.

 

“... it’s sand,” Toph said.

 

“No. Seventeen.” Zuko responded.

 

Toph glared in his general direction. She scrunched her eyebrows up and said, “Rice?” drawing out the word.

 

“Yes.”

 

Toph cheered and threw her arms up, accidentally bitch slapping Zuko as she did.

 

“Agh!!!!!!” Zuko clutched at his left eye, the one he never seemed to open fully. “Why did you do that?!”

 

“Oh, s orry,” Toph apologized sheepishly, “It’s hard to see, the sand makes everything fuzzy, the way that it shifts around so much I hate it.”

 

Appa groaned, seemingly offended by her comments. “Not that there’s anything wrong with fuzzy,” Toph added, “I’m just not used to being so…blind.”

 

Zuko let his anger melt away at her words, though he still held to his ruined eye. Toph had taken him by surprise, and he hadn't taken the usual care to guard his scar. He was embarrassed by his reaction, but the old burn pained him even when it wasn’t being touched. A light touch was almost unbearable, and getting punched by an earthbender, even a tiny one, was agony. He could use his firebending to siphon the heat away, and so only his hands were capable of soothing the melted skin.

 

“It’s fine.” Zuko sat back down, this time placing Toph on his right side. “It’s your turn.”

 

“Alright, I've got it.”

 

“Is it ali-” Appa groaned louder, this time staring out into the distance. Zuko stood up, his senses alert. He stared out into the distance, and could barely see anything.

 

“I don’t…” He looked at Toph, “Can you make out anything?”

 

Suddenly, without warning, Toph punched him in the stomach with a pillar of sand, sending him flying.

 

“Oh, sorry! I didn’t mean to! I thought you were further back, I was trying to boost you higher for a better look!” Toph ran over to Zuko and tried to help him up. Eventually, Zuko regained his feet and glared at her, sand covering his entire body, clinging to his sweat.

 

“Toph.” He took a deep breath, “Maybe you should just stand at the tower.”

 

Toph looked a little hurt but then turned towards the library, and Zuko noted in annoyance that she could find that with no issue. He looked back toward the horizon and saw six… shapes coming towards them and moving fast. Their shadows cast far across the desert sands, as if wraiths heralding the coming night, marring the beauty of the setting sun. The shadows rose and fell, dipping between the dunes as might sharks in a stormy sea.

 

“Something’s coming!” Zuko warned Toph, “It looks like some kind of ship, blowing across the desert.”

 

“One?”

 

“Six.”

 

“Fight?”

 

“Maybe.”

 

“Cool.”

 

Zuko rolled his eyes. Toph was normally a force of nature, but with all the sand she would likely be a hindrance. Zuko hoped it wouldn’t come to it, but he knew that he could win. Unless it was Azula and his father, or uncle. He doubted that. Ozai wouldn’t deign to take the field, and Iroh would never turn on him. Unless he had been brainwashed.

 

Zuko watches as the shapes grow closer, coming to find that they were indeed ships. As they came within range, they threw ropes with weights attached at the end. Zuko was confused, until the ropes went over and around Appa, tying him down. Zuko growled and shot thin bursts of flame at the ropes, freeing the beast. Once free, Appa roared at the attackers, grabbing a rope in his mouth and tugging the man who had thrown it from the vessel.

 

During the few moments Zuko had been distracted, the vessels surrounded them, leaving them with no escape.

 

“I told,” A younger man pointed at an older one, “A sky bison, a real sky bison!”

 

“So you were right, big deal.”

 

“It is actually, we’ll make a killing selling him.”

 

“You won't be selling anyone , ” Zuko said, taking a firebending stance.

 

“Okay , buddy.” A third man said and pushed out his fist. A stream of sand rushed at Zuko, who lept over it. Toph, upon hearing the commotion and dialogue, began fighting. Unfortunately, she didn’t come close to hitting anything. The sandbender, bandits, and the general group of uncouth brigands, elected to ignore her.

 

Zuko lashed out with a blast of fire, spooking the sandbenders and winning himself a moment to think. He couldn’t fight all of the men, at least thirty of them, and protect Appa at the same time. He needed to get the bison out of harm's way.

 

“Yip yip.!” He shouted, and Appa took off and circled around the top of the tower. Zuko gave a self-satisfied smile. He felt that was really a rather clever idea, and was quite pleased with himself. He thought Sokka would have done the same thing.

 

“If you value your lives, you will leave!” He shouted, igniting the fire in both hands as the last vestiges of the day's light faded over the horizon, “I am Zuko! Son of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai! A firebender of the highest order, long descended from Agni himself!”

 

“You?!” The leader, the man who had ignored the younger one, mocked, “You are the rebel son? He who would by force steal the Dragon Throne? The banished Prince turned warlord?”

 

“Yes.”

 

“Well, what do you think, boys? Is he a liar or a fool?”

 

“He looks like the poster.” 

 

“That he does… Perhaps we should sell him to Zhao, the doofus with sideburns?”

 

“Collect the bounty, and then live like kings? Why, that’s an excellent idea.”

 

Without warning, the men attacked as one, blasting Zuko off his feet. He flipped in the air and rolled, coming to a standing position. Zuko took a breath and as quick as thinking, a line of fire traced from his eye. The concentrated beam split the night and shed the darkness. It destroyed one of the sand-ships and shook the earth. 

 

---

Sokka stepped onto the window sill, looking down at the empty space. The dessert night was cool and dry. He turned his gaze below and in the complete dark , he saw Toph, fighting… empty air. Around the tower were four smoking husks of some kind of sled. The r ustle of wind threw the distant sound of her voice up to him. A base groan alerted him, and he found Appa circling above the tower.

 

“Appa,” he said, his voice carried by the shadow though he spoke softly, “Come here.”

 

He stepped lightly onto the bison's back and in seconds he found himself beside Toph, who was still valiantly fighting the ghosts of her enemies.

 

“What happened?” He said and lightly spun to the side to avoid the column of sand she sent his way.

 

“Toph, it’s me. Sokka.”

 

“I know that!” the e arthbender grunted. “Don't ask stupid questions! We were attacked. Sand benders, they were after Appa.”

 

“Where’s Zuko?”

 

“They took him when they couldn't get to Appa. They recognized him and said they were going to give him to somebody named Zhao.”

 

Sokka looked at her, and saying nothing he climbed again on the bison. With a brief effort of will, he pulled fast The Mantle of Koh’s power and searched the horizon.

 

---

It was a dark and wind-swept night as Azula, her friends, and the Kyoshi Warriors left their inn. They rode through the empty streets in a comfortable silence. They had hours left before dawn, and the amber light of the lanterns illuminated the road before them. Azula rode at the head of the procession, with Suki on her left. Mai and Ty Lee rode behind them and were followed by the rest of the Kyoshi Warriors. Azula thought it odd, as she found herself enjoying the quiet windy Earth Kingdom morning, as the blue-tinged light that heralded the coming of dawn began to reveal their surroundings.

 

They had left the village, and Azula basked in the peace and tranquility of the new day, feeling Agni’s warmth approaching from beyond the horizon. And then, as a matter of dignity, Ty Lee ruined it by being herself.

 

“Did we really have to leave so early? We’ve been riding for hours!”

 

“We would have ridden the same amount of time regardless of when we left. And more of it would’ve been spent in the heat. On top of that, the earlier we get to Ba Sing Se the fewer people will be in line before us.” Mai said, rolling her eyes.

 

Azula looked over her shoulder at Mai, a touch surprised. Mai had always been a rather avid complainer, so her response had been unanticipated.

 

“But you're right, the birds stink, it's cold, and I'm tired. There are countless reasons for us to have left when we did and I care for none of them.” Mai sighed.

 

Well, Azula thought, that made more sense.

 

“Oh, quit complaining.” Sara said, “You’re big girls, you’ll be okay.”

 

Ty Lee and Mai looked at each other and crossed their arms. In doing so, they tugged on their reigns and their mounts veered off the road and towards the fences on either side. The girls quickly righted their o stritch- h orses, but not before a chorus of laughter erupted through the group. Azula herself had to crack a smile.

 

From that point on, the companionable silence was no more. The road was filled with the sound of banter and laughter as the girls talked among themselves.

 

“How much farther until we reach the city?” Azula asked.

 

“I’ve never been there.” Suki answered, “But based on the landmarks on the map we should be there just after dawn.”

 

Azula nodded. “So we’ll be parting ways soon.”

 

“Not necessarily.” Suki said slowly, “You could stick with us.”

 

“What do you mean?”

 

“You could join our group, and become a Kyoshi Warrior. All three of you.” Suki offered.

 

Azula was silent, thinking over the possibilities, and how that might further the Fire Nation’s cause. She could get inside information on the city 's defenses, infrastructure, watch schedules, and entry points. They might even gain access to the Earth King himself.

 

“I…” Azula paused, for a moment. She had been about to accept, to say she would join them. But then something in her chest felt… off. That by doing so, accepting her offer, Azula would be doing something... Foul. “I’ll have to discuss it with my friends.”

 

“Mai, Ty Lee,” Azula said crisply, slowing Sugar Foot and letting the Kyoshi Warriors pass them. Once the three had fallen a dozen feet behind the group, Azula said: “Suki has asked us to join the Kyoshi Warriors.”

 

“Really?” Ty Lee grinned broadly, but her smile fell as she thought about what that meant.

 

“What are we going to do then?” Mai asked.

 

“Accept of course,” Azula said. “We’ve gained their trust, certainly, and now we can use that to bring down the Earth Kingdom once and for all.” Azula tried to quash the budding flower of doubt in her mind and speak with her old conviction. Ty Lee nodded in assent, and Mai met her eyes for just an instant too long before doing the same.

 

“I’ve received a message from Zhao,” Azula said. “We have a contact set up in Ba Sing Se.”

 

---

South. The sandbenders had turned south. Sokka could smell it in the wind. Fire, sweat, burned cloth. Anger. Was that Zuko, he idly wondered, or the sandbenders ? He supposed it didn’t matter, as one would lead him to the other. 

 

Appa sailed through the sky, Sokka directing him as the need arose. He pondered what to do when he met the Earth King. Should he tell Zuko of the secret he had found? Of the eclipse? Perhaps he should keep it from him. No, nothing good would come of that. Better to have empty and clean air between them.

 

In the void, he saw it with perfect clarity. What must be done? Lives would be lost, but war is war, and the sooner it ends the less would suffer for it. He thought it was odd, the things he was willing to do now. Not so long ago, taking a life would have shattered him. Now, void or no, he found it was not so large a thing as it once had been. Such a little thing.

 

Well, for others. They would be brought into the afterlife. Some would be born again. Not him, though. The thought had once bothered him, devastated him, but now it was just a fact. As if it were nothing more than a stone by the roadside, or a tree in the forest. Was that void? Or was it the Face Stealer? Was the great emptiness what made him so indifferent? Or the rush of power that came with the Mantle?  Sokka decided that it didn’t really matter. When joined, the two were a thought he found hard to resist. When he resided as himself, weak and filled with distraction and worry, hope and love, grief, and misery, he found often the call of void and shadow whispering in his ear. He couldn't remember why he denied it.

 

Sokka perked up as a light appeared on the horizon, and he urged Appa to fly as the winter winds. In minutes, he was above them. It was a dramatic scene.

 

Zuko, son of Ursa and Firelord Ozai, heir to the Dragon Throne stood panting, swords burning in the night. Surrounded on all sides by those who would sell them to his father. Sokka drew his R egret and leapt from the saddle, the Moonlight Sword leaving a tail through the air like a thunderbolt.

 

He landed in silence and was greeted by fear, the sour smell wafting towards him as he stood beside Zuko. The sca r red man did not react and took Sokka’s arrival in stride. They met each other's eyes.

 

“The others?” Zuko asked, shifting to stand at Sokka's back, “Are they coming?”

 

“Only me,” Sokka answered, “Waiting was pointless. They do not have the heart for what we must do.”

Zuko stared at Sokka, and the two of them ignored the shouting of their foes. Sokka cocked his head at Zuko and spoke, “Do you doubt it?”

“I- Yes!” Zuko said, “We don’t-”

 

“I can see into your heart, Zuko. And into theirs, they’re not good people. The rot has settled in them so deeply that it is all that is left, there is no hope of salvation in this life. They are not human anymore.”

 

Zuko looked away from the First Son, and wondered what had become of the man he had met in the South Pole a few months earlier. What kind of a Spirit was Koh, that he could have wrought such a change? He had been quick to joke, even in battle when they had met as enemies, and now… Was it just the loss of Yue that had changed him? Uncle had said that such loss could transform a soul in unpredictable ways. But this? Zuko had killed in battle, he was no stranger to war. But the lack of mercy, the absence of compassion was frightening. How could these men not be human?

 

“They are to me.” He said, even as the battle commenced.

 

---

Azula rode Sugar Foot, coming to the crest of a large hill. She had accepted Suki’s offer and joined their team. For now. She idly wondered if there could be some use for them in the new order, once the Fire Nation conquered the Earth Kingdom. Azula mused that the superior agility of the Kyoshi warriors would be advantageous when they returned to the N orthern Water Tribe. A night raid on the spirit oasis would mean victory in one fell swoop.

 

Azula came to the top of the hill, and the sight of Ba Sing Se nearly took her breath away. It filled nearly the entire horizon, from far in the north to far in the south was nothing but the wall. It wound, lazy, massive. Encompassing a space so vast that it was hard to conceive of the scale. The guards that stood atop it seemed like ants on a paving stone.

 

Azula pushed her awe aside and continued down the road, listening to the others chit-chat idly as they drew nearer to the city. As they traveled, she noticed one figure on the wall did not seem to move, nor look away as they drew nearer. Other men would come to his side from time to time, but all that Azula could tell from that distance was they wore robes and broad hats.

 

Eventually, Azula had had enough of feeling watched. She took out a spyglass from her saddlebag and trained it on the figure. As she did so, a shaft of morning light reflected off the lens. By the time she had gotten the spyglass to her eye, the watcher had turned away. As the man walked away, his long braid swinging back and forth with every step, a pair of uniformed men fell in step behind him. A third turned and fixed his gaze on her before falling into formation.

 

Azula lowered her spyglass and narrowed her eyes. Dark green robes with gold trim, and broad conical hats. Were they looking at her? Or just in her direction? They were too far away to be able to see anything but an outline without a spyglass of their own, but even still, she wondered: Who was the watcher on the wall?

 

---

Dawn broke in the east, as it was prone to do. Aang had been searching through the night and had no luck. He sat beside the library tower with Toph and Katara.

 

“What was the point of rationing and saving so much water if we don’t have it with us?” Toph asked.

 

Nobody answered.

 

“How long should we wait?”

 

Aang glanced towards Katara as she spoke.

 

“They’ll come back.” The Avatar said with confidence he didn’t feel, “Sokka’s got his creepy spirit thing, and Zuko can blow stuff up with his eye. They’re fine.”

 

“He couldn't have waited for half an hour? Sokka knows he’s the only one who can find people like that. In the dark and without a trail.”

 

“I doubt he thought it was a good idea to wait for us. We could’ve been gone for another day for as far as he knew.” Aang soothed.

 

“I know.” Katara said, “But now we’ve just got to sit here and wonder if they’re… if he’s…”

 

“Sokka is pretty much unkillable, as far as I am concerned.” Aang said, “He heals fast, and he doesn't bleed like the rest of us.”

 

“What about Zuko?” Toph asked quietly, her voice small and unsteady. Aang snorted.

 

“Zuko’s too angry to die. He is resourceful, nobody can hold him for long.”

 

“What about Sokka? Do you think they took him prisoner?” Katara asked.

 

“Not unless his girlfriend was leading them.”

 

“Sokka has a girlfriend?” Toph asked, and it made Aang and Katara laugh.

 

“It’s a long story, but basically yes.”

 

“...okay.”

 

“Ignore them, Toph.” Sokka said, “I do not have a girlfriend, they speak in lies and half-truths.”

 

“Sokka! You’re back!” Katara ran to him. “Where’s Zuko and Appa?”

 

The bison roared and landed seconds after she asked. “Did you jump? That’s so dangerous!”

 

“I told you he’s indestructible.”

 

“You said unkillable.”

 

“It doesn’t matter.” Sokka said, “It’s time to go.”

 

“Where?” Toph asked, “And where’s Zuko?”

 

“I’m on the bison,” Zuko said, his eyes distant and his demeanor stoic.

 

“What happened?” Toph asked.

 

Zuko glanced at Sokka and spoke softly. “It doesn’t matter.”

 

“Then why so sulky? We’re not gonna find a bunch of bodies in the desert are we?”

 

“There were no bodies.”

 

---

Author’s Note.

 

Well, I suppose more time has passed than I realized. The days of my life seem to have gotten away from me, and I know I should take more attention to invest time in my hobbies.

 

It’s been a rollercoaster to be sure, and that is all that needs saying on the matter.

 

We’re nearing the conclusion of part two. There will be pain, consider yourself warned.

 

Also; I’ve been listening to the farseer trilogy, so pardon the melodrama

 

Charlemagne.

 

8/5/2024

 

Chapter 49: It Hurts

Chapter Forty Nine

 

It Hurts

 

“On behalf of he who carries the Earth Kingdom on his back, the beating heart of the world, and lord of the impenetrable city, his majesty Earth King Kuei, I welcome you to Ba Sing Se. My name is Joo Dee.” 

 

Azula eyed the woman through the now mandatory face paint she wore. She and her friends had infiltrated the Kyoshi Warriors, and had been garbed in their traditional regalia and makeup. It was uncomfortable. The rough wool was a step away from the silk clothes and steel armor she usually wore. Ty Lee was of course ecstatic for the change, as it provided a rare glimpse of Mai wearing makeup that ‘wasn’t totally depressing’.

 

“Oh, uh, thank you, Joo Dee.” Suki said, “We are the Kyoshi warriors. We’ve come to offer our services to the Earth King and join the war effort.”

 

“The Earth King is aware of your arrival and has been expecting you for some time.”

 

“The Earth King is expecting us? But we didn’t send word ahead of us.” Suki said, confused.

 

“His royal highness is aware of all things in his kingdom.”

 

“Okay…” Suki spoke the word slowly.

 

“I see that your journey has made you tired and worrisome. There is no need for such stress. Now that you are here, you are safe. The dangers of the outside world do not exist in Ba Sing Se.”

 

“So when are we going to meet the Earth King? Or one of the generals?” Sara asked.

 

“Your request for an audience with his majesty has been submitted, and should be processed in about two months!” Joo Dee answered.

 

“Two months?” Azula asked, eyes narrowed. “You just said that he has been expecting us.”

 

“He has been expecting your arrival, yes, but he is a busy man. He cannot clear his schedule simply for your arrival.” Joo Dee beamed at them, obnoxiously. Azula rolled her eyes. They were being handled.

 

What followed was a needlessly long tour of the slums of Ba Sing Se, followed by their deliverance to a decently kept building in the middle ring of Ba Sing Se. This would evidently be their quarters for the duration of their stay. Joo Dee explained in detail the rule that must be obeyed during their stay, yet Azula’s attention was drawn away from her. A movement in the shadows caught her eye; a soft rustle of cloth, the subtle scrape of stone against flesh reached her ears.

 

She flicked her eyes to Mai and Ty Lee, and with a discreet flick of her fingers gave them orders: Watch, listen, be ready. Giving nothing away, Ty Lee stretched and yawned. She pulled off her gloves under the pretense of fixing her hair. Mai rolled her eyes at the acrobat and stepped to Azula’s other side, leaving against the carriage wall, keeping a constant vigil at their rear.

 

They stayed on guard as Joo Dee finished her speech and led them into the house. The moment they were through the door, Suki pushed Joo Dee out and slammed the door.

 

“Form up.” She barked, and the Kyoshi Warriors fell into a line and knelt. Azula didn’t hesitate and joined the line, with Mai and Ty Lee flanking either side of her.

 

“We’re being watched.” Suki addressed the group. “From the moment we set foot in Ba Sing Se, they’ve been tailing us, watching our every move.”

 

Azula had expected as much, but hadn’t found any signs to indicate until they were outside their quarters.

 

“ The earth king has been expecting you.” Suki said, “Somethings not right. If he had been expecting us, why wait for months to process our request for an audience? And why put a request in to the king directly? We could just as easily meet with one of the council of five.”

 

“Forgive me for speaking out of turn,” Azula said, “But this merits investigation.”

 

Suki looked at her oddly for a moment, “We don't really take turns to speak, just don't interrupt when someone is addressing the group.”

 

“I didn’t mean that liter- it’s not important,” Azula said, waving her hand in a vague motion, “Perhaps there’s something insidious in this city.”

 

“I won't pretend to understand what's going on,” Suki said, “But I don't like it. From now until we leave, we’re going to move in pairs. Sara, you’re with Haruhi. Himari, you stick with Akara. Mai and Ty Lee are partnered up, and Azula’s with me.”

 

Azula bristled at being given orders by this backwater rube who couldn’t mentally perform the simplest quadratic equations. She maintained a cool outward facade as Suki kept speaking, “You will bunk with your partner, you will eat with your partner, you will not leave this building your partner. Do you understand?”

 

The Kyoshi Warriors answered in unison.

 

“Good.” Suki said, “We’re going to take a lesson from the Southern Water Tribe. Haruhi and Sara, you’re on watch. I want one team here at all times to keep watch, eight hour shifts. Mai and Ty Lee, you're next, followed by me and Azula, then Himari and Akara.”

 

“We’re going to split up and head around the city, see what we can find out. Mai, Ty Lee, search the middle ring. Azula and I are going to the outer wall. Himari and Akara will search the lower ring. You’ve got five minutes to drop your gear.”

 

The Kyoshi Warriors broke formation and split into their assigned teams. Azula followed Mai and Ty Lee up the stairs and into the first room they came across. Speaking quietly, Azula said, “We don't have much time. Find important infrastructure, wells, bridges, foodstores. Note the time and locations of any patrols that you pass. Ask the cityfolk about the Earth King and the war, bring something back for Suki, so she doesnt grow suspicious. Meet with our contact at Ye Olde Chin’s Noodle Empire.”

 

Azula turned on her heel and left the small bedroom, and saw Suki entering another room. She followed and dropped her pack on the bed opposite the window, before drawing the shutters. She turned to Suki and said, “Impressive. I only noticed we were being watched when we arrived here.”

 

“You saw them too then?” Suki said, sliding her pack under the bed opposite Azula’s. “I noticed a pair of men in dark green uniforms watching us when we met Joo Dee. I wasn't sure if we were being followed until we were just outside.”

 

“Dark green robes, wide hats?” Azula had seen them atop the outer wall as they approached the city, but they turned away once she used her spyglass. Suki nodded in confirmation, and Azula told her what she had seen.

 

“It’s no secret that we’re friends with the Avatar,” Suki said, “But I don’t see why that would be reason to keep us under surveillance.”

 

Azula shrugged, keeping her thoughts to herself. She wondered if Zhao’s contact had been caught. Perhaps the Earth Kingdom knew she was here, and was bidding it’s time until it could be sure of her identity?

 

“Come on,” Suki opened the door, leading the way out of their room, down the stairs and out of the building. Over the course of the next couple of hours, the pair made their way to the outer wall of Ba Sing Se. Azula took a map of the city’s rail transport system, conveniently printed in pamphlets and stacked on a table inside the station. She was taken aback at the lack of security, that a nation at war would leave sitting in the open maps of vital infrastructure and the quickest ways to get to them in the open. More than that, they even distributed them freely, encouraging people to take them.

 

Even Bumi, the mad king of Omashu, kept such information underwraps. It made the ruling of the conquered city almost impossible, until the Fire Nation had managed to successfully mapped the streets and sewers. Why then, she wondered, did Ba Sing Se not take precautions? Did not the city know they were at war? They must know, else why would they be under surveillance? She had seen them, never far off. Sitting and drinking tea, watching from an alley, They were everywhere.

 

When they arrived at the outer wall, along the western edge of the vast tracts of farmland surrounding the inner city, they were just… allowed up to the top. Nobody asked them to prove their identity. The soldiers on duty just took them at their word, and brought them to the top. Azula found the security laughable, until she considered that despite this her nation had failed to subjugate Ba Sing Se.

 

As they reached the top, Azula surveyed the city. SHe thought it beautiful, in a simple and rustic sort of way. It was nothing to the towering heights of the buildings in the caldera, with the mere beginnings of industry her people had mastered a century past. She turned away from Ba Sing Se, as the wind ripped past and tore at her clothes she looked upon the western horizon. A cold wave of emotion, not quite fear but not far from it, poured through her.

 

Far below and to the west lay the drill, with the might of the Fire Nation assembled around it. A force reminiscent of the power set against the north at the siege of Agna Qel’a, the capital of the northern Water Tribe. A force that no mere army of the lesser nations could defeat, but she saw that it would fail. For beyond the drill, and over the mountains and in the horizon she saw a shape. It was no more than a spec, a faint outline, but she knew in the marrow of her bones. The Avatar had come to Ba Sing Se.

 

---

Despite the howl of the wind, the snap of cloth and the half caught mutter of words, Sokka felt the world to be in silence. He knew it wasn't the case of course, as the evidence of his ears and eyes told him what was true. No, the silence he felt was within. Wrapped in the void, the vast empty place he had cultivated inside himself, all was still and quiet. He would be disturbed by the slaughter, he was sure. Once he left the void, as he knew he would, he would shudder and shake, he would wretch and weep with the villainy of what he had done. He would be affected as surely as Zuko had. 

 

Zuko. A banished prince, the Fire Lord in exile. Scarred and disowned, shamed and then cast out by his father. A man who had wandered the world for years, before finding the light of truth and breaking the chains of cruelty and joining with the Avatar. Sokka glanced over at the scarred man, seeing him there still. Zuko had placed himself between Toph and Sokka, as if he feared what the First Son might do.

 

Since they had left the desert, Zuko had made sure to stand between Sokka and the girl with broken eyes. In time, Sokka knew that Zuko would come to see that what they had done to the sand benders was necessary, and that he had the strength to do it again.

 

Sokka opened his third eye, with less thought than it takes to move your arm, and looked at Zuko. Looked inside of him. He saw there a kind of quiet strength, the strength of steel and fire, a power born through years of long suffering and quiet resolve. The kind of strength that wouldn't break or bend. More than this, Sokka saw love. A fierce burning love for his people, and friends. It instilled in Zuko a desire to protect, and to destroy any who dared threaten those that were his. His was a dragon’s soul.

 

Zuko had caught Sokka staring. “What?” He asked, with more aggression than he meant.

 

“Do not be afraid, it is nothing.” Sokka said.

 

“Is he doing that creepy thing again?” Toph interjected.

 

“Which creepy thing?” Aang asked.

 

“The one where he’s basically a dead guy.”

 

Everyone looked at her, with a mix of raised eyebrows and confused expressions, save Sokka who tilted his head and continued staring at Zuko. Being blind, and on the back of a flying bison, Toph noticed none of this.

 

Realizing that Toph was purely blind, Katara spoke. “What are you talking about?”

 

“There’s this thing he does.” Toph began, “He gets heavier, and his heartbeat slows so much I can barely feel it. His voice sounds weird and I can't tell if he’s lying or not. It’s like if a stone could talk.”

 

“I think she means when he’s entered the void,” Aang said, glancing at Sokka from the corner of his eye, “And yeah he’s been doing that since the Library.”

 

“What does entering the void mean?” Zuko asked.

 

“It’s an ancient airbender technique,” Aang said, “It was created by Guru Laghima, the greatest air bender who ever lived. There’s this poem about it, it goes ‘ let go thy earthly tether. Enter the void, empty, and become wind.’ .”

 

“But Sokka’s not an airbender,” Toph said, “He’s more of a sarcasm bender if anything.”

 

“No,” Aang continued, “He is not an airbender.”

 

“Then what's the point of this void thing?” Zuko asked.

 

“It gives me strength.” Sokka answered, breaking his silence, “The strength to move when my body is broken, to act when otherwise I would hesitate. To do that which needs doing, when otherwise I would balk at the idea.”

 

“Okay” Zuko said, “I don’t know what that means, but if it works.”

 

“Look around you,” Sokka gestured at the open sky, “You are filled with distraction, emotion, toil and despair. In the void there is nothing, only reason. It is a vast, empty place that makes everything clear.”

 

Zuko looked around at the empty sky. It went on without end, further than he could see. It was a cold and empty place. He turned his gaze again to Sokka, and felt pity.

 

“Why would you do that to yourself?” He asked, looking at the First Son.

 

“These are hard times,” Sokka said, “Hard choices must follow.”

 

“Okay, drama queen,” Katara said from her seat atop Appa’s head. “If you’re done being angsty, mind telling us why we’re going to Ba Sing Se?”

 

“What?” Toph said, “I didn’t know that! I hate Ba Sing Se. it’s a city of walls and secrets.”

 

Sokka, paused, decided that Toph’s input was pointless, and spoke. “In the library, I found something that will help us defeat the Fire Nation.”

 

Aang perked up, “What did you find?”

 

“In forty seven days there will be an eclipse. The sun will be bloted out by the moon and the firebenders will be rendered powerless.”

 

“What?” Zuko asked.

 

“Like the lunar eclipse,” Sokka said, “This will remove the bending ability from the Fire Nation, and if we strike fast and hard at the capital we can end the war in a single blow.”

 

“So,” Zuko said, “We can go in, beat my father and be done with it. Why involve the Earth King?”

 

“For an invasion force.”

 

Zuko was silent, “No.”

 

“Yes,” Sokka said, “Should we take out the Fire Lord, just the five of us, who is to say you would be appointed in his place? If the people learned that you were part of the destruction of your father, why would they let you take his place? A man who went willing with the death of his own father to rule a nation? There will be riots, at the very least. Most likely they would put Zhao or Azula in his stead.”

 

“How would an invasion change that?” Zuko asked, anger coursing through him.

 

“It is simple. An army of both the Water Tribe and Earth Kingdom invade bent on righteous destruction and retribution, tearing through the capital, itching to take vengeance on the countryside. Brought to heel not by the Avatar, but by Zuko. Banished for the love of his nation, disavowed and disinherited, scarred and beaten yet unbroken. Without you, the war will continue without end. Without an army the war continues. We need both.”

 

“How can I follow an army bent on destruction? How would they, the people of the Fire Nation, follow someone who came on a river of death?” Zuko countered.

 

“There need not be a river of death,” Sokka said, “You have declared yourself Fire Lord in exile. With the backing of the Avatar and the First Son, The Earth King must listen to you. You are the only one of us who knows the Fire Nation, the only one who can guide our mission. You are the secret, the key to victory. The flame that lights the darkness.”

 

“Flame that lights the darkness?” Aang said, with a confused expression.

 

Zuko stared into space for a moment, before clenching his jaw and nodding once.

 

“We will need all on The Day of Black Sun.”, Sokak said, as before them blossomed the walls of Ba SInge Se, and before the wall they found an army striving to invade.

 

---

Azula listened to Suki snore. It wasn’t much of a snore, to be fair, but enough to tell Azula that the warrior was asleep. She sat up, glancing briefly at the girl. Suki, who was a mere peasant of the Earth Kingdom, an inferior culture. So far beneath Azula’s station that under any other circumstance she would not be worth noticing, of a caste that is nearly sub-human. And yet, despite all reason and effort on her part, Azula could not helo think of her as a friend.

 

Azula left the shared room in silence. She walked down the hall and tapped onc, scraped with her nail, and tapped once again. There was nothing for a moment, and then a reciprocating sign. The door opened and Azula ducked inside.

 

Mai and Ty Lee were within, the window shuttered and a single candle gave light.

 

“Well?” Azula asked.

 

“We met with the contact.” Mai said.

 

“And?” Azula pressed.

 

“It’s Hahn.”

 

Azula froze.

 

“Are you serious?”

 

“Yeah.” Ty Lee said.

 

“They could have sent someone smart. Like a corpse, or a pig-chicken.”

 

Ty Lee snickered behind her hand, and Mai cocked a half smile.

 

“What happened on the wall” Mai asked.

 

“The drill and sixth army are outside.” Azula said, “But they won't succeed. The Avatar has arrived, and it’s likely the army has been beaten already.”

 

“Are you sure?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“Yes,” Azula said, “My brother and his pet earthbender have likely joined them by now, and the ‘ Emperor’ ” She said mockingly, “Has a mind for strategy.”

 

“So what do we do?” Mai asked.

 

“We wait and watch.” Azula answered. “For now. Until the time is right.”

 

“Hahn wants to meet with you.” Ty Lee said, “Tomorrow night, at the bridge near the metal working district.”

 

Azula nodded. “I might as well. At the very least, I could find some information.”

“She didn’t show herself?” Long Feng asked.

 

“No sir,” Hahn answered.

 

“Did you set up another meeting”

 

“Yes,” Hahn said, head bowed. “Tomorrow night on the bridge leading to the metal working district.”

 

“Good. My Dai Li will take her then.”

 

“She is powerful,” Hahn explained, “It will take more than a few earthbenders to-”

 

“It will be more than enough,” Major Wen said, “We have a score to settle, her and I.”

 

“Indeed you do,” Long feng said, “and make sure that when you take her you extend his majesty’s invitation.”

 

“What invitation?” Hahn asked, confused.

 

“In his wisdom, the Earth King has invited her to Lake Laogai.”

---

Team Avatar stood upon the wall of Ba Sing Se, looking out at the utterly defeated Earth Kingdom advance force.”

 

“It was the rough rhinos.” Zuko said.

 

“Who are they?” Aang asked.

 

“A special forces unit. My uncle worked with them alot.”

 

“I see,” General Sung said, “In light of the Tera Team’s defeat, I humbly ask the Avatar to assist.”

 

As if the man had not rudely denied their offer mere minutes before.

 

“Is Azula with them?” Aang asked, as the wind blew from the west.

 

Sokka cocked his head, inhaling deep through his nose. “No.”

 

“What was that?!” Zuko asked, “Did you just sniff the wind?”

 

“Sokka has a super sense of smell!’ Katara interjected, “He can pick out scents from miles away.”

 

“Why do you know what Azula smells like?!” Zuko asked.

 

“She’s taken me prisoner a few times.”

 

“It’s not as creepy as it sounds.” Aang offered.

 

“It’s pretty creepy.” Toph said, “Creepy spirit powers or no.”

 

Sokka took on Koh’s mantle, and his shadow exploded outward and towards the sun. His voice echoed as if two people spoke at once, “It doesn’t matter. We have work that must be done.”

 

“Would you stop with the melodrama for ten minutes?” Zuko asked, “And don’t sniff for my sister.”

 

“Aang, Katara, you and I will infiltrate the drill and find a way to shut it down from inside. Toph and Zuko will keep the Rough Rhino’s distracted.”

 

“Ok.” Aang and Katara said, climbing onto Appa. Sokka joined them.

 

“You guys go ahead,” Toph said walking towards the edge of the wall, “I’ll find my own way down. You coming, Zuzu?”

 

“Zuzu?” General Sung snickered behind his hand.

 

Zuko glared at the general. “I’ll meet you down there. First I’ll grab their attention. We’re a distraction, right?”

 

Appa took off and Toph vaulted over the side of the wall, dragging a hand through the stone with her earthbending to slow her descent. Zuko leapt onto the ramparts. He waited for Toph to be halfway down before sucking in a sharp breath. He focused on the drill. For a moment there was nothing, and then a line of fire split the air. It burst fourth from Zuko’s ruined eye. The Prince took all the pain and frustration, the toil and suffering of his short life, and focused it into a beam of destruction. It struck the head of the drill in a burst of fury that the soldier below had never seen.

 

Meanwhile, Toph exploded onto the battlefield. She hit the ground in a wave of earthbending, churning the dry and barren plain as if it were the sea in a storm. She dove beneath the surface and propelled herself forward, navigating her way beneath the footsoldier battling with Earth Kingdom troops until she found the Rough Rhinos.

 

Zuko leapt from the ramparts, using his firebending to propel himself forward. He considered after he jumped, that he had never tried this before and that doing so off of the wall of Ba Sing Se and into a battle was beyond foolish, but by that point he had already jumped and all he could do was try not to die. He blasted away from the wall and toward where he made out the rhinos. As he approached, he used his firebending to slow his descent, while keeping his forward trajectory. It was really hard, but his alternative was falling into a battle and dying so he kept going. As he neared, he saw Toph erupt out of the ground. All five rhinos rounded on her, and so Zuko focused his energy and used his combustion bending to throw Mongke from his mount. Zuko touched down and battle ensued.

---

Sokka, Aang and Katara flew past the drill, ducking under it as they went. They soared beneath it until they saw Toph, Zuko, and a group of men on komodo-rhinos fighting. One of the men, a Yuyan archer, was thrown from his mount by Toph. While in the air, he drew and knocked an arrow and loosed it towards the earthbender. Sokka saw, and the world seemed to slow around him. He leapt from appa’s back, pushing himself away with enough force that it sent the bison of course. He rocketed through the air, doubting that he would be fast enough. The distance between the girl and the arrow closed, with Toph unaware, for the archer had been separated from the round and thus outside of her awareness. Mere inches separated her eyes and the blade when Sokka’s hand grabbed that arrow. It’s momentum halted, yet a spattering of Sokka’s blackened blood sprayed across Toph's broken eyes. Toph grunted in pain, though no arrow pierced her flesh.

 

Sokka’s hand, mutilated and yet strong, drew his regret and dispatched that archer, though no body touched the ground. Sokka nodded to Zuko and took off, sprinting with an unholy speed toward the end of the drill. There Katara and Aang waited, clinging to a broken entry portal.

 

“Sokka,” Aang shouted, “We need to get inside!”

 

“Then by all means do so!” He shouted, “I’m right behind you!” Aang swept into the drill, Katara following after. Sokka lagged behind, struggling to climb the ladder of the moving drill. A rope of water wrapped around his waist and pulled him in. 

 

Inside was a maze of catwalks and pipes. Dial, gauges and measuring devices of all manner were abound.

 

“How do we bring this thing down?” Katara asked.

 

“If I had to guess, I’d say it runs on steam. That's just really hot water, so make it less hot.”

 

Katara grinned and started freezing everything she could.

 

“Aang, there has to be some kind of support structure,” Sokka said, “ We need to destroy it.”

 

The avatar nodded his agreement.

 

---

Zuko and Toph fought with the rhinos, but were being overwhelmed. They battled, and even in the absence of the archer, they could barely hold their own. The rhinos soon had the support of the infantry, which made matters worse. Zuko and toph fought, and were determined to keep fighting until the drill went down. Things changed when unexpected allies appeared.

 

A pair of hooked sword appeared, blocking the spear coming for Zuko’s stomach. Zuzu punched fore towards the rhino, causing him to retreat. He looked and saw, of all people, Jet.

 

“Jet?!”

 

“Hey Lee.” Jet smirked, “Sorry about how things ended last time.” He jerked a thumb at the Earth bender fighting nearby. “That's my friend Haru, he claims to know the Avatar. We saw you were in trouble, and figured you could use the help.”

 

“Toph needs help,” Zuko said, “Something happened to her eyes.”

 

Jet looked at the girl fighting alongside Zuko. Her eyes were squeezed shut, with black and red blood running from them, and tears flowed after. “What happened to her?”

 

“I don't know.” Zuko used combustion bending on a line of cavalry coming their way, “But if it hadn't happened we’d have won by now.”

 

Jet nodded, and ran towards the earthbending girl. As he approached, he recognized the man she was fighting. A firebender, with a mindless cruelty behind his eyes. A man from his childhood, a monster. A murder. A man who had made Orphans.

 

“You!” Jet said, bearing his swords, “Do you remember me!?”

 

Mongke paused, looking at Jet as the world grew still. At first his mind was blank, but then he remembered. A night of fire and blood. Of joyous slaughter. A man and a woman burned and butchered, and a boy with tearful eyes.

 

Mongke smiled.

 

“Yes,” He said with hunger, “I remember you. And your father. Your mother most off all.”

 

“I am glad,” Jet said, “So you will know why.”

 

“Why?” Mongke said, beginning to laugh. His laugh was cut short, when Jet’s sword plunged through his heart.

 

“That’s it?” Jet asked, holding Mongke up. “After all these years? You laugh, and drop your guard?”

 

Mongke coughed, stunned. He shook his head, graspings at the sword. “That’s war, boy.”

 

“One mistake, and you're done.” Mongke shuddered, he twitched, and he died.

 

Jet pulled his sword. He looked at the darkened blade. Half his life he had dreamed of this, of his vengeance. It was his, he had won it. But he hadn’t expected it to be so easy. So empty. Around him, the battle waned. The drill crumpled, and the girl cried in silence, clutching at her broken eyes. Lee, or Zuko, or whoever he was held her as she wept.

 

“It hurts!” She whispered, and Zuko held her close to him.

 

“I know,” He said, before he bellowed, “KATARA!”

 

Jet looked at Haru, who stood guard. Once their leader had perished, the rhinos surrendered. Now bound in earth they stood still. Jet moved towards Zuko and the girl. He stood over them, his swords drawn.

 

In time, three people came. A boy with arrows tattooed across his skin, girl in blue and a young man with dead eyes. They raced across the battlefield as Zuko called for Katara, whoever that might be. Jet glanced down at the girl who Zuko held so desperately. Steam seemed to trail from her eyes, and her hands were twisted in agony.

 

“What happened?!” Katara asked, her hands coated in glowing water.

 

“I- I don’t know!” Zuko said, letting Katara minister to Toph’s eyes. “Her eye’s started leaking black blood!”

 

Katara stiffened, and her eyes jerked to Sokka. “Did you bleed on her?!”

 

“There was an arrow.” Sokka said, “I caught it but it pierced my hand. It was inches from her face.”

 

Katara paled, before drawing a vial from around her neck. She pulled the water from within and it began to glow with light brighter than any she had made before. “This is water from the spirit oasis, if anything will heal her this will.”

 

“I don’t understand,” Aang said, “Why does Sokka’s blood hurt?”

 

“It’s from his bond. It’s like liquid fire. It burns metal and melts flesh.”

 

Zuko, numb from panic at the suffering of his best friend, desperate for a distraction asked, “What happened in the drill?”

 

Sokka looked at him, and then at the swordsman and the mustachioed earthbender before speaking. “The drill ran on steam. Katara froze the water in the pipes and shut the engine down. Aang sliced through the supports holding the outer shell up, and it crumpled.”

 

“I’ll call Appa,” Aang said, “We should get behind the wall befo- Haru? What are you doing here?”

 

“I’m on the wall guard.” Haru said, “Same as Jet.” Haru jerked his head towards the swordsman.

 

Aang introduced himself to Jet, and Katara worked on Toph.

 

“I’m better now,” Toph said, staggering to her feet. She leaned on Zuko, and then punched Sokka as hard as she could. “Thanks for grabbing that arrow, but eat less spicy food.”

 

“Toph, you need to wear the bandages for a while, a couple of weeks at least.”

 

Begrudgingly, Toph let Katara Bandage her eyes. Appa landed beside them, and team Avatar, along with Jet and Haru, climbed on appa’s back as the moon rose.

 

---

Azula walked under cover of night towards the metalworking district. She had waited for Suki to fall asleep, and bade  Mai and Ty Lee stay behind. She could handle Hahn, of that she was sure.

 

She came close to the bridge, but saw a vaguely familiar woman stand upon it. As she grew close, she recognized her.

 

“Major Wen.” Azula said.

 

“Princess Azula,” The major replied, “ I must congratulate you on your infiltration of the city. How did you manage it?”

 

“Oh, just devilish wit and girlish charm.”

 

“I see. Who is your contact?”

Azula thought furiously. So they didn't know about Hahn, she was reasonably sure. That they didn't know how she had infiltrated the city she doubted very much. Azula prepared for battle.

 

“I suppose it doesn't matter.” Wen said, “Princess Azula, The Earth King has invited you to lake Laogai.”

 

Azula punched out with a bolt of blue fire, but a dozen figures swarmed around her. She fought furiously, but in moments she knew only darkness.

Author’s note

 

Heyo! Sorry I’m late. I don't really have an excuse, time just got away from me.

 

I’ve decided to condense things. This one has about four or five chapters worth of stuff in it. So forgive me if it's not as seemless as i want, and I do hope Jet and Haru's appearence isnt a shock, as it was alluded to in the interludes. it's been a plan since day 5.

 

04/06/2025 

Chapter 50: The Power of Friendship

Chapter Fifty

 

The Power of Friendship

 

Drums. Beating faster and louder. Sporadic. Sokka sprinted down the hallway, doors slamming open as he passed. The eerie green light cast vile and twisted shadows across the uneven stone floor. Ahead of him, always distant and never closer, twin wheels of fire burned. They danced, flickered and went out. The drums stopped their staccato rhythm, and the walls and floor fell away. Sokka was plunged into darkness, falling, twisting until he found himself in the Face Stealers cave.

 

“You are running out of time.”

Sokka’s eyes slid open. He had had that dream before, and others like them. Visions, in a way. He stood and stretched himself. The world was empty and quiet in the pre-dawn light - and the First Son enjoyed the calm.

 

He had through the seven days since their arrival in Ba Sing Se left the void, attempting to stay in the natural state of mankind - even though it made thinking difficult. It made everything difficult, in fact, but he had attempted it. He had failed.

 

At first, he had been overcome by sharp and bitter emotion- Disgust, contempt, fury and despair. Disgust for himself and the crooked souls he had destroyed. Contempt for the way the world was, for what it made him have to be. Fury for the weakness in his heart, and despair for he knew he would not stop. He had once before failed in his obligation and it had cost him and his friends dearly, he would not allow himself to be derelict again. He would not shirk his duty.

 

And so he had fled the world of the living- in a matter of speaking. He had of course tried again to leave the void, but now he could not reach the outside. It fled from his grasp.

 

Sokka dressed, and bound his regret to his side. He moved soundlessly through their house in the upper ring of Ba Sing Se, sliding the door to the back garden open to begin his training for the day.

 

Regret dipped left, and then right, and left once more. He sidestepped, lounged and cut the open air. The first light of the sun peaked over the outer wall and with it came the Avatar. Seven days since he had begun his firebender training. Seven days of practice and toil. Aang was with fire as he was with the others- prodigious.

 

The Dragon Prince was a good teacher, an asset to be sure- but Sokka was certain that Aang would have learned as quickly from any teacher, if not as well.

 

“Now roar like a tiger-dillo!” Zuko demanded. The Avatar did so, flames billowing forth and into the morning air banishing the light fog.

 

Hours passed in this manner, the morning sun rising high with the promise of a new day. When his arms grew too weak to lift his sword, Sokka sheathed it. He turned his back on the firebenders and left the garden.

 

After bathing, Sokka entered the common area. He found Zuko, Katara, and Toph. Aang was gone.

 

“Where is the Avatar?”

 

“He went to try and meet with the Earth King, again.” Katara said, “That's everyday this week.”

 

Zuko kept Sokka in the vision of his right eye. He had taken to doing that, since the library.  A mistrust had formed, which must be addressed. Sokka would not allow it to continue longer.

 

“Zuko, we should search for your uncle.” Sokka took a loaf of bread from the table and tore it, “We will need his help in the days to come.”

 

“I can find him on my own.”

 

“You haven’t.” He took a bite and swallowed, “Two heads are better than one.”

 

“My head is good enough.” Zuko snapped. 

 

Toph slapped a hand to her bandaged head, “Just go with him already! Work out whatever drama you two have going on and get over it. You’re driving me crazy!”

 

“We don’t have drama!”

 

“Liar.”

 

“He would know,” Katara said, “He’s the king of melodrama.”

Ty Lee paced anxiously around the common area of the house in Ba Sing Se’s middle ring. Azula had been gone for over a week, and they had come no closer to finding her. Even then, the Kyoshi Warriors were out searching for her in teams. Her and Mai were assigned to remain at the house until the next shift came to relieve them.

---

 

 

“I think we should go to Zuko.”

 

Ty Lee stopped in her pacing. She looked at Mai. “We don’t know where he is, and for all we know she could be overthrowing the Earth Kingdom as we speak! She could be meeting with Zhao in secret, she could be-!” Mai cut her off.

 

“She could be a prisoner. Tortured for information, about to be married off to the Earth King.” Mai’s voice grew small, “She could be dead.”

 

“Don’t say that!” Ty Lee said, bitter tears welling in her eyes. “She is Azula, blood of the dragon!”

 

Mai rolled her eyes, “Firebender of the highest order, daughter of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai, princess of the Fire Nation and long descended from Agni himself. Yes, I know the royal formula as well as anybody.”

 

“Then you should know that Azula wouldn’t give up without a fight!” Tears flowed freely from the acrobat. “If they had taken her there would have been signs!”

 

“They could easily be covered up.” Mai stood from her seat against the wall, beginning to pace in her friend's stead, “Besides, Azula’s been off lately. Ever since Iroh killed Zhao’s agent, and more since we met the Warriors.”

 

“I know,” Ty Lee said, “But that doesn’t… she can’t be-” Ty Lee’s voice broke. She could not say the words.

 

“She’s been faltering. I think her resolve is broken.” Mai said. “I don’t think she believes in the cause anymore.”

 

“If that’s true it won't be safe for her to come home.”

 

“And she won't come home if we don’t find her.” Mai stopped her pacing beside Ty Lee. “We need to go to Zuko, he can help us.”

 

“But will he?” Ty Lee put her hands to her face, “They’ve never gotten along, and after what happened in Gaoling I can’t say what he’ll do.”

 

“We have to take the chance.”

 

“And say what? “Hey Zuko, Azula hasn’t been around for a week do you know where she is?” We have nothing to tell him. Let’s go back and look around the bridge she met Hahn at again. Maybe we can find something.”

 

Mai sighed, “Why not? Haruhi and Sara will be back in a few minutes and we can go then.”

---

An hour had passed. Mai and Ty Lee searched the bridge and surrounding area. Suki had made fliers with Azula’s likeness on them and the Kyoshi Warriors had been passing them around for days, asking guards and people on the street. No one had seen anything.

 

“There’s nothing.” Mai looked at Ty Lee, “No signs of a fight or anyone being arrested.”

 

“Someone got arrested alright,” A voice spoke from out of sight, “Put up a fight too if you ask me.”

 

The pair wheeled around, searching for the source of the voice.

 

“Who said that?!”

 

“I did!” A dirty hand waved from under the bridge. “I saw the whole thing!”

 

Ty Lee flipped off of the bridge to get a better look. The speaker was a filthy yet perfectly dry man who looked as though he lived under that bridge.

 

“What did you see?”

 

“Oh well, I was on my way home from work about a week ago when-”

 

“You have a job?” Ty Lee was shocked.

 

“Well yeah,” The man said, “I work for the city transport system. I lost a bet with my brother, that's why I’m living under this bridge.”

“What about the fight?” Mai climbed down and into the small waterway, elbowing Ty Lee.

 

“Oh yeah,” the employed hobo continued, “Well as I got back I saw the Dai Li and some soldier lady talking to a girl around your age. Said something about a princess being invited to Lake Laogai by the king. Then they started slinging rock and I got out of there as quick as I could.”

 

Ty Lee took a flier from inside her shirt and showed it to the employed man. “Was this her?”

 

Hobo-with-a-job leaned in and examined the image. “Yeah, I reckon that’s the girl.”

---

Aang landed on the palace grounds, sneaking past the guards and staff. He had to get to the Earth King- but where would he find him? He ducked past an open window and peaked inside. 

There was nobody in sight, so the Avatar leapt through.

 

He listened carefully at the door and heard nothing. He peaked in cautiously. It was a long hallway, and at the far end there was a vast and ornate golden door.

 

“That looks kingly.” He walked towards the massive entry. He had only gone a few steps when a hand fell on his shoulder. He jumped, surprised at the sudden contact- he whirled around and brought his staff to bare. A pair of men in dark green robes and broad hats stood before him.

 

“Youre not supposed to be here.”

 

“I am the Avatar. I need to speak with the Earth King.” Aang lowered his staff, “Do you know where he is?”

 

The two men exchanged a look before one spoke. 

 

“I am Chun,” He gestured to his companion, “This is Gary. We are members of the Dai Li order, and protectors of the cultural heritage of Ba Sing Se.”

 

“Okay…” Aang stretched the word out, “Can you take me to see the king?”

 

“Follow.” Gary said, with a rough voice that made him sound like a human-lion hybrid. The two turned and the last airbender followed.

 

“Gary’s a strange name.”

 

“Not where I come from.”

 

“Must be a strange place.”

 

“Mmm, not really. There are some strange people though, my friend Jason’s a strange one.”

 

“Jason?”

 

“Yeah, he’s big into amphorae and pamphlets. It’s kind of his thing.”

 

“What are pamphlets?”

 

“No idea, but he keeps talking about them.”

---

“So.” Zuko said as they walked through the lower ring, “The sandbenders.”

 

“The sandbenders.”

 

“You killed all of them.”

 

“I did,” Sokka scanned the crowd as they walked, using Koh’s mantle to enhance his vision.

 

“Do you feel nothing?”

 

“Not in the void.”

 

“Why did you? We could have gotten away, they didn’t have to die- and their bodies!” Zuko’s voice grew in volume. He Realized this, and moving close he spoke softly, “What did you do to their bodies?!”

 

“I sent them body and soul to the spirit world to be cleansed and born anew.”

 

“That’s a lie!” Zuko hissed.

 

“No, it isn’t.” Sokka looked at the prince. “It is the way of my bond with the Face Stealer. I find the corrupted souls and send them to him, he devours the corruption and scours clean the souls of the afflicted.”

 

Zuko stared at the First Son of the Southern Water Tribe. “And you believe that? What does he get out of it?”

 

“Koh is a spirit of order,” As he spoke the name, shadows seemed to flicker toward him for only a second and then it passed, “He destroys chaos and it grows his power. He does not abide its presence.”

 

“Fine, say that's true.” Zuko waived a hand in a vague gesture, “How can you do it so easily?”

 

“Because it is necessary.” Sokka said, “And it is not so easy. When I can feel, it haunts me. I can hardly sleep- but I stayed my hand once, Zuko. I know well the price of mercy, and it is steep. Steeper than I can afford.”

 

“What does that even mean?”

 

“I had an opportunity to send Zhao to the Face Stealer,” Sokka answered, his voice hollow and his eyes empty, “I hesitated and it was lost. I shirked my duty, I was derelict and Yue paid the price. For a time I put aside the mantle of power and lived as I had before. I closed my third eye and walked blindly as a fool among snakes and liars.”

 

“Third eye? My Uncle mentioned it once, but I don’t know-”

 

“It lets you see a person. Really see them, who they are, what they're capable of. You can see more with your third eye than can be said in words.”

 

“That’s how you know if someone…” Zuko trailed off.

 

“Yes. Many people have a trace of it, but only those who are taken over are sent to him.”

 

“Do I have it?”

 

“You did,” Sokka answered, “At the fire temple. Then less and less so, until it faded entirely at the north pole.”

 

“Does Azula?”

 

“Not a trace.”

 

“...That makes absolutely no sense.”

 

“I don’t make the rules.”

 

“I’m glad.” Zuko ran a hand through his hair, “About Azula, I mean.”

 

Sokka didn't answer. He saw a pair of women he recognized. It was Suki and another Kyoshi Warrior. They hadn’t seen them, they were showing an elderly couple a picture. He put his hand out to stop Zuko.

 

“What is it?”

 

“We should head back to the house, It’s getting late.”

---

Aang sat bored in an unassuming office. There were tapestries on the walls, and some few trinkets on the desk. The walls were lined with shelves containing countless scrolls. Aang picked up a small badger-mole statue and examined it. He began tossing it back and forth from hand to hand when the door opened, surprising him and making him drop the statue on the desk, where its ear broke off.

 

Aang grinned sheepishly. The man scowled.

 

“I am Long Feng, chief advisor to the Earth King.”

 

“I’m Aang,” Aang began, but Long Feng interrupted.

 

“I know who you are, Avatar. I know all about you and your friends. The banished son of Fire Lord Ozai, the children of Hakoda, and the young Lady Beifong. Quite the cadre of nobles you’ve gathered about yourself. I applaud your efforts, but I am afraid you will not be adding the Earth King to those under your influence.”

 

“I’m not trying to influence- that’s not-! Look, I just need to meet with the Earth King so we can plan an invasion- there’s an eclipse in forty days and we need the army to strike the capital when the firebenders are powerless!” Aang explained as best he could, “If we move fast we can end the war in one strike!”

 

“Is that so?” Long Feng asked, “Who’s idea was this?”

 

“Sokka’s!”

 

“Tell me about Sokka. If the Earth King is to approve your request for an audience, he must know that the source is trustworthy.”

 

“You said you know all about him.”

 

“In a more general sense I mean.”

 

“...okay,” Aang said, “Uh he’s smart, he’s good with a sword, he’s got creepy spirit powers, he can open his third eye, uh… he makes most of our plans? Oh and he’s got a magic sword.” 

 

“Nice try.” Long Feng rolled his eyes, “But his majesty has more important things to deal with than the ramblings of a young boy.”

 

“Young boy?! I am one hundred and twelve years old! I’m a year older than King Bumi!”

 

“A century trapped in an iceberg hardly counts.” As Long Feng left he tossed over his shoulder, “Earth King Kuei has denied your petition for an audience.”

---

Zuko and Sokka returned to their house in the upper ring. As they walked through the garden path and to the front door, they could hear the voices of their friends and some guests.

 

They entered and found Aang, Toph, and Katara sharing a meal with Haru, Jet, and a boy and girl that Sokka didn't recognize.

 

“Hey Lee!” The girl said, “Or Zuko, I guess.”

 

The boy who carried a bow nodded in greeting. Sokka inspected the group of newcomers, and determining no ill intent moved past them without speaking. He took a seat at the head of the long table.

“So, Zuko,” Aang said as the prince took a seat, “How do you know Jet?”

 

“I met him, Longshot, and Smellerbee a few months ago.”

 

Sokka ignored the others as they continued in their conversation. Toph picked at the bandages around her broken eyes, and Katara slapped at her hands. The two began to bicker. He put them out of his mind.

 

“Aang,” Sokka spoke loudly, cutting through the buzz of conversation. The room grew quiet. “Did you meet with the king?”

 

“No,” Aang looked away, chagrined, “He wouldn’t speak with me, I only met with his advisor.”

 

“We are running out of time.” Sokka explained his vision from Koh, and the group sat around the table looking varyingly anxious and contemplative.

 

“But if they won’t let Aang in, how are we going to meet with the Earth King?” Katara proffered, “The generals can’t act without his approval, so we have to go through him.”

 

Aang dragged a hand down his face. “Uh… The power of friendship?”

 

This was met with six seconds of complete silence until Jet spoke.

 

“That might be the dumbest thing I have ever heard.”

 

“Actually,” Toph began, “I think that might work.”

 

Team Avatar and company were shocked, Aang was more so than he was to learn that Toph was blind- he had assumed it was a weird inside joke between her and Zuko.

 

“No, seriously,” She continued, “It can work.”

 

“How?” Aang asked.

 

“It’s simple,” Toph explained, “We use the power of friendship… to commit acts of incredible violence.”

 

The group sat in stunned silence. Zuko was flabergasted, Aang started to laugh and Katara joined in. Sokka slowly nodded his head, speaking.

 

“I like it. Katara, get ink and paper. Aang, draw a map of the Earth King’s palace. Exterior defenses and whatever you’ve seen inside.” He turned to Zuko, "Zuko you have some experience. You have an idea of what to expect.”

 

“Jet and Haru,” Sokka looked at them, “Will you be joining us?”

 

Sokka watched them intently- if they wouldn't side with them they would have to be restrained and kept quiet until the task was done.

 

“What about me and Longshot?”

 

“You go where Jet goes.” Sokka said, “Whatever he decides you will follow.”

---

Azula didn’t know how much time had passed- though she had guessed a week or more. She had been fed little and given less water, and it was beginning to take its toll. The bindings were some kind of metal, wrapped tightly enough that she couldn’t draw a full breath, limiting her bending. Her eyes and ears were covered, leaving her in total darkness.

 

She could hear a faint scraping sound and muffled voices. Water was dripping somewhere, and there were footsteps in the distance. They were getting louder, closer. Good, she thought, company at last.

 

“Why if it isn’t Princess Azula.” A woman’s voice. Wen. “How the mighty have fallen.”

 

“You’re terribly clever aren’t you?” Azula shot back, “spent the last week thinking that one up?”

 

The blindfold was ripped from her head, pulling hair with it. Azula didn’t wince, to her credit. She blinked at the sudden light, dim and green as it was. Before her were two people, Major Wen and a man she didn’t recognize.

 

“So, we meet at last.” The man began, pacing slowly around her, “I am Long Feng, Grand secretariat of Ba Sing Se and chief advisor to He who Carries our Nation on His Back, The Beating Heart of the Earth, and Lord of the Impenetrable city, his majesty Earth King Kuei.”

 

“I am Azula, daughter of Ursa and Fire Lord Ozai, Blood of the Dragon, firebender of the highest order, Princess of the Fire Nation, and long descended of Agni himself.”

 

“I know who you are,” Long Feng said, “The secret shame of the Fire Nation. A dragon princess born without fire, whose only weapons are lies and deceit.”

 

Azula shook her head in shock, and then laughed. “Who ever has been giving you information should be fired, I assure you that I am a firebend-”

 

She was cut off when Wen struck her across the face.

 

“Do not lie to me.” A light began to circle around Azula, propelled along a track, “You will be punished greatly. You are not a firebender, you have never been a firebender.

---

Author’s Note

 

Heyo!

 

Yeah, this was around three chapters worth of stuff in here- I know it seems rushed but that's because it is. I meant to have finished this whole project in less than a year and its been nearly 4. OOPs.

 

Also, Gary the Dai Li is a throwaway reference to He Who Fights With Monsters, as well as the bit with amphorae and pamphlets.

 

Anyway, all of the stuff that has happened here has been planned since day one, and Azula is gonna have a pretty rough time in prison.

 

Ya boi, Charlemagne.

Chapter 51: War and Ruin

Chapter fifty-one

 

War and Ruin

Haru waited in the shadows and listened. He was part of the distraction team, and while it made him feel like a side character, he would do his best. Any moment now, Jet would give the signal and he would begin. Sokka had told them to wait until the sun was at just the right angle so it would be in the eyes of the guards- Haru thought this was a little mean but hey in for a copper in for a gold. This was technically treason and he doubted there would be an unnecessary meanness charge.

 

The signal. A bird call of some kind. Haru stepped out of the shadows and walked into the middle of the boulevard whistling to act natural. Once there he turned away from the palace gate and started bending with all his might. He thought his eyes might burst from the strain, but he managed to bring the gates down.

 

Then he started to run. Guards chased after him and he began leading them away. Another bird call and then an explosion rocked the street.

---

Jet lay prone on the roof watching Haru run from the guards. Just a little farther… he gave the next signal. Long Shot swung down from his hiding place in the rafters of a porch and fired a burning arrow at the charges Smellerbee had planted early that morning. They blew, scaring a flock of sparrow-hogs that began charging in every direction.

 

People in the street did what always happened. They panicked. And that panic turned into a riot. Hundreds of guards streamed from the palace gates and tried to bring order to the chaos.

 

Jet stood and drew his swords, pointed them to the south east with a smirk, and joined the fray.

---

Zuko sat next to Sokka on the roof of a warehouse three miles south-east of the palace. An unusual sight in the upper ring. Sokka stared intently into the distance, his eyes wreathed in darkness.

 

“I think you should leave the void for this one.”

 

“No.”

 

“We need to get Kuei on our side,” Zuko looked over his shoulder at the others. They sat on Appa’s back. Toph tried to surreptitiously pick at the bandages around her eyes. Katara was looking at her when she did so, and slapped her hand away. Zuko looked back to Sokka, “An unfeeling murder machine isn't going to help.”

 

Sokka was silent, and Zuko thought he would just ignore him until the First Son said, “I can’t.”

 

“Why?”

 

“I do not know.”

 

“That’s not good.”

 

Sokka shrugged. “It has it’s advantages.”

 

“It makes you less human.”

 

“It doesn't matter.” He stood. “Thats the signal.”

 

Zuko squeezed his eyes shut- why did he have to be the one to say this?- he turned to the others and shouted, “Operation Friendship is a-go!”

 

Appa roared and leapt into the air, Sokka and Zuko jumped on his back.

 

“Fly Appa,” Sokka whispered in the bison's ear, “Show us the meaning of haste.”

 

“Another reason for you to leave the void,” Zuko shouted, “It makes you a melodramatic edgelord.”

 

“Actauly I think that's from the spirit-powers,” Katara said, “He started acting that way before he found the void.”

 

“Is there someone who knows about that stuff?” Toph asked.

 

“Uh… a couple of dead people Sokka can ask, I think?” Aang said as they sped towards the palace walls, gaining altitude.

 

“He’s a necromancer?” Toph was aghast.

 

“What? No, that's ridiculous.” Katara rolled her eyes, “He can just go into the spirit world and speak with an ancestor and a millenia dead guru.”

 

“Oh yeah that's way more normal than necromancy.” Toph shot a dirty look at Zuko because she didn't know where Katara was.

 

“Ten seconds.” Sokka drew his regret. Shadows pulled toward him and frost covered his sword. “Zuko, Aang, now.”

 

The Avatar and the dragon prince leapt off of Appa. They hung in empty air for a moment before Aang started blasting. Zuko inhaled sharply and a line of fire split the air, and  a boulder shattered into dust. Zuko used his bending to slow his descent while the avatar blew guards across the ground with airbending.

 

Appa landed and Katara leapt off, pulling water from the fountains and forming a defensive mass of tentacles. Sokka threw Toph over his shoulder and scurried down Appa’s tail. He unceremonially dumped Toph onto the stones of the palace grounds. The moment she made contact with the earth she sprouted a feral grin.

 

“Hurry up Zuzu!” She bellowed, “I love the sound of violence in the morning!”

 

“Something is seriously wrong with you!” Zuko touched down with the group, “You and my sister would really get along.”

 

“That stuck up floozy?” Toph buried a team of spearmen to the waist, “I’d rather die than spend another second with her.”

 

“Hey!” Sokka and Zuko said in unison. Sokka frowned, why had that irritated him? He hadn't felt anything in days. He shouldn't be able to feel anything… this was a problem for later.

 

“Forward!” Sokka called, and dashed into the oncoming Earth Kingdom forces.

 

Zuko watched him go. Sokka moved in a blur, weapons shattered and men fell to the ground twitching. It was like watching Ty Lee with a sword and fondness for dramatic poetry. He shook his head, and blew up a defensive earthwork with combustion bending.

 

“We have to get him out of the void,” Zuko said.

 

“Is now really the time?” Katara picked up an earthbender and threw him.

 

“Now’s the only time he can't hear us.”

 

“No, I know a trick to turn him off for a bit.”

 

“Guys,” Aang cut in, “I’m worried too but we’re in the middle of something- and now he’s in the thick of it by himself.”

 

“Yeah,” Toph started running forwards and shouted, “Stairs!”

 

“That’s your battle cry?!” Aang laughed as he fought, chasing after her.

 

“No!”

 

“It sounded like a battle cry!”

 

“Onward, boys!” A sergeant bellowed, “Forward, unto death!”

 

“Now that’s a battle cry.” Aang said, “Kind of macabre though.”

 

Team Avatar finally made it to the stairs. Zuko ducked as Sokka’s boomerang sailed past his head to cut through the string of an archer's bow. 

 

“Enough talking!” Zuko shouted, “We’re in the middle of a fight!”

 

Toph raised her hands and in moments hundreds of feet of stairs turned into a steep ramp. Soldiers began to tumble down the palace ramp while Aang and Toph started to bend their way up the steps. 

 

Zuko watched in silence as a team of earthbenders lifted a massive badger-mole statue and launched it at them. He drew a sharp breath and the statue exploded into dust, raining debris down on them.

 

“Nice shot.”

 

Zuko jumped, glaring at Sokka. “Where did you come from?”

 

“He was halfway up the stairs.” Toph answered. “Figured he’d be fine.”

 

“You knew he was up there?!” Katara was outraged.

 

“He’s fine.”

 

“We’d be inside already if you all would stop talking.” Sokka sheathed his sword.

 

“You’re also talking.” Aang pointed out.

 

Zuko blasted another rock out of the air. 

 

Sokka didn’t reply. The comment did not warrant a response. He stretched his neck as his bones began to re-nit and his muscles repaired themselves. He had overestimated his strength, and had nearly died for it. Had Toph not collapsed the stair when she did he would have fallen.

 

They made it to the top of the stairs and burst into the palace proper. Zuko drew his dao blades.

 

“Follow me!” Aang charged off into the main corridor. He took them on a winding route until they reached an enormous ornate door.

 

“Zuko,” Sokka said, nodding to the door.

 

“I don’t know,” Zuko said, “A firebender blasting down this door is gonna send the wrong message.”

 

“I guess that’s fair. Toph?”

 

“With pleasure.” Toph stomped once and the door collapsed inwards.

 

“My fancy door!” A voice cried out from within.

 

Team Avatar paused before entering the throne room. It was a long ornate chamber, lined with pillars and tapestries. At the far end of the room was an ornate throne, upon which sat a rather unimpressive slender man. Beside him stood a number of nervous looking attendants.

 

“We need to speak to you!” Aang said, leading the procession.

 

“You’re here to overthrow me!” The Earth King said.

 

“No, we’re on your side!” The Avatar advanced toward Kuei.

 

“At least make your lies believable,” Kuei stood and raised a hand. A group of Dai Li burst from the ground in front of him. “You attack my palace, lay waste to my guards, break down my fancy door, and come bearing weapons to my throne! And you expect me to believe that you're on my side?”

 

“He has a point.” Toph said.

 

“Lay down your weapons!”

 

“That’s a terrible idea.” Zuko hissed. Aang shrugged.

 

“We just came to talk.” Katara proffered. Aang and Katara looked to Sokka, who shrugged and sheathed his boomerang. He took Regret in its sheath from his waist and dropped it on the ground. The others followed suit- though Zuko did so with a groan.

 

“Arrest them.” Kuei ordered.

 

“But we dropped our weapons!” Aang protested.

 

“I don’t even know who you are!” The Earth King snapped as Dai Li clamped earthen cuffs around each of them. He looked around for someone, and not seeing him he said, “And where is Long Feng?”

 

“Forgive me my lord,” A woman started, and then fell silent.

 

“What is it, Junior Advisor Kim?” The Earth King asked, raising an eyebrow.

 

“Sir, Long Feng departed the palace after the… uh… assault began.”

 

Kuei looked taken aback. “He ran away?”

 

“Yes, sire.”

 

“I’m sure he had a good reason.” Kuei turned back to the intruders, “Do you know who these people are?”

 

“Uh, yes, my king.” Kuei turned to look at her expectantly, and another attendant nudged her in the back. Kim glanced at the Dai Li nervously before speaking. 

 

“That is the Avatar, the Fire Prince, and the children of Hakoda.” Her voice got softer and higher in pitch as she spoke, “As well as the only daughter of house Beifong.”

 

Kuei paused for a second, and whipped his head around to stare at the avatar. Then he looked around at the various other occupants of the room. “Seriously?”

 

“Yep!” Aang temporarily freed himself and waved.

 

“I don’t buy it.”

 

Aang started bending all four elements. Kuei’s mouth fell open.

 

“Uh… release them.” The Dai Li released Team Avatar.

 

“Go and tell the guards it was a false alarm.” Kuei waved the Dai Li away, “So, young Avatar, why did you break into my palace?

 

---

Mai and Ty Lee stood on the veranda of the avatar’ss house in the upper ring of Ba Sing Se. Nobody was home.

 

“Should we wait for them?” Ty Lee asked.

 

“I don’t know!” Mai snapped. “They could have left the city for all we know.”

 

“Maybe we should just leave a note?”

 

“Saying what? Please find Azula, I know that she might be responsible for the attack on the palace but search for her anyway and let us know. ”

 

“No,” Ty Lee glared, “just something like ‘ Please come meet with the Kyoshi Warriors- we need your help.’ ”

 

Mai nodded.

 

---

Azula winced at the pain as she finally managed to pull her hands free of the manacle that restrained her. Her wrists were left raw and bleeding from the metal scraping against her. She tried to work the mechanism of the iron bands that restricted her breathing, but was unable to overcome the lock. That was alright, she thought, hand to hand it would be.

 

She crept to the cell door and knocked. The Dai Li agent outside slid the metal window open and peered inside, seeing the princess absent. He cursed and opened the door, charging in with a bending stance. Azula struck, using the techniques she had learned from her friends, Mai, Ty Lee, and Suki. The Dai Li fell to the ground immobilized. She searched his robes for keys and found them. She checked them all against the lock on her restraints- success!

 

She took a full breath for the first time in days, and punched out with a gout of fire. Or at least she had meant to. No fire came. She frowned.

 

The water, they had put something in the water. It had been foul and brackish, but that must have been to cover the taste of whatever drugs they had used to dull her bending. They must have drugged her, that was the only thing that made sense. Azula was a firebender.

 

She entered the hallway cautiously, and seeing no other guards she started running.

 

---

“No.”

 

“What do you mean no?” Aang looked shocked.

 

The Earth King had invited them to join him for tea, and they had moved to a small yet elegant dining room while they waited for the royal tea maker to arrive. Kuei said he was the best in the city.

 

“I mean that I will not invade a nation that I have no quarrel with.”

 

“No quarrel?” Katara stood, “How can you say that after everything they have done?”

 

“I am annoyed by their actions,” Kuei said, glaring at Zuko, “But ignoring my correspondence is no reason for an invasion. If it were, then I would have to invade the Air Temples and both poles.”

 

“What are you talking about?”

 

“And you,” Kuei glared at Zuko, ignoring the question, “Betraying your father so you can take the throne early? You should be ashamed of yourself. I have half a mind to endorse Princess Azula for the throne.”

 

“He doesn’t know…” Sokka said softly.

 

“I know all, O’ Emperor of the Water Tribes. Don’t think you can come to my palace uninvited and seek my help in expanding the Empire of the Sea and Moon. I am the Earth King, and if you weren't aware that means I am rather well informed.”

 

“What?” Sokka asked, unsure of what the Earth King was saying.

 

“Empire of the Sea and Moon?” Toph asked.

 

“And I know all about this ‘ Subtle Rebellion’ of yours, Prince Zuko. Declaring yourself Firelord in exile, naming yourself the One-Eyed Dragon. Preposterous. You have two eyes.I will have no part in your schemes.”

 

Team Avatar sat in stunned silence until Toph turned her head and said, “Iroh?!”

 

The door slid open and General Iroh, Dragon of the West and brother of Firelord Ozai appeared carrying a tray laden with tea and cups. “Toph?!”

 

“Uncle?!”

 

“Zuko?!”

 

“What is going on here?” Kuei asked.

 

“I don’t know,” Aang buried his face in his hands, “This isn’t going to plan.”

 

Zuko leapt from his seat and embraced his Uncle. Iroh managed to save the tray and tea. “I am glad to have found you again Uncle.”

 

“You’ve grown.” Iroh said, returning the embrace with one hand.

 

“Explain.” Kuei demanded.

 

“It’s kind of a long story.” Aang said.

 

“I will explain, your majesty.” Iroh said. He began serving tea.

 

“My name is not Mushi, as you believe. I am Iroh, son of Ilah and Firelord Azulon, Dragon of the West, Firebender of the highest order and long descended of Agni himself. I was once crown prince of the Fire Nation and the Sword of Agni’s will.”

 

“Over a century ago my grandfather, Firelord Sozin, began a war of subjugation against the other nations. He began with the extinction of the air nomads.”

 

Iroh told Kuei the story of the hundred years war, of Zuko’s banishment, the finding of the avatar and the death of Princess Yue and Zuko’s eventual turn to good.

 

“That’s quite the tale.” Kuei said, “I don’t know if I can believe it without proof.”

 

“What more proof do you need? You have the Avatar and the Fire Prince sitting before you, and the First Son of the Southern Water Tribe.” Katara gestured to them.

 

“I thought he was the emperor?” Kuei said.

 

“Not as far as I know.” Sokka said.

 

“So you claim Long Feng has been feeding me naught but lies for my entire life?” Kuei asked. “And you offer no proof? I am to trust a tea maker and a group of children over my own advisors?”

 

“We have proof.” Toph said, “There’s the drill.”

Hours later, Kuei had assembled the council of five- the highest ranked generals of the Earth Kingdom. He had been yelling at them for several minutes.

 

“You should all be hanged for this!” He bellowed in conclusion.

 

“Your majesty,” General How said, “We never suspected that you didn’t know - Long Feng always delivered your orders personally. He said you suspected spies in your midst and forbade us from speaking of the war in your presence.”

 

“I never trusted him,” General Duanmu said, “He always seemed fishy to me.”

 

“Yet you obeyed his every command,” Kuei scowled in derision, “Without question.”

 

“The royal seal was on every order. It would have been treason to disobey.”

 

“And yet treason followed none the less!” The King snarled. His voice grew in intensity as he spoke, “My people have been suffering a war for a century, and are led by a blind fool for a king!”

 

Sokka stared unfeeling at the king. Zuko stood awkwardly off to one side whispering with his uncle. Toph looked to have taken offense at the comment about blindness.

 

Kuei took a few deep breaths and calmed himself. When he again spoke his voice was shaky with restrained emotion, “What’s done is done. All we can do now is try to move forward. Where do we stand in the war?”

 

“We’re… We’re losing sir.”

 

“Am I correct in assuming that you mean that the kingdom of earthbenders is losing a land war to a nation that does not possess the innate ability to reshape the earth around them?”

 

“Uh, yes sir.”

 

“For how long?

 

“Seventeen years. Before that it was a stalemate.”

 

“Since I first sat the throne.”

 

“...Yes.”

 

Kuei took off his glasses and leaned forward over the map of the world. “Find Long Feng. Have him arrested and brought before me. I require a military investigation into the Dai Li and a complete list of all correspondence sent to the palace in the last six months.”

 

“Kim!” Kuei Barked, and the young junior advisor jumped. “Send a message to my cousin, King Bumi of Omashu. He is summoned to Ba Sing Se at once, as I require his guidance.”

 

General How coughed. “Omashu has fallen.”

 

“Omashu has fallen.” Kuei said quietly. “How much of my kingdom is controlled by the Fire Lord?”

 

“Over half, sire.”

 

“Over half.” Kuei was stunned. “What am I going to do?”

 

The King began to laugh as tears formed. 

 

“I woke up this morning thinking that I reigned over a prosperous kingdom in times of peace! I even wrote to the monarchs of the other nations and invited them to visit Ba Sing Se!” He fell to his knees and howled with desperate laughter, “Only to find that I've been a puppet! My reign has been a lie! There’s a war on, a century long war of subjugation that we’ve all but lost!”

 

“All is not lost, your majesty,” Iroh walked closer to the king as his laughter died and in its place lay wretched sobs, “We have the Avatar.”

 

Kuei wiped his tears. “What good will that do?”

 

“It means there is still hope.”

 

“The only hope for my people is a child.” Kuei shook his head and stood. “Our first priority is to retake Omashu. We will use it as the staging grounds of the Avatar’s invasion.”

 

“That’s not going to work,” Sokka said, “The invasion needs to happen in thirty-nine days.”

 

---

Mai and Ty Lee arrived back at the home they shared with the Kyoshi Warriors and found them in the midst of an argument.

 

“They’ll help us!” Sara pulled at her hair in frustration, “They’re good people! They’re friends!”

 

“Not if Zuko is with them!” Suki snarled in derision, “He’s fooled them into trusting him, he’s a snake and a liar!”

 

“The Avatar wouldn’t ever fall for that!” Haruhi countered, taking Sara’s side.

 

“The Avatar is twelve!” Suki bellowed.

 

“Uh…” Ty Lee said, zonked.

 

“Oh good, you’re back.” Suki said, “You can tell them they’re wrong.”

 

“Why can’t Zuko be trusted?” Mai asked.

 

“Because he’s the crown prince of the Fire Nation?!”

 

“No, he’s an exile and a rebel.”

 

“That’s just a plot to gain their trust!” Suki whirled on the pair of them, “He’s going to capture the Avatar and kill the Earth King! This reeks of guile and deceit!”

 

“That’s ridiculous.” Mai said, “Zuko hasn't an ounce of guile in him!”

 

“How would you possibly know that? Do you know him? Have you ever met him? No, of course you haven’t! Well we have, and we know the cruelty in his heart. I have seen the malice in his eyes myself!”

 

Mai clenched her jaw and turned away. “It doesn’t matter. Ty Lee and I have contacted the Avatar already.”

 

“You what?!” Suki said, “For all we know, Zuko could have been the one that took her.”

 

“It wasn’t Zuko,” Ty Lee was quiet in her words, “It was the Dai Li. They took her to some place called Lake Laogai.”

 

---

“I will go and meet with Ozai myself!” Kuei said, “I will sue for peace! We have to be able to reach some kind of agreement, he has no reason to want my people to suffer.”

 

“That won’t work,” Zuko explained, “My father does not want peace, he wants only for the Earth Kingdom to be destroyed. And as for your people, he doesn’t care about them at all. He always would tell me and Azula at every opportunity; They’re Earth Kingdom. They just look like people.”

 

“They just look like people?!” Kuei exclaimed.

 

“Invasion is the only viable option.” Sokka said, “A fast and vicious assault on the caldera. No warning, no retreat, and no surrender.”

 

“Is that all that is left to us?” Kuei sagged into his seat, and rested his head in his hands. “Acts of incredible violence? Is all the world naught but war and ruin?”

 

He closed his eyes. “Can we expect aid from the Water Tribes? Or are their poles too far and their navies distant?”

 

“Cheif Hakoda is near with his fleet, as well as a contingent of waterbenders from the north.” General Sung said, “It appears he has captured a few Fire Navy ships as well.”

 

“Send word to him at once, invite him to the palace- if he would even come.” Kuei leaned back. His eyes, normally so kind and curious, were dark and hollow. “We have to send someone he would listen to.”

 

“I will go to him,” Iroh said, “We have battled many times, but he has my measure. If I come under the banner of peace he will listen.”

 

“Katara,” Sokka spoke with his eyes focused on Kuei, “You will go with him. Express the gravity of the situation to our father.”

 

“You can’t just order me to-” Katara stopped mid sentence when Sokka raised a hand.

 

“It is my prerogative as First Son.” Sokka said, “Go in my stead, I command it in service to our people.”

 

“Why does she need to go?” Aang asked, “Shouldn’t Iroh be enough?”

 

“Take no half measures.” Sokka said and though he spoke to the avatar the words seemed meant for the king. “We need to send word to the Mechanist at the northern Air Temple. I have designs for machines that only he can build.”

 

“I can be there and back in a few days,” Aang offered, frowning.

 

“What of the eastern Air Temple?” A woman barring the lists of correspondence said, “We received a letter from them a few weeks ago.”

 

“From the Air Temple?” Aang asked softly, “What did it say?”

 

“I’m not sure off the top of my head,” She bent down and dug through the stack of books she had brought with her to the king. “It looks like… they asked for the avatar to come to the temple, stating they could unlock something called the avatar state.”

 

Sokka looked away from the king for the first time. His head snapped sharply to lock onto the last airbender. “You must go. All else can wait.”

 

“But what about the mechanist?” Aang looked torn, “We need his help!”

 

“It is secondary.”

 

“But I haven’t mastered firebending!”

 

“Firebending does not work during an eclipse.”

 

“I- but- Katara-” Aang sputtered, “Fine. I'll go in the morning.”

 

“Send for this mechanist.” Kuei said, waiving at his attendants.

 

“I’m afraid he wouldn’t get the message with enough time to get here.” General How said grimly.

 

“What?” Kuei said, “An eagle-houd can make that journey in days. How could he not get here in time?”

 

“You banned the use of eagle-hounds years…” He trailed off. “Long Feng.”

 

“Assume that any edicts I have given are suspect.” Kuei’s voice was exhausted. “I have never given any, save for a change to the rations given to the wall guard six years ago.”

 

“Yes, my king.”

 

“Is there more pressing business?” Kuei asked. “I am weary of war and ruin.”

 

“It matters not if you are weary,” Sokka answered, “War and ruin is what remains to you.”

 

Kuei was silent for a moment. He wiped his spectacle before replacing them on his face. “Then it is a burden that I shall carry as I do the crown.”

 

They continued planning long into the night. Messengers came and went, sending orders far and wide as the fifty-second Earth King at last took power.

 

---

“Do you think they made it?”

 

Jet rolled his eyes. “How should I know?”

 

There was silence. And then Smellerbee said, “Guess.”

 

“Yeah, they probably made it.” Haru said.

 

“Then why are we still in jail?”

 

Longshot shrugged his shoulders.

“Twenty-seven men.” Long Feng said, “Impressive for a nonebender.”

 

Azula glared up at him. She was bruised nearly beyond recognition. Her right eye was swollen shut, and some of her ribs were broken. She had been close to freedom, close to the sun she could almost taste it. Now she was again in chains and bound to the floor. “I wish it had been more.”

 

“You would.” Long Feng said, “You vile little monster. But twenty-seven fully grown and skilled earthbenders is rather impressive to beat alone and in the dark. Six of them died.”

 

“If I had my fire it would have been all of them!” Azula hissed between ragged breaths. Six men. Six. She hadn’t killed before- but in such dire circumstances she would do so again. Her fathers words echoed in her mind. Give no quarter. Ask no quarter.

 

“But you’ve never had fire. All you have is guile.” Long Feng turned his back on her. “May you eat that.”

 

As he left, the lantern once again began to circle her.

 

---

Author’s Note

 

Heyo!

 

And with that we have one more arc left in part two.

 

Azula’s having a bad time.

 

Charlemagne.

 

8/12/25

Chapter 52: Interludes Five

Chapter Fifty-Two

Interludes Five

 

Ji. Hakoda, Zhao. Lao. Jin.

 

Author’s Note.

 

I know, I know. We just did an interlude five chapters ago. What do I say to that? Interludes go between each ark, and I condensed the meeting kuei arc. More importantly, I really like the interludes.

 

Charlemagne.

---

 

Ji

Captain Ji sat at a campfire beside the road in the Fire Nation. He had taken off his boots and was enjoying the spring night air as he laid back against a tree. Around him had assembled a surprisingly large number of young men and women- prospective recruits for the Fire Navy.

 

“So you know Prince Zuko?” One of the young women said.

 

Ji nodded, taking a sip from his canteen. “I served under him.”

 

“What’s he like?” A pimply youth asked.

 

“He’s… angry. Stubborn. Proud.” Ji answered, “But he cares for us. When one of the men was hurt, he would act indifferent. He tried to keep up appearances.”

 

“How do you know he was acting?”

 

“Because,” Ji leaned forward, “Zuko is a terrible liar.”

 

“Is that all?” another woman asked.

 

“No,” Ji said, “If there’s any one thing that could sum up Zuko entirely, it’s this. No matter the struggle, or how hopeless it may seem, Zuko always does the right thing. Even if it burns him.”

---

 

Zhao

 

Field Marshall Zhao stalked quietly along the shores of Chameleon Bay. He had a meeting with his counterpart in the Earth Kingdom.

 

“Zhao.” Long Feng spoke from the shadows. The firebender ignited a ball of fire in his palm and cast the Earth Bender in flickering light.

 

“Long Feng.” Zhao said, “It has been too long.”

 

“Indeed.” Long Feng said. “We have much to discuss.”

 

“Get to it then. How goes the work with Azula?”

 

“It’s progressing well.” Long Feng answered. “She has however proven somewhat resilient, in that she managed to escape her cell and injured many of my agents. She even killed a few.”

 

“How ever did she manage that?”

 

“With her bare hands it would seem.”

 

“Perhaps you should break them.”

 

“Perhaps,” Long Feng nodded, “But I can’t help but wonder why bother keeping her alive? Surely she serves our purpose well enough dead as she would broken?”

 

Zhao paused. “I had hoped to kill Zuko first, but he has proven himself resilient. I can’t decide if Ozai's daughter would serve us better as a casualty or an invalid. Keep her alive for now, if just barely.”

 

"Very well." Long Feng said, "The Avatar told me something you might find interesting."

 

"What might that be?"

 

"The Avatar and the Earth King are planning an invasion in thirty eight days. on the day of a solar eclipse."

---

 

Hakoda

“A small vessel broke off from a larger force and sailed into chameleon bay. Small crew, likely a scouting party. Did not engage.”

 

Hakoda hummed as he read the message from his sentries in chameleon bay. He licked his teeth.

 

“Tahno, why would a small vessel depart a large force and go into enemy waters alone?”

 

“Scouting party, maybe contacting spies.” Tahno looked up from the papers he was reading. “Why?”

 

“Never mind why.” Hakoda said. He returned to his letters. He had been reading more reports when the tent door was pushed open.

 

“Chief Hakoda!” Vanuk was red faced and covered in sweat, “We have guests.”

Hakoda sprinted through the camp, the annoying and persistent northern herald on his heels. He turned left, then right, and then left again. He dashed to the western boundary.nUpon reaching it, he saw a large silhouette flying off in the distance. Sitting on the ground and drinking tea was Katara… and the Dragon of the West. Before he could say anything, the damned herald began speaking. Somehow he wasn't out of breath.

 

“He who stands before you is Hakoda, The Southern Fox, Chief regent of the Southern Water Tribe and father of the Emperor. He speaks with the full authority of Sokka, Master of the Moonlight Sword, beloved of the Moon Spirit, the Living Soul of the Seas and Emperor of the Water Tribes.”

 

“What?!” Katara choked on her tea. Hakoda, as was his right as chief, turned and punched the herald in the neck.

 

“I told you not to announce me without my approval!” Hakoda snarled. That was not how he wanted his daughter to find out. “That's the third time today! Next time I'll let Bato keel haul you!”

 

The herald coughed and sputtered.

 

“Perhaps now,” Iroh said smoothly, “You would join me in that cup of tea I offered you so long ago?”

---

Lao

“I know we haven’t found her.” Lao said to his wife. Poppy was walking around the living room of their Ba Sing Se estate, pacing out her anxiety.

 

“We should have hired someone to go after her,” Poppy huffed for the ninth time. “We don’t even now if she’s alive. She ran off with a pair of- you know what.” Poppy didn’t let herself finish. The Dai Li were always watching.

 

“We have to believe that she is.” Lao said.

 

“What are you doing? Our daughter is missing and all you care about is buying and selling, its only trade with you!” Poppy gave her husband a disgusted look as he sat at his desk writing.

 

“I am not writing to any merchants. I am writing to the king.”

---

Jin

 

Jin knocked on Mushi’s door. He wasn’t there. He hadn’t returned from the Earth King’s palace when he had gone to serve tea, nor any of the days since. Jin was starting to worry about the old man. He might not be frail, being in rather spectacular shape for a man of his years, but so many days absent without a word was alarming.

 

More than this, Jet hadn’t showed up to their date. She had stopped by the home he shared with Longshot and Smellerbee, but the home was vacant. She knew that Jet had a position with the wall guard, and she had thought that he wouldn’t have been involved with the attack on the palace, but now she wasn’t so sure. 

 

Jin walked to the Jasmine Dragon, where she worked. Since mushi had been missing, business had slowed. Not completely, as it was only the third day since his absence, but noticeably. When she arrived she found Fit already begging the days work.

 

“Is he coming?” Fit asked,.

 

“No sign of him.” Jin answered.

 

“Pay day is tomorrow.” 

 

“You’ll be paid, Fit.” Jin rolled her eyes at him. She was in charge of paying the employees. He knew that. Jin went about her business and opened the shop for the day. The first customers came in.

 

“There’s no way of knowing that it’s him.” A rather dreary girl with twin buns said to another girl who was… walking on her hands.

 

“He said he was going to Ba Sing Se. We came here to find him,” Hand-walking-girl replied, “And just where he’s supposed to be opens a teashop named The Jasmine Dragon. They said it’s unlike anything they’ve had before.”

 

“I’m not saying we shouldn’t look.” Gloomy girl said, “I’m just saying we shouldn’t get our hopes up.”

 

“Welcome to the Jasmine Dragon!” Jin said with a smile, “How may I serve you today?”

 

“We’re looking for someone.” Gloomy said, “He’s an old man. Likes Pai Sho.”

 

“Well, that doesn’t really narrow it down.” Jin furrowed her brow. “A lot of older men come here to play Pai Sho.”

 

“He has a beard, he’s bald, uh…” Hand-walking-girl stood up and tapped her chin, “He used to be kind of fat, but now he’s in pretty good shape.”

 

“That sounds like Mushi,” Jin said, “But I haven’t seen him in days. He was invited to make tea for the Earth King, and hasn’t been back since.”

 

“I don’t suppose you have a picture of him?” Gloomy said.

 

“Do you know him?”

 

“We’re friends with his niece,” Gloomy said, “Or we might be. If it’s her uncle.”

 

“Wouldn’t you be able to tell by the name?”

 

“No,” Hand-walking-girl said, “He changes it sometimes. Doesn’t like his real one.”

 

“Okay…” Jin said, confused, “He has some pictures of his family in his office, but none of himself.”

 

“Can we see them?”

 

“Uh… sure?” This was by far one of the oddest conversations Jin had ever had, but she wanted to see where it went. She liked it when she got a story out of things. She led the pair of girls back to Mushi’s office, where there sat three portraits. One of a young man with a scar, another of a handsome fellow in his early twenties, and another of a girl around Jin’s age. She surreptitiously slid the one of the girl out of sight before letting the strange young women in.

 

“It’s Lu Ten.” the hand walker said, picking up the picture of the handsome man.

 

“And Zuko.” Gloomy looked at the scarred man.

 

“Do you know who this is too?” Jin asked, pulling out the third image. “Mushi doesn’t talk about his family.”

 

“It’s Azula!” Hand-walker-girl said, shocked.

 

“Where is Mushi?” Gloomy asked.

 

“I told you,” Jin said, “He disappeared days ago.”

 

---

And with that, the only thing left for part two is the last arc. It’s gonna be rough lads.

 

Shoutout to Blue Leopard, Dataseeker, Isaacnwafora, Azula, and Sokkenheimer. Thanks for sticking around boys!

 

DataSeeker has been around the longest, since the week I published the first chapter. He even helped me come up with a name. The original sucked real bad.

 

Also thanks to my beta, who I haven't messaged since I started posting again. I’ve been super inconsistent and don’t want to bother her since it's been such a long time.

 

Anyway, I don't want to jinx it but it seems like I might be hooked on writing again. ADHD is a cruel mistress, and I do not control the hyper fixation! I was supposed to go to bed hours ago.

 

Charlemagne.

 

08/14/2025

Chapter 53: Lies and Folly

Chapter Fifty-Three

 

Lies and Folly.

“The navy is beginning to muster here,” General Sung placed a finger on the south-western shore of chameleon bay. “The first ships have arrived, and the heavy infantry and cavalry have been sent for. The quicksand battalions are bringing our largest garrisons from across the Earth Kingdom, aiding in the transport of supplies and personnel.”

 

“What are quicksand battalions?” Toph asked, face pinched in confusion. She idly began to pick at her bandages, but Zuko slapped her hand away. He had taken to keeping Toph from doing so in Katara’s absence.

 

“They had been relegated to logistics by Long Feng,” Sung explained, “but until fifteen years ago they were our transport specialists. Composed entirely of earthbenders specialised in rapid travel of supplies and soldiers. They can traverse half the Earth Kingdom in a matter of days.”

 

“Send a group to collect the mechanist and his equipment.” Sokka said, “He is invaluable.”

 

Zuko looked over the map. He picked up two markers, one Earth Kingdom and one Water Tribe. He placed them on small islands near the western and southern air temples. “These are the best places for the ships to rally.”

 

Sokka nodded. “Water Tribe forces in the south and Earth Kingdom in the north.”

 

“Will they be seen there?” Sung asked.

 

“Yes. Two fleets with skeleton crews assemble at these points. They will draw the attention of the Fire Navy. This should weaken the blockade in the Mo Se Sea, allowing our main invasion force to break through to the Fire Nation mainland.”

---

 

 

The palace steps loomed before them. Katara walked rather awkwardly at her fathers left. Bato was on his right. Behind the three of them was Iroh, and behind him were assembled some of the highest ranking officers in the Water Tribes. Water Tribe. Singular. That was going to take some getting used to.

 

Sokka was now the Emperor. Emperor Sokka. She did not like the sound of that. It hit the ear wrong. More than that, Sokka had changed. He was darker, more serious. When he left the void, he put on a show of being light-hearted and friendly. It was always there. Just beneath the surface, a shadow hiding just out of sight. Watching, listening, calculating. Waiting for when it could take the mask off. It was almost better when he was empty.

 

She thought of the satchel given her at the library. A gift from Wan Shi Tong. Maybe inside she would find what she was looking for, La had said she could find it at the library. A way to save her brother from the demon that ensnared him.

 

She had to get back to their house in the upper ring. She had hidden it there.

 

“I haven’t been here since I was a boy.” Hakoda said, pulling katara from her thoughts. “I didn’t expect to come back when communications stopped.”

 

“It was Long Feng,” Katara climbed the palace steps, wishing she had Aang to fly her to the top. “He was using the Earth King as a puppet.”

 

“I remember,” The southern chief said, “I was just reminiscing.”

 

 

---

Mai and Ty Lee looked over the calm waters of Lake Laogai. There were no structures around the lake. No docks, no houses, shops, or fortifications of any kind. The lake and the land around it was pristine.

 

“They must be underground.” Mai said, “If they're here at all.”

 

“How are we going to find an underground fortress filled with elite earthbenders? How are we going to rescue Azula?” Tears fell from Ty Lee’s eyes. “What are we going to do?”

 

“We’ll go to Zuko; we’ll stay at their house until they come back.” Mai started to become emotional, “Or we’ll find Sokka, or go to the Earth King and beg for him to show her mercy!”

 

“They have Iroh too!” Ty Lee said, “Zuko joined the Avatar! If the Earth King has Azula, then he’ll have Iroh too! And if he won’t show mercy to Iroh then why would he show mercy to Azula!”

 

“Maybe we should leave, get to the Fire Nation and tell the Fire Lord! Tell Zhao!”

 

“That will take months!” Mai wanted to scream, “And if we leave then there’s no telling if we could get back into Ba Sing Se!”

 

Ty Lee fell to her knees and put her face in her hands. She took a number of slow breaths to calm herself. She raised her head and looked out over the water. “We cannot leave the city. We have no way of contacting the Fire Nation. We cannot find our way into where they’re keeping Azula. We can’t go to the Earth King without getting captured ourselves. We have to get to Zuko, if he would even help us.”

 

“He will. I know it.” Mai said. She could not hide the desperation in her voice.

 

 

---

 

---

The Eastern Air Temple rose into the sky before him. Aang looked at the crumbling facades and overgrown lawns and orchards. His heart ached with the loss. He saw an old man sitting crosslegged. For a moment his heart leapt, but it fell once more. No arrow. He wasn’t an Air Nomad, he wasn’t one of Aang's people. Aang was still alone in the world. He had woken up to a world he knew but couldn’t recognize- a stranger in a strange land.

 

Aang shook his head, forcing the dower thoughts away. He had his friends. Katara, Toph, Zuko. And Sokka, too. His brow furrowed as Appa descended. Sokka had changed, been changing since he met that spirit. Slowly at first, becoming quiet and somber- almost dark. Then he had learned to enter the void and changed again and lived almost as a machine. Now he was… sometimes he seemed almost cruel. Savage. Dead inside. Something had to be done. 

 

Had Katara found anything at the library? She had gone to look for a way to save her brother, but so much had happened afterwards that they hadn’t had a chance to talk about it. Between Toph’s injury, his firebender training, and trying to get to the Earth King they hadn’t spent any time together. And now he was hundreds of miles away from her and would not return for weeks. Which was Sokka’s plan. Did he know what Katara had found? No, whenever the subject was spoken of he would freeze in place and lose time. He couldn’t know, but maybe Koh knew. Maybe the spirit was listening when that happened, and was influencing the First Son. Aang didn’t like that idea.

 

Appa landed and Aang leapt to the ground and approached the old man.

 

“Are you Guru Patik?”

 

 

---

Azula felt the sun on her face. She opened her eyes. She saw the sky, clear and blue. The rhythmic lap of waves on the shore filled the air, and the bitter salt breeze of the sea teased at her senses. She sat up and looked around. She rubbed her eyes. She looked at her hands, her fingers were straight and clean. Azula frowned.

 

She stood. The ever present burning gnaw of hunger was gone. She started walking. She recognized this place, she was on ember island. Their house was just around the bend. She started running and in minutes she burst through the door. She saw her father, laughing with her uncle and Lu Ten. Except it couldn’t be. Father hated uncle, and Lu Ten had died years ago.

 

“You’re back.” An all too familiar voice said, “Mai and I are going to see the empire island players, did you want to come with?”

 

Azula turned her head slowly and saw Zuko, unscarred and smiling. She stared at him. She looked around the room in confusion. She looked back at her hands, at her clean and unbroken fingers- her hands began to shake. She fell to her knees. This wasn’t right, this wasn't real.

 

“What is this?” She asked hoarsely, “What’s happening?”

 

A soft hand touched her shoulder, and her mother spoke. “Azula, what's wrong? What’s happened to you?”

 

“What's wrong?!” Tears began to flow, “This isn’t real, it’s a lie. It’s the Dai Li, they’re doing something to me, or I’m hallucinating- I don’t-!” Her voice failed her and a sob escaped. “This isn’t real! This is what should have been! It’s what would have been if we hadn’t-!”

 

Iroh and Ozai stopped laughing, Lu Ten dropped his tea and his cup shattered . Her family surrounded her, concern painted across their faces.

 

“This is what would have been, if only-” Azula couldn’t get the words out, they stuck in her throat. She took a shuddering and shaky breath, and at last said the words she had been holding back, keeping secret even from herself, “If only we hadn’t bought into a lie!”

 

Azula sobbed openly. She looked at Lu Ten. “You died so long ago, I can’t even remember your voice! And Uncle, you betrayed us, betrayed the Fire Nation, and betrayed me! You and Zuko both!” She turned to her father, “And you sent him away, you burned and banished him over nothing, and he turned against us! He hates me, he tried to kill me. And mother! You’ve always hated me. From the beginning you thought I was nothing but a monster.”

 

“And now because of this lie, the folly it has wrought, I am a prisoner. My hands are…” Azula sobbed, “I am going to die there. I am going to die cold and alone in the dark.”

 

“You’re not alone,” Ursa said. She knelt and embraced her daughter. She reached out a hand and pinched the tip of her nose  gently between the knuckles of her first two fingers, “I love you Azula, and I’m right here. We’re all right here.”

Azula opened her eyes. She was back in her cell. The dim green light was her only company. She felt cold.

 

 

---

Sokka let the power flow through his muscles. He felt strong as he listened to the Earth King approach the war room. Katara and Iroh were with him, and he could hear his father speaking softly with Bato in a room nearby.

 

“Kuei is coming,” Toph said, “Iroh and Katara are with him.”

 

Zuko looked up from the maps and lists he was pouring over with General Howe. He glanced at the door just as it opened. Kuei entered, and the generals bowed to him. He came to the table and sat, his eyes had cheered greatly since they had been opened for him two nights ago. The council of five began to explain their plans to him. Iroh and Katara came and joined Toph, Zuko, and Sokka.

 

“What has our father said?”

 

“He has agreed to help with the invasion.” Katara said, she fidgeted awkwardly.

 

“What are you keeping from me?”

 

“I… Dad needs to speak with you. After Kuei.” She looked away. Sokka nodded.

 

“Do you always let the shadow flow through you?” Iroh asked, watching Sokka.

 

“Yes.”

 

“Power is dangerous, especially when abused.” Iroh spoke slowly, “It might suit you better to let it go for a time. There are consequences to these bonds that you do not understand.”

 

Sokka looked up from the timetable in front of him. He looked at the old man. “My soul is forfeit. I shall not pass into the afterlife, dwell in the spirit world, nor shall I be born again. Once this vessel is destroyed then my soul shall be unmade and my existence undone.”

 

Iroh did not so much as blink. “You have lost much, young warrior. But there is more that you stand to lose if you let power take precedence over your humanity. There is more to life than strength and reason.”

 

Sokka cocked his head to the side as he considered Iroh words. He took a slow breath and closed the gate, cutting off the mantle from his flesh. The old man seemed to be relieved.

 

“Now,” Iroh reached out and gently placed his hand on Sokka’s shoulder. “Come and join us. Leave that cold and empty place for a time. Return to the land of the living, for just a night.”

 

Sokka felt a change in the flow of his chi. He considered resisting, but decided against it. He let the old man guide him out of the void and returned to himself.

 

Katara watched Sokka and Iroh, unsure of what was happening between them. She saw the light return to her brother's eyes. She saw them fill with pain, sorrow, anger, regret, and despair, only to be pushed back and replaced with an iron clad resolve.

 

Sokka nodded slowly, and gave a crooked smile. “Thanks. I think I needed help to get back.”

 

Iroh waived a hand in a vague gesture. “We all need help from time to time. Even when we don’t know it.”

 

“What happened?” Toph was lost. “Is Sokka…?”

 

“Yeah,” Sokka said, “I’m back to normal I think. Do you have any meat? I haven’t eaten since before we planned operation friendship.”

 

“That was four days ago.” Zuko said, staring openly at Sokka.

 

Sokka shrugged. “I don’t need food or sleep when I’m-”

 

“Creepy?” Toph suggested.

 

“A drama queen?" Zuko offered.

 

“I wasn’t a drama queen!” Sokka looked offended. Katara laughed and did a poor impression of his voice.

 

“Fly Appa! Show us the meaning of haste!”

 

“That was cool, and it got the point across. It expressed what we needed.” Sokka defended himself. “I stand by it.”

 

There was laughter until Kuei cleared his throat. “Sokka, I would ask for your assistance in a matter of high import.”

 

Sokka turned to the king, “Then you shall have it. Be it my mind or my sword.”

 

Toph stifled a laugh. Zuko elbowed her in the side. They both received a glare from Iroh and Kuei. Sokka elected to ignore them and the burning in his face.

 

“It seems that many of my soldiers fear the Dai Li greatly, to the point that I can not trust for their investigation to bear fruit.” Kuei took of his spectacles and looked Sokka in the eye. “Will you lead this investigation in their stead? I understand that you are the one who discovered the presence of spies in Agna Qel’a, so I trust that you are capable of this.”

 

“I… Of course, your majesty.” Sokka said, “It would be an honor.”

 

“I thank you. Chief Hakoda is waiting for you to join him for a meal, but I asked that I might postpone your reunion briefly. Please, go and join him.”

 

Sokka bowed, and departed.

 

Katara looked at Toph, “Come on, we should check on your eyes. The bandages look clean,  you might not need them any more.”

 

“Oh thank goodness, I can't take them for much longer.

---

Major Wen stood outside the door to Azula’s cell. She watched the wretched girl breath, cradling her hands.

 

“Aiza,” Wen spoke to her lead conditioner, “I ordered you to break her fingers.”

 

“Yes ma’am.” Aiza said.

 

“Why are they not?”

 

“I took the liberty of employing method forty-seven.”

 

Wen eyed her. “It worked?”

 

“Yes, quite well in fact.” Aiza reached into her robe and withdrew her notes, “Subject four thousand eight has been growing more receptive to mental conditioning. Malnourishment, combined with injuries obtained during her containment breach have weakened her resistance. This suggests that future subjects with high resistance may be more pliable under harsher conditions.”

 

Wen hummed, “That’s promising. Walk with me.”

 

The pair strolled down the corridor, stopping at various cells and looking in. They made their way to Long Feng’s office.

 

“Ah, Major Wen. Chief Conditioner Aiza.”

 

The two women bowed as they came in.

 

“How is the Princess enjoying her stay?”

 

Wen smiled. “She’s not.”

 

“And her condition?”

 

“She has lost substantial weight as her body attempts to heal the damage.” Aiza read over her notes again, “I employed method forty-seven rather than the traditional means.”

 

Long Feng cocked his head. He opened a ledger on his desk and flipped through the pages until he found what he was looking for. He read aloud. “Method forty-seven: Through mental conditioning by lantern therapy, subjects are convinced of great bodily injury, to the point of experiencing pain…”

 

“I find this acceptable. And her firebending?”

 

“Hard to say,” Aiza said, “We can’t know if she’s pretending or if the block has taken effect.”

 

“Very well. Aiza, you are dismissed.”

 

Aiza left the office.

 

“Wen,” Long Feng said, “You must return to the city. Take control of the Dai Li and learn what you can of this invasion of the Fire Nation.”

---

“Stop fidgeting!” Katara snapped.

 

“I can’t help it!” Toph said from her seat on an examination table. “I can tell they’re healed, they feel fine.”

 

“I’ll be the judge of that.” Katara said. She began unwinding the badges from Toph's head. She didn’t like how the Earth Kingdom had decorated their hospital rooms- the walls were covered in  spots. She never liked spots, she had always been annoyed by the pattern.

 

“Katara, something's wrong.” Toph’s voice was concerned.

 

“Is there pain?” Katara asked as she pulled off the last of the wrapping.

 

“No. I don’t know what it is.” Her eyes were squeezed shut. Katara began bending water over her hands.

 

“Let me see them.” Katara said. She leaned in as Toph opened her eyes. Water splashed over the ground.

 

Toph’s eyes were a clear and vibrant green.

---

Author’s Note.

 

I dinked up and forgot to put a plotpoint in Zhao’s interlude. I updated the last chapter so I recommend going back and reading that one.

 

Also; all of the Interludes include some plot relevant information, so if you skip them you might think “Well that came out of nowhere.”

 

Charlemagne.

 

8/17/2025

Chapter 54: Spots

Chapter Fifty-Four

 

Spots.

Katara stared at Toph. Toph stared at Katara.

 

“Is there something wrong with them?” Toph asked.

 

“Uh…” Katara stared, flabbergasted.

 

“There’s…” Toph waved her hands inarticulately, “Something going on. I can’t describe it.”

 

“Toph, I don’t know how to tell you this..” Katara kept staring.

 

“Tell me what? Is it bad?”

 

“No, the opposite if anything.” Katara said, “You can see.”

 

“No, Katara,” Toph explained - as one would to a dense child, “I’m blind.”

 

“Uh…” Katara pinched the bridge of her nose. “Okay, let’s try this. Everyone who is blind raise your hand.”

 

Toph furrowed her brow. It was just the two of them in the examination room. She raised her hand.

 

“Not so fast Toph.”

 

“What are you talking about?”

 

“That thing you can't describe? That’s sight.”

 

“I do not understand what you’re saying.”

 

Katara was beginning to feel exasperated. This should be a momentous occasion but if anything it was rather annoying. “Put your hand in front of your face.”

 

Toph did so. When she did, the thing that was happening changed.

 

“Now move it around.”

 

“Uh…” Toph stared in amazement as the thing moved. “Katara! I- what did you do?!”

 

“I don’t know,” Katara said, “I’ve never healed eyes before!”

 

“I don’t like this!”

 

“Close your eyes!”

 

The sensation went away. Toph opened her eyes again. It came back. She closed them. She opened them. This went on for some time. Eventually, Toph spoke.

 

“I can see.”

 

“I know. I told you that earlier.”

 

Toph looked around the room and pointed. “What is that?”

 

“That is a table.”

 

Toph paused- this might be easier if she was standing on the ground. She got off the examination table. Immediately the world made sense. She turned her face toward the wall. Then towards the examination table.

 

“Okay.” Toph said, rubbing her eyes, “Why does the table look different from the examination table?”

 

“Oh, I guess you wouldn’t know- the table is brown but the examination table is green.”

 

So now she knew what green and brown were.

 

“What is this… color?” She pointed at a vase.

 

“That is also green.”

 

“But it’s different?”

 

“It’s a different texture.”

 

“You can see texture?!” Toph exclaimed.

 

“Yes. Usually. Sometimes it’s hard to tell.”

 

Toph looked around the room, eyes wide. She focused on the far wall. “Why does the wall look like that?”

 

“It has spots. It’s a kind of pattern. I don’t like them.”

 

Toph glared at the wall. “I don’t like them either. Do a lot of things have spots? Because if so I’d rather be blind.”

 

She stared for a second and then pointed out a specific spot, “So this is green, right?”

 

“Uh.. yes.”

 

Toph pointed to another spot. “And this is also green, only a different texture?”

 

“No, they’re the same texture, just different shades.”

 

“Okay.” Toph looked around the room. She frowned and closed her eyes. “I’m over it.”

 

“Over what?” Katara raised an eyebrow in perplexion.

 

“Seeing. It’s not as cool as I thought it would be.” Toph opened the door and left, leaving an astonished Katara in her wake.

---

Sokka took a steadying breath before opening the door. Sitting at a low table he found Bato, and his father. Sokka hesitated, and then entered the small dining room. A small, rational part of him desperate for distraction noted that the room was identical to that of the servants quarters he had searched through in the past week- suggesting that either the palace staff bore a lack of respect for the water Tribe, or more likely that his father had requested someplace quiet and out of the way.

 

“Dad,” Sokka began, “It’s good to see you.”

 

Hakoda stood from his place at the table and looked as though he wanted to rush to Sokka, to embrace his son, his firstborn and heir, but something stayed him. “You too, Sokka,” Hakoda said this with an impotent sort of emotion, a cross between rejoice and resignation. Or perhaps dread or apprehension- Sokka couldn’t tell as easily as he could when using the shadow. He couldn’t smell the emotion.

 

“Sit,” Bato encouraged. Sokka noted a light tension to the man’s shoulders. A stiffness around the mouth- he too was hiding something. Maybe from something, Sokka wasn’t sure. All the same, whatever it was the pair wanted to put it off as long as possible. Sokka was more than happy to oblige them.

 

He sat, airbender style, and looked between the two men. “Is there food coming? I haven’t eaten in a while.”

 

“I- yes,” Hakoda said, watching Sokka. He exchanged a momentary glance with Bato, Sokka wasn’t sure if he imagined it. “It should be out shortly.”

 

“That’s good, it’s been a few days.” Sokka’s stomach rumbled- a phenomenon he knew to be unrelated to hunger, but it punctuated his statement well none the less.

 

“A few days?” Bato was incredulous, “The Sokka I remember was hard pressed to go more than a few hours without eating.”

 

“I’ve uh, outgrown that you could say.”

 

“I see,” Bato looked down at his empty dish, “many things have happened since last we met.”

 

“I know,” Sokka said. He rubbed at the back of his neck. “Too many for such a short time.”

 

“I’m sorry, son.” Hakoda spoke, “I heard about the north. About the siege.”

 

Sokka stiffened. His hand reached down and lightly touched the pommel of his sword. “I… thanks, Dad. It’s been hard.”

 

“Katara said that you… haven’t been yourself lately.”

 

“It’s true.” Sokka raised his hand from his regret, “I’ve had to do things that I couldn’t when I’m me.”

 

“War is a hard thing. It can be trying and cruel, and breaks even the hardest of men.”

 

“Yes,” Sokka voice was soft, almost inaudible, “It can.”

 

The three of them sat in silence for a time. Eventually the food came. Various meats and noodle dishes, along with rice and fresh fruit. Earth Kingdom standard fare. Sokka took a bite and found that it was nearly as good as it looked. He began to eat slowly, trying not to make a scene despite how hungry he felt. It was difficult at first- but he soon felt full. He reasoned that his rather sparse and distant meals had caused his stomach to shrink a bit. He had heard that could happen, after a decrease in the quantity of food consumed the stomach would grow smaller, only to stretch out again over time.

 

“Sokka,” Hakoda said, “I have news for you.”

 

Sokka looked up, “News?”

 

“Yes,” Hakoda swallowed, “Arnook and I have agreed that the treaty still holds, despite what happened at the north pole. The tribes are still merging, in fact they have effectively done so. They are now one, united under a single leader.”

 

“Who? Is it you or Arnook?” Sokka was shocked.

 

“No, son,” Hakoda looked Sokka in the eye, “It is you.”

 

Sokka stared for a second, uncomprehending. He shut his eyes tightly and began cleaning his ears - clearly they were dirty. He had misheard. “I think I misheard, what did you say?”

 

“The north and south have agreed almost unanimously. You have been appointed sole leader of our nations. You have been named Emperor of the Water Tribes.”

 

“No.” Sokka shook his head. “I refuse.”

 

“It’s not something you can turn down.”

 

“And yet here I am, turning it down anyway.”

 

“It’s already done. Like it or not you are an emperor now.”

 

“No, put Katara in my stead,” Sokka looked frantic around the eyes, “I cannot be emperor.”

 

“You know we cannot do that,” Bato said, “Not while the firstborn lives.”

 

“No, the tribes deserve someone better, someone good-” Sokka looked away, “It should not be me. The things I have done, the things I will continue to do- they do not a good emperor make.”

 

“What sort of things?” Hakoda asked, raising an eyebrow skeptically.

 

“I’ve killed people, a lot of people.”

 

“So have I. And Bato, and nearly every member of our navy.” Hakoda rested his hands on his knees, “It’s war, son. Sometimes we are merciful - and sometimes we can’t be.”

 

Sokka looked up again, sorrow in his eyes, “I’ve learned that for myself.”

 

Bato coughed, glancing sideways at Hakoda. “There’s more. We’ve been discussing terms of peace once the war ends with General Iroh, who has the power to negotiate on Fire Lord Zuko’s behalf. We have agreed that should we find victory in the coming months, in order to establish true peace, you will marry Princess Azula.”

 

“You cannot be serious.”

Hakoda slapped Bato across the back of the head, which only served to cause the man to roar with laughter. Sokka looked between them, confused.

 

“That’s not at all funny, Bato.” Hakoda said, “He’s lying Sokka, we never discussed anything of the sort.”

 

“But did you see his face?” Bato was wiping tears from his eyes, “I had to say something to lighten the tension.”

 

“That was the worst thing you could have possibly said.” Sokka looked at Hakoda, “As Emperor can I have him keel-hauled?”

 

“No,” Hakoda said, “You don’t have that authority yet, Arnook and I are acting as regents for now.”

 

“So I’m emperor in name only?”

 

“Yes and no,” Hakoda shook his hand in a so-so gesture, “Orders you give will be followed, but anything major must be approved by Arnook and myself.”

 

“Uh, yeah. Okay.” Sokka was unsure of what to think, “Are you going to help plan the invasion?”

 

“Bato is going to assist with the large-scale co-ordination.” Hakoda took something from a bag he carried at his side, “As well as many of our officers. I am going to return to the fleet and rally the rest of the armada to our side. Katara is coming with me.”

 

“Oh.” Was all that Sokka could say. “When?”

 

“Before dawn.” Bato said.

 

“We will need the north for this venture- to ensure the greatest chance of success.” Hakoda placed the item on the table. It was a scroll. “It needs your signature, or mark. We haven’t got time to design a seal for you.” 

 

Sokka reached out and took the scroll. Opening it he read.

 

“By order of Sokka, Master of the Moonlight Sword, Beloved of the Moon Spirit, The Long Mind of the Waters, the Living Soul of the Seas and First Emperor of the Water Tribes.

 

All able bodied and willing warriors and waterbenders shall depart from the north and make their way to Tsun river delta at haste.

 

Sokka looked up from the message, perplexed. Hakoda sighed.

 

“I know.” Hakoda dragged a hand down his face, “The pomp was insisted upon. And they’re still working on the imperial formula, it changes by the day. Just make a mark on it.”

 

Sokka drew a knife from his belt and pricked his thumb. A small drop of dark red blood, almost black, welled up and clung desperately to his skin. He pressed it to the bottom of the scroll, and when he drew his thumb away there was not a round splotch of blood. Instead there was a mixed red and black character, as if written in blood and shadow.

遵

 

Obey

 

Sokka starred at the mark. His brow furrowed and he frowned. He hadn’t meant for that to happen, only for his thumb print to be left in blood on the order. His blood should have been only red, and taken no shape or form other than that of his thumb. 

 

Hakoda and Bato stared at the mark. They looked at each other. Eventually Bato spoke.

 

“They are going to love that. Northerners eat drama like bread.”

---

Zuko breathed rhythmically. He meditated beside his uncle as the sun rose behind them. When at last the sun stepped fully above the horizon, he stood and began a firebending kata. The dancing dragon in perfect step with his uncle. After the form’s completion, the two began to spar with one another.

 

Earth Kingdom guards and palace servants and dignitaries watched in fascination as the two trained, never having seen firebenders practice in earnest. A few hours passed while they trained, and when they finished Zuko joined Iroh for tea and a game of Pai Sho.

 

“Sokka has darkened greatly since last I saw him at the north pole.” Iroh placed a tile. “He will need his friends to help guide him back into the light.”

 

“Is that not what you did last night?” Zuko considered the board and sipped his tea. He placed a tile of his own.

 

“No, Lord Zuko,” Iroh poured himself more tea. “I brought him not out of darkness, but into the world of men. He was as a stone, unconcerned with the world. Unmoving, unfeeling- a cold and heartless thing with no compassion or joy.”

 

Zuko looked up and met his uncle’s eye for just a moment before returning to the board. “I know what you mean. I’ve seen it first hand, he was savage and merciless- a crocodile-shark disguised as a man.”

 

Iroh closed his eyes for a moment and opened them again. They were sad around the edges, grieved. “I have seen such a thing before. The spirit bound often falter and fail.”

 

“What happens if we can’t help him?”

 

Iroh put his tea down. “If he continues now as he has been, he will slide further into spiritual decay. His words and deeds will begin to push away those who care for him. He will fall to cruelty and malice, in a relentless pursuit of order that destroys all that would obstruct him.”

“In the spirit library, Katara tried to find something to help him.” Zuko placed a tile. “I do not know if she succeeded.”

 

“Is that so?” Iroh placed a tile and thoroughly destroyed Zuko’s defense. “Perhaps I can speak with her over it.”

---

Mai and Ty Lee crept carefully through the tunnel. Jet and Haru walked ahead of them, sculking.

They had come across the pair of them breaking out of jail inside the palace grounds the previous night- both parties froze and stared at each other.

 

“I won’t say anything if you don’t” Haru had said, “I’m friends with the avatar.”

 

“That’s who we’re looking for!” Ty Lee said, “we need to see Zuko!”

 

“Jet know’s Zuko.” Haru jerked a thumb at a young man carrying dual swords. “Are you part of his rebellion?”

 

“...Yes.” Mai said blankly. Jet stared at Haru in disgust. He rolled his eyes.

 

And after a night of wandering through the sewer they had eventually found their way into a rather dingy and disused portion of the palace’s underbelly. Following Jet and Haru, searching for Zuko. The halls were narrow, though surprisingly well lit. Jet raised a hand and they stopped. Muttered words could be heard in the distance, and then something wrang like a bell into the center of their bones. The  sound of fighting ensued.

“What was that?” Jet hissed.

 

“Should we turn around?” Ty Lee asked in a whisper, “We could find another way.”

 

“No,” Haru said, ears straining, “I think I know that voice. I know who that is.”

---

Sokka sat bolt upright, covered in sweat. The bouncing of drums filled his ears, green light and damp stone swam before his waking eyes. He could see them still, faded and translucent, ever fading- twin wheels of golden sunlight. There was a desperation in them, somehow- pain, hunger, and a bone deep cold that shouldn’t be possible. They burned, and yet… Sokka shook his head. Perhaps he should go into the spirit world and speak with Laghima or Kuruk about his vision. It was becoming more and more common, almost nightly. Even so, he had a sense that it was finite- that soon the vision would cease. It was a foreboding thought.

 

He got out of bed and stretched. He washed, ate, and dressed. He strapped Regret to his side and left his room. He walked quickly and quietly down the hall, took a left, went up some stairs and then made another left. He stepped into what had previously been Long Feng’s office and began pouring through records, papers, scrolls, maps. He licked his teeth.

 

“There is something I am not seeing.” He tapped his finger on the desk, “Why would Long Feng sabotage the Earth Kingdom?”

 

There were comprehensive reports on troop movements, Fire Nation, Water Tribe, and Earth Kingdom. A map hidden in one of the drawers had marked on it a single house in the lower ring. Another marked a small bridge in the metal working district. Sokka had thought the map of little import, but when he held it he heard the drums again. Sokka frowned. He read again the note that was hidden beside it.

 

The door opened and a woman walked in. Sokka, leaning over the map, stood with the door at his back, and looking up to the mirror on the wall he recognized her. She had been the officer trying to arrest Zuko when they had found him and Toph.

 

“Who are you? How did you get in here?” Major Wen asked.

 

“I,” Sokka turned away from the desk to face her. “Am the Emperor of the Water Tribes.”

 

Wen stiffened for a moment and bowed her head, “It is an honor your grace. I did not recognise you.”

 

“Sokka is fine,” Sokka said, “Now come and look at this Major Wen.”

 

Wen came to the desk and looked at the map. “It is a map.”

 

“Oh really?” Sokka rolled his eyes. “Why is there a map of a small section of the lower ring, why are there two positions marked on it, and why did Long Feng have it hidden away?”

 

“I couldn’t say,” Wen said, “Long Feng had many secrets.”

 

“Yet you are a high ranking member of the Dai Li.” Sokka stared at her, tilting his head to one side. “Surely you know some of them.”

 

“I…” Wen looked away, “I don’t know what I don’t know.”

 

“Where have you been these past few days?” Sokka watched her intently.

 

“I have been searching for Long Feng, as ordered.”

 

Sokka nodded and looked away, “I understand. You may go.”

 

“This is my office.”

 

“Not anymore, I am taking it over for a few days. The Earth King has placed me in control of the investigation of the Dai Li. It seems the army is frightened. Too much to be trusted with this, afraid of the Dai Li and your Lake Laogai.”

 

“I understand,” Wen bowed, “I shall take my leave.”

 

“Actually,” Sokka said, “What exactly goes on at that lake of yours?”

 

“I’m not sure I get what you mean?”

 

Sokka pulled a sheaf of paper from the pile on the table, “This was with the map. “Contact made with individuals eleven and twelve. Meeting with primary target planned at location beta, will be captured and brought to lake laogai for conditioning.” Who was the primary? What sort of conditioning? I highly doubt that you’re washing her hair.”

 

Wen bolted through the door. Sokka sat frozen in shock for an instant- he had not expected for any sort of reaction. He was fishing for information, he hadn’t actually suspected her to be involved. He snapped out of his surprise and leapt after her, reaching for the shadow as he drew Regret. 

 

Wen was fast. In the space of half a second she had gone from directly before Sokka to rounding the corner and falling out of sight. Sokka poured on the speed and gave pursuit. He raced after. She burst through walls and opened paths through floors and Sokka was on her heels, until they were in a narrow passage in a part of the palace he had yet to explore. Wen stopped and turned. Sokka leveled his sword at her.

 

“I will give you one chance,” He said, “The rot doesn’t have you. I can afford to be merciful, if you co-operate.”

 

“I think you will find,” Wen said slowly, “That it is not your mercy that should concern us.”

 

As she spoke, Dai Li agents fell from the ceiling and rose up from the ground. They surrounded Sokka on both sides. He grit his teeth. In this narrow passage his sword would do him little good, he didn’t have room to use it effectively. He sheathed his blade, and removed the sword from his waist.

 

“A wise choice, O’ mighty emperor.” Wen said, "Throw it away from you.”

 

Sokka ignored her. He secured the sword to his back. “I will not surrender. It would have been in the way.”

 

Sokka drew his blackened knife, and his boomerang.

 

“You cannot hope to win.” Wen looked at him quizzically. “No matter what sort of pact you’ve made.”

 

Sokka shrugged. He was nervous. He hadn’t been afraid in a long time. His hands shook, sweat beaded his brow and the void called to him. Could he face them without it? He could, he thought. But could he win? And if he did, could he find his way out again? Why, after finally leaving, would something come that would force him back into it? What were the odds? It had yet to be a full day. He clenched his teeth against the knot of fear and dread in his stomach. Sokka let himself float into the void, shallow and close to the surface. He opened the gate to Koh’s power. It flooded through him.

 

Sokka looked around him, counting the Dai Li. He took a quick glance at the space available to him, and found it unlikely that he would prevail. He opened his third eye.

 

All of the Dai Li were touched by it, in some way or another. A few were as black and rotten as any, even Zhao. Some had it only slightly. Only one was wholly untouched. Wen had a soul that was bright and clean. It bubbled as might a spring in some quaint valley, untouched by malice or greed. She was driven to her actions, to do anything that might be necessary not by hatred; Wen was moved by love. A love clean, and pure, and unrequited. She knew, she knew in the depths of her heart and the marrow of her bones that she was not loved in return. Yet she loved him anyway. It was a beautiful and terrible thing, Sokka thought, and he would have pitied her.

 

He closed his third eye. He took a slow breath and accepted his inevitable defeat. When he spoke, his voice echoed as if from far away. “You will not take me alive.”

 

He raised his boomerang and struck it thrice against the wall. Rang out cold, and clear, and sharp. It carried far and rested on the bones of all who heard. It was the sound of winter itself.

 

He raised the knife and began his vicious struggle.

---

Aang’s eyes snapped open and he leapt to his feet. “I have to go!”

 

Guru Patik rose and stretched out his hands, placating. “No, Aang, if you leave now you won't be able to go into the Avatar State at all!”

 

“Sokka’s in trouble- he could die!” Aang began packing his few possessions, “I can’t leave him to-!”

 

“You must!” Patik implored, “You have to learn to let them go.”

 

“But if he…” Aang balled his fists, “We haven’t saved him yet. He won’t just die, he will be unmade!”

 

“Aang, look at me.” Patik knelt down, “What will come will come. You are the avatar, you have a responsibility to the world. You have to be resolute- all else comes second, even love.”

 

“If I don't go, they might never find him.” Tears formed, “He could rot down there.”

 

“It is possible,” Patik said, “But what you feel now, people all across the world feel that way. What is happening to Sokka has happened to others, is happening to others, and will continue to happen. Only you can stop it, and that decision has to be made here. It has to be now.”

 

Aang shut his eyes tight against his tears. “They will never forgive me. She won’t ever. Not if he dies.”

 

He thought of Yue, and the north pole. Of what had happened because he hadn’t wanted to do his duty. Of his people who had crumbled into dust because he ran away. He could go and save his friend, he could do it- he thought he could make it in time. He could be selfish. He could be… but how many others would suffer for it. He wiped at his tears and sat, beginning to meditate. All around him the room was illuminated by a harsh blue light.

---

Toph sat in front of the Earth King with her eyes shut.

 

“I can’t read.” She waved a hand in front of her face.

 

“Oh, yes,” Kuei said, “I have a letter from your parents.”

 

“Oh.” Toph said, nearly opening her clear green eyes, “What does it say?”

 

“They are in their estate in the agrarian zone. They think you’ve been kidnapped by the Fire Nation and are being held prisoner.”

 

“Well that’s just not true.”

 

“I managed to puzzle that out for myself actually,” Kuei rolled his eyes. “I have arranged for you to go to them, along with one of my advisors to explain the situation. It is wholly your decision of course.”

 

“I…” Toph fiddled with her fingernails in an uncharacteristic display of nerves. “When?”

 

“Now, if you’d like.”

 

“I…” Katara and Aang had left. Sokka was… well she wasn’t all that fond of him to be honest. He was okay when he was human, but he wasn’t human very often or very long. Zuko was with Iroh again, they were safe. They didn’t need her to babysit them. She could go. “Yeah, sure. I’ve just got to say goodbye to Zuko.”

 

“Of course, of course,” Kuei raised his hand and placed his kind eyes on Kim, the advisor. “Go with her Kim, make sure her parents understand.”

 

“Uh, yes, your majesty.”

 

Toph rose and left the king and his advisors behind. Kim followed her. Eventually, Toph came across Zuko and Iroh playing Pai Sho.

 

“I’m leaving, see you in a couple days.” She turned to go, but Zuko stopped her.

 

“Wait where? I'll go with you.”

 

“No, you’ve got an invasion to plan.”

 

“Where are you going, and Uncle can do that.”

 

“I’m going to see my parents.”

 

“Oh.”

 

“Yeah,” Toph turned to face Zuko, “They probably don’t want to see you guys.”

 

“Probably not.” Zuko stared at Toph. “Why are your eyes closed?”

 

“Oh, yeah, Katara left with her dad before dawn you probably didn’t hear.” Toph waved her hand dismissively, “I can see. It turns out that it’s not really my thing.”

 

“What do you mean you can see?!” Zuko said.

 

“I don’t know, I guess the special water and Katara’s healing can cure blindness.”

 

“Open your eyes and let me look.” Zuko said.

 

Toph snorted and almost didn’t, but she was curious to see what Zuko looked like. She opened her eyes. She looked Zuko in the face and froze.

 

On one side of Zuko’s face there was something awful. Something that nobody had mentioned to her, something she did not like. Zuko… had spots.

---

Long Feng opened the door to Azula’s cell. The little monster was curled up in a heap, shivering. The bruises had faded to dull purple and sickly green. Some of her fingernails had ripped away, and she cradled her hands as if they were broken.

 

“Azula,” Long Feng said, “You don’t look so good.”

 

Azula gave no response. Long Feng smiled.

 

“Your friends went to the Avatar, trying to find you no doubt.” Long Feng waved the letter Mai and Ty Lee had written Zuko. Azula twitched.

 

“Yes, go ahead.” Long Feng said, “Hope. It’s in vain though. Nobody is coming to save you.”

 

“How much longer can you live like this? A few days?” Long Feng looked at her disdainfully, “I was ordered not to kill you. But I wasn’t ordered to try all that hard, either.”

---

Author’s Note

Heyo!

 

Bet some of you thought I disappeared again. Not quite. We’re almost done with part two. Just a couple more chapters.

 

Charlemagne 

 

9/5/22